Technical Handbook 1kW DME STATION LDB-102

Technical
Handbook
1kW DME STATION

LDB-102
Handbook
HA72500
HA72500
REVISION RECORD
REVISION No.
AUTHORITY
DATE INSERTED
INITIALS
1-3
Included in Issue 1
25/6/93
R S Reid
Included in Issue 2
13/4/94
R S Reid
Editorial
18/6/94
R S Reid
Editorial
31/10/94
R S Reid
Editorial
23/11/94
R S Reid
ECO 901695, 901687, 901695, 901701,

901702, 901704, 1901705, 101709,
901727, 901775, 901777, 901787,
901788, 901798, 901799, 901800,
901877, 901887, 901891, 901911,
901934, 901936, 901947, 901953,
901996, 901997, 902000, 902006,
Editorial
2/5/95
R S Reid
ECO 902169, 902181, 902309, 902449,

902499
6/3/96
R S Reid
10
ECO 901940, 902157, 902422, 902731
9/7/96
R S Reid
11
ECO 902011, 903033, 903044, 903233,

903296, 903516, 903757
18/12/96
R S Reid
12
ECO 903757
19/12/96
R S Reid
13
ECO 903915
1/7/97
R S Reid
14
ECO E1389
11/5/98
C OHara
15
ECO E1575
11/5/98
C OHara
16
ECO E1636
11/5/98
C OHara
17
ECO E1708
12/5/98
C OHara
18
ECO E1713
12/5/98
C OHara
19
ECO E1764
25/5/98
C OHara
20
ECO E2261
25/2/00
C OHara
21
ECO E2286
5/7/00
C OHara
22
ECO E10006
4/6/01
C OHara
23
ECO E3003, E3004, E3005, E3006,

E3007, E3008, E3025, E3035, E3048
25/7/05
C OHara
24
E3101
17/8/06
C OHara
25
ECO E3146
2/12/08
A.Cain
26
ECO E3188
23/7/09
A.Cain
Copyright Interscan Navigation Systems Pty Ltd

This publication is copyright and all rights pertaining to it are reserved.
No part may be reproduced by any process without written permission.
HA72500_Revisions.doc
HA72500
HANDBOOK HA72500
VOLUME ARRANGEMENT
VOLUME 1
SECTION 1
BRIEF SPECIFICATION AND SPECIFICATION
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
VOLUME 2
ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
VOLUME 3
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
APPENDIX
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS AND MASSES
POWER AND REMOTE CONTROL
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
TEST EQUIPMENT
VOLUME 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
VOLUME 5
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE
AGENTS
CTU SOFTWARE
COMPONENT LAYOUT DIAGRAMS
AC POWER SUPPLY 3A71130
DEPOT TEST FACILITY
CHANNEL FREQUENCY AND SPACING SPECIFICATION
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS
CRYSTAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 6
DRAWINGS
HA72500
WARNINGS
The warning information Included below should be made known
to all personnel engaged in operation and maintenance of the
DME LDB-102 equipment
RADIATION EXPOSURE HAZARD

The LDB-102 DME has been tested to determine the levels of microwave radiation existing
around various parts of the equipment. These tests were performed in Australia by the
Environmental Protection Authority of the New South Wales State Government. The only
significant levels of radiation are those close to the 1kW Power Amplifier when its cover is
removed, and the measured power density is less than 1.0 milliwatt per square centimetre
(mW/cm2) in all cases.
The DME therefore meets the requirements of Australian Standard AS2772-1985, which sets an
occupational exposure limit of 1 mW/cm2, over an 8-hour day, for these frequencies. The
equipment also meets the requirements of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Standard C95.1-1982, which sets a limit of 3 mW/cm2.
On the basis of these measurements, maintenance personnel are in no danger of hazardous
radiation while working on an operating DME.
Despite the low level of radiation from the equipment, it is recommended that the DME be always
operated with the cover fitted to the 1kW Power Amplifier. When servicing procedures require
DME operation with this cover removed, personnel should exercise care not to unnecessarily
expose sensitive body tissue (such as eyes or gonads) to areas of radiation for an extended time
period.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD

Maintenance or other tasks which require access to the equipment during operation should be
performed only by suitable qualified personnel who are aware of the precautions to be taken
when working on equipment in which hazardous operating voltages may be present.
All personnel should be conversant with emergency cardiopulmonary resuscitation procedures.
An illustrated procedure authorised by the National Heart Foundation of Australia is included in
this manual for reference.
TOXIC SUBSTANCES
Beryllium Oxide
Beryllium oxide in the sintered (ceramic) form is safe to handle whilst it remains intact in its
original manufactured form, but if it is broken or pulverised the resulting dust particles are highly
toxic.
The sintered form of beryllium oxide is a component in the manufacture of thermally conductive
washers as used in transistor heat sink applications, and in the manufacture of chip resistors.
These SHOULD NOT be broken, filed, drilled, sandpapered, or abraded in any way.
The sintered form of beryllium oxide is also used in the manufacture of high-frequency (VHF and
UHF) transistors; these can usually be identified by a white ceramic-looking circumferential band.
These transistors SHOULD NOT be opened 'in any circumstances.
HA72500
Beryllium oxide is also used as a greasy-looking paste inside certain types of metal can
transistors; these SHOULD NOT be opened in any circumstances.
Because of the difficulty in identifying those transistors which may contain beryllium oxide, NO
TRANSISTORS SHOULD EVER BE CUT OPEN FOR INTERNAL INSPECTION. Also, used or
replaced transistors should be disposed of in a manner consistent with the potential hazard that
they may present.
Beryllium oxide should not be confused with beryllium copper, which is safe to handle.
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Thermal degradation of PTFE will commence at temperatures above 200 degrees Celsius; toxic
vapours will be evolved at such temperatures.
This characteristics of PTFE must be taken into account when repair or replacement of
components may involve heating of PTFE. Adequate ventilation should be provided in the event
that processes (such as soldering) may submit PTFE to temperatures above 200 degrees
Celsius.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
The design of the DME LDB-102 minimises hazard from lightning strike effect up to the order of a
few hundred volts. In installations where external wiring is connected to the equipment and
extends over significant distances, suitable protection devices should be fitted at the point where
the external wiring enters the equipment shelter.
CAUTION
The precautionary Information included below should be made
known to all personnel engaged in maintenance of the DME LDB102 equipment
STATIC-SENSITIVE DEVICES
All metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices and the FET family of transistors can potentially be
damaged by electrostatic discharge voltages occurring during handling, or during testing or
installation into a circuit board.
Some types of devices incorporate in-built circuitry to provide protection against the effects of
electrostatic discharge voltages. Other types do not, and are potentially susceptible to damage.
These latter types are referred to as static-sensitive devices (SSDs).
The DME LDB-102 equipment contains SSDs. Personnel involved in testing and repair of the
equipment should be aware of the causes and effects of potential damage to SSDs, and of the
proper practices to be observed in order to obviate such damage.
EMERGENCY CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION FOR

UNCONSCIOUS PATIENT.
STAY WITH VICTIM CALL FOR HELP AND COMMENCE RESUSCITATION.
AIRWAY:
Clear the airway. Quickly turn victim on side Check breathing and listen to breath, watch for chest
movement. If breathing, leave victim on side and keep
and remove foreign material from mouth.
the airway clear.
Place neck and jaw in correct positions.
BREATHING:
If not breathing, quickly turn the victim on his Check circulation, carotid pulse. If present, continue
expired air resuscitation at a rate of 15 per minute.
back and commence expired air
Check the circulation after 1
resuscitation. mouth or mouth to nose, using
minute and then every 2
jaw lift method to open
minutes. If breathing returns,
airway. Give 5 full
place the victim on side and
ventilations in ten
keep the airway clear.
seconds.
CIRCULATION:
Check carotid pulse. If absent, begin external cardiac compression. Place the heel of one hand on the
lower half of the sternum and lock the other hand to the first by grasping wrist or interlocking fingers.
Keep fingers off the chest.
One Operator:
2 ventilations,
15 compressions,
4 cycles per minute.
CHECK PROGRESS
- If effective
Carotid pulse felt with each
compression.
Skin will become pinker.
Two Operators:
1 ventilation,
5 compressions,
12 cycles per minute.
GET HELP
In metropolitan areas, dial 000 and ask for
ambulance service. In country areas, contact
your local ambulance service.
National Heart Foundation of Australia

PE3 (rev) 1984
V19_in_progress\NHF-CPR.doc
HA72500
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

The major acronyms and abbreviations used throughout this handbook, and their meanings, are
listed below. Unless shown otherwise these apply to indicate both noun and verb forms, and to
singular and plural cases. Examples:
AM may indicate either
or
amplitude modulated
LED may indicate either

or
amplitude modulation
light emitting diode
light emitting diodes
ABBREVIATION
MEANING
AC
Alternating current
AFC
Automatic frequency control
AGC
Automatic gain control
AH
Ampere-hour
AM
Amplitude modulation
ATIS
Airport terminal information service
BCD
Binary coded decimal
CMOS
Complementary metal oxide semiconductor
CPU
Central processing unit
CVOR
Conventional VHF omni-range
CW
Carrier wave
DAC
Digital-to-analogue converter
DC
Direct current
DIL
Dual in line
DIP
Dual in line package
DME
Distance measuring equipment
DVOR
Doppler VHF omni-range
EPROM
Electrically programmable read only memory
FET
Field effect transistor
FM
Frequency modulation
ISEP
International standard equipment practice
LED
Light emitting diode
LRU
Line replaceable unit
LSB
Lower sideband
MOS
Metal oxide semiconductor
MOSFET
Metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor
PIN
P-type/intrinsic/N-type
PPM
Parts per million
PRF
Pulse repetition frequency
PROM
Programmable read only memory
PTFE
Polytetrafluoroethane
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
HA72500
ABBREVIATION
MEANING
PWB
Printed wiring board
RAM
Random access memory
R/C
Resistor/capacitor
RF
Radio frequency
RMS
Root-mean-square
ROM
Read only memory
SCR
Silicon controlled rectifier
USB
Upper sideband
SSD
Static-sensitive device
UV
Ultraviolet
VCO
Voltage controlled oscillator
VHF
Very high frequency
VOR
VHF omni-range
VSWR
Voltage standing wave ratio
WPM
Words per minute
COMPONENT DESIGNATORS
The system of letter codes used for the designation of electronic component items of the
equipment described in this handbook conforms to Australian Standard AS1103.2 (1982). This
system is as follows:
Letter Code
Kind of Item
Assemblies, subassemblies
Transducers, from non-electrical to electrical quantity or vice versa
Capacitors
Binary elements, delay devices, storage devices
Miscellaneous
Protective devices
Generators, power supplies
Signalling devices
Relays, contactors
Inductors, reactors
Motors
Analogue integrated circuits
Measuring equipment, testing equipment
Mechanical switching devices for power circuits
Resistors
Switches, selectors
Transformers, regulators (power)
Modulators, changes
Tubes, semiconductors (discrete)
Transmission paths, waveguides, aerials (antennas)
HA72500
Letter Code
Kind of Item
Terminals, plugs, sockets, links, joints (also see below)
Electrically operated mechanical devices
Networks, hybrid transformers, filters, equalisers, limiters
COMPONENT DESIGNATOR SUFFIXES

All connectors (terminals, plugs, sockets. jacks) are identified by the designator letter 'X';
additionally, suffix letters are used to further identify the type or location of connectors. Connector
designators used are:
Letter Code
Type of Connector
XA
A connection point mounted on the face panel of an equipment module and

accessible during normal operation of the equipment; example - a front panel
test jack.
XC
A coaxial connector.
XN
A multiway connector with either male or female contacts.
XT
A test point mounted on a printed wiring board assembly, accessible only when
access panels are removed and/or the board assembly is extended for
maintenance or adjustment
TERMINAL/PIN DESIGNATION
The system used for identification of terminal designations conforms to Australian Standard
AS1103.2 (1982), Section 6.5. Under this system, a terminal number is prefixed with the
qualifying symbol ':'. Thus, for example:
XN4:13
Identifies pin 13 of connector XN4.
N161:3
Identifies pin 3 of analogue integrated circuit N161.
D5:2
Identifies pin 2 of digital integrated circuit D5.
HA72500
SECTION 1
SECTION 1
BRIEF DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATION
1-i
HA72500
SECTION 1
TABLE of CONTENTS
1.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATION........................................... 1-1
1.1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1-1
1.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Application ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
SYSTEM OPERATION
1-1
1.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Distance Measuring Function ...................................................................... 1-1
1.2.3 DME Pulse Generation................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.4 System Squitter ........................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.5 Maximum Reply Rate .................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.6 Identification Message................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.7 Range and Echo.......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.8 Remote Control and Monitoring System...................................................... 1-3
1.3
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
1-3
1.4
DOCUMENTATION
1-10
1-ii
HA72500
SECTION 1
LIST of FIGURES
Figure 1-1
DME Principle.........................................................................................1-2
LIST of TABLES
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Performance Characteristics Summary......................................................1-4

Controls and Indicators...............................................................................1-7
1-iii
HA72500
SECTION 1
1. BRIEF DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATION

1.1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1.1
Introduction
This document describes the Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) series LDB-102
type A72500. It contains information which includes equipment description, alignment
procedures, installation and operation instructions, component parts lists, and circuit
diagrams.
The LDB-102 is designed and manufactured to meet the requirements laid down by the
International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) authority for this type of equipment. The
LDB-102 is fully solid state, and uses digital techniques to minimise the number of
adjustable controls.
1.1.2
Application
The DME system is a navigational system which provides slant-range distance

information between aircraft and a ground station.
The system consists of a transmitter/receiver (interrogator) in the aircraft, and a
receiver/transmitter (transponder) ground station. The interrogator transmits
interrogation pulses to the transponder, which on receipt of the interrogation pulses is
triggered to transmit a sequence of reply pulses which have a predetermined time delay.
The time difference between interrogation and reply is measured in the interrogator and
translated into a distance measurement which is presented on a digital display in the
aircraft cockpit; this display is continuously updated.
1.2
SYSTEM OPERATION
1.2.1
Introduction
This section describes the operating principles of the DME and the options available for
remote control of the equipment.
1.2.2
Distance Measuring Function
The DME system provides each aircraft with up-to-date information regarding the slantrange distance between the aircraft and the selected DME ground station. By using the
correct airborne equipment h is also possible for the interrogating aircraft to establish the
rate of closure and the flight time to a ground station.
The DME system has a transmitter/receiver (interrogator) in the aircraft and a
receiver/transmitter (transponder) operating as the ground beacon. The UHF DME
operates in the L band, from 962 MHz to 1213 MHz. This band is divided into 126 1-MHz
channels for interrogation, and 126 1-MHz channels for transponder replies with the
interrogation frequency and reply frequency always differing by 63 MHz. The number of
channels available is doubled by the use of X and Y channels which define the pulse
separation for the interrogation and reply pulses.
Initially, the airborne equipment is set to the correct frequency for the desired ground
station. The interrogator transmits pairs of pulses at the interrogation frequency at a
repetition rate of approximately 120 pulse-pairs per second (pp/s) (this is called
'searching' mode). The transponder, having identified these pulses as valid
interrogations, introduces a 50 microsecond delay after each interrogating pulse-pair and
transmits reply pulse-pairs at the reply frequency. The airborne interrogator
automatically compares the lapsed time between transmission and reception, subtracts
the 50 microsecond delay, and displays the result in nautical miles. Once the
1-1
HA72500
SECTION 1
interrogator receives replies to its interrogations, the interrogator 'locks' onto the reply
pulses and reduces its transmitted repetition rate to approximately 30 pp/s (this is called
'tracking' mode).
Figure 1-1
1.2.3
DME Principle
DME Pulse Generation
The RF pulses transmitted by both the interrogator and the ground transponder consist
of a pair of 'Gaussian-shaped' pulses; the separation between pulses depends on
whether an X channel or a Y channel has been selected. The duration of the pulses is in
all cases a nominal 3.5 microseconds as measured at the half-amplitude point. The
pulse separation for X channels, for both interrogation and reply pulses, is
12 microseconds; for Y channels the pulse separation is 36 microseconds for
interrogation pulses, and 30 microseconds for reply pulses. The channel frequencies
and spacings for all channels are shown in Appendix L.
1.2.4
System Squitter
Airborne DME receivers require a continuous stream of random pulses to ensure correct
operation; however, unless there are interrogating aircraft present, the airborne receivers
may not receive the required minimum pulse rate. To ensure that the airborne receivers
always receive at least a minimum pulse rate, the DME transponder will generate 'extra'
pulses in a random fashion at a minimum pulse rate of 945 pp/s. These extra random
pulse-pairs are called squitter. At the time when no aircraft are interrogating, only the
squitter is being transmitted, at an average rate of 945 pp/s; however, as the number of
authentic interrogations increases the squitter rate is reduced, and becomes zero when
the live interrogation rate reaches 945 pp/s.
1.2.5
Maximum Reply Rate
As the pulse rate of the interrogations increases, a limit is reached where the
transponder will not allow further interrogations to be serviced. This limit is reached at a
reply rate of approximately 2800 pp/s, above which the transponder would become
overloaded. To avoid overloading, the transponder detects the high rate of replies and
1-2
HA72500
SECTION 1
causes the receiver automatic gain control to limit the gain of the receiver until the
weaker, more distant, aircraft are excluded from the transponder, thus lowering the
transponder loading. Should the system reply rate still exceed the 2800 pp/s limit, video
output pulses are randomly suppressed to limit the maximum reply rate to 2800 pp/s.
1.2.6
Identification Message
Each operational DME is identified by a 2-character or 3-character Morse code message

which is transmitted every 40 seconds. Each identification code (ident) is unique and
identifies a specific DME site. The identification message code is programmed by preset
controls within the equipment, and can be readily altered if the ident is required to be
changed.
Frequently, DME is collocated with ILS or VOR equipment and for this reason the DME
may operate either as a master or as a slave for the generation and transmission of the
station identification message. When the DME is operating as a slave unit, any failure of
the external ident generator will cause the DME to internally generate and transmit the
ident in place of the failed unit.
1.2.7
Range and Echo
The normal slant range for a DME system operating in the ultra high frequency band is
approximately 200 nautical miles (370 km) for good conditions at maximum transponder
sensitivity. This maximum range may be seriously degraded, however, by the terrain
surrounding the installation and by the maximum demands of interrogating aircraft.
A major contributing factor to distance accuracy degradation is the effect of echoes on
the interrogation pulses arriving at the transponder. The shortest path is the direct line
between the aircraft and ground transponder and thus the wave front taking this path
arrives first. Other wave fronts may reflect off the terrain, buildings, and other objects,
and thus arrive at any indeterminate time after the arrival of the direct pulse. Should the
first pulse of a pulse-pair suffer such echo conditions it is possible that a reflection could
arrive at the DME antenna at the same time as the direct second pulse of the
interrogating pulse-pair; and the two pulses may arrive in any phase relationship. It is
possible under these conditions for the second pulse of a pulse-pair to undergo
distortion leading either to cancellation or to a shift in timing such that the transponder
cannot recognise the receipt of a valid pulse-pair.
Short distance echo suppression is included within the LDB-102 to minimise the
problems associated with such reflections. As well, long distance echo suppression is
included to eliminate recognition of echoes that are synchronised with the interrogation
pulses but arrive in the order of up to 320 microseconds late.
1.2.8
Remote Control and Monitoring System
The Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS) has a relay-based interface to the
DME, providing on/off control and operational status monitoring. The operator console at
the central she permits control of the DME in the same manner as that provided on the
DME control panel.
1.3
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
The performance parameters of the major system functions and the location and
functions of all system controls and indicators are given in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2
following.
1-3
HA72500
Table 1-1
SECTION 1
Performance Characteristics Summary
CHARACTERISTIC
Power Supply
Requirements
PARAMETER
Voltage
Current drain (normal operation,
27.0 volts DC)
Single 1 kW, Single Monitor
at 945 Hz (squitter rate)
at 2800 Hz (maximum traffic)
VALUE/LIMITS
21 to +28 volts
6 amperes
12 amperes
Dual 1 kW, Dual Monitor

at 945 Hz (squitter rate)
at 2800 Hz (maximum traffic)
Environmental
Condition Limits
Frequency and
Pulse
Characteristics
Transmitter
Temperature (indoor equipment)

Relative humidity (indoor equipment)
7 amperes
13 amperes
-10 to 60 degrees C
95% (to 45 degrees C)
50% (45 to 60 degrees C)
Antenna
-40 to 70 degrees C (100% RH)
Operating frequency
(set by installed crystals)
Pulse spacing (microseconds)
Can be set to any of 252 channels in the

962-1213 MHz band
Transmit
X channels
12.00.1
Y channels
30.00.1
Decode
X channels
12.01.0
Y channels
36.01.0
Transmitter power
(measured at rack connector)
Low power
> 150 watts peak
High power
> 1 kW peak
Frequency accuracy
Transmitter pulse count
0.002%
Minimum
Maximum
Note that interrogation has precedence

over squitter. Squitter pulses are only
generated if the reply rate to authentic
interrogation is less than 945 pulse-pairs
per second
Pulse shape
Width
Rise time
Fall time
Spectrum
Ident
Internal generator
Transmitted ident
945 pulse-pairs/second
2800 pulse-pairs/second
3.5 0.5 microseconds

DME (N)
Rate
Repeat interval
1350 25 pulse-pairs/second
40 seconds nominal
Dot duration
0.13 seconds nominal
Dash duration
Equals 3 dots
th
Every 4 internally generated or externally
provided from associated navaid
1-4
HA72500
SECTION 1
CHARACTERISTIC
Receiver
PARAMETER
-91 dBm at cabinet connector
Adjacent channel
rejection
80 dB
Spurious rejection
80 dB
IF rejection
80 dB
Frequency stability
System time delay
Test Interrogator
and Monitor
VALUE/LIMITS
Receiver triggering level
0.002% kHz
X channel
35 to 50 microseconds
Y channel
50 to 56 microseconds
Timing reference
First interrogation pulse
Accuracy
For interrogation signal levels between

-81 dBm and -10 dBm at cabinet
connector and throughout the range of
service conditions the bias error shall not
exceed 0.5 microseconds
These modules continuously interrogate the transponder and monitor its reply and
initiate an alarm for the following fault conditions:
REPLY DELAY
Alarm limits can be set in 0.1 microseconds steps up to
1.0 microseconds
SPACING
Alarm limits can be set in 0.1 microseconds steps up to
1.0 microseconds
EFFICIENCY
Alarms when efficiency drops to 60%
REPLY RATE
PULSE WIDTH
Alarms when reply rate fails below 833 pulse-pairs per

second or exceeds 3000 pulse-pairs per second
Alarms if not in range 3.0 to 4.0 microseconds
PULSE RISE TIME
Alarms if greater than 3.0 microseconds
PULSE FALL TIME
Alarms if greater than 3.5 microseconds
POWER OUTPUT
Alarm point can be set to between 1 dB and 6 dB below

nominal level
Alarms when ident is absent for more than a period which
can be set to be between 2 and 128 seconds in 1 second
steps
The monitor checks its failure circuitry on reply delay and
reply spacing parameters. It initiates an alarm if it passes a
faulty reply
Efficiency monitoring: -85 dBm
Reply delay monitoring: -70 dBm
IDENT
MONITOR
Injection levels of test
interrogations into
receiver
1-5
HA72500
SECTION 1
CHARACTERISTIC
AC Mains Power
Supply
Output voltage
range
PARAMETER
Normal operation
Test operation
18-33 volts. adjustable
Output current rating
30 amperes maximum
input voltage
Input frequency
200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250,

260 volts 10%
50Hz 10%
Line regulation
1% for 15% variation
Load regulation
0.45V over range 0 to 30 amperes
Noise and ripple
200 mV peak to peak
Variation of output voltage with temperature
Within 0.2V over temperature range
0-20 amperes
Transient response
20-0 amperes
Efficiency
Overcurrent protection
Battery Supply
VALUE/LIMITS
21-28 volts, adjustable
Less than 2 volts; 50 milliseconds

recovery
Less than 2 volts;
200 milliseconds recovery
70% at 27 volts, 10 amperes
Reverse voltage protection
Current limits can be set over the range

20 amperes to 30 amperes
Fuse
Ambient temperature range
-10 to +60 degrees C
Voltage
Capacity (discharged at 10-hour rates to 1.85
volts per cell - AS1981)
Operating time
At maximum
transponder reply rate
At squitter reply rate
24 volts nominal
105 AH (for specified operating time)
6.5 hours - dual DME
7.0 hours - single DME
12 hours minimum - dual DME
14 hours minimum - single DME
1-6
HA72500
Table 1-2
SECTION 1
Controls and Indicators
UNIT/MODULE CONTROLTYPE
Control Panel
Pushbutton with
LED indicators
FUNCTION
SELECT MAIN
(3 buttons)
NO2
Green
INHIBIT
Red
MONITOR ALARM
(toggle action)
(NORMAL)
MAINTENANCE (mode)
(toggle action)
(OFF)
SOURCE (of control)

(2 buttons)
LOCAL
Yellow
REMOTE
Green
ON
Green
RECYCLE (after shutdown)

(toggle action)
Rotary switch
10 positions
110
LED indicators
SETTINGS or INDICATION
OFF/RESET (Alarms)
Yellow
NO1
Green
ON
Red
(OFF)
ALARM DELAY
Delay in seconds from fault appearing

until the CTU takes action.
STATUS
NO 1 ON
ALARM REGISTER
(indicates alarm status at last
TRANSFER/ SHUTDOWN
action by the equipment)
POWER
TEST
(switches not in NORMAL
position)
Green
NO 2 ON
Green
NORMAL
Green
TRANSFER
Yellow
SHUTDOWN
Red
MAINTENANCE
Red
DELAY
Red
SPACING
Red
EFFICIENCY
Red
TX RATE
Red
RF POWER
Red
IDENT
Red
PULSE SHAPE
Red
ANTENNA
Red
PRIMARY
Red
SECONDARY
Red
MONITOR
Red
CTU
Red
AC PWR NORM
Green
BATT CHG 1
Green
BATT CHG 2
Green
BATT LOW
Red
MODULES
Red
ANT RELAY
Red
1-7
HA72500
Test Facility
Pushbuttons
SECTION 1
FUNCTION
Five pushbuttons, the functions of which are definable by the bottom line
of the TEST FACILITY display. Through a menu of options, the following
information can be selected by these pushbuttons to be displayed on the
top line of the TEST FACILITY display.
Parameters
Spacing
Transmitter pulse spacing
Delay
Signal Levels
PwrOut
RF power out
Effncy
D.Rate
Reply efficiency, when

maintenance mode is OFF. When
maintenance mode is ON, a submenu under this choice gives
access to
(Reply) Efficiency
(normal levels)
(Reply) Efficiency (high level)
(Reply) Efficiency (low level)
Decoded pulse rate
Tx.Rate
Transmitted pulse rate
Width
Transmitted pulse width
Rise
Transmitted pulse rise time
Fall
Transmitted pulse fall time
Vcal
Voltage measurement calibration
Rcal
Rate measurement calibration
Tcal
Time measurement calibration
RV.Osc
Receiver video local oscillator
RV.RF
TD.Drv
Receiver video transmitter RF drive

Transmitter driver RF output
TD.Mod
Transmitter driver modulation
PA.Mod
1 kW RF amplifier modulator output
PA.Drv
1 kW RF amplifier driver output
PA.0ut
1 kW RF amplifier final output
TI RF
Test interrogator interrogation
Power Supply Voltages Aux.24V
Auxiliary 24 volts supply
PA.HT
Power amplifier high tension supply
TP.15V
MON PS
Transponder power supply:

15 volts output
18 volts output
high tension output
Monitor power supply status
RV PS
Receiver video power supply status
Tl PS
Test interrogator power supply

status
Receiver video trigger signal to
transmitter driver
TP.18V
Drv.HT
Status
Reply delay
RV TRIG
1-8
HA72500
SECTION 1
Test Facility
Pushbuttons
(continued)
(continued)
FUNCTION
Miscellaneous
Reset
(only available if
Alarm1
MAINTENANCE mode
not selected)
Restart count set to zero
Modifies alarm register display so
that only those alarms due to
Transponder 1 are displayed
Alarm2
Modifies alarm register display so
that only those alarms due to
Transponder 2 are displayed
LEDTst
Turns on all LEDs on the CTU
front panel
Version
CTU software version identity
Ident Source (for speaker)
Mon1
Monitor module 1
Mon2
Monitor module 2
2440 Hz
2240 Hz tone
OFF
Source Selection
Ch1
(only available if
Ch2
MAINTENANCE mode
is selected)
Fault Limits
Delay
(only available if
Spacing
MAINTENANCE mode
Effncy
is selected)
Tx.Rate
Ant.Pwr
Off
Selects the test
interrogator/monitor module to
use for parameter, level and
power supply voltage
measurements
Delay upper and lower limits
Spacing upper and lower limits
Efficiency lower limit
Transmitted pulse rate upper and
lower limits
Antenna power lower limit
Pushbutton
ESC(APE)
Returns to topmost menu
Pushbutton
TI RATE
(only available if
MAINTENANCE mode
is selected)
Sets interrogation rate of test interrogator.

Selected rate is displayed on top right hand
corner of the TEST FACILITY display.
1 kHz
Toggle action between rates of
1 kHz and the normal rate (50 Hz
for dual, 100 Hz for single)
10 kHz
Rate of 10 kHz while button held
pressed.
1-9
HA72500
1.4
SECTION 1
DOCUMENTATION
Equipment Serial Numbers

All equipment assemblies have individual serial numbers allocated. These are used to
record the history of the equipment.
Modification Records
The modification status of all equipment is controlled with a modification register, and a
modification record is attached to each item of equipment. Navaid users are not normally
notified of any change of modification status as equipments with differing modification
status are functionally interchangeable.
Modification Bulletins
During the production life of equipment, design changes may be made to alter or
improve particular performance characteristics. These changes are documented on a
Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) which will be forwarded to users as appropriate.
Type Numbering System
All manufactured equipments; and subassemblies are identified by a 7-digit type
number.
For navaid equipments the type number has the form YAXXXXX, in which:
'XXXXX is a 5-figure number which is unique to the particular assembly.
Y is a prefix digit which identifies a particular variant of assembly type 'XXXXX.
A signifies that the equipment is avionics equipment.
All correspondence relating to manufactured items should quote the applicable,

complete type number.
1-10
HA72500
SECTION 2
SECTION 2
2-i
HA72500
SECTION 2
TABLE of CONTENTS
2.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 2-1
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2-1
2.1.1 Principles of Operation ..............................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Signal Flow ................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Mechanical Description .............................................................................2-5
2.1.4 Rack Wiring ...............................................................................................2-7
2.2
SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
2-7
2.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................2-7
2.2.2 Transponder Subsystem ...........................................................................2-7
2.2.3 Control and Test Subsystem .....................................................................2-9
2.2.4 Power Supply Subsystem........................................................................2-10
2.2.4.1
Single DME Power Distribution.........................................................2-10
2.2.4.2
Dual DME Power Distribution ...........................................................2-11
2.3
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS
2-12
2.3.1 Introduction..............................................................................................2-12
2.3.2 RF Panel Single DME 1A72545 and RF Panel Dual DME 2A72545 ...... 2-12
2.3.2.1
Preselector Filter 1A72546 ...............................................................2-13
2.3.2.2
Directional Coupler 1A69755............................................................2-13
2.3.2.3
Directional Coupler 2A69755............................................................2-14
2.3.2.4
50 Ohm Termination 1A69757 .........................................................2-14
2.3.2.5
RF Panel PWB Assembly Single DME 1A72547..............................2-14
2.3.2.6
RF Panel PWB Assembly Dual DME 2A72547 ................................2-15
2.3.3 Receiver Video 1A72520.........................................................................2-16
2.3.3.1
Main PWB Assembly Receiver Video 1A72521 ...............................2-17
2.3.3.2
RF Source 1A72522 .........................................................................2-25
2.3.3.3
IF Amplifier 1A72523 ........................................................................2-26
2.3.3.4
RF Amplifier 1A72524 ......................................................................2-27
2.3.3.5
RF Filter 1A72517 ............................................................................2-27
2.3.4 Transmitter Driver 1A72530 .................................................................... 2-30
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.1 Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly 1A72531 ...............................2-31
2.3.4.2
Exciter 1A72532 ...............................................................................2-36
2.3.4.3
Medium Power Driver 1A72533........................................................2-37
2.3.4.4
Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534...............................................2-37
2.3.5 Transponder Power Supply 1A72525......................................................2-40
2.3.5.1
Main PWB Assembly Transponder Power Supply 1A72526 ............2-40
2.3.6 1kW RF Power Amplifier Assembly 1A72535 ......................................... 2-43
2.3.6.1
Power Divider 1A72536 ....................................................................2-44
2.3.6.2
Power Combiner 1A72537 ...............................................................2-44
2.3.6.3
250W RF Amplifier 1A69873 ............................................................2-45
2.3.6.4
Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534...............................................2-45
2.3.6.5
1kW PA Connector PWB Assembly 1A72544 ..................................2-45
2.3.7 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540 ............................................................. 2-46
2.3.7.1
DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly 1A72542 ....................................2-46
2.3.7.2
Control and Status PWIB Assembly 1A72541..................................2-47
2.3.8 Test Interrogator 1A72514.......................................................................2-49
2.3.8.1
Main PWB Assembly Test Interrogator 1A72515 .............................2-50
2.3.8.2
RF Generator 1A72516 ....................................................................2-57
2.3.8.3
Attenuator 1A69737..........................................................................2-58
2.3.8.4
Modulator and Detector 1A72518.....................................................2-58
2.3.8.5
Reply Detector 1A72519 ..................................................................2-60
2.3.9 Monitor Module 1A72510 ........................................................................2-63
2.3.9.1
Main PWB Assembly Monitor Module 1A72511 ...............................2-65
2-ii
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3.9.2
Peak Power Monitor 1A72512 ..........................................................2-88
2.3.10 Control and Test Unit 1A72550 ............................................................... 2-92
2.3.10.1
General.............................................................................................2-92
2.3.10.2
Mechanical .......................................................................................2-92
2.3.10.3
CTU Processor PWB Assembly 1A72552 ........................................2-93
2.3.10.4
CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly 1A72553....................................2-101
2.3.10.5
RCMS Interface MB Assembly 1A722555......................................2-104
2.3.11 Power Distribution Panel Single DME 1A72549 and Power Distribution
Panel Dual DME 2A72549..................................................................... 2-106
2.3.12 AC Power Supply 3A71130 ................................................................... 2-107
2.3.13 Power Supply System Dual AC 2A/3A69758 ........................................ 2-108
2.3.14 Transponder Subrack 1A72513.............................................................2-109
2.3.15 CTU Subrack 1A72506..........................................................................2-109
2.3.16 External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557 ..................................................2-109
2.3.17 1kW PA Power Supply Frame 1A72503................................................ 2-110
2-iii
HA72500
SECTION 2
LIST of FIGURES
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-26
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33
Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
Figure 2-36
Figure 2-37
Figure 2-38
Figure 2-39
Figure 2-40
Block Diagram Single 1kW DME ...............................................................2-3

Block Diagram Dual 1kW DME..................................................................2-4
Layout of DME LDB-102 Single 1kW Rack ...............................................2-5
Layout of DME LDB-102 Dual 1kW Rack..................................................2-6
Transponder Subsystem Diagram.............................................................2-8
Control and Test Subsystem Diagram.......................................................2-9
Single 1kW DME Power Distribution .......................................................2-10
Dual 1kW DME Power Distribution..........................................................2-11
Directional Coupler 1A69755...................................................................2-13
Directional Coupler 2A69755................................................................2-14
Waveforms for Interrogation Pulse Processing ....................................2-18
Ident Keyer Waveforms ........................................................................2-22
Transmitter Driver Block Diagram ........................................................2-30
Shaped Pulse Generation Waveforms .................................................2-33
1kW RF Power Amplifier Block Diagram ..............................................2-43
CTU Bus Timing - Read .......................................................................2-51
CTU Bus Timing - Write........................................................................2-51
Modulator and Detector Waveforms.....................................................2-59
Delay Monitor .......................................................................................2-65
Delay Monitor Waveforms ....................................................................2-66
Spacing Monitor....................................................................................2-67
Spacing Monitor Waveforms ................................................................2-68
Efficiency Monitor .................................................................................2-70
Rate Monitor .........................................................................................2-71
Ident Monitor.........................................................................................2-73
Effective Radiated Power Monitor ........................................................2-75
Antenna Integrity Monitor .....................................................................2-77
Width Monitor Waveforms ....................................................................2-79
Pulse Shape Monitor ............................................................................2-80
Rise Time Monitor Waveforms .............................................................2-81
Fall Time Monitor Waveforms...............................................................2-82
Level Monitor ........................................................................................2-84
Fault Line Driver ...................................................................................2-85
CTU Block Diagram..............................................................................2-92
CTU Processor Board Block Diagram ..................................................2-94
CTU Front Panel Board Block Diagram..............................................2-101
RCMS Interface Board Block Diagram ...............................................2-104
Single Power Distribution Panel Block Diagram.................................2-107
Dual Power Distribution Panel Block Diagram ...................................2-107
Power Supply System Dual AC 2A69758 Layout...............................2-108
2-iv
HA72500
SECTION 2
LIST of TABLES
Table 2-1
Summary of Controls and Indicators: RF Panel (Dual) ...........................2-15
Table 2-2
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Receiver
Video Module .......................................................................................................2-28
Table 2-3
Summary of Internal Controls : Receiver Video Module..........................2-29
Table 2-4
Pulse Shaper Board Test Points .............................................................2-35
Table 2-5
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Transmitter Driver....2-38
Table 2-6
Summary of Internal Controls : Transmitter Driver ..................................2-39
Table 2-7
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Transponder
Power Supply .......................................................................................................2-42
Table 2-8
Summary of Internal Controls : Transponder Power Supply ...................2-42
Table 2-9
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : PA Power Supply.....2-48
Table 2-10
Summary of Internal Controls : PA Power Supply................................2-48
Table 2-11
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Test Interrogator
Module ..............................................................................................................2-61
Table 2-12
Summary of Internal Controls: Test Interrogator Module .....................2-62
Table 2-13
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Monitor Module.....2-89
Table 2-14
Summary of Internal Controls : Monitor Module ...................................2-90
Table 2-15
Ident PLD Outputs: MA_IDENT_IN_1,2, MA_IDENT_OUT,
IDENT_TONE_TRANSFORMER, DET_IDENT_KEY..........................................2-97
Table 2-16
Ident PLD Output: IDENT+ CPU_TONE ..............................................2-97
Table 2-17
Ident PLD Output: IDENT_ON..............................................................2-97
Table 2-18
CTU Processor Board LED Indicators..................................................2-98
Table 2-19
CTU Processor Board Links .................................................................2-98
Table 2-20
CTU Processor Board D19 and D24 Inputs .........................................2-99
Table 2-21
CTU Processor Board D18 and D23 Outputs.....................................2-100
Table 2-22
CTU Front Panel Address Map ..........................................................2-102
Table 2-23
CTU Front Panel Switch Scanner and Coder Output .........................2-103
Table 2-24
RCMS Interface Address Map............................................................2-105
2-v
HA72500
SECTION 2
2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1.1
Principles of Operation
The LDB-102 series DME equipment is available in several standard configurations,

depending on RF power, duplication and primary power requirements.
It is available as either a single equipment or dual equipment configuration; each of
these may be fitted with either low power or high power RF amplifiers. The basic
transponder provides modulation and RF drive to a power amplifier assembly which
raises the power output to either 200 watts or 1kW
Single Transponder - Single Monitor
The basic transponder assembly consist of five modules, a control panel, an RF
distribution panel (mounted behind the control panel), and a DC distribution panel. Low
power and high power amplifier assemblies fed by a driver amplifier boosts the peak
power to more than 200 watts for the low power version and more than 1kW for the high
power version.
Aircraft interrogation signals from the antenna pass through the RF panel to the receiver
and video circuits which process the signals. If the signals are valid interrogations, then
a reply is initiated through the RF power amplifiers and RF panel back to the antenna for
transmission.
A test interrogator, in conjunction with a monitor, continuously interrogates the
transponder to check that it is performing correctly. These signals pass through the
transponder in the same manner as those from aircraft, but now the replies are coupled
from the beacon output and processed by the monitor to verify that the DME signal
parameters are within tolerance. The monitor itself is automatically checked for correct
operation.
An AC mains power supply, which converts the incoming AC supply voltage to a nominal
24 volts DC suitable for the rack as well as charging and standby battery bank, can be
included.
Dual Transponder - Dual Monitor
To provide this configuration, a second transponder assembly of five modules is added
along with a second RF power amplifier (200 watts or 1kW).
Additionally, a single RF panel is replaced by a dual version. A dual 1kW DME has the
AC power supply/battery charger located outside the basic equipment rack.
2-1
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.1.2
Signal Flow
REFER
Figure 2-1 for Single 1kW DME

Figure 2-2 for Dual 1kW DME
Block Diagram 72500-2-26
The following description refers to a 1kW single system, the signal flow in a dual system
being essentially the same for each of the transponders in the system.
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show simplified block diagrams of the basic single and dual
configurations. A more detailed block diagram is shown in Drawing 72500-2-26
Interrogation signals from an aircraft are received by the DME antenna which is
connected to the RF panel in the DME equipment. In this assembly, the signals pass
through a directional coupler and circulator to the preselector filter. The circulator
prevents the transmitter output from coupling directly into the receiver. The preselector,
comprising three coupled resonant cavities tuned to the receive frequency, reject the IF
image frequency, rejects unwanted spurious frequencies and gives further attenuation to
the transmitter output frequency. The interrogation signals then pass to the receiver
video module.
The receiver video module detects and decodes on-channel interrogations and encodes
the synchronous reply trigger pulse pair. Random reply pulse pairs are added, if
necessary, to the synchronous replies to maintain a minimum reply rate of 945 Hz. The
maximum reply rate is limited to a nominal 2800 Hz by reducing receiver sensitivity. The
keyed identification signal (ident) occurs every 40 seconds, the 'mark' of the ident
replacing normal reply pulses with a 1350 Hz pulse train.
Receiver output reply pulse pairs trigger the modulation generator in the transmitter
driver module, producing RF pulses which are connected to the 1kW RF power amplifier
module. The excitation frequency for the transmitter driver is provided by the local
oscillator in the receiver video module.
The output from the power amplifier is connected back to the RF panel, where it passes
through the circulator and directional coupler to the antenna for the reply transmission to
the aircraft. In a dual system, the RF panel includes a coaxial transfer relay to connect
either of the transponders to the antenna, the other being terminated in a dummy load.
The equipment also has a test interrogator and a monitor. These units are used together
to check the performance of the DME. The test interrogator continuously interrogates the
DME in a similar manner to an aircraft. This invokes the transponder to generate reply
pulses; these are detected and processed by the monitor to verity that the signal
parameters of the replies being generated by the transponder are within acceptable
limits.
The test interrogators inject monitoring interrogating signals via a directional coupler in
the main antenna line, and operate at a combined PRF of 100 Hz. In a dual system, two
test interrogators are interconnected to prevent the interrogation of one falling in the
transponder dead-time produced by the other. Efficiency is monitored at an RF level of
-85 dBm, and transponder delay and reply pulse separation at an RF level of -70 dBm by
successive interrogations. The signals pass through the circulator and preselector to the
receiver video, where they are processed.
Transponder output pulses are sampled in the directional coupler and detected in the
reply detector of the test interrogator module. Processing within the test interrogator
separates out the synchronous replies from all other non-synchronous replies and
squitter.
2-2
HA72500
SECTION 2
The monitor module processes output signals from the test interrogator and provides a
pass or fail signal to the control and test unit for each monitored parameter. The monitor
itself is periodically checked by a self-test function initiated by the control and test unit;
this confirms that the monitor is capable of registering a fault for the two primary
parameters of reply delay and pulse spacing.
Figure 2-1
Block Diagram Single 1kW DME
2-3
HA72500
Figure 2-2
SECTION 2
Block Diagram Dual 1kW DME
2-4
HA72500
2.1.3
SECTION 2
Mechanical Description
The LDB-102 DME is designed to be mounted in a standard 483 mm (19-inch) rack type
rack. The dimensions of the rack for both single and dual DME racks are 1800 mm high
by 560 mm wide by 560 mm deep.
The bulk of the electronics is contained within five modules each of 6 rack units height
(267 mm) which plug into the transponder subrack and are secured by holding screws to
the rack frame.
Figure 2-3
Layout of DME LDB-102 Single 1kW Rack
2-5
HA72500
Figure 2-4
SECTION 2
Layout of DME LDB-102 Dual 1kW Rack
The CTU Subrack (1A72506) houses the Control and Test Unit (1A72550) and the
Power Distribution Panel (1A72549). The CTU subrack is screwed to the rack and is
6 rack units (267 mm) high.
Behind the CTU subrack is the RF Panel (1A72545 for single configuration or 2A72545
for dual), on which is mounted the directional coupler(s), preselector(s), circulators and
other RF circuitry.
In 1kW transponders the 1kW RF Power Amplifier (1A72535) and the 1kW PA Power
Supply (1A72540) are both screwed to the rack. They together occupy a 6-unit (267 mm)
high space, with the 1kW power amplifier at the back of the rack and the 1kW PA power
supply at the front of the rack. The 1kW PA power supply is located on hinges which
swing down to give easy access to the unit. The 1kW amplifier, consisting of a
modulating 180-watt stage and ten 250W RF amplifiers together with their associated
splitters and combiners, is mounted on a heat sink which is screwed to the rear of the
rack. A DC-DC converter, which supplies the power amplifier, is mounted on the inside
of the front panel, which swings back to give access to the components.
2-6
HA72500
SECTION 2
The AC power supply/battery charger, when fitted, occupies 8 rack units (356 mm)
height, and is 437 mm deep. In a single transponder station, this supply is normally
mounted in the bottom part of the main equipment rack. In a dual transponder, two of
these supplies are mounted in a separate rack as Dual AC Power Supply 2A/3A69758.
If standby batteries are used, these are housed in a separate, ventilated enclosure which
may be either inside or outside the main equipment shelter.
The physical layout of the 1kW single transponder, single monitor, AC supply version is
shown in Figure 2-3. The physical layout of the 1kW dual transponder, dual monitor, AC
supply version is shown in Figure 2-4.
2.1.4
"
Rack Wiring
REFER Rack Interwiring (Single 1kW DME) 72505-2-06

Rack Interwiring (Dual 1kW DME) 72505-2-17
Rack interwiring is shown in these drawings, which each consist of three sheets:
Sheet 1 shows RF cable interwiring.
Sheet 2 shows signal interwiring.
Sheet 3 shows power interwiring.
2.2
SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
2.2.1
Introduction
To enable easier understanding of the LDB-102 DME system the description is split into
three subsections - Transponder Subsystem, Control and Test Subsystem and the
Power Supply Subsystem. For further information on any individual modules, refer to
Section 2.3 of this handbook.
"
2.2.2
Transponder Subsystem
REFER
Interwiring Diagram 72505-2-37
The Transponder Subsystem consists of five modules mounted in the Transponder

Subrack (1A72513); these are the Receiver/Video (1A72520), Transmitter Driver
(1A72530), Transponder Power Supply (1A72525), Test Interrogator (1A72514) and the
Monitor Module (1A72510), the 1kW RF Amplifier (1A72535); and the RF Panel
(1A72545 for single, 2A72545 for dual). The transponder subrack interwiring is shown in
Drawing 72505-2-37, and is identical for both single and dual configurations.
The basic transponder functions are provided by the receiver/video, transmitter driver
and the 1kW RF power amplifier.
The receiver/video module receives and decodes interrogations and encodes replies.
When a valid interrogation is decoded, a pair of TX Modulation Trigger signals is sent to
the transmitter driver. In a 1kW station, for each TX Modulation Trigger sent to the
transmitter driver a shaped modulation pulse and a square pulse of RF, at the station
frequency, are generated in the transmitter driver and both fed to the 1kW RF power
amplifier. In a 250W transponder, for each TX Modulation Trigger a shaped pulse of
RF, at the station frequency, is generated in the transmitter driver and fed to the
250W RF amplifier.
The transponder power supply generates +15 volts, +18 volts and +HT to power the
transmitter driver.
2-7
HA72500
SECTION 2
The RF panel provides filtering of the input interrogation signals, coupling of the transmit
and receive paths to the antenna, and connection of the test interrogation and reply
signals of the test interrogator. In a dual system, it also provides for switching of the
active transponder to the antenna.
Figure 2-5
Transponder Subsystem Diagram
The test interrogator operates as an independent unit simulating aircraft interrogation

pulses. The transponder treats these pulses as normal interrogations and responds
accordingly, allowing the test interrogator to extract operational parameters from the
transponder. The test interrogator can measure each of the parameters for display on
the CTU.
The monitor accepts from the test interrogator signals representing the operational
parameters of the transponder and compares them to preset values stored on the
monitor module main board. If any of the parameters are found to be in error, the fault is
indicated to the CTU, which takes appropriate action.
The test interrogator also contains the monitor fault limit test circuitry which (under
control from the CTU) can measure the range over which parameters measured by the
monitor indicate acceptance or failure.
2-8
HA72500
2.2.3
SECTION 2
Control and Test Subsystem
The Control and Test Subsystem of the LDB-102 DME monitors, controls and tests
various functions within the DME.
The Control and Test Unit (CTU) monitors the operation of the active transponder. If a
fault is indicated in any of the monitored parameters, then the CTU can shut down the
beacon (or cause a transfer to the second transponder in the case of a dual transponder
beacon).
The CTU also contains a comprehensive test facility to allow rapid assessment of
performance. By keypad selection, each of the main DME parameters, including
important signal levels and status conditions can be displayed. The CTU controls the
test interrogator and monitor module(s) in performing the tests.
The CTU also controls and monitors the Remote Control and Monitoring System
(RCMS) interface which interfaces outside equipment to the DME. The RCMS interface
is accessible on the External I/O PWB (1A72557) for ease of connection.
Figure 2-6
Control and Test Subsystem Diagram
2-9
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.2.4
Power Supply Subsystem
2.2.4.1
Single DME Power Distribution
The single DME is supplied with nominal 240 volts 50 Hz mains AC which powers a
battery charger (Power Supply 3A71130) mounted at the bottom of the transponder rack.
This supplies a regulated +27 volts to the rack's battery terminals, to which batteries may
be connected and charged. The battery terminals are also connected to the distribution
panel (through a diode to protect against battery reversal) which distributes the supply
through circuit breakers to the rest of the DME circuitry.
The CTU and the transponder are powered through a 5A circuit breaker. The CTU
power (+24V_AUX) is routed via the external I/O board. The transponder power
(+24V_D) is connected directly to the transponder through the main power wiring loom.
The CTU converts the incoming +24 volts to +5 volts by use of a DC/DC converter,
which is mounted on the CTU module metalwork. The CTU +5 volts is distributed to the
CTU Main PWB Assembly 1A72552, CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly 1A72553, RCMS
Interface PWB Assembly 1A72555.
The transponder draws its power from the +24V_D. The Test Interrogator 1A72514,
Monitor Module 1A72510, and the Receiver Video 1A72520 all have separate linear
voltage regulators converting the +24V_D to +15 volts and +5 volts. The Transmitter
Driver 1A72530, however, is powered from the Transponder Power Supply 1A72525
which consists of a +15 volts and a +18 volts linear regulator and a DC/DC converter to
generate +HT. The +24V_AUX is used for switching and test mode indication.
The 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540 has its own circuit breaker (20A). This power
supply generates 1kW_HT by use of a DC/DC converter. 1kW_HT is fed to the 1kW
Power Amplifier 1A72535.
Figure 2-7
Single 1kW DME Power Distribution
2-10
HA72500
2.2.4.2
SECTION 2
Dual DME Power Distribution
The dual DME is supplied by a Dual AC Power Supply 2A69758 or 3A69758. This
consists of two AC Power Supplies 3A71130 mounted in a rack adjacent to the
transponder rack. The two separate +27 volts DC outputs of these supplies are
connected to the rack's battery terminals, to which batteries may be connected and
charged.
The battery terminals are also connected to the distribution panel (through diodes to
protect against battery reversal) which distributes the supply through circuit breakers to
the rest of the DME transponder circuitry.
The CTU is powered through a 5A circuit breaker as described in Section 2.2.4.1.
Each transponder has its own 5A circuit breaker, so a fault in one transponder does not
affect the other. Each transponder is connected to the distribution panel through the
main power wiring loom as described in Section 2.2.4.1.
Each 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540 has its own 20A circuit breaker so a fault in one
does not affect the other. +24V_AUX is supplied to the 1kW PA power supplies for
switching and indication purposes.
Figure 2-8
Dual 1kW DME Power Distribution
2-11
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3
MODULE DESCRIPTIONS
2.3.1
Introduction
Section 2.3 contains functional and circuit descriptions for the modules and other
assemblies comprising the DME. The material is arranged in hierarchical fashion, with
each description at module level being immediately followed by sub-sections describing
the elements of that module.
"
2.3.2
2A72545
RF Panel Single DME 1A72545 and RF Panel Dual DME
REFER
Circuit Diagram 72545-3-04 (Single DME)

Circuit Diagram 72545-3-05 (Dual DME)
The RF panel is physically mounted behind the CTU at the back of the rack. Unrestricted
access to the panel can be gained by opening the back door of the rack.
The RF panel mounts all the antenna feed and coupling components permitting short
feeder lengths from the output RF amplifier to maintain low RF loss and leakage. All
fixed coaxial wiring is accomplished in semirigid or flexible semirigid cable which also
assists in low RF leakage and low loss.
In the case of a single transponder DME (see drawing 72545-3-04), the RF panel has
mounted upon it a directional coupler (W3), a circulator (W1), and a receiver preselector
filter (Z1). For a dual transponder system an extra preselector filter, circulator, directional
coupler and transfer relay are added to enable independent operation of transponders
with antenna and dummy load changeover facilities (see drawing 72545-3-05). Switch
S1 (on the RF panel board in a dual DME) permits local operation of the changeover
relay (No. 2 to antenna), no operation (No. 1 to antenna) or remote operation under
control of the changeover logic in the CTU (normal).
Reply signals from the transmitter travel via a circulator and directional coupler to the
antenna. The circulator (W1 or W2), prevents the high power from the transmitter from
damaging the input circuitry of the receiver. The circulator also directs received
interrogation signals from the antenna to the receiver.
The directional coupler (W3 in the single system, W4 in the dual system) couples power
from the transmitter into the reply detector section of the test interrogator where the reply
pulses are measured for their critical parameters. In addition, the directional coupler
injects test interrogator interrogation pulses into the transponder receiver.
An extra pair of connections is available on the directional coupler, labelled
FWD PORT A and REV PORT A, which may be used for observing the conditions on the
antenna line.
In the case of a dual system (see drawing 72545-3-05), there is a further pair of
connectors on W4 to enable both test interrogators to test the on-air system. The second
directional coupler W3 and the 50 ohm load enable one transponder to be isolated and
tested off-air while the other transponder is fully operational. The test interrogator
associated with the transponder under test may have its reply detector and signal
generator cables removed from W4 and re-connected to the appropriate positions on
W3, thus allowing independent operation and testing of the two transponders.
2-12
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.2.1
Preselector Filter 1A72546
REFER
Circuit Diagrams 72545-3-04 or 72545-3-05
The preselector filter is located on the RF panel in the receiver signal path between the
antenna circulator and connector to the receiver video. The filter consists of three
quarter-wave cavity sections of high Q and having an insertion loss of typically 1.5 dB at
the receive frequency.
As well as rejecting image and intermediate frequency signals, the filter also rejects any
reflections from the transmitter which may occur due to antenna system mismatches.
Within the pass-band, the filter presents a 50 ohms load to the circulator, and at the
transmit frequency the attenuation is at least 70 dB.
It is tunable over the frequency band 950 to 1220 MHz.
"
2.3.2.2
Directional Coupler 1A69755
REFER
Circuit Diagram 72545-3-04
This four coupled port directional coupler is used for monitoring and test signal injection
into the antenna feeder of a single DME beacon. It is also used in a dual beacon to
interrogate and monitor the off-line transponder for test purposes. It is mounted on the
RF panel.
The 50 ohms stripline design involves the through-line, one forward and reverse
unterminated coupled line and two forward only coupled lines internally resistively
terminated. Each coupler is designed for a 30 dB nominal coupling with at least 15 dB
directivity over the DME frequency band.
Figure 2-9
2-13
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.2.3
REFER
This six coupled port directional coupler is used for monitoring and test signal injection
into the antenna feeder of a dual DME beacon and is mounted on the RF panel with the
1A69755 type.
The 50 ohms stripline design is essentially the same as the four-port 1A69755, with two
more forward coupled ports added.
In the dual DME system there are two test interrogator test signals to be injected into the
antenna feeder and two replies to be monitored, hence the extra coupler ports.
Figure 2-10
2.3.2.4
50 Ohm Termination 1A69757
This is a component of the RF Panel Dual DME 2A72545 and is fitted to provide a
termination for the RF output of the second transponder when the second transponder is
in maintenance.
Physically, it is a 50 ohms 150 watts (average) resistor fixed to a base plate and which
terminates a short length of semirigid cable; the loose end of the cable has a SMA
connector fitted. A protection cover is fitted over the unit and the base plate is bolted to
the RF panel, which acts as a heat dissipator.
"
2.3.2.5
RF Panel PWB Assembly Single DME 1A72547
REFER
The RF Panel PWB Assembly Single DME 1A72547 is used in the RF Panel Single
DME 1A72545 to allow connection of the antenna integrity input to the DME. This input
is protected from lightning primarily by the gas discharge tube V3, with secondary
protection provided by R1 and V2. R2 provides the reference resistance for the antenna
integrity circuit on the monitor module.
2-14
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.2.6
RF Panel PWB Assembly Dual DME 2A72547
REFER
The RF Panel PWB Assembly Dual DME 2A72547 is used in the RF Panel Dual DME
2A72545 to allow connection of the antenna integrity device to the DME. This input is
protected from lightning primarily by the gas discharge tube V3, with secondary
protection provided by R1 and V2. R2 provides the reference resistance for the antenna
integrity circuit on the monitor module.
It is also used in control of the antenna relay K1 (see circuit diagram 72545-3-05) by
setting the position of S1. This switch can be set to one of three positions:
a.
If switch S1 is in the up (TPNDR 2) position, relay K1 on the RF Panel

2A72545 is energised and the output of Transponder 2 RF power amplifier is
connected to the antenna. The output of Transponder 1 RF power amplifier is
connected to the 50 Ohm Load 1A69757.
b.
If switch S1 is in the centre (TPNDR 1) position, relay K1 is not energised and

the output of Transponder 1 RF power amplifier is connected to the antenna.
The output of Transponder 2 RF power amplifier is connected to the 50 Ohm
Load 1A69757.
c.
If S1 is in the down position (NORMAL) the setting of the relay K1 is

determined by the input Antenna_Relay_Control from the CTU. If this input is
high (+ 24 volts) then Transponder 1 is connected to the antenna with
Transponder 2 terminated, and if this input is low (0 volts) then Transponder 2
is connected to the antenna as in with Transponder 1 terminated.
Table 2-1
Summary of Controls and Indicators: RF Panel (Dual)

CONTROL/INDICATION FUNCTION DETAILS
TYPE
Toggle
switch,
centre off
LEGEND
FUNCTION/SETTING/INDICATION
TPNDR2
The output of Transponder 2 is fed directly to the antenna.

The output of Transponder 1 is terminated in the 50 ohms load.
TPNDR1
The output of Transponder 1 is fed directly to the antenna.

The output of Transponder 2 is terminated in the 50 ohms load.
NORMAL
The CTU controls which transponder output is fed to the antenna.
2-15
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.3
Receiver Video 1A72520
REFER
The Receiver Video module provides the main receiver functions and contains the Main
PWB Assembly Receiver Video 1A72521, RF Source 1A72522, RF Filter 1A72517, IF
Amplifier 1A72523 and RF Amplifier 1A72524.
The received signal is passed from the antenna into the RF panel and preselector filter
on to the receiver. A circulator in the RF panel is used to isolate the receiver from the
transmitter while allowing the use of a common antenna. The cavity-tuned preselector
rejects the image signal and provides initial selectivity for the receiver.
The receiver video module amplifies and detect on-channel interrogations and provides
trigger pulse-pairs for the transmitter modulator for International Morse Code
identification, interrogation replies and squitter. A continuous wave (CW) RF output at
the local oscillator frequency is provided as excitation for the transmitter.
The RF source generates the RF signal required for both the receiver local oscillator and
the transmitter. A single-crystal oscillator operating at a frequency of one-twelfth of the
DME transmit channel frequency generates a signal which is buffered and then
frequency multiplied in three stages to produce the required signal frequency.
The RF amplifier is designed as a broadband micro-stripline amplifier system. It
amplifies the low level signal received from the antenna and, in a separate stage,
amplifies and splits the local oscillator signal into two signals each at an approximate
level of +11 dBm. One of these signals is used as the local oscillator injection frequency
for the receiver mixer, while the other is fed to the transmitter driver as the excitation
signal. The mixer stage utilises a double balanced diode mixer circuit and produces an
intermediate frequency signal at 63 MHz.
The IF amplifier board provides the main 63 MHz IF amplifier which consists of a dualgate FET amplifier stage followed by a successive detection logarithmic output amplifier
chain. Gain control is provided by developing a DC bias to control the FET amplifier
stage. This controlling DC bias is manually and automatically set to reduce CW
response and to reduce the transponder sensitivity during over-interrogation.
The demodulated video output of the logarithmic amplifier stages is broadband and does
not discriminate against adjacent channels.
A second mixer circuit converts the amplified 63 MHz RF signal to 9.25 MHz where it is
amplified and passed through narrowband tuned circuits which provide rejection to all
adjacent channel signals. This narrowband signal is AM-demodulated and is used both
as an on-channel gating pulse and to develop the AGC voltages to control the dual-gate
FET amplifier stage.
Both the logarithmic output pulse and the on-channel pulse are fed into the receiver
video main PWB assembly for decoding and processing.
In the main PWB assembly the signals from the IF amplifier detectors are detected and
processed. Pulses arriving at the logarithmic pulse input without corresponding onchannel pulses are ignored as spurious or adjacent channel noise. The remaining onchannel logarithmic pulses are passed on to a half-amplitude finder circuit for accurate
time referencing. The pulses are then decoded for correct pulse spacing.
On receiving and detecting a valid pulse-pair the transponder then enters a
programmable wait period before generating an appropriate pulse-pair for transmission
as reply pulses. Transponder delay time is referenced to the 50% amplitude point on the
leading edge of the first interrogation pulse.
2-16
HA72500
SECTION 2
As a result of reflection, genuine interrogation pulses which appear to be valid may be

received, having been delayed due to a longer transmission path. These signals could
trigger a misleading reply; to prevent this happening a dead time is introduced, following
a successful interrogation, to block out any such signals.
All pulses for transmission are generated in the receiver video. All critical pulse durations
and time delays are produced by programmable counters and shift registers for which
the clocking frequency is derived from a crystal oscillator. Site-dependent programming
is set by switches.
The ident message is stored on four 8-way DIL switches on the main board. Depending
on the appropriate external connections the ident may act as either master or slave.
When operating as a slave to an associated VHF navaid, the external ident has priority.
If the external ident should fail the internal ident generator automatically takes over.
Squitter is generated in a pseudo-random time sequence at an average frequency of
945 Hz and is transmitted as standard pulse-pairs with random time spacing.
For all transmissions, replies to interrogation have priority over squitter and the ident
message has priority over reply pulses, however reply pulses may occur in the 'space'
period of the ident message.
Short distance echo suppression is selected by an ON/OFF switch mounted on the
board. Its function is to allow decoding of an interrogation when the inter-pulse space is
filled with signals which are reflections of the first pulse. It operates by removing video
signals from the input of the amplitude finder just prior to the arrival of the second
interrogation pulse thereby effectively clearing a space for the second pulse.
Long distance echo suppression is also selected by an ON/OFF switch mounted on the
board. Its function is to inhibit decoding of an interrogation pulse-pair which is produced
by a distant reflector such that it arrives after the dead time has expired. It operates by
increasing the dead time to an adjustable value for those interrogations which exceed a
preset signal level. This provides a better compromise in traffic handling capability than
would be achieved by simply increasing the dead time for all interrogation signal levels.
"
2.3.3.1
Main PWB Assembly Receiver Video 1A72521
REFER
2.3.3.1.1
Pulse Processing
Delayed interrogation pulses from the log video input at XN2:5 and the on-channel video
pulses at XN2:2 arrive at D50 in a phase relationship that permits the on channel pulses
to change the address of the analogue multiplexer in time to allow the log video pulse to
pass through to the follower-amplifier N7b. In the process, the arriving log video pulse is
added on to a DC pedestal voltage of approximately 0.5 volts; N7a clamps the baseline
of the log input signal to +1.5 volts (at the junction of R49 and R36) which is 0.5 volts
above the reference input to D50.
If the log video input pulse is a result of noise or adjacent channel signals, there will be
no accompanying on-channel pulse and D50 will ignore the log video input. This method
recognises valid input pulses and maintains the logarithmic shape of these pulses as
they are passed to the half-height and timing detectors.
2-17
HA72500
2.3.3.1.2
SECTION 2
Half-height and Timing Detection
An adjustable (R45, 6 dB OFFSET) constant current source V15 feeds into the output of
N7b. This current flowing through R44 produces an input to N6:5 which is DC offset with
respect to the waveform applied to N5:4 input. Amplifier N6:7 and delay line D38 provide
a unity-gain time-delayed signal to the other input of N5:5. Thus the signal at XT6 has
been offset by a DC voltage equivalent to 6 dB pulse amplitude, as well as being
delayed by a period equal to half the duration of the standard input pulse.
Due to the offset in amplitude and the delay applied to the pulse at XT6 the half-height
point of the delayed pulse corresponds to the maximum point of the original pulse at
XT13. This will always occur for all logarithmic-shaped pulses of standard duration
regardless of amplitude and thus the comparator output N5:12 will always identify the
half-height point by going low at this time.
As N5:12 goes low, the D-type flip-flop D26:3 is clocked with the D input pin 5 high due
to the on-channel pulse still being present. D26:1 generates a pulse of 2.5 microseconds
duration which is determined by the 14-stage shift register D25, clocked at 5.5296 MHz.
The pulse at D26:1 is loaded into the shift registers D21, D22, D23, D24. This window,
2.5 microseconds wide, passes down the shift registers to coincide with the next valid
input pulse. The shift registers are varied in length depending upon X or Y channel
selection. In the case of X channel operation it will take approximately
13.2 microseconds for a pulse to arrive at D20:5, whereas in the case of Y channel
operation the shift registers are configured to delay the pulse by approximately
37.2 microseconds before operating D20:5. The SELECT DECODER MODE switch S5
is used to select X or Y channel operation and is set on installation for the type of
operation required.
Figure 2-11
Waveforms for Interrogation Pulse Processing
2-18
HA72500
SECTION 2
At the time when a valid first pulse of a pulse-pair is emerging from the shift register, the
second pulse will have operated D26:1 and enabled D20:3 via the gate D41:4 thus
triggering the monostable at D20:5 by the leading edge of the delayed first pulse. The
positive-going pulse generated at XA3 indicates that a valid interrogation pulse-pair has
been decoded. Because D20:5 is enabled for 2.5 microseconds, coincidence can occur
at 12.0 1.2 microseconds for X channels, and at 36.0 1.2 microseconds for
Y channels.
2.3.3.1.3
Dead Time
After a valid pulse-pair has been received (as indicated by the pulse generated at XA3)
the counter D40 is loaded with the binary number set in to the SET DEAD TIME switch
S7. D40 will count to zero at the clock rate of 86.4 kHz determined by D49 and the
5.5296 MHz clock. During the down-count of D40, pulse-pair decoder pulses are
inhibited by the output of D41:3, thus creating the beacon dead time. Switch S7 sets the
dead time in multiples of the 86.4 kHz clock period; that is, 11.57 microseconds. Due to
the random timing of the interrogation pulses in relation to the 86.4 kHz clock, the dead
time will vary between approximately (2.5 + (n-1) x 11.57) microseconds and
(2.5 + n x 11.57) microseconds where 'n' is the number set on switch S7.
2.3.3.1.4
Short Distance Echo Suppression
The purpose of the SDES is to allow the decoding of an interrogation when the space
between the pulses is filled with signals which are echoes of the first pulse. This may be
used at sites which have large nearby reflectors which cause strong echo signals with
amplitude comparable to that of the direct signal. The echo suppression operates by
removing signals from the half-amplitude detector just prior to the arrival of the second
pulse. This allows the decoder to recognise the presence of the second pulse and
thereby initiate a reply to the interrogation.
When SDES is selected, by switch S8, the delayed first pulse produced at D22:10
(2.5 microseconds duration) is used to disable D50. Following the trailing edge of the
SDES pulse, D50 is again enabled to allow decoding of the second pulse. For
X channels the SDES pulse trailing edge occurs approximately 10 microseconds down
the shift register. After a further delay of approximately 1.8 microseconds in the
half-amplitude finder, a pulse is generated with the correct separation to form a
decodable pair. For Y channels, the pulse trailing edge occurs approximately
34 microseconds down the shift register.
The fast-attack slow-release time constant provided by V20, R55 and C79 disables the
2.5 microsecond pulse at D26:1 for approximately 1.5 microseconds after each pulse
terminates. This prevents the generation of SDES pulses with zero gap between them,
which situation could cause inhibiting decoding if the trailing edge of one SDES pulse
was about to generate the artificial second pulse only to be inhibited by a following
SDES pulse.
2.3.3.1.5
Long Distance Echo Suppression
In a similar fashion to SDES, the long distance echo suppression (LDES) function will
eliminate echo pulses with long delays. LDES is only initiated after receiving a valid
pulse-pair and with the LDES switch S9 set ON, Counter D39 will be set by the pulse
from D20:6 and will count the LDES PERIOD set on switch S6. D39 derives its clock,
43.2 kHz, from the divider D49 and the 5.5296 MHz crystal oscillator. The function of
LDES is to inhibit decoding of an interrogation pulse-pair which is produced by a distant
reflector such that it arrives after the dead time has expired. It operates by increasing the
dead time by (if set to be longer than the normal dead time) an adjustable period
(determined by switch S6) for those interrogations which exceed a preset level set by
R46, LDES LEVEL and compared in N5:10. This provides a better compromise in traffic
2-19
HA72500
SECTION 2
handling capability than would be achieved by simply increasing the dead time for all
interrogation signal levels.
Switch S6 sets the LDES period in multiples of the 43.2 kHz clock; that is,
23.15 microseconds. Due to the random timing of the interrogation pulses in relation to
the 43.2 kHz clock, the LDES period will vary between approximately
(2.5 + (n-1) x 23.15) microseconds and (2.5 + n x 23.15) microseconds where 'n' is the
number set on switch S6.
2.3.3.1.6
Beacon Delay
On recognition of a valid pulse-pair, monostable INPUT D2:a is enabled by DOUBLE

PULSE DECODER OUT pulse (observable on XA3) and D2:6 changes state at the next
falling edge of the 5.5296 MHz clock pulse, synchronising this pulse with the
5.5296 MHz clock. The SET BEACON DELAY COARSE switch S1 and the SET
BEACON DELAY FINE switch S2 set the beacon delay time by adjusting the length of
the shift register D13, D42 and D31. Both of these switches are mounted on the front
panel of the receiver video module, and are operator accessible. Monostable output
D2:10 assists to re-adjust the phase of the shift register output pulses to be coincident
with the clock. The output pulse from the beacon delay timer chain comes from D31:10
and appears at the multiplexer D12 which is configured as a priority selection gate.
2.3.3.1.7
Reply Pulse-pair Generation
The dual 4-channel analogue multiplexer D12 has two outputs (pins 13 and 3) each of
which can be switched to be connected to one of four inputs, depending on the selection
logic. As pin 6 is tied permanently low, the address (selection) conditions at pins 10 and
9 determine which inputs are connected to the outputs.
These two address selection lines are controlled by D11:12 (Address 0, pin 10) which is
the select interrogation counter, and by D47:3 (Address 1, pin 9) which is the ident input
control. These two inputs then determine which of the three output conditions will occur
- interrogation reply, squitter, or ident.
Address 01 selects squitter pulses, 00 selects interrogation pulses, and 11 selects ident
pulses. When a double pulse decode occurs, D11 is asynchronously loaded to a count
of 12. D11 counts down to 0 at a clock rate of approximately 173 kHz, and clamps at a
count of 0 by feedback from pin 12 to pin 4. The interrogation select pulse applied to
D12:10 is approximately 70 microseconds in duration and drives D12 to accept the
output pulse, D31:10, from the beacon delay timer.
Reply pulses have a lower priority than ident pulses, but a higher priority than squitter.
Thus, provided that there is no ident mark transmission in progress and D11 is counting,
the multiplexer D12 will have address 00 selected, which will allow the delay timer pulse
from D31:10 to enable D3:13 and the delay shift registers D32, D33 and D34. These
shift registers generate the reply pulse separation time. The pulse generated by D3:10 is
used as the first pulse of the pulse-pair and passes via V1 and D4:12 as the trigger
pulse to the transmitter driver. The same pulse from D3:10 is delayed by the shift
registers D32, D33 and D34 to create the second pulse in D35:10 at the falling edge of
the clock. The time delay created by the shift registers may be varied by the switches S3
and S4. The REPLY PULSE SEPARATION switch S3 allows the delay to be altered in
steps of approximately 180 nanoseconds, whereas the SELECT ENCODER MODE
switch S4 provides for the selection of a 12-microsecond delay for X channel operation
or a 30-microsecond delay for Y channel operation.
2-20
HA72500
2.3.3.1.8
SECTION 2
Identification Message (Ident)
The ident message is a 2-character or 3-character Morse code signal with a 1350 Hz
tone and having a 'dot' period of 0.125 seconds. The tone frequency is derived from the
5.5296 MHz clock, thus assuring accuracy of the tone frequency. The ident message is
set by four 8-bit SPST switches (S13, S14, S15, S16).
The counter D49 divides the 5.5296 MHz clock to produce the 1350 Hz clocking
frequency which is used as the Morse code tone as well as a clock for the ident timing
circuits.
The ident keyer circuit generates a repeated Morse code identification signal of up to
three characters. The characters are built up by setting switches to place the 'dot' and
'dash' elements in the required sequence.
The speed at which the identification signal is transmitted is set by the frequency of the
oscillator circuit associated with D44:5. The frequency can be varied by altering the
CODE SPEED preset R37.
The repetition rate of the ident signal is determined by the frequency of the oscillator
circuit associated with D44:9. The rate can be varied by altering the REPTN RATE
preset, R39.
The required sequence of dots and dashes is provided by circuitry associated with D36,
D45 and D37. The arrangement of common binary lines to the demultiplexers D45 and
D37 in conjunction with the steering circuitry implemented with D51 and D53 enables
one of the demultiplexers D45 and D37 in turn, while inhibiting the other demultiplexer.
The 4-bit binary counter D36 generates the binary code corresponding to decimal 0
through 15. Thus a high (15 volts) is stepped along first from D45:4 through to D45:13,
and then through D37 and, depending on the settings of switches S13 to S16, the high is
applied to either the 'dots' bus or the 'dashes' bus.
The detailed operation of the keyer can be seen with reference to Figure 2-12 which
shows the signals present at various circuit points for the generation of the letters UN
(dot-dot-dash dash-dot). The sequence is started by the asynchronous start pulse which
is produced at D29:12 by dividing the frequency of the repetition oscillator D44:9 by 15.
The start pulse initialises the sequence by setting D51:1 high and by loading counter
D36 with a count of 15. This enables the first output D45:4 which may be switched by
S15/S16 to the dot or dash line to give the first desired code element. With a dot
selected, a high level will be produced at the code output for one full clock cycles when
D51:2 goes high.
When D51:2 is clocked low on the next clock pulse the generation of a 'dot-length' space
is automatically inserted after the first element.
The next clock pulse from D44:5 clocks D36 to its next state for the generation of the
next code element, and the sequence is repeated.
With a dash selected by closure of S16 to the dash position, the dash bus will be high,
which will preload the dash timer D43 with a decimal 3 causing the output to remain high
for three dot periods.
2-21
HA72500
Figure 2-12
SECTION 2
Ident Keyer Waveforms
2-22
HA72500
SECTION 2
The space between letters (see line labelled STATE in Figure 2-12) is formed by leaving
both the dot and dash switches in the 'off' position. This allows a space equivalent to
three dot elements to be generated between letters of the code word.
The line labelled COUNTER D36 STATE in Figure 2-12 traces the counter zero 15,14,
etc, states and the progression of the high along the demultiplexer output.
At the end of the character generation sequence D37:13 is activated and an inhibit
signal is applied to D43:4, stopping the operation of the keyer until the next start pulse is
received.
Where a VOR and a DME beacon are collocated they may be operated in either
'independent' mode or 'associated' mode. D30 is a divide-by-4 counter controlling the
switching of D19 such that three consecutive ident code sequences from D52:3 are
switched to MASTER IDENT OUT and the fourth ident code sequence is switched to
D48:9 for INTERNAL IDENT.
2.3.3.1.9
Squitter
Squitter is generated as a pseudo-random set of pulses at an average rate of 945 Hz

and is transmitted at the lowest priority, being preceded by the ident message and reply
pulses. As the interrogation pulse rates increase to 945 Hz, the squitter becomes totally
inhibited.
Squitter is generated by the action of D15 and D16 operating at different clock rates
(from D49:12 and D49:1 respectively) and the arranged 'disorder` of the parallel load
lines into D15. D16 is a 5-stage Johnson counter clocked at 1.35 kHz. The10 outputs go
high, in turn, for one clock period. D15, an 8-bit, parallel-in, serial-out shift register, is
clocked at 10.8 kHz and is loaded at a rate of 1350 Hz with the end bit always being
zero, and with the other inputs loaded no bit (3/10 of the time) with 1 bit (7/10 of the
time), in the disordered pattern, from D16. This produces the required pseudo-random
pulse rate.
2.3.3.1.10
Minimum Reply Rate
D14:11 is enabled by the absence of decoded interrogation pulses in D20:7 and D2:7
and on receipt of a random pulse (squitter) causes D5 to output a pulse via D17:10 to
D12.
In the absence of both a select interrogation pulse and an ident mark, D12 will
automatically select the squitter input and enable the reply pulse generator logic to
transmit the squitter pulse.
As reply pulses are detected on D2:3, D5 will increment its count with each pulse,
requiring one squitter pulse to occur to decrement the count to zero before transmitting
the next squitter pulse. In this way each reply pulse will replace a squitter pulse and, at a
reply rate of 945 Hz, no squitter will be transmitted. In the case where a reply pulse
occurs simultaneously with a squitter pulse, D14:9 will be inhibited and the reply pulse
will be transmitted; one squitter pulse will be lost to the counter D5.
2.3.3.1.11
Over Interrogation
Accepted interrogation pulses trigger D2:6, and its inverted output D2:7 is used as a
clock for D6 which is configured as a self-reloading divide-by-three counter. D18 is also
self-loaded, each time a terminal count is reached, inhibiting a 'roll-over' of the count.
D18 counts up with each squitter pulse and down with each third reply pulse; thus if the
reply rate exceeds three times the squitter rate, reply pulses are inhibited by D3:6 and
the beacon delay registers are reset. Both D6 and D18 remain jammed at a count of 0,
inhibiting reply pulses until a squitter pulse from D14:9 increments D18 to a count of 1.
2-23
HA72500
SECTION 2
Three more reply pulses are then transmitted. In this situation the squitter pulses are
used as a reference pulse rate only, and the maximum reply rate is held at a nominal
3 times 945 Hz, or 2835 per second.
When this over-interrogation condition exists the output pulses from D18:7 provide two
output signals; one, via buffer D4:9 and XN1:9a, to the test interrogator to switch to high
signal level interrogation for monitoring, and another via XN2:7 to the IF amplifier to
desensitise the receiver, thus discriminating against weaker interrogations from distant
aircraft. Once the receiver gain reduction has achieved control of the interrogation rate
the video inhibiting via D3a, as described above, ceases. If XT22 and XT21 are bridged
the receiver gain reduction is prevented and maximum response rate control is provided
by the video inhibit method. This latter method treats all aircraft equally, giving each the
maximum possible response rate for the interrogating conditions.
2.3.3.1.12
Output Inhibit
The TX MODULATOR TRIGS output at XN1:8c is suppressed at power switch-on,

during transfer relay operate time, and (if the non-active transponder) during warm
standby.
Suppression is provided by a 5 volts logic level applied to XN1:29b which tristates the
output, inhibiting the trigger pulses to the modulator and stopping transmitter output
pulses.
The primary fault signals REPLY_DEL_FLT_1/2 and PULSE_SPAC_FLT_1/2, when
low, indicate that there is a fault in the primary parameters. If both REPLY_DEL_FLT_1
and REPLY_DEL_FLT_2 or both PULSE_SPAC_FLT_1 and PULSE_SPAC_FLT_2 are
low, then the counter D8 begins counting the clock pulses produced by the RC oscillator
of D8:9, 10, 11. When output 9, D8:15, goes high (after about 70 seconds) the oscillator
of D8 is disabled, causing D8 counter to hold its count. The high input on D4:15 inhibits
TX_MODULATION_TRIGS. The action of the inhibit will be disabled when the input
signal INHIBIT_DISABLE is low.
This inhibited state will hold until power is removed from the module. XN1:9c is a disable
for this circuit and is connected to the TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch in the power
supply module. When this switch is in the ON position, which is the usual position during
maintenance, the inhibit circuit is disabled.
2.3.3.1.13
Replies Inhibited Indicator
This front panel LED indicator lights to indicate whenever replies are inhibited. For no
replies the LED is on continuously. As an indicator of over-interrogation it flashes at a
rate of eight flashes per second, driven by the square wave connected via V5
modulating the output from the ident speed generator D18:7.
2.3.3.1.14
Miscellaneous
The RF level and the local oscillator level are buffered and scaled by N10 before being
fed to the monitor for measurement. Each of the RF levels is also available for
monitoring on the front panel.
The +15V rail is monitored by a window comparator consisting of N2 and, N4. RV_PS is
high when +15 V is between 13.0 and 16.5 volts, and low when +15V is outside these
limits.
2-24
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.3.2
RF Source 1A72522
REFER
This unit is designed to produce the signal required for excitation of the transmitter
stages and the first mixer stage of the receiver. It provides an output of approximately
+4 dBm to the receiver RF amplifier board where further amplification and signal splitting
occurs, as described in Section 2.3.3.4.
The signal generation is accomplished by the use of a crystal oscillator operating in the
frequency range of 80 to 101.5 MHz, one-twelfth of the required signal frequency. The
crystal oscillator output is buffered and then multiplied in three stages to produce the
operating signal frequency.
The oscillator stage V1 incorporates a fifth-overtone crystal G1 in series resonance in
the feedback path.
Feedback from V1 emitter is passed through the series resonant crystal to create selfexcitation to the transistor via a damped base tank circuit comprising of L1, C2 and C11.
The tuned circuit L1, C2 and C11, as well as correcting phase shifts around the
feedback loop, also ensures that the fifth-overtone crystal operates without any tendency
to change mode.
An inductor, L6, is connected across the crystal and is selected to resonate with the
crystal holder and crystal stray capacitances to form a parallel tuned circuit at the
operating frequency. This prevents the stray capacitance acting as a separate feedback
path which could cause parasitic oscillation and instability.
Base bias for the oscillator stage V1 is derived by the resistor chain R2, R23 and R3 and
L1. The transistor is operated at a low level of drive to enhance overall stability.
The output from the oscillator is taken from the collector of V1 via C6 to the emitter of the
grounded-base buffer-amplifier stage V2 which isolates the loading effects of the
following multiplier stage from affecting the operation of the crystal oscillator. Capacitor
C8 is adjusted for maximum drive into V3.
The first stage of multiplication is a self-biased multiply-by-three circuit using a heavily
driven transistor V3 with its collector tuned by C12 to three times the oscillator
frequency. Self biasing reduces the conduction angle and raises the efficiency of this
stage.
Transistor V4 operates as a multiply-by-two circuit with its collector circuit tuned to twice
its input frequency or six times the oscillator frequency. This stage uses a small forward
bias voltage on the base circuit which is reduced automatically as drive is increased due
to the increased voltage drops occurring across R15 and R16 as drive increases.
Capacitor C18 tunes the collector circuit of V4.
The final multiplier stage operates in a similar fashion to the previous stage; however,
the final stage uses a microwave transistor (V5) as a multiply-by-two and produces the
required operating frequency in its collector circuit. Tuning of this stage is accomplished
by capacitor C26.
2-25
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.3.3
IF Amplifier 1A72523
REFER
The 63 MHz intermediate frequency signal originates in the RF amplifier mixer stage and
is connected to the input of the IF amplifier at XC1 via a 50 ohms coaxial cable. The lownoise dual-gate FET stage of the IF amplifier V2 operates as an AGC-controlled
amplifier with the two tuned circuits of L7 and L5 providing the necessary bandwidth for
rejecting large out-of-band signals, increasing the signal-to-noise ratio, and providing
inter-stage impedance matching.
Manual gain control is applied to the input stage via a preset gain control R29, which is
adjusted to give a threshold sensitivity of -94 dBm. In addition, delayed AGC is applied
via N9 in such a manner as to reduce the transponder gain when the interrogation rate
exceeds the preset limit of 2800 per second or in the presence of in-band high-levelcarrier received signal. The AGC threshold for CW signals is set by the SET AGC control
R15. The range of automatic gain control is in excess of 50 dB and the receiver
functions normally over this range of gain reduction provided the pulse signal level is
sufficiently above the CW level.
Following the input amplifier stage the signal is amplified and successively detected in a
cascaded set of logarithmic (log) intermediate frequency amplifiers. The eight amplifiers
are divided into two groups of three, coupled via a single parallel resonant circuit which
serves to increase the overall signal-to-noise ratio by restricting the bandwidth and a
group of two (N1, N2) in parallel. To match the amplifier chain to the dynamic range of
the input signal (-90 dBm to -10 dBm), N1 has its input attenuated so that it provides its
required contribution to the log detection law at high signal levels without increasing the
overall gain at low signal levels. Amplifier N1 provides amplifier N3 with the required bias
potential from its pin 7 connection; N6 supplies the bias potential for the second group of
amplifiers; each amplifier is DC coupled. The detected log output from the amplifiers is
then amplified in the transistor stage V5 and then delayed 1.6 microseconds in the delay
line D1 before reaching the video output of the IF amplifier. The value of the delay
compensates for the additional delay to the on-channel pulses in passing through the
narrowband filter L3 and L6.
The 63 MHz output from the log amplifier chain at N8:3 is mixed in the dual-gate FET
mixer circuit of V1 with a 53.75 MHz signal generated by the third-overtone crystal
oscillator circuit of V4.
The output of the mixer circuit is a 9.25 MHz signal which is filtered by a narrowband
filter comprising L3 and L6. L6 includes an inbuilt amplitude detector, and the video
output pulses are applied to the input of a voltage comparator N10a. The reference input
to this stage is a voltage set by the ON CHANNEL THRESHOLD preset R50. R50 is set
to slice the signal just above the noise level, and 15 volts logic pulses are produced at
the ON CHANNEL OUT terminal.
As the 63 MHz intermediate frequency amplifier has a bandwidth of several MHz,
adjacent channel signals could be mistaken as valid interrogation pulses; however, the
narrowband 9.25 MHz circuit will only pass signals that are on-channel and although the
demodulated video pulses do not carry easily definable timing information, these pulses
are used to identity the valid log interrogation pulses by coincidence.
Linear regulator N11 derives +6 volts DC for log amplifier operation from the 15 volts
supply.
2-26
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.3.4
RF Amplifier 1A72524
REFER
The RF amplifier is a broadband micro-stripline amplifier system which:
amplifies the signal received by the DME antenna via the Preselector Filter
1A72546;
amplifies and splits the signals from the RF Source 1A72522 into two +11 dBm
signals; and
mixes the amplified received signal with an amplified signal from the RF source
to produce a 63 MHz intermediate frequency signal.
The RF signal stage uses V1 in a common-emitter amplifier in a micro-stripline matching

network. The AC-coupled input from the preselector filter, at XC1, feeds a teeimpedance transformer comprising a series micro-strip inductance and chip capacitor C2
to ground to achieve matching of the base input impedance.
Base bias current is supplied via a quarter-wave micro-strip inductance from the
collector voltage source and is zener referenced to maintain a constant collector current.
The collector also draws its current via a length-tuned inductor and the collector
impedance is matched to the load impedance presented by the mixer by a series length
of micro-stripline. Capacitor C5 AC-couples the double-balanced mixer load to V1.
The signal from the RF source, which is input via connector XC3, is used as a local
oscillator injection signal for the mixer as well as the low power signal for exciting the
transmitter stages. The RF source input from XC3 is fed through a 50 ohms microstrip
track. A level detector provides a signal for monitoring purposes. A tee-impedance
transformer matches the base input impedance of V4. Bias is applied to V4 in the same
manner as for V1, via a quarter-wave choke.
The collector circuit incorporates a parallel micro-strip inductor pre-tuned by the bypass
chip capacitor C11 and the impedances are transformed by a series capacitor into the
50 ohms wireline hybrid 3 dB coupler, W1. W1 splits the RF power between the outputs
XC4 (RF output to the transmitter) and the micro-stripline feed to the mixer U1. Both
output levels are approximately +11 dBm, and are sensed by the level detector circuit V8
to provide a signal for monitoring purposes.
The double-balanced mixer U1 is supplied as a module and is not field repairable. The
input RF signal from V1 and the RF signal from the RF source are mixed in U1 to
produce the 63 MHz IF signal which is fed out via XC2 into the IF amplifier at a nominal
50 ohms impedance.
"
2.3.3.5
RF Filter 1A72517
REFER
The RF filter is a lumped element filter used to reduce spurious frequency outputs from
the RF source, before the signal is used as local oscillator for the receiver and source for
the transmitter; it is tunable from 950 to 1220 MHz.
The filter is a two-stage, high Q, parallel tuned circuit with, 50 ohms auto transformer
input and output matching and inductive inter-stage coupling. The inductors are formed
as short tinned copper wire elements and the tuning capacitor is a glass dielectric
concentric type.
2-27
HA72500
Table 2-2
SECTION 2
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Receiver Video

Module
LEGEND
TYPE
Yellow LED
REPLIES INHIBITED Flashes on and off when the receiver video is being overinterrogated.
On continuously when replies are inhibited.
Red LED
TEST
Indicates that the IDENT switch is not in the NORMAL position.
Green LED
DC POWER ON
Indicates that DC power is applied to the module.
16-position
switches
BEACON DELAY
COARSE
Sets the Delay parameter of the receiver video.
FINE
16-position
REPLY PULSE
switch
SEPARATION
Toggle switch, IDENT
centre off
Sets the Spacing parameter of the receiver video.

NORMAL
Normal mode of operation.
OFF
No ident is generated.
CONTINUOUS Ident is generated continuously.

All interrogations are inhibited.
Toggle switch, INHIBIT
spring loaded to INTERROGATIONS
centre off
TEST REPLY RATE Transponder replies are inhibited and squitter reduced to 810 Hz.
MONITOR
Test jack
SDES PULSE
Buffered output from the double pulse decoder, which gives the short
distance echo suppression pulse to the on-channel gating logic
(15 volts, 2.5 microseconds wide. one pulse per correctly decoded
pulse pair).
Test jack
LDES PULSE
Buffered output from the dead time suppressor showing the period of
long distance echo suppression and when it is active
(15 volts, selectable length, selectable trigger level).
Test jack
DOUBLE PULSE
Buffered output of the double pulse decoder indicating a pulse pair
DECODER OUT
has been correctly decoded (15 volts, 2.5 microseconds wide, one
pulse per each valid interrogation).
Test jack
DEAD TIME
Buffered output from the dead time generator, shows the period of
dead time and when it is active (15 volts. selectable length).
Test jack
TRIGS TO
Buffered output from the double pulse encoder buffer to the
MODULATOR
transmitter driver This output is normally high, and goes low during
TX MODULATION TRIGGERS (0-15 volts, 2.5 microseconds wide
pulses in pulse pairs separated by 12 or 36 microseconds; minimum
rate 945 PPPS, maximum rate 3000 PPPS).
Test jack
LOCAL OSC LEVEL DC output proportional to the drive level out of the RF source.
Test jack
+15V
Buffered output from the +15V regulator.
Test jack
EARTH
Common earth of all supply voltages and outputs.
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
RFLEVEL
DC output proportional to the output TX RF DRIVE.
Test jack
ON CHANNEL
VIDEO
Test jack
EARTH
Buffered output of the narrow band detected on-channel gate from

the IF amplifier (15 volts pulses forming an envelope around the
detected log video pulses, normally 3 microseconds wide).
Test jack
DETECTED LOG
VIDEO
Buffered output from the wideband logarithmic amplifiers of the IF

amplifier.
2-28
HA72500
Table 2-3
SUBASSY
1A72521
Main PWB
Assembly,
Receiver
Video
SECTION 2
Summary of Internal Controls : Receiver Video Module

TYPE
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
REF
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
R37
CODE SPEED
R39
CODE REPTN
R45
ADJUST 6 dB
OFFSET
Preset
resistor
Slide switch
R46
LONG DISTANCE
ECHO SUPP LEVEL
SELECT ENCODER
MODE
Slide switch
S5
S4
16-way rotary S6
switch
16-way rotary S7
switch
Slide switch
S8
MODE SELECT
DECODER
SET LDES PERIOD
SET DEAD TIME
SDES
Varies the ident code speed, which is set to

8 Hz.
Varies the ident repetition rate, which is set to
1.5 Hz.
Set to 0.24 volts during factory test, but may
need to be varied at module test level (see
Sections 3.3.8, 3.4.17).
Varies the LDES DC level.
X
Selects X mode operation for the encoder.
Selects Y mode operation for the encoder.
Selects X mode operation for the decoder.
Selects Y mode operation for the decoder.
Sets the LDES period in multiples of

12.15 microseconds.
Sets the dead time period in multiples of
11.57 microseconds
ON
Enables SDES operation.
OFF
Slide switch
8-way switch
1A72522
RF Source
Variable
capacitors
Variable
inductor
1A72523
Variable
IF Amplifier capacitor
Preset
resistors
S9
LDES
S13 CODE ELEMENT

to
S16
C8, 12. 18. 26
Disables SDES operation.
ON
Enables LDES operation.
OFF
Disables LOES operation.
Set the ident Morse code characters.

Used to align the RF source to the operating
reply frequency (see Section 3.4.18)
L1
C1
Used to align the IF amplifier

(see Section 3.4.19).
R15, 29, 50
2-29
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.4
Transmitter Driver 1A72530
REFER
The transmitter driver mounts the pulse shaper and RF amplifier stages. When used as
a driver for the 1kW RF power amplifier it produces rectangular reply pulses generated
in response to trigger pulses from the receiver video module.
Front-panel test jacks are available for measurement of selected pulse shaper
parameters and indicators are provided for TEST and DC POWER ON status.
The interconnections of the subassemblies within the module are shown in Drawing
72530-3-03. The subassemblies, each with its own circuit diagram, are described
individually in the following sections.
Within the transmitter driver there are four subunits; these are the exciter, the medium
power amplifier, the power modulation amplifier, and the pulse shaper.
The three amplifiers form an amplifier chain; the RF output from the RF amplifier in the
receiver video module is input to the exciter section of this amplifier chain at a level of
10 mW. This signal is successively amplified and modulated by the amplifier chain to
produce the required pulse shape and timing characteristics. The final output from the
power modulation amplifier consists of RF pulses, produced in response to trigger
pulses from the receiver video module, at a level of 50 watts.
Figure 2-13
Transmitter Driver Block Diagram
2-30
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.1 Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly 1A72531
REFER
The pulse shaper controls the modulation characteristics of the transmitter amplifiers. It
does this by producing modulation pulses that are accurately controlled in shape,
duration, and time. Pulse production and timing are both controlled by the receiver video,
which produces modulation trigger pulses to initiate pulse generation and a 5.5296 MHz
signal which is used as the pulse shaper clock signal. The second major function of the
pulse shaper is to provide control and adjustment of high tension and bias supplies to
the three amplifier assemblies.
The inputs to the pulse shaper are:
a. Modulation trigger signal from the receiver video (XN1:8c).
b. 5.5296 MHz clock signal from the receiver video (XN1:8a, XN1:8b).
c. Provision for input from an external temperature sensor, which could be used to
determine the DC pedestal level of the high level modulation pulse outputs
(XN1:26c, XN1:27a). The external temperature sensor would be a forward biased
diode thermally joined to the power transistor heat sink and connected in parallel
with V13. (This external sensor is not used in this equipment; adequate
temperature compensation is achieved by the on-board sensor V13 responding
to ambient temperature changes only.)
d. Provision for a detected RF input to be switch-selected to be the source from
which the automatic level control of the high level modulation pulses is derived
(XN1:26a, XN1:26b).
e. Modulated detected signal from the power modulation amplifier at X2:16, which is
used to derive the driver pulse level reference voltage.
f.
Supply voltages for the transmitter driver stages, all routed from the transponder
power supply: high tension supply (XN1:2a,b,c); +18 volts supply (XN1:6a,b,c);
+15 volts supply (XN1:9a,b,c).
g. Auxiliary +24 volts supply (XN1:3a,b,c).

The outputs of the pulse shaper are of two main types - modulation pulses, and
adjustable supply voltages for the amplifier assemblies. The outputs are:
a. A receiver suppression pulse, which is supplied to the receiver video to suppress
receive functions during pulse transmission from the transmitter (XN1:10b).
b. To the exciter:
1. A rectangular modulation pulse signal 1W PULSE which provides the low-level
modulation of the transmitter (XN2:10).
2. Adjustable DC voltage EXCITER DC which supplies the collector voltage for V5
and V6 (XN2:8).
3. DC supplies for Class A operation of V1; these are collector voltage VC1
(XN2:6) and bias voltage BIAS 1 (XN2:2).
2-31
HA72500
SECTION 2
c. To the medium power driver:

1. High tension supply +HT (XN2:14).
2. V1 collector voltage MED PD COLL; this can be switch-selected to be either an
adjustable DC level or a shaped modulation pulse signal (XN2:12). In
configurations which do not use the 1kW amplifier, this latter arrangement
provides for the high-level modulation in the system.
d. To the power modulation amplifier:
1. High tension supply +HT (XN2:20).
2. Adjustable DC voltage POWER MOD AMP DC which supplies the collector
voltage for V1 (XN2:18).
e. In system configurations having 1kW outputs, high-level shaped pulse signal
supplied to the modulating stages in the associated 1kW RF amplifiers (XN1:25a,
XN1:25b).
f.
Reference voltage TO_TX_LVL (XN1:28b) which is fed to the monitor module

and CTU for measurement and comparison purposes.
The leading edge of the shaped modulation pulse is generated by a six-segment

adjustable-slope integrator. The durations of the segments are timed by a 5.5296 MHz
clock derived from the receiver video. The trailing edge is symmetrically generated by
discharging the integrator in reverse order. Because the same generator is used for both
pulses of a pair, reply separation of the RF pulses is equal to that determined by the
receiver video. Further, the timing of segments by the transponder clock ensures the
stability of the beacon reply.
Automatic peak pulse level control is applied as a slow acting feedback loop derived
either from the detected RF envelope of the 1kW output pulses of the transmitter or
direct from the high-level output of the pulse shaper.
In the quiescent state, awaiting the arrival of a modulator trigger pulse, the output of the
monostable D6:7 is high. This is the reset state of the pulse generating circuit. The high
output at D6:7:
a. sets the output of the D7, D4:12 divide-by-four flip-flops to low;
b. turns the bilateral switch D4:1, 2 on, thus setting the integrator output N1:1 to
zero;
c. inhibits the analogue multiplexer D1 from operating; and
d. sets the up/down flip-flop D5:2 output to high, which turns the bilateral switch
D4:10. 11 on, grounding the input to the multiplexer, and resets the up/down
counter D2 to the count up mode.
The carry out signal from D2:7 is high in the reset state when counting up. This signal is
applied to D6:3, and sets the monostable D6:6 in the ready state for a trigger pulse.
On receipt of a negative-going trigger pulse at XN1:8c, D6:7 goes low. When D6:7 goes
low:
a. the reset signal is removed from D7:7;
b. the reset is removed from the BCD counter D2:9, enabling it to begin counting;
c. the reset is removed from the up/down flip-flop D5:4;
d. the inhibit is removed from the analogue multiplexer D1:6; and
e. the initialisation bilateral switch D4:1, 2 is turned off, enabling integration to
begin.
2-32
HA72500
Figure 2-14
SECTION 2
Shaped Pulse Generation Waveforms
During the period that the D6:7 is low, the flip-flops D7 inject a 1.3824 MHz signal into
the BCD counter D2:15 which in turn feeds the BCD signal into the analogue multiplexer
D1. The D1 output levels that drive the integrator are individually adjustable to give the
required slope for each segment of the pulse; the first segment (produced by D1:14, 15)
is adjusted by the BASE level adjustment R3, the second segment by R5, through to the
sixth segment (produced by D1:4) which is adjusted by the APEX level adjustment R13.
When the counter D2 reaches a count of 7, the AND gate D3:1 changes state to high
which places a high on the preset enable (D2:1) of the BCD counter D2 and also places
a high on the J input of the up/down flip-flop D5:6. The next positive-going edge of the
D7:15 flip-flop output causes the up/down flip-flop D5:2 to change state. D5:2 goes low
and sends D2:10 low; this sets the counter D2 to the count down mode.
The state change of D5:2 also turns the bilateral switches D4:10, 11 off and D4:8, 9 on
and removes the preset signal from D2:1, allowing D2 to count down on the next clock
pulse.
When the D5:2 state change occurred, after the 7 count, D3:1 went low, which latched
the D5:2 up/down flip-flop output by putting a low on D5:6.
The bilateral switch D4:8, 9 turning on places approximately +10 volts on the multiplexer
D1:3 input. As the counter counts down it addresses the multiplexer in the reverse order,
discharging the integrating capacitor and producing a symmetrical waveform. When a
count of zero is reached D2:7 goes low, which places a low on the clear of the
monostable D6:3. The output D6:7 then goes high, and the system resets awaiting
another trigger pulse.
2-33
HA72500
SECTION 2
The falling edge of the modulator pulse is determined by the discharge of the integrator,
and the relationship between leading edge charge and falling edge discharge
characteristics can be set by the INTEGRATOR BALANCE adjustment R17.
Following the integrator, the pulse is injected into a two-stage filter network. The pulse
amplitude is variable by the MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE adjustment R58. Because the
RF amplifiers require a threshold voltage before modulation occurs, a pedestal voltage is
added which is variable by the PEDESTAL VOLTAGE adjustment R53. Provision is
made for the pedestal level to be determined by an input from an external temperature
sensor (XN1:26c, XN1:27a) consisting of a forward biased diode thermally joined to the
power transistor heat sink in parallel with V13; this is not employed in this equipment and
the reference voltage for N4:3 is derived from the voltage divider R63, R65, V13 which is
on-board mounted and compensates for ambient temperature variations only. The pulse
and the pedestal voltage are added together in V16. The pulse and pedestal voltage is
then amplified in the modulation amplifier comprising V10, V11, V5. The modulation
pulse output is accessible at test point XA3 and can be applied either to the associated
1kW RF amplifier (in high-power systems) via XN1:25a, XN1:25b, or to the medium
power driver (in low-power systems) via XN2:12. The modulation input to the medium
power driver is controlled by the MED COLL switch S4, and can be either the modulation
pulse or a variable DC voltage as set by the MED POWER DRIVER DC adjustment
R115.
The circuitry comprising N2 and associated components forms a video detector and
automatic level control circuit. The level is adjustable using ALC LEVEL R62. The ALC
source selection switch S3 allows the level control voltage to be derived either from the
modulator pulse output at N3:1, or from an external pulse detection circuit. The level
control voltage is accessible at test point XT3. The loop can be disabled by the ALC
LOOP switch S2; in the OPEN position this applies a +10 volts to the integrator, N1,
input via R40.
The two monostables D8 turn off the bilateral switch D4:3, 4 to induce a reduction in the
gain of the modulator amplifier for the second of the X channel pulses because the
effective gain of the RF transistors increases slightly for the second pulse when the
pulses are of 12 microseconds spacing. The gain reduction does not function on a
Y channel, because the pulses are spaced at 30 microseconds and the RF transistors
treat each pulse as an isolated event.
The rectangular RECTANGULAR MODULATION PULSE pulse signal is derived from
theD6 monostable. The two-stage common emitter amplifier V20 and V19 drives a
complementary pair of transistors V18 and V17 which operate together as buffers to
isolate the driver circuitry from the capacitive input of the FET transistor V23. The
transistor V18 conducts during the rising edge of the pulse and V17 conducts on the
falling edge providing a path to ground. C30 and R82 decouple the load of V23 from the
HT supply; R73 reduces the Q of the gate circuit to prevent oscillation, and R83
references the gate to 0V whenever V17 and V18 are both OFF. The RECTANGULAR
MODULATION PULSE is accessible at test point XT4 and at test jack XA1, and is output
to drive the second stage of the exciter via XN2:10. Components V31, C48 and R136
comprise a pulse stretching circuit, to extend the rectangular waveform pulse for use in
the receiver video module as receiver suppression.
Transistor V29 and associated components supply base and collector bias to the exciter
input stage V1. V21, V22, V25 and V30 provide the adjustable collector voltage supplies
for the amplifiers; R97 is the EXCITER DC adjustment for the collector voltage supplied
to V5 and V6 in the exciter; R115 is the MED POWER DRIVER DC adjustment for the
control voltage supplied to the medium power driver; R69 is the POWER MOD AMP DC
adjustment for the control voltage supplied to the power modulation amplifier.
2-34
HA72500
SECTION 2
Board test points are provided as shown in Table 2-4. The test points mounted on the
edge of the board are positioned to be accessible as front panel jacks on the transmitter
driver.
Table 2-4
LOCATION
On Pulse
Shaper
Board
Pulse Shaper Board Test Points

REF
LEGEND
SIGNAL
XT1, 2
XT3
(EARTH)
(ALC)
Earth
Loop control voltage
XT4
SQUARE MODULATION
Pulse to exciter via XN2:10
XT5
(PWR MOD AMP DC)
XT6, 8
(EARTH)
DC control voltage to power modulation amplifier

via XN2:18
Earth
XT7
(EXCITER DC)
Supply voltage to exciter via XN2:8
XT9
(MED PWR DRV DC)
DC control voltage for medium power driver
XT10
(VC1)
Collector voltage to exciter, first stage, via XN2:6
XT11
(TD_TX_LVL)
XT12
(TD_MOD_LVL)
Detected RF output level from the transmitter

driver
Detected modulation pulse level
XA1
XA2
SQUARE MODULATION
FUNCTION GENERATOR
Modulation pulse to exciter

Output to the pulse-shaping integrator
SHAPED MODULATION
Shape modulation pulse
+15 VOLTS
Supply input to board
DRIVER LEVEL
Detected RF output from transmitter driver
Board edge
(front panel XA3
XA4
jacks on
Transmitter XA5
Driver)
XA6
EARTH
XA7
EARTH
The DRIVER DC POWER switch S1 is mounted as a front-panel control, in the

NORMAL position it connects the +8 volts supply to V29 to generate the bias and
collector voltages for the input stage of the exciter; in the OFF position the supply is
disconnected, and the amplifier chain is disabled.
The green POWER ON indicator H1 is lit whenever the +15 volts board supply is
present. The red TEST indicator H2 is supplied from the +24 volts auxiliary voltage line;
this indicator lights when the DRIVER DC POWER switch S1 is set to the OFF position.
Both indicators are mounted to be visible as front-panel indicators on the transmitter
driver.
The output levels of the shape modulation pulse and the detected driver in are fed to
peak rider circuitry which holds the peak value of the pulse. This DC level is fed to the
monitor module for measurement by the CTU.
Detected driver in has its own bootstrap return to negate the capacitance in the line
between the detector and the pulse shaper.
2-35
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.4.2
Exciter 1A72532
REFER
The exciter employs three cascaded stages. The first stage (V1) operates in class A
condition, and is maintained in this condition by a regulator located on the pulse shaper
board. The regulator circuit measures the collector current of V1 and maintains it at
approximately 100 mA by controlling the base bias of V1. The base bias for V1 enters at
XN1:9 and the collector current enters at XN1:5. The base bias circuit is decoupled and
reaches the base via RF choke L1. The collector current is similarly decoupled and
reaches the collector via L2. Microstrip circuits match the 50 ohms input at XC1 to the
transistor base, and match the output impedance of the transistor to the 50 ohms load
presented by the input of the 90-degree hybrid coupler W1.
The input power level to the class A stage V1 is 10 mW and it delivers to W1 typically
100 mW. The ferrite beads on L1 and L2 keep the Q of the decoupling circuits low over a
broad band of frequencies.
The transistors of the next two stages each operate between pairs of 90 degree
couplers. Operated in this way, both the input and output impedances of these stages
approximate to 50 ohms. The transistors V3 and V4 of the second stage operate in
class AB condition, their biases being supplied via the RF chokes L5 and L7.
The collectors of V3 and V4 are supplied with a rectangular pulse from a common pulse
source of adjustable amplitude located on the pulse shaper. This pulse amplitude may
be adjusted from 8 volts to 18 volts. The pulsing of the collectors results in the second
stage delivering RF pulses of approximately 1 watt peak power to the input of the
90 degree hybrid coupler W2.
The third stage operates in class C condition, the bases of transistors V5 and V6 being
returned to ground through L9 and L11. In this third stage microstrip circuits are again
used to match the transistors V5 and V6 to their 90 degree hybrid couplers. The output
impedance of the 90 degree coupler W3 appears as a 50 ohms source to the third stage,
and the input impedance of the 90 degree hybrid W4 appears as a 50 ohms load. The
common DC collector supply voltage to the transistors V5 and V6 is adjustable on the
pulse shaper board from 15 volts to 30 volts. The third stage being driven by pulsed RF
at its input delivers corresponding pulses at its output. As used in the transmitter chain of
stages, the peak pulse power output from the exciter is typically 4 watts at XC2.
Wire loops labelled CURRENT TEST POINT on the circuit diagram allow the magnitude
and shape of the current pulses to be measured or observed on an oscilloscope using a
current probe. Adjustable trimmer capacitors are provided for the input circuits of all
three stages and for the output circuits of the first and the third stages. These trimmer
capacitors are adjusted at the factory to give an essentially flat response over the DME
frequency band (960 to 1220 MHz). The alignment procedure for the exciter, involving
the setting of the pulse amplitude to the second stage and the DC supply voltage to the
third stage, are carried out at the assigned operating frequency.
2-36
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.4.3
Medium Power Driver 1A72533
REFER
The medium power driver consists of two parts - an RF amplifier section and a
modulator section - and is mounted in a metal diecast box. The input signal to the
medium power driver comes from the Exciter 1A72532. A microstrip circuit matches the
50 ohms PULSE IN circuit at XC1 to the input impedance of the transistor V1. A second
microstrip circuit matches the output impedance of the transistor to the 50 ohms PULSE
OUT XC2. The transistor operates in class C.
The transistor collector is supplied with either a DC supply or a pulsed voltage,
depending on the role of the amplifier. In a 1kW transponder this stage operates with DC
on its collector, whereas in a 100 watt transponder this stage is the high-level modulated
stage. If DC is used its level may be adjusted from 15 volts to 30 volts. If pulse
modulation is used the pulse amplitude may be adjusted up to 30 volts.
The transistor V3 in the modulating circuit is a source follower. The transistors V4 and
V5 buffer the circuits on the pulse shaper against the input capacitance of V3 when the
medium power driver is used in the pulse modulated role. The inductors L1 and L2
function as RF chokes.
The amplifier operates over the frequency range 962 to 1213 MHz without retuning. The
output power at the operating frequency is controlled by setting the DC collector supply
or the peak voltage of the modulation pulse.
The capacitors C15, C16 and the resistors R6, R7, R8 act to fitter the current pulses
from the HT supply. The peak pulse power of the input pulse is approximately 4 watts,
and the pulse power at the output XC2 is typically 20 watts.
"
2.3.4.4
Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534
REFER
The RF pulse input to the power modulation amplifier at XC1 from the medium power
driver is via a short length of semirigid transmission line which operates as a balun
converting the unbalanced input coaxial circuits at the module connector to a balanced
circuit at the entry points on the microstrip circuit. The amplifier uses a balanced
transistor. Microstrip circuits together with some fixed and variable capacitors match the
input and output impedances of the transistor to the 50 ohms balanced impedances
presented by the baluns.
A modulator detected signal, derived from a coupling and detector circuit (V2) is output
via XN1:A to the pulse shaper, where it is used to derive a driver pulse level reference
voltage.
The transistor V3 in the modulation circuit is a source follower. The transistors V4 and
V5 buffer the circuits on the pulse shaper against the input capacitance of V3 when used
in the pulse modulated role. The inductors L2 and L3 function as RF chokes.
When used as a modulator its output power is set by adjustment of the input rectangular
pulse power and the amplitude of the video modulation pulse, applied to its collector.
2-37
HA72500
Table 2-5
SECTION 2
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Transmitter Driver
TYPE
LEGEND
Green LED
DC POWER ON
Red LED
TEST
RF OUTPUT
Variable
resistor
Toggle switch DRIVER DC
POWER
FUNCTION/SETT1NG/INDICATION
Indicates that 15 volts output from the transponder power supply is
applied to the module.
Indicates that the DRIVER DC POWER switch is not in the NORMAL
position or that internal switches S2 and S3 are not in the correct
positions.
Adjusts the RF output from the DME, when the ALC loop is closed.
OFF
NORMAL
Test jack
Turns off the pulse modulation to the second stage of

the exciter.
Normal operation.
Test jack
SQUARE PULSE
MODULATION
FUNCTION
GENERATOR
SHAPED PULSE
MODULATION
+15V
A buffered low-level modulation pulse output representing the signal

from the pulse shaper to the second stage of the exciter.
The buffered output of the pulse-shaping integrator on the pulse
shaper.
A buffered high-level modulation output representing the signal from
the pulse shaper to the modulation stage.
The buffered input +15V supply.
Test jack
DRIVER LEVEL
Test jack
EARTH
A buffered signal representing the output RF pulses from the

module.
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
Test jack
2-38
HA72500
SECTION 2
Table 2-6
Summary of Internal Controls : Transmitter Driver
SUBASSY
TYPE
1A72531
Preset
Pulse
resistors
Shaper PWB
Assembly
REF
R3. 5, 7, PULSE SHAPE

9, 11,
13
R17
INTEGRATOR
BALANCE
R36
BACK PORCH
Adjusts the balance of the function generator

integrator.
Adjusts the spacing between the modulation pulses.
R52
Adjusts the DC level of the shaped modulation pulse.
R54
R58
R62
R69
PEDESTAL
VOLTAGE
2ND PULSE
EOUALISING
MOD PULSE
AMPLITUDE
ALC LEVEL
These vary the slope of the segments of the function

generator output from base (R3) to apex (R13).
Adjusts the height of the second pulse of the pulse

pair to equalise it with the height of the first pulse.
Adjusts the amplitude of the shaped modulation
pulse.
With S2 (ALC LOOP) in its closed position, adjusts
the shaped modulation pulse amplitude.
Adjusts the power modulation amplifier DC level.
R85
POWER MOD
AMP DC
1W PULSE
R97
EXCITER DC
Adjusts the exciter DC level.
R115
MED POWER
DRIVER DC
DRIVER DC
POWER
Adjusts the medium power driver DC level.
Slide switch S2
ALC LOOP
Slide switch S3
ALC
Toggle
switch
1A72532
Exciter
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
S1
Adjusts the pulse modulation amplitude.
OFF
Power supply to exciter is off.
NORMAL
CLOSED
Power supply to the exciter is under

CTU control.
Automatic level control is enabled.
OPEN
Automatic level control is disabled.
VIDEO
ALC maintains shaped modulation

pulse amplitude.
DETECTED
ALC maintains output level from the
RF
1kW RF power amplifier.
Slide switch S4
MED PD COLL DC
Selects a DC voltage as the collector
supply for the medium power driver in
high power (1kW) mode.
MODULATION Selects the shaped modulation pulse
as the collector supply for the
medium power driver in low power
(250 W) mode.
Used
to
align
the
exciter (see Section 3.4.25),
Variable
C5, 15, 17. 21, 26, 30, 33,
capacitors 34.
2-39
HA72500
2.3.5
SECTION 2
Transponder Power Supply 1A72525
This assembly comprises the Main PWB Assembly Transponder Power Supply 1A72526
mounted on a supporting frame; the board functions are described in the following
section.
"
2.3.5.1
Main PWB Assembly Transponder Power Supply 1A72526
REFER
This power supply is used to generate the voltage supplies required by the Transmitter
Driver 1A72530. These voltages are +15 volts, +18 volts, and HT (42-50 volts). The front
panel TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch enables the transponder (transmitter driver
and receiver video) to be turned ON, OFF, or to NORMAL; in this latter condition the
transponder is controlled by the CTU via XN1:30b.
Commands to turn the power supply on, either from the control panel or the front panel
switch, will result in the relay K1 being operated by the action of V11 being turned on.
With K1 operated, contacts K1a and K1b will close, supplying the transponder with
+24 volts and supplying +24 volts to the internal regulators and inverter.
The ON position on the front panel TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch is provided so
that power may be applied to a failed system for maintenance. Normally, if a primary
fault has occurred and the power has remained on, circuitry in the monitor module(s) will
(after a time delay) inhibit pulse-pairs from leaving the receiver video module. However,
the ON position of TRANSPONDER DC POWER activates INHIBIT DISABLE line at
XN1:9c to enable the faulty system to be operated for fault diagnosis.
The input +24 volts supply is available for monitoring on the front panel using a high
impedance voltmeter between the test jacks +24V IN (XA1) and EARTH (XA4). Also the
input +24 volts supply current may be monitored, again with a high impedance voltmeter
connected across + SUPPLY CURRENT (XA7) and - SUPPLY CURRENT (XA8). In this
case a measured voltage of 100 mV corresponds to a supply current of 1 ampere.
The HT, +18 volts, and +15 volts supplies may be monitored at the front panel, at test
jacks HT (XA2), +18V (XA5) and +1 5V (XA3) respectively.
The +15 volts supply is produced by a 3-terminal regulator V1, with its input supplied
from the switched +24 volts rail. The 3-terminal regulator is current limited. Its output is
used within the power supply as a reference voltage for generating the +18 volts supply
and for powering N1.
The +18 volts supply is designed using discrete components. V3 and V4 are connected
as a differential error amplifier with the reference voltage, derived from the +15 volts
supply via R7 and R11, connected to the base of V4. The +18 volts output voltage is
sensed by V3 via the resistive divider R16 and R10. These two resistive dividers
determine the output voltage from the regulator. The output voltage of this regulator is
within the range 17.5 to 18.5 volts.
Zener diode V6 provides a regulated 5 volts to the current-limiting transistor V8.
The current limiter operates in the following manner. In the normal working condition of
the supply (non-overload state), V8 is forward biased and the voltage drop across V8
(0.3 volts), applied to the emitter-base junction of V5, is not sufficient to turn it on. When
the regulator output current reaches the predetermined overload value (approximately
170 mA), the voltage drop across R20, R21 added to the 0.3 volts already present turns
V5 on and its collector current raises the base voltage of V7, overriding the normal
voltage regulating action, to limit the output current from the supply.
2-40
HA72500
SECTION 2
The HT supply is developed by a switched mode inverter which steps up the voltage
from the switched +24 volts supply. A power MOSFET V22 is used as a pulse-widthmodulated switch operating into a transformer whose output is rectified, filtered and
controlled at a constant voltage.
A constant switching frequency is generated by N1, the frequency (40 kHz) being
determined by R34 and C24. A sample of the output voltage presented at pin 1 of N1 is
compared with the reference sample at pin 2. The circuit automatically adjusts the width
of the on-pulse at pins 11, 14 so that the energy delivered from the secondary of the
transformer is just sufficient to maintain a consistent DC out voltage. The HT voltage is
set using the HT VOLTAGE adjustment R26.
Input current overload protection is provided as follows. An override control on the pulse
width generated in N1 is available through pin 9. When pin 9 is open circuit, control of
the pulse width is through pin 1 only. As the resistance to ground at pin 9 is lowered, the
maximum length of the pulse is progressively shortened, until it drops below
1 microsecond. As the input current increases from the supply, so does the magnitude of
the current pulses through V22. The resistor R40 is chosen so that at a predetermined
overload current, the peaks of the voltage pulses across R40 just turn off V26. As V26
turns off, V25 turns on to provide a current path from pin 9 to ground, bringing the
current limiting action of the circuit into play.
The transistors V20 and V18 charge and discharge respectively the input capacitance of
V22, while the turn-off spike at its drain is controlled at a safe level by V12, V19 in
combination, by V13, C16 and R28 in combination, and by C15 and R25 in combination.
2-41
HA72500
SECTION 2
Table 2-7
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Transponder

Power Supply
TYPE
LEGEND

Green LED POWER ON

Red LED
TEST
Toggle
switch,
centre off
Indicates that power is applied to the module.
TRANSPONDER
DC POWER
Indicates that the TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch is not in the

NORMAL position.
ON
All supply outputs are on, regardless of CTU commands.
This is required during testing and maintenance.
OFF
All power supply outputs are off.
NORMAL
Power supply outputs are under CTU control.
Test jack
+24V IN
The input voltage from the power supply/battery.
Test jack
HT
HT output to the Transmitter Driver 1A72530.
Test jack
+15V
+15 volts output to the Transmitter Driver 1A72530.
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
+18V
Ground reference for +24V IN, HT, +18V and +15V, which is connected
to the power +24V IN return.
+18 volts output to the Transmitter Driver 1A72530.
Test jack
SWITCHED +24V
The switched +24 volts output.
Test jack
SUPPLY
CURRENT+
SUPPLY
CURRENT-
These test jacks are connected to either side of a resistor in series with
the input +24V IN. The + jack is connected to the higher voltage side of
the resistor, and the - jack to the lower voltage side (100 mV/ampere).
Test jack
Table 2-8
SUBASSY
Summary of Internal Controls : Transponder Power Supply
TYPE
1A72526
Preset
Main PWB
resistor
Assembly,
Transponder
Power Supply
REF
R26
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
HT VOLTAGE
Sets the HT output voltage to the transmitter

driver.
2-42
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.6
1kW RF Power Amplifier Assembly 1A72535
REFER
The 1kW RF power amplifier assembly is located at the rear of the rack behind the 1kW
PA power supply which provides the power amplifier's HT supply.
The elemental electrical operations of the 1kW power amplifier are:
Formation of the initial shaped pulse by the power modulation amplifier.
The first power amplification of the shaped pulses by the broadband amplifier
pair A1, A2.
Eight-way power division of the output of the A1, A2 pair by the power divider.
A second broadband amplification of each eighth-part of power by the amplifiers

A3, A4 .... A10, which form the output amplifier.
Recombination of the amplified outputs by the power combiner.
Passage of the power through the circulator to the output point XC2.
Containment of the RF energy to within the amplifier metal housing by the filters
on the 1kW PA connector assembly.
Provision of the main component of the supply current pulse to the amplifier from
a reservoir capacitor bank.
Figure 2-15
1kW RF Power Amplifier Block Diagram
2-43
HA72500
SECTION 2
The pulses leaving the power modulation amplifier consist of a shaped portion above a
pedestal. The pedestal provides the turn-on power for the following broadband
amplification. The initial pulse is modified by passage through the amplifier to emerge at
XC2 with the characteristic DME Gaussian shape.
Formation of the initial shaped pulse takes place in the following manner. A rectangular
RF power pulse of typically 50 watts enters the Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534 at
XC1 and drives the emitter of the transistor in the modulation amplifier. The collector
voltage pulse enters the amplifier at XN1:C and modulates the power modulation
amplifier to deliver at its output a pulse consisting of a shaped portion on a rectangular
pedestal. The pulse power drive, the collector pulse shape and amplitude, are all
adjusted to produce the required initial pulse shape. These adjustments are made from
the transmitter driver.
The first power amplification of the pulse takes place in the amplifier pair A1, A2 in the
1kW RF power amplifier. Here the 250W amplifiers A1, A2 are connected between
90-degree hybrid couplers on the combiner and divider assemblies. This arrangement
has the property of providing a near 50 ohms resistive input impedance to the hybrid
coupler W5 and a near 50 ohms resistive output impedance from the hybrid coupler W1,
provided always that the impedances of the two transistors remain the same, even
though the actual match at each transistor may deteriorate.
"
2.3.6.1
Power Divider 1A72536
REFER
In the power divider, power division by four is obtained as a division by two, using the
Wilkinson divider circuit shown schematically on the power divider in Drawing
72535-1-07, followed by the two further divisions again using the Wilkinson circuit. The
division by eight is completed using the 90-degree hybrid circuits labelled W2, W3, W4
and W5 on the power divider. The resistors R1, R2 and R3 provide isolation between the
output ports of the Wilkinson circuits; the resistors R5, R6, R7 and R8 on the 90-degree
hybrids absorb reflected power from the transistor circuits.
A coupling and detector circuit creates a driver detected signal output at XC11.
The second broadband amplification of each eighth-part of power is obtained by pairs of
amplifiers A3, A4; A5, A6; A7, A8, A9 and A10 which operate between 90 degree
hybrids in the same way as just described for the amplifier pair A1, A2, though at a
higher power level.
"
2.3.6.2
Power Combiner 1A72537
REFER
The recombining of the powers is accomplished in the power combiner circuit, through
processes which are the reverse of those described for the power divider.
A coupling circuit and detector creates an output detected signal output at XC12.
The combined power is passed to the output through the circulator W1. The resistive
load Rl connected to the circulator provides a 50 ohms resistive load for the 1kW
amplifier in the event of a fault effectively removing its load - for example, disconnection
of the DME antenna.
A group of 20 capacitors form the capacitor bank which provides a reservoir from which
the current pulse requirements of the amplifier are supplied, thus largely confining the
current pulse paths to the amplifier ground plane.
2-44
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.6.3
250W RF Amplifier 1A69873
REFER
This amplifier is the basic building block of the 1kW RF power amplifier, and operates
with a constant DC collector supply of 50 volts to raise the peak input power pulse of
50 watts to, typically, a 250 watts peak output power pulse. It is a microstrip design
which covers the frequency range 962 to 1213 MHz without the need for circuit
adjustment; input and output impedances are each 50 ohms.
The amplifiers are used in pairs between 90-degree couplers, so that each pair presents
a generally better input/output match than either amplifier would show if operated
separately.
2.3.6.4
The function and operation of this unit is described in Section 2.3.4.4.
"
2.3.6.5
1kW PA Connector PWB Assembly 1A72544
REFER
The 1kW PA connector assembly provides a method of connection for the power and
signals to and from the 1kW power amplifier.
To reduce RF leakage through the connector assembly the PWB is covered on all nontrack areas with ground plane and each of the inputs is decoupled through a surface
mount 22 pF capacitor which is self resonant in the DME frequency band.
Each signal output (PWR AMP MOD, PWR AMP DRV, PWR AMP OUTPUT) is supplied
with a return connection (R-PWR AMP MOD, R-PWR-AMP-DRV, R-PWR AM OUTPUT)
which follows the signal waveform. This reduces the effect of line capacitance in the
cables from the 1kW power amplifier detectors to the control and status board.
2-45
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.7
1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540
REFER
This unit consists of the DC-DC Converter Assembly 1A72542 and attached Regulator
Assembly 1A72543, the Control and Status PWB Assembly 1A72541, relay K1 and filter
components.
A front panel switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER mounted from the control and status board
allows the 1kW RF power amplifier to be powered ON or OFF through the relay K1 for
test purposes.
"
2.3.7.1
DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly 1A72542
REFER
The DC-DC converter changes the 24 volts DC supply to the DME beacon to a regulated
50 volts supply to power the 1kW RF power amplifier. The converter is protected against
output short circuits and includes circuitry to prevent over-voltage supply to the 1kW
power amplifier.
The converter circuit consists of a power switching section and a switching signal
generating section. The power switching section comprises four power FET switches, V1
through V4, associated with the ferrite-cored transformer T6. This is followed by a bridge
rectifier and smoothing circuit built around L2. A second filter associated with L3 reduces
the level of switching hash present on the output voltage from the supply.
The switching signal generation section of the converter, located on the Regulator PWB
Assembly 1A72543, is shown in Drawing 72542-1-01 within a dotted surround. The heart
of this circuit is the CA1524 (V101) which generates pulses of controlled width at a
constant rate (30 kHz) determined by R105 and C103. A pulse from V101 is delivered
alternately at pins 12 and 13. These pulses drive the gates of the FET pair V1, V2 via
the buffer amplifiers V118 and the gates of the FET pair V3, V4 via the buffers V119.
An adjustable fraction of the output voltage taken across C11 is applied to pin 1 of V101.
This voltage is compared within V101 to the reference voltage applied at pin 2. The ontime of the switching pulses to the FETs is adjusted by V101 so as to deliver just
sufficient energy at the secondary of the transformer to meet the current demand on the
converter at the set output voltage. The output voltage from the converter is varied by
changing the fraction of it which is applied at pin 1, by altering the value of the variable
resistor R112.
If the output voltage rises above 50 volts, the emitter voltage of V116 increases more
rapidly than its base voltage. At an over-voltage of typically 55 volts the transistor V116
turns on, the SCR V117 is triggered on, and as a consequence the 15 volts supply to the
buffers is removed and the converter remains shut down until the primary supply is
removed to allow the SCR to extinguish.
For current overload protection, the primary current sensing circuit is set to respond at a
lower overload current than the direct output current overload sensing circuit. The
primary sensing circuit peak rectifies the stream of primary current pulse samples across
the secondary of transformer T1, to produce a positive voltage across R115. When this
voltage is sufficient to turn off V106, V107 turns on, the voltage at pin 9 falls and the
pulses generated by V101 shorten to restrict the further increase of the output current
while the fault condition exists. In the event of the primary current overload not
operating, then at a higher secondary overload current; the voltage drop across R12 is
sufficient to turn on V110; this turns on V112 and, as for the primary current pulse
sensing circuit, the voltage at pin 9 falls and V101 output pulses are shortened to limit
the overload current.
2-46
HA72500
SECTION 2
Snubber circuits and zener diodes limit the positive voltage turn-off spike at the FET
drains to typically 80 volts. Zener diodes limit the gate voltages of the FETs to 18.4 volts.
The variable resistor R16 is set for 1 mV between XP:4 and XP:3 per ampere of primary
current. The pulse transformers T2, T3, T4 and T5 produce 0.1 volts per ampere of FET
source pulse current; these allow the performance of the individual FETs of either pair to
be measured or compared.
"
2.3.7.2
Control and Status PWIB Assembly 1A72541
REFER
A sample of the converter voltage, taken at XP:5a on that unit goes to the control and
status board where it causes the front panel green POWER ON indicator H3 to light if
the voltage is between 48.5 volts and 51.9 volts. This result is achieved as follows; the
variable resistor R45 is adjusted so that the two voltages at the imaginary centre of R46
is equal to the zener reference voltage (5.6 volts) of V12. A window comparator formed
by two comparators of N7 monitors the voltage sample against upper and lower limits
allowing H3 to light when between these two limits.
A 15 volts supply is derived from the 24 volts supply via a linear voltage regulator N9
and provides the IC supply on the board.
The AMPLIFIER DC POWER test switch S1, when in the NORMAL position, allows the
relay K1 coil to be energised by a 5 volts signal on XN1:8. If the switch is in the ON or
OFF positions then the front panel red TEST indicator H2 is lit, the test line XN1:2 is at
0 volts and this condition is signalled to the CTU.
The power amplifier signals, output, driver and modulator are buffered and then level
detected. The detected output level of the power amplifier output, power amplifier driver,
power amplifier modulator from the 1kW RF power amplifier are fed to the control and
status board.
Each detected output level has its own bootstrap return to negate the capacitance in the
line between the 1kW PA and the control and status board. The bootstrap trigger also
provides the detected output level test jack output (XA1, XA2, XA3).
PA_OP_LVL, PA_DRV_LVL, PA_MOD_LVL are the detected outputs peak levels.
These DC voltages are held and fed to the monitor module for measurement by the
CTU.
RF DET IN is fed to the pulse shaper (in the transmitter driver) and is the feedback level
for the ALC loop.
2-47
HA72500
Table 2-9
TYPE
Green LED
Red LED
SECTION 2
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : PA Power Supply

LEGEND
POWER ON
TEST
Indicates that DC power is supplied to the module.

Indicates that the AMPLIFIER POWER switch is not in the NORMAL position.
Green LED
HT ON
Indicates that the HT supply is available, and within limits.
Toggle
switch,
centre off
AMPLIFIER DC
POWER
ON
HT output voltage is supplied to the 1kW RF power amplifier

regardless of the power control signal state. This is required only
during testing and maintenance.
There is no power output from the 1kW PA power supply.
OFF
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
POWER AMP
MODULATOR
OUT
POWER AMP
OUTPUT OUT
POWER AMP
DRIVER OUT
+15V
NORMAL There is HT output from the module while the power control signal
from the CTU is active (high); if it is inactive (low) the HT output is
set to 0 volts.
Buffered output signal from the modulation stage of the 1kW RF power
amplifier.
Buffered output signal from the output stage of the 1kW RF power amplifier.
Buffered output signal from the driver stage of the 1kW RF power amplifier.
Internally generated +15V supply (15 volts).
Test jack
SUPPLY
CURRENT SUPPLY
CURRENT+
EARTH
Test jack
+24V IN
A ground reference for the +24V IN, HT OUT and +15V OUT supplies, which
is connected to the +24V IN return.
Buffered +24V IN power supply input.
Test jack
HT OUT
Buffered HT output of 48 to 52 volts.
Test jack
SHAPED
PULSE
MODULATION
Buffered signal modulation pulse.
Test jack
Table 2-10
These jacks are connected to either side of a resistor in series with the
+24V IN supply. The + jack is buffered to the higher voltage side of the
resistor, and the - jack to the lower voltage side (1 mV/ampere).
Summary of Internal Controls : PA Power Supply
SUBASSY
1A72541 Control and
Status PWB Assembly
1A72542 DC-DC
Converter Assembly
A72543 Regulator PWB
Assembly
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
TYPE
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
REF
R45
R16
R112
Varies the centre of the HT ON window between
approximately 48.5 and 51.9 volts.
Calibrates the input circuit monitoring of the DC-DC converter
see Section 3.4.33).
Sets the HT output voltage to the 1kW RF power amplifier.
2-48
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.8
Test Interrogator 1A72514
REFER
The test interrogator module contains the Test Interrogator Main PWB Assembly
(1A72515), RF Generator (1A72516), Modulator and Detector (1A72518), Reply
Detector (1A72519) and Attenuator (1A69737), plus fixed 30 dB and 20 dB attenuators
The interconnection of these subassemblies is shown in Drawing 72514-3-04. The front
panel has a number of test jack connectors and test switches by which various operating
parameters of the module can be set and checked.
The test interrogator operates as an independent unit simulating aircraft interrogation
pulses. The DME transponder treats these pulses as normal interrogations and
responds accordingly, allowing the test interrogator to measure and display the critical
transponder parameters such as transponder delay, pulse separation and efficiency.
Interrogation pulses are alternately generated at two predetermined power levels, to
allow different parameters to be measured. The lower level of interrogation into the
transponder receiver is at -85 dBm and permits a measurement of transponder efficiency
to be made. The level into the transponder receiver is then switched to -70 dBm to allow
transponder delay to be measured. To enable these changes in signal level out of the
test interrogator into the DME receiver, a switched PIN diode Attenuator (type 1A69737)
is used.
The actual levels from the test interrogator are nominally 30.5 dB higher than the levels
stated above, because of the attenuation provided by the directional coupler in the RF
panel, and the attenuation in the rack cabling.
The measured parameter values are presented in digital form to the control and test unit
where each parameter value may be displayed as required. As well as real-time testing
of the transponder, the test interrogator may also be used as a built-in test unit for
system alignment.
A directional coupler mounted in the RF panel connected in-line with the antenna feeder
is used for injecting the test interrogator interrogation pulses into the transponder.
Another port on the directional coupler is used to sample the transponder reply pulses
and to feed them through to the test interrogator module for detection and parameter
testing.
The RF generator uses a crystal-controlled oscillator as its signal source, operating at a
frequency of one-twelfth of the DME receive frequency. A total of five crystals are used
to allow shifting of the RF generator frequency for testing the band pass and adjacent
channel rejection characteristics of the transponder. The five crystals correspond to
frequencies of nominal operating frequency; nominal 160 kHz, for pass band testing;
nominal 900 kHz for adjacent channel rejection testing.
The crystal oscillator is followed by a buffer stage and three stages of frequency
multiplication to produce the required operating channel frequency. Following the
multipliers a micro-stripline amplifier stage raises the signal level to approximately
+11.5 dBm.
The output circuit of the RF generator includes a video amplitude demodulator from
which the video output pulses are fed out to the modulator and detector for automatic
level control.
After receiving a pulse from the test interrogator main board, the modulator and detector
will generate the correct modulation waveforms, MOD OUT and DRIVE OUT, to produce
the required pulse shape at the output of the RF generator.
2-49
HA72500
SECTION 2
RF pulses from the RF generator are passed to a 20 dB 50 ohms attenuator pad; the
output of the pad is connected directly to the input of the PIN diode stripline attenuator.
The stripline attenuator is arranged such that when the PIN diode is off the attenuator
loss approaches zero, and when the diode is switched on the attenuator loss increases
by 15 dB. The output of the stripline attenuator is fed through a 30 dB 50 ohms
attenuator pad to the directional coupler in the RF panel.
With 1 dB residual loss in the module interconnections, pulse-pairs leaving the RF
generator are alternatively attenuated by 51 and 66 dB by switching the diode attenuator
between each pulse-pair; these signals are further attenuated by 30 dB in the directional
coupler.
Transponder output pulses, extracted by the directional coupler in the antenna
transmission line, are demodulated and processed, in the reply detector, to provide
logic-level trigger pulses timed at the 50% amplitude points on the leading edge of each
pulse. These trigger pulses are used as timing points for measuring the transponder
critical time-dependent parameters.
The reply detector uses a half-height pulse detector-processor identical to the one used
in the modulator and detector so that the inherent delays in each detector will be equal
and not affect the measurement of transponder delay. A front-panel pushbutton switch
connects both the reply detector and the modulator detector circuits to the RF generator
so that the detector pulses may be checked for coincidence.
As the test interrogator relies heavily on time period and rate measurements, a stable
10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as a master clock. All pulse generation and timing
waveforms are derived from this stable source.
For normal transponder interrogation and monitoring, pulse-pairs for transmission are
generated at a frequency of 100 Hz in a single DME, or 50 Hz in a dual. This rate may
be varied for other testing purposes by the appropriate switching of a multiplexer to
select an alternative clocking frequency. The demodulated RF pulses from the RF
generator are fed back into the test interrogator main board where the signal processing
is begun.
"
2.3.8.1
Main PWB Assembly Test Interrogator 1A72515
REFER
The following description of the test interrogator main board functions is related to the
five main functions provided by the board - - CTU bus, power, normal mode,
counter/timer and monitor fault limit test (MFLT) mode.
2.3.8.1.1
CTU Bus
The CTU bus is the control interface between the Control and Test Unit (CTU) and the
test interrogator. Control information is sent from the CTU to control the MFLT,
counter/timer and other functions of the test interrogator. D15, D25 and D27 buffer the
incoming signals from the CTU. The CTU control signals (RD, WR, XDT_R, XDEN,
ADDR) are decoded in D26 and the selected latch or buffer is enabled as shown in the
timing diagrams - Figure 2-16 and Figure 2-17.
2-50
HA72500
SECTION 2
Figure 2-16
CTU Bus Timing - Read
Figure 2-17
CTU Bus Timing - Write
The MFLT and counter/timer chips D34 and D35 have their own internal address
decoders, but their chip select signals MEAS_CT_CS and M_FLT_CT_CS are derived
from D26.
2.3.8.1.2
Power
The test interrogator can be powered in one of three ways:

a. The CTU can switch the test interrogator power on or off via the CTU bus when
the test interrogator front panel switch TEST INTERROGATOR AND MONITOR
POWER is in the NORMAL position. The test interrogator module is then
powered from the switched +24 volts supply +24V_SW.
b. When the test interrogator front panel switch TEST INTERROGATOR AND
MONITOR POWER is in the ON position CTU control is bypassed, and the
module is powered on directly from the +24V_AUX supply.
c. When the Transponder Power Supply 1A72525 (located in the transponder
subrack) is on, either by the power supply front panel switch TRANSPONDER
DC POWER or by CTU control.
2-51
HA72500
2.3.8.1.3
SECTION 2
Normal Mode Operation
Normal mode is the situation when the test interrogator interrogates the transponder and
extracts parameter information from the received reply pulses. In this mode the
counter/timer functions may be used to measure the parameters for display on the CTU.
The 10 MHz crystal oscillator is formed with D51, G1 and associated components. This
10 MHz is divided down to 1 MHz in D39 and is fed to the divider chain D43, D44, D45
and D46. From the divider chain the four test interrogation pulse repetition frequencies
(TIPRF) are derived. The TIPRFs (10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz and 50 Hz) are fed to D28
where one of the TIPRFs is selected. The selected TIPRF initiates an interrogation of the
transponder as shown below.
The signal TO_SIG_GEN is the signal which triggers an interrogation from the RF
Generator (1A72516) and the Modulator and Detector (1A72518). The pulse spacing
can be either 12 or 36 microseconds depending on whether an X mode or a Y mode
interrogation is being made. X or Y mode is selected by S4. The interrogation pulse
spacing may be altered by 1 or 2 microseconds by S2 or S3 to test the transponder
double pulse decoder.
The TIPRF also initiates a pair of reply accept gates, after a time delay selected by
switches S6 and S5, which ensures that non-synchronous replies from the receiver
video do not corrupt any parameters, as shown in the timing diagram below. The
operation of D18, D17. , D1 and D19:4 is similar to that described above for D3 and D4.
Synchronous first reply pulses are detected by the DETECTED TX PULSE signal at
D2:5 clocking D2:7, enabled by D17:11. Following the first pulse, D5:7 is set low,
enabling D5:10 to be clocked by the second synchronous DETECTED TX PULSE,
provided it falls within the second reply accept gate from D1:11.
2-52
HA72500
SECTION 2
The Delay parameter (DELAY_DUR_PULSE) D2:10 is set by the signal

FROM_SIG_GEN_DETECTOR and is reset by the first pulse of the signal
WIDTH_PULSE coincident with REPLY_ACCEPT_GATES D2:7. If there is no
WIDTH_PULSE coincident with the reply gate pulses then the monostable D2:10 times
out (after approximately 180 microseconds).
The Spacing parameter (SPAC_DUR_PULSE) D5:6 is set by the first WIDTH_PULSE
coincident with the REPLY_ACCEPT_GATES from D2:7 and reset by a second
WIDTH_PULSE coincident with the REPLY_ACCEPT_GATES from D5:9. If there is no
second WIDTH_PULSE coincident with the REPLY_ACCEPT_GATES the monostable
D5:6 will time out (after approximately 60 microseconds).
If a reply pulse pair is correctly decoded (that is, a WIDTH_PULSE is coincident with
both REPLY_ACCEPT_GATES) then a REPLY_PULSE is generated (from D5:9).
2-53
HA72500
SECTION 2
The RF output of the RF generator is attenuated every second output pulse so the
monitor can measure Efficiency at low RF signal levels. The signal TI_ATTENUATOR
(at XN2:20) controls the RF output attenuator which can be set permanently high or low
under CTU control. The output signal DEL_SPAC_MON_EN (XN1:22c), when high,
indicates that the Interrogation taking place is a high level interrogation. The output pulse
EFF_MON_ENABLE (XN1:25a), when high, indicates that a low level interrogation is
taking place. Signals AC0, AC1 (under control from the CTU), when high, cause
EFF_MON_ENABLE and DEL_SPAC_MON_ENABLE to stay low.
2-54
HA72500
2.3.8.1.4
SECTION 2
Counter/Timer
The counter/timer section of the test interrogator counts and times parameters by use of
the type 82C54 counter/timer chip D35. This device is controlled by the CTU via the CTU
bus. For information on the programming of the 82C54, refer to manufacturer data
sheets.
The counter section uses two of the three counters in D35. Counter 2 is loaded with a
number from the CTU bus and when COUNT_EN is set high by the CTU, a single pulse
(COUNTER_STATUS) of 1, 2 or 4 seconds is generated to set the measurement period
from Counter 1. COUNTER_STATUS opens the gate of counter 1 of D35 allowing the
required parameter to be counted. When COUNTER_STATUS goes low this is an
indication to the CTU that the count has finished and valid data is waiting in counter 1 to
be read. The parameters to be counted (transmitted pulses, decoded interrogations,
synchronous replies and calibration signal) are selected in the multiplexer D42.
The timer section consists of counter 0 of D35 and the PLD (programmable logic device)
D33. When the signal TIMER_EN is set high by the CTU, this input to D33:2 causes
circuitry in D33 to select one complete pulse from the pulse trains selected in D8 and
input to D33:11. It achieves this by detecting a falling edge on the input to D33:11 to set
TIMER_STATUS high. An internal signal selects the next pulse input to D33:11 and
passes it to the gate of counter 0 of D35. The duration of this pulse is measured by
counter 0 using the 10 MHz clock at D35:9. The falling edge of the selected pulse sets
TIMER_STATUS LOW to signal the CTU that valid timer parameter data is waiting in
counter 0 to be read.
2-55
HA72500
2.3.8.1.5
SECTION 2
Monitor Fault Limit Test Mode
Monitor Fault Limit Test (MFLT) mode is a mode in which the test interrogator is used to
test the Monitor Module (1A72510). In this mode, the test interrogator creates the
parameters normally derived from the output of the transponder and feeds these to the
monitor module. The value of the parameter is varied by control from the CTU to
determine the point at which the monitor indicates a fault. To simulate the reply the type
82C54 counter/timer D34 is used. Each of the counters is loaded with a number which
gives the required TIPRF (Counter 0), Delay (Counter 1) and Spacing (Counter 2) - see
figure below.
When the signal M_FLT_EN is set high, the test interrogator no longer interrogates the
transponder and ignores any WIDTH_PULSEs produced by the reply detector. D28:13 is
switched so the selected TIPRF is M_FLT_TIPRF (from D34:10). The signal
M_FLT_REPLY produced at D29:7 (see figure below) and selected by D6 is processed
like any other reply and the parameters are extracted as described in normal mode
operation. To prevent interfering with beacon operation, signal TO_SIG_GEN is inhibited
during these tests. D6:14 also selects a replacement detected interrogation signal from
D52:10 since no signal is available on FROM_SIGN_GEN_DETECT. This signal is
required for the measurement of delay.
To test Efficiency the signal M_FLT_EFF_EN is set high, via the CTU bus. This switches
the MON_TIPRF signal to the monitor module to 10 kHz, while retaining separate CTU
control of REPLY_PULSES.
2-56
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.8.2
RF Generator 1A72516
REFER
The RF generator signal source consists of a crystal oscillator operating at a nominal

frequency of one-twelfth of the transponder receiver frequency.
Any one of five crystals G1-G5 may be selected to provide the output frequency of the
test interrogator. One crystal corresponds to the transponder receive frequency while the
other four correspond to frequencies either side of the nominal receive frequency at
160 kHz and 900 kHz.
The crystals may be selected by operating the dual-in-line switch S1 mounted on the
printed board. Access to the switch is made by withdrawing the module from the rack
and then operating the switch through the access hole in the cover of the RF generator
diecast box. An extra switch position is included to provide a CW TEST condition for
receiver AGC tests. This adds a CW signal 10 dB below the interrogation pulses.
The selected fifth-overtone crystal is connected in series resonance in an in-phase
feedback path between the emitter and base circuit of V1. Inductor L7 is used to
resonate with the stray crystal, socket and switch capacitances creating a high series
impedance and thus avoiding feedback via the stray capacitive coupling which could
cause parasitic oscillation or instability. Inductor L1 is tuned to optimise the operation of
the oscillator. Test point XT1 provides a DC level which indicates oscillator output when
monitored with a high impedance voltmeter.
Transistor V2 is configured as a grounded-base buffer amplifier and isolates the effects
of the non-linear and abrupt loading changes of the following multiplier stage from the
oscillator, as well as providing sufficient gain to drive the multiplier stages.
Each of the three multiplier stages V4 (tripler), V5 (doubler), V6 (doubler) and the
following class-A amplifier stage, V7, are pulse modulated to create the required RF
pulse envelope at the output as well as obtaining the required on/off output signal ratios.
There are two types of modulation inputs to the unit, both supplied from the pulse shape
circuitry on the modulator and detector. One is DRIVE PULSE, a square wave pulse
input at XS4 that activates V4, V6, and V7 by an on/off action; the other is a SHAPED
PULSE at input XS2 which shapes, in V5, the RF envelope.
The DRIVE IN pulse turns switch V3 and bias amplifier V8 on and supplies bias drive to
V6. V3 switches on V4, and V8 switches on V7, so that the frequency multipliers V4 and
V6 and the amplifier V7 are operating normally, ready for the shaped modulation to
develop.
The SHAPED PULSE input pulse has a constant DC pedestal voltage of approximately
1 volt and, on top of this, the trapezoidal modulation pulse will be positioned and aligned
in the centre of the DRIVE PULSE pulse.
2-57
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.8.3
Attenuator 1A69737
REFER
Interrogation pulses at the RF generator output are at a level of +11.5 dBm and pass
through a 20 dB, 50 ohms attenuator before reaching the input of the switched
attenuator connector XMA. Capacitors C1 and C2 provide DC blocking and L1 provides
a high impedance choke feed for the DC bias for the PIN diode V1. L2, C3 and C4 form
a filter section to reduce RF leakage into the DC supply lines. Resistors R1 and R2 are
selected to match the characteristics of the PIN diode such that the DC voltage applied
to XFB:1 produces an increase of 15 dB RF attenuation above the attenuation when the
potential at XFB:1 is off.
The output of the switched attenuator at XFA is then passed through a 30 dB, 50 ohms
fixed attenuator to the 30 dB directional coupler in the transponder antenna feed.
"
2.3.8.4
Modulator and Detector 1A72518
REFER
The modulator and detector operates in conjunction with the RF generator to produce
trapezoidal interrogation pulses of the correct duration and amplitude. Each pulse is
initiated by a modulation pulse coming from the test interrogator main board.
In the quiescent state, the output at N6:7 is high; the analogue multiplexer D2 is enabled
with a zero address input; N6:12 output is low and N4A is configured as a follower,
having an output voltage equal to the pulse pedestal voltage set by R37.
On arrival of a square wave pulse at XS7, the address presented to D2 changes from
00 to 11 by the direct connection of the pulse to D2:9 (A in Figure 2-18) and the action of
D1d and D1c operating on D2:10 (B in Figure 2-18). D2 now reconfigures N4A as an
integrator with C11 coupling the negative voltage step at D2:13 to drive the integrator
output up at a rate controlled by R19, R20 and C17. Simultaneously the XS8 signal,
which follows the integrator N4A output, causes the RF generator to produce an RF
pulse which increases in amplitude as the integrator output goes up. N6A changes state
as the integration voltage exceeds the offset voltage across R36 so that the N6A output
goes high.
A video amplitude-demodulated pulse from the RF generator, at XS1, follows the shape
of the RF pulse and operates as feedback into the modulator and detector to provide
automatic level control. When the RF pulse amplitude reaches the level preset by the
PULSE AMPLITUDE control R13, the video pulse amplitude will cause the comparator
N6B to change state and its output will go from a high to a low state, disabling D2 and
causing the integrator N4A to maintain a constant output voltage until the end of the
input pulse on XS7. This is shown in Figure 2-18 waveforms.
At the time when the input pulse at XS7 returns to 0 volts, D2 is again enabled and the
address presented to D2 is now 01. Now N4A is configured to integrate down at a rate
determined by R19, R20 and C17 and the positive voltage step at D2:13.
N4A will now continue to integrate down until the output of N4A reaches the pedestal
voltage plus the offset voltage across C17, and at that time the comparator N6A will
change its output state from high to low, which changes the address presented to D2 to
00 again, clamping the output of N4A at the pedestal voltage.
In this fashion a complete test interrogation pulse is produced, and is repeated at the
pulse spacing and repetition rate determined by the test interrogator main board
inputting modulation pulses to the modulator and detector.
As each pulse is produced it is necessary to establish a time reference for each pulse to
enable time periods to be measured and checked. The circuit comprising N5A and V2
2-58
HA72500
SECTION 2
acts as a peak follower and generates a DC voltage which closely follows the amplitude
of the pulse. N2A acts as a buffer for the DC voltage and this DC voltage, after
amplification by N3A, is available at XS3 as an indicator of the RF level. Half the DC
voltage is also fed to the comparator N5B, the other input of which is the detector pulses,
and N5 generates a logic level pulse whose width is equal to the half-height width of the
interrogation pulses. These pulses appear at XS4 for use in the main board.
Transistor V3 is used as a constant current load for N4A to increase its sinking capability
while V11 and V12 are emitter-follower buffer amplifiers.
To enable RF alignment of the RF generator a TEST position on switch SA is provided
to allow the square-wave modulation pulses direct from the test interrogator main board
to modulate the RF generator via V10 and with the ALC loop inoperative.
Figure 2-18
Modulator and Detector Waveforms
2-59
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.8.5
Reply Detector 1A72519
REFER
The reply detector consists of an amplitude-modulated video detector, a peak rider

circuit, an analogue multiplexer and circuitry to generate pulse representing the rise
time, fall time and width of the detected pulses.
A sample of the RF power in the antenna feeder system is coupled into the RF input
connector XC1 of the reply detector via the directional coupler in the RF panel. The
received RF power is demodulated by an envelope detector V1, and the resultant video
pulses are amplified by N1a. Resistors R3 and R4 are used to provide a small DC bias
to the detector diode V1; this enables the detector to recover signals at very low levels.
The detected signal is buffered by N3a and appears on connector XS2.
The detected video pulses as well as the detector bias voltage on V1 are fed into the
analogue 2:1 multiplexer D1. Also input to D1 are detected interrogations and the
detector bias from the RF Generator 1A72516; these signals enter the reply detector via
XS7 and XS8 respectively. A signal from a pushbutton switch TEST DETECTOR
COINCIDENCE on the front panel of the test interrogator module is used by the
multiplexer to switch between the detected replies and detector bias of either the reply
detector or the RF generator.
The TEST DETECTOR COINCIDENCE check is used to ensure that the half-height
detector in the reply detector has the same timing delay as the half-height detector in the
RF generator. Any difference in timing delay will introduce inaccuracies in the
transponder delay time measurements. The half-height signal in the reply detector
appears on connector XS4 as signal WIDTH; an alternative designation for this signal is
REPLY TIMING.
The detected signal at the output of N1a is fed into N1b where it is buffered to create the
signal REPLIES, before being passed to the peak rider circuit and the rise, fall and width
time detectors.
The peak rider consists of N5a and V3, and produces a DC voltage level representing
the peak of the detected video pulses. The peak level is buffered by N2b and amplified
by N3b and appears on connector XS3 as signal REPLY_LVL.
The buffered peak level output from N2b is fed into a resistor divider chain consisting of
R11, R12, R13 and R14. These resistors are used to create reference levels of 90% of
peak level, 50% of peak level and 10% of peak level which are fed into comparators
N4a, N4b and N5b respectively.
The other input to the comparators is the buffered video pulse signal REPLIES.
Comparator N4a produces a pulse that is low when any part of the video pulse is greater
than 90% of the peak of the pulse. Comparator N4b produces a pulse that is low when
any part of the video pulse is greater than 50% of the peak of the pulse; it is N4b that is
the half-height detector. N5b produces a pulse that is low when any part of the pulse is
greater than 10% of the peak of the pulse.
D2 and D3 are used to create three pulses named RISE, FALL and WIDTH. These
pulses represent the rise time, fall time and half-height width of the detected video
pulses. RISE is measured between 10% and 90% of pulse peak on the rising edge,
FALL is measured between 90% and 10% of the pulse peak on the falling edge, and
WIDTH is measured between consecutive 50% levels. The signals RISE, FALL and
WIDTH appear on connectors XS4, XS5 and XS6 respectively.
2-60
HA72500
Table 2-11
SECTION 2
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Test
Interrogator Module
LEGEND
TYPE
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
DC POWER ON
Pushbutton
switch
CHECK
DETECTOR
COINCIDENCE
Toggle
Switch,
centre off
Toggle
switch,
centre off
16-way
rotary switch
TEST
TRANSPONDER
DECODING
REPLY GATE
DELAY
Indicates that the MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER

switch is not in the NORMAL position.
Indicates that DC power is applied to the monitor and test
interrogator.
Connects the output of the RF generator into the reply detector,
bypassing the transponder. Is used to check that the detector stages
in the transponder have the same delay. The signals at the
INTERROGATIONS TIMING and REPLY TIMING test jacks should
match each other when this switch is pressed. This switch will
interfere with the normal operation of the monitor module connected
to the test interrogator under test.
REJECT +2us
Alters the interrogating pulse spacing outside
acceptable limits to test the transponder pulse
-2us
decoder rejection.
ACCEPT +1us
Alters the interrogating pulse spacing within
acceptable limits to test the transponder pulse
-1us
decoder acceptance
Sets accept gate timing; variable between 0 and 60 microseconds.
COARSE 16 microseconds increments.
FINE
16-way
rotary switch
1 microsecond increments.
ON
Toggle
switch,
centre off
MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR
DC POWER
Test jack
TRIGGER
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
REPLY ACCEPT
GATES
Test jack
1 us MARKERS
Test jack
+15V
Buffered pulse from the parameter extractor circuitry, defining a time

slot in which the received reply pulse should be present
(15 volts, 6 microseconds wide).
Buffered output from the timer circuitry
(5 volts, 1 microsecond period).
Buffered +15V internal supply (15 volts).
Test jack
+5V
Protected +5V internal supply (5 volts).
Test jack
DETECTED
REPLIES
The power supply output is connected to the test

interrogator and monitor regardless of other power
sources.
OFF
The power supply is disconnected from the test
interrogator and monitor.
NORMAL The test interrogator circuitry is connected to the power
supply if the input signal TI_ON from the CTU is active
(high) or TRANSPONDER POWER on the transponder
power supply is switched ON. Otherwise, the module's
circuitry is isolated from the power supply.
Buffered version of test interrogator output TI_PRF; can be used to
trigger an oscilloscope.
Test jack
Buffered output of the reply detector, which is a detected pulse

envelope representing the RF pulses transmitted from the
transponder.
DETECTED
Buffered detected pulse envelope representing the RF pulse
INTERROGATIONS generated by the test interrogator for test interrogation.
EARTH
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
Test jack
INTERROGATIONS Output pulses from the RF generator detector.

TIMING
EARTH
Test jack
REPLY TIMING
Test jack
Buffered output pulses of the reply detector.
2-61
HA72500
Table 2-12
SUBASSY
1A72515
Main PWB
Assembly,
Test
Interrogator
1A72516
RF Generator
SECTION 2
Summary of Internal Controls: Test Interrogator Module
TYPE
REF

LEGEND
Sets pulse spacing for X channel operation.
Sets pulse spacing for Y channel operation.
S4
mode
Preset
resistor
R7
TPNDR OP LVL Used to calibrate the transmitted pulse peak power.

CAL
Variable
capacitors
Inductor
C 10, 10, 14, 18, 22
6-way DIL
switch
S1
SW1
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
Variable
capacitors
Preset
resistors
Used to align the RF generator to the operating

interrogator frequencies (see Section 3.4.12).
L1
SW2
1A72517
RF Filter
1A72518
Modulator
and Detector
Slide
switch
Selects interrogations at the nominal interrogation

frequency.
Selects interrogations at 160 kHz above the nominal
interrogation frequency.
Selects interrogations at 160 kHz below the nominal
Adds a CW signal to the interrogation pulse at -10 dB.
Used to align the RF filter (see Section 3.4.13).
C1,
C2
R13
Pulse amplitude
R20
Pulse shape
R37
Pulse pedestal
Slide
switch
S1
Normal
Position for normal operation.
Test
Used during testing.
Test point
XT1
Bias voltage
Bias voltage for level detector circuitry.
Test point
XT2
Pk amp lvl
Test point
XT3
Timing pulse
DC voltage proportional to the peak amplitude of the

transmitted pulses.
Timing reference for the transmitted pulse.
Test point
XT4
Mod out
Modulation pulse to RF generator.
Test point
XT5
Ground
0 volts reference.
Test point
XT6
Ground
0 volts reference.
Used to align the pulse shape of the interrogations

produced by the RF generator (see Section 3.4.14).
2-62
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.9
Monitor Module 1A72510
REFER
The monitor module receives input signals from the associated test interrogator module
and from the antenna pickup. These signals represent operational parameters, and the
monitor applies a pass/fail check on each one. A pass/fail result is able to be read by the
control and test unit (CTU) which indicates an alarm or control action as required. A
number of voltage levels from other modules in the transponder are also input to the
monitor module where they are measured and eventually read by the CTU.
The eight monitored parameters are divided into primary and secondary categories, with
primary parameters being defined as those which could, if at fault, give rise to false
guidance information. The parameters are:
PRIMARY
PARAMETERS
Transponder delay
Transponder pulse spacing
Transponder efficiency
Transponder reply rate
SECONDARY
PARAMETERS
Transponder power output effective radiated power (ERP)

Transponder ident
Transponder antenna integrity
Transponder pulse shape
The individual monitor circuits are designed to be failsafe. As an added safeguard, the
CTU regularly initiates a test routine to check that the primary parameter monitors are
operative. If one or both primary monitor circuits do not return a fault indication in
response to this test, the CTU diagnoses a monitor fault and, because the failure
involves a primary parameter, it also initiates the control action appropriate for a primary
parameter fault.
The criteria for the pass/fail decisions for delay, spacing, efficiency, reply rate and pulse
shape measurements are essentially the same. The frequency of success is compared
with a predetermined frequency; hence each of those circuits involves an up/down
counter that determines the higher frequency.
The monitors are independent of interrogating pulse repetition frequency, and exhibit no
drift error. The desired fault limits are either pre-wired or programmable by switches.
The ident monitor extracts ident messages from the transponder output pulses by means
of a continuous pulse spacing decoder. This decoder produces a pulse (called the ident
spacing pulse) which is measured and checked to see if the spacing is within a window
centred on the period of the 1350 Hz ident pulse train. An ident fault will be indicated if:
a. continuous ident keying extends for more than 10 seconds; or
b. the ident message extends for more than 10 seconds; or
c. an ident message is absent for more than a preset 45 to 75 seconds interval.
The recovered 1350 Hz ident tone is used for an audible check of ident message
integrity. The recovered ident mark keying waveform is used to inhibit the delay and
efficiency monitors, thus preventing them indicating spurious faults during ident.
Real-time fault indicators (light emitting diodes) are included for each monitored
parameter. Two LED indicators and associated output lines are provided to show if a
real-time primary and/or secondary fault exists.
2-63
HA72500
SECTION 2
The transponder output pulses sensed by the antenna pickup probe are detected and
their peak value obtained; this peak value is then compared with a DC level preset to the
required fault level. The value of this fault level setting can be checked under the control
of the CTU.
A check of antenna integrity is made by the antenna integrity monitor. This check
involves two fault parameters. "Antenna integrity 1 " fault indicates two or more open
circuit antenna elements, an antenna short circuit or an antenna not connected.
"Antenna integrity 2" fault indicates a single open circuit antenna element. These signals
are read by the CTU to take action as appropriate.
Voltage levels representing monitored parameters from various other stages in the
transponder are input to the monitor. These levels are converted by an analogue-todigital converter into digital numbers that are read and processed by the CTU.
The following circuit features ensure failsafe monitoring:
The choice of primary fault line outputs as zero volts.
The inclusion of timeout monostables to ensure that a failure in any stage of a

parameter monitor will signal a fault in that parameter. Delay, spacing, efficiency,
rate, ident and pulse shape monitors involve counters that are continually
checked for operation. Failure to count results in a fault output.
Inputs from other boards are buffered and level shifted where appropriate. Input
pull-down resistors ensure that floating inputs will be driven to a state that will
produce a fault.
An automatic test routine is applied to the delay and spacing monitors to check
that they are capable of producing a fault.
2-64
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.9.1
Main PWB Assembly Monitor Module 1A72511
REFER
The monitor main board receives pulses from the test interrogator main board, each
pulse having a duration proportional to the parameter being tested. Each parameter is
tested for certain limits and is accepted or rejected in accordance with preset conditions.
The monitor main board indicates alarms as appropriate, and signals the CTU for the
relevant indications and actions.
2.3.9.1.1
Figure 2-19
Delay Monitor
Delay Monitor
The transponder delay is continuously being represented in the test interrogator by a

positive going pulse with a duration equal to the delay time. This pulse appears as
DLY_DUR_PULSE, and it is accessible at test point XT6.
A test of the transponder delay time is initiated by the PRF pulse (XT9) loading
presettable counter D30 with the binary values held on S12. During the course of a test
a second window count is loaded from switch S9.
The values held on switches S12 and S9 are indicative of the reject limits on the
transponder delay. Each count on the switches represents 0.1 microseconds actual time.
The signal DLY_COUNT appears on test point XT5 and the signal DLY_DUR_PULSE
appears on XT6. These two test points can be used in conjunction with an oscilloscope
to check the accuracy of the switch settings. Figure 2-20 illustrates this check.
2-65
HA72500
Figure 2-20
SECTION 2
Delay Monitor Waveforms
For an X channel the transponder delay can be between 35 and 50 microseconds and
for a Y channel between 50 and 56 microseconds. The description which follows
assumes a nominal transponder delay of 50 microseconds
When the counter D30 has been loaded with the preset values held on switch S12 it
waits for the arrival of DLY_DUR_PULSE. The rising edge of this pulse initiates the first
down count that will continue while DLY_DUR_PULSE is present. It takes one clock
cycle (100 nanoseconds) to initiate the first down count. If the counter reaches zero and
DLY_DUR_PULSE is still present the preset value on switch S9 is loaded into the
counter D30 and a second down count is initiated after 1 clock cycle. If the falling edge
of the DLY_DUR_PULSE occurs before the first count has reached zero no delay_OK
flag is set and the second count is not started.
The signal DLY_COUNT at test point XT5 gives an indication of the lengths of the first
and second down counts. If and only if the falling edge of DLY_DUR_PULSE occurs
after the end of the first count and before the end of the second count will a delay_OK
flag be set. The delay_OK flag is set on the falling edge of DLY_DUR_PULSE and a
non-zero second count and is reset when the second count goes to zero. If the second
down count reaches zero and DLY_DUR_PULSE is still asserted then no delay_OK flag
is set. The existence of the delay_OK flag indicates that the DLY_DUR_PULSE is within
the window of acceptable delay limits.
The primary error counter D37 is made up of two 3-bit up/down counters D37a and
D37b. In a non-fault state the delay_OK flag and PRF pulses are fed into D37a. Within
D37 the PRF rate is reduced to 33% of the original PRF rate. The PRF/3 rate is used to
count the 3-bit counter toward zero. The delay_OK flags are used to count the 3-bit
counter towards 7. If the delay_OK flag rate exceeds PRF/3 rate then the primary error
counter will count to 7 and give no fault indications. If the delay_OK rate is exceeded by
PRF/3 rate the counter will count to zero and a fault indication will be given.
The delay_OK rate will be exceeded by PRF/3 if the DLY_DUR_PULSEs are continually
outside the window of acceptable delay limits or no valid DLY_DUR_PULSEs are
returned from the test interrogator due to low beacon efficiency. In either case a DELAY
fault must be raised. If a fault is to be raised the signal delay_fault_indication from D37a
is asserted. This signal is input to the timeout monostable D41b.
2-66
HA72500
SECTION 2
Timeout monostable D41b is used to ensure that the counter device D30 is operating.
The signal DLY_COUNT (XT5) is used to continually retrigger D41b. In the event of a
delay_fault_indication being asserted from counter D37a the monostable D41b is reset
and a positive going DELAY FAULT is output from D41b:9. This timeout monostable
also has the effect that if the DLY_DUR_PULSE is not encountered then the retriggering
signal DLY_COUNT will not be produced and so the monostable will timeout and the
DELAY FAULT signal from D41b:9 will be asserted.
The DELAY FAULT signal from D41b is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
Delay is monitored on every second interrogation when the RF level is -69 dBm. The
delay monitor circuit is therefore enabled by a 50 Hz square wave (25 Hz in a dual
system) from the test interrogator called DELAY_MON_EN. This signal is applied to the
inhibit driver device D51:7 and fed to the primary error counter D37:23 as a delay_inhibit
signal. When this signal is asserted the primary error counter is frozen so that counting
is only permitted during the time when the RF signal is high.
During the transmission of an ident mark an ident_inhibit signal is fed into D51:5. This
signal will also cause the delay_inhibit to be asserted and prevent D37a counting. By
using the delay_inhibit signal from D51 a delay_fault will only be registered when this
signal is not asserted so that false fault indications will not be given during efficiency
testing and ident mark.
2.3.9.1.2
Figure 2-21
Spacing Monitor
Spacing Monitor
A test of the transponder spacing time is initiated by the PRF pulse (XT9) loading
presettable counter D31 with the binary values held on S13. During the course of a test
a second window count is loaded from switch S10.
2-67
HA72500
Figure 2-22
SECTION 2
Spacing Monitor Waveforms
The SPACING FAULT signal from D41a is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
A signal from the binary switch S13, called CODING_MODE_MON is used by the CTU
to determine the operating mode of the beacon, either X or Y channel.
The signal SPAC_COUNT appears on test point XT14 and the signal
SPAC_DUR_PULSE appears on XT8. These two test points can be used in conjunction
with an oscilloscope to check the accuracy of the switch settings. Figure 2-22 illustrates
this check.
transponder spacing. Each count on the switches represents 0.1 microseconds actual
time.
For an X channel the nominal window of acceptable transponder spacing is between
11.5 microseconds and 12.5 microseconds. For a Y channel the nominal accept window
is between 29.5 microseconds and 30.5 microseconds.
A measurement of spacing duration is initiated by the rising edge of a TIPFIF pulse input
to spacing counter D31. This edge causes the counter to reset to zero regardless of the
state of the counter before the edge. Within D31 the TIPRF pulse is delayed by 1 clock
cycle (100 nanoseconds) and then used to load the counter with the preset value held
on switch S13. By clearing the counter before loading the preset values the initial count
value can be guaranteed.
When the counter D31 has been loaded with the preset values held on switch S13 it
waits for the arrival of SPAC_DUR_PULSE. The rising edge of this pulse initiates the
first down count that will continue while SPAC_DUR_PULSE is present. It takes one
clock cycle (100 nanoseconds) to initiate the first down count. If the counter reaches
zero and SPAC_DUR_PULSE is still present the preset value on switch S10 is loaded
into the counter D31 and a second down count is initiated after 1 clock cycle. If the
falling edge of the SPAC_DUR_PULSE occurs before the first count has reached zero
no spacing_OK flag is set and the second count is not started.
2-68
HA72500
SECTION 2
The signal SPAC_COUNT at test point XT14 gives an indication of the lengths of the
first and second down counts. If and only if the falling edge of SPAC_DUR_PULSE
occurs after the end of the first count and before the end of the second count will a
spacing_OK flag be set. The spacing_OK flag is set on the falling edge of
SPAC_DUR_PULSE and a non-zero second count and is reset when the second count
goes to zero. If the second down count reaches zero and SPAC_DUR_PULSE is still
asserted then no spacing_OK flag is set. The existence of the spacing_OK flag indicates
that the SPAC_DUR_PULSE is within the window of acceptable spacing limits.
The primary error counter D37 is made up of two 3-bit up/down counters D37a and
D37c. In a non-fault state the spacing_OK flag and PRF pulses are fed into D37b. Within
count the 3-bit counter toward zero. The spacing_OK flags are used to count the 3-bit
counter towards 7. If the spacing_OK flag rate exceeds PRF/3 rate then the primary
error counter will count to 7 and give no fault indications. If the spacing_OK rate is
exceeded by PRF/3 rate the counter will count to zero and a fault indication will be given.
The spacing_OK rate will be exceeded by PRF/3 if the SPAC_DUR_PULSEs are
continually outside the window of acceptable spacing limits or no valid
SPAC_DUR_PULSES are returned from the test interrogator due to low beacon
efficiency. In either case a SPACING fault must be raised. If a fault is to be raised the
signal spacing_fault_indication from D37c is asserted. This signal is input to the timeout
monostable D41a.
Timeout monostable D41a is used to ensure that the counter device D31 is operating.
The signal SPAC_COUNT (XT14) is used to continually retrigger D41a. In the event of a
spacing_fault_indication being asserted from counter D37c, the monostable D41a is
reset and a positive going SPACING FAULT is output from D41a:7. This timeout
monostable also has the effect that if the SPAC_DUR_PULSE is not encountered then
the retriggering signal SPAC_COUNT will not be produced and so the monostable will
timeout and the SPACING FAULT from D41a:7 will be asserted.
2.3.9.1.3
Monitor Self Test
An automatic test routine is applied to both the delay and spacing monitors to check that
fault outputs can be obtained. A positive going signal is written to the monitor main board
from the CTU and is applied to MON_TEST input D51:5. This signal has the effect of
altering the value set on the preset switches S12 and S13 which are loaded into the
counters D30 and D31 respectively. The value loaded into each counter is altered by
32 counts (3.2 microseconds) which is sufficient to cause both delay and spacing
monitors to fail. The CTU reads faults from both monitors indicating each parameter has
failed and terminates the test, thereby restoring normal operation. The test is repeated
every 16 seconds, and at monitoring PRF takes approximately 0.1 seconds to complete.
2-69
HA72500
2.3.9.1.4
Figure 2-23
SECTION 2
Efficiency Monitor
Efficiency Monitor
The efficiency monitor maintains a running count of each decoded reply and the PRF,
and indicates when the decoded reply rate falls below 60% of the PRF count. This
indication is signalled as an efficiency fault.
The buffered signal representing PRF pulses called XTIPRF is input to a rate multiplier
D36, configured to pass 60% of its input pulses to its output. Counter D49 uses these
signals as an up count pulse.
The buffered signal representing decoded replies called XREPLY_PULSES is used by
counter D49 as a down count pulse. Provided the down count pulse rate is greater than
the up count pulse rate the count value will stay at zero. If the decoded reply rate falls
below 60% the up count rate will be greater than the down count rate, D49 will count up
and be held at a maximum value of 15. At this point an efficiency_error flag will be
asserted.
After an efficiency_error flag has been raised it will be reset by an increase in the reply
rate to greater than 60% of PRF. At this time D49 will begin to count down from the
maximum count of 15. When D49 has a count value of 0 the efficiency_error flag is
reset.
To ensure fail-safe operation a clock signal created in counter D49 from the input
XREPLY_PULSES is used to retrigger a timeout monostable D35a. If counter D49
should fail or XREPLY_PULSES not be present this monostable will timeout and will
assert an EFFICIENCY FAULT D35a:7. In the event of the efficiency_error flag being
asserted from counter D49:8, the monostable D35a is reset and a positive going
EFFICIENCY FAULT is output from D35a:7.
The EFFICIENCY FAULT signal from D35a is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry
D13.
2-70
HA72500
SECTION 2
Efficiency is monitored on every second interrogation when the RF level is -84 dBm. The
efficiency monitor circuit is therefore enabled by a 50 Hz square wave (25 Hz in a dual
system) from the test interrogator called EFF_MON_EN. This signal is applied to the
inhibit driver device D51:8 and fed into counter D49:10 as an EFF_INHIBIT signal. When
this signal is asserted the counter D49 is frozen so that counting is only permitted during
the time when the RF signal is low.
During the transmission of an ident mark an ident_inhibit signal is fed into D51:5. This
signal will also cause EFF_INHIBIT to be asserted and prevent D49 counting. By using
the EFF_INHIBIT signal from D51, efficiency faults will only be registered when this
signal is not asserted so that false fault indications will not be given during delay testing
and ident mark.
2.3.9.1.5
Reply Rate Monitor
This section of the monitor detects if the transponder reply rate falls below a preset limit
of 833 Hz or rises above a preset limit of 3 kHz. The reply rate monitor consists of two
parts. The first part checks the minimum reply rate and the second checks the maximum
reply rate. The buffered signal representing all replies called XDETD_TX_PULSES is
used as input to both parts. The counter D45 consist of parts D45a and D45b. Each part
functions identically.
Figure 2-24
Rate Monitor
2-71
HA72500
2.3.9.1.5.1
SECTION 2
Minimum Reply Rate Monitor
The signal XDETD_Tx_PULSES is input to a rate multiplier D34, configured to pass 60%
of its input pulses to its output. Since XDETD_Tx_PULSES consists of pulse pairs its
frequency is twice the reply rate. The down count pulse rate used by counter D45a is
calculated according to the following formula:
(reply rate) x 2 x 0.6 = down count pulse rate.
Example: for reply rate = 833 Hz, the down count pulse rate = 1 kHz.
The clock signal 1kHz_CLK is used by counter D45a as an up count pulse. Provided the
reply rate is greater than 833 Hz, the down count pulse rate will be greater than the up
count pulse rate of 1 kHz. This will cause D45a to count down to and be held at zero. If
the reply rate falls below 833 Hz the up count rate will be greater than the down count
rate, D45a will count up and be held at a maximum value of 15. At this point a rate_error
flag will be asserted.
2.3.9.1.5.2
Maximum Reply Rate Monitor
The clock signal 1kHz_CLK is input to rate multiplier D39, configured to pass 60% of its
input pulses to its output. This output used by counter D45b as a down count pulse of
frequency 600 Hz.
The signal XDETD_Tx_PULSES is input to a rate multiplier D43, configured to pass 10%
of its input pulses to its output. The up count pulse rate used by counter D45b is
calculated as:
(reply rate) x 2 x 0.1 = up count pulse rate.
Example: for reply rate = 3 kHz, the up count pulse rate = 600 Hz.
Provided the reply rate is less than 3 kHz, the down count pulse rate from D39 of 600 Hz
will be greater than the up count pulse rate. This will cause D45b to count down to and
be held at zero. If the reply rate rises above 3 kHz the up count rate will be greater than
the down count rate and D45b will count up and be held at a maximum value of 15. At
this point a rate_error flag will be asserted.
2.3.9.1.5.3
Fault Processing
After a rate_error flag has been raised it will be reset by the rate returning to a non-fault
condition. This means that if the rate_error flag was raised by the reply rate falling below
833 Hz the rate must increase to above 833 Hz to reset the flag. If the rate_error flag
was raised by the reply rate exceeding 3 kHz it must fall below 3 kHz to reset the flag. In
either case a return to a non-fault state will cause D45a or D45b to count down from the
maximum count of 15. When D45a or D45b has a count value of 0 the rate_error flag is
reset.
To ensure fail-safe operation a clock signal created in counter D45 from the input
XDETD_Tx_PULSES is used to retrigger a timeout monostable D35b. If counter D45
should fail or XDETD_Tx_PULSES not be present this monostable will timeout and will
assert a RATE FAULT from D35b:9. In the event of the rate_error flag being asserted
from counter D45b:8, triggering of the monostable is prevented, and a positive going
RATE FAULT is output from D35b:9, after the timeout period.
The RATE FAULT from D35b is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
2-72
HA72500
2.3.9.1.6
Figure 2-25
SECTION 2
Ident Monitor
Ident Monitor
Each ident message transmitted by the transponder consists of pulse pairs sent at a rate
of 1350 Hz for the duration of each Morse code 'mark'.
The ident monitor scans all reply pulse pairs to identify the trains of pulse pairs at the
ident pulse rate. Once an ident message has been identified the monitor checks that the
messages are occurring within preset timing limits.
During the transmission of an ident mark the normal delay and efficiency monitoring is
suspended as no replies are being sent by the transmitter during this period. Measuring
these parameters at this time would result in a false error indication.
The ident monitoring circuitry consists of three main devices. D33 extracts a single pulse
representing the spacing between pulse pairs from the incoming XDETD_Tx_PULSES
signal; this pulse is called ident_pulse. During ident message transmission the spacing
between pulse pairs is 1/1350 Hz or 741 microseconds. D40 uses ident_pulse in the
same way as the delay and spacing monitors and ensures that the period of this pulse
falls within a specific range of values called ident_window.
The ident window is centred around 741 microseconds with a variation of
4 microseconds. If ident_pulse falls within the ident_window an ident_keying signal is
passed to D47, which ensures that the Morse code marks do not violate any ident timing
limits. These limits are:
1.
Ident messages shall occur within a preset interval (adjustable from 2 to

128 seconds by S8 - connected to D33).
2.
An ident mark shall not last more than 10 seconds.
2-73
HA72500
SECTION 2
3.
An ident mark shall not inhibit delay and efficiency measurement for more than
2 seconds.
4.
An ident message shall not last for longer than 10 seconds.
If any of the above limits are violated an ident_error is indicated.

All ident message information is extracted from the buffered signal
XDETD_Tx_PULSES. When the rising edge of the first pulse of an
XDETD_TX_PULSES pulse pair is encountered on input D33:2 a pulse of 1 clock cycle
duration is created and output from D33:10. This pulse is called IDENT_DECIDE. The
clock input to D33 for ident message extraction is 1 MHz.
The pulse IDENT_DECIDE is input to monostable D38a:4 which produces a pulse,
IDENT_GATE, of 40 microseconds duration to be fed back into D33:14. This gating
pulse is used to gate out the second pulse in the XDETD_Tx_PULSE pulse pair. If this
pulse is not gated out another IDENT_DECIDE pulse will be created on the rising edge
of the second pulse. If this occurs, erroneous information about the pulse pair spacing
will be output from D33 as IDENT_PULSE.
The pulse IDENT_DECIDE generates the signals IDENT_LOAD and IDENT_PULSE
within D33. IDENT_PULSE, at D33:18, is a 3 microseconds negative-going pulse, with a
pulse spacing equal to the spacing between the pulses XDETD_TX_PULSE. It is used
by D40 to determine if the spacing between transmitter output pulse pairs falls within the
ident window.
The IDENT_DECIDE pulse is used by D40 to determine if IDENT_PULSE from the
previous measurement is still high during the ident window generated within D40. If this
is the case then the XDETD_Tx_PULSES pulse pair spacing is at the ident rate of
1350 Hz and output D40:18 is held high. D40:18 is called IDENT_KEYING and
represents the envelope of the ident message pulse pairs.
IDENT_DECIDE is also used to create the pulse IDENT_CLEAR in D33. This pulse,
output from D33:22, is of 1 clock cycle duration and is used by D40 to reset its internal
counter to zero after the previous ident spacing measurement.
IDENT_CLEAR is used to create the pulse IDENT_LOAD in D33. This pulse, output
from D33:15, is of 1 clock cycle duration and is used by D40 to preload its internal
counter to the preset value representing the ident rate pulse pair spacing of
741 microseconds (the number actually loaded into the counter is 738 since three clock
periods are used in creating the control pulses IDENT_DECIDE, IDENT_CLEAR and
IDENT_LOAD).
IDENT_KEYING from D40:18 will be high during a Morse code 'mark' and low during a
Morse code 'space'. This signal is input to D47.
To prevent random squitter pulse pairs of the correct ident spacing being recognised as
valid IDENT_KEYING a digital fitter is used in D47. This filter requires at least three
pulse pairs at the correct ident spacing before it will recognise an ident message. Valid
ident keying is output at D47:7 as the signal REC_IDENT_KEY to the CTU. Valid ident
keying is also output from D47:21 to the inhibit driver device D51:6 as IDENT_INHIBIT,
to disable the monitoring of delay and efficiency during an ident mark.
Once valid ident keying has been recognised by D47 an internal counter of 10 seconds
is started. If valid ident keying extends beyond the 10 second limit an IDENT_ERROR
flag is raised. After 2 seconds of continuous valid ident keying the signal IDENT_INHIBIT
is disabled. This enables delay and efficiency measurements to resume.
2-74
HA72500
SECTION 2
The signal REC_IDENT_TONE is output from D47:10 and used by the CTU to give an
audible check of the ident message being transmitted by the beacon. This signal is
created by gating the valid ident keying signal with the IDENT_GATE pulse from D38a:6.
IDENT_GATE represents a 1350 Hz tone. The REC_IDENT_TONE signal is also input
to D38b:12.
D38b is used to create a pulse called IDENT_CODE which will remain high during an
entire ident message. The output of this pulse from D38b:10 is input to D47 where it
initiates a count of 10 seconds. If this count reaches 10 the ident message has extended
beyond the specified limit of 10 seconds and an IDENT_ERROR flag is raised.
The inverse of IDENT_CODE is output from D38:9 and input to D33:11. This signal,
IDENT_MESSAGE_SPACING, represents the spacing between ident messages.
Preloading of the binary value held on switch S8 is initiated by a count of zero in D33
(the power on condition) or the rising edge of IDENT_MESSAGE_SPACING. After
preloading the counter in D33 a down count is immediately started. The value held on
S8 represents the maximum spacing between ident messages in seconds. If the count
reaches zero a valid ident message has not been received within the maximum time and
an IDENT_SPACING_ERROR flag is raised in D33:21. This flag is input to D47. Switch
S8 can be set for a maximum ident message spacing of 2 to 128 seconds (although it
would normally be set in the range 45 to 75 seconds).
To ensure fail safe operation the signal IDENT_LOAD is used to retrigger a timeout
monostable D42a. If D33 should fail or XDETD_Tx_PULSES not be present this
monostable will timeout and will assert an ident fault signal from D42a:7. In the event of
the IDENT_ERROR flag being asserted from counter D47:18, the monostable D42a is
reset and a positive going IDENT FAULT is output from D42a:7.
The IDENT FAULT from D42a is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
2.3.9.1.7
Figure 2-26
Effective Radiated Power Monitor

Effective Radiated Power Monitor
2-75
HA72500
SECTION 2
The effective radiated power (ERP) monitor receives from the Peak Power Monitor
1A72512 a DC level representing the transponder ERP. This circuitry also incorporates
an ERP monitor fault limit check controlled by the CTU.
The input from the Peak Power Monitor 1A72512 is called POWER_LEVEL and appears
on test point XT2. At commissioning, the variable resistor R87 is used to adjust the
voltage on XT2 to be equal to 2.50 +0.01 volts. The voltage on XT2 is input to 8:1
multiplexer, D5:13, and to quad 2:1 multiplexer D1:12. In normal operation the control
signal PWR_TESTEN from the CTU will cause POWER_LEVEL to be output from
D1:14. This output is fed into comparator N9:10.
The switch S7 is used to set the ERP monitor fault alarm level on an accumulative basis.
Each additional switch setting reduces the fault alarm level a further 1 dB. The 0 dB level
is set at commissioning by R87. The input that appears on N9:11 is a voltage that
represents the fault alarm level.
The power level at N9:10 and the fault alarm level at N9:11 are compared. While the
power level is greater than the fault alarm level no POWER FAULT is indicated. Should
the power level fall below the fault alarm level a POWER FAULT will be indicated and
the output sent to the fault line driver D13.
During ERP monitor fault limit test operation the control lines PWR_TEST0 2 from the
CTU are used to control D5. The software on the CTU will cycle through the inputs to
D5. These inputs represent the following monitor fault levels:
The power level set by R87. This is the 0 dB level.
Voltages representing -0.5 dB to -6.5 dB levels in -1 dB steps.
The monitor fault level output of D5:3 is fed into D1. The control signal from the CTU
PWR_TESTEN selects the monitor fault level input to D1 to be output to N9, instead of
the power level.
By cycling through the monitor fault levels and comparing these to the fault alarm level,
the CTU can determine the fault alarm level set on the ERP monitor. The CTU will
continue to cycle through the inputs to D5 until a POWER FAULT is indicated. When the
POWER FAULT is indicated the input monitor fault level to D5 that forced the POWER
FAULT is read by the CTU and returned as the ERP monitor fault limit.
2-76
HA72500
2.3.9.1.8
Figure 2-27
SECTION 2
Antenna Integrity Monitor
Antenna Integrity Monitor
The antenna integrity monitor is used to ensure that all of the elements in the antenna of
the transponder are operational. If elements are faulty an indication of the fault is given
by this monitor. Two antenna integrity faults are indicated:
Antenna integrity 1 fault is indicated if the antenna is not present, if the antenna
is short circuited or if two or more elements have failed open circuit.
Antenna integrity 2 fault is indicated if one element of the antenna has failed
open circuit.
The antenna can be represented by 10 parallel 10 kilohm loads, one load for each
element. This represents an equivalent load seen by the antenna integrity monitor of
1 kilohm. As each element in the antenna fails the effective load increases. A constant
current source made from transistors V6 and V4 and associated components ensures
that a current of less than 4 mA is fed into this effective load. An identical current
produced by V2 is fed into an external 1 kilohm reference resistor. This produces a set of
reference voltages that are input to the comparator network formed by quad comparator
N2.
The external reference resistor of 1 kilohm is located on the RF Panel PWB Assembly
1A/2A72547. A reference resistor of 1 kilohm is fed by the same current source as feeds
the effective antenna load. The voltage produced across the reference resistor is
buffered and multiplied by 1.18 in amplifier N1. The output from this amplifier is fed into
the comparator network formed by N2.
The reference input to comparator N2a:7 represents a voltage 1.18 times the voltage
produced by the effective antenna load of a fully functioning antenna. Should a multiple
element failure occur then the effective antenna load, connected to N2a:6, will increase
and the current source will produce a voltage across this load greater than the reference
voltage. This will cause an ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_1 FAULT.
2-77
HA72500
SECTION 2
The reference input to comparator N2b:5 represents a voltage 1.06 times the voltage
produced by the effective antenna load of a fully functioning antenna. Should a single
element failure occur, the effective antenna load, connected to N2b:4, will increase and
the current source will produce a voltage across this load greater than the reference
voltage. This will cause an ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_2 FAULT.
The reference input to comparator N2c:8 represents a voltage 0.2 times the voltage
produced by the effective antenna load of a fully functioning antenna. Should the
antenna be short circuited the effective antenna load, connected to N2c:9, is less than
200 ohms and the current source will produce a voltage across this load less the
reference voltage. This will cause an ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_1 FAULT.
If the antenna is not connected the current source has no load and the voltage will be
pulled up by the power supply to greater than the reference voltage in N2a. This will
cause an ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_1 FAULT.
The output of N2a and N2c are wired ORed together so that a fault indication on either
will cause an ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_1 FAULT.
Both fault lines ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_1 FAULT and ANTENNA_INTEGRITY_2
FAULT are input to fault line driver D13.
"
2.3.9.1.9
Pulse Shape Monitor
REFER
Figure 2-29
The pulse shape monitor takes its inputs as a series of positive going pulses
representing rise, fall and width times of the transponder output pulses. These pulses
are created in the test interrogator.
The width pulse is monitored to ensure that the width of the transponder output pulses is
within a preset range of values. The width pulse is measured from the 50% points on the
transponder output pulses.
The rise pulse and the fall pulse are monitored to ensure that the rise time and fall time
of the transponder output pulses are less than preset values. Both rise pulse and fall
pulse are measured between 10% and 90% points on the transponder output pulses.
Width pulse monitoring is achieved with the same circuit configuration used in the delay
and spacing monitors. A similar procedure is used to preset the switches S1 and S4.
A test of the transponder pulse width is initiated by the PRF pulse (XT9) loading
presettable counter D9 with the binary values held on S1. During the course of a test a
second window count is loaded from switch S4.
transponder width. Each count on the switches represents 0.1 microseconds actual time.
2-78
HA72500
Figure 2-28
SECTION 2
Width Monitor Waveforms
The signal WIDTH_COUNT appears on test point XT7 and the signal WIDTH_PULSE
appears on XT11. These two test points can be monitored with an oscilloscope to check
the accuracy of the switch settings. Figure 2-28 illustrates this check.
When the counter D9 has been loaded with the preset values held on switch S1 it waits
for the arrival of WIDTH_PULSE. The rising edge of this pulse initiates the first down
count that will continue while WIDTH_PULSE is present. It takes one clock cycle
(100 nanoseconds) to initiate the first down count. If the counter reaches zero and
WIDTH_PULSE is still present the preset value on switch S4 is loaded into the counter
D9 and a second down count is initiated after 1 clock cycle. If the falling edge of the
WIDTH_PULSE occurs before the first count has reached zero no width_OK flag is set
and the second count is not started.
The signal WIDTH_COUNT at test point XT7 gives an indication of the lengths of the
first and second down counts. If and only K the falling edge of WIDTH_PULSE occurs
after the end of the first count and before the end of the second count will a width_OK
flag be set. The width_OK flag is set on the falling edge of WIDTH_PULSE and a nonzero second count and is reset when the second count goes to zero. If the second down
count reaches zero and WIDTH_PULSE is still asserted then no width_OK flag is set.
The existence of the width_OK flag indicates that the WIDTH_PULSE is within the
window of acceptable width limits.
The pulse-shape error counter D23 is made up of two 3-bit up/down counters D23a and
D23b. In a non-fault state the width_OK flag and PRF pulses are fed into D23a. Within
count the 3-bit counter toward zero. The width_OK flags are used to count the 3-bit
counter towards 7. If the width_OK flag rate exceeds PRF/3 rate then the pulse - shape
error counter will count to 7 and give no fault indications. If the width_OK rate is
exceeded by PRF/3 rate the counter will count to zero and a fault indication will be given.
2-79
HA72500
Figure 2-29
SECTION 2
Pulse Shape Monitor
2-80
HA72500
SECTION 2
The width_OK rate will be exceeded by PRF/3 if the WIDTH_PULSEs are continually
outside the window of acceptable width limits or no valid WIDTH_PULSEs are returned
from the test interrogator due to low beacon efficiency. In either case a WIDTH fault
must be raised. If a fault is to be raised the signal width_fault_indication from D23a is
asserted. This signal is input to the timeout monostable D18b.
The signal WIDTH_COUNT (XT7) is used to continually retrigger D18b. In the event of a
width_fault_indication being asserted from counter D23a the monostable D18a is reset
and a positive going WIDTH FAULT is output from D18b:9. This timeout monostable
also has the effect that if the WIDTH_PULSE is not encountered then the retriggering
signal WIDTH_COUNT will not be produced and so the monostable will timeout and the
WIDTH FAULT signal from D18b:9 will be asserted.
The WIDTH FAULT signal from D18b is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
A test of the transponder pulse rise time is initiated by the PRF pulse (XT9) loading
presettable counter D10 with the binary values held on S3.
The value held on switch S3 is indicative of the maximum rise time of the transponder
pulse. Each count on the switches represents 0.1 microseconds actual time.
Figure 2-30
Rise Time Monitor Waveforms
for the arrival of RISE_PULSE. The rising edge of this pulse initiates a down count that
will continue while RISE_PULSE is present. It takes one clock cycle (100 nanoseconds)
to initiate the down count. If the falling edge of the RISE_PULSE occurs before the first
count has reached zero a rise_OK flag is set.
The signal RISE_COUNT at test point XT15 gives an indication of the lengths of the
down count. If and only if the falling edge of RISE_PULSE occurs before the end of the
count will a rise_OK flag be set. The rise_OK flag is set on the falling edge of
RISE_PULSE and a non-zero count and is reset when the count goes to zero. If the
down count reaches zero and RISE_PULSE is still asserted then no rise_OK flag is set.
The existence of the rise_OK flag indicates that the RISE_PULSE is less than the
maximum rise time limit.
2-81
HA72500
SECTION 2
The pulse_shape error counter D23 is made up of two 3-bit up/down counters D23a and
D23b. Only D23b is used for rise time measurements. In a non-fault state the rise_OK
flag and PRF pulses are fed into D23b. Within D23 the PRF rate is reduced to 33% of
the original PRF rate. The PRF/3 rate is used to count the 3-bit counter toward zero. The
rise_OK flags are used to count the 3-bit counter towards 7. If the rise_OK flag rate
exceeds PRF/3 rate then the pulse_shape error counter will count to 7 and give no fault
indications. If the rise_OK rate is exceeded by PRF/3 rate the counter will count to zero
and a fault indication will be given.
The rise_OK rate will be exceeded by PRF/3 if the RISE_PULSEs are continually
greater than the maximum rise time limit or no valid RISE_PULSEs are returned from
the test interrogator due to low beacon efficiency. In either case a PULSE SHAPE fault
must be raised. If a fault is to be raised the signal rise_fault_indication from D23b is
asserted. This signal is input to the timeout monostable D42b.
The signal RISE_COUNT is used to continually retrigger D42b. In the event of a
rise_fault_indication being asserted from counter D23b the monostable D42b is reset
and a positive going RISE FAULT is output from D42b:9. This timeout monostable also
has the effect that if the RISE_PULSE is not encountered then the retriggering signal
RISE_COUNT will not be produced and so the monostable will timeout and the RISE
FAULT signal from D42b:9 will be asserted.
The RISE FAULT signal from D42b is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
Monitoring of rise pulses and fall pulses is accomplished using identical circuitry.
A test of the transponder pulse fall time is initiated by the PRF pulse (XT9) loading
presettable counter D11 with the binary values held on S2.
Figure 2-31
Fall Time Monitor Waveforms
The values held on switches S2 are indicative of the maximum fall time of the
transponder pulse. Each count on the switches represents 0.1 microseconds actual time.
for the arrival of FALL_PULSE. The rising edge of this pulse initiates a down count that
will continue while FALL_PULSE is present. It takes one clock cycle (100 nanoseconds)
to initiate the down count. If the falling edge of the FALL_PULSE occurs before the first
count has reached zero a fall_OK flag is set.
2-82
HA72500
SECTION 2
The signal FALL_COUNT at test point XT16 gives an indication of the lengths of the
down count. If and only if the falling edge of FALL_PULSE occurs before the end of the
count will a fall_OK flag be set. The fall_OK flag is set on the falling edge of
FALL_PULSE and a non-zero count and is reset when the count goes to zero. If the
down count reaches zero and FALL_PULSE is still asserted then no fall_OK flag is set.
The existence of the fall_OK flag indicates that the FALL_PULSE is less than the
maximum fall time limit.
The pulse-shape error counter D17 is made up of two 3-bit up/down counters D17a and
D17b. Only D17a is used for fall time measurements. In a non-fault state the fall_OK flag
and PRF pulses are fed into D17a. Within D17 the PRF rate is reduced to 33% of the
original PRF rate. The PRF/3 rate is used to count the 3-bit counter toward zero. The
fall_OK flags are used to count the 3-bit counter towards 7. If the fall_OK flag rate
exceeds PRF/3 rate then the pulse_shape error counter will count to 7 and give no fault
indications. If the fall_OK rate is exceeded by PRF/3 rate the counter will count to zero
and a fault indication will be given.
The fall_OK rate will be exceeded by PRF/3 if the FALL_PULSEs are continually greater
than the maximum fall time limit or no valid FALL_PULSEs are returned from the test
interrogator due to low beacon efficiency. In either case a PULSE SHAPE fault must be
raised. If a fault is to be raised the signal fall_fault_indication from D17a is asserted. This
signal is input to the timeout monostable D18a.
A timeout monostable D18a is used to ensure that the counter device D11 is operating.
The signal FALL_COUNT is used to continually retrigger D18a. In the event of a
fall_fault_indication being asserted from counter D17a the monostable D18a is reset and
a positive going FALL FAULT is output from D18a:7. This timeout monostable also has
the effect that if the FALL_PULSE is not encountered then the retriggering signal
FALL_COUNT will not be produced and so the monostable will timeout and the FALL
FAULT signal from D18a:7 will be asserted.
The FALL FAULT signal from D18a is then fed into the fault line driver circuitry D13.
2-83
HA72500
2.3.9.1.10
SECTION 2
Level Monitor
Figure 2-32
Level Monitor
A number of DC voltage levels are input to the level monitor circuit from other modules
within the transponder. Each of these levels is buffered and under CTU control
converted to a digital value that can be read by the CTU.
The following signal levels are read:
SOURCE
MODULE
Receiver Video
Transmitter Driver
SIGNAL NAME
RV_LOCAL_OSC_LVL
RV_Tx_LVL
TD_MOD_LVL
TD_Tx_LVL_
PA_DRV_LVL
Power Amplifier
SOURCE MODULE
Test Interrogator
Transponder
Power Supply
PA_MOD_LVL
PA_OP_LVL
PA_HT_LVL
SIGNAL NAME
TI_INT_RF_LVL
TPNDR_OP_LVL
PS_15V_LVL
PS_18V_LVL
PS_HT_LVL
MON_24V_LVL
Monitor
CALIBRATE
GND
The two monitor signals CALIBRATE and GND are used by the CTU to calibrate the
other level measurements.
2-84
HA72500
SECTION 2
D22 and D27 are 8:1 multiplexers which are used to choose the level signal to be
monitored and also provide a degree of buffering. The CTU controlled signal lines
AMUX0:3 are used by D22 and D27 to choose the level to be monitored.
The chosen level is buffered by N1 and fed to analogue-to-digital converter D28. The
output of D28 is read under CTU control.
2.3.9.1.11
Figure 2-33
Fault Line Driver

Fault Line Driver
The fault line driver circuitry combines all of the faults from the various parameter
monitors to give primary and secondary fault indications.
The faults are combined in device D13 according to the following table. From this device
the combined faults are directed to the CTU bus and to LED drivers. D8 and D4 are
used to buffer the fault lines and drive the LEDs on the front panel. A pair of signal lines
representing a DELAY fault and a SPACING fault are directed to the receiver video to
inhibit beacon operation, following a primary Fault, if the CTU fails to shut the beacon
down.
2-85
HA72500
SECTION 2
The faults are combined as follows:

FAULT TYPE
PRIMARY
FAULT
FAULT GROUP
DELAY FAULT
SPACING FAULT
SECONDARY
EFFICIENCY FAULT
RATE FAULT
IDENT FAULT
POWER FAULT
WIDTH FAULT
PULSE SHAPE
FAULT
RISE FAULT
FALL FAULT
ANTENNA INTEGRITY 1 FAULT
ANTENNA FAULT
ANTENNA INTEGRITY 2 FAULT
Each of the faults shown in italics above are able to be read by the CTU, which then
takes the appropriate course of action for the indicated fault.
The following front panel indicators are used to give a real-time indication of the fault
status of each of the monitored parameters. With the exception of the PRIMARY and
SECONDARY fault indicators, a lit indicator signifies normal operation. If the indicator is
unlit a fault has occurred in that parameter. If the PRIMARY or SECONDARY indicators
are lit a primary fault or a secondary fault has occurred. An unlit indicator for these
parameters signifies normal transponder operation.
FAULT
INDICATOR
DELAY FAULT
GREEN
SPACING FAULT
GREEN
EFFICIENCY FAULT
GREEN
RATE FAULT
GREEN
IDENT FAULT
GREEN
POWER FAULT
GREEN
PULSE SHAPE FAULT
GREEN
ANTENNA FAULT
GREEN
PRIMARY FAULT
SECONDARY FAULT
RED
AMBER
When the front panel switch MONITOR OUTPUTS (S16) is set to FAILED, all of the
front panel indicators will indicate faults. All fault lines read by the CTU will also indicate
faults.
To allow the transponder operation to be inhibited should the CTU fail to respond to
primary faults a pair of fault lines indicating DELAY FAULT and SPACING FAULT are
hardwired to the receiver video module. If these faults are indicated the receiver video
module will inhibit all replies after about 70 seconds.
2-86
HA72500
2.3.9.1.12
SECTION 2
Miscellaneous Circuitry
A buffered 10 MHz crystal oscillator is fed into clock device D24. This device produces
clocks of 1 MHz and 1 kHz. The 1 kHz signal is fed into clock device D19 and this device
produces a clock of 1 Hz. These four clock frequencies are used for timing circuits
throughout the monitor main board. D48 is used to buffer all of the clock signals before
distribution around the board.
Two power supplies are required on the monitor main board. These are +15 volts for
buffering analogue signals from other transponder modules and +5 volts for all of the
digital logic. The +5 volts supply is created by taking the +24 volts from the test
interrogator and first regulating this to +15 volts via ballast resistor R1 and 3-terminal
regulator N4. This +15 volts is then further regulated to +5 volts using ballast resistor
R89 and 3-terminal regulator N8. The +15 volts supply is created by directly regulating
the +24 volts from the test interrogator using the adjustable three terminal regulator N6.
A power supply monitor is used to provide an indication to the CTU that the two power
supplies used on the monitor main board are operating. The circuit consists of a pair of
window comparators that indicate if the voltages on the +5 volts supply and the +15 volts
supply fall with hardwired limits. These limits are set to be 4.75 volts to 5.25 volts and
14.5 volts and 15.5 volts respectively. Should the power supplies fall outside these limits
then a signal line to the CTU called MON_PS_FLT will fall to zero volts indicating that
the monitor power supplies have failed. The CTU will then take an appropriate action.
From the +15 volts supply two precision +5 volts references N3 and N6 are used to
provide accurate +5.00 volts levels for use in ERP monitor and level monitor.
The MONITOR OUPUTS switch S16 is used to determine the operational mode of the
monitor module. When S16 is in NORMAL mode all parameter monitors are operational.
In FAILED mode all parameter monitors are forced into the failed condition, Primary and
Secondary faults are forced and the TEST LED H12 is lit to indicate that the monitor is
no longer in normal mode. When S16 is set to FAILED a hardwired TI_MON_TEST
signal line is grounded. This test line gives indications on both the test interrogator and
the CTU.
Precision resistors R76 and R77 are used to provide a calibrated voltage level to the
level monitor circuitry so that, on request from the CTU, a measurement can be made of
the +24 volts supply from the test interrogator.
A number of signals from the test interrogator representing parameters to be measured
are buffered on the monitor board before distribution to the respective parameter
monitors. This buffering is done with 74HC4050 buffers D29 and D32. HC CMOS is
used for these buffers to ensure that the parameters to be measured are not changed by
the buffering process. Input pulldown resistors are used on all lines to ensure that the
lines are at a known state should a failure of the test interrogator occur.
2-87
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.9.2
Peak Power Monitor 1A72512
REFER
The RF power in the antenna is sampled by a coupler situated within the antenna
housing, and a separate coaxial cable is used to feed this power into the peak power
monitor board at RF input connector XC1.
The peak power monitor consists of an amplitude-modulated video detector and a peak
rider circuit. The detected pulse envelope of the signal at XC1 is output to the monitor
main board via connector XN2:9 as DET_REPLIES. A DC level representing the peak
pulse amplitude of the detected DET_REPLIES signal is also output to the monitor main
board via XN2:14 as REPLY_LVL.
The received RF power is demodulated by an envelope detector V1 and the resultant
video pulses are amplified and buffered by N1a and N1b respectively. Resistors R3 and
R4 are used to provide a small DC bias to the detector diode V1; this enables the
detector to recover signals at very low levels.
The output of N1a at N1:1 is buffered by N3a, producing the signal DET_REPLIES.
The output of N1b at N1:7 is fed into a peak rider circuit consisting of N4a and V3. The
peak amplitude of the pulse envelope is buffered by N2b and amplified by N3b,
producing the signal REPLY_LVL.
The peak power monitor is capable of producing a DC level of greater than 2.5 volts for
input RF power levels of +10 dBm to +20 dBm. This DC level is used by the monitor
main board to determine RF power fault levels.
2-88
HA72500
SECTION 2
Table 2-13
TYPE
Toggle
switch
Summary of Front Panel Controls and Indicators : Monitor Module

LEGEND

MONITOR
OUTPUTS
FAILED
NORMAL
Green LED
DELAY
Green LED
SPACING
All monitor outputs are set to their fault condition (high)

which invokes a FAILED condition for all front panel
indicators and all fault lines read by the CTU. The TEST
indicator is turned on.
Monitor module operates normally and TEST indicator is
off.
Green LED
EFFICIENCY
Green LED
RATE
Green LED
POWER
Green LED
IDENT
Green LED
ANTENNA
Green LED
SHAPE
Yellow LED
SELF TEST
Red LED
PRIMARY
Yellow LED
SECONDARY
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
POWER ON
Test jack
ERP PULSE
Test jack
ERP EARTH
Detected pulse waveform of transmitted pulse - sampled near the

antenna and fed into the ERP IN connector.
Earth reference for the ERP PULSE test jack signal.
Test jack
+1 5V
Buffered output of the internally generated +15 volts.
When on, indicates that the named parameter is within preset limits.
Indicates that the CTU is performing a Monitor Self Test, during which
the CTU will look for the two primary parameters in the fault state.
Indicates that one or both of the primary parameters (Delay, Spacing)
are outside preset limits.
Indicates that one or more of the six secondary parameters (Efficiency,
Rate, RF Power, Ident, Antenna, Shape) are outside preset limits.
Indicates that the MONITOR OUTPUTS switch is not in the NORMAL
position.
Indicates that DC power is applied to the monitor.
Test jack
+5V
Buffered output of the internally generated +5 volts.
Test jack
EARTH
Common earth of the power supplies, the internally generated supplies,

and all input and output signals.
2-89
HA72500
Table 2-14
SUBASSY
SECTION 2
Summary of Internal Controls : Monitor Module

TYPE
REF
R87
1A72511 Main
Preset
PWB Assembly, resistor
Monitor Module 8-way DIL S1
switch
The Monitor
Fault Limit
switches S1-4
and S7-10, S12
and S13 are
binary coded,
with switch 1 of
the DIL switches
the least
significant and
switch 8 (or 10)
the most
significant. They
use inverted
logic, with the
OFF position of
the switch being
active.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
FUNCTIONISETTING/INDICATION
PULSE WIDTH
LOWER REJECT
LIMIT
8-way DIL S2
switch
FALL TIME
UPPER REJECT
LIMIT
8-way DIL S3
switch
RISE TIME
UPPER REJECT
LIMIT
8-way DIL S4
switch
PULSE WIDTH
REJECT
WINDOW
8-way DIL S7
switch
POWER LEVEL
LOWER REJECT
LIMIT
Sets the ERP monitor fault alarm reference level to

0 dB at commissioning.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Multiply the required lower reject limit
(in microseconds) by 10 and subtract 1.
Encode the switches for this value.
For a lower reject limit of 2.9 microseconds the
switches are encoded for a number of 28, as
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Multiply the required upper reject limit
For an upper reject limit of 3.6 microseconds the
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Multiply the difference between the required upper
and lower reject limits (in microseconds) by 10 and
subtract 1.
difference between the limits is 1.2 microsecond
and the switches are encoded for a number of 11,
as shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
The power level corresponds to the switch setting,
from -1 to -8 dB. For a lower reject limit of -3 dB
the switches are set as shown above.
2-90
HA72500
SUBASSY
SECTION 2
TYPE
REF
1A72511 Main
8-way DIL S8
PWB Assembly, switch
Monitor Module
8-way DIL S9
switch
8-way DIL S10

switch
S12
10-way
DIL switch
S13
10-way
DIL switch
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
IDENT GAP
UPPER REJECT
LIMIT
ON
OFF
Subtract 2 from the required upper reject limit
(in seconds). Encode the switches for this value.
For an upper reject limit of 62 seconds the
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DELAY REJECT
WINDOW
ON
OFF
and lower reject limits (in microseconds) by 10
and subtract 1.
as shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPACING
REJECT
ON
WINDOW
OFF
and lower reject limits (in microseconds) by 10
and subtract 1.
as shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DELAY LOWER
REJECT LIMIT
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPACING
LOWER REJECT
ON
LIMIT
OFF
shown above.
2-91
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3.10
Control and Test Unit 1A72550
2.3.10.1
General
The Control and Test Unit (CTU) monitors, controls and tests various functions within the
LDB-102 DME. The CTU contains a comprehensive test facility to allow rapid
assessment of performance. By keypad selection, each of the main DME parameters,
including signal levels and status conditions, can be measured and displayed. The CTU
is used in conjunction with the test interrogator module(s) to perform the measurements
and tests.
The CTU controls the operation of a single or dual transponder configuration LDB-102
DME, both locally and remotely. It also performs data acquisition and control functions
for the Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS).
A detailed description of the controls and indicators of the CTU is given in Appendix A.3.
2.3.10.2
Mechanical
The CTU comprises three boards, namely the CTU Processor PWB Assembly
(1A72552), the CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly (1A72553) and the RCMS Interface
PWB Assembly (1A72555). The boards are mounted on an aluminium frame and
connected using ribbon cables. A DC/DC converter is also mounted on the aluminium
frame and connects to the CTU processor board. The CTU is installed in the CTU
subrack.
A block diagram of the CTU is shown in Figure 2-34. Details of the individual boards are
given in following sections.
Figure 2-34
CTU Block Diagram
2-92
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.10.3
CTU Processor PWB Assembly 1A72552
REFER
2.3.10.3.1
General
The CTU processor board provides the microprocessor and memory for the CTU. It
provides interfaces with the CTU front panel board, the RCMS interface board, and
Transponders 1 and 2. The CTU also has a serial port, and controls the sourcing of the
ident signals.
A block diagram of the CTU processor board is shown in Figure 2-35.
2.3.10.3.2
Microprocessor
The microprocessor, D9, is a CMOS 80C186 which operates at 10 MHz. The processor
provides a clock generator, an interrupt controller, three 16-bit timers, memory and
peripheral chip select logic, and a wait state generator.
The microprocessor supervisory chip, N2, acts as a watchdog for the processor and as a
24 volts monitor. If the watchdog input (WDI), pin 11, is not toggled within 1.6 seconds,
RESET, pin 15, pulses low causing the processor to be reset. N2 monitors the 24 volts
line via the power fail comparator input (PFI), pin 9. If the 24 volts line voltage drops
below a preset value then the voltage at PFI drops below its threshold. This in turn
causes PFO, pin 10, to go low, which activates the LOW_TPNDR_BAT alarm. The
preset value may be adjusted by R32 to be anywhere in the range 18 to 23 volts.
The wait state generator and address decoder, D13, is implemented using an EP610
programmable logic device (PLD). D13 generates external CTU bus signals for the
interfaces with the front panel board, RCMS interface board and the transponders. It
also produces the SRDY signal for the processor. The SRDY signal causes the
processor to insert wait states during input/output operations to slower devices. All
devices selected by PCS0, PCS1, PCS2, MCS1 and MCS2 require seven wait states.
All other devices require zero wait states.
D7, D8 and D10 are address latches.
2-93
HA72500
Figure 2-35
SECTION 2
CTU Processor Board Block Diagram
2-94
HA72500
2.3.10.3.3
SECTION 2
Memory
The memory on the CTU processor board comprises 8Kx8 EEPROM, 64Kx16 EPROM,
and 32Kx16 RAM.
The EEPROM, D16, is a 28C65. It is used to store the state of the CTU front panel at
power down so that it can be restored to the same state at the next power-up; it also
stores the number of restarts.
The EPROM, D17, is a 27C210. It is used to store the CTU program, operating system,
applications code, built-in tests and production test code.
The RAM is divided between two chips; D15 stores the low bytes, and D14 stores the
high bytes.
2.3.10.3.4
Serial Port
The RS-422 serial port comprises two differential bus transceivers, N4 and N5, as well
as a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART), D6. This arrangement allows
the serial port to operate in full-duplex mode.
The serial port is used to communicate with a remote maintenance monitoring system.
2.3.10.3.5
RCMS and Front Panel Interface
The interface to the RCMS interface board and the front panel board is implemented
using D29, D30 and D31.
D29 is an octal bus transceiver used to transfer data between the CTU processor board
and the other two boards. DT/R from the processor controls the direction of data flow
through the transceiver. Resistor networks RN20 and RN21 reduce noise susceptibility
on input data to D29.
D30 is the address buffer, and its outputs are enabled when PCS0 is low. A0 from the
processor is not buffered since it is used as an enable signal rather than an address
signal by the processor (analogous to BHE for the low data byte). Hence ADDR0 to the
front panel and RCMS interface boards connects to A1, ADDR1 connects to A2, and so
on up to ADDR6.
D31 is the control byte buffer. Its outputs are always enabled.
The interrupt input (XINT) from the front panel and RCMS interface enters the CTU
board on XN3:34. It is ANDed with the RDY/BSY signal from the EEPROM. This has the
effect of disabling XINT while the EEPROM is being written to.
2.3.10.3.6
Transponder Interfaces
The Transponder 1 interface comprises D35, D36 and D37, and connects to
Transponder 1 via XN2. The Transponder 2 interface comprises D32, D33 and D34, and
connects to the RCMS interface board via XN3. (The RCMS interface board directs the
signals to Transponder 2.).
The arrangement and operation of these interfaces is similar to the RCMS and front
panel interface in Section 2.3.10.3.5.
2-95
HA72500
2.3.10.3.7
SECTION 2
Ident
Selection of the ident signals is performed by the ident tone and keying PLD, D2. The
ident PLD has the following inputs and outputs:
a.
Sources of ident signal (inputs):

1.
ASSOC_IDENT_IN;
2.
MA_IDENT_OUT_1;
3.
MA_IDENT_OUT_2;
4.
REQ_IDENT_KEYING_1;
5.
REC_IDENT_KEYING_2;
6.
REC_IDENT_TONE_1; and
7.
REC_IDENT_TONE_2.
b.
Clock inputs:
1.
2440 Hz; and
2.
TMROUT.
c.
Select inputs:
1.
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL_1;
2.
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL_2;
3.
REC_IDENT_SEL_1; and
4.
REC_IDENT_SEL_2.
d.
Ident signal outputs:

1.
IDENT_ON;
2.
MA_IDENT_IN_1;
3.
MA_IDENT_IN_2;
4.
MA_IDENT_OUTPUT;
5.
DET_IDENT_KEY;
6.
IDENT_TONE_TRANSFORMER; and
7.
IDENT and CPU TONE.
The relationship between these is shown in Table 2-15 to Table 2-17.
2-96
HA72500
SECTION 2
Table 2-15
Ident PLD Outputs: MA_IDENT_IN_1,2, MA_IDENT_OUT,

IDENT_TONE_TRANSFORMER, DET_IDENT_KEY
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL
MA_IDENT_IN
IDENT_TONE_
TRANSFORMER
MA_IDENT_OUT
DET_IDENT_KEY
ASSOC_IDENT_IN
MA_IDENT_OUT_1
REC_IDENT_TONE_1 REC_IDENT_KEYING_1
ASSOC-DENT_IN
MA_IDENT_OUT_2
REC_IDENT_TONE_2 REC_IDENT_KEYING_2
Table 2-16
Ident PLD Output: IDENT+ CPU_TONE

INPUTS
OUTPUTS
REC_IDENT_SEL
Table 2-17
IDENT +CPU_TONE
REC_IDENT_TONE_1
REC_IDENT_TONE_2
2240 Hz
TMROUT
Ident PLD Output: IDENT_ON

INPUTS
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL
OUTPUTS
REC_IDENT_SEL
2240 Hz
IDENT_ON
REC_IDENT_KEYING_1
REC_IDENT_KEYING_2
x = Don't care
= Low-to-high transition
q = State of IDENT_ON at previous low-to-high transition of 2440 Hz
2-97
HA72500
SECTION 2
The MA_IDENT_OUTPUT signal is produced by N1 which is an optically coupled

MOSFETV relay. This signal appears as either an open circuit or as a contact closure.
The DET_IDENT_KEY output appears as either +24 volts or ground. The other five
IDENT outputs are TTL level signals.
The recovered ident signal at D2:9 activates buzzer B1 for monitoring purposes. The
level of the signal may be adjusted using the variable resistor R33.
2.3.10.3.8
Switches
There are two 8-position DIP switches on the board, S1 and S2, which are read via
buffers D20 and D25 and are used to configure the CTU. The setting details for these
switches are given in Appendix A.
2.3.10.3.9
Indicators
There are eight green LEDs on the CTU board, H1-8. H1 and H2 are driven by one of
the address latches, D10, and the remaining six LEDs are driven by octal latch D26. The
meaning of the LED states is summarised in Table 2-18.
Table 2-18
CTU Processor Board LED Indicators

LED
INDICATES
H1
A19 activity
H2
A16 activity
H3
H4
ROM Test OK
H5
H6
Heartbeat
H7
H8
RAM Test OK
2.3.10.3.10 Links
The CTU board has six links, XN5-10, the functions of which are summarised
in Table 2-19.
Table 2-19
CTU Processor Board Links

LED
FUNCTION
XN5
Ground one leg of MA_IDENT_OUTPUT
XN6
Watchdog disable
XN7
Select signature analysis
XN8
Ident Test
XN9
Watchdog Test
XN10
Pullup ASSOC.IDENTIN input to +24 volts
NOTE: The function is enabled when the link is fitted
2-98
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3.10.3.11 Miscellaneous Inputs and Outputs

There are 13 bits read by D19 and D24. Their source and signal type are summarised
in Table 2-20.
Table 2-20
CTU Processor Board D19 and D24 Inputs

NAME
BIT
SOURCE
DESCRIPTION
15
LOW_TPNDR_BATT N2:10
High if battery voltage < preset
14
Spare
13
Spare
12
ANT_REL_TEST
External I/O Board
11
TI_MON_TEST_2
RCMS (Transponder 2) Ground or open circuit
10
TI_MON_TEST_1
Transponder 1
TPNDR_TEST_2
RCMS (Transponder 2) Ground or open circuit
TPNDR_TEST_1
Transponder 1
Ground or open circuit
EEPROM_RDY
D16:1
Low if EEPROM engaged in write cycle
IDENT_ON
D2:6
Ident output
Spare
TRNS_CB_OFF
External I/O Board
BAT_CHG_NORM_1 External I/O Board
24 volts or open circuit
BAT_CHG_NORM_2 External I/O Board
AC_PWR_NORM_1
External I/O Board
AC_PWR_NORM_2
External I/O Board

2-99
HA72500
SECTION 2
There are 16 bits output via D18 and D23. Their destination and signal type are
summarised in Table 2-21.
Table 2-21
BIT
CTU Processor Board D18 and D23 Outputs

NAME
DESTINATION
DESCRIPTION
15
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL_2
D2:19
+24 volts or ground
14
ASSOC_IDENT_SEL_1
D2:23
+24 volts or ground
13
ANT_RELAY_CONTROL
External I/O Board
+24 volts or ground
12
RV_IDENT_INH_2
RCMS (Transponder 2)
+5 volts or ground
11
RV_TX_INH_2
+5 volts or ground
10
RV_RF_ON_2
+5 volts or ground
TPDR_PWR_ON_2
+5 volts or ground
PA_PWR_ON_2
+5 volts or ground
REC_IDENT_SEL_2
D2:10
+24 volts or ground
REC_IDENT_SEL_1
D2:14
+24 volts or ground
MAINT_FNS_EN
and Transponder 1
+24 volts or ground
RV_IDENT_INH_1
Transponder 1
+5 volts or ground
RV_TX_INH_1
Transponder 1
+5 volts or ground
RV_RF_ON_1
Transponder 1
+5 volts or ground
TPDR_PWR_ON_1
Transponder 1
+5 volts or ground
PA_PWR_ON_1
Transponder 1
+5 volts or ground
2.3.10.3.12 Counter
D12 is a binary ripple counter. The clock input (pin 10) is 10 MHz clock output from the
processor. The three D12 outputs used are 610 Hz (pin 3), 1220 Hz (pin 2) and 2440 Hz
(pin 1). Either 610 Hz or 1220 Hz can be selected to be a clock input for the processor
(D9:20, 21) and the UART (D6:5). The selection is made by fitting either R30 or R31 as
required. The 2440 Hz output of D12 is an input to the ident PLD (D2:2).
2.3.10.3.13 Power
24 volts from the main power supply enters the CTU board via XN1:3a and XN1:3c. This
is distributed around the board and to XN3:43 and XN3:44 for distribution to the front
panel and RCMS interface boards. 24 volts is also connects to XN11:1. From here it is
fed to the CTU DC/DC converter which returns 5 volts via XN11:4. The DC/DC converter
is a switching power supply which is mounted on the CTU metalwork.
5 volts from the DC/DC converter is used on the CTU processor board; it is distributed to
the front panel board and RCMS interface board via XN3:39 and 40; and it is distributed
to the external I/O board via XN1:2c and it is distributed for general use by other
modules mounted in the CTU subrack via XN1:12a,c, 13a,c and 14a,c.
2-100
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3.10.3.14 External 5 Volts Circuit

The external 5 volts circuit comprises V7, R50-52, C53-54, and N3. This circuit provides
a 5 volts supply for Transponder 1 which is independent of the CTU 5 volts supply. This
ensures that any problem which brings down the transponder 5 volts supply will not
adversely affect CTU 5 volts.
Diode V7 protects the linear regulator N3 from any accidental reverse polarity voltages
which may be applied to the 24 volts line. R52 restricts the maximum current drawn to
about 150 mA. During normal operation the current supplied by N3 is typically less than
60 mA.
R50 and R51 set the output voltage of N3 to be in the range 5.3 to 5.7 volts.
"
2.3.10.4
CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly 1A72553
REFER
2.3.10.4.1
General
The front panel board provides the CTU user interface. It has switches, LEDs and a
2-line by 40-character LCD which allow the user to:
a.
display operational parameters and test results; and
b.
exercise local control and monitoring of the DME.
The LCD displays a menu of functions available to the user on the function keys, while
other keys have dedicated functions.
A block diagram of the front panel board is shown in Figure 2-36.
Figure 2-36
CTU Front Panel Board Block Diagram
2-101
HA72500
SECTION 2
2.3.10.4.2
Interface with CTU Processor PWB Assembly
The interface with the CTU processor board comprises D7, D9, RN1-6 and RN12-14.
Resistor networks RN1, RN2, RN4, RN5, RN12 and RN13 reduce noise effects on the
incoming fines. D9 is an EP610 PLD which is programmed as the address decoder for
the front panel. The address map for the board is shown in Table 2-22. D7 is a 74HC245
data transceiver which is used to transfer data bits D0-7 between the front panel and the
processor board. The XDT/R signal from the processor is used to control the direction of
data flow through the transceiver.
Table 2-22
CTU Front Panel Address Map

A1 PCS0 XWR XRD
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
Data transceiver D7 (Write)
Data transceiver D7 (Read)
LCD control/address (Write)
LCD data (Write)
LCD data (Read)
Switch scanner and coder D5 (Read)
Alarm inhibit/delay D3 (Read)
Alarm register 1 D11 (Write)
Alarm register 2 D10 (Write)
Control status 1 D12 (Write)
Control status 2 D12 (Write)
Miscellaneous status D8 (Write)
2.3.10.4.3
SELECTS
Liquid Crystal Display
The liquid crystal display (LCD) is 40-character by 2-line display. The view angle of the
LCD may be adjusted by varying R1, which changes the feedback of the drive voltage to
the LCD display provided by N1. V1 and V2 in the operational amplifier circuit provide
temperature compensation. The forward voltage drop across diodes V1 and V2 varies
with temperature, resulting in the positive input to the amplifier also varying with
temperature; this helps to maintain good LCD contrast.
2.3.10.4.4
Indicators
There are 33 LEDs visible to the CTU user. These LEDs provide information on DME
control status, test functions, power status, alarms and miscellaneous status. Another
LED, the heartbeat LED (H14) is not visible to the user. It is used as a diagnostic aid to
make sure that the CTU processor software is writing to the front panel. During normal
operation the heartbeat LED will flash about once a second.
The octal latches D6, D8 and D10-12 are used to control the LEDs. A high level on the
XRES line from the CTU processor will force all latch outputs high, turning the LEDs off.
Also during reset, transistors V7 and V8 will turn on, causing the PRIMARY alarm LED
(H30) and the CTU alarm LED (H33) to be on.
2-102
HA72500
2.3.10.4.5
SECTION 2
Pushbutton Switches
The front panel has 16 pushbutton switches which are read by the switch scanner and
coder PLD, D5. This divides the keys into two groups, those with dedicated inputs and
outputs, and those read as part of a four-by-four matrix and coded to form a four-bit
output.
The TI RATE switches, 1 kHz (S6) and 10 kHz (S7) have dedicated inputs and outputs.
The D5 outputs for these switches, pins 20 and 21, are enabled by the select signal from
the address decoder which enters D5:4. R11-12, C9-10 and D4 make up the debounce
circuitry for these switches.
Switches S1-5, S10 and S13-20 are read as part of a 4x4 array. D5 senses switch
closures by driving the COL1-4 outputs low, one at a time, and reading the ROW1-4
inputs. When D5 recognises a switch closure, the VALID output (pin 19) goes high, and
the code corresponding to the pressed pushbutton is output on pins 15-18 as shown in
Table 2-23. If more than one of the pushbuttons is pressed at any one time, no switch
closure is recognised by D5, R10, C8 and D4 debounce switch closures and openings
from the switch matrix.
No switches are fitted in the S8 and S9 locations.
Table 2-23
2.3.10.4.6
CTU Front Panel Switch Scanner and Coder Output

I013
I014
I015
I016
SWITCH RECOGNISED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S10
S9
S8
Rotary Switches
There are two rotary switches, ALARM POWER ON INHIBIT (S11) and ALARM DELAY
(S12). The outputs of these binary coded decimal (BCD) switches are read via buffer D3.
S11 is not accessible to the operator, as it is set only by a technician. S12 is mounted on
the front panel and is accessible to the user.
2.3.10.4.7
Charge-pump Voltage Inverter
-5 volts for the front panel is obtained from +5 volts by using two 74HC04 inverter chips,
D1 and D2, in a charge-pump voltage inverter circuit.
2-103
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.10.5
RCMS Interface MB Assembly 1A722555
REFER
2.3.10.5.1
General
The RCMS interface board provides opto-isolators to read remote control relay inputs,
and relays to control remote lamp outputs. All of the RCMS interface relays are fitted
with surge protection. This board also extends the Transponder 2 interface signals from
the CTU processor board to a backplane connector.
A block diagram of the RCMS interface board is shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37
2.3.10.5.2
RCMS Interface Board Block Diagram
Interface with CTU Processor MB Assembly
The interface with the CTU processor board comprises D1, D2 and RN1-9. Resistor
networks RN2, RN3, RN4, RN5, RN8 and RN9 reduce noise effects on the incoming
lines. D1 is a PLD which is programmed as the address decoder for the RCMS interface
board. The address map for the board is shown in Table 2-24 D2 is a 74HC245 data
transceiver which is used to transfer data bits D0-7 between the RCMS interface board
and the processor board. The XDT/R signal from the processor is used to control the
direction of data flow through the transceiver.
2-104
HA72500
SECTION 2
Table 2-24
RCMS Interface Address Map

A1 PCS0 XWR XRD
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
Data transceiver D2 (Write)
Data transceiver D2 (Read)
Miscellaneous status D3 (Write)
RCMS status 2 D4 (Write)
Bit out 3 D5 (Write)
Bit feedback 2 D6 (Read)
RCMS control 1 D7 (Read)
2.3.10.5.3
SELECTS
Input/Output Feedback
The latch D5 and buffer D6 form an input/output feedback circuit. An RCMS interface
board may not be fitted to all CTUs, and so this circuit is used to check for the presence
of the board. If a byte written to the latch can be read back, the RCMS interface board is
fitted.
2.3.10.5.4
Relays
The RCMS interface board is fitted with 15 relays, K1-15. The relays have changeover
contacts fitted with varistors, F2-31, to provide surge protection. The relays are
controlled via octal latches D3 and D4.
2.3.10.5.5
Heartbeat Indicator
The heartbeat LED, H1, is used as a diagnostic aid to make sure that the CTU processor
software is writing to the RCMS interface board. During normal operation the LED will
flash about once a second.
2.3.10.5.6
Opto-isolator Inputs
The RCMS interface board is fitted with six opto-isolator inputs. Each input comprises an
opto-isolator, a diode, a 3.9 volts zener diode, a 1 uF capacitor and a 4.75 kilohms
resistor. The resistor limits current to the opto-isolator; the capacitor filters the applied
voltage; the zener ensures that low voltage inputs do not activate the opto-isolator; and
the diode protects the opto-isolator against reverse polarity voltages. The inputs are read
via buffer D7. The inputs to the buffer are normally pulled high by RN11 and go low
when the opto-isolator is switched on.
2.3.10.5.7
Ident Tone Transformer
The ident tone transformer, T1, is a 600 ohms balanced transformer used to send ident
to a remote location via XN1:32a,c. The ident input is sourced from the CTU processor
board via XN3:46. The variable resistor R1 may be used to adjust the level of the ident
signal.
2-105
HA72500
2.3.10.5.8
SECTION 2
External 5 Volts Circuit
The external 5 volts circuit comprises V13, R10, R15-16, C18, C23, and N7. This circuit
provides a 5 volts supply for Transponder 2 which is independent of the CTU 5 volts
supply. This ensures that any problem which brings down the transponder 5 volts supply
will not adversely affect CTU 5 volts.
Diode V13 protects the linear regulator N7 from any accidental reverse polarity voltages
which may be applied to the 24 volts line. R10 restricts the maximum current drawn to
about 150 mA. During normal operation the current supplied by N7 is typically less than
60 mA.
R15 and R16 set the output voltage of N7 to be in the range 5.3 to 5.7 volts.
2.3.10.5.9
External 24 Volts Circuit
The external 24 volts circuit comprises R9 and F1, and is fitted if required to provide 24
volts to remote equipment via XN1:2a,c. R9 is a 10 ohms resistor and F1 is an RXE050
polyswitch thermistor. During normal operation the current drawn through R9 and F1 is
less than 180 mA. In the event of a short circuit to ground at the remote equipment, R9
restricts the current to 2.4 amperes. At this current, F1 switches off in about 1.5 seconds,
reducing the current to a negligible level until the remote fault is rectified. R9 (which is
10 watts rating) can comfortably withstand the overcurrent for the short period.
2.3.10.5.10 Transponder 2 Interface

The RCMS interface board extends Transponder 2 signals between XN2 and XN3. XN2
is a backplane connector which connects to the transponder. XN3 connects via ribbon
cable to the CTU processor board which controls the interface to the transponder.
"
2.3.11
Power Distribution Panel Single DME 1A72549 and Power

Distribution Panel Dual DME 2A72549
REFER
1A72549 Circuit Diagram 72549-3-06

2A72549 Circuit Diagram 72549-3-16
The power distribution panels terminate and distribute the primary 24 volts supplies and
provide circuit protection for DME circuits. The Power Distribution Panel for a single
DME is a type 1A72549; a block diagram for this is shown in Figure 2-38. For a dual
DME the Power Distribution Panel is a type 2A72549; a block diagram for this is shown
in Figure 2-39.
The circuit breakers used have a second set of contacts which are electrically isolated
from the trip contacts. These secondary contacts are connected in series and tied to
ground at one end. The other end is connected to the CTU as the TRNS_CB_OFF line.
If all circuit breakers are on, the TRNS_CB_OFF signal to the CTU will be ground. If one
or more of the circuit breakers are off, the TRANS_CB_OFF signal will appear as an
open circuit at the CTU.
2-106
HA72500
SECTION 2
Figure 2-38
Single Power Distribution Panel Block Diagram
Figure 2-39
Dual Power Distribution Panel Block Diagram
2.3.12
AC Power Supply 3A71130
Manufacturer documentation for the power supply, including circuit and components
schedule, is identified in Appendix J.
2-107
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.13
Power Supply System Dual AC 2A/3A69758
REFER
The Dual AC Power Supply Systems 2A69758 and 3A69758 each consist of two AC
Power Supplies 3A71130 mounted in an equipment rack. The two types are electrically
and functionally identical but they are mounted in different rack sizes; the type supplied
depends on the installation requirements. The layout of a type 2A69758 is shown in
Figure 2-40, as an example.
Each AC power supply positive and negative output is connected independently to the
DME racks +ve and -ve battery terminals.
The AC power supplies' status outputs (AC Power Normal 1 and 2, Bty Charger Normal
1 and 2 and Mains OK) are connected to terminal blocks for ease of connection. It
should be noted that 'Mains OK' is from AC power supply 1 only.
For detail on AC Power Supply 3A71130, refer to the handbook detail in Appendix J.
Figure 2-40
Power Supply System Dual AC 2A69758 Layout
2-108
HA72500
"
SECTION 2
2.3.14
Transponder Subrack 1A72513
REFER
The transponder subrack consists of a standard Eurocard 6 unit by 280 mm deep card
frame which accepts the five transponder plug-in modules. The card frame is fitted with a
Transponder Subrack Motherboard (1A72556) in the upper three units, and an RF
connector mounting panel in the lower three units to make the coaxial connections when
the modules are plugged in.
The chassis of the plug-in modules are grounded to the subrack through securing
screws fitted to the front panels of the modules.
"
2.3.15
CTU Subrack 1A72506
REFER
Interwiring Diagrams 72550-1-03, 72505-2-06, 72505-2-17
The CTU subrack consists of a standard Eurocard 6 unit by 220 mm deep card frame
which accepts the Control and Test Unit (1A72550) and the Power Distribution Panel
(1A/2A72549); a number of spare monitors are available for expansion (for remote
maintenance monitoring, for example).
All modules are of the plug-in type. The CTU plugs into DIN type IDC connectors in the
card frame.
The power distribution panel plugs into a 15-way DIN connector in the card frame, which
is connected directly to the main power loom.
The chassis of the plug-in modules are grounded to the subrack through securing
screws fitted to the front panels of the modules.
"
2.3.16
External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557
REFER
The External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557 is mounted on the side of the rack frame at
the rear of the transponder subrack. It provides the interface for external connections to
the DME unit. These are made using the terminal block connectors XB1 to XB11.
Connections to the CTU and the Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS) are
made by two 64-way ribbon cable connectors XN6 and XN8.
XN1 connects to the RF panel and provides the RF relay signals and +24 volts to the
CTU. XN2 connects the battery charger signals (Mains OK, AC Normal and Battery
Charger Normal) to the CTU.
Amplifier N2 and transistor V1 provide a protected power supply, for external use with
the status signalling relays. Should the external load current exceed the rated load for
the circuit, the output voltage will fall and the output current will 'fold-back', reducing the
dissipation in transistor V1.
Voltage divider R1 and R9 establish a reference voltage at the non-inverting input, N2:3,
of amplifier N2. The voltage at the inverting input, N2:2, is determined by resistors R2,
R7 and R8. Under normal load conditions, this voltage is slightly above the voltage at
N2:3, so the output at N2:6 is close to ground and transistor V1 is turned on.
When the load current approaches the limiting value, the voltage drop across R4 and R5
causes the voltage at N2:2 to fall slightly below the voltage at N2:3 The voltage at the
output, N2:6, therefore starts to rise, turning off V1 and causing V1 collector voltage to
fall. At the same time, positive feedback is applied through R8, which pulls the voltage at
N2:2 even lower, causing V1 collector voltage to fall further so that the load current
decreases. This creates the so-called 'fold-back' characteristic, where the short-circuit
current is significantly less than the current at the onset of limiting.
2-109
HA72500
SECTION 2
Voltage regulator N1 provides a remote supply for the modem connector XN3 (for use by
a remote maintenance monitoring system).
2.3.17
1kW PA Power Supply Frame 1A72503
This is designed to carry the 1kW PA Power Supply (1A72540).

The frame occupies 6 units of rack space, and has a front panel which hinges forward
and down to provide access to the 1kW PA power supply, which is fitted to this panel.
The front panel has two straps to stop it approximately horizontally when open. It is fitted
with two captive screws to secure it in the closed position. When fitted to the rack the
1kW RF Power Amplifier (1A72535) is located directly behind the 1kW PA power supply
frame.
2-110
HA72500
SECTION 3
SECTION 3
ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3-i
HA72500
SECTION 3
TABLE of CONTENTS
3.
ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 3-1

3.1
INTRODUCTION
3-1
3.2
FIELD PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3-2
3.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Test Equipment ........................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 General Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.4 Test Procedures .......................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4.1 Preliminaries
3-3
3.2.4.2 Module Presets
3-4
3.2.4.3 Procedural Requirements
3-10
3.2.4.4 Test Interrogator Alignment
3-11
3.2.4.5 RF Source and RF Amplifier Alignment and Tests
3-14
3.2.4.6 RF Panel Preselector Filter Alignment and Tests
3-15
3.2.4.7 Receiver Video Alignment
3-16
3.2.4.8 Transmitter Driver RF Output Alignment
3-16
3.2.4.9 1kW RF Power Amplifier Alignment
3-18
3.2.4.10 Transmitter Pulse Parameters
3-20
3.2.4.11 Receiver Performance Tests
3-23
3.2.4.12 Echo Suppression
3-27
3.2.4.13 Transponder Delay
3-29
3.2.4.14 Ident
3-30
3.2.4.15 Monitor Fault Limits
3-31
3.2.4.16 Control System - PART 1 - SINGLE DME
3-38
3.2.4.16 Control System - PART 2 - DUAL DME
3-43
3.2.4.17 Rack Current Drain
3-52
3.2.4.18 Final Check
3-53
3.2.5 Test Interrogator Alignment ....................................................................... 3-54
3.2.6 Receiver Video Alignment ......................................................................... 3-56
3.2.7 Transmitter Driver Alignment..................................................................... 3-57
3.2.7.1 Preparation
3-57
3.2.7.2 RF Alignment
3-59
3.2.8 Function Generator Alignment................................................................... 3-60
3.2.9 IF Amplifier Alignment ............................................................................... 3-61
3.2.9.1 Preliminary Adjustments
3-61
3.2.9.2 Preamplifier Tuning
3-61
3.2.9.3 Local Oscillator Tuning
3-61
3.2.9.4 Narrowband Detector Tuning
3-62
3.2.10 Y-channel Operation.................................................................................. 3-62
3.3
DEPOT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3-66
3.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................ 3-66
3.3.2 Test Equipment Required.......................................................................... 3-66
3.3.3 Module Presets.......................................................................................... 3-67
3.3.3.1 Power Distribution Panel Presets
3-67
3.3.3.2 1kW RF Power Amplifier Presets
3-67
3.3.3.3 Control and Test Unit Presets
3-67
3.3.3.4 Receiver Video Presets
3-68
3.3.3.5 Transmitter Driver Presets
3-70
3.3.3.6 Transponder Power Supply Presets
3-70
3.3.3.7 Test Interrogator Presets
3-70
3.3.3.8 Monitor Module Presets
3-71
3.3.3.9 RF Panel Presets - Single DME
3-72
3.3.3.10 RF Panel Presets - Dual DME
3-73
3-ii
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.3.11 AC Power Supply Presets

3-73
3.3.4 Preliminary Check and Setup .................................................................... 3-76
3.3.4.1 Inspection
3-76
3.3.4.2 Switching On
3-76
3.3.4.3 Procedural Requirements
3-76
3.3.5 Test Interrogator Alignment ....................................................................... 3-77
3.3.5.1 RF Generator Alignment
3-77
3.3.5.2 RF Generator at Nominal Interrogation Frequency
3-78
3.3.5.3 RF Generator at 160 kHz Above Nominal Frequency
3-79
3.3.5.4 RF Generator at 160 kHz Below Nominal Frequency
3-79
3.3.5.5 RF Generator at 900 kHz Above Nominal Frequency
3-79
3.3.5.6 RF Generator at 900 kHz Below Nominal Frequency
3-80
3.3.5.7 Spacing Offset Control
3-80
3.3.5.8 RF Generator Output Frequencies
3-80
3.3.5.9 Test Interrogator Levels
3-81
3.3.5.10 Test Interrogator System Timing Parameters
3-82
3.3.6 RF Source and RF Filter Alignment and Tests.......................................... 3-82
3.3.7 RF Panel Preselector Filter Alignment and Tests...................................... 3-83
3.3.8 Receiver Video Alignment ......................................................................... 3-84
3.3.8.1 6 dB Offset
3-84
3.3.8.2 Receiver On-channel Threshold
3-85
3.3.9 Transmitter Driver Alignment..................................................................... 3-85
3.3.9.1 RF Output Alignment
3-85
3.3.9.2 Modulation Pulse Alignment
3-87
3.3.10 1kW RF Power Amplifier Alignment .......................................................... 3-88
3.3.10.1 Output Pulse Alignment
3-88
3.3.10.2 Automatic Level Control
3-91
3.3.11 Transmitter Pulse Parameters................................................................... 3-91
3.3.11.1 Test Setup
3-91
3.3.11.2 Output Pulse Power
3-92
3.3.11.3 Output Pulse Shape
3-92
3.3.11.4 Output Pulse Spacing
3-92
3.3.11.5 Output Pulse Peak Power Calibration
3-92
3.3.11.6 Output Pulse Spectrum
3-93
3.3.12 Receiver Performance Tests ..................................................................... 3-93
3.3.12.1 Test Setup
3-93
3.3.12.2 Receiver Sensitivity
3-94
3.3.12.3 Receiver Bandwidth
3-94
3.3.12.4 Receiver Selectivity
3-94
3.3.12.5 Receiver Decoding Window
3-95
3.3.12.6 Receiver CW Protection
3-95
3.3.12.7 Receiver Reply Rate
3-96
3.3.12.8 Dead Time
3-96
3.3.13 Transponder Delay .................................................................................... 3-96
3.3.13.1 Delay Variation with Input Level
3-96
3.3.13.2 Final Receiver Checks
3-97
3.3.14 Echo Suppression ..................................................................................... 3-98
3.3.14.1 Long Distance Echo Suppression
3-98
3.3.14.2 Short Distance Echo Suppression
3-98
3.3.15 Ident........................................................................................................... 3-99
3.3.15.1 Internal Ident
3-99
3.3.15.2 External Ident
3-99
3.3.15.3 Master Ident
3-100
3.3.15.4 Ident Frequency
3-100
3.3.16 Monitor Fault Limits ................................................................................. 3-100
3-iii
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.16.1 Test Setup

3-100
3.3.16.2 Delay Monitor
3-100
3.3.16.3 Spacing Monitor
3-101
3.3.16.4 Efficiency Monitor
3-102
3.3.16.5 Rate Monitor
3-103
3.3.16.6 Power Monitor
3-103
3.3.16.7 Ident Monitor
3-103
3.3.16.8 Antenna Monitor
3-104
3.3.16.9 Shape Monitor
3-104
3.3.16.10 Monitor Self Test
3-105
3-105
3.3.17 24V DC Power Supply/Battery Charger .................................................. 3-106
3.3.17.1 Normal Operation
3-106
3.3.17.2 High Voltage Shutdown Adjust
3-107
3.3.17.3 Low Battery Alarm Adjust
3-108
3.3.17.4 Low Voltage Shutdown Adjust
3-108
3.3.17.5 Low Voltage Performance
3-109
3.3.17.6 DC Supply Adjustment
3-110
3.3.18 Control System - Single DME.................................................................. 3-111
3-111
3.3.18.2 Primary Fault
3-112
3.3.18.3 Secondary Fault
3-113
3.3.18.4 Recycle Function
3-114
3.3.18.5 RCMS Remote Control
3-115
3.3.19 Control System - Dual DME .................................................................... 3-116
3.3.19.1 Normal Operation - No. 1 is MAIN
3-116
3.3.19.2 Primary Fault - No. 1 is MAIN
3-117
3.3.19.3 Secondary Fault - No. 1 is MAIN
3-119
3-121
3-122
3-124
3.3.19.7 Operation in Maintenance Mode - No. 1 is MAIN
3-125
3-127
3.3.19.9 Recycle Function - No. 1 is MAIN
3-129
3-131
3.3.19.11 Hot/Cold Standby
3-132
3-132
3.3.20 Rack Current Drain.................................................................................. 3-133
3.3.21 Tidy Up .................................................................................................... 3-134
3.3.22 Y-channel Operation................................................................................ 3-134
3.4
LRU PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3-138
3.4.1 Introduction.............................................................................................. 3-138
3.4.1.1 Definition and Scope
3-138
3.4.1.2 List of Procedures
3-138
3.4.1.3 DME Rack Operation
3-138
3.4.1.4 Test Equipment
3-141
3.4.1.5 Common Procedures
3-141
3.4.2 Attenuator 1A69737................................................................................. 3-143
3-143
3.4.2.2 Return Loss Check
3-144
3.4.2.3 Insertion Loss and Attenuation Check
3-144
3.4.3 Directional Coupler 1A69755................................................................... 3-144
3-144
3-145
3.4.3.3 Insertion Loss Check
3-145
3-iv
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.3.4 Coupling Ratio Check

3-145
3.4.4 Directional Coupler 2A69755................................................................... 3-146
3-146
3-146
3.4.4.3 Insertion Loss Check
3-147
3.4.4.4 Coupling Ratio Check
3-147
3.4.5 250W RF Amplifier 1A69873 ................................................................... 3-148
3-148
3.4.5.2 Setup
3-148
3.4.5.3 Calibration Procedure
3-149
3.4.5.4 Amplifier Test Procedure
3-150
3.4.6 AC Power Supply 3A71130 ..................................................................... 3-153
3-153
3.4.6.2 Setup
3-153
3.4.6.3 Output Voltage Tests
3-156
3.4.6.4 Current Limit Adjustment
3-156
3.4.6.5 Performance Under Load
3-156
3.4.6.6 Transient Response
3-157
3.4.6.7 Output Ripple
3-157
3.4.6.8 Output Fall Alarm - Low Float Voltage
3-157
3.4.6.9 Output Fail Alarm - Charge Fail
3-158
3.4.6.10 High Voltage Alarm - Selective Shutdown Mode
3-158
3.4.6.11 High Voltage Alarm Delay Shutdown Mode
3-158
3.4.6.12 Fuse Alarm
3-159
3.4.7 Monitor Module 1A72510 ........................................................................ 3-159
3-159
3.4.7.2 Alignment
3-159
3.4.7.3 Power Supply Check
3-159
3.4.7.4 Peak Power Monitor Check
3-160
3.4.7.5 RF Power Calibration
3-160
3.4.7.6 Front Panel Indicator Check
3-160
3.4.8 Main PWB Assembly Monitor Module 1A72511...................................... 3-161
3-161
3.4.8.2 Determination of Monitor Switch Settings
3-161
3.4.8.3 Setup
3-162
3.4.8.4 Delay Monitor Check
3-163
3.4.8.5 Spacing Monitor Check
3-164
3.4.8.6 Efficiency Monitor Check
3-165
3.4.8.7 Reply Rate Monitor Check
3-165
3.4.8.8 Effective Radiated Power Monitor Check
3-165
3.4.8.9 Antenna Integrity Monitor Check
3-165
3.4.8.10 Level Monitor Check
3-166
3.4.8.11 Ident Monitor Check
3-166
3.4.8.12 Pulse Shape Monitor Check
3-167
3.4.8.13 Monitor Self Test Check
3-169
3.4.8.14 Front Panel Switch Check
3-169
3.4.9 Peak Power Monitor 1A72512................................................................. 3-169
3-169
3.4.9.2 Performance Check
3-170
3.4.9.3 Completion
3-171
3.4.10 Test Interrogator 1A72514....................................................................... 3-171
3-171
3.4.10.2 Signal Pulse Generation Checks
3-171
3.4.10.3 Pulse Switching
3-172
3.4.10.4 Signal Level Calibration
3-172
3-v
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.10.5 Reply Signal Checks

3-173
3.4.11 Main PWB Assembly Test Interrogator 1A72515 .................................... 3-175
3-175
3.4.11.2 Setup
3-175
3.4.11.3 Interrogation Generation Check
3-175
3-176
3.4.11.5 Reply Signal Processing Check
3-176
3.4.11.6 Measurement Facilities Check
3-177
3.4.11.7 Transponder Output Power Calibrate Alignment
3-178
3.4.11.8 Monitor Fault Limit Facilities Check
3-178
3-178
3.4.12 RF Generator 1A72516 ........................................................................... 3-178
3-178
3.4.12.2 Setup
3-179
3.4.12.3 Alignment
3-179
3.4.12.4 Completion
3-181
3.4.13 RF Filter 1A72517 ................................................................................... 3-182
3-182
3.4.13.2 Requirement
3-182
3.4.13.3 Insertion Loss - Equipment Calibration
3-182
3.4.13.4 Filter Tuning Procedure
3-182
3.4.13.5 Insertion Loss - Measurement
3-183
3.4.13.6 Return Loss - Equipment Calibration
3-183
3.4.13.7 Return Loss - Measurement
3-183
3.4.13.8 Filter Adjustments
3-183
3.4.13.9 Filter Response at 1100 MHz
3-184
3-184
3-184
3.4.13.12 Test at Station Frequency
3-185
3.4.14 Modulator and Detector 1A72518............................................................ 3-185
3-185
3.4.14.2 Performance Check and Adjustment
3-185
3.4.15 Reply Detector 1A72519 ......................................................................... 3-187
3-187
3-187
3.4.15.3 Detector Check
3-187
3.4.15.4 Timing Pulses Check
3-188
3.4.15.5 Detector Coincidence Check
3-188
3.4.15.6 Completion
3-188
3.4.16 Receiver Video 1A72520......................................................................... 3-189
3-189
3.4.16.2 Setup
3-189
3.4.16.3 Performance Tests
3-190
3.4.17 Main PWB Assembly Receiver Video 1A72521 ...................................... 3-192
3-192
3.4.17.2 Initial Setup
3-192
3.4.17.3 Decoder Checks
3-194
3.4.17.4 Over Interrogation Check
3-196
3.4.17.5 Dead Time Check
3-196
3.4.17.6 Long Distance Echo Suppression Check
3-197
3.4.17.7 Short Distance Echo Suppression Check
3-197
3.4.17.8 Squitter Check
3-197
3.4.17.9 Ident Check
3-198
3.4.17.10 Replies Inhibit Check
3-198
3.4.18 RF Source 1A72522 ................................................................................ 3-198
3-vi
HA72500
SECTION 3

3-198
3.4.18.2 Setup
3-198
3.4.18.3 Alignment
3-199
3.4.18.4 Completion
3-200
3.4.19 IF Amplifier 1A72523 ............................................................................... 3-200
3-200
3.4.19.2 Setup
3-201
3.4.19.3 No Signal Checks
3-201
3.4.19.4 IF Checks
3-201
3.4.19.5 Narrow Band Checks
3-202
3.4.19.6 AGC Checks
3-205
3.4.19.7 Final Checks
3-205
3.4.20 RF Amplifier 1A72524 ............................................................................. 3-207
3-207
3.4.20.2 Setup
3-207
3.4.20.3 DC Voltages
3-207
3.4.20.4 Power Stage Check
3-207
3.4.20.5 Local Oscillator Leakage Check
3-207
3.4.20.6 Low Noise Amplifier and Mixer Calibration
3-208
3.4.21 Transponder Power Supply 1A72525...................................................... 3-209
3.4.22 Main PWB Assembly Transponder Power Supply 1A72526 ................... 3-209
3-209
3.4.22.2 Setup
3-210
3.4.22.3 HT Supply Tests
3-210
3-211
3.4.22.5 +15V Supply and +18V Supply Tests
3-213
3.4.22.6 Control Signals
3-214
3.4.23 Transmitter Driver 1A72530 .................................................................... 3-214
3-214
3.4.23.2 Setup
3-214
3.4.23.3 Exciter Alignment
3-216
3.4.23.4 Medium Power Driver Alignment
3-216
3.4.23.5 Power Modulation Amplifier Alignment
3-217
3.4.24 Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly 1A72531.................................................. 3-218
3-218
3.4.24.2 Setup
3-218
3.4.24.3 Rectangular Modulation Test
3-219
3.4.24.4 Driver Level Monitor Tests
3-219
3.4.24.5 Function Generator Test
3-220
3.4.24.6 Shaped Pulse Modulation and TD_MOD_LVL Tests
3-221
3.4.24.7 ALC Loop Check
3-221
3.4.24.8 Second Pulse Equalising Test
3-222
3.4.24.9 Medium Power Driver Supply Test
3-222
3.4.24.10 Exciter Supply Test
3-222
3.4.24.11 Power Modulation Amplifier Supply Test
3-222
3.4.24.12 VC1 Supply and BIAS Test
3-223
3.4.24.13 Completion
3-223
3.4.25 Exciter 1A72532 ...................................................................................... 3-224
3-224
3.4.25.2 Test Overview
3-224
3.4.25.3 Preliminary Checks
3-224
3.4.25.4 DC Checks
3-224
3.4.25.5 Alignment
3-225
3.4.26 Medium Power Driver 1A72533............................................................... 3-226
3-226
3-vii
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.26.2 Preliminary Electrical Tests

3-226
3-227
3-229
3.4.27 Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534 ..................................................... 3-230
3-230
3-230
3-231
3-231
3.4.27.5 Amplifier Test and Tuning Procedure
3-232
3.4.28 1kW RF Power Amplifier 1A72535 .......................................................... 3-233
3-233
3.4.28.2 Setup
3-234
3.4.28.3 Amplifier Performance Tests
3-236
3.4.28.4 Level Monitors
3-238
3.4.28.5 Completion
3-238
3.4.29 Power Divider 1A72536........................................................................... 3-239
3-239
3.4.29.2 Return Loss Measurement
3-239
3.4.29.3 Insertion Loss Measurement
3-239
3.4.29.4 10 dB Attenuator and Detector
3-239
3.4.30 Power Combiner 1A72537 ...................................................................... 3-240
3-240
3.4.30.2 Test Arrangements
3-241
3.4.30.3 Two-way Splitter
3-241
3.4.30.4 Eight-Way Combiner
3-241
3.4.30.5 Attenuator and Detector
3-241
3.4.31 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540 ............................................................. 3-242
3-242
3.4.31.2 Alignment
3-242
3.4.31.3 Control Circuit Checks
3-242
3.4.31.4 Relay and Voltage Checks
3-243
3.4.31.5 Load Tests
3-243
3.4.31.6 Completion
3-243
3.4.32 Control and Status PWB Assembly 1A72541.......................................... 3-243
3-243
3.4.32.2 Setup
3-243
3.4.32.3 Control Circuitry Tests
3-244
3.4.32.4 HT OUT Monitoring
3-244
3.4.32.5 RF Amplifier Monitoring Tests
3-245
3.4.32.6 Completion
3-246
3.4.33 DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly 1A72542 ........................................... 3-247
3-247
3.4.33.2 Setup
3-247
3.4.33.3 Regulator
3-247
3.4.33.4 Output Voltage Adjustment Range
3-248
3.4.33.5 Primary Current Limit Preset
3-249
3.4.33.6 Input Regulation
3-249
3.4.33.7 Output Regulation
3-249
3.4.33.8 Input Current Monitor
3-250
3.4.33.9 Completion
3-250
3.4.34 Preselector Filter 1A72546 ...................................................................... 3-250
3-250
3.4.34.2 Filter Tuning Procedure - 1020 MHz
3-250
3-251
3.4.34.4 Filter Tuning Procedure - Station Frequency
3-251
3-viii
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.35 RF Panel PWB Assembly Single DME 1A72547 .................................... 3-251

3.4.36 RF Panel PWB Assembly Dual DME 2A72547 ....................................... 3-251
3.4.37 Power Distribution Panel Single DME 1A72549...................................... 3-252
3-252
3.4.37.2 Continuity Checks
3-252
3.4.38 Power Distribution Panel Dual DME 2A72549 ........................................ 3-252
3-252
3-253
3.4.39 Control and Test Unit 1A72550 ............................................................... 3-254
3.4.39.1 Introduction
3-254
3-254
3.4.39.3 Setup
3-254
3.4.39.4 DC-DC Converter Output
3-255
3.4.39.5 LCD Display and Softkeys
3-255
3.4.39.6 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Check
3-255
3.4.39.7 CTU Bus Interface to Test Interrogator and Monitor Modules
3-255
3.4.39.8 CTU Direct Interface to the Transponder Modules
3-256
3.4.39.9 Control System Check
3-256
3.4.39.10 Restore Operation
3-256
3.4.40 CTU Processor PWB Assembly 1A72552............................................... 3-256
3-256
3.4.40.2 Setup
3-256
3.4.40.3 Power Supplies
3-257
3.4.40.4 Self Test LED Indicators
3-257
3.4.40.5 Watchdog
3-257
3.4.40.6 External Oscillator Signal
3-257
3.4.40.7 Ident Buzzer
3-257
3.4.40.8 Completion
3-258
3.4.41 CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly 1A72553 ............................................ 3-258
3-258
3.4.41.2 Setup
3-258
3-258
3.4.41.4 Heartbeat LED
3-258
3.4.41.5 Pushbuttons
3-259
3.4.41.6 ALARM DELAY Switch
3-259
3.4.41.7 View Angle Adjust
3-259
3.4.41.8 Completion
3-260
3.4.42 RCMS Interface PWB Assembly 1A72555.............................................. 3-260
3-260
3.4.42.2 Setup
3-260
3-260
3-260
3.4.42.5 Relays
3-260
3.4.42.6 Transponder 2 Interface
3-262
3.4.42.7 Completion
3-262
3.4.43 External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557 .................................................... 3-263
3-263
3.4.43.2 Setup
3-263
3.4.43.3 Modem 12 Volts Supply Check
3-263
3.4.43.4 Protected 24 Volts Supply Check
3-263
3.4.43.5 Status Outputs
3-263
3.4.43.6 Completion
3-265
3-ix
HA72500
SECTION 3
LIST of FIGURES
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Power Supply Control Module Links.....................................................3-75

Standard Return Loss Test Setup ......................................................3-142
Typical Display for Return Loss Test..................................................3-142
Standard Insertion Loss Test Setup ...................................................3-143
Typical Display for Insertion Loss Test...............................................3-143
Switched Attenuator Test Configuration .............................................3-144
250W Amplifier Test Setup.................................................................3-152
Connections to Alarm Connector TB/3 ...............................................3-154
Test Setup for Receiver Video Module...............................................3-190
Test Setup for IF Amplifier Checks.....................................................3-206
Power and Output Cable for IF Amplifier Checks...............................3-206
Test Setup for RF Amplifier Checks ...................................................3-209
Exciter Test Setup ..............................................................................3-225
Medium Power Driver Test Setup.......................................................3-228
Power Modulation Amplifier Test Setup .............................................3-231
1kW RF Power Amplifier Test Setup ..................................................3-235
Attenuator and Detector Test Setup ...................................................3-240
Detector Test Cable............................................................................3-241
10 dB Attenuator and Detector Test Setup.........................................3-242
LIST of TABLES
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Numerical List of Line Replaceable Units...............................................3-139

Hierarchical List of Line Replaceable Units ............................................3-140
3-x
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1
INTRODUCTION
This section contains the procedures required for alignment, adjustment and testing of
an LDB-102 DME beacon and its constituent subassemblies.
Procedures are included for the testing and alignment of a complete DME, either on-site
or in a maintenance depot, and for testing the line-replaceable units as individual items.
The individual sections contained within this part of the handbook are:
Section 3.2 - FIELD PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT, which

contains the procedures for doing basic testing and adjustments on-site, using a
minimum of test equipment.
Section 3.3 - DEPOT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT, which

contains the procedures for doing a detailed alignment and performance test
using a full range of test equipment as would be held in a maintenance depot.
Section 3.4 - LRU PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT, which

contains the procedures for aligning modules and subassemblies in a
maintenance depot test rack, following repair or re-tuning of the units.
3-1
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2
FIELD PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3.2.1
Introduction
This section contains the alignment and testing procedures to be performed on an

LDB-102 DME beacon when installed at a field site. These procedures are applicable to
the alignment and checking of a DME immediately following installation, or for the
periodic testing of a DME subsequent to its commissioning. The procedures assume that
the DME is fully installed, with an antenna connected and with AC mains power applied
to the equipment.
The DME rack should be in full working order before commencing final alignment (that
is, free from any faults). If any faults are found in modules during these tests, then the
defective unit should be replaced with a serviceable unit before the tests are continued.
The procedures described here mostly refer to a single DME transponder. For a dual
beacon, the same series of procedures are performed on the second transponder, with
some additional checks relating to the monitor and control system.
This section contains procedures applicable to two requirements:
1.
Testing procedures, to be carried out during regular performance inspections of

the DME. The abbreviated procedures forming the sub-set of checks that are
applicable to equipment that previously has been aligned to the current
operating channel.
These procedures are shown in normal (Helvetica) type.
2.
Alignment and testing procedures, to be performed upon installation of the

DME, for re-tuning the DME to a different operating channel, or after repair and
replacement of a line-replaceable unit. For this application, the full procedures
should be performed, including, as necessary, the detailed alignment
procedures in Sections 3.2.5 through 3.2.9.
The additional procedures required for full alignment are shown in italics.
For a comprehensive test of all aspects of the DME performance, refer to Section 3.3
DEPOT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT.
3.2.2
Test Equipment
The test equipment required to perform the procedures specified in this section is
detailed in Section E.1.
3.2.3
General Requirements
Extensive use is made of the built-in test facility, located in the CTU module at the top of
the rack. The operator should become familiar with its use and functions before
commencing these procedures. Operation of the test facility is described in Section A.3.
Preset controls within the modules should not be touched unless the procedure contains
instructions to do so. Some modules have internal switches which must be set for a
particular station configuration. If not already set to the correct positions, they may be
initially set as stated in Section 3.2.4.2 Module Presets.
CAUTION
NOTICES
THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONARY REQUIREMENTS SHOULD BE

OBSERVED AT ALL TIMES THROUGHOUT EQUIPMENT TESTING
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE REQUIREMENTS MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE BEING CAUSED TO THE EQUIPMENT.
Although the beacon includes protection to guard against excessive load
mismatch, the transmitter must not be operated unless a suitable load is
3-2
HA72500
SECTION 3
present at the ANTENNA output. The protection circuit is intended for
accidental mismatching only.
The peak power from the transmitter is in excess of 1200 watts, which is
too high for direct application to most test instruments. Therefore, care
should be taken when connecting instruments to the transmitter output to
ensure that a suitably rated attenuator or directional coupler is used to
isolate the instruments from the high power.
Modules must not be removed or inserted with power applied. For most
units, it is sufficient to switch off the rack at the CTU. For the CTU it is
necessary to switch off the 24 volts at the circuit breakers on the power
distribution module.
Equipment repairs and tests should be performed only by personnel
suitably qualified to the level of proficiency required by an equipment of
this type and complexity.
3.2.4
Test Procedures
3.2.4.1
3.2.4.1.1
Preliminaries
Initial Testing
If the DME is being tested for the first time following installation, it is necessary to set a
number of preset switches inside the modules. Section 3.2.4.2 below gives the details
for the standard settings for these presets, and the test procedures throughout this
section assume that standard settings are used. For some sites, different settings of
these presets may be preferred, depending on the station requirements. For these
cases, the appropriate corrections must be made to the expected results in some of
these procedures. Details of the function of the internal preset switches are given in
Section A.5.
At the start of these test procedures, some front panel preset controls are set to nominal
values at installation. During subsequent testing it may be found necessary to make
changes to these settings.
If the DME is undergoing a regular performance inspection, the procedures in Section
3.2.4.2 should be omitted and the tests commenced at Section 3.2.4.3.
3.2.4.1.2
RF Crystal Selection
Refer to Appendix N for crystal specification.

1. Receiver video crystals
Check that the correct crystal is installed as G1 in the RF source of the receiver
video. The crystal frequency is one-twelfth of the station reply frequency.
Example: Channel 84X reply frequency= 1171 MHz
hence crystal frequency = 1171/12 = 97.5833 MHz
2. Test interrogator crystals
Check that the crystals are installed in the RF generator of the test interrogator.
The crystal frequency is one-twelfth of the station interrogation frequency.
Example: Channel 84X interrogation frequency = 1108 MHz = Fo
hence crystal frequency = 1108/12 = 92.3333 MHz = Fx
The five interrogation frequencies and the corresponding crystal frequencies are
shown in the table below.
3-3
HA72500
SECTION 3
SWITCH
SETTING
G1
Fo
Fx
G2
Fo + 160 kHz
Fx + 13.3 kHz
G3
Fo - 160 kHz
Fx - 13.3 kHz
G4
Fo + 900 kHz
Fx + 75 kHz
G5
Fo - 900 kHz
Fx - 75 kHz
3.2.4.2
FUNCTION
Module Presets
Powering the Rack
CAUTION
DO NOT apply power to the equipment under test before the following
settings are made.
3.2.4.2.1
Power Distribution Panel Presets
1. On the power distribution panel, set all circuit breakers off.
3.2.4.2.2
1kW RF Power Amplifier Presets
1. On the 1kW RF power amplifiers, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
3.2.4.2.3
Control and Test Unit Presets
1. On the CTU front panel, set the switch ALARM DELAY to 10 seconds.
2. On the CTU, set the switches on the CTU processor board as follows:
S1, 8-way DIP switch
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
NORMAL/PRODUCTION TESTS
ON = NORMAL
INDICATES IF NAVAID MAINTENANCE

PROCESSOR (NMP) IS FITTED
OFF = NO NMP
SUBTRACT 0.1 s FROM No. 2 DELAY

MONITOR FAULT LIMIT READINGS
ON = INACTIVE
ADD 0.1 s TO No. 2 DELAY MONITOR FAULT

LIMIT READING
ON = INACTIVE
STATISTICS ON DELAY MEASUREMENTS
ON = INACTIVE

ON = INACTIVE
ADD 0.1 s TO No. 1 DELAY MONITOR FAULT

LIMIT READINGS
ON = INACTIVE
SINGLE/DUAL
ON if SINGLE DME
OFF if DUAL DME
3-4
HA72500
SECTION 3

SWITCH
"
NOTE
FUNCTION
SETTING
MAIN AND/OR VOTING (FOR DUAL)
ON = AND
STANDBY AND/OR VOTING (FOR DUAL)
ON = AND
RMM/RCMS CONTROL
OFF = RCMS
COLD/WARM STANDBY
ON = COLD
1 ELEMENT ANT. FLT: NOT/IS FITTED
OFF = IS FITTED
1 ELEMENT ANT. FLT: NO ACTION/ACTION
ON = NO ACTION
ON = NOT FITTED
ON = NO ACTION
If the DME is to be used with a Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)

system, perform all checks and adjustments in this Section 3.2 before
configuring the CTU for operation with the RMM. Refer to the RMM Handbook
for details.
3. Set the ALARM POWER ON INHIBIT switch (S11 on the CTU front panel board)
for a delay of 6 seconds (refer to Section A.5.1.6).
4. On the CTU processor board, ensure that no links are installed on the 2-pin
headers XN5 (MA IDENT OUTPUT referenced to GROUND), XN6 (WATCHDOG
DISABLE), XN7 (SIGNATURE ANALYSIS), XN8 (IDENT TEST) and XN9
(WATCHDOGTEST). Check that a link is fitted to the 2-pin header XN10
(ASSOC IDENT INPUT pulled up to +24 volts).
3.2.4.2.4
Receiver Video Presets
1. On the receiver video, set the switches on the receiver video main board as
follows:
If the DME is to be used on a 'Y' channel, then set SELECT ENCODER MODE
(S4) and SELECT DECODER MODE (S5) accordingly. (Refer to Section 3.2.10)
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S4
SELECT ENCODER MODE
S5
SELECT DECODER MODE
S6
SET LDES PERIOD
S7
SET DEAD TIMES
S8
SDES
OFF
S9
LDES
OFF
2. On the receiver video, set the ident code switches S13, S14, S15 and S16 on the
receiver video main board to generate the desired station ident code, as follows:
b. Convert the required ident letters into International Morse Code, using the
following table:
3-5
HA72500
SECTION 3
LETTER
MORSE SYMBOL
LETTER
MORSE SYMBOL
dot dash
dash dot
dash dot dot dot
dash dash dash
dash dot dash dot
dot dash dash dot
dash dot dot
dash dash dot dash
dot
dot dash dot
dot dot dash dot
dot dot dot
dash dash dot
dash
dot dot dot dot
dot dot dash
dot dot
dot dot dot-dash
dot dash dash
dot dash dash
dash dot dash
dash dot dot dash
dot dash dot dot
dash dot dash dash
dash dash
dash dash dot dot
c. Set the switches using the following code (shading indicates switch position):
Example: for ident code AWA, switch settings are:
3. On the receiver video, set the front panel switches to the following nominal
positions:
SWITCH
3.2.4.2.5
FUNCTION
SETTING
S1
BEACON DELAY, COARSE
S2
BEACON DELAY, FINE
S3
REPLY PULSE SPACING (REPLY

PULSE SEPARATION on early modules)
S11
IDENT
NORMAL
Transmitter Driver Presets
1. On the pulse shaper board in the transmitter driver, set the switches as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S2
ALC LOOP
OPEN
S3
ALC
VIDEO
S4
MED COLL
DC
3-6
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. On the pulse shaper board, place POWER link X1 in the 1kW position.
3. On the transmitter driver front panel, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
3.2.4.2.6
Transponder Power Supply Presets
1. On the transponder power supply front panel, set switch TRANSPONDER DC

POWER to OFF.
3.2.4.2.7
Test Interrogator Presets
1. On the test interrogator main board, set the switch S4 (MODE) to X (or to Y if the
DME is to be used on a Y channel. Refer to Section 3.2.10
2. On the test interrogator front panel, set the switches as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S5
REPLY GATE DELAY COARSE
S6
REPLY GATE DELAY, FINE
S7
MONITOR & INTERROGATOR DC

POWER
NORMAL
3. On the test interrogator, set the switch NORMAL/TEST (S1) on the modulator
and detector to NORMAL.
4. On the test interrogator, set switch S1 (6-way DIP switch) on the RF generators
as follows:
SWITCH
3.2.4.2.8
FUNCTION
SETTING
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo
ON
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo + 160 kHz
OFF
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo - 160 kHz
OFF
OFF
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo - 900 kHz
OFF
CW/PULSE
OFF = PULSE
Monitor Module Presets
1. On the monitor, set the switches on the monitor main board as follows (shading
indicates switch position):
PULSE WIDTH LOWER LMT SET (8-way DIP switch S1): 2.9 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
FALL TIME UPPER LMT (8-way DIP switch S2): 3.6 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
3-7
HA72500
SECTION 3
RISE TIME UPPER LMT (8-way DIP switch S3): 3.1 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
PULSE WIDTH WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S4): 1.2 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
PWR LVL FLT SET (8-way DIP switch S7): -3.0 dB

1
8
ON
OFF
IDENT GAP FLT SET (8- way DIP switch S8): 62 seconds
1
8
ON
OFF
DELAY WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S9): 1.0 microseconds

1
8
ON
OFF
SPACING WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S10): 1.0 microseconds

1
8
ON
OFF
DELAY LOWER LMT SET (10-way DIP switch S12): 49.5 microseconds
(For Y channel settings refer to Section 3.2.10)
1
9 10
ON
OFF
3-8
HA72500
SECTION 3
SPACING LOWER LMT SET (10-way DIP switch S13): 11.5 microseconds
1
9 10
ON
OFF
2. On both monitor front panels, set switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.
"
NOTE
Referencing the Two Systems in a Dual DME

Where reference is required to distinguish between the transponders and
monitoring systems, the modules higher in the DME rack will be referenced as
No.1 while those lower will be referenced as No.2.
3.2.4.2.9
a.
RF Panel Presets
SINGLE
1. On the RF Panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), check that the following
components and connecting cables are installed.
a. 10 dB attenuator to connector TI-1 REPLY DET.
b. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from 10 dB attenuator to
connector FWD-B on the directional coupler.
c. 10 dB attenuator to connector FWD-A on the directional coupler.
d. 50 ohms termination to connector REV-A on the directional coupler.
e. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-C on the
directional coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS.
2. Check that antenna DC continuity monitor is connected to XN2 on the RF panel
board.
b.
DUAL
1. On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), check that the following
components and connecting cables are installed.
a. 10 dB attenuator each to connectors TI-1 REPLY DET and TI-2 REPLY DET.
b. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from 10 dB attenuator on TI-1
REPLY DET to connector FWD-D on No.2 directional coupler.
c. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from 10 dB attenuator on TI-2
REPLY DET to connector FWD-B on No.2 directional coupler.
d. 50 ohms termination to connector REV-A on No.2 directional coupler.
e. 10 dB attenuator to connector FWD-A on No.2 directional coupler.
f.
Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-E on

No.2 directional coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS.
g. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-C on

2. Check that the antenna DC continuity monitor is connected to XN2 on the RF
panel board.
3. On the RF panel, set the ANTENNA RELA Y switch to NORMAL.
3-9
HA72500
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.3.1
SECTION 3
Procedural Requirements
Testing Notes
a. Oscilloscope Triggering
Unless otherwise stated in a particular test, the oscilloscope should be triggered
from test jacks TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator.
b. Measurements during Ident
Avoid making performance measurements during the ident message.
c. Procedure for Extending Transponder Modules
If any of receiver video, transmitter driver or transponder power supply are to be
put on a transponder extender frame in order to gain access to internal controls
etc, the following procedure is to be followed:
1. At the transponder power supply in the same transponder subrack, mentally
record the position of the front panel switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER,
then switch it to OFF.
2. Extend the required module using the transponder extender frame.
3. On the transponder power supply front panel, restore the TRANSPONDER
DC POWER switch to its original position.
Follow the same sequence of steps to restore the module to its transponder
subrack.
d. Procedure for Extending Test Interrogator/Monitor Modules
If either of test interrogator or monitor are to be put on the transponder extender
frame in order to gain access to internal controls, the following procedure is to be
followed:
1. At the test interrogator in the same transponder subrack, mentally record the
position of the front panel switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER, then switch it to OFF.
2. Extend the required module using the transponder extender frame.
3. On the test interrogator front panel, restore the MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC POWER switch to its original position.
subrack.
e. Duplication of Tests for Dual System
The tests of Sections 3.2.4.4 to 3.2.4.15 (inclusive) should be performed on both
transponders and both monitor systems. The tests for the two systems may be
performed in parallel, or the tests of one system may be completed before the
tests on the second system are commenced.
f.
Monitoring of Transponders in Maintenance Mode

In Maintenance mode, monitor system 1 is selected to perform the monitoring
tests by selecting key Ch.1 at the top level menu on the CTU Test Facility;
monitor system 2 is selected to perform the monitoring tests by selecting key
Ch.2 at the top level menu on the CTU Test Facility. In a dual system under
normal conditions, both monitor systems monitor the operating transponder.
3-10
HA72500
3.2.4.3.2
SECTION 3
Powering the Rack
1. In a dual DME, check that the DC output of the two AC power supplies is
connected to the BATTERY 1 and BATTERY 2 terminals at the rear of the DME
rack.
2. In a dual DME, check that the power supply signalling cable, from TB-3 in the
power supply cabinet is connected to XN2 in the DME.
3. On the AC power supply, switch POWER to ON.
4. Check the reading on the power supply voltmeter. This should be 27.0 0.5 volts.
(if outside this range, adjust FLOAT 2 VOLTAGE on the control module of the AC
power supply).
5. On the power distribution panel, switch on the CTU and transponder circuit
breakers.
6. On the CTU, press the following front panel keys in the specified sequence (as
required):
LOCAL,
SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET,
MAINTENANCE (if MAINTENANCE indicator is not on),
RECYCLE (if RECYCLE indicator is not off),
MONITOR ALARM (if MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT indicator is not on).
7. Check that on the CTU, some indicators are on, on the monitor front panel, no
indicators are on, and on the test interrogator front panel, no indicators are on.
8. On the transponder power supply front panel the TEST indicator should be the
only indicator on.
9. On the transmitter driver front panel the TEST indicator should be the only
indicator on.
10. On the 1kW PA power supply front panel the TEST indicator should be the only
indicator on.
3.2.4.4
3.2.4.4.1
Test Interrogator Alignment

RF Generator Alignment
1. Extend the test interrogator using the transponder extender frame. On the test
interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER
to ON.
2. If the RF generator has not yet been aligned for its operating interrogation
frequencies, perform the alignment using the procedures of Section 3.2.5.
3. On the test interrogator, undo the cable connector at the output of the RF
generator, and connect the calibrated detector (with 4.7 kilohm load attached).
Connect the oscilloscope to the output of the loaded detector.
3.2.4.4.2
RF Generator at Nominal Interrogation Frequency
1. On the oscilloscope, measure the peak amplitude of the pulse from the calibrated
detector. Compare this amplitude with the calibration chart for the detector (with
load) to determine the true output from the RF generator. The output should be
+11.5 0.5 dBm.
(If the reading is outside this range, remove the cover of the modulator and
detector and adjust R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) on this module to set the peak
power meter reading to a value in the specified range).
3-11
HA72500
"
NOTE
SECTION 3
Ensure that the oscilloscope probes are correctly compensated, otherwise

pulse amplitude errors may result. Refer to the oscilloscope manual for probe
compensation procedure.
2. Connect the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED INTERROGATIONS and

EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. Measure the following
parameters of the displayed pulses, as below.
If the pulse amplitude and/or shape are outside the above limits, they can be
corrected by removing the lid of the modulator and detector on the test
interrogator and adjusting R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) and R20 (PULSE SHAPE)
as required. Ensure that the output from the RF generator remains within the limit
stated above (that is, +11.5 0.5 dBm). (After completing step 5, replace the lid
on the modulator and detector).
3. From the table below, use the measured value of the peak amplitude from step 2
to determine the limit for the recorded results in step 5. Make a note of this value
as the limit for step 5.
PEAK AMPLITUDE
LIMITS FOR RESULTS OF STEP 5
2.7 to 3.0
0.9 (0.1)
3.1 to 3.3
1.0 (0.1)
4. On the oscilloscope, use the vertical shift control to align the baseline of the
display onto a graticule line.
5. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to ON to add a CW signal to the pulse. The
display on the oscilloscope should remain the same except that the baseline
should move up the pulse. Measure the DC level shift of the baseline level from
the reference level set in the previous step. Set S1:6 to OFF when completed.
If the DC level shift is outside the above limits, it can be corrected by removing
the lid of the modulator and detector on the test interrogator (if not already
removed) and adjusting R37 (PULSE PEDESTAL) as required. Replace the lid
on the modulator and detector when finished.
3.2.4.4.3
RF Generator at Test Frequencies
Confirm correct operation of the RF generator test frequencies by repeating tests in

3.2.4.4.2 steps 1 and 2 with each of the test crystals selected. The crystals are selected
by switch S1 in the RF generator as shown in the table below:
3-12
HA72500
SECTION 3
FREQUENCY
SWITCH
fo
S1-1
fo +160 kHz
S1-2
fo - 160 kHz
S1-3
fo +900 kHz
S1-4
fo - 900 kHz
S1-5
When a test frequency is selected, each of the other switches in S1 must be set to off.
Select the normal interrogate frequency, by setting S1:1 to on, when finished.
3.2.4.4.4
Spacing Offset Control
1. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED

INTERROGATIONS and EARTH, and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks
1 s MARKERS and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. Using the
displayed markers (or an accurately calibrated oscilloscope), measure the
spacing between the detected pulses (channel 1 on the oscilloscope). It should
be 12.0 0.1 microseconds measured at the half amplitude points on the leading
edges. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)
2. While observing the oscilloscope display, switch TEST TRANSPONDER
DECODING, REJECT to +2 microseconds. Measure the increase in spacing
between the detected pulses. It should be 2.0 0.1 microseconds.
DECODING, REJECT to -2 microseconds. Measure the decrease in spacing
DECODING, ACCEPT to +1 microseconds. Measure the increase in spacing
DECODING, ACCEPT to -1 microseconds. Measure the decrease in spacing
3.2.4.4.5
RF Generator Output Frequencies
1. To check the RF frequency of the RF generator it is necessary to remove its

cover and couple some signal from the crystal oscillator to a frequency counter.
For this purpose, it is necessary to have a piece of coaxial cable, approximately 1
metre long, with a 1 cm diameter loop at one end connected between the centre
conductor and the earth braid. The other end connects to the counter. To make a
measurement, the coupling loop should be placed near coil L1, to couple enough
signal to activate the counter. The frequency displayed will be the same as that
marked on the crystal, which is 1/12 the final output frequency.
Read the frequency counter frequency. It should be within 1.67 kHz of the
crystal frequency derived at Section 3.2.4.1.2, for Fo.
2. On the RF generator, and set switch S1:1 to OFF and switch S1:2 to ON (to
change the interrogation frequency to Fo + 160 kHz). Read the frequency
counter frequency. It should be within +1.67 kHz of the crystal frequency derived
at Section 3.2.4.1.2, for Fo + 160 kHz.
3-13
HA72500
SECTION 3
change the interrogation frequency to Fo - 160 kHz). Read the frequency counter
frequency. It should be within 1.67 kHz of the crystal frequency derived at
Section 3.2.4.1.2, for Fo - 160 kHz.
change the interrogation frequency to Fo + 900 kHz). Read the frequency
counter frequency. It should be within 1.67 kHz of the crystal frequency derived
at Section 3.2.4.1.2, for Fo + 900 kHz.
change the interrogation frequency to Fo - 900 kHz). Read the frequency counter
frequency. It should be within 1.67 kHz of the crystal frequency derived at
Section 3.2.4.1.2, for Fo - 900 kHz.
6. On the RF generator, set switch S1:5 to OFF and switch S1:1 to ON (to change
the interrogation frequency back to the nominal frequency).
3.2.4.4.6
Test Interrogator Signal Timing Parameters
On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff (High Efficiency) test in the Maintenance mode,
and a TI RATE of 1 kHz (refer Section A.1 for CTU operating instructions).
1. Connect the frequency counter to test jacks 1 s MARKERS and EARTH on the
front panel of the test interrogator. Measure the frequency; it should be 1000.0
0.10 kHz.
2. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES and
EARTH on the test interrogator. Measure the following characteristics of the
displayed pulses:
PULSE WIDTH
PULSE SPACING
PULSE REPETITION PERIOD

1.0 0.1 milliseconds
(For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)

3. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks INTERROGATIONS TIMING
and EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY TIMING and
EARTH on the test interrogator. On the front panel of the test interrogator press
and hold operated CHECK DETECTOR COINCIDENCE and measure the time
interval, on the oscilloscope, between the leading edges of the pulses on the two
channels. The time interval should be 0.1 microseconds.
3.2.4.5
RF Source and RF Amplifier Alignment and Tests
1. Extend the receiver video using the transponder extender frame.

2. If the RF source and RF filter have not yet been aligned for their operating reply
frequency, perform the alignment using the procedures of Section 3.2.6.
3. To check the RF frequency of the RF source, it is necessary to remove its cover
and couple some signal from the crystal oscillator to a frequency counter. For this
purpose, it is necessary to have a piece of coaxial cable, approximately 1 metre
long, with a 1 cm diameter loop at one end, connected between the centre
conductor and the earth braid. The other end connects to the counter.
To make a measurement, the coupling loop should be placed near coil L1, to
couple enough signal to activate the counter. The frequency displayed will be the
same as that marked on the crystal, which is 1/12 the final output frequency.
3-14
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the frequency of the oscillator, which should be within 1.67 kHz of the
crystal frequency derived in Section 3.2.4.1.2.
4. Measure the DC voltage at the LOCAL OSC LEVEL test jack on the receiver
video front panel. This should be 2.0 1.0 volts.
5. Measure the DC voltage at the RF LEVEL test jack on the receiver video front
panel. This should be 3.0 1.5 volts.
6. Replace the receiver video module in the transponder subrack.
3.2.4.6
RF Panel Preselector Filter Alignment and Tests
1. On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR

DC POWER to OFF. Withdraw the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator
from above the switched attenuator and reconnect the output coaxial cable
directly to the switched attenuator output. Install the test interrogator back into
the transponder subrack. On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR
AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER to ON.
2. On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff test in Maintenance mode, and a TI RATE
of 1 kHz.
3. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) to test jacks
DETECTED LOG VIDEO and EARTH on the receiver video front panel. With an
oscilloscope timebase of 5 microseconds/division, a pulse pair should be
displayed above the noise.
If the signal is not visible, more signal can be achieved (temporarily until initial
alignment is achieved and significant signal is available) by disconnecting the
coaxial cable from Ti-1 TEST INTRGS at port FWD-E - for monitor system 1 (the
coaxial cable from TI-2 TEST INTRGS at port FWD-C - for monitor system 2) on
No.2 directional coupler and reconnecting it to the preselector filter IN connector
(after removing the semirigid cable link to the circulator).
4. Loosen the locknuts on the preselector filter and tune adjusters A and C together,
keeping them equal distances out from the body; if the frequency is to be
increased, tune the adjusters out (counter-clockwise); if the frequency is to be
decreased, tune the adjusters in (clockwise).
5. Tune both adjusters A and C for a peak, then detune adjuster B until the signal is
only just clearly visible.
6. Retune adjusters A and C successively for peaks. While monitoring the
oscilloscope display, to ensure that the signal level does not change, lock
adjusters A and C with their locknuts. Then retune adjuster B for absolute peak,
locking it in the same way.
CAUTION
Extreme care must be exercised during this tuning as even a slight

detuning of one cavity will cause a skewed response.

DC POWER to OFF. Withdraw the test interrogator and replace the 30 dB
attenuator. Install the test interrogator back into the transponder subrack. On the
test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER to ON.
8. (If changed, as above, on the RF panel, disconnect the cable from connector TI-1
TEST INTRGS - for monitor system 1 (TI-2 TEST INTRGS - for monitor system
2) at the preselector IN connector and reconnect it to port FWD-E - for monitor
3-15
HA72500
SECTION 3
system 1 (port FWD-C - for monitor system 2) on No.2 directional coupler.

Replace the semirigid cable between the preselector filter IN connector and the
circulator.)
3.2.4.7
Receiver Video Alignment

of 1 kHz.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) to test points XT13
and XT21 (GND) on the receiver video main board. Measure and record the peak
pulse amplitude above the 0 volts reference.
DC POWER to OFF.
5. Withdraw the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator from above the
switched attenuator and reconnect the output coaxial cable directly to the
switched attenuator output.
6. Install the test interrogator back into the transponder subrack. On the test
to ON.
7. With this increase of 30 dB in the signal level into the receiver video, on the
oscilloscope, again measure and record the peak pulse amplitude above the 0
volts reference.
8. Calculate the difference between the recorded results of steps 3 and 7, and
divide it by 5. Record this voltage; it should be 220 40 mV. This voltage is the
average voltage increment per 6 dB of signal level.
9. Connect the digital multimeter (on 2 volts range) to test points XT13 and XT6 on
the receiver video main board and check that it is within 1 0 mV of the voltage
calculated in step 8.
If the voltage is outside this range, set ADJUST 6 dB OFFSET (R45), so that the
multimeter reading equals (to within 5 mV) the offset voltage calculated in step
8.
POWER to ON.
11. On the oscilloscope, measure the peak pulse amplitude above the 0 volts
reference. It should be within 5 mV of the value recorded in step 3.
12. Replace the receiver video in the transponder subrack.
3.2.4.8
Transmitter Driver RF Output Alignment
The object of the alignment procedure in this section and in Section 3.2.4.9 is to obtain a
correctly shaped DME output pulse at the specified output power, with each of the
stages in the amplifier chain operating at the proper power level. Section 3.2.4.8
describes the procedure for adjusting the RF drive and modulation to the 1kW RF power
amplifier. Section 3.2.4.9 describes the final adjustments to the modulation to achieve
the specified pulse shape and power. At the conclusion of the procedure, the collector
3-16
HA72500
SECTION 3
currents of some of the amplifier stages may be different from the values initially set in
Section 3.2.4.8.
1. If the transmitter driver has not been aligned for operation at the station reply
frequency, then perform the procedure detailed in Section 3.2.7. The alignment
of the function generator (on the pulse shaper board) is detailed in Section 3.2.8.
2. Extend the transmitter driver using the transponder extender frame.
3. Set the switches as follows:
DRIVER DC POWER (on front panel) to OFF
ALC LOOP (S2 on the pulse shaper board) to OPEN,
ALC (S3 on the pulse shaper board) to VIDEO.
MED COLL (S4 on the pulse shaper board) to DC.
POWER link (X1 on pulse shaper board) to 1kW.
4. On the CTU front panel, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or SELECT MAIN NO 2
key as appropriate for the transponder being tested. On the transponder power
supply, switch the TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
5. On the pulse shaper board, set MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) fully counterclockwise to remove any pulse modulation.
6. On the receiver video, set the IDENT switch to CONTINUOUS.
7. Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test jacks HT and EARTH on the
transponder power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 42.0
0.2 volts. (If out of range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting
HT VOLTAGE (R26) on the transponder power supply main board.
8. Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER to OFF and set the 1kW power
amplifier AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
Remove the cover from the 1kW power amplifier then remove the cover from the
power modulation amplifier diecast box.
9. Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER and the 1kW power amplifier
AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
10. On the pulse shaper board, adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) for a voltage of
15 1 volts, as measured on the oscilloscope at the SHAPED MODULATION
test jack (this is just a starting value).
11. Connect the current probe to the oscilloscope and set the sensitivity to give a
display of 2 amperes per division. Clip the current probe sensor to the supply
lead (red lead) in the power modulation amplifier of the 1kW power amplifier.
12. Monitor the collector current and adjust the POWER MOD AMP control (R69) on
the pulse shaper board for a peak current of 9 amperes. Do not exceed this
value.
13. Move the current probe to the supply lead of the left hand amplifier of the driver
pair in the 1kW power amplifier (the amplifier A1). Adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE
(R53) for a collector pulse current of 2 amperes. Following this adjustment, adjust
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) on the pulse shaper board to give a peak
collector current of 7 amperes.
14. Vary MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) from the 7 ampere setting to zero, and
check that the displayed current pulse varies smoothly in amplitude. If there is
evidence of instability (indicated by discontinuities or breaking up of the pulse)
then slightly reduce the trimmer capacitor C4, in the power modulation amplifier,
3-17
HA72500
SECTION 3
by turning it counter-clockwise, to a maximum of one turn. Set the peak collector

current to 7 amperes when this check is completed.
15. Move the current probe back to the collector lead in the power modulator
amplifier and, if necessary, adjust the POWER MOD AMP control (R69) for a
peak current of 9 amperes.
3.2.4.9
1kW RF Power Amplifier Alignment
The 1kW RF power amplifier is a broadband unit and requires no internal alignment.
3.2.4.9.1
Output Pulse Alignment
1. On the RF panel of a dual DME, set the ANTENNA RELAY switch to No 1 TO

ANT or No2 TO ANT as appropriate for the transponder being tested.
2. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or SELECT MAIN NO 2 as
required, then select the Pwr.Out measurement for the transmitter being tested
(if necessary, refer to the CTU operating instructions in Section A.1).
3. Connect the oscilloscope to the DETECTED REPLIES test jack on the test
interrogator. Trigger the oscilloscope from the TRIGS TO MODULATOR test jack
or the receiver video.
4. On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to
ON.
1kW PA power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 50.0 0.2
volts. If out of range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting R112
on the regulator of the 1kW PA power supply.
6. On the transmitter driver front panel, switch DRIVER DC POWER to NORMAL.
7. While monitoring the displayed output power on the CTU, slowly increase MOD
PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) on the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver to
produce a Pwr.Out reading of 1200 50 watts. This will give a detected pulse
amplitude of typically 6 to 7 volts peak.
8. Perform a small number of successive adjustments to PEDESTAL VOLTAGE
(R53) and MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) to obtain an output pulse shape
generally similar to that shown in the figure below with a peak power of 1.2 kW, a
pulse width in the range 3.2 to 3.8 microseconds, and rise and fall times in the
range 1.9 to 2.5 microseconds. For final shape adjustment, see steps 9 to 14.
CAUTION
During the adjustments, do NOT let the peak power exceed a power of
1.6 kW.
3-18
HA72500
SECTION 3
9. On the oscilloscope, check the displayed signal from DETECTED REPLIES. On

the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver, adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE
(R53) so that the pedestal is about 5% of the total pulse amplitude, and clearly
visible, as shown in the figure below.
10. On the pulse shaper board, adjust INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R 17) so that there
is an equal pedestal step at each side of the pulse, that is, RISE PEDESTAL
equals FALL PEDESTAL.
11. On the pulse shaper board, adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) to reduce the
pedestal until there is a smooth transition between the pulse and the baseline.
Then adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) to give 1.2 kW peak power output.
12. If the pulse shape at the completion of step 11 does not meet the limits of step 8,
it may be necessary to readjust the function generator controls, R3 to R13 on the
pulse shaper board to achieve the required pulse shape parameters. The object
is to obtain the rated power output whilst meeting the pulse shape requirements
of step 8.
13. On the oscilloscope display of DETECTED REPLIES, check the relative
amplitudes of the two pulses of the pulse pair. If the second pulse is higher than
the first, reduce its amplitude with 2ND PULSE EQUALISING (R54) on the pulse
3-19
HA72500
SECTION 3
shaper board. (Otherwise leave this control fully clockwise.) If the second pulse is
lower than the first, increase the amplitude by a SMALL adjustment only of
INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) on the pulse shaper board.
14. If necessary, adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) on the pulse shaper board
to give 1.2 kW peak power output as in step 7.
15. Using the oscilloscope, measure the following parameters (with respect to an
EARTH test jack or earth test point on the same module - as appropriate).
Record these in the station log book for future reference.
MODULE
Pulse Shaper
1kW PA Power
Supply
MONITOR POINT
PARAMETER
Test Point XT9
DC Voltage
Test Point XT5
DC Voltage
Test Jack SHAPED

MODULATION
Pedestal Voltage
Pulse Peak Voltage
Test Jack POWER AMP DRIVER
Pulse Peak Voltage
Test Jack POWER AMP

MODULATOR
Pulse Peak Voltage
3.2.4.9.2
Automatic Level Control
CAUTION
In the next 2 steps, the output pulse peak power as measured by the CTU
Pwr.Out display should fall when specified switches are operated. If the
peak power rises instead, there is a fault in the equipment. Reverse the
operation of the switch and rectify the fault before continuing the test. The
pulse peak power should NOT be allowed to exceed 1.8 kW for more
than a few seconds.
1. On the pulse shaper board, switch ALC LOOP (S3) to OPEN. Adjust RF
OUTPUT (R62) on the transmitter driver front panel fully counter-clockwise. Set
switch ALC (S3) to DETECTED RF. Switch ALC LOOP to CLOSED. Observe
that the output pulse peak power has been reduced. Adjust RF OUTPUT to give
1.2 kW peak power output (see Section 3.2.4.9.1step 7). Leave ALC (S3) in the
DETECTED RF position.
2. On the transponder power supply front panel, switch TRANSPONDER DC
POWER to OFF. Replace the transmitter driver in the transponder subrack. On
the transponder power supply front panel, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
to ON.
3. On the CTU Pwr.Out display, read the output pulse peak power, it should be
1200 50 watts.
3.2.4.10 Transmitter Pulse Parameters

Ensure that the oscilloscope probes are correctly compensated and the vertical
amplifiers are calibrated just prior to the commencement of this section. The parameters
measured and recorded at the time of commissioning should be retained for later
reference.
3.2.4.10.1
Test Setup
1. On the receiver video front panel, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS.
3-20
HA72500
SECTION 3

TRIGS TO MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to test
jacks DETECTED REPLIES and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel.
3. On the CTU front panel, press the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET key.
DC POWER to NORMAL.
POWER to NORMAL.
NORMAL.
8. On the CTU front panel, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or SELECT MAIN NO 2
key as appropriate for the transponder being tested. Ensure MONITOR ALARM
is set to INHIBIT.
3.2.4.10.2
Output Pulse Power
1. On the CTU softkeys, select Pwr.Out measurement in the Param menu. Read
the displayed power, which should be 1200 60 watts.
3.2.4.10.3
Output Pulse Shape
1. From the display on the oscilloscope, measure the following parameters, which
should be within the limits shown:
PARAMETER
LIMITS
1st pulse: pulse width at half-amplitude
2nd pulse: pulse width at half-amplitude
1st pulse: rise time, 10% to 90%
2nd pulse: rise time, 10% to 90%
1st pulse: fall time, 10% to 90%
2nd pulse: fall time, 10% to 90%
Amplitude difference between pulses
2%
2. On the CTU front panel, display the following parameters:

PARAMETER
"
NOTE
LIMITS
Pulse width
Rise time
Fall time
The CTU pulse shape measurement facility measures the parameters of the
second pulse of a transmitted pulse pair.
3.2.4.10.4
Output Pulse Spacing
1. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks 1 s MARKERS and EARTH

on the test interrogator front panel. Use the displayed markers to correct the
oscilloscope time base calibration and then measure and record the pulse
3-21
HA72500
SECTION 3
spacing between the half-amplitude points on the leading edge of each pulse. It
should be 12.0 0.1 microseconds. (If the pulse spacing is outside this limit,
adjust REPLY PULSE SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on early
modules) on the receiver video front panel to set this parameter to a value in the
specified range. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)
2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to OFF.
3. On the CTU front panel, display the Spacing reading. The reading should be
within the limits of step 1 above. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)
4. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to NORMAL.
3.2.4.10.5
"
NOTE
Output Pulse Peak Power Calibration
This procedure need only be performed following replacement or repair of the

following units:
Test Interrogator Main PWB Assembly 1A72515
This procedure calibrates the power output measurement displayed on the CTU, and for
this purpose it is necessary to take the peak power meter and attenuators (detailed in
Section E.1) to the DME site.
As an alternative to the peak power meter, a calibrated detector may be used as detailed
in Table E-1 of Section E.1.
1. With the DME switched off, disconnect the antenna feed cable from the
ANTENNA connector on the RF panel at the rear of the rack. To the ANTENNA
connector, connect firstly, a 30 dB 50 watts attenuator then a 20 dB 1 watt
attenuator. Connect the peak power meter (or calibrated detector) to the output
of the 20 dB attenuator.
2. Extend the test Interrogator, using the transponder extender frame.
3. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or NO 2 key as required for the
transponder under test.
On the CTU front panel, display the Pwr.Out reading, Ch 1 or Ch2, as required
for the test interrogator being adjusted.
4. While monitoring the CTU display, adjust TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7) on the test
interrogator main board to display a Pwr.Out reading equal (within 15 watts) to
the reading on the peak power meter. Be sure to include any correction
necessary from the calibration data of the attenuator and peak power meter (or
detector).
5. Replace the test interrogator in the rack. Re-check the CTU Pwr.Out display
which should be within 30 watts of the corrected peak power meter reading. (If
the reading is outside the limits, extend the test interrogator on the extender
frame, adjust TPDR OP LVL CAL to produce the required correction, then
replace the test interrogator in the rack).
6. Switch off the DME, disconnect the meter and attenuators and replace the
antenna feed cable.
3-22
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.11 Receiver Performance Tests

3.2.4.11.1
"
Receiver On-channel Threshold
If this procedure is to be performed on an installed DME beacon, the DME

antenna must first be disconnected at the RF Panel and a suitable dummy load
connected to the ANTENNA connector. This is to prevent incoming aircraft
interrogations giving a false count.
NOTE
1. Connect a frequency counter to the ON CHANNEL VIDEO and EARTH test

jacks on the receiver video. Set the counter time base to 1 second. Make the
following switch settings on the transponder.
Test interrogator, MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER to OFF

(both modules, on a dual DME)
Transmitter driver, DRIVER DC POWER to OFF
Transponder power supply, TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON
2. Measure the ON CHANNEL VIDEO pulse count on the frequency counter. This
should be between 20 and 200 pulses per second.
3. If the pulse count is outside this range, then switch the TRANSPONDER DC
POWER to OFF. Remove the receiver video module from the rack and remove
the cover from the IF amplifier enclosure. Plug the module into the rack using a
transponder extender frame.
4. Switch on the TRANSPONDER DC POWER; leave the test interrogator and
transmitter driver switched off.
5. With a multimeter, measure the DC voltage at test pin XT13 on the IF amplifier
board (referenced to ground); it should be 6.0 0.1 volts. If necessary, adjust the
AGC preset (R15) to set the voltage within this range.
6. Measure the voltage at test pin XT10 (referenced to ground); it should be 5.0
0.1 volts. If necessary, adjust the ON CHANNEL preset (R50) to set the voltage
within this range.
7. Measure the DC voltage at test point XT6 and adjust the GAIN preset (R29) to
give a voltage of 4.0 0.4 volts.
8. Check that the ON CHANNEL pulse count is now within the required range. If it is
not, then make a further gain adjustment to R29 to achieve the specified pulse
count, ensuring that the voltage at XT6 stays within the limits of 4.0 0.4 volts. If
any adjustment is made, re-check the voltage now at XT6.
9. If any adjustment has been made, measure the voltage at test pin XT1; it should
be within the range 5.0 to 7.0 volts.
10. Switch off the transponder. Replace the cover on the IF amplifier and replace the
receiver video module in the rack. Set all transponder front panel switches to
NORMAL.
"
CAUTION
On DME equipment manufactured before 1993, ensure that the cut-out in

the IF amplifier cover is aligned with the ribbon cable entering the box.
3.2.4.11.2
Test Setup
NOTE
The receiver performance tests require the use of two SMA attenuators: a 6 dB
attenuator and a 3 dB attenuator. These are supplied with the DME. When
required, the attenuator is inserted in series with the cable that connects to the
TEST INTRGS connector on the RF panel at the rear of the rack. When an
3-23
HA72500
SECTION 3
attenuator is called for in the following text, the cable at TEST INTRGS should
be removed, the attenuator fitted to the TEST INTRGS connector, and the
cable attached to the attenuator.
"
NOTE
For some receiver tests, it is necessary to apply a high level signal, at 10

dBm, to the receiver input. When this is required, proceed as follows:
a. In the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator at the output of the
switched attenuator, and connect the output cable directly to the switched
attenuator.
b. On the RF panel, remove the short cable between the circulator and the
input to the preselector filter.
c. On the RF panel, make a direct connection from the TEST INTRGS
connector to the input of the preselector filter (a cable is supplied for this
purpose).
d. On the CTU, select Hi Eff measurement in Maintenance mode. A -10
dBm signal is now being applied to the receiver input.
1. Extend the test interrogator, using the transponder extender frame. Switch on the
DME in the maintenance mode, by first selecting MAINTENANCE, MONITOR
INHIBIT then SELECT MAIN NO 1 or NO 2 as required.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks REPLY TIMING and
EARTH, also on the test interrogator.
3. Connect channel 2 on the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES
and EARTH on the test interrogator.
4. On the oscilloscope, check that the centre of the REPLY ACCEPT GATES align,
within 0.5 microseconds, with leading edges of the REPLY TIMING pulses. If it
is outside this range, adjust the REPLY GATE DELAY controls on the test
interrogator.
5. On the CTU front panel, select Lo Eff parameter measurement in Maintenance
mode, and a TI RATE of 1 kHz. Check that a reply efficiency greater than 90% is
being displayed.
3.2.4.11.3
Receiver Sensitivity
1. Insert the 6 dB attenuator in series with the TEST INTRGS cable (of the RF
panel), to apply an input of -91 dBm to the receiver. Select TI RATE, 1 kHz. On
the CTU, measure the reply efficiency (using Lo Eff) averaged over a 10 second
period. The average reply efficiency should be greater than 70%.
If the reply efficiency in step 1 is not achieved, then check the following:
tuning of the preselector filter;
alignment of the IF amplifier;
receiver video alignment
(Refer to Section 3.2.9 for an abbreviated alignment procedure, or to Section 3.4

for detailed alignment)
3.2.4.11.4
Receiver Bandwidth
1. Remove the 6 dB attenuator on TEST INTRGS and replace it with the 3 dB

attenuator, to apply an input of -88 dBm to the receiver. On the CTU, measure
3-24
HA72500
SECTION 3
the reply efficiency (using Lo Eff) averaged over a 10 second period. The
average reply efficiency should be greater than 90%.
the interrogation frequency to 160 kHz above the nominal frequency). On the
CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged over a 10 second period. The
the interrogation frequency to 160 kHz below the nominal frequency). On the
If the reply efficiencies in step 1 to 3 are not achieved, then check the narrow
band alignment of the IF amplifier. (Refer to Section 3.2.9 for an abbreviated
alignment procedure, or to Section 3.4 for detailed alignment.)
3.2.4.11.5
Receiver Selectivity
1. Apply an input of -10 dBm to the receiver, as described in Section 3.2.4.11.2. On

the CTU, measure the reply efficiency (using Hi Eff) averaged over a 10 second
period. The average reply efficiency should be greater than 90%.
average reply efficiency should be less than 2%.
3.2.4.11.6
Receiver Decoding Window
1. Apply an input of -10 dBm to the receiver, as described in Section 3.2.4.11.2.

Switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING REJECT on the test
interrogator to +2 microseconds. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency (using
Hi Eff) averaged over a 10 second period. The average reply efficiency should
be less than 5%.
2. On the test interrogator, switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING
REJECT to -2 microseconds. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency
averaged over a 10 second period. The average reply efficiency should be less
than 5%.
3. Restore normal connections on the RF panel and replace the 30 dB attenuator in
the test interrogator. Insert the 3 dB attenuator at TEST INTRGS to give an input
of -88 dBm to the receiver. On the CTU, retain a TI RATE of 1 kHz and select
Lo Eff measurement.
ACCEPT to +1 microsecond. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency (using
Lo Eff) averaged over a 10 second period. The average reply efficiency should
be greater than 70%.
3-25
HA72500
SECTION 3

ACCEPT to -1 microsecond. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged
over a 10 second period. The average reply efficiency should be greater than
70%.
REJECT to +2 microseconds. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency
than 10%.
than 10%.
8. Remove the 3 dB attenuator from the RF panel when finished.
3.2.4.11.7
Receiver CW Protection
1. In the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator at the switched attenuator

output and re-connect the output cable. This applies a receiver input level of -40
dBm. On the CTU, select a TI RATE of 1 kHz, and select H1 Eff measurement.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DETECTED LOG
VIDEO and EARTH on the receiver video. Measure the pulse peak amplitude
(with respect to mean noise baseline); it should be at least 2.2 volts.
3. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to ON to add a CW signal to the
interrogation pulse. On the oscilloscope, measure the pulse peak amplitude (with
respect to mean noise baseline); it should be not more than 0.7 volts. (This
reduction in pulse peak amplitude proves correct operation of the automatic gain
control.)
4. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged over a 10 second period.
The average reply efficiency should be greater than 90%.
5. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to OFF to remove the CW signal from the
interrogation pulse. Replace the 30 dB attenuator in the test interrogator and
restore all connections to normal.
3.2.4.11.8
Receiver Reply Rate
1. With all connections on the RF panel and in the test interrogator restored to
normal, select a TI RATE of 1 kHz on the CTU.
2. On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement.
3. On the receiver video, switch and hold TEST switch to INHIBIT
INTERROGATIONS. On the CTU, read the average of five displayed Tx.Rate
readings. This squitter reply rate should be 945 10 Hz.
4. On the receiver video, switch and hold TEST switch to REPLY RATE MONITOR
TEST. On the CTU, read the average of five displayed Tx.Rate readings. This
reply rate should be 810 10 Hz.
5. While holding TI RATE 10 kHz on the CTU pressed, read the average of five
displayed Tx.Rate readings. This maximum reply rate should be 2800 100 Hz.
6. On the CTU, select D.Rate parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz. On a
dual DME, temporarily switch off the second test interrogator module to prevent
3-26
HA72500
SECTION 3
additional interrogation. Read the average of five displayed D.Rate readings. This
decoded pulse rate should be 1000 10 Hz.
7. On the CTU select Hi Eff measurement to give an input of -70 dBm. Connect
channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks TRIGGER and
EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DETECTED LOG VIDEO and
EARTH on the receiver video. Measure the pulse peak amplitude (with respect to
mean noise baseline); it should be at least 1.1 volts.
8. While observing the oscilloscope display, press TI RATE, 10 kHz on the CTU.
Measure the pulse peak amplitude (with respect to mean noise baseline); it
should be not more than 0.7 volts. (This reduction in pulse peak amplitude
proves correct operation of the automatic gain control.)
3.2.4.11.9
Dead Time
The performance tests include the setting of the DEAD TIME to position 6 of the switch.
This gives a nominal dead time of 60 microseconds, which is usually used if no better
value is known. Particular sites may do better if a different value is chosen. The
performance testing should be done at the site value.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DEAD TIME and
EARTH on the receiver video. The duration of the displayed pulse will have
random variations. Check that the pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73
microseconds for a DEAD TIME switch setting of 6. The dead time will jitter
between these limits because the system clock is not synchronous with the
incoming interrogations.
3.2.4.12 Echo Suppression

3.2.4.12.1
Long Distance Echo Suppression (LDES)
Long distance echo suppression stops the DME replying to echoes of the interrogation
pulse pair which arrive after the dead time has elapsed. This can occur at some sites
where aircraft interrogations suffer multi-path reflections from terrain that is 5 to 25
nautical miles distant from the beacon. If the reflections are of a comparable amplitude
to the direct signal, the transponder gives an additional synchronous reply, which may
cause a false lock-on at the interrogator. The effect in the aircraft is a stable DME
indication, which sometimes jumps to a larger erroneous value. The presence of echoes
is difficult to detect at the transponder, but it is helpful to connect the oscilloscope to test
point XT13 on the receiver video main board and observe the received aircraft
interrogation pulses. Trigger the oscilloscope internally, and look for synchronous
interrogations of reduced amplitude that appear after the dead time period. The LDES
THRESHOLD is set so that it is triggered by the direct signal, and the LDES PERIOD is
set so that the LDES suppression pulse extends beyond the observed echoes. The final
setting may need to be determined by experiment, to suit the amplitude and delay of the
echoes at the particular site.
The procedure below uses nominal settings to test the LDES. At sites where the LDES is
in use, the previously determined settings should be used.
1. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
2. While extending the receiver video using the transponder extender frame, switch
LDES (S9) on the receiver video main board to ON.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test points XT13 and XT21 on
3-27
HA72500
SECTION 3
the receiver video main board. On the oscilloscope, measure the peak
interrogation pulse voltage. This voltage should be 2.70 0.50 volts.
4. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test points XT9 and XT21 (GND) on the
receiver video main board. While observing the oscilloscope display, adjust
LDES LEVEL (R46) to set the long distance echo suppression level to 0.10 to
0.15 volts less than the voltage recorded in the previous step.
5. Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DEAD TIME and EARTH on the
receiver video. The duration of the displayed pulse will have random variations.
Check that the pulse duration remains in the range 115 to 140 microseconds.
6. On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope, check
that the pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73 microseconds.
7. On the receiver video main board, switch LDES (S9) to OFF (unless it is to be
used at this site).
3.2.4.12.2
Short Distance Echo Suppression (SDES)
Short distance echo suppression permits the decoding of an interrogation pulse pair
when echoes of the first pulse occur between the two pulses. It may be found necessary
at sites where reflections from nearby structures or terrain corrupt the second pulse of
the interrogation pulse pair. The effect in the aircraft is the absence of replies, and the
loss of DME indication at certain locations. The need for SDES may be determined onsite by connecting the oscilloscope (internally triggered) to test point XT13 on the
receiver video main board, and observing the interrogation pulse pairs from nearby
aircraft. If extraneous pulses appear between the two pulses, or if the second pulse
leading edge is distorted, then switch SDES to ON, and check it this improves the DME
reception in the aircraft.
The procedure below checks the operation of the SDES circuit. If SDES is used, it
should be left switched ON at the end of this check procedure.
1. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test points XT13 and XT21
(GND) on the receiver video main board. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope
to test jacks SDES PULSE and EARTH on the receiver video. On the
oscilloscope, check that the displayed XT13 waveform is similar to that shown in
the figure below for SDES OFF.
3. On the receiver video main board, switch SDES to ON. On the oscilloscope,
check that an SDES pulse is now present and that the displayed XT13 waveform
has the leading edge of the second pulse masked out in line with the SDES pulse
3-28
HA72500
SECTION 3
as shown in the figure above for SDES ON. (The SDES pulse has a nominal
width of 2.5 microseconds and is delayed a nominal 14 microseconds from the
TRIGGER pulse.)
4. On the receiver video main board, switch SDES to OFF (unless it is to be used at
this site). Install the receiver video back in the transponder subrack.
3.2.4.13 Transponder Delay

3.2.4.13.1
Reply Delay Adjustment
1. On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz. The

displayed reading will probably fluctuate 0.1 microseconds about the average
value. If necessary, adjust the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE controls
on the receiver video to achieve an average as near as possible to 50.0
microseconds. Due to the limited resolution of the FINE control, it will sometimes
be necessary to accept 49.9 or 50.1 microseconds. A reading on the low side is
preferred since the antenna feeder will increase the transponder delay as
measured by an aircraft. Record this Reference Delay value in the log book.
3.2.4.13.2
Final Receiver Checks
1. On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks INTERROGATIONS
TIMING and EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY
TIMING and EARTH on the test interrogator. Measure the time interval between
the first interrogation pulse and the first synchronised reply pulse (at halfamplitude points on the pulse leading edges) and measure by reference to the 1
microsecond markers at 1 s MARKERS test jack on the test interrogator. The
time interval should be within 0.1 microseconds of the value displayed on the
CTU. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)
3. On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
VIDEO and EARTH on the receiver video. Measure the amplitude of the
displayed synchronous video pulses with respect to the 0 volts reference (taking
the mean of the noise on the peak of the pulses). The amplitude should be 1.2
0.5 volts.
5. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope
measure the amplitude of the displayed synchronous video pulses with respect to
the 0 volts reference. The amplitude should be 1.8 0.5 volts.
6. Calculate the difference in amplitudes of steps 4 and 5. This difference should be
in the range 0.4 to 0.7 volts.
7. On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope, check
(see figure below) that the displayed synchronous video pulses alternate
between the two levels recorded above. Measure the time interval from the rising
edge of the first pulse of a low level synchronous video pulse pair to the rising
edge of the first pulse of a high level synchronous video pulse pair. This time
interval should be 1.00 0.05 milliseconds. (Synchronous reply pulses, probably
at a higher level, will also be present on the displayed waveform.)
3-29
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.14 Ident
The ident code used for testing should be the one assigned to the DME station.
3.2.4.14.1
Internal ldent
1. On the CTU, switch MAINTENANCE to OFF. Under the Misc menu select Mon 1
- for No.1 transponder (Mon 2 - for No.2 transponder) as the ident (speaker)
source. Switch MAINTENANCE back to ON. Listen to the ident from the CTU
mounted speaker and check that it is correct for the assigned ident (as set in
Section 3.2.4.2.4). If necessary, set the internal speaker volume preset (R33) to
provide a suitable ident level (refer Section A.5.1.3). If external ident tone is
required, it may be appropriate to set the level here; refer to Section A.5.1.7.
2. Using a stopwatch, measure the ident repetition period. It should be 40 4
seconds.
If it is outside this range, it may be adjusted by the preset IDENT REPTN RATE
(R39) in the receiver video. (IDENT CODE SPEED (R37) sets the rate at which
the dots and dashes are transmitted).
3.2.4.14.2
External Ident
1. On the external I/O board at the rear of the rack, locate terminals XB1:4 (ASSOC
IDENT IN) and XB11:5 (GND).
2. Apply a pulsed short circuit between these terminals to simulate Morse code from
an external source. Listen to the CTU mounted speaker and confirm that ident is
transmitted whenever the short circuit is applied.
3. Listen for the internally generated ident and start a stopwatch at the
commencement of the internal ident.
4. Immediately, on the external I/O board terminals, apply the short circuit for 1 to 2
seconds.
5. Using a stopwatch, measure the elapsed time until the commencement of the
next internal ident. This elapsed time should be less than 58 seconds.
3.2.4.14.3
Master Ident
1. On the external I/O board, connects a continuity test between terminals XB1:1
and XB1:2 (ASSOC IDENT OUT). Using a stopwatch, measure the time period
between the commencement of the internally generated ident messages. Check
that this time period is 10 1 seconds for three out of four ident messages.
2. Check that every fourth ident message is suppressed.
3-30
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. Check that the suppressed ident message coincides with the ident message
transmitted by the DME.
3.2.4.14.4
Ident Frequency

2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS. On the CTU, read the
average of five displayed transmitted pulse rate readings. This ident frequency
should be 135020 Hz.

For the tests described in this section, it is assumed that the monitor fault limits have
been set, using the internal preset switches, to the values specified in Section 3.2.4.2.8.
If these limits have been set to values other than those specified, then the appropriate
corrections must be made to the limit values given in the following tests.
For most of the fault limit tests below, two procedures are given, marked 'a' and b'. The
use of these is as follows:
a. This procedure uses the internal fault limit test facility to measure the monitor
fault limit. DME operation is not interrupted and no preset controls are disturbed.
This procedure should be used for periodic inspections.
b. This procedure may interrupt the operation of the DME and requires disturbance
of some controls.
This procedure should be used only after repair or replacement of the monitor.
3.2.4.15.1
Test Setup
1. On the monitor main board, ensure that each of the fault limit switches has been
set as specified in Section 3.2.4.2.8, step 1 (or to the fault limits required for the
station).
2. At the rear of the rack, ensure that the cables providing signals into the ERP IN
connectors of the transponders have been connected.
3. On the RF panel, ensure that the antenna integrity monitor cable (from the
antenna DC continuity monitor) is connected to XN2 on the RF panel board.
If the antenna does not have a DC continuity monitor, then switches S2:5 and
S2:7, on the CTU processor board, must be set to ON (refer Section 3.2.4.2.3).
DC POWER to NORMAL.
POWER to NORMAL.
NORMAL.
8. On the RF panel, ensure ANTENNA RELAY switch is set to NORMAL in a dual
DME.
9. On the CTU front panel select MAINTENANCE, then press the SELECT MAIN
NO 1 or NO 2 key as appropriate for the transponder being tested.
3-31
HA72500
SECTION 3
10. On the monitor, ensure that the eight green parameter indicators are on and the
red PRIMARY and yellow SECONDARY indicators are off (except for short
periods about every 16 seconds when some of these indicators will flash during
monitor self test).
3.2.4.15.2
Delay Monitor
a. Procedure a:
1. On the CTU, select the FltLimit menu and the Delay parameter for
measurement.
2. Check that the displayed values are within the following limits:
Delay, Lower: 49.5 +0.1. -0.0 microseconds
Delay, Upper: 50.5 +0.1, -0.0 microseconds
If a consistent error exists in the Upper and Lower Delay limits, a correction of
+0.1 microseconds or -0.1 microseconds can be added, for each monitor system,
by using the 8-bit DIP switch S1 on the CTU processor board as follows. Record
the final settings of these four switches for future reference.
CORRECTION
s
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 1
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 2
ON
ON
ON
ON
+0.1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-0.1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
(0)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
b. Procedure b:
2. On the receiver video, read and record the position of the BEACON DELAY,
COARSE and FINE switches (to enable these switches to be restored to their
original positions at the completion of these tests).
3. On the receiver video, adjust the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE
switches to produce a displayed Delay of 49.5 microseconds on the CTU.
Check that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY
indicator is on.
4. While observing the monitor DELAY indicator, slowly continue to adjust the
BEACON DELAY, COARSE switch towards position 0 to reduce the beacon
delay. Check that the DELAY indicator remains off.
For delays outside the range 48 to 52 microseconds, the CTU will display
"OVERFLOW".
For delays around 38 microseconds, the second pulse of the pulse pair will
fall within the accept window around 50 microseconds and the DELAY
indicator will again turn on. This is acceptable.
Check that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY
indicator is on.
3-32
HA72500
SECTION 3
BEACON DELAY, COARSE switch towards position F to increase the
beacon delay. Check that the DELAY indicator remains off.
Check that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is on.
BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE switches to decrease the beacon
delay (but not below 49.7 microseconds). Check that the DELAY indicator
remains on.
Check that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is on.
10. On the receiver video, restore the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE
switches to their original settings.
3.2.4.15.3
Spacing Monitor
a. Procedure a:
1. On the CTU, select the FltLimit menu and the Spacing parameter for
measurement.
Spacing, lower: 11.5 +0.0, -0.1 microseconds
Spacing, upper: 12.5 +0.0, -0.1microseconds
b. Procedure b:
1. On the CTU, select Spacing parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
2. On the receiver video, read and record the position of the REPLY PULSE
SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on earlier modules) switch (to
enable this switch to be restored to its original position at the completion of
these tests).
3. On the receiver video, adjust the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to
produce a displayed Spacing of 11.4 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of
the coarse adjustment of the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch it may not be
possible to achieve a steady reading of 11.4 microseconds on the CTU. In
this case, adjust the switch to produce a CTU reading as close as possible to
11.4 microseconds, but never greater than 11.4 microseconds.) Check that
the SPACING indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is
on.
4. While observing the monitor SPACING indicator, slowly continue to adjust the
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch towards position 0 to reduce the pulse
spacing. Check that the SPACING indicator remains off.
produce a displayed spacing of 12.6 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of
3-33
HA72500
SECTION 3
12.6 microseconds, but never less than 12.6 microseconds.) Check that the
SPACING indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch towards position F to increase the pulse
produce a displayed Spacing of 12.3 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of
12.3 microseconds, but never greater than 12.3 microseconds.) Check that
the SPACING indicator on the monitor is on.
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to decrease the pulse spacing (but not
below 11.7 microseconds). Check that the SPACING indicator remains on.
produce a displayed spacing of 11.7 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of
11.7 microseconds, but never less than 11.7 microseconds.) Check that the
monitor SPACING indicator is on.
10. On the receiver video, restore the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to its
original setting.
3.2.4.15.4
Efficiency Monitor
a. Procedure a:
1. On the CTU, select the FltLimit menu and the Effncy parameter for
measurement.
2. Check that the displayed value is within the following limit:
Effncy, lower: 60 2%
b. Procedure b:
There is no alternative procedure for this test.
3.2.4.15.5
Rate Monitor
a. Procedure a:
1. On the CTU, select the FltLimit menu and the Tx.Rate parameter for
measurement.
Tx.Rate, lower: 833 10 Hz
Tx.Rate, upper: 3000 30 Hz
b. Procedure b:
1. On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 50
Hz (100 Hz for a dual DME).
3-34
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. On the monitor, check that the RATE indicator is on while the CTU
displays a transmit pulse rate reading of 945 10 Hz.
3. On the receiver video, switch and hold TEST switch to REPLY RATE
MONITOR TEST. On the monitor, check that the RATE indicator is off
and the SECONDARY indicator is on while the CTU displays a
transmitted pulse rate reading of 810 10 Hz.
3.2.4.15.6
Power Monitor
3.2.4.15.6.1 Adjustment
This procedure is intended for use at installation or after module repair.
1. Extend the monitor on the transponder extender frame. Switch on the DME and
confirm that it is giving normal transmitter power.
2. Select the required fault limit point on switch PWR LVL FLT SET (S7) on the
monitor main board. This fault limit is normally set to -3 dB, and the following
check procedure assumes a fault limit of -3 dB.
3. With a multimeter, (on the 20V range) measure the voltage between test points
XT1 and XT13 (GND) on the monitor main board. This should be 5.000 0.002
volts.
4. Connect the multimeter to test point XT2 and XT13 (GND). Adjust R87 (PEAK
POWER MONITOR CALIBRATION) preset to give a voltage of 2.50 0.05 volts.
Check that the monitor RF POWER indicator is on.
5. Replace the module in the rack.
3.2.4.15.6.2 Measurement
a. Procedure a:
1. On the CTU, select the FltLimit menu and the Ant.Pwr parameter for
measurement.
2. Check that the displayed value is within the following limit:
Ant.Power, lower: -3 0 dB
b. Procedure b:
1. Extend the monitor module on the transponder extender frame. Switch on the
DME and confirm normal operation. Check that the monitor RF POWER
indicator is on.
2. Connect a multimeter (20V DC range) to test points XT2 and XT13 (GND) on
the monitor main board. Measure and record the voltage at XT2.
3. Adjust R87 (PEAK POWER MONITOR CALIBRATION) preset to reduce the
voltage at XT2. Measure the voltage at which the RF POWER indicator just
turns off. This should be 1.77 0.1 volts.
4. Restore R87 for the XT2 voltage measured in step 2 above.
5. Replace the monitor module in the rack.
3.2.4.15.7
Ident Monitor
a. Procedure a:
There is no fault limit test for this parameter.
b. Procedure b:
3-35
HA72500
SECTION 3
1. On the CTU, set MONITOR ALARM to NORMAL to allow ident to be

transmitted.
2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to NORMAL. Check that ident code is
being transmitted and is audible from the CTU mounted speaker.
3. Immediately after the transmission of an ident code group, switch IDENT on
the receiver video to OFF. Measure (with a stopwatch) the time taken for the
monitor IDENT indicator to turn off and the SECONDARY indicator to turn on.
This should be 60 3 seconds.
4. On the CTU, set MONITOR ALARM to INHIBIT (to prevent the beacon from
shutting down).
5. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS. Measure (with a
stopwatch) the time taken for the monitor DELAY and SPACING indicators to
both turn off. This should be 3 seconds.
7. On the CTU, set MONITOR ALARM to NORMAL.
"
NOTE
The ident fault delay time may be set as low as 45 seconds, if required,
provided that the internal ident generator (in the receiver video) is set for a
repetition period of 40 seconds. However, if an external ident source is used
(for example, from an associated DVOR), then the ident fault delay time must
be set to a value not less than 60 seconds. This is to ensure adequate time for
the internal ident to start should the external ident fail.
Details for setting the ident fault delay time (switch IDENT GAP FLT SET (S8)
on the monitor main board) are given in Section A.5.
3.2.4.15.8
Antenna Monitor
a. Procedure a:
b. Procedure b:
1. On the monitor, check that the ANTENNA indicator is on.
2. On the RF panel at the rear of the rack, disconnect the antenna DC continuity
cable from XN2 on the RF panel board. Check that the monitor ANTENNA,
indicator is off.
3. Re-connect the antenna DC continuity cable to XN2. Replace monitor in the
rack.
3.2.4.15.9
Shape Monitor
a. Procedure a:
b. Procedure b:
1. Extend the monitor using the transponder extender frame.
2. On the monitor, check that the SHAPE indicator is on. (If it is not, then check
that the transmitter pulse shape is correct and that switches S1, S2, S3 and
S4 on the monitor main board are correctly set - see Section 3.2.4.2.8, step
1.).
3-36
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. On the monitor, switch S1.5 to ON to change the Pulse Width Lower Reject
Limit from 2.9 microseconds to 1.3 microseconds (and thus the Upper Limit
from 4.1 microseconds to 2.5 microseconds). Check that the SHAPE
indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S1:5 back to
OFF (and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is on again).
4. On the monitor, switch S1:6 to OFF to change the Pulse Width Lower Reject
Limit from 2.9 microseconds to 6.1 microseconds. Check that the SHAPE
indicator is off. Switch S1:6 back to ON (and ensure that the SHAPE indicator
is on again).
5. On the monitor, switch S2:6 to ON to change the pulse Fall Time Upper
Reject Limit from 3.6 microseconds to 0.4 microseconds. Check that the
SHAPE indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S2:6
back to OFF (and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is on again).
6. On the monitor, switch S3:5 to ON to change the pulse Rise Time Upper
Reject Limit from 3.1 microseconds to 1.5 microseconds. Check that the
SHAPE indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S3:5
back to OFF (and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is on again).
7. Restore the monitor back in the transponder subrack.
"
NOTE
The monitor pulse shape monitor checks the parameters of the first pulse of a
transmitted pulse pair. The CTU pulse shape measurement facility however,
measures the second pulse of the pair.
3.2.4.15.10 Monitor Self Test

1. With the DME operating in Maintenance mode, ensure that all eight monitor
parameter indicators are on.
2. On the monitor, check that the SELF TEST indicator flashes on at regular
intervals. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period of these indicator flashes.
The time period should be 16 2 seconds.
3. Check that simultaneously with this indicator flashing on, the DELAY and
SPACING indicators are off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
3.2.4.15.11 Monitor Fault Limits - Final Check

1. With the DME operating in Maintenance mode, ensure that all 8 monitor
2. On the CTU, select the FltLimit parameters listed in the table below. For each
parameter, the displayed fault limits should be within the ranges listed in the
table. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.2.10)
PARAMETER
SPECIFIED
VALUE
Delay; Lower
49.5
Delay; Upper
50.5
Spacing; Lower
11.5
Spacing; Upper
12.5
Effncy; (Lower)
Tx Rate; Lower
Tx Rate; Upper
Ant Power; (Lower)
60
833
3000
-3
LIMITS
+0.1
--0.0
+0.1
--0.0
+0.0
-0.1
+0.0
-0.1
2
10
30
0
UNITS
s
s
s
s
%
Hz
Hz
dB
3-37
HA72500
SECTION 3
If a consistent error exists in the Upper and Lower Delay limits, a correction of +0.1
microseconds or -0.1 microseconds can be added, for each monitor system, by using
the 8-bit DIP switch S1 on the CTU processor board as follows.
CORRECTION
s
0
+0.1
-0.1
(0)
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 1
6
7
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 2
3
4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
3.2.4.16 Control System - PART 1 - SINGLE DME

3.2.4.16.1
Normal Operation
1. On the monitor, ensure switch MONITOR OUTPUTS is set to NORMAL.

2. On the test interrogator, ensure switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER is set to NORMAL.
3. On the transponder power supply, ensure switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
is set to NORMAL.
4. On the transmitter drivers, ensure switch DRIVER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
5. On the receiver video, ensure switch IDENT is set to NORMAL.
6. On the 1kW PA power supply, ensure switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
MAINTENANCE (if MAINTENANCE indicator is not off),
MONITOR ALARM (if MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT indicator is not off),
RECYCLE (if RECYCLE indicator is not off).
8. On the CTU, set the ALARM DELAY switch to 10 seconds.
9. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 key. Check that the state of each of
the CTU indicators is as shown in the table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
ALL
MODULES
ANT RELAY
AC POWER NORM
BATT CHG 1
BATT CHG 2
BATT LOW
REQUIRED STATE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3-38
HA72500
SECTION 3
10. On the monitor, ensure that the eight parameter indicators are on and the
PRIMARY and SECONDARY indicators are off (except for short periods about
every 16 seconds when some of these indicators will flash during monitor self
test).
When setting up the DME for normal operation, it may be necessary to wait up to
10 seconds (90 seconds for ident) for normal operation to commence from the
last action which initiated the normal operation.
3.2.4.16.2
Primary Fault
This test involves generating a primary fault, and then monitoring the sequence of
events following this action.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
2. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY alarm register
indicator on the CTU turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator on the CTU
turning off - in response to switching and holding TEST, on the receiver video to
INHIBIT INTERROGATIONS. This alarm delay time should be 10 1 seconds.
3. On the CTU, check that the state of the listed CTU indicators is as shown in the
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NORMAL
SHUTDOWN
DELAY
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
4. On the CTU, press the following front panel keys in the specified sequence:
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
5. Confirm that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
3.2.4.16.3
Secondary Fault
This test involves generating a secondary fault, and then monitoring the status following
this action.
2. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of the transponder
subrack.
3. On the monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
table below.
INDICATOR
NORMAL
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
SECONDARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
ON
5. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cable to connector ERP IN

on the rear of the transponder subrack.
3-39
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.16.4
Recycle Function
This test involves causing a shutdown by generating a primary fault, and then monitoring
the sequence of restart events following this action.
2. On the CTU, reset the restart count to 0 using the Misc menu. Press RECYCLE
key to turn the RECYCLE indicator on.
3. Cause the DME to shutdown by switching MONITOR OUTPUTS on the monitor
to FAILED and check that the rack shuts down after the selected 10 1 seconds.
4. Measure the time period from this shutdown to the following restart. This should
be 30 3 seconds.
5. Leaving the MONITOR OUTPUTS switch in the FAILED position, count the total
number of restart attempts (including the first one in the step above). This
number should be 3.
6. Check that the rack then remains shutdown.
7. On the CTU, select the Misc menu and check that the displayed number of
restart attempts is 3.
table below:
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
REQUIRED STATE
NO 1 ON
NORMAL
SHUTDOWN
DELAY
SPACING
EFFICIENCY
TX RATE
RF POWER
IDENT
PULSE SHAPE
ANTENNA
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
MONITOR
CTU
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
9. On the monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.

SELECT MAIN NO 1.
12. If the recycle function is not required, press RECYCLE key on the CTU to turn
the RECYCLE indicator off.
3-40
HA72500
3.2.4.16.5
SECTION 3
High Voltage Shutdown Adjust
1. On the control module of the AC power supply, set the controls listed in the table
below as indicated:
SHUT DOWN DELAY fully counter-clockwise,
H/V SHUTDOWN fully clockwise.
2. With the multimeter connected to the rack BATTERY terminals, switch and hold
the TEST/FLOAT switch to TEST, and adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on
the control module of the AC power supply to produce a multimeter reading of
28.5 0.1 volts.
3. While keeping the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply held to TEST,
slowly adjust H/V SHUT DOWN control counter-clockwise until the DME shuts
down. Check that the H/V SHUT DOWN indicator on the control module is on.
adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise to produce a multimeter
reading of 27.5 0.2 volts. The DME should return to normal operation.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control clockwise again until the DME again
shuts down. Read the multimeter reading. It should be 28.5 0.2 volts.
6. On the AC power supply, release the TEST/FLOAT switch. Confirm that the
DME is powered up and operating in the normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
7. On the control module of the AC power supply, adjust the SHUT DOWN DELAY
control to mid-position.
reading of 29.0 0.2 volts. Release the TEST/FLOAT switch to enable the DME
to return to normal operation.
9. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from pressing the TEST/FLOAT
switch to the DME shutting down. This time delay should be 3 1 seconds. (If
necessary readjust SHUT DOWN DELAY control to achieve this delay.)
3.2.4.16.6
Low Voltage Alarm Adjust
1. On the control module of the AC power supply, set LOW VOLTALARM control
fully counter-clockwise.
23.5 0.1 volts.
slowly adjust LOW VOLTALARM control clockwise until the O/P FAIL indicator
on the control module turns on. The DME should remain in operation.
adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control clockwise to produce a multimeter reading of
24.5 0.2 volts.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise again until the O/P
FAIL indicator again turns on. Read the multimeter reading. It should be 23.5
0.2 volts.
3-41
HA72500
SECTION 3
23.0 0.1 volts.
check that the BATT CHG 1 indicator on the CTU is off.
3.2.4.16.7
Low Voltage Shutdown Adjust
1. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU & TRANSPONDER
to OFF. Extend the CTU using two Eurocard extenders. Switch circuit breaker
CTU & TRANSPONDER to ON. If batteries are used, temporarily disconnect
them from the BATTERY terminals.
2. On the CTU processor board of the CTU, adjust the low volts preset R32 fully
counter-clockwise.
22.0 0.1 volts.
4. While keeping the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply held to TEST, on
the CTU processor board, adjust R32 clockwise until the DME shuts down and
the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns on. Then slowly adjust R32 counterclockwise until the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns off. Slowly adjust R32
clockwise again until the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU again turns on.
24.5 0.2 volts. The DME should return to normal operation.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise again while
observing the multimeter. Measure the voltage immediately prior to DME
shutdown. It should be 22.0 0.2 volts.
check that the CTU BATT LOW indicator is on.
to OFF. Restore the CTU to the CTU subrack. Switch circuit breaker CTU &
TRANSPONDER to ON.
3.2.4.16.8
DC Supply Adjustment
1. Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to the 24 volts BATTERY terminals
at the rear of the rack.
2. With the DME operating in the normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1, measure the
primary DC supply voltage. It should be 27 0.2 volts.
If it is outside this limit, it may be adjusted by the FLOAT2 VOLTAGE control on
the control module of the AC power supply.
3-42
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.16 Control System - PART 2 - DUAL DME

From this point on, the tests are only to be performed once on the equipment under test.
When an action is taken on the DME to initiate a shutdown or a transfer, and the time
delay from the action to the response is to be measured, it is recommended that the
action take place within a period 2 to 7 seconds after the completion of monitor self test.
This will ensure that the measured time period is not affected by the presence of a
monitor self test.
3.2.4.16.1
Normal Operation - No. 1 is MAIN
1. On both monitors, ensure switch MONITOR OUTPUTS is set to NORMAL.

2. On both test interrogators, ensure switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
3. On both transponder power supplies, ensure switch TRANSPONDER DC
4. On both transmitter drivers, ensure switch DRIVER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
5. On both receiver videos, ensure switch IDENT is set to NORMAL.
6. On both 1kW PA power supplies, ensure switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER is set
to NORMAL.
7. On the RF panel, ensure switch ANTENNA RELAY is set to NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
9. On the CTU, set the ALARM DELAY switch to 10 seconds.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
ALL
MODULES
ANT RELAY
AC POWER NORM
BATT CHG 1
BATT CHG 2
BATT LOW
REQUIRED STATE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
11. On both monitors, ensure that the eight parameter indicators are on and the
test).
3-43
HA72500
SECTION 3
When setting up the DME for normal operation, it may be necessary to wait up to
10 seconds (90 seconds for ident) for normal operation to commence from the
last action which initiated the normal operation.
3.2.4.16.2
Primary Fault - No.1 is MAIN
This test involves generating primary faults, and then monitoring the sequence of events
following this action.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the No.1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
2. On both receiver video modules, read and record the position of the REPLY
PULSE SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on earlier modules) switch (to
enable these switches to be restored to their original positions at the completion
of these tests).
3. On the No.1 receiver video, turn REPLY PULSE SPACING through 5 positions.
Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY ALARM
REGISTER indicator on the CTU turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator
on the CTU turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY PULSE
SPACING on No.1 receiver video through 5 positions. This alarm delay time
should be 10 1 seconds.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
5. On the No.2 receiver video, turn REPLY PULSE SPACING through FIVE
positions. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY alarm
indicator on either monitor turning on to the NO 2 ON STATUS indicator on the
CTU turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY PULSE SPACING
on No.2 receiver video through 5 positions. This alarm delay time should be 10
1 seconds.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
7. On both receiver video modules, restore switches REPLY PULSE SPACING to

their original positions recorded at Section 3.2.4.16.2 step 2.
3-44
HA72500
SECTION 3
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
9. Confirm that the DME is operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
3.2.4.16.3
Secondary Fault - No. 1 is MAIN
This test involves generating secondary faults, and then monitoring the status following
this action. (Ensure that the cable connectors to ERP IN at the rear of the two
transponders are able to be distinguished so that they are returned to their correct
connections at the completion of this test.)
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
2. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of No.1 transponder
subrack. On No.1 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
3. Wait at least 20 seconds. On the CTU, check that the state of the listed CTU
indicators is as shown in the table below. No transfer to standby will occur until
this fault is registered on both monitors.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
RF POWER
SECONDARY
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of the No.2 transponder
subrack. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the SECONDARY
alarm indicator on the No.2 monitor turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator
on the CTU turning off - in response to disconnecting the input to the ERP IN
connector at the rear of No.2 transponder subrack. This alarm delay time should
be 10 1 seconds.
5. On No.2 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
RF POWER
SECONDARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
7. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cables to connectors ERP

IN on the rear of the transponder subracks (ensuring the original connections are
restored) and on the CTU, pressing the following front panel keys in the specified
sequence:
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
3-45
HA72500
SECTION 3
8. Confirm that the DME is operating in the No.1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
3.2.4.16.4
Normal Operation - No.2 is MAIN

NORMAL.
5. On both receiver video modules, ensure switch IDENT is set to NORMAL.
to NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
9. On the CTU, ensure switch ALARM DELAY is set to 10 seconds.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
RF ALL
MODULES
ANT RELAY
AC POWER NORM
BATT CHG 1
BATT CHG 2
BATT LOW
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
test).
3.2.4.16.5
Primary Fault - No. 2 is MAIN
3-46
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. On the No.2 receiver video, turn REPLY PULSE SPACING through five
positions. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY
ALARM REGISTER indicator on the CTU turning on to the NO 2 ON STATUS
indicator on the CTU turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY
PULSE SPACING on No 2 receiver video through five positions. This alarm
delay time should be 10 1 seconds.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
REQUIRED STATE
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
4. On the No.1 receiver video, turn REPLY PULSE SPACING through five
positions. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY alarm
indicator on either monitor turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator on the
CTU turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY PULSE SPACING
on No.1 receiver video through five positions. This alarm delay time should be
10 1 seconds.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON

SELECT MAIN NO 2.
3.2.4.16.6
Secondary Fault - No. 2 is MAIN
this action.
3-47
HA72500
SECTION 3
indicators is as shown in the table below. No transfer to standby will occur until
this fault is registered on both monitors.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
RF POWER
SECONDARY
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of the No.1 transponder
subrack. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the SECONDARY
alarm indicator on the No.1 monitor turning on to the NO 2 ON STATUS indicator
on the CTU turning off - in response to disconnecting the input to the ERP IN
connector at the rear of No. 1 transponder subrack. This alarm delay time should
be 10 1 seconds.
5. On No. 1 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
RF POWER
SECONDARY
REQUIRED STATE
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
7. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cables to connectors ERP

IN on the rear of the transponder subracks (ensuring the original connections are
restored) and on the CTU, pressing the following front panel keys in the specified
sequence:
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
3.2.4.16.7
Recycle Function - No. 1 is MAIN
This test involves causing a transfer and a shutdown by generating a primary fault, and
then monitoring the sequence of restart events following this action.
2. On the CTU, reset the restart count to 0 using the misc menu. Press RECYCLE
3. On No.2 receiver video, turn rotary switch REPLY PULSE SPACING through five
positions (so that when a transfer occurs to No.2 transponder, a primary fault will
be immediately present).
positions and check that a transfer to No.2 transponder occurs after the selected
3-48
HA72500
SECTION 3
10 1 seconds and that the rack then shuts down after an additional 11 2
seconds.
be 30 3 seconds.
6. Leaving the REPLY PULSE SPACING switches set as above, count the total
number should be 3.
8. On the CTU, select the misc menu and check that the displayed number of
9. On the CTU, check that the state of the listed. CTU indicators is as shown in the
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
3.2.4.16.8
Recycle Function - No. 2 is MAIN
positions (so that when a transfer occurs to No. 1 transponder, a primary fault will
positions and check that a transfer to No. 1 transponder occurs after the selected
seconds.
be 30 3 seconds.
number should be 3.
3-49
HA72500
SECTION 3
table below.
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
SPACING
PRIMARY
REQUIRED STATE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
13. If the recycle function is not required, press RECYCLE key on the CTU to turn
the RECYCLE indicator off.
3.2.4.16.9
Warm/Cold Standby
This procedure is performed only if 'warm' standby operation is required at the site. For a
definition of 'warm standby operation, refer to Appendix A.
off. Withdraw the CTU module from the rack.
2. On the CTU processor board, set switch 4 of S2 to OFF to change from COLD
standby to WARM standby operation. Replace the CTU in the rack.
on.
4. Operate the DME in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
5. For No.2 transponder, on the front panel of each of transponder power supply,
transmitter driver, receiver video and 1kW PA power supply, check that the DC
POWER ON indicator is on.
6. Remove the CTU from the rack and set switch 4 of S2 to ON if "warm" standby
operation is not required.
3.2.4.16.10 High Voltage Shutdown Adjust

1. On the control module of the AC power supply, set the controls listed in the table
below as indicated:
SHUT DOWN DELAY Fully counter-clockwise,
H/V SHUT DOWN
Fully clockwise.
28.5 0.1 volts.
3-50
HA72500
SECTION 3
reading of 27.5 0.2 volts. The DME should return to normal operation.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control clockwise again until the DME again
shuts down. Read the multimeter reading. It should be 28.5 0.2 volts.
7. On the control module of the AC power supply, adjust the SHUT DOWN DELA Y
control to mid-position.
reading of29.0 0.2 volts. Release the TEST/FLOAT switch to enable the DME
to return to normal operation.
switch to the DME shutting down. This time delay should be 3 1 seconds. (If
necessary readjust SHUT DOWN DELAY control to achieve this delay.)
3.2.4.16.11 Low Voltage Alarm Adjust

1. On the control module of the AC power supply connected to BATTERY 1
terminals, set LOW VOLT ALARM control fully counter-clockwise.
2. With the multimeter connected to the rack BATTERY 1 terminals, switch and hold
23.5 0.2 volts.
slowly adjust LOW VOLT ALARM control clockwise until the O/P FAIL indicator
24.5 0.2 volts.
FAIL indicator again turns on. Read the multimeter reading. It should be 23.5
0.2 volts.
23.0 0.1 volts.
check that the BATT CHG 1 indicator on the CTU is off.
9. Repeat the procedure for the No.2 AC power supply on the BATTERY 2
terminals.
3-51
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.16.12 Low Voltage Shutdown Adjust

1. Extend the CTU module using the two special extender cards.
2. On the AC power supply connected to BATTERY 2 terminals, switch off the
MAINS power. If batteries are used, temporarily disconnect them from the
BATTERY 1 and BATTERY 2 terminals.
3. On the CTU processor board of the CTU, adjust the low volts preset R32 fully
counter-clockwise.
4. With the multimeter connected to the rack BATTERY 1 terminals, switch and hold
22.0 0.1 volts.
BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns on. Then slowly adjust R32 counterclockwise until the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns off Slowly adjust R32
24.5 0.2 volts. The DME should power up and return to normal operation.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise again while
observing the multimeter. Measure the voltage immediately prior to DME
shutdown. It should be 22.0 0.2 volts.
check that the CTU BATT LOW indicator is on.
DME is powered up and operating in the No.1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
10. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU off. Restore the CTU
to the CTU subrack. Switch circuit breaker CTU on.
3.2.4.16.13 DC Supply Adjustment

2. With the DME operating in the normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1, measure the
primary DC supply voltage. It should be 27 0.2 volts.
If it is outside this limit, it may be adjusted by the FLOAT2 VOLTAGE control on
the control module of the AC power supply.
3.2.4.17 Rack Current Drain

1. Operate the DME in the No.1 normal state of Section 3.2.4.16.1.
2. Measure the rack current drain from the AC power supply. It should be not more
than 6 amperes for a single DME, and not more than 7 amperes for a dual DME.
MAINTENANCE key (to turn its associated indicator on),
SELECT MAIN NO 1
3-52
HA72500
SECTION 3
4. On the CTU, select Ch.1 monitoring. While holding TI RATE, 10 kHz pressed (to
produce maximum reply rate). Measure the rack current drain from the AC power
supply. It should be not more than 12 amperes for a single DME and not more
than 13 amperes for a dual DME.

The performance checks and alignment of the DME has now been completed. In the
case of a newly installed DME, the equipment is now ready for flight testing and
commissioning. In the case of a DME undergoing a regular performance inspection, the
beacon is now ready to be returned to service.
To return the DME beacon to normal operation, proceed as follows:
1. On the AC power supply, select POWER ON.
2. On the power distribution panel, switch all circuit breakers on.
3. On the CTU, select OFF/RESET (if the DME is not already off).
4. On the following modules, set all front panel switches to NORMAL:
a. Monitor.
b. Test interrogator.
c. Transponder power supply.
d. Transmitter driver.
e. Receiver video.
f.
1kW power amplifier.
5. On a dual DME, set the ANTENNA RELAY switch on the RF panel to NORMAL.
6. On the CTU:
a. Select LOCAL control.
b. Set MAINTENANCE off (MAINTENANCE indicator is off).
c. Reset the restart count to 0 using the Misc menu.
d. Select RECYCLE ON (if the Recycle facility is required).
e. Select MONITOR INHIBIT off.
7. On the CTU, select the No.1 transponder by pressing SELECT MAIN NO 1.
8. On all modules, check that no red TEST indicators are on.
9. On the CTU, check that the state of each of the CTU indicators is as shown in
the table below:
3-53
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
REQUIRED STATE
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF for Single
ON for Dual
OFF
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
All
MODULES
ANT RELAY
AC PWR NORM
BATT CHG 1
BATT CHG 2
BATT LOW
10. On each monitor, ensure that the eight parameter indicators are on and the
test).
11. Using the CTU parameter measurement facility, measure the following
parameters for the transponder (these values apply to an X channel DME).
PARAMETER
DELAY
SPACING
EFFNCY
TX RATE
RF POWER
RESTART COUNT
NOMINAL
VALUE
50.0
12.0
90
945
1200
0
LIMITS
0.2
0.1
> 85
10
100
0
UNITS
s
s
%
Hz
W
-
12. On a dual DME, select OFF/RESET at the CTU, then SELECT MAIN NO 2.
13. Repeat the measurements of step 11 for the No.2 transponder in dual DME.
14. When checks are completed, select the desired transponder (in a dual DME),
then select REMOTE if the DME is to be operated remotely.
3.2.5
to ON.
2. Remove the lids and shims from the RF generator box and the modulator and
detector box.
3. On the modulator and detector board, switch S1 to the test position.
4. On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff (High Efficiency) test in the Maintenance
mode, and a TI RATE of 1 kHz (refer Section A.1 for operating instructions for
the CTU).
5. On the RF generator, switch 1 to 4 of S1 to OFF, S1:5 to ON and S1:6 to OFF.
3-54
HA72500
SECTION 3

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to the test point XT1 on the RF
generator (connect the oscilloscope EARTH lead to the diecast box) and tune the
core in L1 for peak positive DC voltage on the oscilloscope display (1.9 volts
minimum).
7. Check that the oscillator is operating at the crystal frequency by using a one-turn
coupling loop connected to the frequency counter and loosely coupled to L1, as
described in Section 3.2.4.4.5.
8. On the RF generator, switch S1:1 to ON, and 2 to 6 of S1 to OFF.
9. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT2 on the RF generator board
and tune C10 for peak positive voltage during the pulse. If necessary, restrict the
bandwidth of the oscilloscope to eliminate crystal frequency appearing on the
trace.
10. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT3 and tune C14 for a peak
pulse indication (0.6 volts minimum).
12. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jack DETECTED INTERROGATIONS

on the front panel of the test interrogator (to display the detected output of the RF
generator) and tune C22 for maximum detector output.
13. On the modulator and detector board, switch S1 to the normal position.
14. The shape of the detected output pulses (channel 1 of the oscilloscope) should
be as shown below.
3-55
HA72500
SECTION 3
PEAK AMPLITUDE (from BASE LINE):

HALF AMPLITUDE PULSE WIDTH:
FLAT TOP DURATION:
BASE LINE DC LEVEL:
3.0 0.3 V
3.4 0.3 s
1.0 0.2 s
3.6 0.3 V
corrected by adjusting R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE), and R20 (PULSE SHAPE) as
required.
display on channel 2 of the oscilloscope should remain the same except that the
baseline should move up the pulse. The DC level shift of the baseline level from
the reference level set in the previous step should be 0.95 0.05 volts. (If the DC
level shift is outside the above limits, it can be corrected by and adjusting R37,
(PULSE PEDESTAL) on the modulator and detector.)
17. Restore the connections to the RF generator.
18. Replace the shims and lids of the diecast boxes (the lids are deliberately warped
to ensure good RF sealing). Tighten the screws firmly.
3.2.6

2. Remove the lids from the RF source and the RF amplifier boxes.
3. On the RF source, set capacitors C8, C12 and C18 to mid-range, as shown
below, so that clockwise movement will increase frequency.
4. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (internally triggered to channel 1) to the

test point XT1 on the RF source (connect the oscilloscope EARTH lead to the
diecast box) and tune the core in L1 for peak indication on the oscilloscope,
checking that a smooth peak is obtained [approximately 2 volts].
coupling loop connected to the frequency counter and loosely coupled to L1, as
described in Section 3.2.4.5, step3. (If the frequency is out of range, then retune
L1 for correct mode and then re-peak, after first removing the loop.)
3-56
HA72500
SECTION 3
6. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT2 on the RF source. Tune C8
to give peak indication [approximately 0.6 volts].
7. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT3 on the RF source. Tune
C12 to give peak indication [approximately 2.5 volts].
8. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT4 on the RF source. Tune
9. Disconnect the RF filter from the output of the RF source and connect the
calibrated detector (with 4.7 kilohm load attached). Connect the oscilloscope
probe to the output of the loaded detector. Carefully adjust trimmer capacitor C26
(through the end hole in the box of the RF source) to give a peak indication on
the oscilloscope.
10. Measure the DC output voltage from the calibrated detector. Compare this
voltage with the calibration chart for the detector (with load) to determine the true
output from the RF source. The output level should be between +5 and +7 dBm.
If the output exceeds +7 dBm, then adjust C26 inwards (that is, clockwise) to
reduce the output to +7 dBm.
11. Disconnect the detector from the output of the RF source and reconnect the RF
filter. Connect the detector to the RF filter output. Adjust trimmer capacitors C1
and C2 on the filter to obtain maximum output from the filter, as indicated by the
detector output on the oscilloscope. Measure this output (making reference to the
detector calibration), which should be not less than +3 dBm.
12. Disconnect the detector from the filter output and re-connect the cable to the RF
amplifier. Remove the cable from connector XC4 of the RF amplifier and connect
the calibrated detector in its place.
13. Measure the DC voltage from the detector and refer to the calibration chart to
determine the RF output level. This should be +12.5 dBm l.5 dB. If the power
exceeds the upper limit, then reduce it by slightly detuning capacitor C1 in the RF
filter.
14. Connect a multimeter to feed-through capacitor, C23, on the outside of the RF
amplifier box. - The DC voltage should be 1.3 0. 5 volts.
15. With the multimeter, measure the DC voltage between the test jacks RF LEVEL
and EARTH on the receiver video front panel. This should be 3.0 1.0 volts.
16. Replace the covers on the boxes for the RF source and RF amplifier.
3.2.7
3.2.7.1
Transmitter Driver Alignment

Preparation
1. Remove the transmitter driver and remove the covers from the three diecast
boxes. Extend the transmitter driver using the transponder extender frame, but
leave transponder power supply switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER set to
OFF.
2. On the transmitter driver, switch DRIVER DC POWER to ON.
3. On the pulse shaper board, set the switches as follows:
ALC LOOP (S2) to OPEN,
ALC (S3) to VIDEO,
MED COLL (S4) to DC.
4. On the pulse shaper board, adjust the following controls all fully counterclockwise:
3-57
HA72500
SECTION 3
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58),

RF OUTPUT (POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) on the printed wiring board),
1W PULSE (R85),
EXCITER DC (R97), and
MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115).
5. Remove the cover from the 1kW power amplifier and remove the cover from the
power modulation amplifier box.
6. On the transponder power supply, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
Switch the receiver video IDENT switch to CONTINUOUS. Trigger the
oscilloscope from the TRIGS TO MODULATOR jack on the receiver video
(negative trigger).
7. On the transmitter driver, display the rectangular modulation pulses at the
SQUARE PULSE MODULATION test jack (XA1) and the shaped modulation
pulses at the SHAPED MODULATION test jack (XA3) simultaneously. Ensure
that the shaped pulses are centred on the rectangular modulation pulses. Check
that the space between the two rectangular pulses is 1.3 0.1 microseconds. If it
is outside this range, adjust BACK PORCH (R36) on the pulse shaper board to
give the required spacing.
Set 2ND PULSE EQUALISING (R54) fully clockwise.
8. Using the oscilloscope, monitor the collector supply voltage of V3, V4 in the
exciter; check that positive pulses are present.
9. The control 1W PULSE (R85) on the main board (pulse shaper) adjusts the
amplitude of the rectangular modulation pulses. The required pulse amplitude is
dependent on the frequency of operation of the transmitter. Adjust 1W PULSE
(R85) accordingly to obtain:
1. Frequencies 960-1170 MHz: 11 volts peak.
2. Frequencies 1171-1220 MHz: 15 volts peak.
10. Other collector supply voltages in the module are DC, and should beset as
shown below, again using the oscilloscope:
RF UNIT
TEST
POINT
(collector
supply)
ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR ON PULSE
SHAPER BOARD
REF
LEGEND
Exciter
V5 and
V6
R97
Exciter
Medium
Power Driver
V1
R115
Medium Power
Driver
Power
Modulation
Amplifier
V1
R69
Pwr Mod
Amp
ADJUST TO GIVE VOLTAGE

FREQUENCY
RANGE (MHz)
960-1050
1050-1170
1170-1220
960-1050
1050-1170
1170-1220
960-1050
1050-1170
1170-1220
REQUIRED
VOLTAGE
(VDC)
20
26
30
25
27
28
28
25
30
11. On the power distribution panel, switch the 1kW POWER AMP circuit breaker on.
On the 1kW power amplifier, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON; check that
one red and two green indicators are on. Measure the voltage at the HT test jack;
this should be 50.0 0.2 volts.
3-58
HA72500
SECTION 3
12. Set the DC level at the SHAPED MODULATION test jack on the front panel to +
12 volts, by adjusting the PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53).
13. Transfer the oscilloscope to the FUNCTION GENERATOR test jack on the front
panel and display the waveform, using oscilloscope gain and shift controls to
expand a single pulse; compare the displayed pulse with the shape shown
below, observing the discontinuities. Pulse amplitude should be +7.5 0.5 volts,
relative to earth, at the peak.
The shape shown above is typical only, and may need to be modified to achieve
the final RF envelope shape. If the pulse shape has not been previously
adjusted, perform the procedure described in Section 3.2.8. The pulse shape
should only be adjusted if it differs greatly from that shown in the figure above.
14. Transfer the oscilloscope back to the SHAPED PULSE MODULATION test jack,
and increase the pulse amplitude using the MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58)
preset on the main board; increase the level slowly, until the pulse is about 7
volts above the base line.
15. Again compare the pulse with the figure shown above, and check that the
discontinuities are considerably smoothed.
16. Remove the pulses by rotating MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) fully counterclockwise.
17. Switch the 1kW power amplifier AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
18. On the transponder power supply, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF.
3.2.7.2
RF Alignment
This alignment is started with the voltages listed in Section 3.2.7.1 step10. These
voltages are only a starting point, and will be modified to provide optimum drive to each
stage as the tuning proceeds. As a general guide, the collector current of a stage is
determined by the input drive, which is adjusted by the collector voltage of the previous
stage. There may be a wide variation in collector current depending upon the frequency
at which the unit is aligned. At the end of the alignment, the collector current of a
particular stage may be different from the initial value.
1. Connect the current probe output to the oscilloscope, and adjust the sensitivity of
the oscilloscope for 200 mA/division.
2. Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER to NORMAL.
3. Clip the current probe pickup to the test loop in the exciter V3, V4 supply, with
the arrow on the probe pointing towards the transistors. Check that the V3, V4
supply current pulses are in the range 200-500 mA.
3-59
HA72500
SECTION 3
4. Move the current probe to the V5, V6 collector supply loop. Check that the V5,
V6 supply current is in the range 400-700 mA. If necessary adjust 1W PULSE
(R85) to bring the current within this range.
"
NOTE
If the peak collector currents for the exciter stages are not within the ranges
specified above, then the exciter may require a full alignment. This is described
in Section 3.4.25.
5. Move the current probe to the medium power driver V1 collector supply loop.
Check that the V1 supply current is in the range 2.0-2.7 amperes. If necessary,
adjust the preset EXCITER DC (R97) to bring the current within this range.
6. Switch the 1kW RF amplifier AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
7. Move the current probe to the collector supply lead (red lead) in the power
modulation amplifier (in the transmitter driver). Check that the current is in the
range 6 to 8 amperes and, if necessary, adjust the preset MED POWER DRIVER
(R115) on the main board to achieve this current.
8. Observe the displayed current pulses and check that the tilt on the pulse tops
does not exceed 5%, as shown in the diagram below. If the tilt exceeds this
amount, then make further small adjustments to EXCITER DC (R97) and MED
POWER DRIVER DC (R115) to reduce the tile by changing the drive to the
Power Modulation Amplifier. Note the following points during this adjustment:
a. 1W PULSE (R85) controls the drive to the exciter 8 watt stage. EXCITER DC
(R97) controls the drive to the medium power driver. MED POWER DRIVER
DC (R115) controls the drive to the power modulation amplifier.
b. In adjusting for pulse flatness, up to 5% negative or positive tilt is acceptable,
as shown below.
c. If the output pulses have a positive tilt, this indicates that the power
modulation amplifier is under-driven; if the tilt is negative, the amplifier is
over-driven.
3.2.8
Function Generator Alignment
The displayed pseudo-Gaussian waveform is generated from a series of sloping lines

six parts with upward slopes to the peak of the pulse, and six downward slopes from the
peak to the baseline. Each upward (and corresponding downward) slope is determined
by the time constant of the R-C network presets, R3, R5, R7, R9, R11 and R13, with
R13 controlling the apex.
a. Adjust the shape presets in sequence until the displayed pulse at the FUNCTION
GENERATOR test jack fits the waveform drawn on the graticule, keeping the peak of
the pulse at an amplitude of 7.5 0.5 volts peak. Several re-adjustments may be
required to ensure that there is no abrupt transition from one slope to another - the
transition must be as smooth as possible, as shown below.
3-60
HA72500
SECTION 3
The waveform shown above represents a generalised pulse shape. Individual

equipment may require variations to this basic general shape.
b. Turn INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) in both directions and check the change in the
level of the trailing edge of the pulse (see figure above). This edge will increase or
decrease relative to the leading edge of the pulse. Finally, set the trailing edge to be
level with the leading edge. Re-adjust the shape of the pulse, as necessary.
3.2.9
3.2.9.1
IF Amplifier Alignment
Preliminary Adjustments
1. Remove the receiver video from the rack and remove the cover from the IF
amplifier.
2. Extend the receiver video on the transponder extender frame and switch on the
DME.
3. Measure the voltage at IF amplifier test point XT7; this should be 3.0 0.1 volts.
A voltage outside this range indicates a fault in the IF amplifier.
4. Measure the voltage attest point XT13; this should be 6.0 0.1 volts. If it is
outside this range, adjust preset SET AGC (R15) to achieve the required voltage.
5. Check that preset SET GAIN (R29) is set fully clockwise.
3.2.9.2
Preamplifier Tuning
1. Monitor the signal at the front panel DETECTED LOG VIDEO test jack with the
oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope to a time base of 5 seconds/division, triggered
from the TRIGGER test jack on the test interrogator. Set the sensitivity to 0.5
volts/division.
2. On the CTU, select Lo Eff measurement, in the Maintenance mode, and TI
RATE, 1 kHz.
3. On the IF amplifier, carefully tune inductors L7 and L5 for peak signal amplitude.
3.2.9.3
Local Oscillator Tuning
1. Connect oscilloscope to test point XT8 (LO) on the IF amplifier and display a DC
level.
3-61
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. Adjust L4 tuning core into the coil so that it is 2 to 3 turns below being flush with
the top of the former. With the digital multimeter, measure the DC voltage on
XT8; it should be between 0.7 and 0.76 volts.
3. Adjust L4 tuning core counter-clockwise until the voltage is seen to jump to
between 0.9 and 1.2 volts. Note the core position. Continue adjusting the core
counter-clockwise until either a voltage peak or 2.0 volts is reached; leave the
core in this position. Check that the core has been rotated more than one-half
turn beyond the position of the voltage jump observed above.
"
NOTE
Tuning must be done with the core initially being in the position stated above.
Do not exceed the XT8 voltage stated, otherwise a spurious mode of oscillation
may be induced.
4. Check that the final voltage at XT8 is between 1.2 and 2.1 volts.
5. Switch the power supply off and on at least three times, and check that the XT8
voltage returns to the same value each time.
3.2.9.4
Narrowband Detector Tuning
1. Observe the signal at IF amplifier test point XT6 with the oscilloscope set to 1
volt/division.
2. Carefully tune L3 and L6 for maximum pulse amplitude above the noise baseline.
Repeat the tuning until no further increase can be achieved. Record the pulse
peak amplitude as a reference.
3. Remove the test interrogator from the rack, set switch S1:1 to OFF (the Fo
frequency) and set S1:2 to ON to select the +160 kHz frequency.
4. Replace the test interrogator in the rack and measure the new pulse amplitude at
IF amplifier XT6. Record this pulse amplitude.
5. Again remove the test interrogator, set switch S1:2 to OFF, and set S1:3 to ON,
to select the -160 kHz frequency. Replace the test interrogator in the rack.
6. Measure the new pulse amplitude at IF amplifier XT6. Record this pulse
amplitude.
7. Compare the pulse amplitude recorded at steps 2, 4 and 6. The amplitude
difference should not exceed 0.2 volts. If the variation exceeds this amount, it is
necessary to repeat the tuning of L3 and L5 so that the response is symmetrical
with equal amplitude pulse outputs at 160 kHz.
8. When completed, remove the test interrogator, set switch S1:1 to ON (to select
the Fo crystal) and set all remaining switches of S1 to OFF.
9. When finished, replace the IF amplifier cover, then replace the receiver video in
the rack.
3.2.10
Y-channel Operation
The following changes are applicable when a DME is to be used on a Y-channel.

Compared with the more common X-channel settings, a Y-channel has a different reply
delay setting, and a different pulse spacing for interrogate and reply pulse pairs.
The numbers below refer to the relevant paragraphs in this section of the handbook:
3.2.4.2
Module Presets
3.2.4.2.4

3-62
HA72500
SECTION 3
Set switches S4, ENCODER MODE, and S5, DECODER MODE, to the Y
position.
Set the front panel rotary switches as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S1
Beacon Delay, Coarse
S2
Beacon Delay, Fine
S3
Reply Pulse Spacing
3.2.4.2.7
Set switch S4, MODE, to the Y position.

SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S5
Reply Gate Delay, Coarse
S6
Reply Gate Delay, Fine
3.2.4.2.8
Set preset switch S12, DELAY LOWER LIMIT SET, for 55.5 microseconds, and
switch S13, SPACING LOWER LIMIT SET, for 29.5 microseconds, as shown in
the following figure:
DELAY LOWER LIMIT SET, S12 55.5 microseconds
1
9 10
ON
OFF
SPACING LOWER LIMIT SET, S13 29.5 microseconds

1
9 10
ON
OFF
Y-CHANNEL SETTINGS
3.2.4.4.4
1
3.2.4.4.6
2

For Y channel, the spacing between the detected pulses shall be
36.0+/-0.1 usec.
Test Interrogator Signal Timing Parameters

For Y channel, the displayed pulse spacing shall be 30.0+/-0.2 usec.
3.2.4.10.4 Output Pulse Spacing

1
3
For Y channel, the spacing between the half-amplitude points on the leading
edge of the pulses shall be 30.0+/-0.1 usec.
For Y channel, the CTU displayed pulse spacing shall be 30.0+/-0.1 usec.
3-63
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.2.4.13.1 Reply Delay Adjustment

1
For Y channel, set the receiver video BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE,
controls to give a displayed delay as near as possible to 56.0, but always
within the range 56.0+/-0.1 usec.
3.2.4.13.2 Final Receiver Checks

2
For Y channel, the Reply Delay displayed on the CTU, and the Reply Delay
measured on the oscilloscope, shall be 56.0+/-0.2 usec. These two values
shall be within 0.1 usec of each other.
3.2.4.15
Monitor Fault Limits
3.2.4.15.2 Delay Monitor

Procedure a: For Y channel, the following values and limits apply for Delay:
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay; Lower
55.5 to 55.6
usec
Delay; Upper
56.5 to 56.6
usec
Procedure b: For Y channel, set the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE,
controls to give the following values, for each of the steps indicated:
3.
55.5 usec
4.
Less than 55.5 usec
5.
56.5 usec
6.
Greater than 56.5 usec
7.
56.3 usec
8.
55.7 to 56.3 usec
9.
55.7 usec
3.2.4.15.3 Spacing Monitor

Procedure a: For Y channel, the following values and limits apply for Spacing:
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Spacing; Lower
29.4 to 29.5
usec
Spacing; Upper
30.4 to 30.5
usec
Procedure b: For Y channel, set the REPLY PULSE SPACING control to give the
following values, for each of the steps indicated:
3.
29.4 usec (as close as possible to 29.4, but not greater than 29.4 usec)
4.
Less than 29.4 usec
5.
30.6 usec (as close as possible to 30.6, but not less than 30.6 usec)
6.
7.
8.
29.7 to 12.3 usec
9.
3.2.4.15.11 Monitor Fault Limits - Final Check

For Y channel, the following values and limits apply for Delay and Spacing:
3-64
HA72500
SECTION 3
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay; Lower
55.5 to 55.6
usec
Delay; Upper
56.5 to 56.6
usec
Spacing; Lower
29.4 to 29.5
usec
Spacing; Upper
30.4 to 30.5
usec
3.2.4.18
11.
Final Check
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay
55.8 to 56.2
usec
Spacing
29.9 to 30.1
usec
3-65
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3
DEPOT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3.3.1
Introduction
This section contains the full alignment and performance verification procedures to be
performed on an LDB-102 DME at a maintenance depot or, in some circumstances, at a
beacon site. These procedures describe in detail the tasks necessary to fully verify the
correct operation of the DME. For this reason an extensive range of test equipment is
required.
The procedures in this section are to be performed on a DME that is operating into
dummy loads. The procedures are especially applicable to a rack that is used as a
module repair facility in a maintenance depot. In this case it may be necessary to
perform only those procedures relevant to the module being repaired. For example, if a
transmitter driver module has been repaired, then it is necessary to only perform the
tests associated with the transmitter sub-section.
For periodic testing of an operational DME beacon, refer to the procedures in Section
3.2.
Since a dual DME is essentially two single DMEs in a single rack (except for the RF
panel, the operation of the control section and the location of the battery charger/power
supplies) the test and alignment procedures are applicable to either a single or a dual
DME (unless specifically indicated otherwise). The procedures, however, have been
written for a dual rack to cover the more complex situation.
CAUTION
NOTICES
THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONARY REQUIREMENTS SHOULD BE

OBSERVED AT ALL TIMES THROUGHOUT EQUIPMENT
TESTING. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE REQUIREMENTS MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE BEING CAUSED TO THE EQUIPMENT.
Although the beacon includes protection to guard against excessive load
mismatch, the transmitter must not be operated unless a suitable load is
present at the ANTENNA output. The protection circuit is intended for
accidental mismatching only.
The peak power from the transmitter is in excess of 1200 watts, which is
too high for direct application to most test instruments. Therefore, care
should be taken when connecting instruments to the transmitter output to
ensure that a suitably rated attenuator or directional coupler is used to
isolate the instruments from the high power.
Modules must not be removed or inserted with power applied. For most
units, it is sufficient to switch off the rack at the CTU. For the CTU, it is
necessary to switch off the 24 volts at the circuit breakers on the power
distribution panel.
Equipment repairs and tests should be performed only by personnel
suitably qualified to the level of proficiency required by an equipment of
this type and complexity.
3.3.2
Test Equipment Required
See Section E.2 for the list of test equipment required to perform the alignment of the
DME.
3-66
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.3
"
Module Presets
NOTE
Alternative Module Preset Values

The module preset values listed below are typical of the values that would be
set for operational equipment. For alternative values and/or an explanation of
the settings, see Appendix A. If alternative values are set, the results of some
of the tests may be different from the specified results.
DO NOT apply power to the equipment under test before the following
settings are made.
CAUTION
3.3.3.1
Power Distribution Panel Presets
On the power distribution panel, set all circuit breakers off.
3.3.3.2
1kW RF Power Amplifier Presets
On the 1kW RF power amplifiers, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
3.3.3.3
Control and Test Unit Presets
1. On the CTU front panel, set the switch ALARM DELAY to 10.
2. On the CTU, set the switches on the CTU processor board as follows:
SWITCH
"
NOTE
FUNCTION
SETTING
NORMAL/PRODUCTION TESTS
ON = NORMAL
INDICATES IF NAVAID MAINTENANCE

PROCESSOR (NMP) IS FITTED
OFF = NO NMP

ON = INACTIVE
ADD 0.1 s TO No. 2 DELAY MONITOR

FAULT LIMIT READING
ON = INACTIVE
STATISTICS ON DELAY MEASUREMENTS
ON = INACTIVE

ON = INACTIVE
ADD 0. 1 s TO No. 1 DELAY MONITOR

FAULT LIMIT READINGS
ON = INACTIVE
SINGLE/DUAL
ON if SINGLE DME
OFF if DUAL DME
If the DME is to be used with a Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)

system, perform all checks and adjustments in this Section 3.3 before
configuring the CTU for operation with the RMM. Refer to the RMM Handbook
for details.
3-67
HA72500
SECTION 3

SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
MAIN AND/OR VOTING (FOR DUAL)
ON = AND
STANDBY AND/OR VOTING (FOR DUAL)
ON = AND
RMM/RCMS CONTROL
OFF = RCMS
COLD/WARM STANDBY
ON = COLD
OFF = IS FITTED
ON = NO ACTION
OFF = IS FITTED
ON = NO ACTION
3. Set the ALARM POWER ON INHIBIT switch (S11 on the CTU front panel board)
for a delay of 6 seconds (refer to Section A.5.1.6).
4. On the CTU processor board, ensure that no links are installed on the 2-pin
headers XN5 (MA IDENT OUTPUT referenced to GROUND), XN6 (WATCHDOG
DISABLE), XN7 (SIGNATURE ANALYSIS), XN8 (IDENT TEST) and XN9
(WATCHDOG TEST). Fit a link to the 2-pin header XN10 (ASSOC IDENT INPUT
pulled up to +24 volts).
3.3.3.4
1. On the receiver video modules, set the switches on the receiver video main
board as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S4
SELECT ENCODER MODE
S5
SELECT DECODER MODE
S6
SET LDES PERIOD
S7
SET DEAD TIMES
S8
SDES
OFF
S9
LDES
OFF

2. On the receiver video modules, set the ident CODE ELEMENT switches (S13,
S14, S15 and S16 on the receiver video main board) as follows:
a. Convert the required ident letters into International Morse Code, using the
following table.
3-68
HA72500
SECTION 3
LETTER
MORSE SYMBOL
LETTER
MORSE SYMBOL
dot dash
dash dot
dash dot dot dot
dash dash dash
dash dot dash dot
dot dash dash dot
dash dot dot
dash dash dot dash
dot
dot dash dot
dot dot dash dot
dot dot dot
dash dash dot
dash
dot dot dot dot
dot dot dash
dot dot
dot dot dot-dash
dot dash dash
dot dash dash
dash dot dash
dash dot dot dash
dot dash dot dot
dash dot dash dash
dash dash
dash dash dot dot
b.
Set the switches using the following code (shading indicates switch
position):
Example: for ident code AWA, switch settings are:
3. On the receiver video modules, set the front panel switches as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S1
BEACON DELAY, COARSE
S2
BEACON DELAY, FINE
S3
REPLY PULSE SPACING (REPLY

PULSESEPARATION on early modules)
S11
IDENT
NORMAL
4. On the IF amplifiers of the receiver video modules, ensure that no link is installed
on the 2-pin headers MAN of XN2. Fit a link to the 2-pin headers AGC of XN2.
5. Install the correct oscillator crystals as G1 in the RF sources of the receiver video
modules. The crystal frequency is one-twelfth of the station reply frequency.
Example: Channel 84X reply frequency = 1171 MHz
The crystal specification is given in Appendix N.
3-69
HA72500
"
SECTION 3
In the depot test facility (unless an RF source is to be aligned) the frequency is

set by an RF signal generator. See Appendix K for details.
NOTE
3.3.3.5
Transmitter Driver Presets
1. On the pulse shaper boards of the transmitter drivers, set the switches as
follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S2
ALC LOOP
OPEN
S3
ALC
VIDEO
S4
MED COLL
DC
2. On the transmitter driver front panels, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
3.3.3.6
Transponder Power Supply Presets
1. On the transponder power supply front panels, set switch TRANSPONDER DC

POWER to OFF.
3.3.3.7
1. On the test interrogators, set the mode switch S4 on the test interrogator main
board to X. (For Y channel settings refer to Section 3.3.22)
2. On the test interrogator front panels, set the switches as follows:
SWITCH
S5
FUNCTION
REPLY GATE DELAY, COARSE
SETTING
2
S6
REPLY GATE DELAY, FINE
S7
MONITOR & INTERROGATORDC POWER
NORMAL
3. On the test interrogators, set the switch S1, NORMAL/TEST on the modulator
and detector to NORMAL.
4. Install the five correct oscillator crystals in each of the RF generators of the two
test interrogators. The crystal frequencies are one-twelfth of the station
interrogation frequency and the offsets from it.
Example:
Channel 84X interrogation frequency = 1108 MHz = Fo

The crystal specification is given in Appendix N.

shown in the table below:
SWITCH
"
NOTE
FUNCTION
SETTING
G1
Fo
Fx
G2
Fo + 160 kHz
Fx + 13.3 kHz
G3
Fo - 160 kHz
Fx - 13.3 kHz
G4
Fo + 900 kHz
Fx + 75 kHz
G5
Fo - 900 kHz
Fx - 75 kHz
In the depot test facility (unless an RF generator is to be aligned) the frequency

is set by an RF signal generator. See Appendix K for details
5. On the test interrogators, set the switches on the RF generators as follows:
3-70
HA72500
SECTION 3

SWITCH
3.3.3.8
FUNCTION
SETTING
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo
ON
OFF
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo -- 160 kHz
OFF
OFF
INTERROGATION FREQ = Fo -900 kHz
OFF
CW/PULSE
OFF = PULSE
1. On the monitors, set the switches on the monitor main board as follows (shading
indicates switch position):
PULSE WIDTH LOWER LMT SET (8-way DIP switch S1): 2.9 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
1
8
ON
OFF
1
8
ON
OFF
PULSE WIDTH WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S4): 1.2 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
PWR LVL FLT SET (8-way DIP switch S7): -3.0 dB

1
8
ON
OFF
3-71
HA72500
SECTION 3
IDENT GAP FLT SET (8- way DIP switch S8): 62 seconds
1
8
ON
OFF
DELAY WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S9): 1.0 microseconds

1
8
ON
OFF
SPACING WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S10): 1.0 microseconds

1
8
ON
OFF
1
9 10
ON
OFF

1
9 10
ON
OFF

2. On the monitor front panels, set switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.
"
NOTE
Referencing the Two Systems in a Dual DME

Where reference is required to distinguish between the transponders and
monitoring systems in a dual DME rack, the modules higher in the DME rack
will be referenced as "No.1" while those lower will be referenced as "No.2.
3.3.3.9
RF Panel Presets - Single DME
1. On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), install the following
components and connecting cables:
a. 10 dB attenuator to connector TI-1 REPLY DET.
REPLY DET to connector FWD-B on the directional coupler.
c. 50 ohms termination to connector REV-A on the directional coupler.
d. 10 dB attenuator to connector FWD-A on the directional coupler.
3-72
HA72500
SECTION 3
e. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-C on the
directional coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS.
2. Connect a coaxial cable from the output of the 10 dB attenuator on connector
FWD-A of the directional coupler to connector ERP IN on the rear of the
transponder subrack.
3. Using a multimeter on 2k resistance range, set the resistance of the antenna
integrity monitor test fixture (shown below) to 1000 10 ohms. Connect the
antenna integrity monitor test fixture to connector XN2 on the RF panel board.
3.3.3.10 RF Panel Presets - Dual DME

1. On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), install the following
components and connecting cables:
a. 10 dB attenuator each to connectors TI-1 REPLY DET and TI-2 REPLY DET.
REPLY DET to connector FWD-D on No.2 directional coupler.
c. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from 10 dB attenuator on TI-2
REPLY DET to connector FWD-B on No.2 directional coupler.
d. 50 ohms termination to connector REV-A on No.2 directional coupler.
e. 10 dB attenuator to connector FWD-A on No.2 directional coupler.
f.
Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-E on

g. Coaxial cable (RG-188 with SMA connectors) from connector FWD-C on

2. Connect the input of the power splitter to the 10 dB attenuator on connector
FWD-A of No.2 directional coupler (using a suitable cable - if required).
3. Connect two coaxial cables from the outputs of the power splitter to connectors
ERP IN on the rear of the two transponder subrack.
4. Set the resistance of the antenna integrity monitor test fixture as in Section
3.3.3.9 step 2, then connect it to connector XN2 on the RF panel board.
5. On the RF panel, set the ANTENNA RELAY switch to NORMAL.
3.3.3.11 AC Power Supply Presets

1. On the AC power supplies, set the switches on or behind the front panel as
follows:
3-73
HA72500
SECTION 3
SWITCH
SETTING
MAINS
OFF
DC ISOLATOR
ON
TEST/FLOAT
FLOAT
BATTERY ON/NO BATTERY
NO BATTERY (Used without Batteries)
2. On the AC power supplies, wire to appropriate local voltage at the mains voltage
selector block inside the top of the unit.
3. Remove the control module from the AC power supplies and ensure that the links
are installed in the positions shown in the table following (see Figure 3-1 for the
identification of the links on the control module).
U-LINK
POSITION
OPTION SELECTED
356
402-403
Outputs low volts alarm
357
404-405
Delayed overvoltage shutdown
358
408-409
24 volts operation
359
411-412
24 volts operation
360
414-415
24 volts operation
361
417-418
24 volts operation
362
420-421
24 volts operation
363
423-424
24 volts operation
364
426-427
24 volts operation
365
429-430
24 volts operation
366
432-433
24 volts operation
367
435-436
Function control
368
438-439
Capacitor 8 local alarm
369
441-442
370
444-445
Normal voltage range
371
446-447
Latching overvoltage alarm
372
449-450
Output contactor isolation for overvoltage protection
373
453-454
Contactor control local (normal)
3-74
HA72500
Figure 3-1
SECTION 3
Power Supply Control Module Links
3-75
HA72500
3.3.4
SECTION 3
Preliminary Check and Setup
3.3.4.1
Inspection
1. Visually inspect power distribution cables into each bay for polarity and secure
connection. Check wiring generally, especially inspect semirigid coaxial cables
and soldering to connectors.
2. Check that all modules are correctly inserted.
3.3.4.2
Switching On
1. Connect mains supply to the AC power supplies and switch POWER on these
units to ON.
2. Check the reading on the power supply voltmeters. They should be 27.00.2
volts. (If outside this range, adjust FLOAT 2 VOLTAGE on the control module of
the AC power supplies.)
3. On the power distribution panel, switch the circuit breakers CTU, TPNDR 1 and
TPNDR 2 on.
required):
LOCAL,
5. On the AC power supply check that the current meter indicates an idling current
of 0.5 0.2 amperes. (For a dual, switch POWER on one of the AC power
supplies to OFF and read the current on the meter of the other AC power supply.
Then switch POWER back to ON.)
6. On the CTU, some indicators will be on.
7. On the monitor front panels, no indicators should be on.
8. On the test interrogator front panels, no indicators should be on.
9. On the transponder power supply front panels, TEST indicator should be the only
indicator on.
10. On the transmitter driver front panels, TEST indicator should be the only indicator
on.
11. On the 1kW PA power supply front panels, TEST indicator should be the only
indicator on.
3.3.4.3
Procedural Requirements
The following general procedural requirements that apply generally throughout the
following procedures should be noted.
1. Oscilloscope Triggering.
Unless otherwise stated in a particular test, the oscilloscope should be triggered
from test jacks TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator.
2. Measurements During Ident.
Avoid making performance measurements during the ident message. (With
MONITOR ALARM set to INHIBIT, ident is inhibited.)
3-76
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. Procedure for Extending Transponder Plug-in Modules.

If any of receiver video, transmitter driver or transponder power supply are to be
put on a transponder extender frame in order to gain access to internal controls
etc, the following procedure is to be followed:
a. At the transponder power supply in the same transponder subrack, mentally
record the position of the front panel switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER,
then switch it to OFF.
b. Extend the required module using the transponder extender frame.
c. On the transponder power supply front panel, restore the TRANSPONDER
DC POWER switch to its original position.
subrack.
4. Procedure for Extending Test Interrogator/Monitor Plug-in Modules.
If either of test interrogator or monitor is to be put on the transponder extender
frame in order to gain access to internal controls, etc, the following procedure is
to be followed:
a. At the test interrogator in the same transponder subrack, mentally record the
position of the front panel switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER, then switch it to OFF.
b. Extend the required module using the transponder extender frame.
c. On the test interrogator front panel, restore the MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC POWER switch to its original position.
subrack.
5. Monitoring of Transponders in Maintenance Mode - Dual DME.
For a dual DME in Maintenance mode, monitor system 1 is selected to perform
the monitoring tests by selecting key Ch.1 at the top level menu on the CTU test
facility; monitor system 2 is selected to perform the monitoring tests by selecting
key Ch.2 at the top level menu on the CTU test facility. With the rack wiring of
Section 3.3.3.9, both monitor systems monitor the operating transponder.
6. Duplication of Tests for Dual System.
The tests of Sections 3.3.5 to 3.3.16 (inclusive) should be performed on both
transponders and both monitor systems of a dual DME. The tests for the two
systems may be performed in parallel, or the tests of one system may be
completed before the tests on the second system are commenced.
3.3.5
3.3.5.1

RF Generator Alignment
to ON.
2. If the RF generator has not yet been aligned for its operating interrogation
frequencies, perform the alignment using the procedures of Section 3.4.12.
3-77
HA72500
SECTION 3
generator, and connect the output of the RF generator to RF IN on the sensor of
the peak power meter using a short cable.
3.3.5.2
RF Generator at Nominal Interrogation Frequency
1. On the peak power meter, read the pulse peak amplitude. It should be +11.5 0.2
dBm (14.1 0.7 mW). (If the reading is outside this range, remove the cover of
the modulator and detector and adjust R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) on this board
to set the peak power meter reading to a value in the specified range.
"
NOTE
Improved Accuracy in Use of Peak Power Meter

The HP 8900D peak power meter provides improved accuracy in COMPARE
mode. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to VIDEO OUT of the peak power
meter. On the peak power meter, adjust COMPARE LEVEL control to align the
reference level with the peak of the pulse as displayed on the oscilloscope.
Read the reference level from the peak power meter. If the peak power meter
has been characterised to improve its accuracy, the correction factor should be
applied to the meter reading to determine the actual peak power.
2. Disconnect channel 1 of the oscilloscope from the peak power meter (if
connected as in the note above) and reconnect it to test jacks DETECTED
INTERROGATIONS and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator.
Measure the following parameters of the displayed pulses (see figure below).
"
NOTE
interrogator and adjusting R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) and R20 (PULSE
SHAPE) as required, and then repeating step 1. After completing step 5,
replace the lid on the modulator and detector.
3. From the table below, use the measured value of the peak amplitude from step 2
to determine the limit for the results in step 5.
PEAK AMPLITUDE
LIMITS FOR RESULTS OF STEP 5
2.7 to 3.0
0.9 (0.1)
3.1 to 3.3
1.0 (0.1)
3-78
HA72500
SECTION 3
baseline should move up the pulse. Measure the DC level shift of the baseline
level from the reference level set in the previous step. The DC level shift should
be within the limits determined at step 3. If the DC level shift is outside the above
limits, it can be corrected by removing the lid of the modulator and detector on
the test interrogator (if not already removed) and adjusting R37 (PULSE
PEDESTAL) as required. Replace the lid on the modulator and detector.
3.3.5.3
RF Generator at 160 kHz Above Nominal Frequency
1. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to OFF (to change operation back to
pulsed), and set switch S1:1 to OFF and switch S1:2 to ON (to change the
interrogation frequency to 160 kHz above the nominal frequency). On the
oscilloscope, measure the parameters of the displayed pulses listed at Section
3.3.5.2, step 2.
2. From the table of Section 3.3.5.2, step 3 use the measured value of the peak
amplitude from step 1 to determine the limit for the measured results in step 4.
level from the reference level set in the previous step.
3.3.5.4
RF Generator at 160 kHz Below Nominal Frequency
interrogation frequency to 160 kHz below the nominal frequency). On the
3.3.5.2, step 2.
3.3.5.5
RF Generator at 900 kHz Above Nominal Frequency
interrogation frequency to 900 kHz above the nominal frequency). On the
3.3.5.2, step 2.
3-79
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.5.6
RF Generator at 900 kHz Below Nominal Frequency
interrogation frequency to 900 kHz below the nominal frequency). On the
3.3.5.2, step 2.
pulsed operation), and set switch S1:5 to OFF and switch S1:1 to ON (to change
3.3.5.7

on the front panel of the test interrogator. Using the displayed markers (or an
accurately calibrated oscilloscope), measure the spacing between the detected
pulses (channel 1 on the oscilloscope). It should be 12.0 0.1 microseconds
measured at the half amplitude points on the leading edges. (For Y channel
values refer to Section 3.3.22)
DECODING, REJECT to +2 microseconds. Measure the increase in spacing
DECODING, REJECT to -2 microseconds. Measure the decrease in spacing
DECODING, ACCEPT to +1 microsecond. Measure the increase in spacing
between the detected pulses. It should be 1.0 0.1 microsecond.
DECODING, ACCEPT to -1 microsecond. Measure the decrease in spacing
between the detected pulses. It should be 1.0 0.1 microsecond.
3.3.5.8
RF Generator Output Frequencies
1. Disconnect the peak power meter from the output of the RF generator and
replace it with the frequency counter (through a suitable test cable). Terminate
the frequency counter input with 50 ohms. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6
to ON to add a CW signal to the pulse. Read the frequency counter frequency. It
3-80
HA72500
SECTION 3
should be within 20 kHz of the interrogation frequency of Section 3.3.3.7, step 4

for Fo.
the interrogation frequency to Fo + 160 kHz). Read the frequency counter
frequency. It should be within 20 kHz of the interrogation frequency of Section
3.3.3.7, step 4 for Fo + 160 kHz.
the interrogation frequency to Fo - 160 kHz). Read the frequency counter
3.3.3.7, step 4 for Fo - 160 kHz.
the interrogation frequency to Fo + 900 kHz). Read the frequency counter
3.3.3.7, step 4 for Fo + 900 kHz.
the interrogation frequency to Fo - 900 kHz). Read the frequency counter
3.3.3.7, step 4 for Fo - 900 kHz.
pulsed operation), and set switch S1:5 to OFF and switch S1:1 to ON (to change
3.3.5.9
Test Interrogator Levels
1. On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff (High Efficiency) test in Maintenance mode,
and a TI RATE of 1 kHz (refer to Section A.3 for operating instructions for the
CTU).
2. Disconnect the frequency counter from the output of the RF generator and
replace it with the calibrated 10 dB and 1 dB step attenuators connected to the
RF generator through a calibrated 0.5 dB semirigid cables. Connect the output of
the step attenuators to the spectrum analyser input with a second calibrated
0.5 dB semirigid cable. Select 60 dB in the 10 dB step attenuator and 10 dB in
the 1 dB step attenuator.
3. Set the spectrum analyser controls as follows:
Centre frequency
Bandwidth
Scan width
Input attenuation
Scan time
Video filter
Log scan sensitivity
Station interrogation frequency

1 MHz
1 MHz per division
to suit.
0.1 seconds per division
1 MHz bandwidth
to suit.
4. On the spectrum analyser, adjust the display so that the peak of the displayed
spectrum is aligned with a reference graticule. This establishes a reference level
of 59 dBm at the input to the spectrum analyser (corrected for the losses in the
two 0.5 dB cables - refer Section 3.3.5.2, step 1). In the following steps, do not
adjust any of the spectrum analyser controls.
DC POWER to OFF. Disconnect the step attenuators from the output of the RF
generator and reconnect the cable from the input to the switched attenuator to
the output of the RF generator.
3-81
HA72500
SECTION 3
6. Remove the transponder extender frame and install the test interrogator back
into the transponder subrack. On the test interrogator front panel, switch
MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER to ON.
7. On the RF panel, disconnect the connection to connector TI-1 TEST INTRGS -.
for monitor system 1 (TI-2 TEST INTRGS - for monitor system 2). Using the
same semirigid cables as used in step 2, connect the input of the step
attenuators to connector TI-1 TEST INTRGS - for monitor system 1 (T1-2 TEST
INTRGS - for monitor system 2). Reduce the attenuation of the step attenuators
until the peak of the displayed spectrum on the spectrum analyser is again
aligned with the reference graticule of step 4.
8. The high level interrogation level, the sum of the attenuator settings (+ve
number) and the reference -59 dBm level, should be -40 1 dBm.
9. On the CTU front panel, select Lo Eff (Low Efficiency) test in Maintenance mode,
and TI RATE, 1 kHz. Again reduce the attenuation of the step attenuators until
the peak of the displayed spectrum on the spectrum analyser is aligned with the
reference graticule of step 4.
10. The low level interrogation level, the sum of the attenuator settings (+ve number)
and the reference -59 dBm level, should be -55 1 dBm.
11. Disconnect the spectrum analyser and the semirigid cable from the RF panel. On
the RF panel, restore the connections:
a. for a single DME:
from connector FWD-C on the directional coupler

to TI-1 TEST INTRGS
b. for a dual DME:
from connector FWD-E on No.2 directional coupler

to TI-1 TEST INTRGS - for monitor system 1
from connector FWD-C on No.2 directional coupler

1. Connect the frequency counter to test jacks 1 s MARKERS and EARTH on the
front panel of the test interrogator. Measure the frequency; it should be 1000.00
0.10 kHz.
2. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES and
EARTH on the test interrogator. Measure the following characteristics of the
displayed pulses:
Pulse width
Pulse spacing
Pulse repetition period 1.0 0.1 milliseconds.
3. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks INTERROGATIONS TIMING
and EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY TIMING and
EARTH on the test interrogator. On the front panel of the test interrogator press
and hold operated CHECK DETECTOR COINCIDENCE and measure the time
interval, on the oscilloscope, between the leading edges of the pulses on the two
channels. The time interval should be not more than 0.1 microseconds.
3.3.6
RF Source and RF Filter Alignment and Tests
3-82
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. If the RF source and RF filter connected to the output of the RF source have not
yet been aligned for their operating reply frequency, perform the alignment using
the station frequency alignment procedures of Section 3.4.18 and for the receiver
video module in Section 3.4.17.
3. On the receiver video undo the cable connector at the output of the RF filter, and
connect the output of the RF filter to the frequency counter terminated in 50
ohms. Read the frequency counter frequency; it should be within 20 kHz of the
reply frequency of Section 3.3.3.4, step 5.
4. Disconnect the frequency counter and reconnect the coaxial cable from the RF
amplifier back to the output of the RF filter.
5. Measure the DC level at the LOCAL OSC LEVEL test jack on the receiver video
front panel; this should be 2.0 0.1 volts.
6. Measure the DC level at the RF LEVEL test jack; this should be 3.0 1.5 volts.
7. Remove the transponder extender frame and replace the receiver video module
in the rack.
3.3.7
RF Panel Preselector Filter Alignment and Tests

DC POWER to OFF. Withdraw the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator
from above the switched attenuator and reconnect the output coaxial cable
directly to the switched attenuator output. Install the test interrogator back into
the transponder subrack. On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR
of 1 kHz.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) to test jacks
DETECTED LOG VIDEO and EARTH on the receiver video front panel. With an
oscilloscope timebase of 5 microseconds/division, a pulse pair should be
displayed above the noise.
"
NOTE
Increasing Signal Level - if Required

If the signal is not visible, more signal can be achieved (temporarily until initial
alignment is achieved and significant signal is available) by providing a direct
connection from the appropriate TEST INTRGS connector to the corresponding
preselector IN connector on the RF panel (after first disconnecting the existing
cables to these connectors).
4. Loosen the locknuts on the preselector filter and tune adjusters A and C together,
keeping them equal distances out from the body; if the frequency is to be
increased, tune the adjusters out (counter-clockwise); if the frequency is to be
decreased, tune the adjusters in (clockwise).
5. Tune both adjusters A and C for a peak, then detune adjuster B until the signal is
only just clearly visible.
6. Retune adjusters A and C successively for peaks. While monitoring the
oscilloscope display, to ensure that the signal level does not change, lock
adjusters A and C with their locknuts. Then retune adjuster B for absolute peak,
locking it in the same way.
"
NOTE
Extreme care must be exercised during this tuning as even a slight detuning of
one cavity will cause a skewed response.
3-83
HA72500
SECTION 3

POWER to ON.
8. If changed, as in the note above, on the RF panel, disconnect the cable from
TEST INTRGS to the preselector, and restore the connections:

to TI-1 TEST INTRGS
b. for a dual DME:

c.
3.3.8
3.3.8.1
for both single

and dual DMEs:
from circulator to connector IN (on the preselector

filter.)

6 dB Offset

of 1 kHz.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) to test points XT13
and XT21 (GND) on the receiver video main board. Measure and record the peak
pulse amplitude above the 0 volts reference.
DC POWER to OFF.
5. Withdraw the test interrogator, remove the 30 dB attenuator from above the
switched attenuator and reconnect the output coaxial cable directly to the
switched attenuator output.
6. Install the test interrogator back into the transponder subrack. On the test
to ON.
7. With this increase of 30 dB in the signal level into the receiver video, on the
oscilloscope, again measure and record the peak pulse amplitude above the 0
volts reference.
8. Calculate the difference between the recorded results of steps 3 and 7, and
divide it by 5. Record this voltage. It should be 220 40 mV. This voltage is the
average voltage increment per 6 dB of signal level.
9. Connect the digital multimeter (on 2 volts range) to test points XT13 and XT6 on
the receiver video main board. Set ADJUST 6 dB OFFSET (R45) so that the
multimeter reading equals (to within 5 mV) the offset voltage calculated in step
8.
3-84
HA72500
SECTION 3

POWER to ON.
11. On the oscilloscope, measure the peak pulse amplitude above the 0 volts
reference. It should be within 5 mV of the value recorded in step 3.
3.3.8.2
Receiver On-channel Threshold
1. Connect a frequency counter to the ON CHANNEL VIDEO and EARTH test

jacks on the receiver video. Set the counter time base to 1 second. Make the
following switch settings on the transponder (after first noting their initial
positions):
Test interrogator, MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER to OFF

(both modules, on a dual DME).
Transmitter driver, DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
Transponder power supply, TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
2. Measure the ON CHANNEL VIDEO pulse count on the frequency counter. This
should be between 20 and 200 pulses per second.
3. If the pulse count is outside this range, the switch the TRANSPONDER DC
POWER to OFF. Remove the receiver video module from the rack and remove
the cover from the IF amplifier enclosure. Plug the module into the rack, using
the transponder extender frame.
4. Switch on the TRANSPONDER DC POWER but leave the test interrogator and
transmitter driver OFF.
5. With a multimeter, measure the DC voltage at test pin XT13 on the IF amplifier
board (referenced to ground). Check that it is 6.0 0.1 volts; if necessary, adjust
the AGC preset (R15) to set the voltage within this range.
6. Measure the DC voltage at test pin XT10 (referenced to ground) and check that it
is 5.0 0.1 volts. If necessary, adjust the ON CHANNEL preset (R50) to set the
voltage within this range.
7. Measure the DC voltage at test pin XT6 and adjust the GAIN preset (R29) to give
a voltage of 4.0 0.1 volts.
8. Check that the ON CHANNEL pulse count is now within the required range. If it
is not, then make a further gain adjustment to R29 to achieve the specified pulse
count, ensuring that the voltage at XT6 stays within the limits of 4.0 0.4 volts.
9. If any gain adjustment has been made, measure the voltage at the gain test pin
XT1; it should be within the range 5.0 to 7.0 volts.
10. Switch off the transponder. Replace the cover on the IF amplifier and replace the
receiver video module in the rack. Set all transponder switched to NORMAL.
3.3.9
3.3.9.1
Transmitter Driver Alignment

RF Output Alignment
1. If the transmitter driver has not been aligned for operation at the station reply
frequency, then perform the procedure detailed in Section 3.4.23.
2. Extend the transmitter driver using the transponder extender frame.
3. Set the switches and controls as follows:
3-85
HA72500
SECTION 3
DRIVER DC POWER (on the front panel) to OFF,
ALC LOOP (S2 on the pulse shaper board) to OPEN,
ALC (S3 on the pulse shaper board) to VIDEO,
MED COLL (S4 on the pulse shaper board) to DC,
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58 on the pulse shaper board) fully counterclockwise.
4. On the CTU front panel, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or NO 2 key as

appropriate for the transponder being tested.
TRIGS TO MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to
VIDEO OUT on the peak power meter to check the pulse shape (in step 8
onwards).
6. On the receiver video, set the IDENT switch to CONTINUOUS.
transponder power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 42.0
0.2 volts. If out of range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting
HT VOLTAGE (R26) on the transponder power supply main board.
8. On the 1kW RF power amplifier, disconnect the coaxial cable from the INPUT
connector, and connect the cable (with suitable adaptors, through the 30 dB
attenuator) to the peak power meter. Record the calibrated loss of the 30 dB
attenuator.
CAUTION
The sensor on the peak power meter is sensitive to overload, and is

easily damaged. To prevent expensive delays and repairs from being
incurred, ensure that the correct specified attenuator is connected to the
peak power meter sensor before connecting to the RF source to be
measured.
9. If the capability is available on the peak power meter, enter an offset to the
displayed peak power reading equal to the calibrated loss of the 30 dB attenuator
(so that the peak power meter displays the actual power at the input to the 30 dB
attenuator). If this capability is not available, use the table below to determine the
required reading on the peak power meter corresponding to 40.0 watts into the
input of the 30 dB attenuator. Ensure that the characterisation correction factor is
also applied to the meter readings.
CALIBRATED ATTENUATOR LOSS
29.5
29.6
29.7
29.8
29.9
30.0
30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4
30.5
METER READING (for 40W)

44.9 mW
43.9 mW
42.9 mW
41.9 mW
40.9 mW
40.0 mW
39.1 mW
38.2 mW
37.3 mW
36.5 mW
35.7 mW
10. On the transmitter driver front panel, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to
NORMAL. While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust the RF OUTPUT
control on the transmitter driver front panel to produce a peak power meter
reading of that shown in the table above 0.5 mW - corrected by the
3-86
HA72500
SECTION 3
characterisation factor - (or 40.0 0.5 watts if the reading is corrected for the
calibrated loss of the 30 dB attenuator).
11. Check that any tilt on the top of the waveform has a total peak-to-peak value over
the two pulses of not more than 10% of the mean pulse height (see figure below).
12. Check that the space between the two pulses is 1.5 0.1 microseconds. If it is
not, then set it within this limit using the preset BACK PORCH (R36) on the pulse
shaper board. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.3.22)
3.3.9.2
Modulation Pulse Alignment
1. On the power distribution panel, switch the appropriate 1kW PWR AMP circuit
breaker on.
2. On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
Confirm the state of the following indicators:
HT ON
TEST
DC POWER ON
on
on
on
3. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks FUNCTION GENERATOR

and EARTH on the transmitter driver. Measure the peak height of the displayed
waveform with respect to the 0 volts reference. It should be 10.8 0.5 volts. (The
shape may need to be modified to achieve the final RF envelope shape - see
Section 3.3.10. Section 3.4.24 includes procedures for the initial alignment of the
pulse shape.)
4. Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks SHAPED MODULATION and
EARTH on the 1kW PA power supply front panel. A constant voltage display
should be observed. Adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) on the pulse shaper
board to produce a multimeter reading of 17.0 0.5 volts.
5. While observing the oscilloscope, slowly adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58)
to produce a pulse rising 15.0 0.5 volts above the base line. Ensure that this
pulse voltage can be achieved.
6. Remove the pulses by adjusting MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) fully counterclockwise.
7. On the transmitter driver front panel, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
OFF.
9. On the 1kW RF power amplifier, disconnect the coaxial cable from the input of
the 30 dB attenuator and reconnect it to the INPUT connector of the 1kW RF
power amplifier.
3-87
HA72500
3.3.10
SECTION 3
1kW RF Power Amplifier Alignment
3.3.10.1 Output Pulse Alignment

1. For a dual DME, on the RF panel, set the ANTENNA RELAY switch to No1 TO
ANT or No2 TO ANT as appropriate for the transponder being tested.
2. Connect the peak power meter through the calibrated 30 dB and 20 dB
attenuators to the ANTENNA connector on the RF panel at the rear of the rack.
(Make a direct connection, without using any cables.) Connect channel 1 of the
oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks TRIGS TO MODULATOR and
EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to VIDEO OUT on the peak power
meter to check the pulse shape. The transmitter driver should be on the
transponder extender frame as in the previous section. Ensure that the cover is
securely fitted to the 1kW RF power amplifier.
3. Record the calibrated loss of the 20 dB attenuator. Add and record the sum of
the calibrated losses of the 20 dB and 30 dB attenuators.
4. If the capability is available on the peak power meter, enter an offset to the
displayed peak power reading equal to the sum of the calibrated losses of the
20 dB and 30 dB attenuators (so that the peak power meter displays the actual
power at the input to the 30 dB attenuator). If this capability is not available, use
the table below to determine the required reading on the peak power meter
corresponding to 1200 watts into the input of the 30 dB attenuator. Ensure that
the characterisation correction factor is also applied to the meter readings.
CALIBRATED
ATTENUATO
R LOSS
METER
READING
(FOR 1.2 KW)
CALIBRATED
ATTENUATOR
LOSS
METER
READING
(FOR 1.2 KW)
49.0
15.1 mW
50.0
12.0 mW
49.1
14.8 mW
50.1
11.7 mW
49.2
14.4 mW
50.2
11.5 mW
49.3
14.1 mW
50.3
11.2 mW
49.4
13.8 mW
50.4
10.9 mW
49.5
13.5 mW
50.5
10.7 mW
49.6
13.2 mW
50.6
10.5 mW
49.7
12.9 mW
50.7
10.2 mW
49.8
12.6 mW
50.8
10.0 mW
49.9
12.3 mW
50.9
9.8 mW
50.0
12.0 mW
51.0
9.5 mW

ON.
1kW PA power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 50.0 0.2
volts. If out of range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting R112
on the regulator of the 1kW PA power supply.
8. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED REPLIES and
EARTH on the test interrogator front panel.
9. While monitoring the peak power meter, slowly increase the MOD PULSE
AMPLITUDE (R58) preset on the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver to
3-88
HA72500
SECTION 3
produce a peak power meter reading of 1800 watts (or the maximum power
available). Check that no instability or break-up of the shape of the pulse occurs
at any power setting up to the specified maximum.
10. While monitoring the peak power meter, decrease the MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE
(R58) on the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver to produce a peak
power meter reading of that shown in the table above 0.5 mW (or 1200 50 watts
if the reading is corrected for the calibrated loss of the 50 dB attenuator).
11. Perform a small number of successive adjustments to the PEDESTAL VOLTAGE
(R53) and MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) presets to obtain an output pulse
shape generally similar to that shown in the figure below with a peak power of 1.2
kW, a pulse width in the range 3.2 to 3.8 microseconds, and rise and fall times in
the range 1.9 to 2.5 microseconds. For final shape adjustment, see step 15.
(During the adjustments, do NOT let the peak power exceed a power 50% above
the 1.2 kW limit.)
12. On the oscilloscope, adjust the gain and position controls of channel 2 to set the
detected pulses from the peak power meter and DETECTED REPLIES to the
same amplitude. Check that the waveforms coincide within 5%.
13. On the oscilloscope, check the displayed signal from DETECTED REPLIES. On
the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver, adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE
(R53) so that the pedestal is about 5% of the total pulse amplitude, and clearly
visible, as shown in the figure below.
3-89
HA72500
SECTION 3
14. On the pulse shaper board, adjust INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) so that there
is an equal pedestal step at each side of the pulse, that is, RISE PEDESTAL
equals FALL PEDESTAL.
15. On the pulse shaper board, adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) to reduce the
pedestal until there is a smooth transition between the pulse and the baseline.
Then adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) to give 1.2 kW peak power output
(see step 10).
16. If the pulse shape at the completion of step 15 does not meet the limits of step
11, it may be necessary to readjust the function generator controls, R3 to R13 on
the pulse shaper board to achieve the required pulse shape parameters. The
object is to obtain the rated power output whilst meeting the pulse shape
requirements of step 11.
17. On the oscilloscope display of DETECTED REPLIES, check the relative
amplitudes of the two pulses of the pulse pair. If the second pulse is higher than
the first, reduce its amplitude with 2ND PULSE EQUALISING (R54) on the pulse
shaper board (otherwise leave this control fully clockwise). If the second pulse is
lower than the first, increase the amplitude by a SMALL adjustment only of the
INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) on the pulse shaper board.
18. If necessary, adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) on the pulse shaper board
to give 1.2 kW peak power output (see step 10).
19. Using the oscilloscope, measure the following parameters (with respect to an
EARTH test jack or test point on the same module - as appropriate) and record
them for later reference:
MODULE
Pulse Shaper
1kW PA Power
Supply
MONITOR POINT
PARAMETER
Test Point XT9
DC Voltage
Test Point XT5
DC Voltage
Test Jack SHAPED MODULATION
Pedestal Voltage
Pulse Peak Voltage
Test Jack POWER AMP DRIVER
Pulse Peak Voltage
Test Jack POWER AMP MODULATOR
Pulse Peak Voltage
3-90
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.10.2 Automatic Level Control
CAUTION
In the next two steps, the output pulse peak power as measured by the
peak power meter should fall when specified switches are operated. If the
peak power rises instead, there is a fault in the equipment. Reverse the
operation of the switch and rectify the fault before continuing the test. The
pulse peak power should NOT be allowed to exceed 1.8 kW for more
than a few seconds.
1. On the pulse shaper board, ensure ALC switch (S3) is set to VIDEO. Adjust the
front panel RF OUTPUT control fully counter-clockwise. Switch ALC LOOP (S2)
to CLOSED. Observe that the output pulse peak power has been reduced. Adjust
RF OUTPUT to give 1.2 kW peak power output (see Section 3.3.10.1 step 10).
2. On the pulse shaper board, switch ALC LOOP to OPEN. Adjust the front panel
RF OUTPUT control fully counter-clockwise. Set the ALC switch to DETECTED
RF. Switch ALC LOOP to CLOSED. Observe that the output pulse peak power
has been reduced. Adjust RF OUTPUT to give 1.2 kW peak power output (see
Section 3.3.10.1 step 10). Leave the ALC switch in the DETECTED RF position.
POWER to OFF. Replace the transmitter driver in the transponder subrack. On
the transponder power supply front panel, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
to ON.
4. On the peak power meter, read the output pulse peak power. Correct this reading
for the calibrated loss of the 50 dB attenuator and the characterisation correction
of the peak power meter. The corrected peak power should be 1200 50 watts.
3.3.11
Transmitter Pulse Parameters
Ensure that the oscilloscope probes are correctly compensated and the vertical
amplifiers are calibrated just prior to the commencement of this section.
3.3.11.1 Test Setup

1. On the receiver video front panel, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS.
TRIGS TO MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to test
jacks DETECTED REPLIES and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel.
3. On the CTU front panel, press the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET key.
DC POWER to NORMAL.
POWER to NORMAL.
NORMAL.
appropriate for the transponder being tested. Ensure MONITOR ALARM is set to
INHIBIT.
3-91
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.11.2 Output Pulse Power

1. On the peak power meter, read the meter reading. Applying the corrections for
the calibration errors of the attenuators and meter, calculate the corrected output
pulse peak power. This should be 1200 60 watts.
3.3.11.3 Output Pulse Shape

1. From the display on the oscilloscope, measure the following parameters:
PARAMETER
LIMITS
1st pulse: pulse width at half-amplitude
2nd pulse: pulse width at half-amplitude
1st pulse: rise time, 10% to 90%
2nd pulse: rise time, 10% to 90%
1st pulse: fall time, 10% to 90%
2nd pulse: fall time, 10% to 90%
Amplitude difference between pulses
2%
2. On the CTU front panel display the following parameters:

PARAMETER
"
NOTE
LIMITS
Pulse width
Rise time
Fall time
The CTU pulse shape measurement facility measures the parameters of the
second pulse of a transmitted pulse pair.

on the test interrogator front panel. Use the displayed markers to correct the
oscilloscope time base calibration and then measure the pulse spacing between
the amplitude points on the leading edge of each pulse. It should be 12.0 0.1
microseconds. If the pulse spacing is outside this limit, adjust REPLY PULSE
SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on early modules) on the receiver
video front panel to set this parameter to a value in the specified range.
2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to OFF.
3. On the CTU front panel display the Spacing reading; it should be within the limits
of step 1 above. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.3.22)
4. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS.
3.3.11.5 Output Pulse Peak Power Calibration

1. On the CTU front panel display the Pwr Out reading.
2. Extend the test interrogator using the transponder extender frame.
3. While monitoring the CTU display, adjust TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7) on the test
interrogator main board to display a power output reading equal (within 10 watts)
to the corrected peak output power reading of Section 3.3.11.2.
4. Reinstall the test interrogator into the transponder subrack. The CTU power
output reading should be within 30 watts of the corrected peak output power
reading of Section 3.3.11.2. If the reading is outside the limits, extend the test
3-92
HA72500
SECTION 3
interrogator on the transponder extender frame, adjust TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7)
to produce the required correction and then reinstall the test interrogator.
3.3.11.6 Output Pulse Spectrum

1. At the RF panel, disconnect the sensor of the peak power meter (but leave 30 dB
and 20 dB attenuators terminating the ANTENNA connector). Connect a cable
from the output of the 20 dB attenuator to RF IN on the spectrum analyser.
2. Initially set the spectrum analyser controls as follows:
Centre frequency
Station reply frequency
Bandwidth
100 kHz
Scan width
1 MHz per division
Input attenuation
20 dB
Scan time
Video filter
1 MHz bandwidth
to suit
3. On the spectrum analyser, tune in the pulse spectrum. Change the SCAN
WIDTH to 200 kHz per division. Set the 0 dB reference to the peak of the
displayed spectrum. At 800 kHz either side of the frequency of the peak
response, read the spectral response in dB below the 0 dB reference. The
magnitude of this difference should not be less than 50 dB.
4. Change the SCAN WIDTH to 5 MHz per division, reset the 0 dB reference to the
peak of the displayed spectrum. Confirm that there are no responses between 2
MHz and 50 MHz which are above a level which is 65 dB below the 0 dB
reference level. (Responses above the specified level which can be shown to not
be generated in the equipment under test are not to be considered.)
5. Change the SCAN WIDTH to 10 MHz per division, reset the 0 dB reference to
the peak of the displayed spectrum. Measure the responses at 11/12 and 13/12
of the station reply frequency. These should be below a level which is 60 dB
below the 0 dB reference level.
6. On the receiver video front panel, switch IDENT to NORMAL.
3.3.12
Receiver Performance Tests
3.3.12.1 Test Setup

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks REPLY TIMING and
EARTH also on the test interrogator.
2. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES
and EARTH on the test interrogator.
3. On the oscilloscope, check that the centre of the REPLY ACCEPT GATES align,
within 0.5 microseconds, with leading edges of the REPLY TIMING pulses. If
this alignment is outside the specified limits, adjust REPLY GATE DELAY,
COARSE and FINE controls on the test interrogator front panel to achieve the
required alignment.
4. On the CTU front panel, select Lo Eff parameter measurement in Maintenance
mode, and a TI RATE of 1 kHz. Check that a reply efficiency greater than 70% is
being displayed.
5. Extend the test interrogator using the transponder extender frame.
3-93
HA72500
SECTION 3
generator, and connect the output of the RF generator to the calibrated 10 dB
and 1 dB step attenuators connected through one of the 0.5 dB semirigid cables.
Connect the output of the step attenuators to the input of the corresponding
preselector filter with the second 0.5 dB semirigid cable - after removing the
semirigid cable link to the circulator (see figure below). Select 90 dB in the 10 dB
step attenuator and 0 dB in the 1 dB step attenuator. Check that a reply
efficiency greater than 70% is being displayed on the CTU.
3.3.12.2 Receiver Sensitivity

1. Select 100 dB on the 10 dB step attenuator and 3 dB on the 1 dB step attenuator
to give an input level of 93 dBm to the preselector filter. On the CTU, measure
the reply efficiency averaged over a 10 second period. The average reply
efficiency should be greater than 70%.
2. If the reply efficiency in step 1 is not achieved, then check the following:
tuning of preselector filter (refer to Section 3.4.34.2);
alignment of IF amplifier (refer to Section 3.4.19);
gain adjustment of receiver video (refer to Section 3.4.17).
3.3.12.3 Receiver Bandwidth

to give an input level of -90 dBm to the preselector filter. On the CTU, measure
If the reply efficiencies in step 1 to 3 are not achieved, then check the
narrowband alignment of the IF amplifier. (Refer to Section 3.4.19)
3.3.12.4 Receiver Selectivity

to give an input level of 10 dBm to the preselector filter. On the CTU, measure
3-94
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.12.5 Receiver Decoding Window

1. With an input level of -10 dBm at the preselector filter (as in Section 3.3.12.4
above), switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING REJECT on the
test interrogator to +2 microseconds. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency
than 5%.
than 5%.
to give an input level of -92 dBm to the preselector filter. On the CTU, change the
TI RATE to 50 Hz (100 Hz on a single DME).
ACCEPT to +1 microsecond. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged
70%.
ACCEPT to -1 microsecond. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged
70%.
REJECT to +2 microseconds. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency
than 10%.
than 10%.
3.3.12.6 Receiver CW Protection

to give an input level of -30 dBm to the preselector filter. On the CTU, change the
TI RATE to 1 kHz.
(with respect to mean noise baseline). The pulse peak amplitude should be not
less than 2.2 volts.
3-95
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to ON to add a CW signal to the

interrogation pulse. On the oscilloscope, measure the pulse peak amplitude (with
respect to mean noise baseline). The pulse peak amplitude should be less than
0.7 volts. (This reduction in pulse peak amplitude proves correct operation of the
automatic gain control).
4. On the CTU, measure the reply efficiency averaged over a 10 second period.
The average reply efficiency should be greater than 90%.
5. On the RF generator, set switch S1:6 to OFF to remove the CW signal from the
interrogation pulse.
3.3.12.7 Receiver Reply Rate

to give an input level of -70 dBm to the preselector filter.
3. On the receiver video, switch and hold TEST switch to INHIBIT
INTERROGATIONS. On the CTU, read the average of five displayed transmitted
pulse rate readings. This squitter reply rate should be 945 10 Hz.
TEST. On the CTU, read the average of five displayed transmitted pulse rate
readings. This reply rate should be 810 10 Hz.
5. While holding TI RATE 10 kHz on the CTU pressed, read the average of five
displayed transmitted pulse rate readings. This maximum reply rate should be
2800 100 Hz.
6. On the CTU, select D.Rate parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
Read the average of five displayed readings; this decoded pulse rate should be
1000 10 Hz.
(with respect to mean noise baseline); it should b at least 1.1 volts.
8. While observing the oscilloscope display, press TI RATE 10 kHz on the CTU.
Measure the pulse peak amplitude (with respect to mean noise baseline); it
should be not more than 0.7 volts. (This reduction in pulse peak amplitude
proves correct operation of the AGC.)
3.3.12.8 Dead Time

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DEAD TIME and
EARTH on the receiver video. The duration of the displayed pulse will have
random variations. Observe that the pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73
microseconds.
3.3.13
Transponder Delay

to give an input level of 70 dBm to the preselector filter.
2. On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz. The
displayed reading will probably fluctuate 0.1 microseconds about the average
3-96
HA72500
SECTION 3
value. If necessary, adjust the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE controls
on the receiver video to achieve an average as near as possible to 50.0
microseconds. Due to the limited resolution of the FINE control, it will sometimes
be necessary to accept 49.9 or 50.1 microseconds. A reading on the low side is
preferred since the antenna feeder will increase the transponder delay as
measured by an aircraft. Record this reference Delay value. (For Y channel
values refer to Section 3.3.22)
3. Set the step attenuators to the values listed in the table below to produce the
specified input levels to the preselector filter. For each setting, read the reply
delay reading displayed on the CTU. If there is any fluctuation in the reading,
take the mean value averaged over a 10 second period. These delay values
should be within the tabulated limits of the recorded reference delay.
ATTENTUATOR
SETTING (dB)
INPUT LEVEL AT
PRESELECTOR (dBm)
LIMITS
(microseconds)
80
-70
0.2
100
-90
0.2
103
-93
0.4
60
-50
0.2
40
-30
0.2
30
-20
0.2
20
-10
0.4
4. On the test interrogator, disconnect the step attenuators and the semirigid cable
from the output of the RF generator. Restore the connection from the output of
the RF generator to the switched attenuator. Remove the transponder extender
frame and install the test interrogator back in the transponder subrack.
5. On the RF panel, disconnect the step attenuators and the semirigid cable from
the input of the preselector filter. Restore the semirigid cable link from the
circulator to the input of the preselector filter.
6. On the CTU, read the displayed delay. It should be within 0.1 microseconds of
the reference delay recorded above.

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks INTERROGATIONS
TIMING and EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY
TIMING and EARTH on the test interrogator. Measure the time interval between
the first interrogation pulse and the first synchronised reply pulse (at halfamplitude points on the pulse leading edges) and measure by reference to the 1
microsecond markers at 1 s MARKERS test jack on the test interrogator. The
time interval should be within 0.1 microseconds of the value displayed on the
CTU. (For Y channel values refer to Section 3.3.22)
VIDEO and EARTH on the receiver video. Measure the amplitude of the
displayed synchronous video pulses with respect to the 0 volts reference (taking
3-97
HA72500
SECTION 3
the mean of the noise on the peak of the pulses). The amplitude should be 1.2
0.5 volts.
5. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope
measure the amplitude of the displayed synchronous video pulses with respect to
the 0 volts reference. The amplitude should be 1.8 0.5 volts.
6. Calculate the difference in amplitudes of steps 4 and 5. This difference should be
7. On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope check
(see figure below) that the displayed synchronous video pulses alternate
between the two levels measured above. Measure the time interval from the
rising edge of the first pulse of a low level synchronous video pulse pair to the
rising edge of the first pulse of a high level synchronous video pulse pair. This
time interval should be 1.00 0.05 milliseconds. (Note that synchronous reply
pulses, probably at a higher level, will also be present on the displayed
waveform).
3.3.14
Echo Suppression
3.3.14.1 Long Distance Echo Suppression

1. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
2. Extend the receiver video using the transponder extender frame and switch
LDES (S9) on the receiver video main board to ON.
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to XT13 and XT21 (GND) on the
receiver video main board. The peak interrogation pulse voltage should be 2.70
0.50 volts.
4. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test points XT9 and XT21 (GND).
Adjust LDES LEVEL (R46) to set the long distance echo suppression level to
0.10 to 0.15 volts less than the voltage measured in the previous step.
5. Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DEAD TIME and EARTH on the
receiver video. The duration of the displayed pulse will have random variations,
but should remain in the range 115 to 140 microseconds.
6. On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope, check
that the pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73 microseconds.
7. On the receiver video main board, switch LDES to OFF.
3.3.14.2 Short Distance Echo Suppression

1. On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement.
3-98
HA72500
SECTION 3

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator) to XT13 and XT21 (GND) on the
receiver video main board. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks
SDES PULSE and EARTH on the receiver video. Check that the displayed XT13
waveform is similar to that shown in the figure below for SDES OFF.
3. On the receiver video main board, switch SDES (S8) to ON. Check that an SDES
pulse is now present and that the displayed XT13 waveform has the leading
edge of the second pulse masked out in line with the SDES pulse as shown in
the figure above for SDES ON. (The SDES pulse has a nominal width of 2.5
microseconds and is delayed a nominal 14 microseconds from the TRIGGER
pulse.)
4. Switch SDES to OFF. Install the receiver video back in the transponder subrack.
3.3.15
Ident
3.3.15.1 Internal Ident

1. On the CTU, switch MAINTENANCE to OFF and MONITOR ALARM to
NORMAL. Under the Misc menu, select Mon 1 (for No. 1 transponder) or Mon 2
(for No.2 transponder) as the ident (speaker) source. Switch MAINTENANCE
back to ON (after switching the transponder off and then switching the
transponder back on). Listen to the ident from the CTU mounted speaker and
check that it is correct for the assigned ident (set at Section 3.3.3.4, step 2).
2. Using a stopwatch, measure the ident repetition period; it should be 40 4
seconds. If the measured period is outside the limits, connect a counter, set for
period measurement, to test points XT7 and XT21 on the receiver video main
board, and adjust IDENT REPTN RATE (R39) to produce a period reading in the
range 600 to 650 milliseconds on the counter.
3.3.15.2 External Ident

1. On the external I/O board at the rear of the rack, connect the NO (normally open)
contacts of a pushbutton switch (through suitable leads) between terminal 4 of
terminal block XB1 (ASSOC_IDENT_IN) and terminal 6 of terminal block XB1 1
(GND).
2. Listen to the CTU mounted speaker and confirm that ident is transmitted
whenever the pushbutton is pressed.
3. Listen for the internally generated ident. Within 1 second of the commencement
of the internal ident, press and hold the pushbutton for 1 to 2 seconds. Start a
stopwatch on releasing the pushbutton.
4. From a stopwatch, read the elapsed time until the commencement of the next
internal ident. This elapsed time should be less than 55 seconds.
3-99
HA72500
SECTION 3
5. Remove the pushbutton switch from the external I/O board.
3.3.15.3 Master Ident

1. Connect the indicator test fixture (see Section E.2) to the external I/O board,
positive to terminal 2 of terminal block XB1 (ASSOC_IDENT_OUT -), negative to
terminal 6 of terminal block XB11 (GND).
2. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period between the commencement of the
internally generated ident messages. This time period should be 10 1 seconds
for three out of four ident messages.
3. Check that every fourth ident message is suppressed, and that the suppressed
ident message coincides with the ident message transmitted by the DME.
3.3.15.4 Ident Frequency

2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS. On the CTU, read the
average of five displayed transmitted pulse rate readings. This ident frequency
should be 1350 20 Hz.
3.3.16
Monitor Fault Limits
3.3.16.1 Test Setup

1. On the monitor main board, ensure that each of the fault limit switches has been
set as specified in Section 3.3.3.8, step 1.
2. At the rear of the rack, ensure that the cables providing signals into the ERP IN
connectors of the transponders have been connected (see Section 3.3.3.9, step
2 for a single DME; Section 3.3.3.10, steps 2 and 3 for a dual DME).
3. On the RF panel, ensure that the antenna integrity monitor test fixture (see
Section 3.3.3.9) is connected to XN2 on the RF panel board.
DC POWER to NORMAL.
POWER to NORMAL.
7. On the 1kW PA power supply, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to NORMAL.
8. On the RF panel, ensure ANTENNA RELAY switch is set to NORMAL.
appropriate for the transponder being tested.
test).

1. Extend the monitor on the transponder extender frame.
3-100
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. On the receiver video, read and record the position of the BEACON DELAY,
COARSE and FINE switches (to enable them to be restored to their original
positions at the completion of these tests).
switches to produce a displayed delay of 49.5 microseconds on the CTU. Check
that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
5. Slowly adjust the BEACON DELAY, COARSE switch towards position 0 to
reduce the beacon delay. Check that the monitor DELAY indicator remains off.
"
NOTES Delay Displayed on CTU

For delays outside the range 48 to 52 microseconds, the CTU will display
"OVERFLOW".
Second Pulse Within Delay Window
For delays around 38 microseconds, the second pulse of the pulse pair will fall
within the accept window around 50 microseconds and the DELAY indicator
will again turn on. This is acceptable.
that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
BEACON DELAY, COARSE switch towards position F to increase the beacon
delay. Check that the DELAY indicator remains off.
that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is on.
BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE switches to decrease the beacon delay
(but not below 49.7 microseconds). Check that the DELAY indicator remains on.
that the DELAY indicator on the monitor is on.
11. On the receiver video, restore the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE
switches to their original settings.

1. On the CTU, select Spacing parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on earlier modules) switch (to enable
this switch to be restored to its original position at the completion of these tests).
3. On the receiver video, adjust the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to produce a
displayed spacing of 11.4 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of the coarse
adjustment of the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch it may not be possible to
achieve a steady reading of 11.4 microseconds on the CTU. In this case, adjust
the switch to produce a CTU reading as close as possible to 11.4 microseconds,
but never greater than 11.4 microseconds.) Check that the SPACING indicator
on the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
3-101
HA72500
SECTION 3
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch towards position 0 to reduce the pulse spacing.
Check that the SPACING indicator remains off.
displayed Spacing of 12.6 microseconds on the CTU. (Because of the coarse
but never less than 12.6 microseconds.) Check that the SPACING indicator on
the monitor is off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch towards position F to increase the pulse
but never greater than 12.3 microseconds.) Check that the SPACING indicator
on the monitor is on.
REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to decrease the pulse spacing (but not below
11.7 microseconds). Check that the SPACING indicator remains on.
but never less than 11.7 microseconds.) Check that the SPACING indicator on
the monitor is on.
10. On the receiver video, restore the REPLY PULSE SPACING switch to its original
setting.
3.3.16.4 Efficiency Monitor

1. On the RF panel, remove the coaxial cable between TI-1 TEST INTRGS and
FWD-E on No.2 directional coupler - for monitor system 1 (between TI-2 TEST
INTRGS and FWD-C on No.2 directional coupler - for monitor system 2).
Connect the 1 dB step attenuator between these two points using the two 0.5 dB
semirigid cables. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.
3. While observing both the displayed CTU efficiency reading and the EFFICIENCY
indicator on the monitor, slowly increase the attenuation of the step attenuator.
4. Observe that while the displayed CTU efficiency reading is greater than 70%, the
monitor EFFICIENCY indicator is on.
5. Observe that while the displayed CTU efficiency reading is less than 50%, the
monitor EFFICIENCY indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on.
"
NOTE
Extra Attenuation
3-102
HA72500
SECTION 3
It may be necessary to insert the 10 dB step attenuator (set to 10 dB) in series

with the specified attenuator to reduce the efficiency below 50%.
6. Remove the step attenuator and semirigid cables. On the RF panel, restore the
connections:

to TI-1 TEST INTRGS
b. for a dual DME:

to T1-1 TEST INTRGS - for monitor system 1
3.3.16.5 Rate Monitor

1. On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 50 Hz (100
Hz on a single DME).
2. On the monitor, check that the RATE indicator is on while the CTU displays a
transmitted pulse rate reading of 945 10 Hz.
TEST. Check that the monitor RATE indicator is off and the SECONDARY
indicator is on and the CTU shows a transmitted pulse rate reading of 810
10 Hz.
3.3.16.6 Power Monitor

1. Connect the multimeter (on 20 volts range) to test points XT1 and XT13 (GND)
on the monitor main board. Measure the voltage of the 5 volts reference. It
should be 5.00 0.02 volts.
2. At the rear of the rack, disconnect the cable to the ERP IN connector on the
transponder subrack and connect it to the 1 dB step attenuator (set to 0 dB).
Connect the other end of the 1 dB step attenuator to the ERP IN connector using
an additional cable not exceeding 100 mm in length.
3. Move the multimeter (on 20 volts range) to test points XT2 and XT13 (GND) on
the monitor main board. Adjust R87, PEAK POWER MONITOR CALIBRATION
control to produce a multimeter reading of 2.50 0.05 volts.
4. At the rear of the rack, insert a 0.5 dB semirigid cable (plus adaptors as required)
between the output of the step attenuator and the short cable to ERP IN.
5. For step attenuator settings of 0 dB, 1 dB and 2 dB, check that the monitor RF
POWER indicator is on.
6. For step attenuator settings of 3 dB, 4 dB, 5 dB, 6 dB and 7 dB, check that the
monitor RF POWER indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on.
7. Remove the step attenuator and cables and restore the connection to connector
ERP IN on the rear of the transponder subrack.
3.3.16.7 Ident Monitor

1. On the CTU, set MONITOR INHIBIT to OFF to allow ident to be transmitted.
2. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to NORMAL. Check that ident code is being
transmitted and is audible from the CTU mounted speaker.
3. Immediately after the transmission of an ident code group, start a stopwatch and
switch IDENT on the receiver video to OFF. Measure the time taken for the
3-103
HA72500
SECTION 3
monitor IDENT indicator to turn off and the SECONDARY indicator to turn on.
This should be 62 5 seconds.
4. On the CTU, set MONITOR ALARM to INHIBIT (to prevent transfer or shut
down).
5. On the receiver video, switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS. With a stopwatch,
measure the time taken for the monitor DELAY and SPACING indicators to both
turn off. This should be not more than 3 seconds.
7. On the CTU, set MONITOR ALARM to NORMAL.
3.3.16.8 Antenna Monitor

1. Remove the antenna integrity monitor test fixture from connector XN2 on the RF
panel board. Using the multimeter, set the resistance of the test fixture to 1000
10 ohms. Restore the antenna integrity monitor test fixture to XN2 on the RF
panel board. On the monitor, check that the ANTENNA indicator is on.
panel board. On the monitor, check that the ANTENNA indicator is off and the
SECONDARY indicator is on.
panel board.
3.3.16.9 Shape Monitor

1. On the monitor, check that the SHAPE indicator is on. (If it is not, then check that
the transmitter pulse shape is correct and that switches S1, S2, S3 and S4 on the
monitor main board are correctly set - see Section 3.3.3.8, step 1.)
2. On the monitor, switch S1:5 to ON to change the Pulse Width Lower Reject Limit
from 2.9 microseconds to 1.3 microseconds (and thus the Upper Limit from 4.1
microseconds to 2.5 microseconds). Check that the SHAPE indicator is off and
the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S1:5 back to OFF (and ensure that the
SHAPE indicator is on again).
3-104
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. On the monitor, switch S1:6 to OFF to change the Pulse Width Lower Reject
indicator is off. Switch S1:6 back to ON (and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is
on again).
4. On the monitor, switch S2:6 to ON to change the pulse Fall Time Upper Reject
indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S2:6 back to OFF
(and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is on again).
5. On the monitor, switch S3:5 to ON to change the pulse Rise Time Upper Reject
indicator is off and the SECONDARY indicator is on. Switch S3:5 back to OFF
(and ensure that the SHAPE indicator is on again).
6. Restore the monitor back in the transponder subrack.
3.3.16.10 Monitor Self Test

2. On the monitor, check that the SELF TEST indicator flashes on at regular
intervals. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period of these indicator flashes.
The time period should be 16 2 seconds.
3. Check that simultaneously with this indicator flashing on, the DELAY and
SPACING indicators are off and the PRIMARY indicator is on.

2. On the CTU, select the FltLimit parameters listed in the table below. For each
parameter, the displayed fault limits should be within the ranges listed in the
table.
PARAMETER
SPECIFIED VALUE
LIMITS
UNITS
Delay; Lower
49.5
+0.1
-0.0
Delay; Upper
50.5
+0.1
-0.0
Spacing; Lower
11.5
+0.0
-0.1
Spacing; Upper
12.5
+0.0
-0.1
Effncy; (Lower)
60
Tx Rate; Lower
833
10
Hz
Tx Rate; Upper
3000
30
Hz
-3
dB
Ant Power; (Lower)

If a consistent error exists in the Upper and Lower Delay limits, a correction of
+0.1 microseconds or -0.1 microseconds can be added, for each monitor system,
by using the 8-bit DIP switch S1 on the CTU processor board as follows.
3-105
HA72500
SECTION 3
CORRECTION
s
3.3.17
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 1
SWITCHES FOR
MONITOR SYSTEM 2
ON
ON
ON
ON
+0.1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-0.1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
(0)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
24V DC Power Supply/Battery Charger

1. On the monitors, ensure switch MONITOR OUTPUTS is set to NORMAL.
2. On the test interrogators, ensure switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
3. On the transponder power supplies, ensure switch TRANSPONDER DC
4. On the transmitter drivers, ensure switch DRIVER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
5. On the receiver video modules, ensure switch IDENT is set to NORMAL.
6. On the 1kW PA power supplies, ensure switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
7. For a dual DME, on the RF panel, ensure switch ANTENNA RELAY is set to
NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
9. On the CTU, check that the state of each of the CTU indicators is as shown
below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
ON
ALL
OFF
MODULES
OFF
ANT RELAY
OFF
AC PWR NORM
ON
BATT CHG 1
ON
3-106
HA72500
SECTION 3
BATT CHG 2
ON for Dual
OFF for Single
BATT LOW
OFF
10. On the monitors, ensure that the eight parameter indicators are on and the
test).
3.3.17.2 High Voltage Shutdown Adjust
"
NOTE
Power Supply Adjustment for a Dual DME

For a dual DME, switch one AC power supply off in turn while the other AC
power supply is being tested and adjusted.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.17.1. Then
press MONITOR ALARM on the CTU to set it to INHIBIT. (This inhibits ident and
ensures a steady load to the AC power supply and thus a steady output voltage
from the AC power supply.)
2. On the control module of the AC power supply, set the controls:
SHUT DOWN DELAY Fully counter-clockwise
H/V SHUT DOWN
Fully clockwise
3. With the multimeter connected to the appropriate rack BATTERY terminals,
switch and hold the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply to TEST, and
adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on the control module to produce a
multimeter reading of 28.5 0.1 volts.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise to produce a
multimeter reading of 27.5 0.2 volts. The DME should return to normal
operation.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control clockwise until the DME again shuts
down. The multimeter reading should be 28.5 0.2 volts.
7. Release the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply and adjust the SHUT
DOWN DELAY control on the control module of the AC power supply to midposition.
reading of 29.0 0.2 volts. Release the TEST/FLOAT switch to enable the DME
to power up again.
switch to the DME shutting down. This time delay should be 3 1 seconds; if
necessary, readjust SHUT DOWN DELAY control to achieve this delay.
10. Press MONITOR ALARM on the CTU to set it to NORMAL. (On a dual DME,
switch the other AC power supply on.) Confirm that the DME is powered up and
operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.17.1.
3-107
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.17.3 Low Battery Alarm Adjust
"
NOTE
Power Supply Adjustment for a Dual DME

2. On the control module of the AC power supply, set LOW VOLT ALARM control
fully counter-clockwise.
23.5 0.1 volts.
slowly adjust LOW VOLT ALARM control clockwise until the O/P FAIL indicator
24.5 0.2 volts (to turn the O/P FALL indicator on the control module off).
FAIL indicator again turns on. The multimeter reading should be 23.5 0.2 volts.
23.0 0.1 volts.
check that the BATT CHG indicator on the CTU corresponding to the AC power
supply being tested is off.
the external I/O board, check that the BATT CH NORM output to the RCMS
interface board for the AC power supply under test is off. (For BATT CH NORM
1, the normally open contacts (terminals 2 and 4 of terminal block XB4) are open
circuit, and the normally closed contacts (terminals 6 and 4 of terminal block
XB4) are short circuit. For BATT CH NORM 2, the normally open contacts
(terminals 1 and 3 of terminal block XB4) are open circuit, and the normally
closed contacts (terminals 5 and 3 of terminal block XB4) are short circuit.)
10. On the AC power supply, release the TEST/FLOAT switch. (On a dual DME,
switch the other AC power supply on.) Press MONITOR ALARM on the CTU to
set it to NORMAL. Confirm that the DME is powered up and operating in the
normal state of Section 3.3.17.1.
3.3.17.4 Low Voltage Shutdown Adjust

3-108
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU (CTU &
TRANSPONDER on a single DME) to OFF. Extend the CTU using two Eurocard
extenders. Switch circuit breaker CTU on.
3. On the CTU processor board, adjust the low volts preset R32 fully counterclockwise.
4. On a dual DME, switch AC power supply 2 off.
the TEST/FLOAT switch on AC power supply to TEST, and adjust the FLOAT 1
VOLTAGE control on the control module of this AC power supply to produce a
the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns on. Then slowly adjust R32 counterclockwise until the BATT LOW indicator on the CTU turns off. Slowly adjust R32
27.0 0.2 volts. The DME should power up.
slowly adjust FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control counter-clockwise again until the DME
again shuts down. The multimeter reading should be 22.0 0.2 volts.
9. On the AC power supply, release the TEST/FLOAT switch. Press MONITOR
ALARM on the CTU to set it to NORMAL.
10. On a dual DME, switch AC power supply 2 on.
11. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU off. Restore the CTU
to the CTU subrack. Switch circuit breaker CTU on. Confirm that the DME is
powered up and operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.17.1.

the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply to TEST, and adjust the
FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on the control module of the AC power supply to
produce a multimeter reading of 22.5 0.1 volts. Check that the BTY CHG 1
indicator on the CTU is off.
measure the following parameters from the monitor systems using the CTU
parameter measurement facility. The measured parameters should be within the
following limits:
PARAMETER
NOMINAL VALUE
LIMITS
UNITS
DELAY
50.0
0.1
SPACING
12.0
0.1
EFFNCY
95
> 90
TX RATE
945
10
Hz
RF POWER
1200
100

3. Release the TEST/FLOAT switch on the AC power supply.
3-109
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.17.6 DC Supply Adjustment
"
NOTE
2. With the DME operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.17.1, measure the
primary DC supply voltage. It should be 27 0.1 volts; if it is outside this limit, it
may be adjusted by the FLOAT 2 VOLTAGE control on the control module of the
AC power supply.
"
NOTEs Duplication of Tests

From this point on, the tests are only to be performed once on the equipment
under test.
Affect of Monitor Self Test on Alarm Delay Measurements
When an action is taken on the DME to initiate a shutdown or a transfer, and
the time delay from the action to the response is to be measured, it is
recommended that the action take place within a period 3 to 7 seconds after
the completion of monitor self test. This will ensure that the measured time
period is not affected by the presence of a monitor self test.
RCMS Interface
The test procedures below require checking the state of the RCMS Interface
parameters. If the intended application of the DME does not use the RCMS
Interface, these references in the test procedures can be ignored. If the RCMS
Interface is to be included in the tests to be performed on the DME rack, the
RCMS Interface can be checked in a number of ways. The RCMS Interface is
located on the external I/O board at the rear of the rack. Connections are via
terminal blocks. Each output parameter has three terminals on a terminal block:
C (common), NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed).
a. When the parameter is off, the NO contact is open circuit and the NC
contact is connected to the C contact.
b. When the parameter is on, the NC contact is open circuit and the NO
contact is connected to the C contact.
A protected 24 volts supply is provided on XB1:1, and a ground is provided on
XB11:6. If desired, a test fixture could be built, using indicators to monitor the
state of the output parameters. If this test fixture cannot be justified, a LED
Indicator can be used to check the state of the output parameters as shown
below.
A lighted LED when connected to the NO contact indicates the output

parameter is on.
3-110
HA72500
SECTION 3
A lighted LED when connected to the NC contact indicates the output

parameter is off.
3.3.18
"
NOTE
Control System - Single DME

The tests in this section are only to be performed on a single DME. The tests
for a dual DME are in Section 3.3.19.

1. On the monitor, ensure switch MONITOR OUTPUTS is set to NORMAL.
2. On the test interrogator, ensure switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
3. On the transponder power supply, ensure switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
is set to NORMAL.
4. On the transmitter driver, ensure switch DRIVER DC POWER is set to NORMAL.
5. On the receiver video, ensure switch IDENT is set to NORMAL.
6. On the 1kW PA power supply, ensure switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER is set to
NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINTENANCE
OFF
ALL
OFF
MODULES
OFF
ANT RELAY
OFF
AC POWER NORM
ON
BATT CHG1
ON
BATT CHG 2
OFF
BATT LOW
OFF
3-111
HA72500
SECTION 3
test).
10. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of each of the output
parameters is as shown below.
"
NOTE
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
BATT CH NORM 1
ON
BATT CH NORM 2
OFF
AC PWR NORM
ON
MAINS OK
ON
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
NON ALM
OFF
LOC CTRL
ON
MAINT
OFF
PRI ALM
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
Checking for Normal Operation

When setting up the DME for normal operation, it may be necessary to wait up
to 10 seconds (90 seconds for ident) for normal operation to commence from
the last action which initiated the normal operation.
3.3.18.2 Primary Fault

This test involves generating a primary fault, and then monitoring the sequence of
events following this action.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.18.1 steps 8
to 10.
SPACING (REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on earlier modules) switch (to enable
this switch to be restored to its original position at the completion of this test).
3. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY ALARM
SPACING on the receiver video through 4 to five positions. This alarm delay time
should be 10 1 seconds.
4. On the CTU, check that the state of the listed CTU indicators is as shown below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
ON
3-112
HA72500
SECTION 3
ALARM REGISTER
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
5. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of the listed output
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
6. On the receiver video, restore switch REPLY PULSE SPACING to its original
position recorded at Section 3.3.18.2 step 2.
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
8. Confirm that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.18.1 steps 8
to 10 (including the status of the output parameters on the RCMS interface
board).
3.3.18.3 Secondary Fault

This test involves generating a secondary fault, and then monitoring the status following
this action.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section3.3.18.1 steps 8
to 10.
2. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of the transponder
subrack.
3. On the monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
NORMAL
OFF
ALARM REGISTER
SECONDARY
ON
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
ON
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
3-113
HA72500
SECTION 3
6. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cable from the 10 dB

attenuator on connector FWD-A of the directional coupler to connector ERP IN
on the rear of the transponder subrack.
board).
3.3.18.4 Recycle Function

This test involves causing a shutdown by generating a primary fault, and then monitoring
the sequence of restart events following this action.
1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.18.1 steps 8
to 10.
3. Cause the DME to shutdown by switching MONITOR OUTPUTS on the monitor
to FAILED and check that the rack shuts down after the selected 10 1 seconds.
be 30 3 seconds.
5. Leaving the MONITOR OUTPUTS switch in the FAILED position, count the total
number should be 3.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
DELAY
ON
SPACING
ON
EFFICIENCY
ON
TX RATE
ON
RF POWER
ON
IDENT
OFF
PULSE SHAPE
ON
ANTENNA
ON
PRIMARY
ON
SECONDARY
ON
MONITOR
OFF
CTU
OFF
3-114
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MON ALM
OFF
PRI ALM
ON
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
10. On the monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.

SELECT MAIN NO 1.
board).
13. On the CTU, press RECYCLE key to turn the RECYCLE indicator off.

1. To provide remote inputs on the RCMS interface board, on the external I/O board
at the rear of the rack, connect the NO (normally open) contacts of 3 pushbutton
switches (through suitable leads) respectively between terminal 1 of terminal
block XB1 (+24V) and:
Terminal 2 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE OFF,
Terminal 4 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE NO 1 ON,
Terminal 6 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE NO 2 ON.
With suitable leads, connect together terminals 1, 3 and 5 of terminal block XB10
and terminal 6 of terminal block XB11 on the external I/O board for GND
common connection.
2. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET key and the
MAINTENANCE key (to turn their associated indicators on).
3. On the RCMS interface board, check that the LOC CTRL and MAINT output
parameters are both in the on state.
4. On the CTU, press the MAINTENANCE key (to turn its associated indicator off)
and the REMOTE key (to turn its associated indicator on).
5. On the RCMS interface board, check that the LOC CTRL output parameter is in
the off state.
6. On the RCMS interface board, momentarily press switch NO 1 ON. Confirm that
the DME is powered up and operating in the normal state of Section 3.3.18.1
steps 8 to 10 (including the status of the output parameters on the RCMS
interface board - except LOC CTRL, which should be off).
7. On the RCMS interface board, momentarily press switch REMOTE OFF. Confirm
that the DME switches off.
3-115
HA72500
SECTION 3
8. On the CTU, press the LOCAL key (to turn its associated indicator on and turn
the REMOTE indicator off).
3.3.19
"
NOTE
Control System - Dual DME

The tests in this section are only to be performed on a dual DME. The tests for
a single DME are in Section 3.3.18.

NORMAL.
to NORMAL.
7. On the RF panel, ensure the ANTENNA RELAY switch is set to NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINTENANCE
OFF
ALL
OFF
MODULES
OFF
ANT RELAY
OFF
AC POWER NORM
ON
BATT CHG 1
ON
BATT CHG 2
ON
BATT LOW
OFF
3-116
HA72500
SECTION 3
test).
11. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of each of the indicated
output parameters is as shown below.
"
NOTE
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
BATT CH NORM 1
ON
BATT CH NORM 2
ON
AC PWR NORM
ON
MAINS OK
ON
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MON ALM
OFF
LOC CTRL
ON
MAINT
OFF
PRI ALM
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
Checking for Normal Operation

When setting up the DME for normal operation, it may be necessary to wait up
to 10 seconds (90 seconds for ident) for normal operation to commence from
the last action which initiated the normal operation.

1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.3.19.1
steps 9 to 11.
2. On both receiver videos, read the position of the REPLY PULSE SPACING
(REPLY PULSE SEPARATION on earlier modules) switch (to enable these
switches to be restored to their original positions at the completion of these
tests).
SPACING on No. 1 receiver video through four to five positions. This alarm delay
time should be 10 1 seconds.
3-117
HA72500
SECTION 3
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
6. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY alarm indicator
on either monitor turning on to the NO 2 ON STATUS indicator on the CTU
turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY PULSE SPACING on
No.2 receiver video through four to five positions. This alarm delay time should
be 10 1 seconds.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
3-118
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
9. On both receiver videos, restore the REPLY PULSE SPACING switches to their
original positions recorded at Section 3.3.19.2 step 2.
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
11. Confirm that the DME is operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.3.19.1
interface board).

this action. (Ensure that the cable connectors to ERP IN at the rear of the two
transponders are able to be distinguished so that they are returned to their correct
connections at the completion of this test.)
steps 9 to 11.
2. Disconnect the input to the ERP IN connector at the rear of No. 1 transponder
subrack. On No. 1 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
Indicators is as shown below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
RF POWER
OFF
SECONDARY
OFF
PRIMARY
OFF
3-119
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
5. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the SECONDARY alarm
indicator on the No. 2 monitor turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator on
the CTU turning off. In response to disconnecting the input to the ERP IN
be 10 1 seconds.
6. On No. 2 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
RF POWER
ON
SECONDARY
ON
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
9. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cables from the power
splitter to connectors ERP IN on the rear of the transponder subracks (ensuring
the original connections are restored) and on the CTU, pressing the following
front panel keys in the specified sequence:
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
3-120
HA72500
SECTION 3
10. Confirm that the DME is operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.3.19.1
interface board).

NORMAL.
to NORMAL.
required):
LOCAL,
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
9. On the CTU, cheek that the state of each of the CTU indicators is as shown
below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
POWER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINTENANCE
OFF
ALL
OFF
MODULES
OFF
ANT RELAY
OFF
AC POWER NORM
ON
BATT CHG 1
ON
BATT CHG 2
ON
BATT LOW
OFF
test).
3-121
HA72500
SECTION 3
11. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of each of the indicated
output - parameters is as shown below.
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
BATT CH NORM 1
ON
BATT CH NORM 2
ON
AC PWR NORM
ON
MAINS OK
ON
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MON ALM
OFF
LOC CTRL
ON
MAINT
OFF
PRI ALM
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF

1. Ensure that the DME is operating in the No.2 normal state of Section 3.3.19.4
steps 9 to 11.
SPACING on No.2 receiver video through four to five positions. This alarm delay
time should be 10 1 seconds.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
3-122
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
5. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the PRIMARY alarm indicator
on either monitor turning on to the NO 1 ON STATUS indicator on the CTU
turning off - in response to turning rotary switch REPLY PULSE SPACING on
No.1 receiver video through four to five positions. This alarm delay time should
be 10 1 seconds.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
8. On both the receiver videos, restore switches REPLY PULSE SPACING to their
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
3-123
HA72500
SECTION 3
10. Confirm that the DME is operating in the No.2 normal state of Section 3.3.19.4
interface board).

this action.
steps 9 to 11.
indicators is as shown below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
RF POWER
OFF
SECONDARY
OFF
PRIMARY
OFF
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
ON
TRANSFER
OFF
5. Using a stopwatch, measure the time period from the SECONDARY alarm
indicator on the No.1 monitor turning on to the NO 2 ON STATUS indicator on
the CTU turning off - in response to disconnecting the input to the ERP IN
be 10 1 seconds.
6. On No.1 monitor, check that the RF POWER indicator is off.
3-124
HA72500
SECTION 3
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
RF POWER
ON
SECONDARY
ON
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
9. Restore normal operation by reconnecting the coaxial cables from the power
splitter to connectors ERP IN on the rear of the transponder subracks (ensuring
the original connections are restored) and on the CTU, pressing the following
front panel keys in the specified sequence:
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
interface board).

MAINTENANCE to select Maintenance mode on,
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
3-125
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. Check that the state of the listed CTU indicators is as shown below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINTENANCE
ON
ALARM REGISTER
ALL
OFF
TEST
MODULES
OFF
STATUS
3. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of the indicated output
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
ON
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINT
ON
PRI ALM
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
4. On No.2 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED. Wait at least 20

seconds and check that the operating state of the DME has not changed from
that of steps 2 and 3 except MODULES TEST indicator on the CTU is on.
5. On No.2 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL. Check that
MODULES TEST indicator on the CTU is off.
"
NOTE
Allowing for Ident Power Up Alarm Delay

Ensure that step 6 is not commenced before at least 90 seconds have elapsed
from completion of step 1. (This ensures that the 90 second ident alarm delay
has timed out and no faults on the monitors are rejected.)
6. On No. 1 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED and check that No. 1
transponder shuts down after the selected 10 1 seconds.
3-126
HA72500
SECTION 3
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
ON
SHUTDOWN
ON
MAINTENANCE
ON
DELAY
ON
SPACING
ON
EFFICIENCY
ON
TX RATE
ON
RF POWER
ON
IDENT
ON
PULSE SHAPE
ON
ANTENNA
ON
PRIMARY
ON
SECONDARY
ON
MODULES
ON
TEST
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MON ALM
OFF
MAINT
ON
PRI ALM
ON
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
ON
9. On No.1 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.

SELECT MAIN NO 2.
3-127
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. Check that the state of the listed CTU indicators is as shown below.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINTENANCE
ON
ALARM REGISTER
ALL
OFF
TEST
MODULES
OFF
STATUS
3. On the RCMS interface board, check that the state of the indicated output
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
ON
SHUTDOWN
OFF
MAINT
ON
PRI ALM
OFF
SEC ALM
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
4. On No. 1 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED. Wait at least 20

seconds and check that the operating state of the DME has not changed from
that of steps 2 and 3 except MODULES TEST indicator on the CTU is on.
5. On No.1 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL. Check that
MODULES TEST indicator on the CTU is off.
"
NOTE
Allowing for Ident Power Up Alarm Delay

Ensure that step6 is not commenced before at least 90 seconds have elapsed
from completion of step 1. (This ensures that the 90 second ident alarm delay
has timed out and no faults on the monitors are rejected.)
6. On No.2 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED and check that No.2
transponder shuts down after the selected 10 1 seconds.
3-128
HA72500
SECTION 3
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
TEST
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MAINTENANCE
ON
DELAY
ON
SPACING
ON
EFFICIENCY
ON
TX RATE
ON
RF POWER
ON
IDENT
ON
PULSE SHAPE
ON
ANTENNA
ON
PRIMARY
ON
SECONDARY
ON
MODULES
ON
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MON ALM
OFF
MAINT
ON
PRI ALM
ON
SEC ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
9. On No.2 monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.

MAINTENANCE to select Maintenance mode off,
SELECT MAIN NO 1.

This test involves causing a transfer and a shutdown by generating a primary fault, and
then monitoring the sequence of restart events following this action.
1. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU off.
3-129
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. Extract the CTU and, on the CTU processor board, set switches 1 and 2 of S2
both to OFF to change the main and standby voting both to OR. Reinstall the
CTU in the CTU subrack.
3. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU on.
steps 9 to 11.
seconds.
be 30 3 seconds.
number should be 3.
10. Check that the rack then remains shut down.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MON ALM
OFF
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
3-130
HA72500
SECTION 3
14. On both receiver videos, restore switches REPLY PULSE SPACING to their
SELECT MAIN NO 2.
interface board).

steps 9 to 11.
seconds.
be 30 3 seconds.
number should be 3.
7. Check that the rack then remains shut down.
REQUIRED
STATE
INDICATOR
STATUS
ALARM REGISTER
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
SPACING
ON
PRIMARY
ON
3-131
HA72500
SECTION 3
INDICATOR NAME
REQUIRED
STATE
NO 1 ON
OFF
NO 2 ON
OFF
SHUTDOWN
ON
MON ALM
OFF
PRI ALM
ON
NORMAL
OFF
TRANSFER
OFF
11. On both receiver videos, restore switches REPLY PULSE SPACING to their
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
interface board).
14. On the CTU, press RECYCLE key to turn the RECYCLE indicator off.
3.3.19.11 Hot/Cold Standby

1. On the power distribution panel, switch circuit breaker CTU off. Extend the CTU
using two Eurocard extenders. Switch circuit breaker CTU on.
2. Operate the DME in the No. 1 normal state of Section 3.3.19.1 steps 9 to 11.
POWER ON indicator is off.
5. On the CTU processor board, set switch S2:4 to OFF to change from COLD
standby to WARM standby operation.
POWER ON indicator is on.
9. On the CTU processor board, set switch S2:4 to ON to change from WARM
standby back to COLD standby operation

1. To provide remote inputs on the RCMS interface board, on the external I/O board
at the rear of the rack, connect the NO (normally open) contacts of three
3-132
HA72500
SECTION 3
pushbutton switches (through suitable leads) respectively between terminal 1 of

terminal block XB1 (+24V) and:
Terminal 2 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE OFF,
Terminal 4 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE NO 1 ON,
Terminal 6 of terminal block XB10 for REMOTE NO 2 ON.
With suitable leads, connect together terminals 1, 3 and 5 of terminal block XB10
and terminal 6 of terminal block XB11 on the external I/O board for GND
common connection.
2. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET key.
the on state.
4. On the CTU, press the REMOTE key (to turn its associated indicator on).
the off state.
the DME is powered up and operating in the No. 1 normal state of Section
3.3.19.1 steps 9 to 11 (including the status of the output parameters on the
RCMS interface board - except that BATT CHG 2 on the CTU and BATT CH
NORM 2 and LOC CTRL on the RCMS interface board are off).
the DME is powered up and operating in the No.2 normal state of Section
3.3.19.4 steps 9 to 11 (including the status of the output parameters on the
RCMS interface board - except that BATT CHG 2 on the CTU and BATT CH
NORM 2 and LOC CTRL on the RCMS interface board are off).
10. On the CTU, press the LOCAL key (to turn its associated indicator on and turn
the REMOTE indicator off).
3.3.20
Rack Current Drain
1. Operate the DME in its normal state (see Section 3.3.18.1 for a single DME, or
Section 3.3.19.1 for a dual DME).
2. Measure the rack current drain from the AC power supply. It should be 6
amperes for a single DME and not more than 7 amperes for a dual DME.
MAINTENANCE key (to turn its associated indicator on),
SELECT MAIN NO 1
4. On the CTU, select Ch.1 monitoring. While holding TI RATE, 10 kHz pressed (to
produce maximum reply rate), measure the rack current drain from the AC power
supply. It should be not more than 12 amperes for a single DME and not more
than 13 amperes for a dual DME.
3-133
HA72500
SECTION 3
5. On the CTU, press the MAINTENANCE key (to turn its associated indicator off).
Confirm that the DME is operating in the normal state of step 1.
3.3.21
Tidy Up
1. Operate the DME in its normal state (see Section 3.3.18.1 for a single DME, or
Section 3.3.19.1 for a dual DME).
2. Using the CTU parameter measurement facility, measure the following
parameters and ensure that they are within the specified limits. For a dual DME,
ensure measurements from both monitoring systems are within the limits, firstly
with the system operating with No. 1 as main (as in Section 3.3.19.1), then with
No.2 as main (as in Section 3.3.19.4).
PARAMETER
NOMINAL
VALUE
LIMITS
UNITS
DELAY
50.0
+0.2
SPACING
12.0
+0.1
EFFNCY
95
>80
TX RATE
945
+10
Hz
RF POWER
1200
+100

3. On the CTU press SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET to turn the DME off.
4. Remove all test connections and fixtures except:
a. 10 dB attenuators connected to connectors TI-1 REPLY DET (and TI-2
REPLY DET for a dual DME) on the RF panel.
b. On a single DME, coaxial cable connected from 10 dB attenuator on TI-1
REPLY DET to connector FWD-B on the directional coupler.
c. On a dual DME, coaxial cables connected from 10 dB attenuators on TI-1
REPLY DET and TI-2 REPLY DET to connectors FWD-D and FWD-B
respectively on No.2 directional coupler.
d. 50 ohms termination(s) connected to connectors REV-A on the directional
coupler(s).
e. 10 dB attenuator connected to connector FWD-A on the directional coupler
(No.2 directional coupler on the dual DME).
f.
On a single DME, coaxial cable from connector FWD-C on the directional

coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS.
g. On a dual DME, coaxial cable from connectors FWD-C and FWD-E on No.2
directional coupler to TI-2 TEST INTRGS and TI-1 TEST INTRGS
respectively.
5. On the power distribution panel, switch all circuit breakers off.
3.3.22
Y-channel Operation
The following changes are applicable when a DME is to be used on a Y-channel.

Compared with the more common X-channel settings, a Y-channel has a different reply
delay setting, and a different pulse spacing for interrogate and reply pulse pairs.
The numbers below refer to the relevant paragraphs in this section of the handbook:
3-134
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.3.3
Module Presets
3.3.3.4
Set switches S4, ENCODER MODE, and S5, DECODER MODE, to the Y
position.
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S1
Beacon Delay, Coarse
S2
Beacon Delay, Fine
S3
Reply Pulse Spacing
3.3.3.7
Set switch S4, MODE, to the Y position.

3.3.3.8
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S5
Reply Gate Delay, Coarse
S6
Reply Gate Delay, Fine
Set preset switch S12, DELAY LOWER LIMIT SET, for 55.5 microseconds, and
switch S13, SPACING LOWER LIMIT SET, for 29.5 microseconds, as shown in
the following figure:
DELAY LOWER LIMIT SET, S12 55.5 microseconds
1
9 10
ON
OFF
SPACING LOWER LIMIT SET, S13 29.5 microseconds

1
9 10
ON
OFF
Y-CHANNEL SETTINGS
3.3.5.7
1

For Y channel, the spacing between the detected pulses shall be
36.0+/-0.1 usec.

2
3.3.9.1
For Y channel, the displayed pulse spacing shall be 30.0+/-0.2 usec.
RF Output Alignment
3-135
HA72500
12
SECTION 3
For Y channel, the space between the two pulses shall be 20+/-1 usec.

1
3
For Y channel, the spacing between the half-amplitude points on the leading
edge of the pulses shall be 30.0+/-0.1 usec.
For Y channel, the CTU displayed pulse spacing shall be 30.0+/-0.1 usec.

2
For Y channel, set the receiver video BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE,
controls to give a displayed delay as near as possible to 56.0+/-0.1 usec. The
set value becomes the Reference Delay for the remainder of this test.

2
For Y channel, the Reply Delay displayed on the CTU, and the Reply Delay
measured on the oscilloscope, shall be 56.0+/-0.2 usec. These two values
shall be within 0.1 usec of each other.

For Y channel, set the BEACON DELAY, COARSE and FINE, controls to give the
following values, for each of the steps indicated:
4.
55.5 usec
5.
Less than 55.5 usec
6.
56.5 usec
7.
8.
56.3 usec
9.
55.7 to 56.3 usec
10. 55.7 usec

For Y channel, set the REPLY PULSE SPACING control to give the following
values, for each of the steps indicated:
3.
4.
Less than 29.4 usec
5.
6.
7.
8.
29.7 to 12.3 usec
9.

PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay; Lower
55.5 to 55.6
usec
Delay; Upper
56.5 to 56.6
usec
Spacing; Lower
29.4 to 29.5
usec
Spacing; Upper
30.4 to 30.5
usec
3-136
HA72500
2
3.3.21
2
SECTION 3
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay
55.9 to 56.1
usec
Spacing
29.9 to 30.1
usec
Tidy Up
PARAMETER
VALUE RANGE
UNIT
Delay
55.8 to 56.2
usec
Spacing
29.9 to 30.1
usec
3-137
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4
LRU PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
3.4.1
Introduction
3.4.1.1
Definition and Scope
A line replaceable unit is defined as the lowest-order subassembly that should be

replaced during field maintenance to restore an equipment to service.
This section describes, for each line replaceable unit within the LDB-102 DME, the
procedure to be followed to check the operational performance and characteristics of the
unit. Such tests may typically be performed either to determine the degree of
serviceability of a suspected faulty unit or to check the performance characteristics of a
unit following repair.
All the tests and procedures within this section are designed to apply only with the two
following prerequisite conditions:
a. That the unit to be tested is mounted in place of the existing equivalent unit in an
operational equipment rack used as a test bed. The Depot Test Facility type
3A72500, is specially designed for this purpose.
b. The supporting test equipment nominated for each procedure (and detailed in a
consolidated list in Section E.3) or items having equivalent performance
characteristics is available.
3.4.1.2
List of Procedures
The major assemblies and subassemblies of the LDB-102 DME are shown in two lists
below. The first list (Table 3-1) is arranged in numerical type number sequence; the
second list (Table 3-2) shows the equipment assembly/subassembly configuration for
those assemblies which have subordinate subassemblies and is arranged in numerical
order of module. Both lists show the procedures which apply to each assembly/
subassembly. Some higher-order assemblies may consist of two or more subassemblies
which are themselves line replaceable units; in the second list, the section/s in which
applicable test procedures appear are shown against each item.
3.4.1.3
DME Rack Operation
The LRU test procedures in this section require the availability of a fully functional DME
rack, operating into a dummy load. For the operation and configuration of the rack, refer
to the following sections:
a. General operating instructions:
Section 3.1.
b. Module internal presets:
Section 3.3.
c. Preliminary check and setup:
Sections 3.4.
When these procedures are performed on a Depot Test Facility, type 3A72500, refer to
Appendix K for a description of the depot test facility and operating instructions specific
to it.
3-138
HA72500
Table 3-1
SECTION 3
Numerical List of Line Replaceable Units
ASSEMBLY/SUBASSEMBLY
Type No.
1A69737
1A69755
2A69755
1A69873
3A71130
1A72510
1A72511
1A72512
1A72514
2A72514
1A72515
1A72516
2A72516
1A72517
1A72518
1A72519
1A72520
2A72520
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72525
1A72526
1A72530
1A72531
1A72532
1A72533
1A72534
1A72535
1A72536
1A72537
1A72540
1A72541
1A72542
1A72546
1A72547
2A72547
1A72549
2A72549
1A72550
1A72552
1A72553
1A72555
1A72557
SECTION
Name
Attenuator
Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
250W RF Amplifier
AC Power Supply
Monitor Module
Main PWB Assembly. Monitor Module
Peak Power Monitor
Test Interrogator
Test Interrogator (Modified)
Main PWB Assembly, Test Interrogator
RF Generator
RF Generator (Modified)
RF Filter
Modulator and Detector
Reply Detector
Receiver Video
Receiver Video (Modified)
Main PWB Assembly, Receiver Video
RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
Transponder Power Supply
Main PWB Assembly, Transponder Power Supply
Transmitter Driver
Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly
Exciter
Medium Power Driver
Power Modulation Amplifier
1kW RF Power Amplifier
Power Divider
Power Combiner
1kW PA Power Supply
Control and Status PWB Assembly
DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly
Preselector Filter
RF Panel PWB Assembly - Single DME
RF Panel PWB Assembly - Dual DME
Power Distribution Panel - Single DME
Power Distribution Panel - Dual DME
Control and Test Unit
CTU Processor PWB Assembly
CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly
RCMS Interface PWB Assembly
External I/O PWB Assembly
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.12
3.4.13
3.4.14
3.4.15
3.4.16
3.4.16
3.4.17
3.4.18
3.4.19
3.4.20
3.4.21
3.4.22
3.4.23
3.4.24
3.4.25
3.4.26
3.4.27
3.4.28
3.4.29
3.4.30
3.4.31
3.4.32
3.4.33
3.4.34
3.4.35
3.4.36
3.4.37
3.4.38
3.4.39
3.4.40
3.4.41
3.4.42
3.4.43
VERSION
USED ON
1A
2A
3A
3-139
HA72500
Table 3-2
SECTION 3
Hierarchical List of Line Replaceable Units
Type No.
1A72510
1A72511
1A72512
1A72514
1A72515
1A72516
1A69737
1A72518
1A72519
2A72514
1A72515
2A72516
1A69737
1A72518
1A72519
1A72520
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72517
2A72520
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72517
1A72525
1A72526
1A72530
1A72531
1A72532
1A72533
1A72534
1A72535
1A72536
1A72537
1A69873
1A72534
1A72540
1A72541
1A72542
1A72545
1A72546
1A72547
1A69755
2A72545
1A72546
2A72547
1A69755
2A69755
SECTION
Name
Monitor Module
Main PWB Assembly, Monitor Module
Peak Power Monitor
Test Interrogator
RF Generator
Attenuator
Reply Detector
Attenuator
Reply Detector
Receiver Video
RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
RF Filter
RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
RF Filter
Transmitter Driver
Exciter
Medium Power Driver
Power Divider
Power Combiner
250W RF Amplifier
1kW PA Power Supply
RF Panel - Single DME
Preselector Filter
Directional Coupler
RF Panel - Dual DME
Preselector Filter
RF Panel PWI3 Assembly - Dual DME
Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.2
3.4.14
3.4.15
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.2
3.4.14
3.4.15
3.4.16
3.4.17
3.4.18
3.4.19
3.4.20
3.4.13
3.4.16
3.4.17
3.4.18
3.4.19
3.4.20
3.4.13
3.4.21
3.4.22
3.4.23
3.4.24
3.4.25
3.4.26
3.4.27
3.4.28
3.4.29
3.4.30
3.4.5
3.4.27
3.4.31
3.4.32
3.4.33
Not LRU
3.4.34
3.4.35
3.4.3
Not LRU
3.4.34
3.4.36
3.4.3
3.4.4
VERSION
USED ON
1A
2A
3A
3-140
HA72500
SECTION 3
Type No.
3A71130
1A72549
2A72549
1A72550
1A72552
1A72553
1A72555
1A72557
Name
AC Power Supply
SECTION
3.4.6
3.4.37
3.4.38
3.4.39
3.4.40
3.4.41
3.4.42
3.4.43
VERSION
USED ON
1A
2A
3A
The following items do not require tuning and are not repairable:
a. Coaxial Changeover Relay (in RF Panel).
b. Circulators (in RF Panel and 1kW Power Amplifier).
3.4.1.4
Test Equipment
A complete list of the test equipment and accessories required to conduct the range of
test and alignment procedures for LRUs as specified in this section is contained in
Section E.3. That list gives the required performance characteristics for each item of test
equipment, and nominates a notional type (or types) which would be suitable for the
range of procedures specified. The procedure for each LRU gives a summary list of test
equipment items required.
It is assumed that the extenders, cables and other accessories contained in the DME
Test and Accessory Kits types 1A72561-1A72564 (refer Appendix F) are available for all
procedures; items contained in these kits are not repeated in the summary lists of items
for each procedure.
3.4.1.5
Common Procedures
The equipment setup requirements detailed in this section for return loss testing and
insertion loss testing are common to the testing procedures for a number of LRUs. To
avoid unnecessary repetition of detail, these are located in this common section, and
referred to as necessary from within individual procedures. The test equipment required
for these tests is listed in the sections detailing the individual procedures.
3.4.1.5.1
Return Loss Testing Setup
The return loss test method uses a signal generator, spectrum analyser and directional
coupler to measure the power reflected back from the unit under test. Set up the
equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 and set the signal generator output to a CW level of
+10 dBm.
Set the spectrum analyser controls to:
Centre frequency:
Sweep time:
Span:
Amplitude:
Resolution bandwidth:
Video bandwidth:
1100 MHz
10 milliseconds/division
40 MHz/division (50)
10 dB/division
1 MHz
10 kHz
3-141
HA72500
Figure 3-2
SECTION 3
Standard Return Loss Test Setup
Connect the short circuit to the return loss port. Calibrate the test equipment for a
reference return loss of 0 dB over the range 950-1250 MHz by tuning the signal
generator over the band and noting the envelope of the response peaks on the spectrum
analyser.
Remove the short circuit and connect a 50 ohms termination to the return loss port.
Measure the return loss over the range 950-1250 MHz. The worst measured value (that
is, the value of the return loss which is the least number of dB below the 0 dB reference see the typical display shown in Figure 3-3) must be greater than 27 dB.
Figure 3-3
3.4.1.5.2
Typical Display for Return Loss Test
Insertion Loss Testing Setup
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-4, but with the SMA back-to-back adaptor in
place of the unit under test. The 10 dB attenuators should be placed as close to the unit
under test as possible (they ensure a well-defined impedance at the connection points to
the unit under test). Set the signal generator output to a level of +10 dBm and the
spectrum analyser to the 2 dB/division amplitude range.
3-142
HA72500
Figure 3-4
SECTION 3
Standard Insertion Loss Test Setup
Calibrate the test equipment for a reference insertion loss of 0 dB over the frequency
range 950-1250 MHz by tuning the signal generator over the band and noting the
envelope of the response peaks on the spectrum analyser display. (If the variation of the
level meter reading over the frequency band is less than or equal to 0.2 dB peak-topeak, calibrate the test equipment to give a reference response within 0.1 over the
frequency band. It the variation of the level meter reading over the frequency band is
greater than 0.2 dB peak-to-peak, correction factors will have to be applied for all
frequencies of interest).
When the expected insertion loss is of the order of 30 dB, greater precision may be
obtained by calibrating the test equipment with a 30 dB attenuator of known accuracy.
For this procedure, set the spectrum analyser to 10 dB/division amplitude range and
insert the 30 dB attenuator in place of the unit under test. Calibrate the test equipment
for a reference insertion loss of 30 dB over the frequency range, as described above.
Figure 3-5
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
Typical Display for Insertion Loss Test
Attenuator 1A69737
Test Equipment
Power supply, 15 volts.

Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
Directional coupler.
Attenuator, miniature, 30 dB.
Attenuator, miniature, 10 dB: Qty 2.
Resistor, 4.75 kilohm.
Resistor, 475 ohms.
Coaxial cables and adaptors.
3-143
HA72500
3.4.2.2
SECTION 3
Return Loss Check
Set up the attenuator under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.1.

Connect the RF input connector XMA on the switched attenuator, in place of the 50
ohms termination, to the return loss port.
Connect the power supply to the switched attenuator through the resistor divider as
shown in Figure 3-6. Do not switch on.
Connect the matched load (50 ohms) to the RF output connector XFA on the switched
attenuator. Measure the return loss over the frequency range 1000 to 1200 MHz; this
should not be less than 15 dB.
Figure 3-6
3.4.2.3
Switched Attenuator Test Configuration
Insertion Loss and Attenuation Check
Set up the attenuator under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2

Connect the attenuator under test between the 10 dB attenuators. Measure the insertion
loss of the switched attenuator over the frequency range 1000 to 1200 MHz. This should
not be greater than 1 dB.
Set the power supply to 15.0 0.1 volts and switch on. The insertion loss of the
attenuator should remain unchanged unless resistors R1 and R2 are already fitted.
Switch off the power supply.
If required, the two resistors R1 and R2 must now be chosen so that a 15 dB drop in the
RF output level occurs when the power supply is switched on with the respect to the
level when the supply is off. The total value of the R1 and R2 required is about 700
ohms and two standard value resistors are to be fitted to give 15 0.5 dB attenuation
difference.
Measure the attenuation difference, from off state to on state, over the frequency range
1000 to 1200 MHz; it should be 15.0 0.5 dB.
3.4.3
3.4.3.1

Test Equipment
Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
Attenuator miniature, 30 dB.
3-144
HA72500
3.4.3.2
"
NOTE
SECTION 3
Return Loss Check
It is possible, during repair, that internal resistor pills may become misaligned; if
the results for the FWD-B and FWD-C measurements are outside the specified
limits, it will be necessary to dis-assemble the coupler and re-assemble it with
tabs accurately aligned with tracks.
Set up the coupler under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.1.

Connect the connectors of the coupler under test one at a time, as shown in the table
below, in place of the 50 ohms termination, to the return loss port of the test setup.
Connect 50 ohms terminations to the unused ports listed in this table. Measure the
return loss for each port over the frequency range 950-1220 MHz; this should be greater
than 22 dB.
MEASURE RETURN
LOSS AT PORT
TERMINATE THESE PORTS

WITH 50 OHMS
IN
3.4.3.3
OUT
FWD-A
REV-A
OUT
FWD-A
FWD-B
OUT
FWD-A
FWD-C
OUT
FWD-A
OUT
IN
REV-A
FWD-A
IN
REV-A
Insertion Loss Check
Set up the coupler under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2 but with the SMA backto-back female adaptor in place of the coupler under test. The 10 dB attenuators should
be placed as close to the unit under test as possible (they ensure a well defined
impedance at the connection points to the coupler under test).
Set the oscillator output to a level of +10 dBm and the spectrum analyser to 2 dB/division
amplitude range.
range 950-1220 MHz.
Remove the SMA back-to-back female adaptor from the test setup and connect the
coupler under test in its place as shown in the table below. Connect 50 ohms
terminations to the unused ports listed in this table. Measure the worst insertion loss
over the frequency range 950-1220 MHz (that is, the largest number of dB below the
reference level). The measured value should be less than 0.4 dB.
PORT TO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
PORT TO
SPECTRUM
ANALYSER
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
3.4.3.4

WITH 50 OHMS
FWD-A
FWD-B
FWD-C
REV-A
Coupling Ratio Check
The test method is the same as that used for Section 3.4.3.3 except that the test
equipment is calibrated at an insertion loss of 30 dB. Since the nominal value of the
forward coupling ratios of the coupler under test is 30 dB, this gives improved accuracy
of measurement compared with calibration at an insertion loss of 0 dB.
3-145
HA72500
SECTION 3
Set up the equipment as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2, but with the 30 dB attenuator
and the SMA back-to-back female adaptor in place of the coupler under test. The 10 dB
attenuators should be placed as close to the unit under test as possible (they ensure a
well defined impedance at the connection points to the coupler under test). Set the
oscillator output to a level of +10 dBm and the spectrum analyser to 10 dB/division
amplitude range.
Calibrate the test equipment for a 0 dB reference over the frequency range 950-1220
MHz, and record the calibrated value of the 30 dB attenuator.
Remove the 30 dB attenuator and the SMA back-to-back female adaptor from the test
setup and connect the coupler under test in its place as shown in the table below.
smallest (most negative) and largest (most positive) values of the relative response over
the frequency range 950-1220 MHz. (Responses below the 0 dB reference line are to be
treated as positive; those above the 0 dB reference line to be treated as negative.)
Add the measured response values to the recorded calibrated value of the 30 dB
attenuator. The added values should be in the ranges listed in the table.
PORT TO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
PORT TO
SPECTRUM
ANALYSER
IN
FWD-A (1)
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.8
IN
FWD-B
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
FWD-C
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
REV-A
OUT
FWD-A
15 dB below
FWD-A (1)
OUT
REV-A (2)
IN
FWD-A
30.0 0.8
OUT
FWD-A
IN
REV-A
15 dB below
REV-A (2)
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
TERMINATE PORTS WITH

50 OHMS
LIMITS (dB)
OUT
FWD-B
IN
REV-A
45.0
OUT
FWD-C
IN
REV-A
45.0

Test Equipment
Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
3.4.4.2
"
NOTE
Return Loss Check

It is possible, during repair, that internal resistor pills may become misaligned; if
the results for the FWD-B through FWD-E measurements are outside the
specified limits, it will be necessary to dis-assemble the coupler and reassemble it with tabs accurately aligned with tracks.
Set up the coupler under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.1.

Connect the connectors of the coupler under test one at a time, as shown in the table
below, in place of the 50 ohms termination, to the return loss port of the test setup.
return loss over the frequency range 950-1220 MHz; this should be greater than 22 dB.
3-146
HA72500
SECTION 3
MEASURE RETURN
LOSS AT PORT

WITH 50 OHMS
IN
3.4.4.3
OUT
FWD-A
REV-A
OUT
FWD-A
FWD-B
OUT
FWD--A
FWD-C
OUT
FWD-A
FWD-D
OUT
FWD-A
FWD-E
OUT
FWD-A
OUT
IN
REV-A
FWD-A
IN
REV-A
Insertion Loss Check
Set up the coupler under test as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2 but with the SMA backto-back female adaptor in place of the coupler under test. The 10 dB attenuators should
be placed as close to the unit under test as possible (they ensure a well defined
impedance at the connection points to the coupler under test).
Set the oscillator output to a level of +10 dBm and the spectrum analyser to 2 dB/division
amplitude range.
range 950-1220 MHz.
Remove the SMA back-to-back female adaptor from the test setup and connect the
coupler under test in its place as shown in the table below. Connect 50 ohms
terminations to the unused ports listed in this table. Measure the worst insertion loss
over the frequency range 950-1220 MHz (i.e., the largest number of dB below the
reference level). The measured value should be less than 0.4 dB.
PORT TO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
PORT TO
SPECTRUM
ANALYSER
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
3.4.4.4

WITH 50 OHMS
FWD-A
FWD-B
FWD-C
FWD-D
FWD-E
REV-A
Coupling Ratio Check
The test method is the same as that used for Section 3.4.3.3 except that the test
equipment is calibrated at an insertion loss of 30 dB. Since the nominal value of the
forward coupling ratios of the coupler under test is 30 dB, this gives improved accuracy
of measurement compared with calibration at an insertion loss of 0 dB.
Set up the equipment as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2, but with the 30 dB attenuator
and the SMA back-to-back female adaptor in place of the coupler under test. The 10 dB
attenuators should be placed as close to the unit under test as possible (they ensure a
well defined impedance at the connection points to the coupler under test). Set the
oscillator output to a level of +10 dBm and the spectrum analyser to 10 dB/division
amplitude range.
Calibrate the test equipment for a 0 dB reference over the frequency range 950-1250
MHz and record the calibrated value of the 30 dB attenuator.
Remove the 30 dB attenuator and the SMA back-to-back female adaptor from the test
setup and connect the coupler under test in its place as shown in the table below.
3-147
HA72500
SECTION 3
smallest (most negative) and largest (most positive) values of the relative response over
the frequency range 950-1220 MHz. (Responses below the 0 dB reference line are to be
treated as positive; those above the 0 dB reference line to be treated as negative.)
Add the measured response values to the recorded calibrated value of the 30 dB
attenuator. The added values should be in the ranges listed in the table following.
PORT TO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
PORT TO
SPECTRUM
ANALYSER
IN
FWD-A (1)
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.8
IN
FWD-B
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
FWD-C
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
FWD-D
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
FWD-E
OUT
REV-A
30.0 0.5
IN
REV-A
OUT
FWD-A
15 dB below
FWD-A (1)
OUT
REV-A (2)
IN
FWD-A
30.0 0.8
OUT
FWD-A
IN
REV-A
15 dB below
REV-A (2)
OUT
FWD-B
IN
REV-A
45.0
OUT
FWD-C
IN
REV-A
45.0
OUT
FWD-D
IN
REV-A
45.0
OUT
FWD-E
IN
REV-A
45.0
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
TERMINATE PORTS WITH

50 OHMS
LIMITS (dB)
250W RF Amplifier 1A69873

Test Equipment
Oscilloscope.
Attenuator, medium, 10 dB; Qty 2.
Attenuator, power, 30 dB.
Attenuator, medium, 3 dB.
Peak power meter and sensor.
Detector; Qty 2.
Resistor, 4.75 kilohm.
Calibration link (semi-flexible cable, 100 mm long, SMA(F) to SMA(F)).
3.4.5.2
Setup
Remove the cover from the 1kW power amplifier in the depot test facility and arrange an
insulator (such as a sheet of cardboard) to cover the power combiner board. The RF test
equipment and the amplifier under test can lay on top of the heat sink or cardboard, as
convenient.
Remove the transmitter driver module and connect it to the rack on the module extender
frame.
The amplifier under test is to be powered from the capacitor bank on the underside of
the power combiner. The red lead attached to the amplifier is the positive supply
connection, and the quick-connect terminal should be inserted in place of one of the
leads supplying a 250W amplifier in the 1kW power amplifier in the depot test facility.
3-148
HA72500
SECTION 3
The earth return must be a very short, low impedance link from the body of the amplifier
under test to the heatsink of the power amplifier.
For the RF connection, loosen and remove the N-type coaxial plug on the semirigid
cable from the INPUT connector on the power amplifier heatsink and reconnect it, via a
N-type elbow, to the directional coupler (or 6 dB attenuator for calibration).
3.4.5.3
Calibration Procedure
Arrange the test setup as shown in Figure 3-7 with the calibration link connected in
circuit instead of the amplifier which is to be tested. Remove the 10 dB attenuator at the
peak power sensor, and connect the sensor directly to the 30 dB attenuator. Connect the
6 dB attenuator before the directional coupler.
Set the depot test facility transmit frequency to 1213 MHz.
Set the switches in the transmitter driver as follows:
ALC LOOP
ALC
MED COLL
(S2)
(S3)
(S4)
to OPEN
to VIDEO
to DC.
Switch on the mains to all the test equipment, with the depot test facility transmitter
driver DRIVER DC POWER switch set to OFF.
Set the oscilloscope sweep time to 1 microsecond per division and trigger the
oscilloscope from the receiver video TRIGS TO MODULATOR front panel test jack.
On the peak power meter, set the correction to that stated on the correction table for
frequencies up to 2 GHz. Set the reading offset to 30 dB and the range switch to 100
mW. Set the peak power meter to measure in DIRECT mode.
Reverse the directional coupler, end for end, using two coaxial adaptors (male-male and
female-female), keep the two detectors attached to the same connectors.
Rotate the transmitter driver POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) preset fully counterclockwise (this is located on the printed wiring board).
Connect the reverse detector, using the 4.75 kilohm resistor in parallel, to the
oscilloscope channel 2.
Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to NORMAL and check the
'reflected' pulse of channel 2 and the 'output' pulse via the peak power meter.
Adjust the POWER MOD AMP DC preset to give 10 watts on the power meter, and then
note the 'reflected' pulse amplitude This becomes a reference level which represents 10
watts reflected power.
Switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
Rotate the directional coupler to its original direction.
Set the peak power meter to the COMPARE mode.
Adjust the COMPARE LEVEL controls on the peak power meter to give a meter reading
which corresponds to 50.0 watts into the 30 dB attenuator. The actual meter reading will
depend on the exact attenuation of the 30 dB attenuator, and it is important that its
calibration be taken into account when deriving the meter reading. As an example, the
figures below show the correct meter reading for various values of attenuation:
P input (watts)
ATTENUATION (dB)
P meter (watts)
50.0
29.7
53.6
50.0
29.8
52.4
3-149
HA72500
SECTION 3
50.0
29.9
51.2
50.0
30.0
50.0
50.0
30.1
48.9
50.0
30.2
47.8
50.0
30.3
46.7
With the meter set to the appropriate value, there will be a horizontal trace on
oscilloscope channel 1, which represents a true 50.0 watts into the 30 dB attenuator.
Remove the 6 dB attenuator from the input to the directional coupler.
CAUTION
The power sensor diode of the peak power meter is easily destroyed, so
check that the 30 dB of attenuation is connected in front of the power
sensor.
Set the transmitter driver POWER MOD AMP DC preset fully counter-clockwise and set
the DRIVER DC POWER switch to NORMAL.
Observe the following:
a. a forward power pulse on channel 1 of the oscilloscope, and
b. a reflected power pulse on channel 2 of the oscilloscope.
Increase the output power using the POWER MOD AMP DC preset on the transmitter
driver printed wiring board until the main body of the pulse lies on the 50.0 watts
horizontal trace on the oscilloscope (that is, ignore any initial spike in the pulse). If the
top of the main body of the pulse slopes, then take an average level.
Check that the voltage on channel 2 of the oscilloscope represents a reflected power of
1 watt or less (this confirms that the system is properly matched). This voltage should be
below 0.316 of the 10 watts reference established above.
Once 50 watts of power is available with less than 1 watt reflected and the pulse width
and repetition rate are correct, measure the output from the FWD detector on the
oscilloscope and record the peak pulse voltage to the nearest 20 mV. This value then
becomes the '50W available' calibration at this frequency. (The detector output may be a
negative-going pulse.)
Switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF. Replace the 10 dB attenuator between the peak
power sensor and the 30 dB attenuator.
3.4.5.4
Amplifier Test Procedure
Arrange the test setup as shown in Figure 3-7, with the amplifier under test in circuit in
place of the SMA calibration link. Recheck that there is a total of 40 dB attenuation
between the amplifier and peak power sensor.
Set the RANGE switch on the peak power meter to 100 mW and the MODE switch to
DIRECT. The reading offset should be switched to 40 dB and the correction set for 2
GHz from the correction table on the sensor.
Connect the oscilloscope to display input (50 watts) power on channel 1 and reflected
power on channel 2 with the graticule line representing 10 watts of reflected power (from
previous calibration). This line is a limit which must not be exceeded by the reflected
power pulse from the amplifier under test.
Set the POWER MOD AMP DC preset on the transmitter driver to minimum (counterclockwise) setting, switch the DRIVER DC POWER to ON, then switch the AMPLIFIER
DC POWER switch on the 1kW PA power supply to ON.
3-150
HA72500
SECTION 3
Check that the supply voltage to the amplifier under test is 50.0 0.5 volts.
Slowly raise the input power from the transmitter driver by adjusting the POWER MOD
AMP DC preset in the clockwise direction, whilst monitoring:
a. output power from the amplifier on the peak power meter, and
b. reflected power from the input of the amplifier on channel 2 of the oscilloscope.
Observe the output from the detector on channel 1 of the oscilloscope and continue to
increase the input signal level whilst continually checking that the reflected power does
not rise above the 10 watts calibration level.
CAUTION
For a normal 250W RF amplifier the power reflected back from its input is
around 1 to 5 watts, so that the power to the reverse detector is around 5
to 25 mW. The object of continually checking on the reflected power is to
avoid destroying the detector diode should a large mismatch be present
for any reason at the input of the 250W RF amplifier.
When the '50W available' calibration point has been reached at the input, measure the
output power on the peak power meter. This must be at least 250 watts peak. Observe
the pulse shape, from the video output of the meter, on channel 1 of the oscilloscope.
On channel 2 of the oscilloscope, measure the input reflected power pulse amplitude.
This must not exceed the 10 watts peak level.
3-151
HA72500
Figure 3-7
SECTION 3
250W Amplifier Test Setup
3-152
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.6
3.4.6.1
Test Equipment
Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Output cables (power connectors, or pair of heavy duty cables).
Variable load resistor network, 0.7 to 30 ohms, to dissipate 900 watts maximum.
3.4.6.2
Setup
Remove the printed circuit board and, referring to the Control Board layout drawing
below, check that the U-links are inserted as follows:
U-LINK
POSITION
OPTION SELECTED
356
402-403
Output low volts alarm
357
404-405
Delayed overvoltage shutdown
358
408-409
24 volts operation
359
411-412
24 volts operation
360
414-415
24 volts operation
361
417-418
24 volts operation
362
420-421
24 volts operation
363
423-424
24 volts operation
364
426-427
24 volts operation
365
429-430
24 volts operation
366
432-433
24 volts operation
367
435-436
Function control
368
438-439
369
441-442
370
444-445
Normal voltage range
371
446-447
Latching overvoltage alarm
372
449-450
Output contactor isolation for overvoltage protection
373
453-454
Contactor control local (normal)
Set the trimpots as follows:

TRIMPOT
SETTING
FLOAT 1
Mid-range
FLOAT 2
Mid-range
BOOST
Mid-range
CURRENT LIMIT
Fully clockwise
H/V SHUTDOWN
Fully clockwise
SHUTDOWN DELAY
Fully anticlockwise
LOW VOLTS ALARM
Fully anticlockwise
Extend the printed circuit board in the power supply under test.
3-153
HA72500
Figure 3-8
SECTION 3
Connections to Alarm Connector TB/3
3-154
HA72500
SECTION 3
Control Board Layout
3-155
HA72500
3.4.6.3
SECTION 3
Output Voltage Tests
Set the function switch to the TEST position.

Set the battery switch to the NO BATTERY position.
Set the output isolate switch to OFF.
Check that the tapping for the mains transformer has been correctly selected and, using
a suitable power cord, connect the unit to a mains outlet.
Turn the POWER ON switch to its ON position, and switch on the power outlet.
Check that there is a click from the relay RL2 (the mains fail relay), that contacts 4 and 5
on the alarm connector TB/3 are short circuit, and that contacts 18 and 19 are open
circuit.
Temporarily set the POWER ON switch to its OFF position, and check that RL2 deenergises, and that now contacts 18 and 19 on TB/3 are short circuit and 19 and 20
open circuit. Restore the power.
Measure the AC voltage between the 0 volts and 240 volts contacts on the TB/1 primary
tap selecting block.
If this voltage is close to 240 volts, use the 0 volts terminal as a reference and check that
the marked voltages are present on the other terminals.
Check that the green POWER ON indicator is lit.
Switch the DC ISOLATOR switch to its ON position, and check that the output contactor
can be clearly heard to operate.
Connect the digital multimeter to the test points below the voltmeter.
The TEST/FLOAT switch must be manually held in the TEST position for this check.
Vary the FLOAT 1 trimpot and check that the TEST voltage may be varied over the
range 18 volts to 32 volts. Set the output to 25 volts on the digital multimeter.
Check that the voltage indicated on the built-in meter is 25.0 0.5 volts.
Set the function switch to FLOAT. Vary the FLOAT 2 trimpot and check that the FLOAT
voltage may be varied over the range 25.0 to 29.0 volts. Set the output to 26.4 volts on
the digital multimeter.
3.4.6.4
Current Limit Adjustment
Set the function switch to the FLOAT position and check that the output is 26.4 volts.
Connect the output test cable to the output, and connect load resistors until a current of
about 35 amperes is flowing.
Adjust the CURRENT LIMIT trimpot until the output current is limited to 31 amperes.
Short-circuit the load, and check that the current does not exceed 31.5 amperes.
Reduce the load to 30 amperes, and check that the output voltage is not less than 26.0
volts measured on the digital multimeter. (It may be necessary to marginally increase the
current limit to meet this requirement, but it must NOT be advanced beyond 31.5
amperes.)
3.4.6.5
Performance Under Load
Reduce the output load to 20 amperes, and check that the output is 26.4 volts.
Remove the load, and check that the rise in output is less than 0.1 volts.
Select the TEST function, and check that the change in output is less than 0.1 volts
when the load is applied.
3-156
HA72500
3.4.6.6
SECTION 3
Transient Response
Set the function switch to FLOAT, and check that the output is 20 amperes at 26.4 volts.
Disconnect the load, and check that the battery switch is set to NO BATTERY.
Connect an oscilloscope across the output, and check the dip in output voltage when the
load is re-applied. Repeat several times, and check that the undershoot is less than 6
volts for a 0-20 amperes current step. Recovery to within 2 volts of the final value must
occur within 200 milliseconds. The typical transient performance is shown as waveform
1 below.
Remove the load, and check the output overshoot transient. Repeat several times, and
check that the overshoot is less than 3 volts for a 20-0 amperes current step. Recovery
to within 1 volt of the final value must occur within 200 milliseconds. The typical transient
performance is shown as waveform 2 above.
Disconnect the output load.
3.4.6.7
Output Ripple
Connect the AC power supply under test in place of the depot test facility AC power
supply.
Set the power supply under test to FLOAT, and check that its output is 26.4 volts.
Switch the depot test facility on with all systems operating.
Connect an oscilloscope across the battery terminals to display the AC ripple
components on the 24 volts supply line.
Measure the 100 Hz ripple component; it should be not more than 0.5 volts peak-topeak.
Disconnect the depot test facility as load on the AC power supply under test. Following
tests use resistor loads.
3.4.6.8
Output Fall Alarm - Low Float Voltage
Set the function switch to the TEST position.

Check that U-link 356 links 402-403 (low volts alarm mode).
Adjust the load to give an output current of about 10 amperes.
Adjust the FLOAT 1 trimpot until the output is 23.0 volts, measured with the digital
multimeter.
3-157
HA72500
SECTION 3
Slowly rotate the LOW VOLT ALARM trimpot in a clockwise direction until the O/P FAIL
indicator lights and relay 123 releases. Check the operation of relay 123 by measuring
the continuity between contacts on the alarm connector TB/3. Contact 12 (common)
should be a short circuit to 13 when the O/P FAIL indicator is extinguished, and short
circuit to 11 when it is lit. Check also that contacts 14 and 15 are short circuit when the
indicator is extinguished, and open circuit when it is lit.
Increase the output voltage with the FLOAT 1 trimpot, and check that the indicator is
extinguished and the relay 123 operated for an output not greater than 24.0 volts.
Check the setting of the alarm limit by again decreasing and then increasing the output.
As the voltage is decreased, the alarm indicator should light for voltages less than 23
volts; as the voltage is increased, the indicator should be extinguished for voltages
greater than 24 volts. Adjust, if necessary, the LOW VOLT ALARM trimpot until this
condition is obtained.
Re-set the TEST (FLOAT 1) output to 25.0 volts.
3.4.6.9
Output Fail Alarm - Charge Fail
Set the function switch to FLOAT, and the battery switch to BATTERY ON.
Adjust the load to give an output current of about 10 amperes.
Change U-link 356 from 402-403 (low volts alarm mode) to 401-402 (charge fail alarm
mode).
Pull out the output fuse (F4) and check that the O/P FAIL indicator lights. Relay 125
should release, and the O/P FUSE indicator should light.
Re-insert the output fuse (F4) and check that both indicators are extinguished.
Restore U-link 356 to the 402-403 position (low volts alarm mode).
Re-set the battery switch to the NO BATTERY position.
3.4.6.10 High Voltage Alarm - Selective Shutdown Mode

Check that U-link 357 links 405-406 (selective overvolts shutdown).
Set the function switch to TEST, and adjust the load until the output current is 10
amperes.
Increase the output to 29.0 volts by adjustment of the FLOAT 1 trimpot.
Slowly rotate the H/V SHUTDOWN trimpot in a counter-clockwise direction until the H/V
SHUTDOWN indicator lights and the output contactor releases. Alarm relay 124 should
also release; operation of this relay may be verified by monitoring the continuity between
contact 9 and 10 on the alarm connector TB/3. These contacts should be open circuit
when the indicator is extinguished, and short circuit when it is lit.
Reduce the output voltage slightly with the FLOAT 1 trimpot, and check that the output
contactor operates, the H/V SHUTDOWN indicator is extinguished, and alarm relay 124
operates. Also check for continuity between contacts 10 and 16 on TB/3.
If the FLOAT 1 voltage is set very close to the alarm limit, the contactor may pull in and
drop out sporadically. This should not happen for outputs below 28.5 volts.
Set the output voltage to 26.4 volts with the FLOAT 1 trimpot.
3.4.6.11 High Voltage Alarm Delay Shutdown Mode

Change U-link 357 to link 404-405 (delay shutdown mode).
3-158
HA72500
SECTION 3
Rapidly increase the output, using the FLOAT 1 trimpot, to greater than 29.0 volts. The
high voltage shutdown should operate after a 1 to 2 seconds time delay.
Reduce the output to below 28.5 volts, and check that the output contactor pulls in and
the H/V ALARM indicator is extinguished.
Set the SHUTDOWN DELAY trimpot fully clockwise, and repeat the above two steps.
The shutdown delay should now be in excess of 10 seconds.
Set the SHUTDOWN DELAY trimpot fully counter-clockwise.
Re-adjust the TEST output to 25.0 volts with the FLOAT 1 trimpot.
3.4.6.12 Fuse Alarm

With the function switch in the FLOAT position set up a load to draw about 10 amperes.
Remove the output fuse F4 and check that the O/P FUSE indicator lights, and that alarm
relay 125 operates. The operation of this relay may be verified by monitoring the
continuity between contacts 7 and 8 on the alarm connector TB/3. These contacts
should be open circuit when the indicator is extinguished, and short circuit when it is lit.
Replace the output fuse (F4) and check that the O/P FUSE indicator is extinguished.
Switch the POWER switch to OFF, and change U-link 368 to link 437-438 (capacitor 8
fuse remote alarm). Remove fuse F2, and switch POWER to ON.
Check that the C1 FUSE indicator lights, and that relay 125 operates, as above,
Switch the POWER to OFF, and after checking that C8 is discharged, re-insert fuse.
Change U-link 368 to link 438-439 (capacitor 8 fuse local alarm).
Change U-link 369 to link 440-441 (capacitor 10 fuse remote alarm).
Remove fuse F9, and switch the POWER to ON.
Check that the C1 FUSE indicator is extinguished, and that the C2 FUSE indicator is lit.
Check that relay 125 has operated.
Switch the POWER to OFF, check that C10 is discharged, and re-insert fuse F9.
Change U-link 369 to 441-442 (capacitor 10 local alarm).
Switch the POWER switch to ON, and check that ail alarm indicators are extinguished,
and that relay 125 is not operated.
3.4.7
3.4.7.1
Monitor Module 1A72510

Test Equipment
Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
3.4.7.2
Alignment
If the LRU alignment procedure has been carried out on the Main PWB Assembly
Monitor 1A72511 and the Peak Power Monitor 1A72512, then no alignment apart from
RF power calibration (see Section 3.4.7.5) is necessary on the Monitor 1A72510.
3.4.7.3
Power Supply Check
The following voltages should be present at the front panel test jacks of the monitor
module:
3-159
HA72500
+5V
+15V
3.4.7.4
SECTION 3
+4.75 volts to +5.25 volts
+14.2 volts to + 15.3 volts.
Peak Power Monitor Check
Place the monitor module in the transponder extender frame.

On the CTU press switches in the following order:
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE OFF
MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), ensure that the following
components and connecting cables have been installed:
a. 50 ohms termination to connector REV-A on the directional coupler.
b. 10 dB attenuator to connector FWD-A on the directional coupler.
c. Coaxial cable from connector FWD-A of the directional coupler to connectors
ERP IN on the rear of the transponder subrack.
On the CTU front panel, press ESC, Ch.1, Param and PwrOut. Check that the measured
output power is in the range 1.1 to 1.3 kW.
Trigger the oscilloscope from the front panel jack TRIGGER on the test interrogator
module. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 to the front panel test jack ERP PULSE on
the monitor module, using AC coupling. Check that the waveform is a pair of Gaussianshaped pulses of amplitude in the range 6.0 to 8.5 volts (see figure below).
Connect the digital voltmeter to XN2:14 on the monitor main board. Check that the DC
voltage is in the range 7.4 to 10.4 volts.
3.4.7.5
RF Power Calibration
Check that the voltage on XT2 of the monitor main board is 2.50 0.01 volts. If it is not,
adjust R87 on the monitor main board until this voltage is achieved.
3.4.7.6
Front Panel Indicator Check
Check that all front panel indicators are lit except PRIMARY, SECONDARY, and SELF
TEST. If any indicators are not lit, refer to LRU alignment and test procedure for the
Main PWB Assembly Monitor Module 1A72511 (see Section 3.4.8).
3-160
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.8
Main PWB Assembly Monitor Module 1A72511
3.4.8.1
Test Equipment
Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Antenna integrity monitor test fixture (see below).
3.4.8.2
Determination of Monitor Switch Settings
Use the following procedure to determine switch settings for the DELAY, SPACING and
WIDTH monitors according to the table below.
MONITOR
DELAY
SPACING
WIDTH
PARAMETER
SWITCH
Lower Limit Count
S12
Window Count
S9
Lower Limit Count
S13
Window Count
S10
Lower Limit Count
S1
Window Count
S4
1. Determine upper and lower FAULT limits in units of microseconds.

2. Multiply each FAULT limit by 10 to determine upper and lower FAULT counts as
a decimal number.
3. Subtract 1 from lower FAULT count.
4. Convert the decimal number in step 3 to a binary number.
5. Set the Lower Limit Count switch with the binary value from step 4, noting that
the lowest significant bit in the binary number is set on switch position 1 and that
a switch in the ON position signifies a binary 0.
6. Subtract the lower fault count from the upper fault count.
7. Subtract 1 from the decimal number gained in step 6.
9. Set the Window Count switch with the binary value from step 8, noting that the
lowest significant bit in the binary number is set on switch position 1 and that a
switch in the ON position signifies a binary 0.
Use the following procedure to determine switch settings for the RISE and FALL
monitors and the Ident Gap Set switch according to the table below.
3-161
HA72500
SECTION 3
MONITOR
PARAMETER
SWITCH
RISE
Upper Limit Count
S3
FALL
Upper Limit Count
S2
IDENT
Gap Set
S8
1. Determine upper FAULT limits in units of microseconds for RISE and FALL.
"
NOTE
For Ident Gap Set the ident upper fault limit (in seconds) is equal to the upper
fault count. Go to step 3.
2. Multiply each FAULT limit by 10 to determine upper FAULT counts as a decimal

number.
3. Subtract 2 from upper FAULT count.
5. Set the appropriate switch with the binary value from step 4, noting that the
lowest significant bit in the binary number is set on switch position 1 and that a
switch in the ON position signifies a binary 0.
Use the following procedure to determine switch settings for the POWER monitor:
1. With the transponder operating normally, adjust R87 on the monitor main board
so that the voltage on test point XT2 is 2.50 0.01 volts.
2. Set switch POWER LVL FLT SET (S7) according to the following table.
SWITCH POSITION
0 dBm
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
-1 dBm
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
-2 dBm
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
-3 dBm
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
-4 dBm
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
-5 dBm
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
-6 dBm
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
-7 dBm
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
Refer to Section 3.3.3.8 for nominal settings of the monitor fault limit preset switches.
3.4.8.3
Setup
The tests following assume that the depot test facility has been aligned to specification.
If this is a new board, ensure that all programmable devices are inserted correctly. Place
the monitor module in the depot test facility on the transponder extender frame.
On the CTU press the switches in the following order
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE ON
SELECT MAIN NO 1
The following voltages should be present at the front panel test jacks of the monitor:
+5V
+15V
+4.75 volts to +5.25 volts

+14.2 volts to +15.3 volts.
3-162
HA72500
SECTION 3
Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 to XT4. Check that the waveform is a 10 MHz clock.
3.4.8.4
Delay Monitor Check
Connect the oscilloscope to the monitor main board, with channel 1 to test point XT6
(DELAY PULSE) and channel 2 to test point XT5 (DELAY COUNT); trigger the
oscilloscope from channel 2.
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Delay Fault limit of 50.0 0.5
microseconds (see below - shading indicates switch position).
1
9 10
ON
OFF
DELAY WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S9): 1.0 microsecond

1
8
ON
OFF
Perform fault limit test on this parameter as follows:

a. On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1, then FltLmt, then Delay.
b. The indication on the CTU front panel display should read:
lower limit 49.5 0.1 microseconds
upper limit 50.5 0.1 microseconds.
On the CTU front panel press ESC, then select Ch.1 then TI RATE 1 kHz. Display the
measured Delay parameter reading on the CTU; it should be 50.0 0.3 microseconds.
Examine the pulses on channel 1 and channel 2 of the oscilloscope. Check that the
failing edge of the pulse on XT6 is within 0.3 microseconds of half way between the
failing edges of the two pulses on XT5.
3-163
HA72500
SECTION 3
Check that the DELAY front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.5
Spacing Monitor Check
Connect the oscilloscope to the monitor main board, with channel 1 to test point XT8
(SPACING PULSE) and channel 2 to test point XT14 (SPACING COUNT); trigger the
oscilloscope off channel 2.
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Spacing Fault limit of 12.0 0.5
microseconds (see below).
1
9 10
ON
OFF
SPACING WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S10): 1.0 microsecond

1
8
ON
OFF
Perform fault limit test on this parameter as follows:

a. On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1 then FltLmt, then Spacing.
b. The indication on the front panel display should read:
lower limit= 11.5 0.1 microseconds
upper limit = 12.5 0.1 microseconds.
On the CTU front panel press ESC, then select Ch.1 then TI RATE 1 kHz. Display the
measured Spacing parameter on the CTU; it should be 12.0 0.1 microseconds.
falling edge of the pulse on XT8 is within 0.1 microseconds of half way between the
falling edges of the two pulses on XT14.
3-164
HA72500
SECTION 3
Check that the SPACING front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.6
Efficiency Monitor Check
On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1, then FltLmt, then Effncy.

The CTU front panel display should show a lower limit of 60%.
On the CTU front panel press ESC.
Check that the EFFICIENCY front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.7
Reply Rate Monitor Check
On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1, then FltLmt, then Tx.Rate.

The indication on the front panel display should read:
lower limit in the range 828 to 838 Hz
upper limit in the range 2985 to 3015 Hz.
Press ESC on the CTU front panel.
Check that the RATE front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.8
Effective Radiated Power Monitor Check
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Power Fault limit of -3 dBm (see
below - shading indicates switch position).
POWER LVL FLT SET (8-way DIP switch S7): -3. 0 dB
1
8
ON
OFF
On the CTU softkeys select Ch.l. then FltLmt, then Ant.Pwr; ensure that the CTU
displays -3 d B as the fault limit.
Check that the POWER front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.9
Antenna Integrity Monitor Check
Remove the antenna integrity monitor test fixture from connector XN2 on the RF panel
board. Using the multimeter, set the resistance of the test fixture to 1000 1 0 ohms.
Restore the antenna integrity monitor test fixture to XN2 on the RF panel board. On the
monitor, check that the ANTENNA indicator is on. Using the digital multimeter, check
that the voltages on D6:2 and D6:3 are both less than 0.2 volts.
board. Using the multimeter, set the resistance of the test fixture in turn to each of the
3-165
HA72500
SECTION 3
values listed in the table below. Restore the antenna integrity test fixture to XN2 on the
RF panel board. For each resistance setting, check that the ANTENNA and
SECONDARY indicators are in the state shown in the table. Check also that the
voltages at D6:2 and D6:3 correspond with the values shown in the table.
TEST
FIXTURE
RESISTANCE
(ohms)
10 ohms
ANTENNA
Indicator
SECONDARY
Indicator
D6:2
VOLTAGE
(volts)
D6:3
VOLTAGE (volts)
1000
ON
OFF
< 0.2
< 0.2
1110
OFF
ON
< 0.2
> 4.5
1250
OFF
ON
> 4.5
> 4.5
1450
OFF
ON
> 4.5
> 4.5
150
OFF
ON
> 4.5
< 0.2
board. Using the multimeter, set the resistance of the test fixture to 1000 10 ohms.
Restore the antenna integrity monitor test fixture to XN2 on the RF panel board.
3.4.8.10 Level Monitor Check

On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1, then select each of the internal signal levels and
power supply voltages listed in the PARAMETER column of the table below. Check that
the displayed reading for each one is within the limits shown in the table.
"
NOTE
The DME rack must be fully functional for this test.

PARAMETER
LOWER LIMIT
UPPER LIMIT
RV Local Oscillator
1.0 volts
3.0 volts
RV RF Drive
1.5 volts
4.5 volts
TD Drive
1.5 volts
2.5 volts
TD Modulation
1.5 volts
3.5 volts
PA Modulation
1.0 volts
3.5 volts
PA Drive
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
PA Output
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
TI Interrogation Level
2.7 volts
3.3 volts
21 volts DC
28 volts DC
Power Amplifier HT
49.5 volts DC
50.5 volts DC
Transponder 15 V
14.6 volts DC
15.6 volts DC
Transponder 18 V
17.2 volts DC
18.6 volts DC
Driver HT
41.8 volts DC
44.0 volts DC
Auxiliary 24 V
NOTES
Varies with battery voltage.

On the CTU softkeys, select Ch.1, then Status, then MON PS; the CTU front panel
display should read NORMAL.
3.4.8.11 Ident Monitor Check

Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for an Ident Gap Fault limit of 62 seconds
(see below - shading indicates switch position).
3-166
HA72500
SECTION 3
IDENT GAP FLT SET (8-way DIP switch S8): 62 seconds

1
8
ON
OFF
Operate the DME rack under normal conditions and check that the IDENT indicator on
the monitor is lit. Immediately following the sound of an ident code group, select
MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT to ON on the CTU (to stop ident transmission). Check that
the IDENT indicator goes out within 62 3 seconds.
Switch the front panel IDENT switch on the receiver video from NORMAL to
CONTINUOUS. Check that a continuous ident tone is heard from the CTU and that the
IDENT indicator on the monitor is initially lit. Check that after approximately 2 seconds
the DELAY indicator goes out, and that after 15 seconds the IDENT indicator goes out.
Return the receiver video IDENT switch to NORMAL.
On the CTU, switch the MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT to OFF.
CONTINUOUS and then back again. Check that an ident tone is heard while the switch
is in the CONTINUOUS position and the IDENT indicator on the monitor is lit.
CONTINUOUS and then to OFF. Check that the IDENT indicator goes out within 62 3
seconds of the ident being switched off.
3.4.8.12 Pulse Shape Monitor Check

Connect the oscilloscope to the monitor main board to check the pulse width monitor by
connecting channel 1 to test point XT11 (WIDTH PULSE) and channel 2 to test point
XT7 (WIDTH COUNT); trigger the oscilloscope from channel 1.
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Width Fault limit of 3.5 0.6
microseconds (see below - shading indicates switch position).
PULSE WIDTH WINDOW SET (8-way DIP switch S4):1.2 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
PULSE WDTH LOWER LIMIT SET (8-way DIP switch S1): 2.9 microseconds
1
8
ON
OFF
On the CTU front panel press ESC, then press Ch.1 then 1 kHz.
Examine the pulses on channel 1 and channel 2 of the oscilloscope. Check that the first
falling edge of the pulse on XT7 occurs 2.9 0.1 microseconds after the trigger and that
the second falling edge occurs 4.1 0.1 microseconds after the trigger. Check that the
falling edge of the pulse on XT11 falls within the window between the two falling edges
of the pulse on XT7.
3-167
HA72500
SECTION 3
Connect the oscilloscope to the monitor main board to check the pulse rise time monitor
by connecting channel 1 to test point XT3 (RISE PULSE) and channel 2 to test point
XT1 5 (RISE COUNT); trigger the oscilloscope from channel 1.
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Rise Fault upper limit of 3.1
microseconds.
1
8
ON
OFF
On the CTU front panel press ESC then Ch.1 then 1 kHz.
falling edge of the pulse on XT15 occurs 3.1 0.1 microseconds after the trigger. Check
that the falling edge of the pulse on XT3 falls before the falling edge of the pulse on
XT15.
Connect the oscilloscope to the monitor main board to check the pulse fall time monitor
by connecting channel 1 to test point XT10 (FALL PULSE) and channel 2 to test point
XT16 (FALL COUNT); trigger the oscilloscope from channel 1.
Set fault limits as described in Section 3.4.8.2 for a Fall Fault upper limit of 3.6
microseconds.
1
8
ON
OFF
3-168
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the CTU front panel press ESC then Ch.1 then 1 kHz.
falling edge of the pulse on XT16 occurs 3.6 0.1 microseconds after the trigger. Check
that the falling edge of the pulse on XT10 falls before the falling edge of the pulse on
XT16.
Check that the SHAPE front panel indicator on the monitor is lit.
3.4.8.13 Monitor Self Test Check

Select Ch.1 on the CTU softkeys.
Check that approximately every 15 seconds a monitor self check is initiated and that on
the monitor the DELAY and SPACING indicators go out and that the PRIMARY indicator
is lit immediately following the SELF TEST indicator being lit.
3.4.8.14 Front Panel Switch Check

On the CTU press the switches in the following order:
SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE OFF
MONITOR ALARM NORMAL
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
After the first ident code, check that all front panel indicators except PRIMARY,
SECONDARY and SELF TEST are lit.
Toggle the monitor front panel switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to the FAILED position.
Check that all green indicators are now extinguished and that the PRIMARY and
SECONDARY indicators are lit. Return the switch to the NORMAL position, and check
that all green indicators are on.
3.4.9
3.4.9.1
Peak Power Monitor 1A72512

Test Equipment
Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
Stepped attenuator, 11 dB.
3-169
HA72500
3.4.9.2
SECTION 3
Performance Check
Place the monitor module in the transponder extender frame and replace the peak
power monitor with the unit to be tested. Ensure that the cable connections from the
monitor main board to the peak power monitor board are correct.
On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), connect the following components
and connecting cables:
c. 11 dB stepped attenuator connected via a short coaxial cable to the 10 dB
attenuator above.
d. Coaxial cable from the 11 dB stepped attenuator to the ERP IN connector on the
rear of the transponder subrack.
On the CTU front panel press the switches in the following order:
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE OFF
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
Disconnect the coaxial cable from the input of the unit under test and reconnect it to the
peak power meter. Set the peak power meter to 0 dB and 100 mW ranges, and to the
DIRECT measurement mode. Measure the peak power and set the level to 10.0 0.5
mW by adjusting the stepped attenuator and then using the RF OUTPUT control on the
transmitter driver front panel as a fine adjustment.
Reconnect the cable to the input connector of the unit under test.
Trigger the oscilloscope from the test interrogator front panel jack TRIGGER and
connect channel 1 to the monitor module front panel ERP PULSE test jack using AC
coupling. Check that the waveform at this point is a pair of Gaussian-shaped pulses of
amplitude in the range 2.0 to 2.4 volts.
Connect the digital multimeter to XN2:14 on the monitor main board. Check that the DC
voltage is in the range 2.45 to 2.95 volts.
Reconnect the input cable to the peak power meter again, then repeat the above
procedure to set the peak power level to 100 5 mW.
Again reconnect the input cable to the unit under test, and at the ERP PULSE test jack
check the amplitude of the pulses present; they should be between 6.6 and 7.4 volts.
3-170
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the DC voltage at XN2:14; it should be between 8.2 and 9.2 volts.
3.4.9.3
Completion
On the CTU, press the SELECT/OFF RESET switch.

Remove the stepped attenuator and extra cables from the RF panel and restore the
original connections.
Remove the tested unit from the monitor module, and replace the original peak power
monitor.
3.4.10

Oscilloscope.
Peak power meter.
Spectrum analyser.
Digital multimeter.
Test cable, RG-213, 800 mm, N(M) to N(M).
Cable, coaxial, 0.5 dB.
3.4.10.2 Signal Pulse Generation Checks

Ensure that the RF Generator 1A72516 of the unit under test has been aligned as
described in Section 3.4.12.
Extend the test interrogator using the transponder extender frame. On the test
interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER to ON.
On the test interrogator, undo the cable connector at the output of the RF generator, and
connect the output of the RF generator to RF IN on the sensor of the peak power meter
using a short semirigid coaxial cable.
On the peak power meter, read the pulse peak amplitude. It should be +11.5 0.2 dBm
(14.1 0.7 mW). If the reading is outside this range, remove the cover of the modulator
and detector and adjust PULSE AMPLITUDE on this board to set the peak power meter
reading to a value in the specified range.
Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED INTERROGATIONS
and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. Measure the following parameters
of the displayed pulses (see figure below).
3-171
HA72500
"
NOTE
SECTION 3
interrogator and adjusting R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE), R20 (PULSE SHAPE)
and R37 (PULSE PEDESTAL) providing that the pulse amplitude on the peak
power meter remains at 14.1 0.7 mW. The DC level shift is measured by
observing the baseline lifting from its normal position when switch S 1:6 on the
RF generator is set to ON, temporarily.
Disconnect the peak power meter and restore the connection from the output of the RF
generator to the attenuator.
3.4.10.3 Pulse Switching

On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks TRIGGER
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DETECTED LOG VIDEO and EARTH
on the receiver video. Measure the amplitude of the displayed synchronous video pulses
with respect to the 0 volts reference (taking the mean of the noise on the peak of the
pulses). The amplitude should be 1.2 0.5 volts.
On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope measure the
amplitude of the displayed synchronous video pulses with respect to the 0 volts
reference. The amplitude should be 1.8 0.5 volts.
Calculate the difference between these two amplitudes; this difference should be in the
range 0.4 to 0.7 volts.
On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope check (see
figure below) that the displayed synchronous video pulses alternate between the two
levels measured above. Measure the time interval from the rising edge of the first pulse
of a low level synchronous video pulse pair to the rising edge of the first pulse of a high
level synchronous video pulse pair. This time interval should be 1.00 0.05 milliseconds.
(Note that synchronous reply pulses, probably at a higher level, will also be present on
the displayed waveform.)
3.4.10.4 Signal Level Calibration

Using the 0.5 dB semi flexible coaxial cable, connect the pair of 1 dB and 10 dB stepped
attenuators to the output of the RF generator. Set the attenuators to a total of 66 dB, to
establish a reference level of -55 dBm.
Connect the spectrum analyser to the stepped attenuator output using the 800 mm test
cable. Set the spectrum analyser controls to:
Centre frequency:
Bandwidth:
Video filter:
Test interrogator frequency

1 MHz
1 MHz
3-172
HA72500
Scan width:
Scan time:
Input attenuator:
Log sensitivity:
SECTION 3
1 MHz per division
5 to 10 seconds
to suit
to suit.
Measure and record the peak signal level equivalent to -55 dBm, averaging the reading
over 5 scans to reduce any error due to noise jitter. This reference level is defined as
"Pcal 55.
Set the attenuators to a total of 51 dB, to establish a reference level of -40 dBm.
Measure and record the spectrum analyser peak signal level equivalent to this
reference, again averaging over 5 scans. This reference level is defined as Pcal 40.
"
NOTE
Once the reference levels have been established, DO NOT adjust any
spectrum analyser controls in the following steps.
Disconnect the spectrum analyser cable from the stepped attenuators, disconnect the
0.5 dB cable from XC1 of the RF generator and reconnect the test interrogator's fixed
and switched attenuators between the RF generator and the module output.
Connect the spectrum analyser cable to the module output using a suitable coaxial
adaptor. Use the same test cable on the spectrum analyser as was used in establishing
the reference levels.
Set the Attenuator 1A69737 to the ON state by removing the connection from its
connector XFB. Observe the high level interrogation signal on the spectrum analyser.
Measure and record the averaged (over 5 scans) displayed level and, by comparing it
with the Pcal 40 reference, calculate the corrected output signal level, which should be
-40.0 1.0 dBm.
Set the attenuator to the OFF state by replacing the connection to connector XFB and
then using a shorting lead to ground the upper end of R2 on the test interrogator main
board (a ground point is available at the nearby XA2 test jack). Observe the low level
interrogation on the spectrum analyser. Measure and record the averaged (over 5
scans) displayed level and, by comparing it to the Pcal 55 reference, calculate the
corrected output signal level, which should be -55.0 1.0 dBm.
Remove the shorting lead and recheck the calibration described above, to ensure that
the reference levels are still valid. If the reference levels have changed, the
measurements must be repeated.
Restore all connections within the module.
3.4.10.5 Reply Signal Checks

Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from the test jacks TRIGGER
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to DETECTED REPLIES and EARTH on the test
interrogator.
3-173
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the half-height pulse width of the second pulse of the synchronous replies. On
the CTU, select Width parameter measurement. The displayed width should be within
0.1 microseconds of the width measured on the oscilloscope.
On the oscilloscope, measure the rise time (10% to 90%) of the second pulse of the
synchronous replies. On the CTU, select Rise parameter measurement. The displayed
rise time measurement should be within 0.1 microseconds of the rise time measured on
the oscilloscope.
On the oscilloscope, measure the fall time (90% to 10%) of the second pulse of the
synchronous replies. On the CTU, select Fall parameter measurement. The displayed
fall time measurement should be within 0.1 microseconds of the fall time measured on
the oscilloscope.
On the oscilloscope, measure the spacing between the two pulses of the synchronous
replies (use the 1 s MARKERS on the test interrogator front panel for greater accuracy
if required). On the CTU, select Spacing parameter measurement. The displayed
spacing measurement should be within 0.1 microseconds of the spacing measured on
the oscilloscope.
and EARTH on the test interrogator. Measure the delay from the half-height point of the
first pulse of the interrogations to the half-height point on the first pulse of the
synchronous replies (use the 1 s MARKERS on the test interrogator front panel for
greater accuracy if required). On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement. The
displayed delay measurement should be within 0.1 microseconds of the delay
measured in on the oscilloscope.
Connect the digital voltmeter to XN2:1 8 on the main board (COMMON to chassis). The
voltmeter reading should be in the range 5.4 to 6.8 volts.
On the CTU, select PwrOut parameter measurement and on the test interrogator main
board adjust TPNDR OP LVL CAL (R7) to produce a CTU reading of 1.2 kW.
On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement (in Maintenance mode). The
displayed efficiency reading should be greater than 99.8%.
On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement. The displayed efficiency reading
should be greater than 80%.
Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks INTERROGATIONS TIMING and
EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY TIMING and EARTH on
the test interrogator. On the front panel of the test interrogator, press and hold operated
CHECK DETECTOR COINCIDENCE and measure on the oscilloscope the time interval
between the leading edges of the pulses on the two channels; this time interval should
be not greater than 0.1 microseconds.
3-174
HA72500
3.4.11
SECTION 3
Main PWB Assembly Test Interrogator 1A72515

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
3.4.11.2 Setup
On the front panel of the test interrogator, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER to OFF.
Remove the test interrogator from the depot test facility, remove the test interrogator
main board from the module and assemble the board to be tested in its place. Ensure
that both of the programmable devices are inserted correctly and that the ribbon cable
connector is plugged into XN2 on the rear of the board.
Install the test interrogator into the transponder extender frame, and the extender frame
into the transponder subrack.
Set the mode switch S4 on the test interrogator main board to X.
On the CTU front panel, press the switches in the following order:
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE ON
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC
POWER to ON.
Check the front panel test jacks on the test interrogator module and ensure that:
+5V is in the range 4.75 to 5.25 volts;
+1 5V is in the range 14.7 to 15.3 volts.
3.4.11.3 Interrogation Generation Check

1. On the CTU, ensure that the interrogation rate is set to 100 Hz (by toggling the TI
RATE, 1 kHz switch, if necessary).
2. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (triggered to channel 1) to the test jacks
TRIGGER and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. The period of
the displayed waveform should be 10 1 milliseconds.
3. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to XN2:20 on the test interrogator main
board. Check that a square wave signal is present, with an amplitude of 1.1 0.2
volts and a period of 20.0 0.4 milliseconds.
4. On the CTU, press TI RATE, 1 kHz. The period of the display on channel 1 of the
oscilloscope should change to 1.0 0.1 milliseconds.
5. On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement.
6. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the test jacks DETECTED LOG VIDEO
and EARTH on the front panel of the receiver video. The display should be as
shown below, with the level of interrogations alternating between high and low
levels (the synchronous reply pulses also will be present on the displayed
waveform).
3-175
HA72500
SECTION 3
7. On the CTU select Lo Eff parameter measurement. The channel 2 display should
show all interrogations to be at the lower level of step 6.
8. On the CTU select Hi Eff parameter measurement. The channel 2 display should
show all interrogations to be at the higher level of step 6.
9. On the CTU, press and hold TI RATE, 10 kHz. The period of the display on
channel 1 of the oscilloscope should change to 100 10 microseconds.
10. On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement. The channel 2 display on
the oscilloscope should be similar to that of step 6, except that:
a. the interrogations should be spaced at 100 microseconds;
b. only about one-third of the replies will be indicated; and
c. all the interrogations should be at the high level established above.
If necessary, the display of step 6 can be recalled by temporarily releasing
the TI RATE, 10 kHz key.
On completion of the measurements, release the TI RATE, 10 kHz key.

and EARTH.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks 1 s MARKERS and EARTH on the
front panel of the test interrogator. Using the displayed markers (or an accurately
calibrated oscilloscope), measure the spacing between the detected pulses (channel 1
on the oscilloscope). It should be 12.0 0.1 microseconds measured at the half
amplitude points on the leading edges.
While observing the oscilloscope display, switch TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING,
REJECT to +2 microseconds. Measure the increase in spacing between the detected
pulses. It should be 2.0 0.1 microseconds.
REJECT to -2 microseconds. Measure the decrease in spacing between the detected
pulses. It should be 2.0 0.1 microseconds.
ACCEPT to +1 microsecond. Measure the increase in spacing between the detected
pulses. It should be 1.0 0.1 microsecond.
ACCEPT to -1 microsecond. Measure the decrease in spacing between the detected
pulses. It should be 1.0 0. 1 microsecond.
3.4.11.5 Reply Signal Processing Check

On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement and TI RATE, 1 kHz.
3-176
HA72500
SECTION 3
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED REPLIES and EARTH on
the front panel of the test interrogator. Gaussian-shaped pulses should be displayed,
delayed about 50 microseconds from the interrogation triggers displayed on channel 1.
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks REPLY TIMING and EARTH on the
test interrogator.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES and
EARTH on the test interrogator.
While observing the oscilloscope, adjust REPLY GATE DELAY, COARSE and FINE
control on the test interrogator front panel to align the centre of the REPLY ACCEPT
GATES within 0.5 microseconds of the leading edges of the REPLY TIMING pulses.
3.4.11.6 Measurement Facilities Check

On the CTU, select each of the following check parameters in turn; confirm that each is
within the stated limits:
Vcal : 5.00 0.02 volts
Rcal : 50002Hz
Tcal : 100.0 0.2 microseconds.
On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement; the displayed reading should be
50.0 0.2 microseconds.
On the CTU, select Spacing parameter measurement; the displayed reading should be
12.0 0.1 microseconds.
On the CTU, select Effncy parameter measurement; the displayed reading should be
greater than 90%.
On the CTU, select D.Rate parameter measurement; the displayed reading should be
between 990 and 1000 Hz.
On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement; the displayed reading should be
1000 10 Hz.
On the receiver video, hold the TEST switch operated to the REPLY RATE MONITOR
TEST position. The displayed CTU reading should be 810 10 Hz.
On the CTU, select Width measurement; the displayed reading should be 3.5 0.3
microseconds.
On the CTU, select Rise measurement; the displayed reading should be between 1.9
and 2.5 microseconds.
On the CTU, select Fall measurement; the displayed reading should be between 1.9 and
2.5 microseconds.
On the CTU, select PwrOut parameter measurement and make a note of the power
reading. Adjust the preset TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7) to give a CTU reading of 1.3 kW to
prove that this value can be achieved. Readjust R7 to give a CTU reading of 0.7 kW to
prove that this value can be achieved. Readjust R7 again to give the original CTU
reading.
On the CTU, select TI PS status display; the displayed status should be NORMAL.
On the receiver video, ensure that IDENT is switched to NORMAL.
On the monitor, ensure that all green indicators are on and that all other indicators are
off (except for approximately every 16 seconds when monitor SELF TEST flashes).
3-177
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.11.7 Transponder Output Power Calibrate Alignment

With the DME switched off, disconnect the load from the antenna connector on the RF
panel at the rear of the rack. To the antenna connector, connect firstly a 30 dB, 50 watts
attenuator then a 20 dB, 1 watt attenuator. Connect the peak power meter (or calibrated
detector) to the output of the 20 dB attenuator.
Extend the test interrogator module, using the transponder extender frame.
On the CTU, press either the SELECT MAIN NO 1 or NO 2 key as required for the
transponder under test. Set the CTU softkeys to display the PwrOut parameter, reading
Ch.1 or Ch.2 as required for the test interrogator being adjusted.
While monitoring the CTU display, adjust the preset TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7) on the test
interrogator main board to display a power output reading to within 1 5 watts of the
reading on the peak power meter. Be sure to include any correction factor necessary
from the calibration data of the attenuators and peak power meter (or detector).
Remove the extender and replace the test interrogator into the depot test facility and recheck the power output reading on the CTU display which should be within 30 watts of
the corrected peak power meter reading. If the CTU reading is outside these limits, again
extend the test interrogator and adjust TPDR OP LVL CAL (R7) to give the required
adjustment, then replace the test interrogator in the depot test facility.
Switch off the DME, disconnect the peak power meter and attenuators, and replace the
load at the antenna connector.
3.4.11.8 Monitor Fault Limit Facilities Check
"
For this test, the monitor fault limit switches must be set as detailed in Section
3.3.
NOTE
With the DME operating in Maintenance mode, ensure that all eight monitor parameter
indicators are on.
On the CTU, select the FltLimit parameters listed in the table below. For each
parameter, the displayed fault limits should be within the ranges listed in the table.
PARAMETER
SPECIFIED VALUE
LIMITS
UNITS
Delay; Lower
49.5
0.1
Delay; Upper
50.5
0.1
Spacing; Lower
11.5
0.1
Spacing; Upper
12.5
0.1
Effncy; (Lower)
60
Tx Rate; Lower
833
10
Hz
Tx Rate; Upper
3000
30
Hz
Ant Power, (Lower)
-3
dB

Check that the DELAY, SPACING, EFFICIENCY, POWER, SHAPE and RATE
parameter indicators on the monitor module are on.
3.4.12

Oscilloscope.
Spectrum analyser.
Frequency counter.
3-178
HA72500
SECTION 3
Peak power meter.

Test crystals (see Section 3.4.12.3 step 1).
3.4.12.2 Setup
1. Switch the depot test facility off. Remove the coaxial cable connected to the
INTERROGATION SIGNAL GENERATOR connector on the front panel of the
test interrogator. Remove the test interrogator from the transponder subrack.
Remove the lids and shims from the RF generator (modified) and the modulator
and detector diecast boxes.
2. Replace the RF generator (modified) from the depot test facility with the RF
generator to be tested (after first removing the coaxial connected to the output
connector, XC1, the test interrogator main board, the four screws securing the
RF generator (modified) to the chassis and the six leads from the modulator and
detector).
3. Reconnect the six leads from the modulator and detector. Restore the test
interrogator main board to its chassis. Extend the test interrogator in the
transponder subrack using the transponder extender frame.
4. Connect the peak power meter to the output connector, XC1, of the RF
generator, using a short, semi-rigid coaxial cable.
5. Switch the test facility on. On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR
6. On the modulator and detector board, set switch S1 to the test position.
7. On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff test in Maintenance mode, and TI RATE,
1 kHz.
8. Using channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks
TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) check the following
voltages and waveforms on the RF generator (connect the oscilloscope earth
lead to the RF generator diecast box).
3.4.12.3 Alignment
To fully test and prove an RF generator, the tests of this section should be performed at
both the minimum and maximum DME interrogation frequencies, 1025 MHz and 1150
MHz respectively. However, if the RF generator is only to be realigned for its operational
DME interrogation frequency, the tests of this section need only be performed at this
operational frequency.
1. Install the five oscillator crystals in the RF generator. The crystal frequencies are
one-twelfth of the station interrogation frequency and the offsets from it.
Example: Channel 84X interrogation frequency = 1108 MHz Fo
hence crystal frequency = 1108/12 = 92.3333 MHz Fx
3-179
HA72500
SECTION 3
shown in the table below:
CRYSTALFREQUENCY
CCT
REF
INTERROGATION
FREQUENCY
For 1025 MHz
For 1150 MHz
G1
F0
85.4167 MHz
95.8333 MHz
Fx = F0 /12
G2
F0 +160 kHz
85.4300 MHz
95.8467 MHz
Fx +13.3 kHz
G3
F0 -160 kHz
85.4033 MHz
95.8200 MHz
Fx -13.3 kHz
G4
F0+ 900 kHz
85.4197 MHz
95.9083 MHz
Fx +75 kHz
G5
F0 -900 kHz
85.3417 MHz
95.7583 MHz
Fx -75 kHz
For Operational Freq
2. On the RF generator, switch 1 to 4 of S1 to OFF, S1:5 to ON and S1:6 to OFF.

3. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT1 on the RF generator and
tune the core in L1 for peak positive DC voltage on the oscilloscope display (1.9
volts minimum).
coupling loop connected to the frequency counter and loosely coupled to L1.
5. On the RF generator, set switch S1:1 to ON, and switches 2 to 6 of S1 to OFF.
6. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT2 on the RF generator board
and tune C10 for peak positive voltage during the pulse. If necessary, restrict the
bandwidth of the oscilloscope to eliminate crystal frequency appearing on the
trace.
8. Move channel 1, of the oscilloscope to test point XT4 and tune C18 for a peak
9. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to VIDEO OUT on the peak power meter and
tune C22 for maximum output. The peak pulse output should be not less than
60 mW.
10. On the modulator and detector, set switch S1 to the normal position.
11. On the peak power meter, read the pulse peak amplitude. It should be 14.0 0.2
mW. (If the reading is outside this range, adjust R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) on
the modulator and detector to set the peak power meter reading to a value in the
specified range).
3-180
HA72500
SECTION 3
12. Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED

Measure the following parameters of the displayed pulses:
PEAK AMPLITUDE (FROM BASELINE):

HALF AMPLITUDE PULSE WIDTH:
FLAT TOP DURATION:
BASE LINE DC LEVEL:
3.0 0.3V
3.4 .02s
1.0 .02s
3.6 0.3V
corrected by adjusting R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) and R20 (PULSE SHAPE) on
the modulator and detector as required and then repeating step 11.
baseline should move up the pulse. The DC level shift of the baseline level from
the reference level set in the previous step should be 0.95 0.05 volts. If the DC
level shift is outside the above limits, it can be corrected by and adjusting R37
(PULSE PEDESTAL) on the modulator and detector.
15. Remove the peak power meter from XC1 and replace it with the frequency
counter (through a suitable cable). Terminate the frequency counter with 50
ohms. Set switch S1:6 to ON to add a CW signal to the pulse. Measure the
output frequency selecting each crystal in turn (switches 1 to 5 of S1 set to ON
one at a time in turn). The frequencies should be within 10 kHz of those of the
table of step 1.
16. Disconnect the frequency counter from the output of the RF generator and
connect the spectrum analyser. On the RF generator switch S1:1 to ON and 2 to
6 of S1 to OFF. On the spectrum analyser, check that all undesired harmonics
and spurious are at least 30 dB below the desired signal.
3.4.12.4
Completion
After having performed the above tests at the required frequencies, switch the depot test
facility off, remove the RF generator under test from the test interrogator in the depot test
facility, and replace it with the RF generator (modified), ensuring that all screws and
electrical connections are correctly replaced and securely tightened.
Replace the shims and lids of the diecast boxes. Note that the lids are deliberately
warped to ensure good RF sealing. Tighten the screws firmly.
3-181
HA72500
SECTION 3
Remove the transponder extender frame and install the test interrogator back in the
depot test facility.
3.4.13
RF Filter 1A72517

Signal generator.
Spectrum analyser.
Adaptor SMA (female).
50 ohms termination SMA (male).
Coaxial cables: Qty 4 (two with SMA male on cable).
3.4.13.2 Requirement
This procedure is suitable for a thorough test of a refurbished unit. If it is required to test
a unit without re-tuning, use only the test procedure in Section 3.4.13.12.
The procedure uses a separate oscillator, spectrum analyser and directional coupler to
measure the power reflected back from the unit under test.
3.4.13.3 Insertion Loss - Equipment Calibration

Set the spectrum analyser for:
Centre frequency
Span
Sweep time
Amplitude scale
Resolution bandwidth
Reference level
1100 MHz
40 MHz/division (50)
10 millisecond/division
10 dB/division
1 MHz
0 dBm
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-4, but with a direct connection in place of the
unit under test. The 10 dB attenuators should be placed as close to the unit under test
as possible (they ensure a well defined impedance at the connection points to the unit
under test). Set the oscillator output to a level of +10 dBm and the spectrum analyser to
2 dB/division amplitude range.
range 950-1250 MHz as described in Section 3.4.1.5.2.
3.4.13.4 Filter Tuning Procedure

Set the spectrum analyser back to 10 dB/division and the signal generator to 1100 MHz.
Connect the filter as the unit under test.
Adjust filter capacitors C1 and C2 for the best response (minimum insertion loss) at 1100
MHz and compare the response with that shown below (marker 2) by sweeping the
signal generator frequency, manually or automatically.
3-182
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.13.5 Insertion Loss - Measurement

Reset the spectrum analyser to 2 dB/division scale and measure the insertion loss at
1100 MHz. When correctly aligned, the insertion loss should not exceed 2.8 dB.
3.4.13.6 Return Loss - Equipment Calibration

Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 and set the oscillator output to a CW level
of +10 dBm.
Set the spectrum analyser controls as before.
Calibrate the test equipment for return loss measurement as described in Section
3.4.1.5.1.
3.4.13.7 Return Loss - Measurement

Connect the input connector XC1 in place of 50 ohms termination with termination now
connected to XC2.
Display the return loss for the filter, by sweeping the signal generator frequency, and
compare with the results shown in the figure below (marker 2). When correctly aligned,
the return loss at the centre of the passband (1100 MHz) should be not less than 25 dB,
the shape being as below.
3.4.13.8 Filter Adjustments

If the required response and return loss characteristics cannot be achieved, it may be
necessary to adjust the coupling between the filter sections. This is achieved by varying
3-183
HA72500
SECTION 3
the spacing of the wire loops in relation to the slot in the centre partition. The loops must
be moved only in small amounts, as this spacing is critical. There are two conditions
which indicate incorrect coupling:
a. Under-coupled, indicated by excessive insertion loss and low return loss with a
single shoulder notch. Increase the coupling by gently squeezing the loops closer
together, on each side of the slot. Keep the loops equally spaced from the
partition.
b. Over-coupled, indicated by a double hump" transmission response and low
return loss with a double peak characteristic. Decrease the coupling, by gently
bending the wire loops away from the slot, but keeping them equally spaced from
the partition.
If satisfactory return loss cannot be achieved after adjustment of coupling, it is possible
that the connectors are not soldered to equal tapping points on the wire loops. Carefully
examine each connection point, and ensure that the length of wire from each connector
centre pin to ground is identical.
When the filter is correctly aligned, the transmission and return loss responses should be
very similar to those shown in the above figures.

With the filter tuned for 1100 MHz, measure the following performance characteristics,
which should be within the limits stated:
1. Return loss
not less than 25 dB.
2. Insertion loss
not exceeding 2.8 dB.
3. Response at 1000 MHz
not less than 33 dB below peak response.

Tune the filter for minimum insertion loss and maximum return loss at 960 MHz, by
adjustment of C1 and C2 only. It should not be necessary to make any changes to the
coupling if the alignment at 1100 MHz was done correctly. If the coupling is changed, for
any reason, then the measurements at 1100 MHz must be repeated.
Check that the transmission and return loss characteristics are very similar to those
shown in the figures for filter tuning and return loss measurement (marker 1)
respectively.
Measure the following performance characteristics, which should be within the limits
stated:
1. Return loss
2. Insertion loss

Tune the filter for minimum insertion loss and maximum return loss at 1215 MHz, by
adjustment of C1 and C2 only. If the coupling is changed, for any reason, then the
measurements at 1100 MHz and 960 MHz must be repeated.
Check that the transmission and return loss characteristics are very similar to those
shown in the figures for filter tuning and return loss measurement (marker 3)
respectively.
3-184
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the following performance characteristics, which should be within the limits
stated:
1. Return loss
2. Insertion loss
3.4.13.12 Test at Station Frequency

Repeat the procedures for insertion loss and filter tuning at the station frequency.
Tune the filter for minimum insertion loss and maximum return loss at the required
frequency, by adjustment of C1 and C2 only.
Measure the three parameters:
1. Return loss.
2. Insertion loss.
3. Response at 100 MHz.
and check that the results are between the limits stated for 1100 MHz and the end-ofband frequency (beyond the station frequency).
3.4.14
Modulator and Detector 1A72518

Oscilloscope.
Peak power meter.
Detector.
3.4.14.2 Performance Check and Adjustment

Switch the depot test facility off. Extend the test interrogator on the transponder extender
frame.
Remove lids from the RF generator and the modulator and detector subassemblies in
the module.
Remove the modulator and detector board from the module and install the board to be
tested.
Set switch S1 on the modulator and detector board to the test position and connect the
peak power meter, via a short semirigid coaxial cable, to XC1 of the RF generator.
Switch the depot test facility on. On the CTU front panel, set the following switches:
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE ON
SELECT MAIN NO 1
PARAM
1 kHz.
Set the MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC POWER switch on the test interrogator
front panel to ON. Check with the oscilloscope that pulses at XS7 are 3 microseconds
duration, +15 volts amplitude and 1 millisecond period.
Check for the following voltages and waveforms on the modulator and detector board.
3-185
HA72500
SECTION 3
Set all three preset resistors to mid-position and set switch S1 to the normal position.
On the peak power meter, read the pulse peak amplitude. It should be +11.5 0.2 dBm
(14.1 0.7 mW). If the reading is outside this range, adjust PULSE AMPLITUDE (R13) to
set the peak power meter reading to a value in the specified range.
and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. Measure the following parameters
of the displayed pulses (see figure below).
Switch CW TEST switch S1:6 on the RF generator board to ON, and adjust R37 (PULSE
PEDESTAL) on the modulator and detector board for 0.2 volts shift from the baseline.
Switch S1:6 to OFF. On the modulator and detector board, adjust the R20 (PULSE
SHAPE) and (R13) PULSE AMPLITUDE until the correct shape is achieved.
Connect the oscilloscope probe on channel 1 to XS6 on the modulator and detector
board and check that the pulse shape on channel 1 closely matches that on channel 2
and the amplitude of the pulse on channel 1 is 1.5 0.2 volts.
Connect the oscilloscope probe on channel 1 to XS5 on the modulator and detector
board and check that the pulse shape closely matches that on channel 2 and the
amplitude of the pulse is 3.00.4 volts.
Connect the oscilloscope probe on channel 2 to XS3 and measure the DC voltage. It
Vary the pulse amplitude with R13 (PULSE AMPLITUDE) and ensure that the DC
voltage at XS3 closely tracks the amplitude of the pulse at XS5.
Move the oscilloscope probe on channel 2 to XS4 on the modulator and detector board
and check that a positive pulse of amplitude not less than 14 volts is present. Measure
3-186
HA72500
SECTION 3
the duration between half-amplitude points of the pulse at XS5 and measure the width of
the pulse at XS4. The two timings should be within 0.1 microseconds.
"
NOTE
3.4.15
When using a Depot Test Facility equipment the 2A72516 RF Generator

(Modified) requires different settings of the preset controls compared with the
1A72516, so R20 (PULSE SHAPE) may be close to one end of its travel.

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
Stepped attenuator, 11 dB.

Place the test interrogator module in the transponder extender frame and replace the
reply detector with the unit to be tested. Ensure that the cable connections from the test
interrogator main board to the reply detector board are correct.
On the RF panel (at the rear of the rack at the top), connect the following components
and connecting cables:
c. 11 dB stepped attenuator connected via a short coaxial cable to the 10 dB
attenuator above.
d. Coaxial cable from the 11 dB stepped attenuator to the input connector on the
reply detector under test.
On the CTU front panel press the switches in the following order:
SOURCE LOCAL
MAINTENANCE OFF
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
3.4.15.3 Detector Check

Disconnect the coaxial cable from the input of the unit under test and reconnect it to the
peak power meter. Set the peak power meter to 0 dB and 100 mW ranges, and to the
DIRECT measurement mode. Measure the peak power and set the level to 10.0 0.5
mW by adjusting the stepped attenuator and then using the RF OUTPUT control on the
transmitter driver front panel as a fine adjustment.
Reconnect the cable to the input connector of the reply detector.
Trigger the oscilloscope from the test interrogator front panel jack TRIGGER and
connect channel 1 to the test interrogator module front panel DETECTED REPLIES test
jack using AC coupling. Check that the waveform at this point is a pair of Gaussianshaped pulses of amplitude in the range 2.0 to 2.4 volts.
Connect the digital multimeter to XN2:14 on the test interrogator main board. Check that
the DC voltage is in the range 2.0 to 2.4 volts.
3-187
HA72500
SECTION 3
Reconnect the input cable to the peak power meter, then repeat the above procedure to
set the peak power level to 100 5 mW.
Again reconnect the input cable to the unit under test, and at the DETECTED REPLIES
test jack, check the amplitude of the pulses; they should be between 6.6 and 7.4 volts.
Measure the DC voltage at XN2:14; it should be between 6.6 and 7.4 volts.
3.4.15.4 Timing Pulses Check

Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from the test jacks TRIGGER
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to DETECTED REPLIES and EARTH on the test
interrogator.
Measure the half-height pulse width of the second pulse of the synchronous replies. On
the CTU, select Width parameter measurement. The displayed width should be should
be within 0.1 microseconds of the width measured on the oscilloscope.
On the oscilloscope, measure rise time (10% to 90%) of the second pulse of the
synchronous replies. On the CTU, select Rise parameter measurement. The displayed
rise time should be should be within 0.1 microseconds of the rise time measured on the
oscilloscope.
On the oscilloscope, measure fall time (90% to 10%) of the second pulse of the
synchronous replies. On the CTU, select Fall parameter measurement. The displayed
fall time should be should be within 0.1 microseconds of the fall time measured on the
oscilloscope.
3.4.15.5 Detector Coincidence Check

Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks INTERROGATIONS TIMING and
EARTH and channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the test jacks REPLY TIMING and EARTH
on the test interrogator.
On the front panel of the test interrogator, press and hold operated the CHECK
DETECTOR COINCIDENCE switch. Measure the time interval on the oscilloscope
between the leading edges of the pulses on the two channels; this should be not greater
than 0.1 microseconds.
3.4.15.6 Completion
On the CTU, press the SELECT/OFF RESET switch.
Remove the stepped attenuator and extra cables from the RF panel and restore the
original connections.
Remove the tested unit from the monitor module, and replace the original reply detector.
3-188
HA72500
3.4.16
SECTION 3
Receiver Video 1A72520

Spectrum analyser.
Oscilloscope.
Frequency counter.
Attenuator, step, 10 dB range, 1 dB steps.
Attenuator, step, 110 dB range, 10 dB steps.
Peak power meter.
Digital multimeter.
3.4.16.2 Setup
Ensure that the RF source on the unit under test has been aligned to the station reply
frequency (see Section 3.4.18).
Ensure that the IF amplifier and RF amplifier of the unit under test have been aligned
(see Sections 3.4.19 and 3.4.20 respectively).
Align the test interrogator in the depot test facility to the interrogation frequency (see
Appendix K).
Mount the receiver video to be tested into the depot test facility, on the transponder
extender frame.
Remove the test interrogator module from the depot test facility and reconnect the output
cable (to XC2) directly to the RF generator board output connector, via a 6 dB attenuator
pad. Replace the test interrogator in the depot test facility.
At the RF panel, disconnect the semirigid cable at the output of the pre-selector filter
(this is the cable that connects to the receiver video module).
At the depot test facility RF panel, using short RG-188 cables and minimum necessary
adaptors, connect the two variable attenuators between the TEST INTRGS connector
and the semirigid coaxial cable removed from the pre-selector output.
Using the peak power meter in DIRECT mode on the 10mW range, measure the RF
pulse-pair signal amplitude just before the semirigid cable; with the tens attenuator at
0 dB, adjust the units attenuator until the power level is 1.0 0.1 mW. This attenuator
setting (which should be about 4 or 5 dB) is the reference 0 dBm value.
The equipment setup is shown in Figure 3-9.
Connect the RF output from the variable attenuator to the receiver video under test. Set
the tens attenuator to 110 dB (to give a level of -110 dBm) and switch on the power to
the module under test.
Remove the cover from the IF amplifier and, using a digital multimeter, check that:
a. at XT10, the DC voltage is 5.0 0.1 volts - adjust R50, ON CHANNEL preset, if
necessary to achieve this;
b. at XT13, the DC voltage is 6.0 0.1 volts - adjust R15, AGC preset, if necessary
to achieve this;
c. set the DC voltage at XT6 on the IF amplifier to 4.0 0.1 volts by adjusting the,
GAIN preset, R29.
3-189
HA72500
Figure 3-9
SECTION 3
Test Setup for Receiver Video Module

Set the tens attenuator to 30 dB, to give a level of -30 dBm.
Connect the oscilloscope trigger input to the TRIGGER jack on the test interrogator
module front panel and set the timebase to 2 microseconds/division.
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the DETECTED LOG VIDEO and adjacent EARTH
test jacks on the receiver video front panel and check that the signal is as shown below.
Set the tens attenuator to 100 dB and increase the units attenuator by 5 dB to give 95
dBm input. Check that the "peak tangential noise" input condition is met, as shown
below.
3-190
HA72500
SECTION 3
Peak tangential noise condition is when the noise peaks on the bottom of the pulse
coincide with the noise peaks on either side of the pulse: the peak tangential noise
sensitivity is the input level to achieve this condition, in this case -95 dBm.
Set the units attenuator to the reference value, and the tens attenuator to 90 dB to give
-90 dBm input level, and observe the small noisy pulse; increase the input signal level in
10 dB steps and check that there are equal increases in pulse amplitude up to -10 dBm
input.
Increase the input level to 0 dBm (attenuators switched to reference value) and note that
the pulse is substantially flattened on top. Again reduce the input level to -15 dBm (tens
attenuator to 10 dB and units attenuator increased by 5 dB above the reference value)
and check that the pulse now shows no signs of flattening.
Both conditions specified above (peak tangential noise input condition, and no pulse
flattening) should be met, as shown below. If they are not met, then the IF amplifier
should be checked as described in Section 3.4.19.
In the figure above, the noise level shown is at -95 dBm and the intermediate steps are
10 dB increments from -95 dBm to -15 dBm.
Return the input level to -30 dBm. Connect the oscilloscope probe to the ON CHANNEL
VIDEO test jack and check that the signal is as shown below.
Reset the oscilloscope timebase to 1 millisecond/division and check random 15 volts

noise pulses as well as the "on channel" signal pulses.
Connect a frequency counter to the front panel ON CHANNEL VIDEO test jack. Select a
counter timebase of 1 second. Remove the signal pulses by setting the variable
attenuators to maximum (120 dB).
Check that the noise count displayed on the frequency counter is between 20 and 200
pulses per second. If it is not, then make a gain adjustment to IF amplifier preset R29 to
achieve this count, ensuring that the voltage at XT6 stays within the limits of 4.0 0.2
volts.
Readjust the oscilloscope to 2 microseconds/division timebase and decrease the
attenuation until the signal pulse re-appears.
Set the attenuator so that the pulse is just solid and note the dB value; this should
correspond to a level equal to, or below, -95 dBm.
Connect the peak power meter to the RF OUTPUT connector XC1 of the RF source
board. The RF output level should be within the range +5 to +7 dBm. If it exceeds +7
dBm, reduce the output by turning the RF source output capacitor C26 clockwise (i.e.,
3-191
HA72500
SECTION 3
inwards). If the level is less than this +5 dBm, then refer to Section 3.4.18 to retune the
module.
Remove the peak power meter from XC1 and reconnect the RF source to the RF
amplifier via the RF filter.
Connect the peak power meter to XC2 of the receiver video module.
Tune the RF filter capacitors C1 and C2 for maximum output on the power meter.
Measure the output power, which should be +12.5 dBm 1.5 dB.
Connect the multimeter to the front panel LOCAL OSC LEVEL test jack; the signal
Connect the multimeter to the front panel RF LEVEL test jack; the signal should be 3.0
1.5 volts.
Connect the spectrum analyser via the 10 dB attenuator to XC2 of the receiver video
module. Set the analyser controls as follows:
Attenuator
Bandwidth
Display
Sweep time
20 dB
30 kHz
50 MHz/division (or full sweep)
2 seconds (0.2 seconds/division)
Observe the displayed spectrum and set the LEVEL control on the spectrum analyser for
a reference level of 0 at the wanted centre frequency. Check that the levels at
frequencies offset from the centre by the crystal frequency are at least 65 dB below the
reference. Also check, using full sweep display, that all other spectral components
present are at least 65 dB below the reference. If the module fails this test then the RF
source and the RF filter may require retuning. Refer to the RF source procedure (Section
3.4.18) for details.
Connect the frequency counter, through a 10 dB attenuator to the RF output, and
measure the actual frequency at the output. If the actual frequency is outside the allowed
range then the RF source may require retuning. Refer to the RF source procedure
(Section 3.4.18) for details.
At the completion of this sequence, switch the depot test facility rack off. Remove the
transponder extender frame and the unit under test. Restore the receiver video
(modified) to the depot test facility. Remove the test interrogator and restore the
connections to the switched attenuator. Switch the rack on and check that it operates
normally.
3.4.17
Main PWB Assembly Receiver Video 1A72521

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Frequency counter.
Small alligator clip (to short two adjacent test points on the unit under test).
Stopwatch
3.4.17.2 Initial Setup

Switch the depot test facility rack off and remove the receiver video from the transponder
subrack.
Remove the ribbon cable connector from connector XN2 on the rear of the receiver
video main board and remove this printed wiring board assembly from the receiver
3-192
HA72500
SECTION 3
video. Assemble the receiver video main board to be tested onto the receiver video.
Connect the ribbon cable connector to connector XN2 on the rear of the unit under test.
Replace the receiver video into the transponder subrack using the transponder extender
frame.
Switch the rack on. On the CTU, press the following front panel keys in the specified
sequence (as required):
LOCAL,
Using the digital multimeter, check that the voltage between test jacks +15V and EARTH
is in the range 14.25 to 15.75 volts.
On the unit under test, set the switches as follows:
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SETTING
S1
BEACON DELAY, COARSE (on front panel)
S2
BEACON DELAY, FINE (on front panel)
S3
REPLY PULSE SPACING (on front panel)
S4
SELECT ENCODER MODE
S5
SELECT DECODER MODE
S6
SET LDES PERIOD
S7
SET DEAD TIME
S8
SDES
OFF
S9
LDES
OFF
S11
IDENT (on front panel)
NORMAL
Set the ident CODE ELEMENT switches S13, S14. S15 and S16 as follows:
a.
Convert the required ident letters into International Morse Code, using the
following table.
LETTER
MORSE SYMBOL
LETTER
dot dash
MORSE SYMBOL
dash dot
dash dot dot dot
dash dash dash
dash dot dash dot
dot dash dash dot
dash dot dot
dash dash dot dash
dot
dot dash dot
dot dot dash dot
dot dot dot
dash dash dot
dash
dot dot dot dot
dot dot dash
dot dot
dot dot dot dash
dot dash dash
dot dash dash
dash dot dash
dash dot dot dash
dot dash dot dot
dash dot dash dash
dash dash
dash dash dot dot
3-193
HA72500
b.
SECTION 3
Set the switches using the following code (shading indicates switch position).
EXAMPLE: For ident code AWA, switch settings are:
Set 6 dB offset by connecting the digital multimeter to test points XT6 and XT13 and
adjusting ADJUST 6 dB OFFSET (R45) to set the displayed voltage to 0.23 0.01 volts.
Connect the frequency counter (set to period mode with a resolution of 1 millisecond) to
test points XT20 and XT17 (COMMON). Adjust IDENT CODE SPEED (R37) to set the
measured period to 125 5 milliseconds.
Connect the counter (set to period mode with a resolution of 1 millisecond) to test points
XT7 and XT1 7 (COMMON). Adjust IDENT REPTN RATE (R39) to set the measured
period to 667 25 milliseconds.
3.4.17.3 Decoder Checks

On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DETECTED LOG VIDEO and EARTH.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks ON CHANNEL VIDEO and EARTH.
On the channel 1 display on the oscilloscope check that rounded top pulses are present
in pairs. The amplitude of the displayed synchronous video pulses should be 1.8 0.5
volts with respect to the 0 volts reference.
On the channel 2 display on the oscilloscope check that square top pulse pairs are
present in line with the channel 1 pulses.
3-194
HA72500
SECTION 3
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jack DOUBLE PULSE DECODER OUT. The
oscilloscope display should show a single square pulse positioned immediately after the
second video pulse.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jack TRIGS TO MODULATOR. The

oscilloscope display should show a pulse pair positioned about 50 microseconds after
the second video pulse.
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks REPLY TIMING and EARTH also on
the test interrogator.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks REPLY ACCEPT GATES and
EARTH on the test interrogator.
On the oscilloscope, check that the centre of the first REPLY ACCEPT GATES pulse
aligns, within 0.5 microseconds, with the leading edge of the first REPLY TIMING
pulse. (If this alignment is outside the specified limits, adjust BEACON DELAY,
COARSE and FINE controls on the front panel of the unit under test to achieve the
required alignment.)
On the CTU, select Delay parameter measurement. Adjust BEACON DELAY, COARSE
and FINE controls on the front panel of the unit under test to achieve a displayed delay
of 50.0 0. 1 microseconds.
On the oscilloscope, cheek that the centre of the second REPLY ACCEPT GATES
pulse aligns, within 0.5 microseconds, with the leading edge of the second REPLY
TIMING pulse. (If this alignment is outside the specified limits, adjust REPLY PULSE
SPACING control on the front panel of the unit under test to achieve the required
alignment.)
On the CTU, select Spacing parameter measurement. Adjust the REPLY PULSE
SPACING control on the front panel of the unit under test to achieve a displayed pulse
spacing of 12.0 0.1 microseconds.
3-195
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the CTU, select D.Rate parameter measurement. The displayed decoded rate (from
the unit under test) should be in the range 990 to 1000 Hz.
On the test interrogator, switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING, ACCEPT
to +1 microsecond. The displayed decoded rate should be greater than 700 Hz. Release
the switch.
On the test interrogator, switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING, ACCEPT
to -1 microsecond. The displayed decoded rate should be greater than 700 Hz. Release
the switch.
On the test interrogator, switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING, REJECT
to +2 microseconds. The displayed decoded rate should be less than 50 Hz. Release
the switch.
On the test interrogator, switch and hold TEST TRANSPONDER DECODING, REJECT
to -2 microseconds. The displayed decoded rate should be less than 50 Hz. Release the
switch.
3.4.17.4 Over Interrogation Check

a. On the CTU select Hi Eff parameter measurement.
b. Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks
VIDEO and EARTH on the unit under test. Measure the pulse peak amplitude
(with respect to mean noise baseline). The pulse peak amplitude should be not
less than 1.1 volts.
c. While observing the oscilloscope display, press and hold TI RATE, 10 kHz on the
CTU. Measure the pulse peak amplitude (with respect to mean noise baseline).
The pulse peak amplitude should be not less than 0.7 volts. (This proves correct
operation of the AGC circuit in reducing interrogations.)
d. On the CTU, the displayed efficiency should be less than 30%. On the unit under
test, confirm that the REPLIES INHIBITED indicator is flashing at about 2 Hz.
Release the switch.
e. Short test points XT21 and XT22 to disable the AGC control to the IF amplifier.
On the CTU, press and hold TI RATE, 10 kHz. The displayed efficiency should
be less then 30%.
f.
On the oscilloscope display, the pulse peak amplitude should not have changed
from the value in step b. Release the switch.
3.4.17.5 Dead Time Check

and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test jacks DEAD TIME and EARTH on the unit
3-196
HA72500
SECTION 3
under test. The duration of the displayed pulse will have random variations. Check that
the pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73 microseconds.
3.4.17.6 Long Distance Echo Suppression Check

On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
On the unit under test, switch LDES to ON.
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test points XT13 and XT21 (GND). On the
oscilloscope, measure the peak interrogation pulse voltage; it should be 2.70 0.50
volts.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test points XT9 and XT21 (GND). While
observing the oscilloscope display, adjust LDES LEVEL (R46) to set the long distance
echo suppression level to 0.10 to 0.15 volts less than the voltage measured in the
previous step.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DEAD TIME and EARTH. The duration
of the displayed pulse will have random variations. Check that the pulse duration
remains in the range 115 to 140 microseconds.
On the CTU, select Lo Eff parameter measurement. On the oscilloscope, check that the
pulse duration remains in the range 58 to 73 microseconds.
On the unit under test, switch LDES to OFF.
3.4.17.7 Short Distance Echo Suppression Check

On the CTU, select Hi Eff parameter measurement.
and EARTH on the test interrogator) to test points XT13 and XT21 (GND) on the unit
under test. Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks SDES PULSE and
EARTH. On the oscilloscope, check that the displayed XT1 3 waveform is similar to that
shown in the figure below for SDES OFF.
Switch SDES to ON. On the oscilloscope, check that an SDES pulse is now present and
that the displayed XT13 waveform has the leading edge of the second pulse masked out
in line with the SDES pulse as shown in the figure above for SDES ON. (The SDES
pulse has a nominal width of 2.5 microseconds and is delayed a nominal 14
microseconds from the TRIGGER pulse.)
3.4.17.8 Squitter Check

On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz. The
displayed transmit rate should be in the range 990 to 1000 Hz.
3-197
HA72500
SECTION 3
Switch and hold the front panel TEST switch to INHIBIT INTERROGATIONS. On the
CTU, the displayed transmit rate should be in the range 940 to 950 Hz. Release the
switch.
On the CTU, change the TI RATE to 100 Hz. The displayed transmit rate should be in
the range 940 to 950 Hz.
Switch and hold the TEST switch to REPLY RATE MONITOR TEST. On the CTU, the
displayed transmit rate should be in the range 805 to 810 Hz. Release the switch.
3.4.17.9 Ident Check

On the CTU, select Ident Source as Mon 1. (This function is available under the Misc
menu on the CTU Test Facility when Maintenance mode is off. Ensure Maintenance
mode is switched back on.)
On the CTU, press MONITOR ALARM to switch this function from INHIBIT to NORMAL.
Ident should be transmitted within 5 seconds.
Using a stopwatch, check that the ident messages are transmitted at a rate of once
every 40 5 seconds.
On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement.
Switch IDENT to CONTINUOUS. On the CTU, the displayed transmit rate should be in
the range 1345 to 1355 MHz. Switch IDENT back to NORMAL.
3.4.17.10 Replies Inhibit Check

On the CTU, select Tx.Rate parameter measurement. Check that the displayed transmit
rate is in the range 990 to 1000 Hz.
On the monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED. Using a stopwatch, measure
the time delay until the displayed transmit rate on the CTU fails to below 5 Hz. This time
delay should be in the range 60 to 70 seconds. On the unit under test, confirm that the
REPLIES INHIBITED indicator is steady on.
On the transponder power supply switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON. Confirm
that the REPLIES INHIBITED indicator is now off.
On the CTU, confirm that the displayed transmit rate is again in the range 990 to 1000
Hz.
3.4.18
RF Source 1A72522

Oscilloscope.
Spectrum analyser.
Frequency counter.
RF millivoltmeter.
Test crystals (refer Section 3.4.18.3, step 1).
3.4.18.2 Setup
Switch the depot test facility off. Extend the receiver video using the transponder
extender frame. Remove the lid from the RF source diecast box.
Replace the RF source board from the depot test facility with the RF source to be tested
(after first removing the coaxial cable connected to the output connector XC1, (if any),
the two screws securing the printed wiring board to the box, the two screws securing the
coaxial connector bracket to the box - located beside the output connector - and the two
3-198
HA72500
SECTION 3
leads supplying power to the unit). Note the colour coding of the two power leads to
ensure that they are re-connected with the correct polarity.
Reconnect the two power leads. Replace the two screws securing the RF source to the
box and the two screws securing the coaxial connector bracket to the box.
Connect the RF millivoltmeter to the output connector, XC1, of the RF source.
Switch the depot test facility on. On the transponder power supply front panel, switch
TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
Using channel 1 of the oscilloscope (internally triggered), check that the voltages on the
power supply leads to the RF source (connect the oscilloscope earth lead to the RF
source diecast box) are at 15.0 1.0 volts and 0 volts.
3.4.18.3 Alignment
To fully test and prove an RF source, the tests of this section should be performed at the
minimum, middle and maximum reply frequencies, 962 MHz, 1088 MHz and 1213 MHz
respectively. However, if the RF source is only to be realigned for its operational reply
frequency, the tests of this section need only be performed at this operational frequency.
1.
Install the oscillator crystal in the RF source. The crystal frequency is onetwelfth of the station reply frequency.
Example:
Channel 84X reply frequency = 1171 MHz

2.
On the RF source, set capacitors C8, C12 and C18 to mid-range, as shown
below, so that clockwise movement will increase frequency.
3.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the test point XT1 on the RF source
and tune the core in L1 for peak indication on the oscilloscope, checking that
a smooth peak is obtained [approximately 2 volts].
4.
Check that the oscillator is operating at the crystal frequency by using a oneturn coupling loop connected to the frequency counter and loosely coupled to
Ll. (if the frequency is out of range, then retune L1 for correct mode and then
re-peak (after first removing the loop).
5.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test point XT2 on the RF source. Tune
6.
7.
8.
Carefully adjust trimmer C26 (through the end hole in the box of the RF
source) to give maximum power display on the RF millivoltmeter. The RF
output level should not be less than +5 dBm.
9.
Remove the RF millivoltmeter from XC1 and replace it with the spectrum
analyser.
3-199
HA72500
10.
SECTION 3
Set the spectrum analyser controls as follows:
Attenuator
Bandwidth
Display
11.
20 dB
300 kHz
50 MHz/division (or full sweep).
Observe the displayed spectrum and set the LEVEL control on the spectrum
analyser for a reference level of 0 dB at the wanted centre frequency (962,
1088, 1213 MHz or operational reply frequency). Check that the levels at
frequencies offset from the output by multiples of the crystal frequency are
equal to, or below, the following limits:
Fx
2Fx
3Fx
6 Fx and beyond
34 dBr
24 dBr
20 dBr
10 dBr
where Fx is the crystal frequency. Also check, using full sweep display, that
no abnormal spectra are present.
If the crystal frequency harmonics specification is not met directly, it may be
achieved by a slight detuning of capacitors C18 and/or C26, ensuring at the
same time that the output level does not decrease by more then 0.3 dB.
12.
Remove the spectrum analyser from XC1 and replace it with the frequency
counter (through a 10 dB attenuator). The measured output reply frequency
should be within 20 kHz of the nominal frequency of step 1.
3.4.18.4 Completion
After having performed the above tests at the required frequencies, switch the depot test
facility off, remove the RF source under test from the diecast box on the receiver video,
and restore the depot test facility RF source back into its diecast box, ensuring that all
screws and electrical connections are correctly replaced and securely tightened.
Replace the lid of the diecast box. Note that the lid is deliberately warped to ensure good
RF sealing. Tighten the screws firmly.
Restore the RF source under test to its diecast box, ensuring that all screws the lid are
correctly replaced and the screws securely tightened.
Remove the transponder extender frame and install the receiver video back in the depot
test facility.
3.4.19
IF Amplifier 1A72523

Oscilloscope.
Signal generator.
Pulse generator.
Digital multimeter.
Stopwatch.
Mixers for pulse modulation; Qty 2.
Power supply, regulated, 30 volts (required for bench test only).
Resistor, fixed, 365 kilohm (or close value), 400 mW.
Coaxial cables and adaptors. Tuning tools.
3-200
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.19.2 Setup
The IF amplifier board can be conveniently tested in a working depot test facility in the
receiver video module, so that DC supplies on the correct connectors are available. It
must be connected in place of the original IF amplifier, and the whole module should be
mounted on an extender frame. If the unit is to be tested on a bench setup, connector
details for XN1 are given in Figure 3-11. The IF amplifier must be well grounded to a
metal plate if tested in this manner.
Set all variable resistors to mid-travel and all inductor cores to flush with the tops of the
formers.
Place jumper of XN2 in the MAN position.
Switch the transponder supply TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch to ON.
Check the supply voltage with the multimeter; it should be 15.0 0.1 volts.
Measure the +6 volts supply at test point XT4; should be 6.00 0.15 volts.
Measure the GAIN CONTROL voltage at test point XT1 and adjust SET GAIN (R29); this
should vary between +6.9 0.2 and +4.2 0.2 volts. Leave SET GAIN at maximum
voltage (clockwise).
Measure DC voltage on test point XT3; it should be 6.3 0.2 volts.
3.4.19.3 No Signal Checks

Connect the oscilloscope, set to 500 mV/division, DC coupled, to XT3 and back off the
DC offset to check the noisy base line near the top of the display.
Reduce SET GAIN (R29) to minimum (counter-clockwise) and note that the noise
reduces in amplitude, noting also that the signal is negative going.
Temporarily provide a short circuit across R30 and note that the noise reduces even
further.
Remove the short circuit and reset SET GAIN to maximum gain. Measure and record the
peak-to-peak noise amplitude; it should not exceed 300 mV.
3.4.19.4 IF Checks
Connect the test system as in Figure 3-10 with the signal generator set to -90 dBm at
63.00 MHz and set the pulse generator to provide +4 volts single pulse at 1 kHz PRF
with 5 microseconds width to modulate the 63 MHz signal. Synchronise the oscilloscope
to the pulse generator.
Connect the modulated signal to XC1 of the unit under test, using the short coaxial
RG-188 cable.
Observe the XT3 signal on the oscilloscope and increase the signal generator output
level until the pulse is visible above the noise (still negative-going), as below.
3-201
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust the tuning of L5 and L7 to peak the pulse, then adjust C1 also to peak the pulse.
Repeat this tuning procedure to ensure peaking.
Turn SET GAIN (R29) to minimum (counter-clockwise) and adjust the oscilloscope for
the noise base just at the top line of the screen as below; then reset SET GAIN to
maximum.
Adjust the signal generator output level for an accurate 1 volt peak pulse, with respect to
the top graticule line, then increase the level by 3.0 dB.
Increase the signal generator frequency until the pulse amplitude is again 1 volt and
record the frequency, fi+.
Decrease the frequency below 63 MHz to give a 1 volt pulse again and note the
frequency, fi-.
Calculate fi+ minus fi-; this difference (3 dB bandwidth) should be between 1.5 and 1.9
MHz.
Reset the frequency to 63.00 MHz. Remove the mixers from the signal generator output
and connect the signal generator directly to the IF amplifier, to give unmodulated 63
MHz. Readjust the output level to give 1 volt below the top graticule line on the
oscilloscope. Note the generator output in dBm.
Reconnect the mixers as before and increase the generator output until the pulse on the
oscilloscope has a 1 volt amplitude. Note the new generator output in dBm. The
difference between these two noted values (in dBm) is the mixer-modulator insertion
loss in dB. Call this value M dB.
For this 1 volt peak pulse, note the signal generator output level in dBm (this will be
referred to as level A1).
Increase the level to give a 2 volts peak pulse and note the level in dBm (A2).
Again increase the level for a 3 volts pulse and note the level in dBm (A3).
Calculate A1 minus A2, and A2 minus A3; the difference between these two values
should be less than 5 dB.
Increase the amplifier input level to -10 dBm (signal generator level = (M - 10) dBm) and
measure the pulse amplitude, which should be greater than 3.0 volts peak.
Increase the level to 0 dBm (signal generator level = M dBm) and again measure the
amplitude; this should not be less than 3.1 volts peak.
Decrease the signal generator output to -100 dBm (signal generator level = (M -90 dBm)
and check that the pulse is still visible through the noise (approximately equal). Measure
the peak-to-peak noise voltage, which should not exceed 200 mV peak-to-peak.
3.4.19.5 Narrow Band Checks

With the oscilloscope set to 500 mV DC, monitor the DC voltage on XT8.
3-202
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust L4 tuning core into the coil so that it is 2 or 3 turns below being flush with the top
of the former. With the digital multimeter, measure the DC voltage on XT8; it should be
between 0.70 and 0.76 volts.
Adjust the tuning core of L4 counter-clockwise until the voltage is seen to jump to
between 0.9 and 1.2 volts. Note the core position. Continue adjusting the core counterclockwise until either a voltage peak or 2.0 volts is reached, whichever occurs first; leave
the core in this position. Check that the core has been rotated more than one half turn
beyond the position of the voltage jump observed above.
"
NOTE
Tuning must be done with the core being in the position stated above. Do not
exceed the voltage stated for XT8, otherwise a spurious mode of oscillation
may be induced.
Check that the final voltage on XT8 is between 1.2 and 2.1 volts. Switch the power
supply off and on at least three times, and check that the XT8 voltage returns to the
same value each time.
Monitor XT6 waveform on the oscilloscope, on the 1 volt DC range, and increase the
63.00 MHz level to -60 dBm ((M-60) dBm from generator).
Detune L3 by removing the adjuster core almost completely, peak the pulse by tuning L6
(it may be necessary to temporarily increase the oscilloscope gain) then retune L3 to
peak and note the pulse amplitude above the noise average.
Change the frequency to 63.5 MHz and note the amplitude at the middle of the pulse,
then to 62.5 MHz and again note the amplitude; equalise the pulses by retuning L3. This
pulse level should be less than 0.5 of the amplitude noted in the previous step.
Reset the frequency to 63.0 MHz.
With two oscilloscope probes on 1 volt DC range, connect both to XT9 and adjust
controls to view both traces coincidentally.
Reconnect one probe to XT10 and adjust ON CHAN THRESH (R50) for 5.0 volts.
Observe noise and pulse on XT9: adjust ON CHAN THRESH so that XT10 level cuts
through the main pulse and some of the peaks of the noise, as below.
Retune the signal generator to 62.1 MHz and confirm that most of the pulse left is below
the level of the noise peaks, then repeat at 63.9 MHz. A typical waveform is shown
dotted in the figure above. Reset the frequency to 63.0 MHz.
Reconnect the XT10 probe, set to 5 volts DC range, to XT11 and check the ON
CHANNEL signal; this should be a square 15 volts pulse with very few random noise
pulses, as shown below
3-203
HA72500
SECTION 3
Reduce the signal generator output level and note that the square pulse starts to break
up, as shown below; increase the output until the pulse is just free of breakup and record
the threshold input signal level in dBm, which should be below a level of -93 dBm
((M-93) dBm at the signal generator).
Increase the input level to -10 dBm (M-10 dBm at the signal generator) and check that
the ON CHANNEL pulse is still solid; ignore any increase of noise.
Reconnect the oscilloscope probe from XT9 to XT12 and check that the DETECTED
LOG VIDEO pulse falls completely within the width of the ON CHANNEL pulse on XT11
at all input levels from -10 to -90 dBm. Leave the signal generator level at M-30 dBm.
Transfer the oscilloscope probe from XT11 to XT12 also and reset to 1 volt DC range.
Expand the timebase to 1 microsecond/division and check the leading edges of the two
pulses, then superimpose the traces to ensure no timing or shape differences.
Reconnect one probe to XT3, AC couple and invert: adjust the vertical gain, if
necessary, and shift so that the half-pulse amplitude is at the horizontal centre line.
Adjust the oscilloscope channel displaying XT12 waveform to centre the half amplitude
points also; measure the delay between XT3 and XT12 pulses on the centre line and
record this value. The delay should be 1.65 0.1 microseconds, as shown below.
Disconnect the oscilloscope probes.
3-204
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.19.6 AGC Checks

Remove the mixers from the signal generator and connect the signal generator directly
to the IF amplifier. Set the signal generator for 63 MHz at a level of -110 dBm.
Reconnect the jumper on XN2 to AGC position.
Connect the multimeter to XT13 and measure the voltage above earth; adjust preset
SET AGC (R15) to give +6.0 volts. The supply must be +15.00.05 volts, and steady.
Connect an oscilloscope probe (1 volt DC range) to XT1 and check that the DC level is
6.9 0.3 volts.
Increase the signal generator output level slowly until the voltage starts to fall on its own;
note the signal level for the AGC threshold, which should be below a level of -93 dBm.
Increase the generator output again and note the steady decrease in XT1 voltage until it
flattens at about 2.5 volts, then starts to drop rapidly and lose control; note the signal
level just before it loses lock, which should be above a level of -30 dBm.
Reset the signal generator to M-10 dBm and replace the mixers. Check that the pulses
appear correctly at XT3, with the oscilloscope on 500 mV DC range, as previously.
Connect a 365 kilohm resistor from test point XT5 to +15 volts supply (far end of R11 is
the closest available) and measure the time elapsed for the pulse amplitude to reduce to
the minimum level; the period should be 4 1 seconds.
Note the final output pulse amplitude (A4) to be used as a reference.
Disconnect the 365 kilohm resistor from the +15 volts supply and check that the full
pulse returns in less than 1 second.
Reduce the signal generator output level until the XT3 amplitude equals A4; the amount
that the signal generator level has been reduced below the initial M-10 dBm level should
be greater than 65 dB.
3.4.19.7 Final Checks

Observe the XT3 waveform on the 200 mV AC range and increase the signal input until
the "peak tangential noise" input condition is reached. This is the level at which the noise
peaks on the bottom of the pulse coincide with the noise peaks on either side of the
pulse, as shown below. The signal generator output level at which this occurs should be
equal to or below a level of M-92 dBm.
Check that the output signals are connected via XN1, by monitoring with the
oscilloscope at the module front panel test jacks:
DETECTED LOG VIDEO signal as on XT12
ON CHANNEL VIDEO signal as on XT11.
Switch off power, remove the test cables and replace the cover with the screws.
3-205
HA72500
SECTION 3
Figure 3-10
Test Setup for IF Amplifier Checks
Figure 3-11
Power and Output Cable for IF Amplifier Checks
3-206
HA72500
3.4.20
SECTION 3
RF Amplifier 1A72524
3.4.20.1
Test Equipment
Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator; Qty 2
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
3.4.20.2 Setup
Switch the test facility rack off. Place the receiver video on the transponder extender
frame. Replace the RF amplifier in the receiver video of the test facility with the RF
amplifier to be tested. Ensure that all screws and connections are restored. Switch the
rack on.
3.4.20.3 DC Voltages
Switch on the unit by setting the TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch on the
transponder power supply to ON.
Using a digital multimeter, measure the DC voltage at the following points
R1/R3 junction
V2/R2 junction
R4/R6 junction
V5/R5 junction
8.7 0.5 volts

0.7 0.1 volts
8.7 0.5 volts
0.7 0.1 volts
Check for zero volts at XC1, XC2, XC3 and XC4.
3.4.20.4 Power Stage Check

Set up the equipment as in Figure 3-12. Connect the CW output of the signal generator
to XC3 on the RF amplifier. Connect a 50 ohms load to XC2 and power meter to XC4.
Set the signal generator frequency to 950 MHz and level to +3 dBm.
Measure the output power; it should be +12.5 1.5 dBm (12.6 to 25.1 mW).
Connect XC4 to the spectrum analyser. Set the spectrum analyser to centre frequency
1000 MHz and span at least 1000 MHz and measure any spurious components present.
All spurious components should be more than 55 dB below the signal.
"
NOTE
Ensure that no spurious components are originating in the signal generator.
Using a digital multimeter measure the DC voltage at XS3, which should be 0.25 0.07
volts. If the voltage is not within the limits specified, it may be achieved by changing the
length of the anode lead on diode V7. Shortening the lead should reduce the detector
output.
Measure the DC voltage at XS4; it should be 1.3 0.5 volts.
Repeat these measurements with the signal generator frequency to 1100 MHz and then
to 1220 MHz. The measured voltages should remain within the stated limits.
3.4.20.5 Local Oscillator Leakage Check

Reconnect the test equipment as follows:
50 ohms termination to XC1.
Signal generator to XC3, frequency 1100 MHz; level +3 dBm.
Spectrum analyser to XC2.
50 ohms termination to XC4.
3-207
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the level of 1100 MHz signal on the analyser at XC2; it should be less than -15
dBm.
Set the analyser to sweep at least zero to 1500 MHz and check for any spurious
components; all spurious components should be below -70 dBm. Again note the output
spectrum of the signal generator.
3.4.20.6 Low Noise Amplifier and Mixer Calibration

For this test it is necessary to have two signal generators, one of which has been
calibrated and characterised across the band 950-1250 MHz and at 63 MHz at a level of
-20 dBm.
Connect the calibrated signal generator to the spectrum analyser with the level set to -20
dBm.
Set the spectrum analyser as follows:
Centre frequency
Span
Resolution bandwidth
Video bandwidth
Reference level
Log scale
Sweep time
1100 MHz
400 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
-10 dBm
1 dB/division
500 milliseconds.
Measure and record the levels indicated on the analyser at each of 1025 MHz, 1055
MHz, 1087 MHz, 1120 MHz, 1150 MHz and 63 MHz.
If the tests are being carried out at a single frequency, the correction factors and
measurements need only be done at that frequency (the transmit and local oscillator
frequency).
Calculate the 63 MHz correction factor, F63, for each RF frequency, from:
F63
= (analyser reading (RF) - analyser reading (63))
for example: if analyser reading (RF) = -20.1 dBm,

and the reading for 63 MHz = -20.8 dBm, then
F63
= (-20.1 - (-20.8)) dB
= 0.7 dB
Connect the calibrated signal generator to XC1 and spectrum analyser to XC2. Connect
the second signal generator to XC3, at a level of +3 dBm.
Set the calibrated signal generator level to -20 dBm. Set the frequencies as in the table
below and for each frequency measure the 63 MHz signal level from XC2 as displayed
on the analyser. At each frequency, the difference between the 63 MHz level and the
corresponding RF level measured above gives the gain from RF to IF.
Calculate the gain at each frequency from the level measured on the analyser. Use the
formula:
Gain
= (63 MHz level - RF level + F63) dB
for example, if the measured RF level at 11 50 MHz is -20.1 dBm, the 63 MHz level is
-9.3 dBm and the 63 MHz correction factor for 1150 MHz is 0.7 dB, then the gain is:
Gain
= (-9.3 - (-20.1) +0.7) dB

= (10.8 + 0.7) dB
= 11.5 dB
The gain at all frequencies should be within the limits 12.0 1.2 dB.
3-208
HA72500
Figure 3-12
3.4.21
SECTION 3
FREQUENCY at
XC1 (MHz)
FREQUENCY at
XC3 (MHz)
1025
962
1055
992
1087
1024
1120
1183
1150
1213
Test Setup for RF Amplifier Checks
Transponder Power Supply 1A72525
Since the transponder power supply contains no electronic circuitry in addition to that
contained on the transponder power supply main board, no additional tests are required
to those specified for that assembly in Section 3.4.22
3.4.22
Main PWB Assembly Transponder Power Supply 1A72526

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter: Qty 2.
Load resistor 54 ohms, 2%, 35 watts.
3-209
HA72500
SECTION 3
Connector, plug, 4-pin.

Current limit select-on-test resistors for R40: 51 ohms, 56 ohms, 62 ohms, 68 ohms, 75
ohms and 1.5 kilohm.
3.4.22.2 Setup
With the depot test facility operating, on the CTU, press the following front panel keys in
the specified sequence (as required):
LOCAL,
A means is required to connect different loads to the HT supply output. Two ways of
doing this are:
a.
loosen the screws to either of the electrolytic capacitors C1 or C2 and attach

two leads to which any, or all, of the load resistors may be connected, or
b.
attach leads through a 4-pin plug connector to the 4-pin connector XN9
(POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR 2) on the transponder subrack motherboard.
The inner two pins are the positive connection to the HT supply; the outer two
pins are the common earth connection.
Connect the 400 ohms load resistor to the HT supply output connections.
Remove the transponder power supply, receiver video and the transmitter driver from
the depot test facility.
If a resistor is not already fitted for R40 on the unit under test, temporarily connect a 68
ohms resistor.
Place the transponder extender frame in position of the transponder power supply. Plug
the transponder power supply board to be tested into the transponder extender frame.
The receiver video and transmitter driver modules remain disconnected.
On the test interrogator front panel, set the switch MONITOR & INTERROGATOR DC
POWER to ON.
On the monitor front panel, set switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to NORMAL.
Set the TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch to ON, and check that the red TEST
indictor is on.
Check that the relay K1 is activated by confirming that the green DC POWER ON
indicator is on.
3.4.22.3 HT Supply Tests

3.4.22.3.1
Regulator Oscillator Tests
Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (set to AUTO INTERNAL CHANNEL 1 trigger and
POSITIVE slope) to test points XT9 (OSC) and XT10 (EARTH) on the unit under test.
Confirm that a signal is present at XT9 with a waveform similar to the waveform below,
with a period in the range 26.5 to 34.0 microseconds and a pulse width of less than 1.0
microsecond.
3-210
HA72500
3.4.22.3.2
SECTION 3
Current Limit Setup
1.
Connect the 54 ohms load resistor in parallel with the 400 ohms load resistor
at the HT supply output.
2.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 volts DC range, to test jacks +24V IN and
EARTH.
3.
Switch and hold the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply to TEST,
and adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on the control module of the AC
power supply to produce a multimeter reading of 21.0 0.1 volts.
4.
Connect the multimeter to test jacks HT and EARTH.
5.
Adjust HT VOLTAGE (R26) to produce a multimeter reading of 42.0 0.1

volts.
6.
Connect the second multimeter, on 2 volts range, to test jacks SUPPLY

CURRENT, + and -. The input current drawn by the transponder power
supply board, in amperes, is 10 times this multimeter reading, in volts. The
input current under this conditions should be not more than 2.6 amperes (not
more 0.26 volts on the multimeter).
7.
R40 on the unit under test is to be chosen to meet both the following
conditions:
a. with only the 54 ohms and 400 ohms load resistors connected to the HT
output, shorting R40 should cause a measured increase in HT supply
output voltage of less than 0.1 volts; and
b. with all three load resistors (54 ohms, 100 ohms and 400 ohms)
connected in parallel to the HT output, the input current drawn by the
transponder power supply board should be not more than 3.2 amperes
(not more than 0.32 volts on the multimeter).
Five standard values for R40 are 51 ohms, 56 ohms, 62 ohms, 68 ohms and
75 ohms. If a value between the standard values is required, use the higher
valued resistor and connect a 1.5 kilohm resistor in parallel with it.
8.
When the required value for R40 is determined, solder the selected value for
R40 into the unit under test.
9.
Repeat steps 7.a and 7.b to ensure that the conditions are still met.
10.
Release the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply.

Ensure that only the 100 ohms and 400 ohms load resistors are connected to the HT
supply output.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 volts range, to test jacks +24V IN and EARTH.
3-211
HA72500
SECTION 3
Switch and hold the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply to TEST, and adjust
the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on the control module of the AC power supply to
produce a multimeter reading of 24.0 0.1 volts.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 volts range, to test jacks HT and EARTH.
Adjust HT VOLTAGE (R26) to produce multimeter readings of 39.8 0.1 volts and 52.2
0.1 volts to prove that control of the HT supply output is available over this range.
Disconnect the 100 ohms load resistor from the HT supply output, and add the 54 ohms
load resistor to the 400 ohms load resistor at the HT supply output.
Adjust HT VOLTAGE to produce a multimeter reading of 42.0 0.1 volts.
Connect the second multimeter, on 2 volts range, to test jacks SUPPLY CURRENT +
and -. The input current drawn by the transponder power supply board should be not
more than 2.3 A (not more than 0.23 volts on the multimeter).
Disconnect the 54 ohms load resistor from the 400 ohms load resistor at the HT supply
output. The HT supply output should not increase to more than 44.0 volts.
Add the 100 ohms load resistor across the 400 ohms load resistor at the HT supply
output. The HT supply output should be not more than 43.0 volts.
Disconnect the 100 ohms load resistor from and add the 54 ohms load resistor to the
400 ohms load resistor at the HT supply output.
Move the second multimeter, on 200 volts range, to test jacks +24V IN and EARTH.
Adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE of the AC power supply to give an input voltage of 30.0
0.1 volts.
The HT supply output should be not more than 42.3 volts.
0.1 volts.
The HT supply output should be not more than 41.8 volts.
0.1 volts.
POSITIVE Slope) to test points XT4 (TPS_HT) and XT1 (EARTH). Confirm that a signal
is present at XT4 with a waveform similar to the waveform below. The measured peakto-peak ripple voltage (excluding spikes) should be not more than 50 mV. The measured
peak-to-peak spike voltage should be not more than 150 mV. (The amplitude of the
leading spike is dependent on the position of the oscilloscope probe leads. To minimise
pick-up, the oscilloscope probe leads may need to be connected directly to XT4, without
using the slip-on probe tip. Ground the probe sleeve directly on the printed wiring board
with a short length of wire or braid.)
3-212
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the CTU front panel, select Drv.HT from the PS.Volt menu. The displayed reading on
the CTU should be 42.0 0.4 volts.
3.4.22.5 +15V Supply and +18V Supply Tests

Connect the multimeter, on 200 volts range, to test jacks +24V IN and EARTH.
Switch and hold the TEST/FLOAT switch of the AC power supply to TEST, and adjust
the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE control on the control module of the AC power supply to
produce a multimeter reading of 24.0 0.1 volts.
Connect the second multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +15V and EARTH. The
voltage should be in the range 14.6 volts to 15.4 volts.
Move the second multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +18V and EARTH. The
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF.
Restore the receiver video and the transmitter driver back into the transponder subrack.
On the receiver video front panel, set switch IDENT to NORMAL.
On the transmitter driver front panel, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to NORMAL.
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
Adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE of the AC power supply to give an input voltage of
30.00.1 volts.
The reading on the multimeter monitoring the +18V output should be in the range 17.4
volts to 18.6 volts.
Move the second multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +15V and EARTH. The
0.1 volts.
While holding TI RATE, 10 kHz pressed, the reading on the multimeter monitoring the
+15V supply output should be in the range 14.4 volts to 15.4 volts. Release the 10kHz
switch.
Move the second multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +18V and EARTH. While
holding TI RATE, 10 kHz pressed, the measured voltage of the +18V supply output
should be in the range 17.2 volts to 18.4 volts. Release the 10 kHz switch.
0.1 volts.
On the CTU front panel, select TP.18V from the PS.Volt menu. The displayed reading on
the CTU should be within 0.2 volts of the reading on the multimeter monitoring the
+18V supply output.
Move the second multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +15V and EARTH.
On the CTU front panel, select TP.15V from the PS.Volt menu. The displayed reading on
the CTU should be within 0.1 volts of the reading on the multimeter monitoring the
+15V supply output.
3-213
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.22.6 Control Signals

POWER to NORMAL.
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to NORMAL. Check that:
a. On the unit under test, both DC POWER ON (green) and TEST (red) indicators
are off.
b. On the CTU, the MODULES TEST indicator is off.
c. On the unit under test, relay K1 is released.
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF. Check that:
a. On the unit under test, the DC POWER ON (green) indicator is off and the TEST
(red) indicator is on.
b. On the CTU, the MODULES TEST indicator is on.
c. On the unit under test, relay K1 is released.
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON. Check that:
a. On the unit under test, both DC POWER ON (green) indicator and TEST (red)
indicator are on.
b. On the CTU, the MODULES TEST indicator is on.
c. On the receiver video, the REPLIES INHIBITED indicator is off.
On the CTU front panel, press the MAINTENANCE key to turn its indicator off.
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to NORMAL. Check on the receiver video that the
REPLIES INHIBITED indicator is now off.
On the CTU, press SELECT MAIN, NO 1. Check that:
a. On the unit under test, the DC POWER ON (green) indicator is on and the TEST
(red) indicator is off.
b. On the CTU, the MODULES TEST indicator is off.
c. On the unit under test, relay K1 is activated.
After having performed the above tests, remove the transponder extender frame and
install the transponder power supply belonging to the depot test facility back in the
3.4.23
Transmitter Driver 1A72530

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
SMA connector torque wrench.
Cables and adaptors.
3.4.23.2 Setup
"
NOTE
The alignment procedure involves temporary changes to the connections to the

sub-modules of the transmitter driver. To ensure correct alignment and
3-214
HA72500
SECTION 3
subsequent correct operation, ensure that each RF connector is securely

tightened (use a torque wrench for SMA connectors) following its connection.
When making measurements of the peak RF power, correction needs to be
made for the errors in the peak power meter and for the actual losses in any
attenuators at the input to the peak power meter. This requires that the peak
power meter and any attenuators used be characterised at the frequency of
operation and these corrections applied to the meter readings.
CAUTION

measured.
The unit under test is normally aligned at a reply frequency of 1215 MHz. However, if
alignment and testing is required at the operational reply frequency, the tests below
need only be performed at this operational frequency. Tune the receiver video in the
depot test facility for the test and alignment frequency(ies) - see Section 3.4.18 if an RF
Source is to be aligned; see Appendix K if the tests are being performed at the depot
test facility.
LOCAL,
On the unit under test, set the and controls switches as follows:
RF OUTPUT (on front panel) fully clockwise,
DRIVER DC POWER (on front panel) to OFF,
ALC LOOP (S2 on pulse shaper board) to OPEN,
ALC (S3 on pulse shaper board) to VIDEO,
MED COLL (S4 on pulse shaper board) to DC.
On the pulse shaper board of the unit under test, adjust the following controls all fully
counter-clockwise:
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58),
1W PULSE (R85),
EXCITER DC (R97), and
MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115).
On the unit under test, check that the 50 ohms termination E1 is connected to PORT 3 of
circulator W1. Check that termination E2 is connected to PORT 2 of circulator W2.
At the depot test facility, remove the transmitter driver. Place the transponder extender
frame in the position of the transmitter driver. Plug the unit under test into the
transponder extender frame.
POWER to ON.
On the receiver video front panel, set the IDENT switch to CONTINUOUS.
3-215
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the front panel of the unit under test, set the DRIVER DC POWER switch to ON, and
check that the DC POWER ON and TEST indicators are on.
Connect the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks TRIGS TO MODULATOR
and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to VIDEO OUT on the peak power meter
to check the pulse shape.
Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test jacks HT and EARTH on the
transponder power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 42.0 0.2 volts.
(If out of range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting HT VOLTAGE
(R26) on the transponder power supply main board.)
3.4.23.3 Exciter Alignment

On the transponder power supply, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF.
Connect a calibrated 20 dB attenuator to RF IN on the peak power meter.
Disconnect the coaxial cable from the output of the exciter and connect a short coaxial
cable from the exciter output connector to the IN connector on the 20 dB attenuator.
Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test points XT7 and XT8 (COMMON) on
the pulse shaper board.
On the transponder power supply, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
While monitoring both the multimeter and the peak power meter, adjust EXCITER DC
(R97) to produce a multimeter reading of 32.0 0.2 volts. The peak power meter reading
should not exceed 40 mW (or 4.0 watts if the reading is corrected for the 20 dB
attenuator).
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust 1W PULSE (R85) to produce a peak
power meter reading of 60.0 0.5 mW (or 6.00 0.05 watts if the reading is corrected for
the 20 dB attenuator) to confirm that this output power can be achieved.
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust EXCITER DC (R97) to produce a peak
power meter reading of 50.0 0.5 mW (or 5.00 0.05 watts if the reading is corrected for
the 20 dB attenuator).
Disconnect the test coaxial cable from the output of the exciter to the IN connector on
the 20 dB attenuator and reconnect the coaxial cable that connects the output of the
exciter to the input of the medium power driver.
3.4.23.4 Medium Power Driver Alignment

Replace the 20 dB attenuator connected to the input of the peak power meter with the
30 dB attenuator.
Disconnect the coaxial cable from the input of the power modulation amplifier and
reconnect it (with suitable adaptors) to the IN connector on the 30 dB attenuator
connected to the peak power meter.
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115) to
produce a peak power meter reading of 28.0 0.5 mW (or 28.0 0.5 watts if the reading
is corrected for the 30 dB attenuator).
"
NOTE
If the power output specified above cannot be achieved with 5 watts from the
exciter, it is permissible to return to Section 3.4.23.3 and adjust EXCITER DC
(R97) to produce an exciter output power of 6.0 watts. Do this ONLY if the
specified power cannot be obtained with 5 watts drive.
3-216
HA72500
SECTION 3
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115) to
produce a peak power meter reading of 25.0 0.5 mW (or 25.0 0.5 watts if the reading
is corrected for the 30 dB attenuator).
Disconnect the coaxial cable from the IN connector on the 30 dB attenuator and
reconnect it to the input of the power modulation amplifier.
3.4.23.5 Power Modulation Amplifier Alignment

On the 1kW RF amplifier, disconnect the coaxial cable from the INPUT connector, and
connect the cable (with suitable adaptors) to the IN connector on the 30 dB attenuator
connected to the peak power meter.
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) to produce
a peak power meter reading of 60.0 0.5 mW (or 60.0 0.5 watts if the reading is
corrected for the 30 dB attenuator).
On the circulator W2, swap the connections to ports 1 and 3 (i.e., the output of the power
modulation amplifier to port 1 of the circulator; port 3 of the circulator to connector XC2
(RF DRIVE PULSE); extender coaxial cables will probably be required).
The reading on the peak power meter should be not more than 1.0 mW (or not more
than 1.0 watt if the reading is corrected for the 30 dB attenuator).
On the circulator W2, swap the connections to ports 1 and 3 (i.e., the output of the power
modulation amplifier to port 3 of the circulator; port 1 of the circulator to connector XC2
(RF DRIVE PULSE); remove the extender coaxial cables if used).
While monitoring the peak power meter, adjust POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) to produce
a peak power meter reading of 50.0 0.5 mW (or 50.0 0.5 watts if the reading is
corrected for the 30 dB attenuator).
Observe the waveform on the oscilloscope (the video output from the peak power
meter). Check that any tilt on the top of the waveform (see figure below) should have a
peak-to-peak value not more than 10 % of the mean pulse height.
Check that the space between the two pulses is 1.5 0.1 microseconds. (If it is not, then
set it within this limit using the preset BACK PORCH (R36) on the pulse shaper board).
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks DRIVER LEVEL and EARTH. The
displayed waveform (see figure above) should have an amplitude (when measured with
respect to the 0 volts reference) in the range 3.0 to 4.0 volts.
3-217
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the CTU front panel, select TD.Drv from the Level menu. The displayed reading on
.the CTU should be in the range 2.1 to 2.9 volts.
Set RF OUTPUT fully counter-clockwise.
After having performed the above tests, remove the transponder extender frame and
install the transmitter driver belonging to the depot test facility back in the transponder
subrack.
3.4.24
Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly 1A72531

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Test clip lead, 300 20 mm long, with alligator clips both ends.
3.4.24.2 Setup
LOCAL,
Remove the transmitter driver from the depot test facility.
Place the transponder extender frame in the transmitter driver position in the
transponder. Plug the pulse shaper board to be tested into the transponder extender
frame (without the transmitter driver module).
POWER to ON.
On the unit under test, set the following variable resistors fully counter-clockwise:
R3, R5, R7, R9, R11, R13, R17, R36, R53, R58, R62, R69, R85, R97, R115.
and set fully clockwise:
R54.
Set the option switches as follows:
DRIVER DC POWER (S1) to OFF (towards H1),
ALC LOOP (S2) to OPEN,
ALC (S3) to VIDEO,
Set link X1 (POWER) to the 1kW position.
On the transponder power supply front panel, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to
ON.
Check that the green DC POWER ON indicator (H1) is on.
Check that the red TEST indicator (H2) is on.
3-218
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.24.3 Rectangular Modulation Test

Connect channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks TRIGS TO
MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to test jack SQUARE
MODULATION (XA1) and the earth lead to EARTH (XA6).
Measure the peak voltage of the pulses at XA1. This voltage should be in the range 3.0
volts to 4.5 volts.
Adjust 1W PULSE (R85) fully clockwise while observing the output of XA1 on the
oscilloscope. The peak voltage of the pulse should increase smoothly to 22.0 3.0 volts.
Adjust 1W PULSE for a peak voltage of 16.0 0.5 volts.
Measure the time period between the two pulses. This time period should be in the
range 1.7 to 2.2 microseconds.
Adjust BACK PORCH (R36) fully clockwise. The time period between the two pulses
should decrease to not more than 0.5 microseconds. Set BACK PORCH for a 1.7 0.1
microseconds time period between the two pulses and measure the total duration of the
double pulse, which should be 22.5 1.0 microseconds.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the lower end of R18 (earth to test point XT2). The
amplitude of the rectangular pulse should be 15.0 1 .0 volts, and its duration should
exceed the double pulse duration, measured above, by 5.5 2.5 microseconds.
3.4.24.4 Driver Level Monitor Tests

OFF.
Unplug the receiver video, but leave it located in the transponder subrack.
ON.
Connect the multimeter (set to 20 volts range) to test jacks FUNCTION GENERATOR
(XA2) and EARTH (XA7). Set INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) fully counter-clockwise;
the multimeter reading should be 2.4 0.1 volts. Then set INTEGRATOR BALANCE fully
clockwise; the multimeter reading should now be 3.5 0.2 volts. Adjust INTEGRATOR
BALANCE to give a multimeter reading of 2.50 0.5 volts.
On the CTU front panel, select TD.Drv from the Level menu. The displayed reading on
the CTU should be not more than 0.8 volts.
Connect the test clip lead between the back of test jack FUNCTION GENERATOR
(XA2) and the top of resistor R100. The displayed reading on the CTU should be 1.6
0.2 volts.
OFF.
Plug the receiver video back into the transponder subrack.
ON.
Ensure R3, R5, R7, R9, R11, R13 are all set fully counter-clockwise. The displayed
reading on the CTU should be not more than 3.6 volts.
Adjust R3 to produce a displayed reading on the CTU of 3.6 0.1 volts.
Connect both channel 1 and channel 2 of the oscilloscope (still externally triggered from
test jacks TRIGS TO MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to
test jacks FUNCTION GENERATOR (XA2) and EARTH (XA7). Ensure that the two
3-219
HA72500
SECTION 3
oscilloscope probes connected to channels 1 and 2 of the oscilloscope are calibrated

similarly by ensuring that the displayed waveforms for these two channels are identical.
Measure the peak height of the waveform on the oscilloscope with respect to the 0 volts
reference. It should be 5.6 0.5 volts.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jack DRIVER LEVEL (XA5). Confirm that the
two waveforms on the oscilloscope are identical (except for some possible high
frequency noise).
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to XN2:15 (DETECTED DRIVER RETURN) (ground
to test point XT2). Confirm that the two waveforms on the oscilloscope are identical
(except for some possible high frequency noise).
3.4.24.5 Function Generator Test

1. Connect the multimeter (on 20 volts range) across R102 (COMMON to bottom
end). Ensure that the PULSE SHAPE presets R3, R5, R7, R9, R11, R13 are all
set fully counter-clockwise. Adjust INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) to produce a
2. Adjust R3 fully clockwise. The multimeter reading should be in the range 6.50 to
7.10.
3. Adjust R3 fully counter-clockwise.
6.50.
7.50.
7.50.
8.60.
8.60.
14. Adjust R3 to give a multimeter reading of 5.8 0.1 volts.
The procedure of steps 14 to 19 has to be performed in the specified order. If a
mistake was made in the alignment, the procedure has to be repeated from step
14 (after first readjusting R3, R5, R7, R9, R11, R13 all fully counter-clockwise).
3-220
HA72500
SECTION 3
20. Confirm that the two waveforms on the oscilloscope (connected to XN2:15 and
the DRIVER LEVEL test jack XA5) are identical (except for some possible high
frequency noise).
21. Measure the peak height of the waveform on the oscilloscope with respect to the
0 volts reference. It should be 10.8 0.5 volts.
22. Adjust INTEGRATOR BALANCE (R17) to set the trailing edge of the waveform
on the oscilloscope to be level with the leading edge.
3.4.24.6 Shaped Pulse Modulation and TD_MOD_LVL Tests

On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks SHAPED MODULATION (XA3) and
EARTH (XA7); disconnect channel 2.
Measure the voltage at test jack SHAPED MODULATION (XA3). This should be a DC
level in the range 5.0 to 7.0 volts.
Connect the test clip lead between the ANODE end of V13 and test point XT8 (EARTH).
Using the oscilloscope, measure the voltage at test jack SHAPED MODULATION (XA3).
This should be a DC level of not more than 2.5 volts.
Remove the test clip lead between the ANODE end of V13 and test point XT8 (EARTH).
Adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) fully clockwise. Using the oscilloscope, measure
the voltage at the SHAPED MODULATION test jack (XA3). This should be a DC level of
at least 17.0 volts.
Adjust PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) to produce a DC level of 17.0 1.0 volts on the
oscilloscope display.
Connect the test clip lead between the ANODE end of V13 and test point XT8 (EARTH).
Using the oscilloscope, measure the voltage at the SHAPED MODULATION test jack
(XA3). This should be a DC level in the range 10.0 to 13.0 volts.
Remove the test clip lead between the ANODE end of V13 and test point XT8 (EARTH).
On the CTU front panel, select TD.Mod from the Level menu. The displayed reading on
the CTU should be in the range 1.50 to 1.75 volts.
Connect the oscilloscope to the test jack SHAPED MODULATION (XA3) and adjust
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) clockwise whilst observing the oscilloscope. A pulse
should develop from the base line, and should increase in height with the top eventually
flattening off. Ensure that a pulse with a flattened top was achieved.
Adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) counter-clockwise until the pulse just regains its
pointed shape. The pulse peak voltage should be in the range 39 volts to 41 volts.
Adjust MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58) to produce a pulse peak voltage of 35.0 1.0
volts.
The displayed reading on the CTU should be in the range 3.2 to 3.5 volts.
3.4.24.7 ALC Loop Check

On the unit under test, set:
ALC SOURCE (S3) to VIDEO,
ALC LOOP (S2) to CLOSED,
ALC LEVEL (R62) to fully counter-clockwise.
3-221
HA72500
SECTION 3
Measure the peak pulse voltage at SHAPED MODULATION test jack XA3 (as displayed
on the oscilloscope - with respect to the 0 volts reference). This voltage should be not
more than 18 volts (low amplitude pulses may not be visible above the DC baseline).
While monitoring the waveform on the oscilloscope, adjust ALC LEVEL fully clockwise.
Check that the baseline voltage remains constant within 0.1 volts during this test.
Measure the peak pulse voltage at SHAPED MODULATION test jack (as displayed on
the oscilloscope - with respect to the 0 volts reference). This voltage should be at least
38.0 volts.
Set ALC LEVEL for a peak pulse voltage of 35.0 1.0 volts on the oscilloscope.
3.4.24.8 Second Pulse Equalising Test

Adjust 2ND PULSE EQUALISING (R54) fully clockwise. On the oscilloscope (still
connected to SHAPED MODULATION test jack XA3), compare the height of the first
pulse with the height of the second pulse; the two pulse peaks should be within 0.1 volts
of each other.
Adjust 2ND PULSE EQUALISING fully counter-clockwise. Compare the height of the
first pulse with the height of the second pulse; the height of the first pulse should be
greater than the height of the second by at least 2.0 volts.
Adjust 2ND PULSE EQUALISING so that the heights of the two pulses are the same (to
within 0.1 volts).
3.4.24.9 Medium Power Driver Supply Test

Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to pin 12 of connector XN2 (on the wiring
side of the printed wiring board) and test point XT6 (COMMON).
Set MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115) fully counter-clockwise. The multimeter voltage
reading should be not greater than 13.0 volts.
Set MED POWER DRIVER DC fully clockwise; the multimeter voltage reading should be
at least 37.0 volts.
Adjust MED POWER DRIVER DC to give a multimeter voltage reading of 24.0 0.1
volts.
Set switch MED COLL (S4) to MODULATION. The multimeter voltage reading should be
3.4.24.10 Exciter Supply Test

Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test points XT7 and XT8 (COMMON).
Adjust EXCITER DC (R97) fully clockwise; the multimeter voltage reading should be at
least 34.0 volts.
Set EXCITER DC fully counter-clockwise; the multimeter voltage reading should be not
more than 13.0 volts.
Adjust EXCITER DC to give a voltage of 24.0 0.1 volts.
3.4.24.11 Power Modulation Amplifier Supply Test

Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test points XT5 and XT8 (COMMON)
Adjust POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) fully clockwise; the multimeter voltage reading
should be at least 37.0 volts.
Set POWER MOD AMP DC fully counter-clockwise; the multimeter voltage reading
should be not more than 24.0 volts.
3-222
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust POWER MOD AMP DC to give a voltage of 24.0 0.1 volts.
3.4.24.12 VC1 Supply and BIAS Test

ON.
Switch DC POWER (S1) to NORMAL (away from LED H1), ALC LOOP (S2) to CLOSED
and ALC SOURCE (S3) to DETECTED RF. Check that the red TEST indicator (H2) is
off.
Check that the red TEST indicator (H2) is on for each of the following combination of
switch settings:
DC POWER (S1)
ALC LOOP (S2)
ALC SOURCE (S3)
OFF
CLOSED
DETECTED RF
NORMAL
OPEN
DETECTED RF
NORMAL
CLOSED
VIDEO
Move the POWER link (X1) to the 150W position. Set switch ALC SOURCE (S3) to the
DETECTED RF position; check that the red TEST indicator (H2) is on.
Set switch DC POWER (S1) to NORMAL, ALC LOOP (S2) to CLOSED and ALC
SOURCE (S3) to VIDEO; check that the red TEST indicator (H2) is off.
Return the POWER link (X1) to the 1kW position.
Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test points XT10 and XT8 (COMMON).
Switch DRIVER DC POWER (S1) to NORMAL and check that the red TEST indicator
(H2) is off; the multimeter voltage reading (voltage at XT10) should be 16.3 0.5 volts.
Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to the +ve end of capacitor C41 and to test
point XT8 (COMMON); the multimeter voltage reading should be 1.5 0.2 volts.
Switch DRIVER DC POWER to OFF.
3.4.24.13 Completion
After having performed the above tests, on the transponder power supply front panel,
switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF.
On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
Remove the transmitter driver from the transponder extender frame and the transponder
extender frame from the depot test facility. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the unit
under test connector XN2, and remove the unit under test from the transmitter driver.
Assemble the pulse shaper board (belonging to the depot test facility) to the transmitter
driver belonging to the depot test facility. Connect the ribbon cable from the RF modules
to connector XN2 of the pulse shaper board. Install the transmitter driver into the
NORMAL.
On the test interrogator front panel, set the MONITOR & INTERROGATOR DC POWER
switch to NORMAL.
On the receiver video front panel, set the IDENT switch to NORMAL.
3-223
HA72500
3.4.25
SECTION 3
Exciter 1A72532

Signal generator.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
Oscilloscope.
Current probe.

This section comprises preliminary check, an alignment procedure and a sequence of
tests repeated at three frequencies of 1215, 1090 and 950 MHz. The testing sequence
to be followed is:
a. Perform the preliminary checks.
b. Peak tune the amplifier at 1215 MHz; then equalise the response over the
frequency band.
c. Measure amplifier performance at the three frequencies in the band.
3.4.25.3 Preliminary Checks

Select the diode test range on the multimeter and measure the continuity between
connector XN1:9 and ground (negative meter lead to ground). Check that a meter
reading equivalent to the forward resistance of a silicon diode is obtained.
With the negative meter lead to ground, check that no continuity is present at each of the
following points:
XN1:1
XN1:3
XN1:5
3.4.25.4 DC Checks
Fit the exciter board in place of the board in the depot test facility transmitter driver:
a. Remove the module from the depot test facility and remove the cover of the
exciter.
b. Disconnect the input and output coaxial cables and the 10-pin connector and, by
removing the six screws retaining the printed wiring board, take it out of the box.
c. Install the board on test into the box, using the same screws, and connect the
10-pin connector.
d. Replace the transmitter driver module, using the transponder extender frame,
into the correct position in the depot test facility.
With the power switched off, connect the other instruments as shown in Figure 3-13. The
small RF test items (i.e., load attenuator and peak power sensor) can be placed on the
top of the extender frame.
Set the signal generator output to off, then switch the transmitter driver module DRIVER
DC POWER switch to NORMAL.
3-224
HA72500
Figure 3-13
SECTION 3
Exciter Test Setup
Check that the following voltages are present on the amplifier under test:
V1 base bias (R1)
V1 collector (R2)
0.8 0.1 volts DC

16.3 1.5 volts DC
Adjust the controls on the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver to give the
following signals on the amplifier under test:
a. Set V3, V4 collector supply (as measured at XN1:1) to 15.0 0.2 volts peak pulse
by adjusting 1W PULSE (R85).
b. Set V5, V6 collector supply (as measured at XN1:2) to 32.0 0.5 volts DC by
adjusting EXCITER DC (R97).
3.4.25.5 Alignment
With the drive voltage set as above, set the signal generator to 1215 MHz and a level of
+10 dBm (10 mW), but do not yet apply RF drive to the amplifier under test (that is, leave
the generator RF output off).
Set the controls on the peak power meter as follows:
READING OFFSET
RANGE
MODE
CORRECTION
20 dB
100 mW
DIRECT
to suit sensor
Connect the termination unit of the current probe to channel 1 of the oscilloscope. Set
the current probe sensitivity to 2 mA/mV and the oscilloscope sensitivity to 20
mV/division, so that the display represents 40 mA/division.
Clip the current probe on to the current loop leading to collectors V3 and V4 of the
exciter under test. Check that the arrow on the probe is pointing towards the transistors
V3 and V4.
Check the combined current pulse of V3 and V4 (in the absence of RF drive) and with a
collector voltage of 16.3 volts (set as before). The current pulse should be greater than
30 mA, but less than 140 mA (refer to the conversion factor of the current probe).
3-225
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the signal generator, set the RF switch to ON. Using the correct alignment tool,
proceed to tune the 1 watt stage by trimming C5, C17, C 15 and C21 in succession, and
repeating the process, until there is no further increase obtainable in the current. Check
that the maximum current obtained is greater than 200 mA, but less than 500 mA.
Remove the current probe from the first loop, and clip it on to the loop supplying the
current to transistors V5 and V6. Trim C26 and C30 in succession, and repeat the
process, until there is no further increase obtainable in the current. Check that the
maximum current obtained is greater than 300 mA, but less than 650 mA.
Observe on channel 2 of the oscilloscope, the peak of the detected RF pulse while
trimming C33 and C34 in succession. Repeat the process several times, until no further
increase can be obtained in the pulse amplitude. Check the output power on the peak
power meter and ensure that 5 watts power is achievable by varying the 1W PULSE
control on the pulse shaper board. Check that the pulse amplitude at the collectors of V3
and V4 required to give 5 watts output is not greater than 16 volts.
Set the signal generator frequency to 950 MHz, the output level remaining at +10 dBm.
Check that 5 watts output power is achievable by varying the 1W pulse control on the
pulse shaper board. Check that the pulse amplitude required to get 5 watts is not greater
than 16 volts.
Set the signal generator frequency to 1090 MHz, the output level remaining at +10 dBm.
Check that it is possible to adjust the output power to 5 watts by varying 1W PULSE
(R85) on the pulse shaper board. Check that the pulse amplitude required to get 5 watts
is not greater than 16 volts.
Remove the exciter board from the box in the transmitter driver module and install it in its
original box; replace the original board in the module.
3.4.26
Medium Power Driver 1A72533

Oscilloscope.
Current probe.
Signal generator.
Digital multimeter.
Attenuator, medium, 10 dB: Qty 2.
Dual directional coupler.
Coaxial detector.
Resistor, 4.75 kilohm, 400 mW.
Adaptor, 50 ohms, SMA (female) - SMA (female).
Termination, 50 ohms, 1 watt.
Calibration link (semi-flexible cable, 100 mm long, SMA(F) - SMA(F).

The medium power driver to be tested, is fitted in place of the unit in the depot test
facility transmitter driver module, as follows:
1. Remove the module from the depot test facility and remove the cover of the
medium power driver.
2. Disconnect the input and output coaxial cables and the 4-pin connector and, by
removing the three screws visible through the PWBs, take the complete medium
power driver out of the module.
3-226
HA72500
SECTION 3
3. Install the unit on test into the module, using the same screws, and connect the
4-pin connector
4. Replace the transmitter driver module, using the extender frame, into the correct
position in the depot test facility.
5. Using the digital multimeter, check that the input microstrip circuit is grounded.
6. Using the digital multimeter, check that the output microstrip circuit is isolated
from ground.
7. Disconnect the link between the DC control board (terminal X2) and the RF
board.
8. Set switch MED COLL (S4) on the pulse shaper board to DC, switch ALC LOOP
(S2) to OPEN and switch ALC (S3) to VIDEO, then set the front panel DRIVER
DC POWER switch to NORMAL, and set the TRANSPONDER DC POWER to
ON. Measure the HT voltage on X5; it should be 42 0.2 volts.
9. While monitoring the voltage at X2 with the digital multimeter, slowly increase
MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115) control on the pulse shaper board from
minimum to maximum. Check that the voltage at X2 increases with the increase
of the control voltage.
10. The voltage at X2 must be less than 6 volts below the voltage on XN1 pin C.
11. Set the front panel DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF.
12. Replace the link removed in step 7.

This section details a calibration procedure at the depot test facility frequency. The RF
test equipment (directional coupler with detectors, load attenuators and peak power
sensor) can be placed on the top of the extender frame.
The coaxial cable from the exciter unit output to the directional coupler input may be as
long as necessary, but the cable from the coupler to the unit on test should be as short
as possible, as also should be the cable from the medium power driver to the 20 dB
attenuator before the power meter.
CAUTION
check that the 30 dB of attenuation is connected in front of the power
sensor.
Arrange the test setup as shown in Figure 3-14 with the SMA calibration link connected
in circuit instead of the medium power driver which is to be tested. Remove the 10 dB
attenuator at the peak power sensor, and connect the sensor directly to the 20 dB
attenuator.
3-227
HA72500
SECTION 3
Figure 3-14
Medium Power Driver Test Setup
Switch on the mains to all the test equipment, with the transmitter driver DRIVER DC
POWER switch remaining set to OFF.
oscilloscope from the receiver video TRIGS TO MODULATOR test jack.
mW. Set the peak power meter to measure in COMPARE mode. Adjust the COMPARE
LEVEL controls on the peak power meter to give a meter reading which corresponds to
4.0 watts into the 20 dB attenuator. The actual meter reading will depend on the exact
attenuation of the 20 dB attenuator, and it is important that its calibration be taken into
account when deriving the meter reading. As an example, the figures below show the
correct meter reading for various values of attenuation:
Pinput (watts)
ATTENUATION
Pmeter (watts)
4.00
19.7
4.29
4.00
19.8
4.19
4.00
19.9
4.09
4.00
20.0
4.00
4.00
20.1
3.91
4.00
20.2
3.82
4.00
20.3
3.73
Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to NORMAL.
3-228
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust 1W PULSE (R85) level control on the pulse shaper board until the main body of
the pulse lies on the 4.0 watts horizontal trace on the oscilloscope (that is, ignore any
initial spike in the pulse). If the top of the main body of the pulse slopes, then take an
average level.
Once 4 watts of power is available, measure the output from the HP detector on the
second oscilloscope and record the peak pulse voltage to the nearest 20 mV. This value
then becomes the '4W available' calibration at this frequency. (The detector output is a
negative-going pulse.)
Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF. Replace the 10 dB
attenuator between the peak power sensor and the 20 dB attenuator.

Arrange the test setup as shown in Figure 3-14, with the medium power driver on test in
circuit in place of the SMA calibration link. Set the RANGE switch on the peak power
meter to 100 mW and the MODE switch to DIRECT. Check that there is a total of 30 dB
attenuation between the amplifier and peak power sensor.
The reading offset should be switched to 30 dB and the correction set for 2 GHz from the
correction table on the peak power sensor.
Observe the output power from the medium power driver on channel 2 of the
oscilloscope.
Observe the output from the detector on channel 1 of the oscilloscope and adjust 1W
PULSE (R85) to bring the displayed pulse level to the '4 watts available' level.
Measure the output power on the peak power meter; this should be at least 25 watts
peak.
Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF.
Connect the current probe to the oscilloscope channel 1 and set the sensitivity to read
8.0 amperes full scale (0.1 volts/10 mA/mV); clip the current probe to the link from X2 to
the RF board.
On the pulse shaper board check that switch MED COLL (S4) is set to DC.
Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to ON and check that the
current pulse shape is as shown below, the peak current should be 1.9 to 2.7 amperes
for the 25 watts output.
Adjust MED POWER DRIVER DC (R115) and check that the channel 1 waveform varies
as indicated below.
Reset the controls and switch on the main board to their original conditions.
Switch the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF, remove the unit on
test and replace the original unit in the module.
3-229
HA72500
3.4.27
SECTION 3

Oscilloscope.
Current probe.
Signal generator.
Digital multimeter.
Attenuator, medium, 10 dB: Qty 2.
Dual directional coupler.
Coaxial detector.
Capacitor, electrolytic, 100 uF, 100 volts: Qty 2.
Resistor, 4.75 kilohm, 400 mW.
Adaptor, 50 ohms, SMA (female) - SMA (female).
Termination, 50 ohms, 1 watt.
Connector, plug, 4-pin.
Calibration link (semi-flexible cable, 100 mm long, SMA(F) - SMA(F).

For this test, the power modulation amplifier to be tested should be placed on a bench
top adjacent to the depot test facility.
Remove the transmitter driver module from the depot test facility and set the following
switched on the pulse shaper board:
ALC LOOP (S2) to OPEN
ALC (S3) to VIDEO
Replace the transmitter driver module, using the extender cradle, into the correct
position in the depot test facility.
On the amplifier under test, use the digital multimeter, check that the two input microstrip
circuits are grounded.
Use the digital multimeter to check that the two output microstrip circuits are isolated
from ground.
Disconnect the link between the DC control board (terminal X2) and the RF board.
Attach leads (minimum of 1.0 mm2) through a 4-pin plug connector to the 4-pin
connector XN9 (POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR 2) on the transponder subrack
motherboard in the depot test facility. The inner two pins are the positive connection to
the HT supply; the outer two pins are the common earth connection.
Connect the negative lead to the body of the amplifier under test, and connect the
positive lead to pins C and D of the 4-pin connector XN1.
Switch the transponder power supply front panel switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
to ON and measure HT voltage at the input of the amplifier on test (XN1:C); it should be
42 0.2 volts.
Measure the voltage at X2 with the digital multimeter; this voltage must be less than 6
volts below the voltage on XN1:C.
On the transponder power supply front panel, set TRANSPONDER DC POWER switch
to OFF.
3-230
HA72500
SECTION 3

This section details a calibration and test procedure which must be performed at depot
test facility frequencies of 1150 MHz and 1213 MHz.
CAUTION
Figure 3-15
check that at least 30 dB of attenuation is always connected in front of the
power sensor.
Power Modulation Amplifier Test Setup
At the back if the 1kW power amplifier, remove the type-N coaxial plug at the INPUT
connector. Using a type-N elbow and adaptors, connect a suitable cable from the input
cable just removed to the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15. This allows RF drive,
for the amplifier under test, to be obtained from the transmitter driver in the depot test
facility.
Arrange the test setup as shown in Figure 3-15 with the SMA calibration link connected
in circuit instead of the power modulation amplifier which is to be tested. Remove the 10
dB attenuator at the peak power sensor, and connect the sensor directly to the 30 dB
attenuator.
Switch on the mains to all the test equipment, with the transmitter driver DRIVER DC
POWER switch remaining set to OFF
Switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
oscilloscope from the receiver video TRIGS TO MODULATOR test jack.
mW. Set the peak power meter to measure in COMPARE mode.
3-231
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust the COMPARE LEVEL controls on the peak power meter to give a meter reading
which corresponds to 50.0 watts into the 30 dB attenuator. The actual meter reading will
depend on the exact attenuation of the 30 dB attenuator, and it is important that its
calibration be taken into account when deriving the meter reading. As an example, the
figures below show the correct meter reading for various values of attenuation.
Pinput (watts)
ATTENUATION
Pmeter (watts)
50.0
29.7
53.6
50.0
29.8
52.4
50.0
29.9
51.2
50.0
30.0
50.0
50.0
30.1
48.9
50.0
30.2
47.8
50.0
30.3
46.7
Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to NORMAL.
Observe the forward power pulse on channel 1 of the oscilloscope.
Adjust the output power by varying POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) on the pulse shaper
board (with the MED COLL switch S4 switched to DC) until the main body of the pulse
lies on the 50.0 watts horizontal trace on the oscilloscope (that is, ignore any initial spike
in the pulse). If the top of the main body of the pulse slopes, then take an average level.
When 50 watts of power is available, measure the output from the detector on the
oscilloscope and record the peak pulse voltage to the nearest 20 mV. This value then
becomes the '50 watts available' calibration at this frequency. (The detector output may
be a negative-going pulse.)
Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF. Replace the10 dB
attenuator between the peak power sensor and the 30 dB attenuator.
3.4.27.5 Amplifier Test and Tuning Procedure

Disconnect the link between the DC control board and the RF board, and connect the
positive output of the HT supply to the point on the RF board where the link was
connected. Connect two 100 uF electrolytic capacitors within 100 mm of the amplifier
under test, as shown in Figure 3-15. Switch the TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON
and check that the HT supply is 42.0 0.2 volts.
With the test setup as shown in Figure 3-15, connect the power modulation amplifier on
test in place of the SMA calibration link. Set the RANGE switch on the peak power meter
to 100 mW and the MODE switch to DIRECT. Check that there is a total of 40 dB
attenuation between the amplifier and peak power sensor.
The reading offset should be switched to 40 dB and the correction set for 2 GHz from the
correction table on the peak power sensor.
Observe the output power pulse from the power modulation amplifier on channel 2 of the
oscilloscope.
Observe the output from the detector on channel 1 of the oscilloscope and adjust the
input signal level by varying POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) until the 50 watts reference
level is attained.
3-232
HA72500
SECTION 3
a. At 1150 MHz only

When the '50W available' calibration point has been reached at the input, adjust
capacitor C4 on the amplifier under test to give the maximum output amplitude.
b. At all test frequencies, including 1150 MHz:
Measure the output power on the peak power meter. This must be at least 185
watts peak.
Connect a probe to the amplifier peak detector output on pin XN1:A and check the
detected pulse on channel 1 of the oscilloscope. Adjust the RF input to the amplifier so
that the output power is 185 watts. The amplitude of the pulse must be within the limits
inferred by the following table when the amplifier output is 185 watts peak.
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
(Vpk)
960
5.0 1.0
1090
5.3 1.0
1150
6.0 1.0
1213
6.3 1.0
Readjust POWER MOD AMP DC (R69) to give 100 watts output power.
Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF.
Connect the current probe to the oscilloscope channel 1 and set the sensitivity to read
20 amperes full scale (0.5 volts/1 0 mA/mV): clip the current probe to the link from X2 to
the RF board.
Switch on the DRIVER DC POWER and check the current pulse shape, noting the peak
current, which should be 7.5 to 9.5 amperes for the 100 watts output; see the figure
below.
Adjust the front panel RF OUTPUT control and check that the channel 1 waveform
varies as indicated below.
Reset the controls and switch on the main board to their original conditions.
Set the transmitter driver DRIVER DC POWER switch to OFF. Remove the unit on test
and replace the original unit in the module.
Replace the link between the RF board and DC control board in the amplifier under test.
3.4.28
1kW RF Power Amplifier 1A72535

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Peak power meter.
Spectrum analyser.
3-233
HA72500
SECTION 3
Current probe.
SMA connector torque wrench.
Cables and adaptors.
3.4.28.2 Setup
"
NOTE
The alignment procedure involves temporary changes to the RF connections to

some of the modules in the depot test facility. To ensure correct alignment and
subsequent correct operation, ensure that each RF connector is securely
tightened (use a torque wrench for SMA connectors) following its connection.
When making measurements of the peak RF power, correction needs to be
made for the errors in the peak power meter and for the actual losses in any
attenuators at the input to the peak power meter. This requires that the peak
power meter and any attenuators used be characterised at the frequency of
operation and these corrections applied to the meter readings.
CAUTION

measured.
The unit under test is normally aligned at a reply frequency of 1215 MHz. However, if
alignment and testing is required at the operational reply frequency, the tests below
need only be performed at this operational frequency. Tune the receiver video in the
DME rack for the test and alignment frequency(ies) - see Section 3.4.18 if an RF source
is to be aligned; see Appendix K if the tests are being performed at the depot test facility.
If necessary, align the transmitter driver for the test and alignment frequency(ies) - see
Section 3.4.23.
the sequence:
LOCAL,
On the pulse shaper board in the transmitter driver module, set the following switches:
ALC LOOP (S2) to OPEN
ALC (S3) to VIDEO
On the depot test facility, lower the hinged front panel of the 1kW PA power supply to
provide access to the connections to the 1kW RF amplifier. Disconnect the two multi-pin
connectors and the two RF connectors.
At the rear of the depot test facility, remove the four screws securing the cover of the
1kW RF amplifier. Remove the cover. Remove the four screws securing the 1kW RF
amplifier to the rack. Remove the two screws attaching the rack earthing bars (one each
side of the rack) to the 1kW RF amplifier. Carefully remove the 1kW RF amplifier. (When
temporarily storing this unit, do not place the 1kW RF amplifier so that it rests on its RF
connectors.)
3-234
HA72500
SECTION 3
Install the unit under test in the depot test facility in place of the removed 1kW RF
amplifier. Secure the unit under test to the two earthing bars (one each side of the rack).
Secure the unit under test to the depot test facility. (Do not install the cover to the unit
under test at this stage.)
Figure 3-16
1kW RF Power Amplifier Test Setup
Connect the two multi-pin connectors to the unit under test. (Access is provided from the
front of the depot test facility after lowering the hinged front panel of the 1kW PA power
supply.)
Connect the RF cable (from the transmitter driver in the transponder subrack) to the
INPUT connector of the unit under test.
At the OUTPUT connector of the unit under test, connect the following items of test
equipment, as shown in Figure 3-16.
a. INPUT of the 30 dB attenuator to OUTPUT of the unit under test (a right angle
adaptor may be required);
b. INPUT of the 20 dB attenuator to OUTPUT of the 30 dB attenuator;
c. TX (or INPUT) of the directional coupler to OUTPUT of the 20 dB attenuator; and
d. RF IN of the sensor of the peak power meter to LOAD (or OUTPUT) of the
directional coupler.
Connect an RF cable from the COUPLER connector on the directional coupler to RF IN
on the spectrum analyser.
Initially set the spectrum analyser controls as follows:
Centre frequency
Bandwidth
Scan width
Input attenuation
Scan time
1215 MHz
100 kHz
1 MHz per division
0 dB
3-235
HA72500
SECTION 3
Video filter
Off
to suit.
POWER to ON.
Extend the transmitter driver using the transponder extender frame.
On the transmitter driver front panel, set switch DRIVER DC POWER to NORMAL.
On the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver, adjust the following controls fully
counter-clockwise:
PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53),
MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58).
On the transponder power supply front panel, set switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER
to ON.
MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to VIDEO OUT on the
peak power meter to check the pulse shape.
Carefully raise the hinged front panel of the 1kW PA power supply (to provide access to
the controls and test jacks on the front panel) ensuring that no test cables have potential
for being damaged.
On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
Connect the multimeter (on 200 volts range) to test jacks HT and EARTH on the 1kW
PA power supply front panel. The measured voltage should be 50.0 0.2 volts. (If out of
range, set the voltage within the specified range by adjusting R112 on the regulator
board of the 1kW PA power supply.)
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope (other connections unchanged) to test jacks
SHAPED MODULATION and EARTH on the transmitter driver front panel.
Confirm that the peak power meter reading is not more than 5.0 mW (or not more than
500.0 watts if the reading is corrected for the 50 dB attenuator).
3.4.28.3 Amplifier Performance Tests
CAUTION
DO NOT AT ANY TIME let the peak power exceed 2 kW (20 mW on the
peak power meter).
1.
While monitoring the peak power meter, to ensure that its reading does not
exceed 5.0 mW (or 500.0 W if the reading is corrected for the 50 dB attenuator),
slowly increase PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) on the pulse shaper board of the
transmitter driver to produce a base voltage of 17.0 0.5 volts as displayed on
channel 2 of the oscilloscope.
2.
While monitoring the peak power meter, slowly increase MOD PULSE
AMPLITUDE (R58) control on the pulse shaper board of the transmitter driver to
produce a peak power meter reading of 18 0.5 mW (or 1800 50 watts if the
reading is corrected for the 50 dB attenuator). Be sure to take into account the
true calibrated attenuation of the 30 dB and 20 dB attenuators. The table below
may be used to determine the required reading of the peak power meter for 1800
watts peak power.
3-236
HA72500
3.
SECTION 3
CALIBRATED
ATTENUATOR LOSS
METER READING (in

mW) FOR 1.8 kW
49.0
22.7
49.1
22.1
49.2
21.6
49.3
21.1
49.4
20.7
49.5
20.2
49.6
19.7
49.7
19.3
49.8
18.8
49.9
18.4
50.0
18.0
50.1
17.6
50.2
17.2
50.3
16.8
50.4
16.4
50.5
16.0
50.6
15.7
50.7
15.3
50.8
15.0
50.9
14.6
51.0
14.3
While observing channel 1 of the oscilloscope, make successive small changes

to the PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) and MOD PULSE AMPLITUDE (R58)
presets to achieve a pulse shape as close as possible to that shown in the figure
below (with a pulse width in the range 3.50 to 3.75 microseconds, and rise and
fall times in the range 1.80 to 2.50 microseconds), while maintaining the 1.8 kW
peak power. (The PEDESTAL VOLTAGE (R53) adjustment should be used
mainly to ensure a smooth transition from the shaped pulse to the base line.) Do
not let the peak power exceed 2 kW.
3-237
HA72500
SECTION 3
4.
On the spectrum analyser, tune in the pulse spectrum. Change the SCAN
WIDTH to 200 kHz per division. Set the 0 dB reference to the peak of the
displayed spectrum. At 800 kHz either side of the frequency of the peak
response, read the spectral response in dB below the 0 dB reference. The
magnitude of this difference should not be less than 50 dB (step 3 may need to
be repeated to achieve this result).
5.
Change the SCAN WIDTH to 5 MHz per division and reset the 0 dB reference to
the peak of the displayed spectrum. Confirm that there are no responses
between 2 MHz and 50 MHz which are above a level which is 65 dB below the
0 dB reference level. (Responses above the specified level which can be shown
to not be generated in the unit under test are not to be considered.)
6.
Using the current probe, measure the peak currents in the RF power transistors
of the 250W RF amplifiers, A1 through A10. The peak currents should be less
than 20.0 amperes.
3.4.28.4 Level Monitors

Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP OUTPUT and EARTH on
the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply. The oscilloscope channel 2 display should
be similar to the oscilloscope channel 1 display, with a peak amplitude in the range 6.0
to 8.0 volts.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP DRIVER and EARTH on
the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply. The oscilloscope channel 2 display should
be similar to the oscilloscope channel 1 display, but with the pulse riding on a
rectangular pedestal. The peak amplitude should be is the range 7.5 to 9.5 volts.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP MODULATOR and
EARTH on the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply. The oscilloscope channel 2
display should be similar to the oscilloscope channel 1 display, but with the pulse riding
on a rectangular pedestal. The peak amplitude should be in the range 3.0 to 7.0 volts.
3.4.28.5 Completion
After having performed the above tests, on the transponder power supply front panel,
switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to OFF.
On the depot test facility, lower the hinged front panel of the 1kW PA power supply.
Disconnect the test equipment connected to the OUTPUT connector, the two multi-pin
connectors and the RF cable connected to the INPUT connector of the unit under test.
At the rear of the depot test facility, remove the four screws securing the unit under test
to the depot test facility. Remove the two screws attaching the depot test facility earthing
bars (one each side of the rack) to the unit under test. Carefully remove the unit under
test.
Install the 1kW RF amplifier back in the depot test facility and secure it to the two
earthing bars (one each side of the rack). Secure the 1kW RF amplifier to the depot test
facility. Install and secure the cover to the 1kW RF amplifier.
Reconnect the two multi-pin connectors and the two RF connectors to the 1kW RF
amplifier.
If no further testing of 1kW RF amplifiers is required, the controls on the pulse shaper
board of the transmitter driver need to be readjusted for the 1kW RF amplifier installed.
The procedures to do this are contained in the detailed beacon alignment procedures
3-238
HA72500
SECTION 3
contained in Section 3.3 (specifically the appropriate steps of Sections 3.3.9.1, 3.3.9.2
and 3.3.10.1).
Remove the transponder extender frame from the depot test facility. Install the
transmitter driver into the transponder subrack.
NORMAL.
POWER to NORMAL.
On the receiver video front panel, set the IDENT switch to NORMAL.
3.4.29
Power Divider 1A72536

Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
Oscilloscope.
Digital voltmeter.
Connector, coaxial, panel, SMA(F).
Termination, coaxial, SMA(M): Qty 9.
3.4.29.2 Return Loss Measurement

Connect the equipment and calibrate as detailed in Section 3.4.1.5.1, and calibrate using
the SMA adaptor.
Remove the 50 ohms reference termination and connect the test port to the directional
coupler.
While measuring the return loss at one port, ensure that the other nine ports are
terminated with 50 ohms.
Measure the return loss at each of the ports XC1 through XC10 over the frequency
range 950 to 1250 MHz; it should be not less than 15 dB.
3.4.29.3 Insertion Loss Measurement

Set up and calibrate the equipment as detailed in Section 3.4.1.5.2.
Remove the SMA adaptor and connect the input 10 dB attenuator to XC2 and the output
10 dB attenuator to XC3. Terminate connectors XC1 and XC4 through XC10 with 50
ohms loads and measure the insertion loss over the range 950 to 1250 MHz. Similarly
measure the insertion loss from XC2 to each of the connectors XC5 through XC10 and
XC1 ensuring that connectors other than the one under test are terminated.
The insertion loss at each connector except XC1 should be 13 1 dB. Additionally, the
insertion losses at two connectors connected to the same 2-way combiner (e.g., XC3
and XC4) should be within 1 dB of each other. With the input attenuator connected to
XC3 and the output attenuator connected to XC1, the insertion loss should also be 13 1
dB.
3.4.29.4 10 dB Attenuator and Detector

Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 3-17.
3-239
HA72500
SECTION 3
Set the signal generator to an output of +13 dBm.

Using the SMA panel receptacle, connected to the SMA(M) cable, feed the RF signal
from the signal generator to the short coupled line on the divider unit by pressing the
centre contact of the SMA panel receptacle on to the 50 ohms terminated end of the
coupled line and the body to the ground plane as shown in Figure 3-17.
Measure the voltage at XC11; this should be 10010 mV.
Figure 3-17
3.4.30
Attenuator and Detector Test Setup
Power Combiner 1A72537

Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
Oscilloscope.
Digital voltmeter.
Special detector test cable; see Figure 3-18.
Connector, coaxial, panel, SMA(F).
Termination, coaxial, SMA(M): Qty 9.
3-240
HA72500
Figure 3-18
SECTION 3
Detector Test Cable
3.4.30.2 Test Arrangements

For return loss measurement, connect and calibrate the test equipment as in Section
3.4.1.5.1.
For insertion loss measurement, connect and calibrate the test equipment as in Section
3.4.1.5.2.
3.4.30.3 Two-way Splitter

Measure the return loss at each of the ports XC13, XC1 and XC2 over the frequency
range 900 to 1250 MHz. While measuring the return loss at one port, ensure that the
other two ports are terminated with 50 ohms. The return loss should not be less than 15
dB.
Setup the equipment for insertion loss measurement as detailed in Section 3.4.1.5.2.
Connect the 10 dB attenuator from the signal generator to XC13 and, connecting the
other 10 dB attenuator to each of the connectors XC1 and XC2, measure the insertion
loss through the splitter over the frequency range 900 to 1250 MHz. It should be not
greater than 3.8 dB.
3.4.30.4 Eight-Way Combiner

Measure the return loss at each of the connectors XC3 through XC11 over the frequency
range 900 to 1250 MHz. Ensure that all the connectors other than the one under test are
terminated with 50 ohms. The return loss at each port should be not less than 15 dB.
Connect the 10 dB attenuator from the signal generator to XC11 and the other 10 dB
attenuator to XC3. Terminate connectors XC4 through XC10 with 50 ohms loads and
measure the insertion loss over the frequency range 900 to 1250 MHz. Similarly
measure the insertion loss from XC11 to each of the connectors XC5 through XC10
ensuring that the connectors other than the one under test are terminated.
The insertion loss at each connector should be 9.8 1 dB. Additionally, the insertion
losses at two connectors connected to the same 2-way combiner (e.g., XC3 and XC4)
should be within 1 dB of each other.
3.4.30.5 Attenuator and Detector

Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 3-19, with the signal generator SMA(M) cable
connected to the detector test cable shown in Figure 3-18.
Set the signal generator to an output of +13 dBm.
Using the detector test cable, feed the RF signal from the signal generator to the short
coupled line on the combiner unit. To do this, insert this cable beneath the metal screen,
so that the centre conductor contacts the middle of the coupled line, and the outer
3-241
HA72500
SECTION 3
conductor is earthed to the screen, as shown in Figure 3-19. Measure the voltage at
XC12; it should be 100 10 mV.
Figure 3-19
3.4.31
10 dB Attenuator and Detector Test Setup

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Variable load resistor, 8 to 20 ohms, 250 watts rating.
3.4.31.2 Alignment
Alignment of the 1kW PA power supply is performed by carrying out the required
alignment procedures for its component assemblies Control and Status PWB Assembly
1A72541 and DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly 1A72542.
If a complete 1kW PA power supply is to be tested, switch off circuit breaker 1kW
POWER AMP on the power distribution panel, remove the 1kW PA power supply from
the depot test facility and replace it with the unit to be tested. Connect only the input
power leads (positive to XB1/1, negative to XP2) but NOT the output power leads.
3.4.31.3 Control Circuit Checks

Power on the beacon using the distribution panel.
On the 1kW PA power supply set the AMPLIFIER DC POWER switch to OFF. Check
that the front panel green indicators DC POWER ON and HT ON are both off and that
the red TEST indicator is on.
3-242
HA72500
SECTION 3
Set the AMPLIFIER DC POWER switch to the ON position, and check that the green DC
POWER ON and HT ON indicators are both on.
3.4.31.4 Relay and Voltage Checks

Using the multimeter set to DC volts and the 200 volts range, measure across XB1:6 (0
volts) and XB1:5 (HT). The meter reading should be 50.0 0.5 volts; if it is not, refer to
Section 3.4.33.
positive slope) to connectors XB1:6 (ground) and XB1:5.
Check that the peak-to-peak ripple and noise present on the power supply output is less
than 100 mV peak-to-peak.
3.4.31.5 Load Tests

Connect the variable load, set to its maximum resistance (of at least 20 ohms) to the
output terminals XB1:5 (positive) and XB1:6 (negative), through an ammeter (digital
multimeter set on 10A range).
Adjust the resistance of the variable load to give an ammeter reading of 3.5 0.1
amperes. On the oscilloscope, connected as in Section 3.4.31.4, check that the ripple
and noise present on the power supply output is less than 100 mV peak-to-peak.
3.4.31.6 Completion
Switch circuit breaker 1kW POWER AMP off. Remove the unit under test and replace
the 1kW PA power supply belonging to the depot test facility back in the rack. Ensure
that all cables are securely fastened. Switch on circuit breaker 1kW POWER AMP and
check that the depot test facility operates normally
3.4.32
Control and Status PWB Assembly 1A72541

Oscilloscope.
3.4.32.2 Setup
With the DME operating, on the CTU, press the following front panel keys in the
sequence:
LOCAL,
Switch circuit breakers CTU & TRANSPONDER and 1kW POWER AMP on the power
distribution panel to off.
Lower the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply, disconnect the two cable connectors
to the control and status board, remove its retaining screws and remove the control and
status board.
Install the control and status board to be tested in place of the removed unit, ensuring
that the retaining screws and cable connectors are securely replaced.
Switch on circuit breakers CTU & TRANSPONDER and 1kW POWER AMP on the
power distribution panel.
3-243
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.32.3 Control Circuitry Tests

Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply front panel to NORMAL.
On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN NO 1 key.
On the CTU, select PwrOut parameter measurement at a TI RATE of 1 kHz. The
displayed transmitted output power should be 1.2 0.1kW.
On the 1kW PA power supply front panel, check that the indicators are as follows:
a. H3, HT ON (green) is on;
b. H2, TEST (red) is off; and
c. H1, DC POWER ON (green) is on.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply front panel to OFF.
a. H3, HT ON (green) is off;
b. H2, TEST (red) is on; and
c. H1, DC POWER ON (green) is off.
On the CTU, select PwrOut parameter measurement. The displayed transmitted output
power should be less than 0.1kW.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply front panel to ON.
a. H3, HT ON (green) is on;
b. H2, TEST (red) is on; and
c. H1, DC POWER ON (green) is on.
On the CTU, select PwrOut parameter measurement. The displayed transmitted output
power should be 1.2 0.1kW.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply to OFF.
3.4.32.4 HT OUT Monitoring

For this test, disconnect the HT supply from the 1kW PA, by removing the connector at
XN2 on the 1kW power amplifier.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply front panel to ON.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 volts range, to test jacks HT OUT and EARTH on the
unit under test (on the 1kW PA power supply front panel). The measured voltage should
be 50.0 0.2 volts.
On the CTU, select PS.Volt then PA.HT measurement. The displayed voltage should be
50.0 0.5 volts.
Remove the cover from the DC-DC converter of the 1kW PA power supply. Adjust R112
on the DC-DC converter slowly counter-clockwise until indicator HT ON turns off. The
multimeter reading should be 48.5 0.1 volts. (If this reading is outside limits, slightly
adjust R45 so that this and the following requirement can both be met with the same
setting of R45).
Adjust R112 on the DC-DC converter slowly clockwise until indicator HT ON turns on
and then off. The multimeter reading should be 51.9 0.1 volts. (If this reading is outside
limits, slightly adjust R45 so this and the previous requirement can both be met with the
same setting of R45).
3-244
HA72500
SECTION 3
Adjust R112 on the DC-DC converter to give a multimeter reading of 50.0 0.1 volts.
Replace the cover of the DC-DC converter of the 1kW PA power supply.
Connect the multimeter, on 20 volts range, to test jacks +15V and EARTH (on the 1kW
PA power supply front panel). The measured voltage should be 15.0 0.8 volts.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply to OFF.
Reconnect the HT supply to the 1kW power amplifier.
Switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER on the 1kW PA power supply to ON.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 mV range, to test jacks SUPPLY CURRENT + and
SUPPLY CURRENT - (on the 1kW PA power supply front panel). The measured voltage
should be in the range 4.0 to 7.0 mV.
3.4.32.5 RF Amplifier Monitoring Tests

MODULATOR and EARTH on the receiver video front panel) to test jacks SHAPED
MODULATION and EARTH on the 1kW PA power supply front panel. The displayed
waveform should be dual, shaped pulses with an amplitude in the range 25 to 35 volts.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP DRIVER and EARTH on
the 1kW PA power supply front panel. The displayed waveform should be dual, shaped
pulses (on pedestals) with an amplitude in the range 3.5 to 7.5 volts.
Connect channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the top end of R24 (near N5) on the unit under
test. The two waveforms on the oscilloscope should be the same.
3-245
HA72500
SECTION 3
On the CTU, select PA.Drv Level measurement. The displayed power amplifier driver
level should be in the range 2.0 to 4.8 volts.
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP OUTPUT and EARTH on
the 1kW PA power supply front panel. The displayed waveform should be dual, shaped
pulses with an amplitude in the range 4.0 to 7.5 volts.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the top end of R18 (near N4) on the unit under
On the CTU, select PA.Out Level measurement. The displayed power amplifier driver
Move channel 1 of the oscilloscope to test jacks POWER AMP MODULATOR and
EARTH on the 1kW PA power supply front panel. The displayed waveform should be
dual, shaped pulses (on pedestals) with an amplitude in the range 2.0 to 6.5 volts.
Move channel 2 of the oscilloscope to the top end of R30 (near N6) on the unit under
On the CTU, select PA.Mod Level measurement. The displayed power amplifier driver
3.4.32.6 Completion
Switch off circuit breakers CTU & TRANSPONDER and 1kW POWER AMP on the
3-246
HA72500
SECTION 3
Remove the unit under test from the 1kW PA power supply and restore the control and
status board belonging to the depot test facility, ensuring that all the retaining screws
and cable connectors are securely replaced.
Ensure that the depot test facility is operating normally.
3.4.33

Oscilloscope.
Variable load resistor, 8 to 20 ohms, 250 watts rating.
3.4.33.2 Setup
With the DME operating, press the following CTU front panel keys in the sequence:
LOCAL,
On the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to OFF.
Lower the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply, disconnect and remove the DC- DC
converter using the procedures of Section 4.1.1.7.
Install the DC-DC converter to be tested in place of the removed unit, ensuring that the
retaining screws and cable connectors are securely replaced. However DO NOT
connect the heavy output leads to XP5 and XP6.
Connect the variable load resistor, set to maximum (20 ohms) to terminals XP5 and
XP6.
Remove the cover from the regulator diecast box. On the regulator board, adjust variable
resistor R112 fully clockwise.
On the unit under test, disconnect the driver outputs, XP9, XP10, XP12 and XP13, from
the regulator.
On the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to ON.
3.4.33.3 Regulator
3.4.33.3.1
Oscillator Tests
POSITIVE slope) to the connection lead XP11 (CRO TRIGGER) on the regulator
(connect the oscilloscope GN D lead to any point on the metalwork).
Confirm that a signal is present at XP11 with a waveform similar to the CRO TRIGGER
waveform shown in the figure below, with a period in the range 16.0 to 20.5
microseconds.
3-247
HA72500
3.4.33.3.2
SECTION 3
15 Volts Supply Tests
Measure the voltage at test point XT3 on the regulator. It should be within the range 14.3
to 15.7 volts.
3.4.33.3.3
Output Waveforms
Connect channels 1 and 2 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered to connection lead

XP11 of the regulator) to connection leads XP9 and XP10 of the regulator. Superimpose
the two waveforms on the oscilloscope. They should be identical and have the general
shape as shown for No 1 DRIVE OUTPUT in the above figure.
Using the oscilloscope, confirm that the ON TIME is in the range 15.0 to 20.0
microseconds, the OFF TIME is in the range 16.5 to 21.5 microseconds and the
AMPLITUDE is in the range 14.0 to 16.0 volts.
Move channels 1 and 2 of the oscilloscope to connection leads XP12 and XP13 of the
regulator. Superimpose the two waveforms on the oscilloscope. They should be identical
and have the general shape as shown for No 2 DRIVE OUTPUT in the above figure.
Using the oscilloscope, confirm that the ON TIME is in the range 15.0 to 20.0
microseconds, the OFF TIME is in the range 16.5 to 21.5 microseconds and the
AMPLITUDE is in the range 14.0 to 16.0 volts.
Confirm that the timing of the CRO TRIGGER signal is as shown in the above figure.
Confirm the half-height PULSE WIDTH of the CRO TRIGGER waveform is in the range
0.2 to 1.3 microseconds.
3.4.33.4 Output Voltage Adjustment Range

On the front panel of the 1kW PA power supply, switch AMPLIFIER DC POWER to
OFF.
On the regulator, adjust variable resistor R112 fully counter-clockwise.
Reconnect the driver outputs, XP9, XP10, XP12 and XP13, from the regulator.
Adjust the load resistor for its maximum resistance (at least 18 ohms) and connect it,
through an ammeter (multimeter on 10 amperes range), to connectors XP5 and XP6.
3-248
HA72500
SECTION 3
With the multimeter connected to the rack BATTERY terminals, switch and hold the
TEST/FLOAT switch on AC power supply to TEST, and adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE
control on the control module of the AC power supply to produce a multimeter reading of
22.0 0.1 volts. This TEST/FLOAT switch is to be held in this position until instructed to
be released.
Connect the multimeter (on 100 volts range) to connectors XP5 (+ve) and XP6 (-ve). The
voltmeter reading should be in the range 40 V to 48 volts
While monitoring the multimeter reading, adjust R112 to give an output voltage of 47.8
0.1 volts to prove that this voltage can be preset.
Readjust R112 to give an output voltage of 52.2 0.1 volts to prove that this voltage can
be preset.
3.4.33.5 Primary Current Limit Preset

While monitoring the reading on the multimeter (connected to XP5 and XP6), adjust
R112 to give an output voltage of 50.0 0.1 volts. While monitoring the ammeter reading,
adjust the load resistor to give an output current of 5.2 0.1 amperes. Readjust R112, if
necessary, to give an output voltage of 50.0 0.1 volts. On the AC power supply, the
ammeter reading should be less than 16.7 amperes.
While monitoring the ammeter reading, adjust the load resistor to give an output current
of 4.5 0.1 amperes. The output voltage (as indicated on the multimeter) should be in
the range 49.5 to 49.8 if the current limiting select on test resistor R115 on the regulator
is set correctly (nominally 200 ohms).
If this voltage is greater than 49.8 volts, R115 needs to be reduced in value. If the
voltage is less than 49.5 volts, R115 needs to be increased in value. Select a value for
R115 in the resistance range 150 to 274 ohms, 5%, 400 mW. If a new value of R115 is
fitted, repeat the measurement and validate that the voltage is in the required range.
While monitoring the multimeter reading, adjust the load resistor (decrease its
resistance) to give an output voltage of 40.0 0.2 volts. The output current (on the
ammeter) should be less than 4.9 amperes.
While monitoring the ammeter reading, adjust the load resistor (increase its resistance)
to give an output current of 3.7 0.1 amperes. The output voltage (on the multimeter)
3.4.33.6 Input Regulation

1. With the operating configuration as at the end of Section 3.4.33.5 (that is, input
voltage 22.0 0.1 volts; output voltage 50.0 0.1 volts; output current 3.7 0.1
amperes) note the actual output voltage.
2. With the multimeter connected to the rack BATTERY terminals and switch
TEST/FLOAT on AC power supply held to TEST, adjust the FLOAT 1 VOLTAGE
control on the control module of this AC power supply to produce a multimeter
reading of 28.0 0.1 volts. Note the output voltage. Calculate the difference
between this voltage and the voltage measured at step 1. The difference should
be less then 0.3 volts.
3.4.33.7 Output Regulation

1. With the operating configuration of step 2 of Section 3.4.33.6 (that is, input
voltage 28.0 0.1 volts, output voltage 50.0 0.1 volts, output current 3.7 0.1
amperes) note the actual output voltage.
3-249
HA72500
SECTION 3
2. Adjust the load resistor to decrease the output current to 2.8 0.1 amperes. Note
the output voltage. Calculate the difference between this voltage and the voltage
measured at step 1. The difference should be less than 0.2 volts.
3.4.33.8 Input Current Monitor

OFF.
Disconnect the ammeter from the output of the unit under test and reconnect the load
resistor to connectors XP5 and XP6.
At connector XP1, disconnect the two leads. Connect the ammeter (on 10 amperes
range) between these two leads (connected together) and XP1.
Adjust the load resistor to give an input current (on the ammeter) of 7.0 0.1 amperes.
Connect the multimeter, on 200 mV range, to test jacks SUPPLY CURRENT + and
SUPPLY CURRENT - on the 1kW PA power supply front panel. The measured voltage
should be 7.0 0.1 mV.
3.4.33.9 Completion
Release the TEST/FLOAT switch on the AC power supply.
Remove the unit under test from the 1kW PA power supply and restore the DC-DC
converter belonging to the depot test facility, ensuring that all the retaining screws and
cable connectors are securely replaced.
NORMAL.
Ensure that the depot test facility is operating normally.
3.4.34
Preselector Filter 1A72546

Spectrum analyser.
Signal generator.
Oscilloscope.

3.4.34.2.1
Setup
Connect the equipment for insertion loss measurement as detailed in Section 3.4.1.5.2.
Set the spectrum analyser for:
Centre frequency:
Span:
1020 MHz
10 MHz/division
3-250
HA72500
SECTION 3
Sweep time:
Amplitude scale:
Resolution bandwidth:
Reference level:
10 dB/division
1 MHz
0 dBm
Set the signal generator to 1020 MHz and +10 dBm output.
Connect the preselector filter as the unit under test.
Tune the preselector A and C adjusters together, keeping them equal distances out from
the body, until a response is visible on the spectrum analyser display; then tune the
adjusters for a peak at 1020 MHz. Adjusters will be close to fully in at this frequency (that
is, clockwise end of travel).
Tune adjuster B for peak at 1020 MHz.
3.4.34.2.2
Return Loss Measurement
Measure the return loss at the input of the preselector filter, using the procedure detailed
in Section 3.4.1.5.1. This must be 20 dB minimum over a bandwidth of 1 MHz on either
side of the centre frequency of 1020 MHz. If it is not, slightly tune the adjusters A, B and
C to achieve this.
3.4.34.2.3
Insertion Loss Measurement
Set up the equipment and measure the insertion loss of the preselector filter at 1020
MHz as detailed in Section 3.4.1.5.2 It should not be greater than 1.6 dB.
By retuning the signal generator determine the frequencies, on either side of the centre
frequency, where the response is 0.2 dB below the peak. This bandwidth should not be
less than 0.5 MHz.
Similarly, determine the frequencies at which the level is 1 dB below the peak; the limits
are 1 MHz to 2 MHz.
Check the bandwidth at -60 dB; it should be 20 MHz to 30 MHz.
Measure the level 63 MHz away on either side of 1020 MHz; it should be more than 70
dB down with respect to the peak.

Repeat the procedure in Section 3.4.34.2 with the signal generator and spectrum
analyser tuned to 1160 MHz. The same limits apply.
In this case the filter adjusters will be withdrawn from the body.
3.4.34.4 Filter Tuning Procedure - Station Frequency

Repeat the procedure in Section 3.4.34.2 with the signal generator and spectrum
analyser tuned to the station interrogation (airborne) frequency. The same limits apply.
3.4.35
RF Panel PWB Assembly Single DME 1A72547
Although this assembly is a LRU, it is not subject to a separate test procedure but is
included in the overall depot test facility test procedures. It is a very simple circuit, and
functionality could be independently verified (if required) using a multimeter with
reference to the circuit diagram.
3.4.36
RF Panel PWB Assembly Dual DME 2A72547
Although this assembly is a LRU, it is not subject to a separate test procedure but is
included in the overall depot test facility test procedures. It is a very simple circuit, and
3-251
HA72500
SECTION 3
functionality could be independently verified (if required) using a multimeter with

reference to the circuit diagram.
3.4.37
Power Distribution Panel Single DME 1A72549

Digital multimeter.

Set the circuit breakers on the unit under test as indicated in the table below, and for
each series of settings check for continuity or lack of continuity (YES or NO) between the
nominated pins of connector XN1. The "chassis" connection indicates a lug screwed to
the chassis.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ON
1kW POWER
AMP
OFF
FROM
CTU &
TRANSPONDER
1kW POWER AMP
CTU &
TRANSPONDER
CTU &
1kW POWER AMP
TRANSPONDER
CTU &
TRANSPONDER
1kW POWER
AMP
3.4.38
CONTINUITY
TO
CONNECTION
z4
z32
YES
z4
chassis
YES
z4
d14
NO
d6
z20
NO
Z8
d18
NO
Z8
d22
NO
z8
z12
NO
z4
z32
YES
z4
chassis
YES
z4
d14
NO
d6
z20
YES
Z8
d18
NO
Z8
d22
NO
Z8
z12
NO
z4
z32
YES
z4
chassis
YES
z4
d14
NO
d6
z20
NO
Z8
d18
YES
Z8
d22
YES
Z8
z12
YES
z4
z32
YES
z4
chassis
YES
z4
d14
YES
Power Distribution Panel Dual DME 2A72549

Digital multimeter
3-252
HA72500
SECTION 3

Set the circuit breakers on the unit under test as indicated in the table below, and for
each series of settings check for continuity or lack of continuity (YES or NO) between the
nominated pins of connector XN1. The chassis" connection indicates a lug screwed to
the chassis.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ON
OFF
ALL
1kW PWR
AMP 1
ALL OTHERS
1kW PWR
AMP 2
ALL OTHERS
CTU
TPNDR 1
ALL OTHERS
ALL OTHERS
FROM
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
d10
d10
d10
d10
z8
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
d10
d10
d10
d10
Z8
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
d10
d10
d10
d10
Z8
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
d10
d10
d10
d10
z8
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
CONTINUITY
TO
CONNECTION
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
Z20
NO
d18
NO
d22
NO
d26
NO
z12
NO
z16
NO
z28
NO
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
z20
YES
d18
NO
d22
NO
d26
NO
z12
NO
z16
NO
z28
NO
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
z20
NO
d18
NO
d22
NO
d26
NO
z12
NO
z16
NO
z28
YES
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
z20
NO
d18
YES
d22
YES
d26
YES
z12
NO
z16
NO
z28
NO
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
z20
NO
d18
NO
3-253
HA72500
SECTION 3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ON
OFF
TPNDR 2
ALL OTHERS
ALL
NONE
3.4.39
FROM
d10
d10
d10
d10
z8
z4
z4
z4
d6
d10
d10
d10
d10
d10
Z8
z4
z4
z4
CONTINUITY
TO
CONNECTION
d22
NO
d26
NO
z12
YES
z16
NO
z28
NO
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
NO
z20
NO
d18
NO
d22
NO
d26
NO
z12
NO
z16
YES
z28
NO
z32
YES
chassis
YES
d14
YES
Control and Test Unit 1A72550
3.4.39.1 Introduction
The CTU assembly consists of three circuit assemblies; these are the processor board,
the front panel board, and the RCMS interface board. To test and align the processor
board, see Section 3.4.40. To test and align the front panel board, see Section 3.4.41.
To test and align the RCMS interface board, see Section 3.4.42.
The following procedures in this section provide a confidence check on the CTU
assembly as a whole. These procedures would normally be done after the three main
assemblies of the CTU have been tested and aligned.

Digital multimeter.
3.4.39.3 Setup
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off, and remove the CTU from the
depot test facility. On the processor board of the unit under test, set switches S1:8 and
S2:4 to the ON position, noting their original positions. Install the CTU to be tested in the
depot test facility using the extender cards.
CAUTION
Make sure that the CTU is properly supported so that it cannot fall from
the extender cards.
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on; after a short delay (about 2
seconds) the CTU should start up in the same configuration it had before it was last
powered down.
Check the green 'heartbeat' indicators on the processor board, the front panel board,
and the RCMS interface board. Each of these should be flashing at a rate of about once
per second.
3-254
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.39.4 DC-DC Converter Output

Measure the voltage between pins 3 and 4 of XN1 in the CTU module; this should be in
the range 5.15 to 5.25 volts.
If the measured voltage is not within the required range, then the resistor connected
between the +5V and the TRIM pins on the DC-DC converter will need to be changes,
as follows:
a. If the voltage is in the range 5.00 to 5.15 volts, replace the trimming resistor with
a 121 kilohm resistor.
b. If the voltage is in the range 5.25 to 5.40 volts, replace the trimming resistor with
a 562 kilohm resistor.
Repeat the voltage measurement to check that the voltage is within the required range.
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off, remove the CTU from the
extender cards, and replace the CTU directly into its rack frame. Switch the CTU &
TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on.
3.4.39.5 LCD Display and Softkeys

Select the maintenance off mode; the LCD should display:
LDB-102 DME
Param Level PS.Volt Status Misc
Select each submenu in turn, and compare with the listing given in Figure A-2 in
Appendix A. Use ESC to return to the top level menu.
Select the maintenance on mode; the LCD should display:
LDB-102 DME - Maintenance Mode
Ch.1
3.4.39.6 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Check

Select LOCAL operation; the yellow indicator above this switch should now be on. The
green indicator above the REMOTE switch should be off.
Select transponder OFF/RESET; the yellow indicator above the OFF/RESET switch
should be on, and the green SELECT MAIN indicators above the NO 1 and NO 2
switches should be off.
Select REMOTE operation, the green indicator above this switch should now be on. The
yellow indicator above the LOCAL switch should be off. The red MAINTENANCE and
MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT indicators should be off.
Select maintenance mode; the MAINTENANCE indicator should stay off, and the
>> Select LOCAL First << error message should be flashed three times on the bottom
line of the LCD display.
CAUTION
Ensure that the high power 50 ohms RF load is attached to the

transponder output before proceeding to the next step.
Select LOCAL operation, MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT and SELECT MAIN NO 1

operation. Check that the DME switches on and operates normally.
3.4.39.7 CTU Bus Interface to Test Interrogator and Monitor Modules

Press the ESC key, and then press 'Params', 'NEXT', 'NEXT', 'NEXT', 'R cal' softkey
sequence. The LCD should display:
Rate Cal. = 5000 Hz (1 Hz).
3-255
HA72500
SECTION 3
Press the Wall softkey. The LCD should display:

Volt Cal. = 5.00 volts (0.1 volts).
Using the front panel softkeys, select each DME parameter in turn to display the
measured result. Check that the displayed values are within the limits stated in the table
in Section A.1.7 in Appendix A.
3.4.39.8 CTU Direct Interface to the Transponder Modules
CAUTION
Ensure that the 50 ohms RF load is attached to the transponder output

before proceeding to the next step.
Make sure that all the module test switches are in the NORMAL position, and the red
CTU MODULES TEST indicator is off. Select LOCAL, MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT, and
SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET operation. Make sure that the green power indicators on
all the transponder modules are off.
Select LOCAL, MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT, and SELECT MAIN NO 1 operation.
Check that the green transponder module power indicators on the five modules in the
transponder subrack and on the 1kW PA power supply are on.
3.4.39.9 Control System Check

As a more complete check of the CTU control functions, perform the procedures
described in Section 3.3.18 Control System - Single DME".
3.4.39.10 Restore Operation

Turn the CTU circuit breaker off, then remove the unit under test from the depot test
facility. Make sure that switch S1:8 and switch S2:4 on the processor board are returned
to their previously noted positions. Reinstall the original CTU, making sure that it is
properly seated. Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on; after a short
delay (about 2 seconds) the CTU should start up in the same configuration it had before
it was last powered down.
3.4.40
CTU Processor PWB Assembly 1A72552

Oscilloscope.
Digital multimeter.
Alligator clip.
3.4.40.2 Setup
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off. Remove the CTU from the depot
test facility. Undo the four screws securing the CTU processor board to the CTU chassis.
Undo the three electrical connectors and remove the CTU processor board. Install the
processor board to be tested to the CTU chassis, following the reverse of the above
procedure.
Install the CTU using two Eurocard extenders. Make sure that the CTU is properly
supported so that it cannot fall from the extender cards. Make sure that switch S1:8 is in
the ON position.
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on. After a short delay the CTU
should start up in the same configuration it had before it was last powered down.
3-256
HA72500
SECTION 3

Using a digital multimeter check the following voltages:
CONNECTOR
XN1
XN2
XN3
XN4
XN11
PINS
VOLTAGE (volts)
2c
+5.0 0.5
3a, 3c
+23 5
1a, 1c, 10a, 10c, 30a, 30c, 31a, 31c,

32a, 32c
Ground
18c
+5.3 0.5
1a, 1c, 2a, 4c, 5c, 6a, 7a, 9c, 10c, 12a,
13a, 19a, 21c, 25a, 27a, 29c, 30c, 31a,
31c, 32a, 32c
Ground
39,40
+5.0 0.5
43,44
+23 5
1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 12, 14, 17, 19, 47, 48,

49, 50
Ground
26
+5.0 0.5
1, 2, 5, 7, 10. 12, 15. 17, 29. 36, 39. 48,

52, 55, 57, 59, 60
Ground
+5.0 0.5
+23 5
2, 3
Ground
3.4.40.4 Self Test LED Indicators

The heartbeat indicator HBEAT (H6) should flash at a rate of about once a second. The
RAM OK indicator (H8) and the ROM OK indicator (H4) should both be continually lit.
3.4.40.5 Watchdog
3.4.40.5.1
Reset Line
Using an alligator clip, short pins 1 and 2 of XN9 together. Set the oscilloscope to 2
volts/division and connect the probe to N2:16. The signal at this pin should be normally
high and should pulse low every 1.6 seconds for a period of 50 milliseconds. Remove
the alligator clip from XN9.
3.4.40.5.2
+24 Volts Monitor
On the AC power supply, hold the TEST/FLOAT switch to TEST. Adjust the FLOAT 1
VOLTAGE so that the voltage at XN1:3c is 22.0 0.1 volts. Set the oscilloscope to 2
volts/division and connect the probe to N2:10. Using a small screwdriver, adjust preset
the low volts preset R32 fully counter-clockwise. The signal on the oscilloscope should
be high. Slowly adjust R32 until the signal on the oscilloscope changes from high to low.
Return the 24 volts supply to the normal operating voltage.
3.4.40.6 External Oscillator Signal

Set the oscilloscope to 2 volts/division and 0.5 millisecond/division. Connect the probe to
D31:13. The waveform on the oscilloscope should be a square wave between ground
and 5 volts with a frequency of 1220 61 Hz.
3.4.40.7 Ident Buzzer

If the RECYCLE indicator is lit press the RECYCLE key and the indicator should be
turned off.
3-257
HA72500
SECTION 3
If the REMOTE indicator is lit press the LOCAL key; the LOCAL indicator should be lit
and the REMOTE indicator should be turned off.
If the MAINTENANCE indicator is lit press the MAINTENANCE key and the indicator
should be turned off.
If the MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT indicator is lit press the MONITOR ALARM key and
the indicator should be turned off.
If either the SELECT MAIN, NO 1 or NO 2 indicator is on press the OFF/RESET key.
The indicator which is lit should be turned off, and the OFF/RESET indicator should be lit
instead.
Press the ESC key. The LCD should display the top level menu with the first line of the
LCD being
LDB 102 DME.
Press the rightmost softkey three times, which should result in the Ident Source menu
being displayed. Select 2440 Hz as the ident source. The buzzer on the CTU processor
board should activate. Select OFF as the ident source to turn the buzzer off.
3.4.40.8 Completion
Restore the CTU processor board from the depot test facility back to the CTU, using the
procedures of Section 3.4.40.2. Ensure correct CTU operation.
3.4.41

Digital multimeter.
3.4.41.2 Setup
Turn the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off. Remove the CTU from the depot
test facility. Replace the CTU front panel board on the CTU with the unit to be tested
(see Section 4.1.1.6 for guidance).
Reinstall the CTU using two Eurocard extenders. Make sure that the CTU is properly
supported so that it cannot fall from the extender cards.

Using a digital multimeter, check the following voltages:
CONNECTOR/
DEVICE
XN1
D1
PINS
VOLTAGE (volts)
39, 40
+5.0 0.5
43, 44
+23 5
1, 2, 3,4 7, 9, 12, 14, 17, 19, 47, 48, 49, 50
Ground
+5.0 0.5

The heartbeat indicator (H14) should be flashing at a rate of about once a second.
3-258
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.41.5 Pushbuttons
3.4.41.5.1
DME Control Buttons
Press the RECYCLE key a number of times to toggle its indicator. Leave it with its
indicator off.
Press the LOCAL key a number of times to toggle its indicator. Leave it with its indicator
off.
Press the MAINTENANCE key a number of times to toggle its indicator. Leave it with its
indicator off.
Press the MONITOR ALARM key a number of times to toggle its indicator. Leave it with
its indicator off.
If either the SELECT MAIN, NO 1 or NO 2 indicator is on press the OFF/RESET key.
The indicator which is lit should be turned off, and the OFF/RESET indicator should now
be fit instead.
Press the SELECT MAIN, NO 2 key, check that the message:
Not available on single DME
is shown on the display.
Press the SELECT MAIN, NO 1 key, check that the DME switches on, and the NO 1
indicator is lit.
3.4.41.5.2
Softkeys
Press the ESC key. The LCD should display the top level menu with the first line of the
LCD being
LDB 102 DME.
Press the first softkey located just below the LCD. The LCD should display the next level
of the menu. Press the ESC key and the LCD should display the top level menu again.
Repeat for the other four softkeys.
3.4.41.5.3
TI RATE Buttons
Press the MAINTENANCE key and its ON indicator should be lit. The top line of the LCD
should display
Maintenance Mode
Press the first softkey which corresponds to Ch.1. The top right hand corner of the LCD
should display 100.
Press the 1 kHz N key. With each press of the key the frequency displayed should
toggle between 1 and 100.
Press the 10 kHz key. While the key is pressed the display should show 10. When the
key is released the display should show the previously active state (100 or 1).
3.4.41.6 ALARM DELAY Switch

Use a small screwdriver to turn the actuator of the ALARM DELAY switch. The ALARM
DELAY indicator should be on only if a delay of less than 4 seconds is selected.
3.4.41.7 View Angle Adjust

Use a small screwdriver to adjust preset R1. The view angle of the LCD should vary with
the setting of R1.
3-259
HA72500
SECTION 3
3.4.41.8 Completion
Restore the CTU front panel board from the depot test facility back to the CTU using the
procedure of Section 3.4.41.2.
3.4.42
RCMS Interface PWB Assembly 1A72555

Digital multimeter.
3.4.42.2 Setup
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off. Remove the CTU from the depot
test facility. Undo the four screws securing the RCMS interface board to the CTU
chassis. Undo the two electrical connectors and remove the RCMS interface board.
Install the unit under test to the CTU chassis following the reverse of the above
procedure. Reinstall the CTU using two Eurocard extenders. Make sure that the CTU is
properly supported so that it cannot fall from the extender cards.

Using the multimeter check the following voltages:
CONNECTOR
PINS
VOLTAGE (volts)
XN1
1a, 1c, 25c
Ground
XN2
18c
+5.3 0.5
XN3
39, 40
+5.0 0.5
43, 44
+23 5
1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 12, 14, 17, 19, 47,

48, 49, 50
Ground

The heartbeat indicator, H1, should flash at a rate of about once per second.
3.4.42.5 Relays
Ensure that the depot test facility is operating on normal mode (that is, all green
indicators on the monitor are on, and NORMAL and NO 1 ON indicators on the CTU
STATUS display are on) in LOCAL control.
Ensure RECYCLE is off.
On the External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72257 at the rear of the rack, check the continuity
of the connections on the following terminal blocks.
3-260
HA72500
SECTION 3
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
LOC CTRL
C-NO
C-NC
BATT CH NORM 1
C-NO
C-NC
AC PWR NORM
C-NO
C-NC
SEC ALM
C-NC
C-NO
NO 1 ON
C-NO
C-NC
SHUTDOWN
C-NC
C-NO
NORMAL
C-NO
C-NC
MON ALM
C-NC
C-NO
MAINT
C-NC
C-NO
BATT CH NORM 2
C-NC
C-NO
PRI ALM
C-NC
C-NO
NO 2 ON
C-NC
C-NO
TRANSFER
C-NC
C-NO
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker off.

On the CTU processor board, switch S1:8 to OFF (to set for DUAL operation). Switch
the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on.
On the CTU, press the following front panel keys:
MAINTENANCE (ON indicator to be on)
MONITOR ALARM (INHIBIT indicator to be on)
SELECT MAIN NO 2
REMOTE
The DME will attempt to power up with No.2 transponder as main. Since there is no
second transponder in the depot test facility, the monitor will detect primary faults.
However, since the monitor alarms are inhibited, no transfer will take place.
On the External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557 at the rear of the rack, check continuity of
the connections on the following terminal blocks.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
LOC CTRL
C-NC
C-NO
SEC ALM
C-NO
C-NC
NO 1ON
C-NC
C-NO
NORMAL
C-NC
C-NO
MON ALM
C-NO
C-NC
MAINT
C-NO
C-NC
PRI ALM
C-NO
C-NC
NO 2 ON
C-NO
C-NC
On the AC power supply, remove the front cover and disconnect the cable connector to
TB/3 (the multi-way connector for status indication). On the External I/O PWB Assembly
1A72557 at the rear of the rack, check continuity of the connections on the following
terminal blocks.
3-261
HA72500
SECTION 3
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
BATT CH NORM 1
C-NC
C-NO
AC PWR NORM
C-NC
C-NO
Restore the connector to TB/3 and replace the power supply front cover.
LOCAL (LOCAL indicator to be on),
MAINTENANCE (ON indicator to be on),
MONITOR ALARM (INHIBIT indicator to be off).
Since the monitor alarms are no longer inhibited, the CTU will initiate a transfer to No.1
transponder. On the External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557 at the rear of the rack, check
continuity of the connections on the following terminal blocks.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
NO 1ON
C-NO
C-NC
TRANSFER
C-NO
C-NC
On the monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED. This will cause the CTU to
shut down the DME.
On the External 1/0 PWB Assembly 1A72557 at the rear of the rack, check continuity of
the connections on the following terminal blocks.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
C-NO
C-NC
SHUTDOWN
3.4.42.6 Transponder 2 Interface

At the rear of the rack, remove the ribbon cable connector from CTU CONNECTOR
(XN6) on the transponder subrack motherboard, and plug the connector labelled
SECOND TRANSPONDER (on the unattached ribbon cable) into XN6.
Switch the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on.
The DME should power up in normal mode (that is, all green indicators on the monitor
are on, and NORMAL and NO 1 ON indicators on the CTU STATUS display are on) with
No.2 transponder indicating as the operating transponder.
On the CTU select Param Delay measurement. The delay should be 50.0 0.2
microseconds.
On the CTU select PS.Volt TP.18V to measure the transponder power supply 18 volts
supply; it should be 18.0 0.1 volts.
3.4.42.7 Completion
On the CTU, press the front panel softkeys in the following order:
SELECT MAIN NO 1.
3-262
HA72500
SECTION 3
At the rear of the rack, remove the ribbon cable connector SECOND TRANSPONDER
and restore the original cable connector to XN6 on the transponder subrack
motherboard.
On the CTU processor board, set switch S1:8 back to ON (to restore SINGLE operation).
Restore the RCMS interface board from the depot test facility back to the CTU and
restore the CTU to the subrack.
are on and NORMAL and NO 1 ON indicators on the CTU STATUS display are on) with
No. 1 transponder indicating as the operating transponder.
3.4.43
External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557

Digital multimeter.
Resistor, 180 ohms, 4 watts
Resistor, 47 ohms, 3 watts.
3.4.43.2 Setup
At the rear of the rack, remove all cables from the External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557.
Undo the mounting screws and remove the external I/O board; replace it with the unit
under test, installing cables only to XN6 and XN8 terminal blocks.
3.4.43.3 Modem 12 Volts Supply Check

Power on the rack using the power distribution panel.
Connect a 47 ohms resistor between XN3:1 and XN3:10.
Using the voltmeter set to DC 200 volts range, measure the voltage across C1; it should
be 24.0 0.5 volts. If necessary, set the voltage to within this range by adjusting the
FLOAT 2 preset control on the AC power supply control board.
Using the voltmeter set to DC 20 volts range, measure the voltage across C2: it should
be 12.0 0.6 volts.
3.4.43.4 Protected 24 Volts Supply Check

Connect a 180 ohms resistor between XB1:6 and XB11:6.
Using the voltmeter set to DC 200 volts range, measure the voltage between XB1:6 and
XB11:6; it should be not more than 1.0 volt below the input voltage measured across C1.
Place the multimeter set to DC 200 mA range between XB1:6 and ground. The meter
reading should be 20 5 mA.
Remove the 47 ohms and 180 ohms resistors.
3.4.43.5 Status Outputs

Ensure that the depot test facility is operating on normal mode (that is, all green
indicators on the monitor are on and NORMAL and NO 1 ON Indicators on the CTU
STATUS display are on) in LOCAL control.
Ensure RECYCLE is off.
3-263
HA72500
SECTION 3
Check the continuity of the connections on the following terminal blocks.

FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
LOC CTRL
C-NO
C-NC
BATT CH NORM 1
C-NO
C-NC
AC PWR NORM
C-NO
C-NC
SEC ALM
C-NC
C-NO
NO 1 ON
C-NO
C-NC
SHUTDOWN
C-NC
C-NO
NORMAL
C-NO
C-NC
MON ALM
C-NC
C-NO
MAINT
C-NC
C-NO
BATT CH NORM 2
C-NC
C-NO
MAINS OK
C-NO
C-NC
PRI ALM
C-NC
C-NO
NO 2 ON
C-NC
C-NO
TRANSFER
C-NC
C-NO

On the CTU processor board, switch S1:8 to OFF (to set for DUAL operation). Switch
the CTU & TRANSPONDER circuit breaker on.
MAINTENANCE (ON indicator to be on)
MONITOR ALARM (INHIBIT indicator to be on)
SELECT MAIN NO 2
REMOTE
The DME will attempt to power up with No.2 transponder as main. Since there is no
second transponder in the depot test facility, the monitor will detect primary faults.
However, since the monitor alarms are inhibited, no transfer will take place.
Check continuity of the connections on the following terminal blocks.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
LOC CTRL
C-NC
C-NO
SEC ALM
C-NO
C-NC
NO 1ON
C-NC
C-NO
NORMAL
C-NC
C-NO
MON ALM
C-NO
C-NC
MAINT
C-NO
C-NC
PRI ALM
C-NO
C-NC
NO 2 ON
C-NO
C-NC
3-264
HA72500
SECTION 3
Disconnect the cable connector to XN2 and check the continuity of the connections on
the following terminal blocks
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
BATT CH NORM 1
C-NC
C-NO
AC PWR NORM
C-NC
C-NO
Restore the normal cable connector to XN2.

FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
BATT CH NORM 1
C-NO
C-NC
AC PWR NORM
C-NO
C-NC
MAINS OK
C-NO
C-NC
On the CTU, press the following front panel keys as required to give the condition
indicated:
LOCAL (LOCAL indicator to be on),
MAINTENANCE (ON indicator to be on).
MONITOR ALARM (INHIBIT indicator to be off).
Since the monitor alarms are no longer inhibited, the CTU will initiate a transfer to No. 1
transponder. Check continuity of the connections on the following terminal blocks.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
NO 1 ON
C-NO
C-NC
TRANSFER
C-NO
C-NC
On the monitor, switch MONITOR OUTPUTS to FAILED. This will cause the CTU to
shut down the DME.
FUNCTION
CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
C-NO
C-NC
SHUTDOWN
3.4.43.6 Completion
On the CTU, press the front panel keys in the following order:
SELECT MAIN NO 1
At the rear of the rack, remove the unit under test and restore the external I/O board
from the depot test facility, along with all its connections.
On the CTU processor board, set switch S1:8 back to ON (to restore SINGLE operation).
are on and NORMAL and NO 1 ON indicators on the CTU STATUS display are on) with
No. 1 transponder indicating as the operating transponder.
3-265
HA72500
SECTION 4
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
4-i
HA72500
SECTION 4
TABLE of CONTENTS
4.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...............................................................4-1
4.1
REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT OF LINE-REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU) 4-1
4.1.1 Replacement/Removal Instructions............................................................. 4-1
4.1.1.1 SMA Connectors ................................................................................4-1
4.1.1.2 PWB Assemblies (General) ................................................................4-1
4.1.1.3 RF Modules in Transponder Plug-in Modules
(excluding 1A72533 and 1A72534) ..................................................4-1
4.1.1.4 Medium Power Driver 1A72533 and Power Modulation Amplifier
1A72534 .............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1.5 RF Modules in 1kW RF Power Amplifier ............................................ 4-2
4.1.1.6 Switched Attenuator 1A69737 ............................................................4-2
4.1.1.7 CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly 1A72553........................................ 4-2
4.1.1.8 DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly 1A72542 ...................................... 4-2
4.1.1.9 Preselector Filter 1A72546 and Directional Coupler 1A/2A69755...... 4-2
4.1.1.10 Control Card, AC Power Supply 3A71130.......................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Fault Location ..............................................................................................4-3
4.1.2.1 General Troubleshooting Guidance.................................................... 4-3
4.1.2.2 Fault Finding Procedures ...................................................................4-6
4.1.3 LRU Post-Replacement Tests ................................................................... 4-11
4.2
WAVEFORMS
4-18
4.3
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
4-41
4.3.1 Stripline Printed Wiring Boards..................................................................4-41
4.3.1.1 Positioning of Ceramic Chip Capacitors ........................................... 4-41
4.3.1.2 Soldering ..........................................................................................4-42
4.3.1.3 Cleaning ...........................................................................................4-47
4.3.2 Conformal Coating.....................................................................................4-47
4.3.3 RF Transistor Replacement.......................................................................4-48
4.3.3.1 Tools Required .................................................................................4-48
4.3.3.2 Preparation of Unit............................................................................4-48
4.3.3.3 Removal of Device ...........................................................................4-48
4.3.3.4 Inserting the New Device..................................................................4-49
4-ii
HA72500
SECTION 4
LIST of FIGURES
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Signal Flow Block Diagram.....................................................................4-5

Lateral Positioning of Chip Capacitors .................................................4-41
Longitudinal Positioning of Chip Capacitors .........................................4-41
Chip Capacitor Soldering Requirements ..............................................4-42
Soldering of Through Board Mounted Chip Capacitors........................4-43
Part Placement .....................................................................................4-44
Maximum/Minimum Solder Conditions .................................................4-44
Lead Placement Conditions..................................................................4-45
Lead Soldering Conditions ...................................................................4-45
Minimum Clearance of Sealed Components ........................................4-46
Multiple Lead Termination Requirements.............................................4-46
LIST of TABLES
Table 4-1
LRU Post-Replacement Tests ..................................................................4-11
4-iii
HA72500
SECTION 4
4. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
4.1
REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT OF LINE-REPLACEABLE

UNITS (LRU)
4.1.1
Replacement/Removal Instructions
The DME LDB-102 contains a number of line replaceable units (LRUs) which can be
replaced during field servicing. A list of LRUs can be found in Section 3.4.
The following sections describe the procedure for removing units. Units may be refitted
by following the reverse procedure.
4.1.1.1
SMA Connectors
Most RF LRUs are connected using SMA coaxial connectors. These may be
disconnected using the 8 mm open-ended spanner provided in the DME Test Accessory
Kit. When reconnecting SMA connectors, ensure that the connectors are properly
aligned and not cross-threaded. The connector nut should be tightened to a torque of
0.5 newton-metres (4.5 inch-pounds), which is equivalent to a light hand pressure on the
spanner provided.
4.1.1.2
PWB Assemblies (General)
a.
Disconnect all external connectors.
b.
Remove the printed wiring board (PWB) fixing screws, and withdraw the
PWB.
4.1.1.3
RF Modules in Transponder Plug-in Modules (excluding 1A72533

and 1A72534)
a. Remove the plug-in module main PWB, following the procedure described in
Section 4.1.1.2; this gives access to the RF module fixing screws.
b. Disconnect all external connectors to the RF module, removing the box lid if
necessary.
c. Remove the module fixing screws, and withdraw the module.
4.1.1.4
Medium Power Driver 1A72533 and Power Modulation Amplifier

1A72534
a. Disconnect all external connectors.

b. Remove the lid from the box.
c. Remove the three module fixing screws from inside the box, and withdraw the
unit.
"
NOTE
When removing the power modulation amplifier from the 1kW RF Power
Amplifier 1A72535, it is necessary to remove the fixing screws and move the
box before disconnecting the 4-pin connector and the coaxial cables, because
of the space restrictions around the box.
4-1
HA72500
4.1.1.5
SECTION 4
RF Modules in 1kW RF Power Amplifier
This procedure applies to Power Divider 1A72536, Power Combiner 1A72537 and 250W
RF Power Amplifier 1A69783 (procedure for Power Modulation Amplifier 1A72534 is
given in 4.1.1.3).
b. Remove the fixing screws and withdraw the unit.
CAUTION
When disconnecting the flexible semirigid coaxial cables, do not strain

the cables more than is necessary to permit removal of the unit being
serviced. If straining of these cables is necessary, do so evenly along the
length of each cable, and avoid straining the cable close to the
connectors, as fatigue failure may result.
4.1.1.6
Switched Attenuator 1A69737

b. Remove the two fixing screws, and withdraw the unit.
4.1.1.7

b. Remove the CTU Processor PWB Assembly 1A72552, and the RMS Interface
PWB Assembly 1A72555, following the procedure described in Section 4.1.1.2.
c. Remove the six fixing screws for the front panel. The CTU front panel and CTU
front panel PWB assembly can then be lifted away separately from the CTU
module chassis.
4.1.1.8
a. Hinge open the front panel of the 1kW Power Supply Frame 1A72503.
b. Disconnect all external connectors to the DC-DC converter.
c. Remove the four screws which fasten the large heatsinks to the 1kW PA power
supply frame. The DC-DC converter complete with the two large heatsinks can
then be lifted away.
d. Remove the three screws which fasten each heatsink to the DC-DC converter,
and remove the heatsinks.
4.1.1.9
Preselector Filter 1A72546 and Directional Coupler 1A/2A69755

b. Remove the four fixing screws, and withdraw the unit.
4.1.1.10
Control Card, AC Power Supply 3A71130
a. Remove the front panel to give access to the AC power supply.

b. Withdraw the control card from the power supply. It is a plug-in card, located
approximately centrally.
4-2
HA72500
4.1.2
SECTION 4
Fault Location
This section describes the various methods that may be used for troubleshooting should
a fault occur in an LDB-102 DME. The first section gives guidance of a general nature, to
outline the various facilities available to assist fault location. The second section gives
detailed instructions for signal tracing within the DME equipment.
4.1.2.1
General Troubleshooting Guidance
Should a DME beacon develop a fault, it is best serviced by replacing the defective
module, or subassembly, with an operational unit. These replaceable assemblies are
called line-replaceable units (LRUs).
The following guidance information is given to assist technical personnel locate a
defective LRU after a DME beacon has shut down or registered a fault. The facilities
discussed below may be used either individually or in combination to isolate the
defective unit.
a. System Block Diagrams
Two levels of block diagram are included in the DME handbook to show the
signal flow through the equipment. These are:
1. System Block Diagrams:
Single
Dual
Test Facility
see Figure 2-1.

see Figure 2-2.
see Figure K-2.
2. Signal Flow Block Diagram; see Figure 4-1.

This last drawing indicates the divisions between modules and subassemblies,
and the signal flow between then. It eases the task of tracing a signal through a
particular subsystem for fault location purposes.
b. Test Facility
The test facility, which is part of the CTU, allows rapid measurement of the main
beacon parameters and internal signal levels. During troubleshooting, the
parameter values and signal voltage levels may be compared with the values
recorded at station commissioning. In many cases, this will isolate a fault to a
specific module.
Refer to Appendix A, Section A.3, for operating instructions of the Test Facility.
c. Front Panel Test Jacks
Each of the transponder modules has a number of front panel test jacks to allow
rapid checking of significant signals and voltages. In most cases, the information
available from the test jacks is sufficient to determine if a module is functioning
correctly.
Section 4.2 lists the test point signal waveforms and voltages that should be
present in a normally functioning DME rack. Comparison of these signals with
those measured on the equipment under test will help isolate a faulty unit.
4-3
HA72500
SECTION 4
d. Alarm Register
The CTU includes a group of indicators to show the alarms that were present
when a transponder transfer shutdown occurred. When technical personnel visit
a DME which has shut down due to a fault, the alarm register should be
examined before switching on the beacon again. The alarms indicated will show
which parameters were out of tolerance, and this often suggests which
subsystem is at fault.
In a dual DME, the alarm register can be accessed to show the faults associated
with each transponder. This is explained in Appendix A.3.
4-4
HA72500
Figure 4-1
SECTION 4
Signal Flow Block Diagram
4-5
HA72500
4.1.2.2
SECTION 4
Fault Finding Procedures
In the event of a failure in the LDB-102 DME beacon, the adoption of the following
procedures will help isolate the fault to a particular area, so that replacement of the
appropriate line-replaceable unit (LRU) can restore operation of the equipment with
minimum interruption to service.
These procedures trace the signal firstly through the interrogation and receiver chain,
and then through the transmitter chain. The test interrogator is used as a source of test
signals for the transponder, and it is essential to obtain interrogations at the correct level
from the test interrogator in order to check operation of the receiver and video signal
processing.
Test jacks are provided on the module front panels to facilitate troubleshooting. The
typical waveforms measured on these test points are given in Section 4.2. Reference is
made to these waveforms during the signal tracing procedures.
4.1.2.2.1
Conditions for Tests
1. Operate the equipment in the MAINTENANCE mode, as described in Appendix

A.1 for a single DME, and A.2 for a dual DME.
2. For a dual DME, the defective transponder will be operated as the standby. On
the RF panel at the rear of the rack, connect the test interrogator of the standby
transponder to the second directional coupler, so that it can be used to
interrogate the standby transponder. This is described in Appendix A.2.5.1.
3. On the standby monitor of a dual DME, switch the MONITOR OUTPUTS switch
to the FAILED position (this takes the monitor 'off-line').
4. On the CTU, select MONITOR ALARM to INHIBIT. For a single DME, press
the SELECT MAIN, NO 1 switch. For a dual DME, press the SELECT MAIN,
NO 1 or NO 2 switch for the transponder that will be operating normally (for
example, if transponder 2 is under investigation, then select NO 1 as the
operating transponder so that transponder 2 becomes the standby).
5. On the transponder power supply, switch TRANSPONDER DC POWER to ON.
6. On the CTU, select Hi Eff (High Level Efficiency) measurement to set the
interrogation level to -70 dBm.
4.1.2.2.2
Interrogation and Receiver Chain
With the DME operating in the MAINTENANCE mode, perform the following check
sequence:
1.
Trigger the oscilloscope from the TRIGGER test jack on the test interrogator
Failure of the oscilloscope to trigger reveals the absence of a signal from the
test interrogator module.
In this case, either the test interrogator main board, or the complete test
interrogator module (equipped with the appropriate crystals and tuned to the
correct frequency) should be replaced.
2.
Set the oscilloscope sensitivity to 2 volts/division and the timebase to

2 microseconds/division, and check the waveform at the DETECTED
INTERROGATIONS test jack on the test interrogator. Compare the displayed
waveform with that in Waveform 17.
If the displayed waveform is significantly different to the reference waveform,
a failure in the test interrogator is indicated; either the entire module, or
separate LRUs, should be replaced.
4-6
HA72500
3.
SECTION 4
Set the oscilloscope to 0.5 volts/division and 5 microseconds/division, and
check the waveform at the DETECTED LOG VIDEO test jack on the receiver
video. Compare the displayed waveform with that in Waveform 37.
If the waveforms are significantly different, malfunction of the receiver video is
indicated. Either the entire module, or separate LRU, should be replaced with
appropriate assemblies tuned to the correct frequency.
4.
If, after replacement of the module or circuit board assemblies, the correct
waveform is still not obtained, consult Figure 4-1 to identify the block circuitry
in the failed signal path.
5.
Set the oscilloscope to 0.5 volts/division and 5 microseconds/division. On the

CTU, select Effncy measurement, to cause the interrogations to switch
between high and low level. With only one oscilloscope channel displayed,
observe the waveform on the DETECTED LOG VIDEO test jack and
compare it with that in Waveform 37.
If the displayed waveform does not show the two discrete pulse amplitude
levels, malfunction of the level switching in the test interrogator is indicated.
Replace either the complete test interrogator, or the main board assembly
and switched attenuator LRUs.
6.
Display the waveforms at the DETECTED LOG VIDEO and ON CHANNEL

VIDEO test jacks. Compare the displayed waveform with those shown in
Waveform 36.
7.
Similarly, display the waveform at the DOUBLE PULSE DECODER OUT test
jack and compare with that in Waveform 33.
8.
Reset the oscilloscope to 10 microseconds/division and check that the

waveform at the TRIGS TO MODULATOR test jack is similar to that in
Waveform 35.
Failure to obtain waveforms as above indicates a receiver video malfunction
requiring replacement of the module or subassemblies.
9.
4.1.2.2.3
Check the waveform at the DETECTED REPLIES test jack on the test
interrogator and compare it with that in Waveform 16. Absence of pulses
indicates a malfunction in the transmission chain.
Transmitter Chain
The major symptom of transmitter faults will be shown on the CTU as a low output power
reading. Transmitter chain faults can be isolated and corrected by the following
sequence; the waveforms referred to in the test sequence are shown in Section 4.2.
The performance requirements of each step must be met before the next step in the
sequence is commenced; the sequence need only be performed far enough to correct
the fault.
When the transmitter output power has been restored to the correct level (either by
adjustment/s or module replacement) perform the routine alignment and performance
tests on the transmitted pulse power and pulse shape, making adjustments as
necessary. The pulse shape of a correctly adjusted transmitter is shown in Waveform 16
and 67.
4-7
HA72500
1.
SECTION 4
At the HT test jack on the front panel of the 1kW RF amplifier, check that the
DC supply to the 1kW RF amplifier is within the range 49.5 to 50.5 volts.
This voltage is supplied by the DC-DC converter. If this voltage is only slightly
out of tolerance, it may be corrected by adjustment of the converter output
voltage control R112 (located under the cover of the metal box housing the
regulator board).
If this voltage is more than 3 volts out of range, then replace the DC-DC
converter in the 1kW PA power supply.
2.
Trigger the oscilloscope from the TRIGS TO MODULATOR test jack on the
receiver video. Display the waveform at the SHAPED MODULATION test
jack on the transmitter driver, and compare the displayed waveform with that
shown in Waveform 51. Check that the pulse amplitude is within the normal
amplitude range stated against Waveform 51; the 1kW PA power supply must
be within limits for this pulse to be correct.
If the amplitude exceeds this range, and there is low (or zero) output from the
transmitter, then it is probably due to the automatic level control (ALC) trying
to correct the low output condition. If this pulse is absent, or significantly
below the stated range, then it indicates a fault on the pulse shaper board,
which should be replaced.
3.
Display the waveform at the DRIVER LEVEL test jack on the transmitter
driver. If the drive waveform amplitude is within the limits stated against
Waveform 52, then it indicates that the transmitter driver is satisfactory and is
providing drive to the 1kW RF power amplifier. Proceed to step 9 to continue
the signal tracing.
If the waveform amplitude is below the limits stated, then check the
performance of the transmitter driver units, as detailed in steps 4 to 8.
4.
Extend the transmitter driver using the transponder extender frame. Switch
on power to the transponder, switch DRIVER DC POWER to NORMAL, and
check that the following supply voltages are within the limits stated:
Test Point
Limits (volts DC)
Transponder power supply
+15 V
+18V
HT
15.0 0.5
18.0 1.0
42.0 1.0
Transmitter driver
+15 V
15.0 0.5
Pulse shaper board
XT10
XT4
XT7
XT9
XT5
16.3 1.0
11 to 15, rectangular pulse
20 to 32
25 to 35
28 to 37
If any of these voltages are out of tolerance, then replacement of the

transponder power supply or pulse shaper board may be necessary. For
alignment of the pulse shaper board, refer to Section 3.2.7.
5.
Remove the cover from the exciter unit and clip the current probe around the
wire loop supplying current to the collectors of transistors V5 and V6. Check
that the collector current waveform is within the limits stated against
Waveform 54.
4-8
HA72500
SECTION 4
If the waveform is low in amplitude, check firstly that the input drive from the
receiver video is correct, as described in Section 3.2.6, then check the
alignment of the exciter as described in Section 3.2.7. If this fails to correct
the current waveform, then replace the exciter board.
6.
Remove the cover from the medium power driver and clip the current probe
around the wire supplying collector current to the RF amplifier subassembly.
Check that the collector current waveform is within the limits stated against
Waveform 55.
If the waveform is low in amplitude, then it indicates either insufficient drive,
from the exciter, or a fault in the medium power driver itself. Replace each
subassembly in turn to determine the defective unit.
7.
Remove the cover from the power modulation amplifier and clip the current
probe around the wire supplying collector current to the RF amplifier
subassembly. Check that the collector current waveform is within the limits
stated against Waveform 56.
If the waveform is low in amplitude, then it indicates either insufficient drive
from the medium power driver, or a fault in the power modulation amplifier
itself. Replace each subassembly in turn to determine the defective unit.
8.
If any units have been replaced or adjusted, repeat the check described in
Step 3 above. If the waveform amplitude is now within the stated limits, then
replace the covers on the units in the transmitter driver, then replace the
module in the rack.
9.
On the 1kW RF amplifier, display the waveform from the POWER AMP
MODULATOR test jack and check that it is within the limits stated against
Waveform 60.
If the waveform is low in amplitude, and if it has been previously determined
that the RF drive and the modulation to the 1kW RF amplifier are correct,
then a fault in the 1kW power modulation amplifier is indicated. Remove the
cover from the 1kW RF amplifier and replace the power modulation amplifier.
10.
DRIVER test jack and check that it is within the limits stated against
Waveform 62.
If the waveform is low in amplitude, then a fault in the 1kW amplifier driver
stage is indicated; this function is provided by the 250W amplifier units A1
and A2, in the 1kW RF amplifier. Remove the cover from the 1kW RF
amplifier and determine the defective unit by checking the collector current of
each driver stage. Clip the current probe around the red supply lead,
connecting to the amplifier module, and check the waveform amplitude with
the limits stated against Waveform 66. A low amplitude collector current
indicates the defective unit, which should be replaced.
11.
OUTPUT test jack and check that it is within the limits stated against
Waveform 61.
If the waveform is low in amplitude, a defective power output stage is
indicated, and the particular unit may be isolated by the procedure below.
4-9
HA72500
SECTION 4
Remove the cover from the 1kW RF amplifier and clip the current probe, in
turn, around the red supply lead to each of the amplifiers A3 to A10. Display
the current waveform and check that it is within the limits stated against
Waveform 64. There may be considerable variation in the current amplitude
for the individual power amplifiers A3 to A10, but a defective unit is usually
indicated by a current much lower than the others. Any defective units should
be replaced.
This completes the signal tracing troubleshooting procedures. If any module or

subassembly has been replaced during these procedures, then perform the
relevant LRU Post- Replacement Tests, as listed in Section 4.1.3.
4-10
HA72500
4.1.3
SECTION 4
LRU Post-Replacement Tests
This section details the tests and/or adjustments required to be made to an operational
beacon following the replacement of any module or subassembly. The information is
presented in tabular form, and:
a. contains a brief statement of the parameter or performance function required to
be checked, or adjustments required to be made, as applicable, in sequence
user order; and also
b. cites the relevant section of this handbook in which the detailed procedure for the
required check, measurement, or adjustment may be found.
If any module or subassembly is replaced during servicing, then the procedure listed for
that unit MUST be performed to restore the beacon to operational status. It is implicit
that all other units in the beacon are in normal working order.
Table 4-1
LRU Post-Replacement Tests
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A69737
Attenuator
PARAMETER TO BE CHECKED or ADJUSTMENT TO

BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
High and low switching of interrogations
3.2.4.13.2
1A69755
2A69755
Directional Coupler
1
2
3
Final receiver checks

Calibrate
Final check
3.2.4.13.2
3.2.4.10.5
3.2.4.18
1A69873
250W RF Amplifier
Check Transmitter Pulse Parameters
2
3
4
(If pulse parameters out of tolerance, then perform output

pulse alignment)
Transponder delay
Final check
3.2.4.10.1 to
3.2.4.10.4
(3.2.4.9)
3A71130
AC Power Supply or
Control Card for AC
Power Supply
1
2
3
4
5
Printed wiring board link settings

Powering rack
High voltage adjust
Low voltage alarm adjust
DC supply adjustment
3.3.3.11
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.16.5
3.2.4.16.6
3.2.4.16.8
1A72510
Monitor Module
Set internal preset switches for station fault limits
2
3
4
Calibrate Peak Power Monitor

Check Monitor fault limits and fault indications
Final check
3.2.4.2.8 or
Appendix A.5.3
3.2.4.15.6
3.2.4.15
3.2.4.18
1A72511
Monitor Main PWB
1A72512
Peak Power Monitor
3.2.4.13
3.2.4.18
Perform all checks listed for Monitor Module, 1A72510

1
2
Check signal amplitude at Monitor ERP MONITOR test jack

Calibrate peak power monitor
4.2 Waveform 1
3.2.4.15.6
4-11
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
3.2.4.1.2
5
6
Install crystals for interrogate frequencies

Set internal preset switch S4 for X or Y channel
Set front panel switches REPLY GATE DELAY to settings
recorded for the station
Align RF Generator for operation at the station frequency (if
not pre-aligned)
Check RF Generator crystal frequencies
Check RF Generator output pulse amplitude and shape
7
8
9
10
Check RF Generator test frequencies

Check signal timing parameters
Calibrate Peak Power Display
Set REPLY ACCEPT GATES
11
12
Check high and low level switching of interrogations

Final check
1
2
3
Set preset switch S4 for X or Y channel

Set front panel switches REPLY GATE delay to setting
recorded for the station
4
5

Set REPLY ACCEPT GATES
6
7
Check high and low level switching of interrogations

Final check
1
2
3
4
Install crystals for interrogate frequencies

Align RF Generator
Check RF Generator crystal frequencies
5
6
Check test frequencies

Final check
1A72517
RF Filter
Align RF Filter
Check receiver video module RF levels
1A72518
Modulator and
Detector
1
2
3
Check and adjust RF Generator output pulse amplitude and

shape
Final check
3.2.4.4.1,
3.2.4.4.2
3.2.4.4.6
3.2.4.18
1A72519
Reply Detector
Check detector coincidence
2
3
Calibrate peak power display

Check Reply Delay measurement. (This should be within
0.1 microseconds of the normal value for the station)
Check pulse shape measurement
Final check
3.2.4.4.6
step 3
3.2.4.10.5
3.2.4.13.1
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72514
Test Interrogator
Module
1
2
3
4
1A72515
Test Interrogator
Main PWB
1A72516
RF Generator
4
5
3.2.5
3.2.4.4.5
3.2.4.4.1,
3.2.4.4.2
3.2.4.4.3
3.2.4.4.6
3.2.4.10.5
3.2.4.11.2
steps 2 to 5
3.2.4.13.2
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.4.1,
3.2.4.4.2
3.2.4.4.6
3.2.4.11.2
steps 2 to 5
3.2.4.13.2
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.1.2
3.2.5
3.2.4.4.5
3.2.4.4.1,
3.2.4.4.2
3.2.4.4.3
3.2.4.18
3.2.6
steps11 to 13
3.2.4.5
steps 4, 5
3.2.4.15.9
3.2.4.18
4-12
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
3.2.4.1.2
3.2.4.2.4
3.2.4.2.4
8
9
Install crystal for reply frequency

Set internal switches S4 and S5 for X or Y channel
Set code switches for station ident code
Select SDES and LDES OFF or ON as required for the
station
Set internal DEAD TIME and LDES PERIOD switches to
standard setting of 6, or to setting recorded for the station
Set front panel BEACON DELAY and SPACING
(SEPARATION) switches to settings recorded for the
station
Align RF source for operation of the station frequency (if not
pre-aligned)
Check RF source crystal frequency and check RF level
Align RF Filter
10
11
12
Adjust 6 dB offset
Set ON-CHANNEL threshold
Check receiver sensitivity
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Check receiver bandwidth

Check receiver selectivity
Check decoding window
Check reply rate
Set dead time
Set LDES threshold (if LDES is used)
Check SDES (if used)
Check station ident code
Set reply delay
Perform final receiver checks
Final check
1
2
3
6
7
Set internal switches S4 and S5 for X or Y channel

Set code switches for station ident code
Select SDES and LDES OFF or ON as required for the
station
Set internal DEAD TIME and LDES PERIOD switches to
standard setting of 6, or to setting recorded for the station
Set front panel BEACON DELAY and SPACING
(SEPARATION) switches to settings recorded for the
station
Adjust 6 dB offset
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Check reply rate
Set dead time
Set LDES THRESHOLD (if LDES is used)
Check SDES (if used)
Check station ident code
Set Reply Delay
Final check
1
2
Install crystal for reply frequency

Align RF Source for operation at the station frequency (if
not pre-aligned)
Check RF source crystal frequency and check RF level
Final check
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72520
Receiver Video
Module
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1A72521
Receiver Video Main
PWB
4
5
1A72522
RF Source
3
4
5
3.2.6
3.2.4.5
3.2.6
steps11 to 13
3.2.4.7
3.2.4.11.1
3.2.4.11
steps 2, 3
3.2.4.11.4
3.2.4.11.5
3.2.4.11.6
3.2.4.11.8
3.2.4.11.9
3.2.4.12.1
3.2.4.12.2
3.2.4.14.1
3.2.4.13.1
3.2.4.13.2
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.2.4
3.2.4.2.4
3.2.4.7
3.2.4.11
steps 2, 3
3.2.4.11.6
3.2.4.11.8
3.2.4.11.9
3.2.4.12.1
3.2.4.12.2
3.2.4.14.1
3.2.4.13.1
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.1.2
3.2.6
3.2.4.5
3.2.4.11.3
3.2.4.18
4-13
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72523
IF Amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
Set AGC link XN2 to AGC position

Align IF amplifier (if not pre-aligned)
Set ON-CHANNEL threshold
Adjust 6 dB offset
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Check receiver bandwidth

Check receiver selectivity
Check CW protection
Set reply delay
Perform final receiver checks
Final check
1A72524
RF Amplifier
Check RF output level
2
3
4
Check tuning of Preselector Filter

Final check
1A72525
Transponder Power
Supply
Check the HT voltage and adjust if necessary
2
3
Check regulated supply voltages, +15 volts and +18 volts

Final check
1A72526
Transponder Power
Supply Main PWB
1A72530
Transmitter Driver
3.2.9
3.2.4.11.1
3.2.4.7
3.2.4.11
steps 2, 3
3.2.4.11.4
3.2.4.11.5
3.2.4.11.6
3.2.4.11.7
3.2.4.13.1
3.2.4.13.2
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.5
steps 4, 5
3.2.4.6
3.2.4.11.3
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.8
steps 4, 7
3.2.4.6
3.2.4.18
Perform all checks listed for Transponder Power Supply

Module, 1A72525
1
2
4
5
6
Set internal switches to alignment positions

Align Transmitter Driver for operation at the station
frequency (if not pre-aligned)
Adjust Transmitter Driver for correct drive to RF Power
Amplifier
Align Transmitter output pulse
Adjust ALC for correct power out
Check Transmitter output pulse amplitude and shape
Final check
1
2
5
6
7
Set PWB switches to alignment positions

Align function generator for nominal pulse shape (if not prealigned)
Amplifier.
Note: This is necessary only if PWB has never been
aligned.
Amplifier
Align Transmitter output pulse
Final check
1A72531
Pulse Shaper PWB
Assembly
REFER to
SECTION
3.2.4.2.5
3.2.7
3.2.4.8
3.2.4.9.1
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.2.5
3.2.8
3.2.7
3.2.4.8
3.2.4.9.1
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
4-14
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
Set Pulse Shaper Board switches to alignment positions
Set Exciter supply voltages to initial values
Align Exciter
Adjust drive to Medium Power Driver
5
6

Final check
3.2.7.1
step 3
3.2.7.1
steps 1, 2 then
steps 5 to 10
3.2.7.2
steps 1 to 5
3.2.7.2
step 6
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
Set supply voltage to Medium Power Driver
Adjust drive to Power Modulation Amplifier
4
5

Final check
A
1
FOR POWER MODULATION AMPLIFIER IN

TRANSMITTER DRIVER MODULE.
Set supply voltage to Power Modulation Amplifier
Adjust drive to the Power Modulation Amplifier
4
5
6
Adjust drive to the RF Power Amplifier

Final check
2
3
4
FOR POWER MODULATION AMPLIFIER IN 1kW

POWER AMPLIFIER.
Adjust Transmitter Driver for correct drive to 1kW Power
Amplifier.
Align transmitter output pulse.
Adjust ALC for correct power out.
Check Transmitter output pulse amplitude and shape.
Final check.
1
2
3
4
Adjust Transmitter Driver for correct drive to 1 kW PA.

Align 1 kW Power Amplifier.
Check transmitter output pulse amplitude and shape.
Final check.
Prepare Transmitter Driver for 1 kW PA alignment.
2
3

Check transmitter output pulse amplitude and shape.
Final check.
Perform all checks listed for Power Divider, 1A72536.
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72532
Exciter
1A72533
Medium Power
Driver
1A72534
Power Modulation
Amplifier
1A72535
1kW Power Amplifier
1A72536
Power Divider
1A72537
Power Combiner
3.2.7.1
step 3
3.2.7.1
steps 1, 2, 10
3.2.7.2
steps 7, 8
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
3.2.7.1
step 3
3.2.7.1
steps 1, 2, 10.
3.2.7.2
steps 7, 8
3.2.4.8
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.8
3.2.4.9.1
3.2.4.9.2|
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.8.1
3.2.4.9.1
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.8.1
steps 1 to 9
3.2.4.9.2
3.2.4.10
steps 1 to 4
3.2.4.18
4-15
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
Check power switching to 1kW Power Amplifier.
2
3
Check LED indicators.

Check voltage at HT test jack and adjust if necessary.
4.9.1
steps 4, 5
4
5
6
Check Transmitter output power.

Check 1kW PA detected signals at front panel test jacks
(confirm that these are unchanged from normal station
values).
Final check.
Check power switching to 1kW Power Amplifier.
2
3
4
Check LED indicators.

Check 1 kW PA detected signals at front panel test jacks
values).
Check 1 kW PA detected signals at front panel test jacks
values)
Final check.
1A72542
DC-DC Converter
Check voltage at HT test jack and adjust if necessary.
2
3

Final check
1A72546
Preselector Filter
1
2
Tune Preselector Filter to station frequency

Final check
3.2.4.6
3.2.4.11
steps 2, 3
3.2.4.18
1
2
Perform rack powering sequence

Final check
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.18
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72540
1 kW PA Power
Supply
1A72541
Control and Status
PWB
1A72549
2A72549
Power Distribution
Panel
3.2.4.9.1
steps 4, 5
3.2.4.10.2
4.2
3.2.4.18
4.9.1
steps 4, 5
3.2.4.10.2
3.2.4.10.2
4.2
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.9.1
steps 4,5
3.2.4.10.2
3.2.4.18
4-16
HA72500
SECTION 4
BE MADE
REFER to
SECTION
1
2
3
4
Set configuration and offset switches S1 and S2

Adjust low voltage shutdown level
Set power-on inhibit delay S11
Adjust ident volume and set external ident level (if

applicable)
3.2.4.2.3
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.16.7
Appendix
A.5.1.6
Appendix
A.3.2.14
MODULE OR
SUBASSEMBLY
1A72550
Control and Test
Unit
SINGLE DME
6
Check control system action for:

a. Normal operation
b. Primary Fault
c. Secondary Fault
d. Recycle
DUAL DME
8
9
10
1A72552
Control and Test
Unit Processor PWB
1A72553
CTU Front Panel
PWB
Check control system action for:

a. Normal operation, No. 1 Main
b. Primary fault
c. Secondary fault
d. Normal operation, No. 2 Main
e. Primary fault
f. Secondary fault
g. Recycle
Check Test Unit operation
Confirm correct operation of remote control and status
indications at remote site
Final check
3.2.4.16,
Part 1
3.2.4.16.1
3.2.4.16.2
3.2.4.16.3
3.2.4.16.4
3.2.4.16
Part 2
3.2.4.16.1
3.2.4.16.2
3.2.4.16.3
3.2.4.16.4
3.2.4.16.5
3.2.4.16.6
3.2.4.16.7
Appendix
A.3.1.2
3.2.4.18
Perform all checks listed for Control and Test Unit 1A72550
1
2

Confirm correct operation of each front panel switch and
LED (functional check only)
Final check
1A72555
RCMS Interface
PWB
1
2

Final check
1A72557
External I/O PWB
2
3
4

Check operation of external ident interface (if used)
Confirm correct indications on CTU from AC Power
Supplies
Final check
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.16
Part 1, Single
Part 2, Dual
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.3
3.2.4.18
3.2.4.14.2 &
3.2.4.14.3
3.2.4.18
4-17
HA72500
4.2
SECTION 4
WAVEFORMS
WAVEFORM 1
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Monitor
Trigger from:
Receiver Video TRIGS TO

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
5 microseconds/division Channel 2
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor ERP PULSE jack
Typical value:
6.0 to 8.5 volts pulse on 3.5 volts DC

(pulse amplitude depends on ERP RF
level from antenna)
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
Beacon in normal operation
WAVEFORM 2
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
1 microsecond/division
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor test point XT3
Typical value:
5 volts logic levels
Included reference
waveforms:
Test Interrogator DETECTED

REPLIES jack (upper trace)
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 3
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Channel 1
Timebase:
100 nanoseconds/division
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor 10 MHz CLOCK test point

XT4
Typical value:
5 volts logic level
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
ERP PULSE XA1
RISE PULSE XT3
10 MHz CLOCK XT4
4-18
HA72500
WAVEFORM 4
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Monitor
Trigger from:
Test Interrogator TRIGGER jack
Timebase:
1 microsecond/division, delayed
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division Channel 1
Connect to:
Channel 1 DELAY COUNT test point

XT5 (upper)
Channel 2 DELAY PULSE test point
XT6 (lower)
Typical value:
A correctly aligned delay monitor will

have the falling edge of trace 2
occurring during second pulse of
trace 1.
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 5
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
2 microseconds/division, delayed
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
Connect to:
Monitor WIDTH COUNT test point

XT7
Monitor WIDTH PULSE test point
XT11
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 6
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division both channels
Connect to:
Monitor SPACING COUNT test point

XT14
Monitor SPACING PULSE test point
XT8
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
DELAY COUNT XT5

DELAY PULSE XT6
WIDTH COUNT XT7

WIDTH PULSE XT11
SPACING PULSE XT8

SPACING COUNT XT14
4-19
HA72500
WAVEFORM 7
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Monitor
Trigger from:
Timebase:
0.5 microseconds/division, delayed

sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor TIPRF test point XT9
Typical value:
5 volts logic level
Included reference
waveforms:
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 8
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor FALL PULSE test point XT10
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

REPLIES jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 9
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor WIDTH PULSE test point

XT11 (Channel 2)
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

REPLIES jack
Conditions:
TIPRF XT9
FALL PULSE XT10
Monitor WIDTH PULSE XT11
4-20
HA72500
WAVEFORM 10
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Monitor
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor RISE COUNT test point XT15

Channel 1 (upper trace)
Monitor RISE PULSE test point XT3
Channel 2 (lower trace)
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 11
Monitor
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Monitor FALL COUNT test point

XT16 (upper)
Monitor FALL PULSE test point XT10
(lower)
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 12
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Channel 1 on oscilloscope
Timebase:
0.5 microseconds/division
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
RISE PULSE XT3

RISE COUNT XT15
FALL PULSE XT10

FALL COUNT XT16
TRIGGER XA1
Typical value:
+5 volts logic levels
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
4-21
HA72500
WAVEFORM 13
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
20 microseconds/division
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video LDES PULSE jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Test Interrogator INTERROGATIONS

TIMING jack Channel 2
Conditions:
1. LDES switch ON
2. Beacon in normal operation
3. LDES period set to 7
WAVEFORM 14
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator REPLY ACCEPT

GATES jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

REPLIES test jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 15
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
LDES PULSE XA2
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator 1 s MARKERS

jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Conditions:
REPLY ACCEPT GATES XA3
1 s MARKERS XA4
4-22
HA72500
WAVEFORM 16
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:

REPLIES jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
GND Channel 2
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 17
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:

INTERROGATIONS jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

(2 volts/division)
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 18
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator INTERROGATION

TIMING jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

INTERROGATIONS jack Channel 1
(1 volt/division)
Conditions:
DETECTED REPLIES XA7
DETECTED INTERROGATIONS XA8
INTERROGATION TIMING XA11
4-23
HA72500
WAVEFORM 19
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
sweep
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator REPLY TIMING jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

REPLIES jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 20
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:

TIMING jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Test Interrogator REPLY TIMING jack

Channel 2
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 21
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
DC Test Interrogator test point XT1
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
1. Beacon in Maintenance Mode

2. Select Channel 1
3. Select FLT LIMIT
4. Select TX RATE
Signal is present for 10 seconds only
REPLY TIMING XA12
REPLY TIMING XA1

INTERROGATIONS TIMING XA13
M FLT REPLY XT1
4-24
HA72500
WAVEFORM 22
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
COUNTER test point XT2 Channel 1
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:

2. Select Channel 1
3. Select PARAM
4. Select TX RATE
WAVEFORM 23
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator test point XT3
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:

2. Select Channel 1
3. Select FLT LIMIT
4. Select TX RATE
WAVEFORM 24
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:

2. Select Channel 1
3. Select FLT LIMIT
4. Select TX RATE
COUNTER XT2
M FLT SPACING XT3
M FLT T PRF XT4
4-25
HA72500
WAVEFORM 25
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 26
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator TIMER test point

XT7
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:

2. Select Ch 1 on CTU Param, NEXT,
NEXT, Width
WAVEFORM 27
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Test Interrogator TIPRF test point

XT8 100 Hz
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 2 Test Interrogator

TRIGGER jack
Conditions:
MICROSECOND MARKERS XT6
TIMER XT7
TIPRF 100Hz XT8
4-26
HA72500
WAVEFORM 28
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
0.1 milliseconds/division
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
1. Maintenance Mode
2. Select Channel 1
3. Select FLT LIMIT Select DELAY
WAVEFORM 29
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Channel 1 to XT10
Timebase:
10 milliseconds/division, single DME

20 milliseconds/division dual DME
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
5 volt logic levels
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 30
Test Interrogator
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
M FLT DELAY XT9
ATTENUATOR XT10
1 MHz 15V XT11
4-27
HA72500
WAVEFORM 31
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 32
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video SDES jack (lower

trace)
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

INTERROGATIONS jack
Conditions:

SDES switch ON
WAVEFORM 33
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video DOUBLE PULSE

DECODER OUT jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Receiver Video DETECTED LOG

VIDEO jack
Conditions:
10 MHz 15V XT12
SDES PULSE XA1
DOUBLE PULSE DECODER OUT XA3
4-28
HA72500
WAVEFORM 34
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Receiver Video
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video DEAD TIME jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Test Interrogator INTERROGATION

TIMING jack Channel 2
Conditions:

DEAD TIME set to 6
WAVEFORM 35
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:

MODULATOR jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

TIMING jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 36
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
DEAD TIME XA4
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video ON CHANNEL

VIDEO jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

VIDEO jack (0.5 volts/division)
Conditions:

Hi Eff selected
TRIGS TO MODULATOR XA5
ON CHANNEL VIDEO XA11
4-29
HA72500
WAVEFORM 37
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Receiver Video
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
0.5 volts/division
Connect to:

VIDEO jack
Typical value:
1.2 volts pulse on 0.7 volts DC

(high interrogation level shown)
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 38
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

DECODER jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Channel 1 to XT1
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

DECODER OUT XA3 jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 39
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Receiver Video test point XT3
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video Channel 1 to test

point XT2 SQUITTER FREQUENCY
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 2 to Receiver Video test

point XT3
Conditions:
DETECTED LOG VIDEO XA13
SELECT INTERROGATION XT1
SQUITTER FREQUENCY XT2
4-30
HA72500
WAVEFORM 40
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Receiver Video
Trigger from:
Channel 1
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Channel 1 to Receiver Video board

test point XT3
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 41
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:

test point XT5 BEACON DELAY O/P
Typical value:
15 volt logic levels
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 2 Receiver Video DOUBLE

PULSE DECODER OUT test jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 42
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:

test point XT6
Typical value:
1.6 volts peak pulse on 1.2 volts DC
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 2 connected to Receiver

Video test point XT13
Conditions:

Hi Eff selected
XT3
BEACON DELAY O/P XT5
XT6
4-31
HA72500
WAVEFORM 43
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Receiver Video
Trigger from:

DECODER OUT jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:

test point XT8
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 2 to Receiver Video

DOUBLE PULSE DECODER OUT
jack
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 44
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
Channel 1 - 1 volt/division
Channel 2 - 5 volts/division
Connect to:

test point XT11
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Channel 1 to Receiver Video test

point XT6
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 45
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
2 microseconds/division (lower trace)
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video board test point XT12
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

INTERROGATIONS jack
Conditions:

SDES switch to ON
XT8
XT11
XT12
4-32
HA72500
WAVEFORM 46
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Receiver Video
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:

test point XT6
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

Video board test point XT13
Conditions:

Hi Eff selected
WAVEFORM 47
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:

test point XT6
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:

Video test point XT13
Conditions:

Hi Eff selected
WAVEFORM 48
Receiver Video
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Receiver Video board test point XT20
Typical value:
XT13
XT14
XT20
Included reference
waveforms:
Conditions:
4-33
HA72500
WAVEFORM 49
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Transmitter Driver
Trigger from:
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Transmitter Driver SQUARE

MODULATION jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 50
Transmitter Driver
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
Transmitter Driver FUNCTION

GENERATOR jack
Typical value:
5 to 10 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 51
Transmitter Driver
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Transmitter Driver SHAPED

MODULATION jack
Typical value:
17 volts DC, 25 to 35 volts peak pulse
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
SQUARE MODULATION XA1
FUNCTION GENERATOR XA2
SHAPED MODULATION XA3
4-34
HA72500
WAVEFORM 52
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Transmitter Driver
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:
DRIVER LEVEL jack
Typical value:
2.5 to 4.0 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 53
Pulse Shaper
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
Pulse Shaper Board test point XT4
Typical value:
11 to 15 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 54
Exciter
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
Both channels DC
Sensitivity:
Channel 1: 10 volts/division
Channel 2: 200 mA/division
Connect to:
Channel 1: Collector supply lead of

V5, V6 pair in exciter
V5, V6 pair in exciter, with current
probe
Typical value:
Channel 1: 20 to 30 volts
Channel 2: 0.4 to 0.7 amperes
(Both values depend on operating
frequency)
Conditions:
DRIVER LEVEL XA5
SQUARE MODULATION XT4
V5, V6 CURRENT
4-35
HA72500
WAVEFORM 55
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Medium Power Driver
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
Both channels DC
Sensitivity:
Channel 1. 10 volts/division
Channel 2: 1 ampere/division
Connect to:

V1 in medium power driver
V1 in medium power driver, with
current probe
Typical value:
Channel 1: 22 to 30 volts
Channel 2: 1.9 to 2.7 amperes
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 56
Trigger from:
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
COLLECTOR CURRENT

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 amperes/division
Connect to:
Collector supply lead V1 in power

modulation amplifier, with current
probe
Typical value:
5 to 8 amperes
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 57
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
COLLECTOR CURRENT
Trigger from:
Internal, Channel 1
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
20 volts/division
Connect to:
Transponder Power Supply test point

XT5
Typical value:
40 volts peak-to-peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
XT5
4-36
HA72500
WAVEFORM 58
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Trigger from:
Internal, Channel 1
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
0.2 volts/division
Connect to:

XT8
Typical value:
0.35 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 59
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
Internal, Channel 1
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:

XT9
Typical value:
4 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 60
1kW RF Amplifier
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:
POWER AMP MODULATOR jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
XT8
XT9
POWER AMP MODULATOR XA1
4-37
HA72500
WAVEFORM 61
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
1kW RF Amplifier
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:
POWER AMP OUTPUT jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 62
1kW RF Amplifier
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:
POWER AMP DRIVER XA3

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
1 volt/division
Connect to:
POWER AMP DRIVERJACK
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 63
1kW RF Amplifier
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
POWER AMP Output XA2
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
5 volts/division
Connect to:
SHAPED MODULATION jack
Typical value:
17 volts DC, 25 to 35 volts peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
SHAPED MODULATION XA10
4-38
HA72500
WAVEFORM 64
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
1kW RF Amplifier :
250W Output Amplifiers
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 amperes/division
Connect to:
Collector supply lead to 250W

amplifiers A3-A10, with current probe
Typical value:
10 to 15 amperes peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 65
1kW RF Amplifier :
Power Mod Amp
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 amperes/division
Connect to:
Collector supply lead to V1 of power

modulation amplifier in 1kW RF PA,
with current probe
Typical value:
7 to 9 A pedestal, 10 to 12 A peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
WAVEFORM 66
1kW RF Amplifier :
Drivers
Trigger from:
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
COLLECTOR CURRENT
COLLECTOR CURRENT
DRIVER COLLECTOR CURRENT

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 amperes/division
Connect to:
Collector supply lead to 250W

amplifiers A1, A2, with current probe
Typical value:
1.5 to 2.5 A pedestal, 8 to 15 A peak
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
4-39
HA72500
WAVEFORM 67
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
SECTION 4
Test Interrogator
Trigger from:

MODULATOR test jack
Timebase:
Mode:
DC
Sensitivity:
2 volts/division
Connect to:

REPLIES jack
Typical value:
Included reference
waveforms:
None
Conditions:
DETECTED REPLIES XA7
4-40
HA72500
SECTION 4
4.3
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
4.3.1
Stripline Printed Wiring Boards
Component replacement on the flexible stripline printed wiring boards used in the
LDB-102 requires that special requirements relating to positioning of components,
soldering and cleaning be observed.
4.3.1.1
Positioning of Ceramic Chip Capacitors
a. Lateral Positioning.
Ceramic chips must be positioned within the track or pad boundaries or, when
the pad is the same width as the chip, within 0.25 mm of true position (that is,
0.25 mm deviation each side of centre line); refer to Figure 4-2
Figure 4-2
Lateral Positioning of Chip Capacitors
b. Longitudinal Positioning.
Metallised contact ends of ceramic chip capacitors should not be positioned so
that they overhang the ends of the pads; refer to Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3
Longitudinal Positioning of Chip Capacitors
4-41
HA72500
SECTION 4
4.3.1.2
Soldering
4.3.1.2.1
Type of Solder and Flux
The solder to be used for soldering ceramic chip capacitors to stripline board should be
62-36-2 (Sn-Pb-Ag) alloy. For manufacture, a solder paste of this alloy is applied by
screen printing. For component replacement, a resin-cored solder wire of this alloy is to
be used; a suitable type is 'Multicore' Sn62. All fluxes must be of the QQ-S-571E Type R
or AS1834 type 2.
4.3.1.2.2
Soldering Surface Mounted Chip Capacitors
The soldering of surface mounted chip capacitors shall be such that the end result
displays good wetting (solderability) indicating good joint integrity and reliability. Solder
joints are to be smooth, bright and feathered to a thin edge, indicating proper wetting
action. Lead material is not to be exposed within the solder connection, and no sharp
protrusions or contamination (embedded foreign material) is to be evident. The contour
of the component lead must be visible. The height of the solder fillet should extend at
least one-third of the chip height and not higher than the end of the chip. The soldered
joint surfaces should exhibit good wettability (that is, low contact angles of the solder in
contact with the joined surfaces). Figure 4-4shows these requirements, together with
examples of typical soldering faults.
Figure 4-4
Chip Capacitor Soldering Requirements
4-42
HA72500
4.3.1.2.3
SECTION 4
Soldering Through Board Mounted Chip Capacitors
The main criterion for a sound joint is a smooth bright joint displaying good wetting
across the entire width of the metallised contact of the chip. Care must be taken that no
short circuits are caused due to excessive solder. Refer to Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5
4.3.1.2.4
Soldering of Through Board Mounted Chip Capacitors
Workmanship
Care must be taken when soldering ceramic chip capacitors to stripline. Excessive
temperature will cause damage to the metallised chip contacts and stripline pads. On
completion of each solder joint check for evaporation of the metallised chip contacts and
for lifted pads or track. Under no circumstances are ceramic chip capacitors to be
touched with a soldering iron. The molten solder joint must not be disturbed while
cooling; cooling should be natural, without assistance from liquid or air.
4.3.1.2.5
Placement and Soldering of Standard Components to Stripline
Standard components (such as resistors, capacitors, diodes) when used in conjunction

with stripline board must have the shortest possible leads to reduce inadvertent
inductance.
The following are essential requirements:
a. Components must have the shortest possible leads and be as close as possible
to the surface of the board.
b. Stress relief bends are not required.
c. For surface mounted ribbon leads, the soldered area between lead and land of
ribbon wire leads is to be greater than the square of the lead width. After
soldering, the distance from the top of the lead to the top of the land is to be less
that three times the lead thickness, and the lead outlines are to be visible.
Maximum and minimum lead overhang conditions are shown in Figure 4-6, and
maximum and minimum solder conditions are shown in Figure 4-7.
4-43
HA72500
SECTION 4
Figure 4-6
Part Placement
Figure 4-7
Maximum/Minimum Solder Conditions
4-44
HA72500
SECTION 4
d. Surface mounted round, flat or coined leads are not to have any side overhang.
The contact length of the lead is to be twice the width of the flattened leads, and
twice the diameter for round leads. Lead placement requirements are shown in
Figure 4-8 and soldering conditions are shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-8
Lead Placement Conditions
Figure 4-9
Lead Soldering Conditions
e. Coated or sealed components (such as capacitors) must display a minimum

clearance of 0.25 mm between the solder fillet and the coating; refer Figure 4-10.
4-45
HA72500
Figure 4-10
f.
SECTION 4
Minimum Clearance of Sealed Components
Multiple lead terminations are allowable within the following constraints:

1. No lead is closer than 1.25 mm to the end of the metallisation of a ceramic
chip capacitor; refer to Figure 4-11.
2. Pads are of sufficient size to accommodate the number of leads; refer to
Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11
Multiple Lead Termination Requirements
4-46
HA72500
4.3.1.3
SECTION 4
Cleaning
On completion of soldering, printed board assemblies should be cleaned by brush

application of Freon TE35, Freon TP35 or ethyl alcohol. It should be noted that the
following components and materials are adversely affected by cleaning solvents such as
Freon (trichlorotriflurorethane):
a. All aluminium electrolytic capacitors where ends are not sealed with epoxy
resins.
b. Variable and/or adjustable capacitors and resistors.
c. Metal oxide resistors (such as Welwyn F series).
d. Wire wound resistors (such as IRC ASW series).
e. MFD capacitors.
f.
'Styroseal' capacitors and other polystyrene capacitors of the wound film type.
g. All polystyrene materials and coatings.

h. Inductor type 222V57973 (red) or any inductor impregnated with M198 or with
potted cores (such as 89V57997 and 90V57997).
i.
All silicon based rubber material, or components containing it such as tantalum

foil capacitors (Plessey type ETR) and miniature variable capacitors (Morganite
type 81 or 83).
j.
Wax and silicon greases.
k. Natural rubber and neoprene.

l.
4.3.2
Components impregnated or coated with Dow Corning 630 Protective Coating.
Conformal Coating
Most printed wiring boards in the DME LDB-102 equipment are coated with Dow Corning
Conformal Coating 1-2577. Component replacement will breach the conformal coating,
which must then be restored on completion of the repair.
Repair and restoration of conformal coating should be conducted as follows:
a. Desolder the component. Use a small soldering iron or a solder sucker device at
the lowest practicable tip temperature (250 to 300 degrees C); maximum tip
temperature should not exceed 300 degrees C. The coating is affected by a timeby-temperature factor, so apply heat for the shortest possible time.
b. If the conformal coating becomes discoloured or charred from desoldering,
carefully scrape the affected coating away or use a rubber eraser to remove it.
c. Clean the area affected by desoldering; use Freon TP35, or equivalent. Do NOT
flood or wet the conformal coating, as this may dissolve it.
d. Solder in the new component with a resin flux-cored solder wire.
e. Remove the flux residue and clean the surrounding conformal coating. Use a
cotton-tipped applicator (cotton bud) moistened with Freon TP35, or equivalent,
as soon as possible after soldering. Do NOT flood or wet the conformal coating,
as this may dissolve it.
f.
To restore the conformal coating recoat the soldered joint(s), the component
leads on both sides of the board, and any bare board surfaces by brush
application of Dow Corning Conformal Coating 1-2577. This material will be
supplied thinned for brushing.
4-47
HA72500
4.3.3
SECTION 4
RF Transistor Replacement
This section describes the preferred method for removal of RF low power and high
power transistors from printed wiring boards (PWB), especially microstrip circuitry on
Teflon substrate: it is assumed that the device to be removed is to be discarded as
faulty, most emphasis being placed on avoiding damage to the PWB which is being reused.
Care must be taken in component removal from any PWB to avoid the use of excessive
heat, as this will reduce the adhesion of the copper track to the base material: this is
especially critical in the microstrip-on-TefIon case, where the initial adhesion is lower
than with fibreglass boards and the tracks rely on surface adhesion alone, having no
plated-through holes which provide mechanical anchoring as well as thermal shunting.
4.3.3.1
Tools Required
a. For efficient removal of surface mounted transistors, it is advisable to have two

instrument type soldering irons available, one with a small bit with a flat area,
which is temperature controlled to 250 degrees Celsius, and the other with a
larger flat bit to rapidly heat larger thermal masses.
b. A reel of multi-cored solder
c. Tapered nose pliers and tweezers.
d. A fine sharp blade such as a craft knife.
e. A vice or clamp for securing small assemblies.
f.
Damp pad for keeping iron bit clean - important.
g. Solder sucker or solder wick braid.
4.3.3.2
Preparation of Unit
a. With all external connections removed, take the LRU from its module and the
PWB, or subassembly, from the unit, if possible; see Section 4.1.1 if necessary
for instructions on removal and replacement of LRU and PWB sub-assemblies.
b. Note the method used to mount the transistor, and withdraw and retain any
screws or nuts used.
c. Secure the PWB or subassembly with a clamp or vice to leave both hands free.
4.3.3.3
Removal of Device
a. If any surface mounted components are within 3 mm of the device joints, these
should be removed, first noting their precise positioning with respect to the
transistor, for later replacing.
b. Miscellaneous chip components can be readily removed using the two-iron
method - apply the iron with the larger bit to the end of the component connected
to ground plane and the smaller bit to the other end; as soon as the solder has
melted both ends, lift the component between the bits and quickly remove it from
the heat before it loses its end cap plating.
4-48
HA72500
SECTION 4
c. If the transistor is soldered to large track areas (such as ground planes) these
joints should be unsoldered first; using the larger soldering iron bit and a little
fresh solder, melt the local solder and, using the solder sucker or wick, reduce
the molten solder as fast and thoroughly as possible. Whilst the solder is still
molten, use the sharp blade to part all transistor tabs, except one, from the
copper areas: it may be necessary to complete this later. Using the smaller
soldering iron bit, reduce the solder and, again using the blade, lift the tabs of the
transistor connected to the microstrip tracks, then finally lift the remaining large
tab.
d. Lift the device, using pliers to hold the body and the soldering iron to finally part
any joints still connected.
e. Clean up all track areas by carefully using the soldering iron to reflow the solder.
4.3.3.4
Inserting the New Device
a. Handle the new transistor by the body, or the tabs to be connected to ground
plane, to prevent any static discharge damage. Place it in the desired position,
ensuring that the tabs are accurately aligned with the tracks, using any screws or
nuts removed earlier.
b. Pressing the body down gently with an insulated tool, if needed, solder any
ground plane connections first, using the soldering iron with the large bit and
more solder - not too much.
c. Using the smaller bit, solder the collector (or drain) lead(s) to track(s) using
minimum heat for a clean joint; then solder the base (or gate) lead(s) to the
appropriate track(s).
d. Finally, any components previously removed should be carefully resoldered back
in their correct positions.
e. Clean the board to remove any excess flux and inspect new joints.
f.
The PWB can now be refitted into its box and the appropriate LRU tests applied.
4-49
HA72500
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B
B-i
HA72500
APPENDIX B
TABLE of CONTENTS
B.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS AND MASSES ..................................................B-1
B.1
B.2
DME LDB-102 STATION (SINGLE 1kW) TYPE 1A72500

DME LDB-102 STATION (DUAL 1kW) TYPE 2A72500
B-1
B-1
B-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX B
LIST of TABLES
Table B-1
Table B-2
Dimensions and Masses - Single 1 kW DME ............................................ B-1

Dimensions and Masses - Dual 1 kW DME............................................... B-1
B-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX B
B.
B.1
DME LDB-102 STATION (SINGLE 1kW) TYPE 1A72500
The dimensions and masses of the main items of the single 1kW station equipment are
listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1
Dimensions and Masses - Single 1 kW DME
Rack Assembly (Single 1kW DME) 1A72505

(complete with all modules and AC Power Supply)
Antenna Cable Set for Single Installation 1A72560
Accessory Kit, DME Test 1A72561
DME Antenna
HEIGHT
WIDTH
DEPTH
MASS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
1930
560
580
206
Kits of various assemblies and

components
7
3
Refer to separate antenna

handbook
The only assemblies with masses greater than 5 kg are the following:
Rack Frame Assembly 1A72588 (without removable modules)
100
64
19
B.2
DME LDB-102 STATION (DUAL 1kW) TYPE 2A72500
The dimensions and masses of the main items of the dual 1kW station equipment are
listed in Table B-2.
Table B-2
Dimensions and Masses - Dual 1 kW DME

HEIGHT
WIDTH
DEPTH
MASS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
Rack Assembly (Dual 1kW DME) 2A72505

(complete with all modules)
1930
560
580
185
Dual AC Power Supply System 2A69758
1060
560
560
190
Dual AC Power Supply System 3A69758
1930
560
560
220
Antenna Cable Set for Dual Installation 2A72560

Accessory Kit, DME Test 1A72561
DME Antenna
Kits of various assemblies and

components
7
3
Refer to separate antenna

handbook
The only assemblies with masses greater than 5 kg are the following:
Rack Frame Assembly 1A72588 (without removable modules)
100
64
19
B-1
HA72500
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX C
C-i
HA72500
APPENDIX C
TABLE of CONTENTS
C.
POWER AND REMOTE CONTROL .......................................................C-1
C.1
POWER REQUIREMENTS AND CONSUMPTION
C-1
C.2
REMOTE CONTROL AND MONITORING FACILITIES
C-2
C.2.1 RCMS Control Inputs................................................................................... C-2
C.2.2 RCMS Inputs and Outputs........................................................................... C-2
C.2.3 Remote Indication Descriptions................................................................... C-4
C-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX C
LIST of TABLES
Table C-1
Table C-2
Table C-3
Table C-4
RCMS Control Inputs............................................................................. C-2

RCMS Inputs ......................................................................................... C-2
RCMS Outputs ...................................................................................... C-3
Remote Indication Functions ................................................................. C-4
C-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX C
C.
C.1
POWER REQUIREMENTS AND CONSUMPTION
The primary source requirement is:

a. Input voltage: 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250 or 260 volts 10%, single phase.
b. Input frequency: 45 to 55 Hz.
c. Consumption: 1400 VA maximum (when charging flat batteries) for single beacon;
2800 VA for dual beacon.
The battery supply requirement is:
a. Voltage: 24 volts nominal.
b. Capacity: not less than 105 AH (discharged at 10-hour rate to 1.85 volts per cell).
This will give 14 hours operation at squitter rate.
c. Current consumption from a fully charged battery at 27 volts is:
Single Transponder,
Single Monitor
Dual Transponder,
Dual Monitor
Operating at squitter rate:
6 amperes
7 amperes
Operating at maximum replies:
12 amperes
13 amperes
C-1
HA72500
APPENDIX C
C.2
REMOTE CONTROL AND MONITORING FACILITIES
C.2.1
RCMS Control Inputs
The three remote control functions (OFF, NO 1 ON, NO 2 ON) shown in Table C-1 are
each activated by applying a control voltage of 24 volts DC to the relevant control inputs
on the External I/O PWB 1A72557. Although these inputs are protected against reverse
polarity, the correct polarity must be used to activate the input. If more than one input is
active, the priority is OFF, NO 1 ON, NO 2 ON.
An input can be activated by wiring the +24 Volts Protected supply to the '+ve' terminal
and earthing the '-ve' terminal. Both +24 Volts Protected and Earth are also available on
the I/O PWB Assembly. The +24 Volts Protected supply can source a maximum current
of 140 mA.
The loop resistance of the external input must be between 0 and 1200 ohms. The control
responds to either impulse (0.2 to 2 seconds impulse duration) or continuous earthing.
Table C-1
RCMS Control Inputs
SIGNAL NAME
EXTERNAL I/O BOARD CONTACTS

Negative Input
Positive Input
OFF
XB10:5
XB10:6
NO 1 ON
XB10:3
XB10:4
NO 2 ON
XB10:1
XB 10:2
C.2.2
RCMS Inputs and Outputs
RCMS inputs are voltage free (dry) optically-isolated inputs to 100 volts AC, at the
external I/O board. They are listed in Table C-2.
RCMS outputs are voltage free (dry) contacts, floating to 100 volts AC, at the external
I/O board. They are listed in Table C-3.
Table C-2
RCMS Inputs
SIGNAL NAME

Out 1
Out 2
Comments
Master Ident Output
XB1:2
XB1:1
From DME ident generator, voltage

free.
Recovered Ident Key
XB1:3
SIGNAL NAME

In 1
Associated Ident In
Recovered ident key from monitor

module, open collector.
XB1:4
In 2
Comments
To DME ground referenced
(optional pullup on CTU processor
board). Used when external ident
keying is to be used as master.
C-2
HA72500
Table C-3
APPENDIX C
RCMS Outputs
SIGNAL NAME

Common
Normally Closed
Normally Open
NORMAL
XB9:4
XB9:6
XB9:2
TRANSFER
XB9:3
XB9:5
XB9: 1
SHUTDOWN
XB8:4
XB8:6
XB8:2
LOCAL CONTROL
XB3:4
XB3:6
XB3:2
NO 1 ON
XB7:4
XB7:6
XB7:2
NO 2 ON
XB7:3
XB7:5
XB7:1
MAINTENANCE
XB3:3
XB3:5
XB3:1
MONITOR ALM INHIBIT
XB2:3
XB2:5
XB2:1
PRIMARY ALARM
XB6:3
XB6:5
XB6:1
SECONDARY ALARM
XB6:4
XB6:6
XB6:2
BATT CHG NORM 1
XB4:4
XB4:6
XB4:2
BATT CHG NORM 2
XB4:3
XB4:5
XB4:1
AC PWR NORM
XB5:4
XB5:6
XB5:2
Ground (0 volts)
XB11:5,6
+24 V DC - protected
XB1:5,6
C-3
HA72500
C.2.3
APPENDIX C
Remote Indication Descriptions
For each remote indication, the RCMS interface provides voltage-free (dry) changeover
relay contacts capable of switching 50 volts DC at 200 mA and 24 volts DC at 500 mA,
surge protected and isolated to 100 volts AC.
+24 Volts Protected and Earth are also available on the External I/O PWB Assembly.
The transponder functions for which status indication is available for remote indication
are listed in Table C-4.
Table C-4
Remote Indication Functions
FUNCTION
PURPOSE
No. 1 On/No. 2 On
Indicators which transponder is on and operating
Normal
Indicates when the selected main transponder is on and

operating with no faults or alarms.
Will not be active if the monitor alarms are inhibited.
Transfer
Indicates when the standby transponder is on and

operation (dual system only).
Shutdown
Indicates when the transponder(s) have been turned off

by the CTU (due to a fault condition).
Maintenance
Indicated when the DME is in maintenance mode or in a

test condition.
Monitor Alarm Inhibit
Indicates when the DME is set to ignore the alarms from

the monitor(s).
Primary Alarm
Indicates when the DME has a primary fault or alarm.
Secondary Alarm
Indicates when the DME has a secondary fault or alarm.
Battery Charger
Normal No. l/No. 2
Indicates when the battery charge conditions are normal
AC Power Normal
Indicates when the input AC power is normal.
Local Control
Indicates when the CTU has been put into local control
mode.
Ground
Ground reference for the RCMS.
+24V Protected
Protected voltage source.
Ident Tone
Recovered ident tone, from the selected monitor

module. 600 ohms balanced line.
C-4
HA72500
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
D-i
HA72500
APPENDIX D
TABLE of CONTENTS
D.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION .......................................................................D-1
D.1
INTRODUCTION
D-1
D.2
INSTALLATION ITEMS REQUIRED
D-2
D.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. D-2
D.2.2 Hardware ..................................................................................................... D-2
D.2.3 Tools............................................................................................................ D-3
D.2.4 Test Equipment ........................................................................................... D-3
D.3
EQUIPMENT EARTHING
D-3
D.4
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION OF RACK
D-4
D.4.1 Unpacking.................................................................................................... D-4
D.4.2 Checks after Unpacking .............................................................................. D-4
D.5
EMPLACEMENT OF DME RACK(S)
D-4
D.6
AC AND DC POWER CONNECTIONS
D-5
D.6.1 AC Connections........................................................................................... D-5
D.6.2 DC Connections .......................................................................................... D-5
D.7
RACK ASSEMBLY
D-7
D.7.1 Module Assembly ........................................................................................ D-7
D.7.2 1kW Power Amplifier Assembly................................................................... D-7
D.7.3 1kW PA Power Supply Assembly................................................................ D-8
D.8
WIRING CONNECTIONS
D-10
D.8.1 External Interface ...................................................................................... D-10
D.8.2 Wiring for Power Supply Signals ............................................................... D-10
D.8.3 Wiring for Remote Control and Status Signalling ...................................... D-10
D.8.4 Wiring to Associated VHF Navaid ............................................................. D-12
D.9
ANTENNA INSTALLATION
D-13
D.9.1 General...................................................................................................... D-13
D.9.2 Pipe Mounting Installation ......................................................................... D-13
D.9.3 Antenna Assembly and Connections......................................................... D-14
D.10 ANTENNA CABLES
D-16
D.10.1Antenna Feeder Cables............................................................................. D-16
D.10.2ERP Monitor Cable.................................................................................... D-19
D.10.3ERP Monitor Attenuator............................................................................. D-21
D.10.4Antenna Integrity Signal Cable .................................................................. D-22
D.11 COMPLETION
D-22
D-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX D
LIST of FIGURES
Figure D-1
Figure D-2
Figure D-3
Figure D-4
Figure D-5
Figure D-6
Figure D-7
Figure D-8
Figure D-9
Figure D-10
Figure D-11
Figure D-12
Figure D-13
Figure D-14
Figure D-15
Figure D-16
Figure D-17
Figure D-18
Figure D-19
Figure D-20
Figure D-21
DC Power Connections, Single DME .................................................... D-6

DC Power Connections, Dual DME....................................................... D-6
1kW RF Power Amplifier Connections .................................................. D-8
1kW PA Power Supply Connections ..................................................... D-9
RF Feeder Connector Termination...................................................... D-17
Monitor Feeder Connector Termination............................................... D-20
Antenna Integrity Signal Cable Connections ....................................... D-22
Rack Installation .................................................................................. D-23
Rack Power Cabling - Single 1kW DME Installation ........................... D-24
Rack Power Cabling - Dual 1kW DME Installation .............................. D-25
Air Vent Assembly ............................................................................... D-26
LDB-102 Single 1kW Rack Arrangement ............................................ D-27
LDB-102 Dual 1kW Rack Arrangement............................................... D-28
AC Power Supply Monitor Connections .............................................. D-29
Antenna Feeder Connections - RF and Signal.................................... D-30
Pipe Mount - Chu Antenna .................................................................. D-31
Antenna Installation - Chu Antenna..................................................... D-32
Antenna Installation - Interscan Antenna............................................. D-33
Interscan Antenna Baseplate .............................................................. D-34
External I/O Board Layout ................................................................... D-35
dB Systems Antenna Base Connections............................................. D-36
D-iii
HA72500
"
APPENDIX D
D.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
D.1
INTRODUCTION
REFER Figure D-9 and Figure D-10

This appendix describes the recommended procedures for installing an LDB-102 DME
beacon, and is compiled in a sequence which provides the simplest installation plan.
Some details will be dictated by particular site characteristics and can only be decided
locally; these items, listed below, are not covered in this appendix.
Details not covered are:
a. Site preparation.
b. Assembly of antenna mast.
c. Assembly of equipment shelter.
d. Laying of power cables and control/monitoring cables.
e. Assembly and wiring of work bench, lights and power outlets in the equipment
shelter.
f.
Mounting and connections to the remote control facility.
If batteries other than the fully sealed type are used, it is necessary to locate them in a
room separated from the main equipment; the battery room must have adequate
ventilation to prevent accumulation of fumes. An alternative arrangement is to house the
batteries in a suitable box outside the main shelter, again with adequate ventilation.
Essential elements of equipment shelter layouts are shown in Figure D-9 and
Figure D-10 for single and dual installations respectively.
D-1
HA72500
APPENDIX D
D.2
INSTALLATION ITEMS REQUIRED
D.2.1
Introduction
This section lists all the major ancillary items needed for the installation of an LDB-102
DME beacon which are NOT supplied with the equipment, and references them to the
section in which they are specified. The list applies to a standard beacon installation.
D.2.2
Hardware
a.
Power cable for mains supply connection, rated for 240 volts, 8 amperes
minimum. Conventional flexible 3-core mains cable is sufficient.
(Qty 2 required for dual DME) : see Section D.6.1.
b.
Power cable for connection to batteries. Recommended type is

195 x 0.25 mm, (10 sq mm) such as Hartland HC0060: see Section D.6.2
c.
Battery terminal lugs to suit batteries used : see Section D.6.2.
d.
Battery supply fuse (if required); if used, it is to be slow blow (delay) type,
32 amperes rating, HRC type or equivalent: see Section D.6.2
e.
Antenna mounting pipe, diameter to suit antenna used : see Section D.9.
f.
Antenna obstruction lights (if to be fitted) : see Section D.9
g.
Mains power cable for connection to antenna obstruction lights (if fitted) : see
Section D.9.
h.
Cable strain bracket (if required) : see Section D.9.
i.
Cable(s) for earthing rack to earth bus (not less than 20 square mm area of
copper total) and lugs as necessary : see Section D.3.
j.
Wooden plinth for mounting rack: see Section D.5.
k.
Masonry anchors for securing plinth : see Section D.5.
l.
Coach screws 120 mm long by 10 mm diameter, for securing rack to wooden

plinth; Qty 4 per rack : see Section D.5.
The following are required only if the unit is NOT collocated with other equipment
requiring extensive grounding; otherwise, use a common earth bus for all equipments
(see Section D.3).
m.
Grounding stakes, 2 metres long minimum; Qty 2 minimum.
n.
Earth bus, copper bar 25 mm by 3 mm; lengths as necessary for the

installation.
o.
Mechanical and electrical fittings for earth bus (screws, lugs, cable).
D-2
HA72500
D.2.3
APPENDIX D
Tools
As well as normal hand tools appropriate to the installation of an electronic system such
as the LDB-102 DME, the following special items are required:
a. Two wrenches, 13/16 inch capacity (for termination of antenna feeder cable, as
detailed in Section D.10.1).
b. Crimp tool for fixing type N connectors on type RG-223 coaxial cable (for termination
of the monitor feeder cable, as detailed in Section D.10.2). Suitable tool types are
Radiall R282-223 or R282-240 (for Radiall connectors); Amphenol TWIN-HEX tool,
handle 227-944 and die set 227-1221-57 (for Amphenol connectors); ERMA 29010 (for
both connector types).
D.2.4
Test Equipment
Test equipment required for installation is specified in Section E.1 of Appendix E.
D.3
"
EQUIPMENT EARTHING
REFER Figure D-1, Figure D-2, Figure D-9 and Figure D-10
Very good ground connections between the rack and the installation ground are
essential.
It is recommended that 2-metre long copper stakes be used, with a minimum of two
stakes spaced about 1750 mm apart and connected together at their tops with 25 mm by
3 mm copper bar, or very heavy PVC-covered cable. Copper braid must not be used. If
the ground contains a high percentage of non-conductive elements such as silica or
calcium, longer stakes should be used.
A copper earthing bar at least 25 mm by 3 mm should be fitted in the duct beneath the
rack(s). The copper bar should pass through the wall of the shelter and be bolted
securely to the copper bar or cable joining the ground stakes.
Connection is made from the negative battery terminal at the rear right-hand side of the
rack to the earthing bar by one or more lengths of heavy duty multi-strand earthing cable
fitted with lugs at each end; refer to Figure D-1 and Figure D-2. These terminals are
7.94 mm (5/16 inch) diameter. The cable (or cables) used for this should have crosssectional area of at least 20 square mm and the run should be as short as possible. This
cable will pass through the right-hand (as viewed from the rear of the rack) cable entry
hole in the base of the rack.
Ensure that good electrical connections are made where the bars join and where the
rack earth cables are bolted to the bar; refer to Figure D-9 Figure D-10.
D-3
HA72500
"
APPENDIX D
D.4
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION OF RACK
D.4.1
Unpacking
REFER Appendix B
The wired DME rack and plug-in modules are packed separately, and must be reassembled on site.
Carefully unpack the rack, modules, power supply and cables, and check for any
damage that may have occurred during transit. Check that all items of equipment are
present; refer to Appendix B for a list of major equipment items.
D.4.2
a.
Replace any screws or fasteners that are found lying loose inside the rack as
a result of vibration in transit.
b.
Check that no module guide rails have come loose during transit.
c.
Check that the following subassemblies are mounted in the rack:
d.
D.5
"
Checks after Unpacking
1.
RF Panel 1A72545 (or 2A72545 if a dual DME).
2.
External I/O PWB Assembly 1A72557.
3.
Transponder and CTU subracks.
The racks should now be secured to the plinth before further assembly.
EMPLACEMENT OF DME RACK(S)
REFER Figure D-8

The equipment room/shelter should be provided with in-floor ducts for the earth bus, DC
input power cables from the battery room, and AC mains power cables. If required,
remote control cables can also be ducted; recommended duct size is 150 mm by
100 mm.
The rack(s) should be mounted on a wooden plinth to enable a 60 mm floor clearance;
leave at least 800 mm clearance from the wall behind the rack for access. The wooden
plinth(s) should be firmly attached to the floor using masonry anchors to suit the
thickness of the plinth, and the rack(s) attached to them using 10 mm by 120 mm
hexagon head coach screws; the mounting centres and general detail can be seen in
Figure D-8.
"
NOTE
In a dual system the AC power supplies are mounted separately and the two
racks may be spaced apart. The DC power cables from the AC supplies to the
main racks are best located in the underfloor duct.
D-4
HA72500
APPENDIX D
D.6
AC AND DC POWER CONNECTIONS
D.6.1
AC Connections
For a single DME beacon installation, the AC mains supply cable is fed into the main
rack through an elongated hole, in the base of the rack to the left of the rear door (as
viewed from the rear), adjacent to the AC power supply unit. The cable connects to the
6-way mains terminal block; line colours are:
ACTIVE
- BROWN;
NEUTRAL
- BLUE;
EARTH
- GREEN/YELLOW.
In a dual system installation, two separate mains cables are required, one for each
power supply. Connections are made to the 6-way mains terminal block in the power
supply rack for AC power supplies Nos 1 and 2.
D.6.2
"
DC Connections
REFER Figure D-1, Figure D-2, Figure D-9 and Figure D-10
The batteries are not normally supplied, and the final arrangement of the battery bank
will depend on the type of batteries to be used.
It is recommended that the installation includes a delay fuse (32 amperes HRC, for
example) in series with the batteries to prevent catastrophic short circuit conditions in the
event of wiring damage; the DME equipment itself is protected by surge-proof circuit
breakers.
Wiring from the battery bank to the rack should be kept as short as possible, using the
recommended cable type (see Section D.2.2). It is important to keep the cable run as
short as possible; the recommended cable type is rated at six times the maximum
equipment operating current of 9 amperes, but even so would introduce a 0.5 volts drop
over a 12-metre run.
The battery connecting cable and terminating lugs must be supplied by the user. The
terminal lugs for connection to the main rack should be ring types; the terminals to which
they connect at the rack end are 7.94 mm (5/16 inch) diameter.
The cable entry to the equipment rack is via the elongated hole in the base to the righthand side of the rear door. The cable is terminated at the heavy-duty terminals marked
BATTERY on the mounting bracket at the back of the main rack.
In a dual system, the DC outputs from the AC power supplies are connected to the red
and black BATTERY terminals on the mounting bracket using the cable assembly
supplied in the installation kit; the DC power cables will have to be cut to length and
terminated with the ring lugs supplied.
See Figure D-1 and Figure D-2 for connection details.
"
NOTE
In a single DME installation, all cables entering the rack via the access holes in
the base must be routed to leave adequate clearance for the AC power supply
unit, which in this type of installation is mounted in the main rack. Cables
should be secured to convenient points within the rack, using cable ties.
No power should be connected to the rack until after installation is complete and beacon
is ready for testing.
D-5
HA72500
APPENDIX D
Figure D-1
DC Power Connections, Single DME
Figure D-2
DC Power Connections, Dual DME
D-6
HA72500
D.7
"
APPENDIX D
RACK ASSEMBLY
REFER Figure D-11

Assemble the air vent on top of the equipment racks as shown in Figure D-11. All
mounting hardware necessary to do this is packed with the mesh sides and unit top
cover.
D.7.1
"
Module Assembly

Unpack each module and inspect it to check that no damage has occurred, particularly
to the 96-way and RF connectors at the rear.
CAUTION
Connectors are not keyed, and it is possible to plug a module into the
wrong position.
Insert each module into its assigned position in the rack, as shown in Figure D-12. The
module name is also printed above the 96-way connector on the subrack motherboard.
This is visible from the front of the rack when the modules are removed.
"
NOTE
In a dual system, install the modules in Transponder 1 or Transponder 2

subracks according to the serial numbers listed in the factory Test Report
which accompanies the equipment.
Slide each module into the assigned position, checking that it moves freely on the guides
and that it can be pushed fully home. Secure the front panel module locking screws.
D.7.2
"
1kW Power Amplifier Assembly
REFER Figure D-3, Figure D-12 and Figure D-13

The 1kW Power Amplifier (type 1A72535) module is fitted as follows:
Unpack the amplifier unit and remove the cover. The cover is held in place with
temporary screws for shipment. Check that no damage has occurred in transit.
Lift the amplifier into position at the rear of the rack, and rest it on the support
brackets. The location of the amplifiers is shown in Figure D-12, for a single DME
and in Figure D-13, for a dual DME. Ensure that the type N coaxial connectors
are to the top.
Secure the amplifier in the rack with the four M6 screws and flat washers, as
shown in Figure D-3.
Connect the DC power and signal connectors, XN1 and XN2, on the amplifier
heatsink, as shown in Figure D-3.
Connect the coaxial cables to the RF Input and RF Output connectors on the
heatsink, as shown in Figure D-3. Ensure that these connectors are firmly
tightened by hand.
Fit the cover over the amplifier unit, securing it with four M6 screws and washers.
Tighten the screws fully to ensure that the RF gasket is properly compressed.
D-7
HA72500
Figure D-3
APPENDIX D
1kW RF Power Amplifier Connections
WARNING
Ensure that the cover of the 1kW RF power amplifier is correctly

refitted as operating the amplifier without it may cause harmful
levels of RF radiation.
D.7.3
1kW PA Power Supply Assembly
The 1kW PA Power Supply (type 1A72540), comprising the Control and Status Board
(type 1A72541) and DC Converter (type 1A72542), is packed separately as a complete
assembly. To fit the 1kW PA Power Supply, proceed as follows:
"
NOTE
Unpack the Power Supply assembly and inspect it for damage.

Be very careful when resting this assembly on a flat surface to avoid damage to
the components projecting from the edge of the Control and Status Board.
Release the screws securing the 1kW PA Power Supply hinged panel and lower
it to the open position.
Place the 1kW PA Power Supply on the open panel as shown in Figure D-4,
being careful to align the projecting components (on the Control and Status
Board) with the apertures in the panel.
Secure the assembly to the panel with the screws provided.
D-8
HA72500
APPENDIX D
Connect the wires and cables from the rack wiring harness as follows:
a.
25-way D connector to XN1 on the Control and Status Board.
b.
Red lead (labelled to 1kW PA PS-1") to XB1:1.
c.
Orange and black leads (labelled "to XB1 1A72540") to XB1:5 and
XB1:6 respectively.
d.
Black lead (labelled "to XP2 1A72542") to post XP2 on the DC

Converter.
These connections are shown in Figure D-4.
Close and fasten the hinged panel.
Figure D-4
1kW PA Power Supply Connections
D-9
HA72500
APPENDIX D
D.8
WIRING CONNECTIONS
D.8.1
External Interface
All external signal connections to the DME rack are made to the External I/O PWB
Assembly 1A72557, which is mounted on the upper left-hand side of the DME rack as
viewed from the rear. This includes AC power supply status signals, beacon remote
control, and beacon status signals.
D.8.2
"
Wiring for Power Supply Signals
REFER Figure D-14

The AC power supply provides status signals via the multi-way plug on the Power
Supply to XN2 on the External I/O Board.
In a single DME, this cable (Cable Assembly 72558-2-55) is already fitted to the rack.
For a dual DME, the signal cable (Cable Assembly 69758-3-26) must be connected from
the two 16-way terminal blocks in the rack housing the power supply units, to XN2 on the
external I/O board in the DME rack. (in the case of a dual DME using a single AC power
supply, there will be only one 16-way terminal block in the power supply rack.) The
signal cable supplied has the 9-way D connector already fitted. Make the connections
shown in Figure D-14 for the interwiring between the AC power supply and the DME.
D.8.3
"
Wiring for Remote Control and Status Signalling
REFER Figure D-20

For remote control and status monitoring of the DME, connections are made to terminal
blocks XB2 - XB10 on the External I/O PWB at the rear of the rack.
The following remote control inputs are available:
OFF/RESET
DME NO 1 ON
DME NO 2 ON
The following remote status indications are available:
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
NO 1 ON
NO 2 ON (Dual only)
PRIMARY FAULT
SECONDARY FAULT
BATTERY CHARGER 1 NORMAL
BATTERY CHARGER 2 NORMAL (Dual only)
MAINS OK
LOCAL CONTROL
MONITOR ALARM INHIBITED
D-10
HA72500
APPENDIX D
In addition, the recovered 1350 Hz ident tone is available for connection to an external
600 ohms balanced line.
The connections to the terminal block for remote control and status signalling are shown
in Figure D-20, and the electrical requirements of the interface are given in
Appendix C.2.
To connect the remote control and status signal cable proceed as follows:
"
1.
Feed the appropriate multicore cables through the left side (viewed from the
rear) elongated hole in the base of the rack.
2.
Run the cables up the side of the rack to the External I/O Board, fastening the
cables to the rack frame using cable ties. Keep these cables away from the
DME rack wiring to prevent coupling of voltage surges should a lightning strike
occur on the remote lines.
3.
Connect the cables to the relevant terminal block contacts on the External I/O
Board. The layout and connection for this board are shown in Figure D-20. In
this figure, the left column of function designations is associated with the left
half of the terminal block. For example, the DME NORMAL function is
connected to terminal block XB9, terminals 2, 4 and 6 with the normally open
relay contact on 2, the common contact on 4 and the normally closed contact
on 6.
4.
For remote signalling of the mains power status, make the connection to the
MAINS OK terminals (XB5:1, 3 and 5) and not AC PWR NORM. The MAINS
OK terminals are directly connected to the mains relay in the AC power supply.
5.
The remote control inputs (to XB10) require a switched positive voltage of at
least 12 volts to activate the function. If this voltage is not available from the
external signalling system, +24 volts DC may be obtained from terminal block
XB1: 5 and 6. To use this voltage, make a connection to the common contact
of the relays in the external signalling unit, then connect the switched voltage to
the '+' terminal of each remote input on XB10. Connect the - terminal of each
remote input to ground, on XB11: 5 and 6, to complete the circuit.
NOTE
The remote control inputs, and the remote signalling outputs, are not protected
beyond the 100 V AC isolation specified in Appendix C.2. If these terminals are
connected directly to external lines where there is a possibility of lightning
induced surges, then external surge protection must be provided in order to
protect the DME.
6.
If the external remote signalling system requires either a switched positive

voltage or a closure to ground to assert a signal, these may be obtained from
the terminal blocks. A +24 volts DC voltage is available at XB1: 5 and 6 and
ground is available at XB11: 5 and 6. If either of these is required, make a
"daisy chain" connection to the common contact of each status signalling
function used.
7.
An additional signalling function, FUSE FAIL, is available from each AC power

supply for external use if required. This is available at terminals 7 and 8 of the
16-way terminal block in the DME Power Supply rack. For this function, the
connections must be made in the Power Supply rack.
D-11
HA72500
D.8.4
"
APPENDIX D
Wiring to Associated VHF Navaid
REFER Figure D-20

If the DME is collocated with an associated VHF navaid, such as a Doppler VOR or ILS,
connections must be made between the two navaids to ensure synchronised ident
generation (as specified in the ICAO requirements). For this purpose, the LDB-102 DME
provides for:
ASSOCIATED IDENT IN (from the VHF Navaid)
ASSOCIATED IDENT OUT (to the VHF Navaid)
The electrical requirements of the ident interface are specified in Appendix C, but it
should be noted that:
a.
The Associated Ident In requires a closure to ground to signal an ident mark

(dot or dash).
b.
The Associated Ident Out provides a floating closure for an ident mark
which is polarity sensitive.
To connect the wiring for the associated VHF navaid, proceed as follows:
1.
Feed the interconnecting cables through the left side (viewed from the rear)
elongated hole in the base of the rack.
2.
Run the cables up the side of the rack to the External I/O Board, fastening the
cables to the rack frame using cable ties.
3.
Connect the wires to the relevant terminal block contacts on the External I/O
Board, the layout and connections of which are shown in Figure D-20.
Connect the ident out" wiring to XB1:1 and 2, observing the polarity
indications. Connect the "ident in" to XB1:4.
4.
If the external ident source switches between ground and a positive voltage,
then remove the link on pins XN10 of the CTU Processor Board.
If the external ident source simply provides a switched closure to ground,
then the XN10 link must be left in place in order to provide a voltage pull-up.
D-12
HA72500
APPENDIX D
D.9
ANTENNA INSTALLATION
D.9.1
General
The Chu antenna type CA3167, supplied fully assembled, has an overall length of
2.7 metres (106.3 inches) and a mass of 45 kg (99.2 pounds); it mounts on a 114.4 mm
(4.5 inches) diameter steel pipe which is supplied and erected by the user. The overall
length includes the obstruction lights, which are normally not supplied; these lights
should be fitted before mounting the antenna.
Alternatively, an Interscan DME/N antenna type 230-7340, may be supplied. It is also
fully assembled, and mountable on a 114.4 mm (4.5 inches) diameter steel pipe which is
supplied and erected by the user. The overall length includes the obstruction lights,
which are normally not supplied; these lights should be fitted before mounting the
antenna according to the instructions given in the DME/N Antenna Handbook.
Another antenna supplied with the LDB-102 is the dB Systems type dBS 5100A. It is
supplied fully assembled and, with its base adaptor fitted, mounts on a steel pipe of
diameter 100 to 105mm, which must be supplied and erected by the user. The mounting
pipe is smaller than that used with the two earlier antennas. The dBS antenna is
approximately 2.7 metres long, including the base adaptor and optional obstruction light.
Details for installing this antenna are given in the dBS Antenna Technical Handbook,
supplied with the antenna.
D.9.2
"
Pipe Mounting Installation

REFER
Figure D-16, Figure D-17 and Figure D-18
The height of the antenna installation must be such that it is above any local obstruction
(such as DVOR antennas, if collocated) or equipment buildings. Choose an appropriate
pipe length, to give adequate antenna height, and ensure rigid mounting of the pipe
base. An entry hole for the antenna cables is recommended as shown in Figure D-17
and Figure D-18.
If the pipe is fastened to the side of a building and projects more than 1 metre above the
point of fixing, then guying or strutting must be provided to prevent wind gust resonance.
If a free-standing mast is to be used, ensure it is sufficiently rigid to prevent deflection or
vibration of the antenna under the maximum wind speeds expected at the site.
The pipe mount for the antenna should be pre-assembled on to the pipe as shown in
Figure D-16 or Figure D-18 (as applicable, depending on the type supplied) before the
pipe is erected, and the antenna mounted onto the pipe after erection; if this cannot be
done then, the antenna could be fitted to the mast before erection and carefully lifted
with the mast. The installation procedure adopted will depend on individual site
limitations.
The recommended routing of the antenna cables is to support them overhead between
the mast and the shelter roof overhang. This method is preferable when low-loss 'Heliax'
type cable is used, to reduce length and to minimise cable handling and bending; see
Figure D-17 and Figure D-18.
It is also recommended that the antenna cables be routed inside the antenna pipe to the
antenna connectors, as shown in Figure D-17 and Figure D-18. This gives the cables
protection from the weather. If this cannot be done, then the cables may be routed on
the outside of the pipe or mast, provided they are securely fastened at regular intervals.
D-13
HA72500
"
APPENDIX D
D.9.3
Antenna Assembly and Connections
D.9.3.1
Chu Antenna
REFER Figure D-17

If the antenna is lifted on to the pre-erected mast and pipe adapter, special care must be
taken to protect the exposed connectors on the base. Particularly, take care not to
damage the gasket.
Remove the cover plate on the adapter to gain access to the antenna connectors.
D.9.3.2
"
Interscan Antenna
REFER Figure D-18

The mast requires a mounting adapter to be fitted to it, onto which the antenna base
casting is then bolted. Full instructions for installing this antenna are given in the
Interscan DME/N Antenna Handbook.
The lighting rod cable passes out from the antenna body through the baseplate. It is best
connected to earth via the antenna mast. Accordingly, cut the cable to the length
required and terminate with an appropriate lug to connect to one of the 10 mm diameter
bolts that mount the antenna base to the mast adapter; see Figure D-18.
D.9.3.3
Cables
Route the antenna cables through the mounting pipe (or on the outside of the mast, as
suitable) and connect them to the antenna, observing the connector designations on the
antenna base. For further details on connecting and terminating the cables, refer to
Section D.10.
If the cable drop distance exceeds 3 metres, a cable strain bracket must be fitted.
External cables must be secured to the pipe mast at 1-metre intervals, and then
supported back to the shelter by the nominated method.
D.9.3.4
dB Systems Antenna
This antenna requires a base adaptor to secure it to the mounting pipe. Full instructions
for mounting the antenna are given in the dBS Antenna Technical Handbook.
The mounting arrangement and cabling is the same as that shown in Figure D-18,
except that there is no antenna continuity monitor cable, and no separate lightning
conductor cable. The lightning conduction path is through the body of the antenna, to the
base adaptor and to the mounting pipe. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that
the mounting pipe is properly earthed to provide a low impedance path for lightning
strike currents. Ensure that the bolts securing the antenna to its base adaptor, and the
bolts clamping the base adaptor to the mounting pipe, are all properly tightened to give a
good electrical connection.
The antenna cables comprise the RF Input cable, one or two monitor cables (single or
dual DME), and the obstruction light power cable. Route these cables through the
mounting pipe and connect them to the appropriate connector on the base of the
antenna, as shown in Figure D-21, and as described in the following sections of this
handbook. Detailed wiring connections for the obstruction light are given in the dBS
Antenna Technical Handbook. For estimating the ERP Monitor signal level in section
D.10.3, use a value of 25dB for the nominal coupling of the monitor ports in the dBS
antenna.
D-14
HA72500
APPENDIX D
There is no antenna continuity monitor in this antenna, so this particular function in the
DME Monitor must be inhibited to prevent an erroneous fault indication. A special plug is
provided for this purpose. It is called a DME Antenna DC Monitor Substitute (part no.
72560-4-07), and is supplied in the DME Antenna Cable Set. Fit this plug to connector
XN2, on the RF Panel Board Assembly, at the top rear of the DME cabinet
(refer Figure D-15).
D-15
HA72500
D.10
APPENDIX D
ANTENNA CABLES
There are a number of cables which must be connected between the DME rack and the
DME antenna. These are:
Antenna Feed Cable
ERP Monitor Cable (quantity 2 used in Dual DME)
DC Continuity Monitor Cable (Interscan antenna only)
Obstruction Light Cable (for optional obstruction lights)
The first three of these cables, complete with their associated connectors, are supplied
in the Antenna Cable Set, type 1A72560 (single) or 2A72560 (dual).
The obstruction light cable must be supplied by the user.
Each of the cables supplied has a connector fitted at one end only, the second being
fitted on-site after the cable is cut to suit the distance between the equipment rack and
the antenna.
D.10.1
"
Antenna Feeder Cables
REFER Figure D-5 and Figure D-15.

The low-loss antenna feed cable (supplied) should be cut to the minimum practicable
length for the installation, to allow maximum radiated power.
The cable is already terminated with a connector at one end. This end should be
connected to the antenna when the cable is installed. The other connector, supplied with
the cable but not terminated, must be attached to the rack end following EXACTLY the
instructions given in Figure D-5.
When the antenna is installed and the cable routed, the rack end of the cable is fed
through the grommet in the top cover of the rack.
"
NOTE
It will be necessary to remove this grommet whilst feeding the large connector
through. Slip it over the cable end, and replace it in the hole.
Attach the coaxial right-angled adapter (supplied in the Antenna Cable Set) to the
ANTENNA output on the back of the RF panel and connect to it the feed cable, as
shown in Figure D-15.
D-16
HA72500
APPENDIX D
Figure D-5
RF Feeder Connector Termination
(Sheet 1 of 2)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
TYPES L44F L44J, L44M, L44N, L44NT, L44P, L44R,
L44T, L44U, L44W, L44EN and L44EW CONNECTORS
FOR LDF4-50 HELIAX COAXIAL CABLE
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR ASSEMBLY

File, flat
Hacksaw, fine-toothed blade
Knife
Wire brush, small
Scale, 6 in. (150 mm)
Gauge, 1/16 in., (provided)

Soft solder
Soldering gun
Rosin flux
Damp cloth
Garnet cloth
Solvent, comothene, vythene, or
other non-flammable cleaning
fluid
Wrenches: (2) 13/16 in.
READ INSTRUCTIONS THOROUGHLY BEFORE ASSEMBLY

STEP 1. Prepare cable. End of cable must be straight for
at least 10 in. (254 mm). Remove jacket to approximate
dimension shown. Use knife. Deburr sharp end of cut
outer conductor.
STEP 2. Make second jacketing cut. Scribe line on ridge

of exposed corrugated outer conductor. Line must be at
least 13/32 in. (10 mm) from end of cable. Remove
jacket to dimension shown using straight edged piece of
heavy paper wrapped around cable to guide cut.
STEP 3. Install gasket. Clean outer conductor with

GASKET solvent. Add thin O-ring gasket to second fully
exposed corrugation groove from jacket. Apply thin
coating of silicone grease to outer surface of gasket and
gasket lead chamfer in clamping nut using finger tip.
STEP 4. Add clamping nut and cut cable. Push clamping

nut on cable. Use twisting motion to assure spring
contacts snap into groove. Refer to cutaway view in Step
6. Grip clamping nut with one hand and align edge with
scribed line, then carefully cut outer conductor and foam
dielectric material flush with end of clamping nut
exposing inner conductor. Make shallow cut; do not
damage inner conductor. Use hacksaw with fine-toothed
blade or model maker's saw.
D-17
HA72500
Figure D-5
APPENDIX D
RF Feeder Connector Termination
(Sheet 2 of 2)
L44EN, L44EW, L44J, L44NT, L44T, L44W = 7/32 (5mm)
L44P, L44U = 5/16 (8mm)
L44R = 3/8 (10mm)
L44F = 7/16 (11mm)
STEP 5. Trim inner conductor. Cut inner conductor to
length shown. Use file to deburr cut end of inner
conductor.
STEP 6. Detach foam dielectric. Separate ail foam

dielectric completely from edge of outer conductor to
assure good electrical contact with outer body. Refer to
enlarged cutaway view in Step 7 which illustrates positive
grip of outer conductor between clamping nut and outer
body. Use tip of knife and work around entire
circumference. Remove burrs from inside edge of outer
conductor with knife. Use wire brush to remove copper
particles from foam.
STEP 7. Inspect contact surface. Thread outer body to
clamping nut and tighten with wrenches. Turn outer body
only; do not turn clamping nut. Disassemble connection
to inspect for good metal-to-metal contact. Cut foam
dielectric flush with edge of flared outer conductor.
STEP 8. Add inner connector and outer body. Clean

inner conductor. For all connectors except L44F, slip
inner connector onto ' inner conductor. Use gauge as
indicated. Solder connector to conductor while pressing
connector against gauge. Cool with damp cloth then
clean with garnet cloth. Make certain connector is
straight, i.e., square to flared outer conductor. Place thick
O-ring gasket into groove in clamping nut. Add thin
coating of silicone grease to outer surface of gasket. For
all connectors, thread outer body onto clamping nut and
tighten. For L44F, add inner connector and solder per
above.
STEP 9. L44T assembly. Apply thin coating of
silicone grease to both O-ring gaskets, and place
one gasket onto extension insulator. Slip
assembly into outer body. See that gasket is
properly seated inside. Place other gasket into
groove in stud head. Care fully screw stud head
onto inner connector and tighten.
STEP 10. L44T assembly. Lock stud head in
place with setscrew. Add connecting strap or wire
connection, flat washer, shake proof lockwasher
and cap nut as shown. Tighten cap nut. For
protection against corrosive atmospheres, apply
silicone grease over entire connection.
D-18
HA72500
D.10.2
"
APPENDIX D
ERP Monitor Cable

The antenna includes provision for sampling the effective radiated power (ERP) of the
transmitter signal. In a dual DME, two ERP monitors are used. The monitor cables(s),
supplied with a coaxial connector fitted to one end, should be cut to the appropriate
length and installed with the terminated end connected to the antenna. After the cable is
installed, terminate the cut end with the type N connector supplied in the Antenna Cable
Set. Termination details for the connectors are shown in Figure D-6. Be sure adequate
slack is allowed to connect the cables to the ERP connectors, as shown in Figure D-15.
Feed the equipment end of the cable through one of the grommets in the top of the rack
and connect it to the ERP MONITOR connector on the rear of the Transponder 1
subrack, via an attenuator if necessary; see Figure D-15. The other cable (in a dual
system) goes to the ERP MONITOR connector on the rear of the Transponder 2
subrack.
In a 1kW DME beacon, it is usually necessary to install an attenuator in series with the
monitor cable to avoid an excessive signal level to the DME monitor. The presence of
the attenuator depends on the monitor cable length and the monitor signal coupling
within the antenna. Details for determining the need for this attenuator are given in
Section D.10.3. Coaxial Type-N, 10 dB attenuators are supplied in the Antenna Cable
Set.
No attenuator is required with a low power beacon.
D-19
HA72500
Figure D-6
APPENDIX D
Monitor Feeder Connector Termination

AMPHENOL TYPE
RADIALL TYPE
NOTE: Stripping dimensions vary, depending on the type of connector supplied.

1. Slide the ferrule over the cable.
2. Strip one end of the cable only, as above. Ensure that there are no nicks in the braid
or the conductor.
3. Crimp the centre contact. Using the appropriate crimping tool
4. Slide the cable and contact into the body. Ensure that the milled back end of the
connector is positioned between the dielectric and the braid.
5. Push the dielectric of the cable home into the body.
6. Crimp. Using the appropriate crimping tool
7. Fit over the ferrule, using heatshrink tubing 6 mm by 25 mm long.
D-20
HA72500
D.10.3
APPENDIX D
ERP Monitor Attenuator
Some installations may need a different attenuation value to enable correct monitoring of
the antenna radiated power. The monitor detector has a range of 10 dB, from +10 to
+20 dBm, within which the normal input level must fall; however, the actual power
arriving from the monitor antenna will depend on several factors - such as signal
frequency, signal feeder loss, monitor feeder loss, monitor antenna coupling, and
radiated power.
An example of how the required attenuation value can be calculated is as follows:
a.
Signal frequency
= 1200 MHz
b.
Signal feeder length

Signal feeder unit loss
Therefore signal feeder loss
= 20 metres
= 9.5 dB/100 metres at 1200 MHz (LDF4-50)
= 1.9 dB
c.
Monitor feeder length

Monitor feeder unit loss
Therefore monitor feeder loss
= 20 metres
= 59.0 dB/100 metres at 1200 MHz (RG-223)
=11.8dB
d.
Monitor antenna coupling
=21.0 dB at 1200 MHz
Output power
=1200 watts
= 60.8 dBm approx.
Therefore
Power at monitor input
= 60.8 - 1.9 - 11.8 - 21.0

= 26.1 dBm
Monitor window is +10 to +20 dBm, with a nominal level of +15 dBm.
Therefore
Attenuation needed
= 26.1 - 15 dBm
= 9.1 dB
say 10 dB
Because the monitor window is so wide, the situation for an installation will be that an
attenuator is either not needed or, if needed, a 10 dB attenuator will be suitable. A 10 dB
type N attenuator is supplied as part of the Antenna Cable Set.
D-21
HA72500
APPENDIX D
D.10.4
"
"
Antenna Integrity Signal Cable
REFER Figure D-15

NOTE
This cable assembly is required only if the Interscan DME antenna is used. It
allows monitoring of the DC continuity of the antenna by means of the Antenna
Integrity Monitor in the DME.
All parts required for the cable assembly are contained in the cable accessories kit
supplied as part of the Antenna Cable Set (type 1A72560 for a single DME installation,
type 2A72560 for a dual DME installation).
The 2-core flexible cable will need to be cut to the appropriate minimum practical length
and terminated at both ends, as shown in Figure D-7 below.
Figure D-7
Antenna Integrity Signal Cable Connections
Feed the cable through the unused third grommetted hole in the rack top cover and
connect it to connector XN2 on the RF Panel PWB, as shown in Figure D-15.
D.11
COMPLETION
When all the work in the preceding sections has been completed, check the following
items before proceeding with the beacon alignment:
1.
All modules correctly inserted in rack.
2.
1kW Power Amplifier and associated power supply correctly wired.
3.
DC power wiring and batteries correctly connected.
4.
VHF navaid ident interface connected (if used).
5.
Antenna feed cable and adaptor connected and connectors tightened.
6.
Antenna ERP monitor cables connected and connectors tightened.
The Beacon is now ready for testing and alignment; the procedures for this are
described in Section 3.2, On-site Performance Testing.
D-22
HA72500
Figure D-8
APPENDIX D
Rack Installation
D-23
HA72500
Figure D-9
APPENDIX D
Rack Power Cabling - Single 1kW DME Installation
D-24
HA72500
Figure D-10
APPENDIX D
Rack Power Cabling - Dual 1kW DME Installation
D-25
HA72500
Figure D-11
APPENDIX D
Air Vent Assembly
D-26
HA72500
Figure D-12
APPENDIX D
LDB-102 Single 1kW Rack Arrangement
D-27
HA72500
Figure D-13
APPENDIX D
LDB-102 Dual 1kW Rack Arrangement
D-28
HA72500
Figure D-14
APPENDIX D
AC Power Supply Monitor Connections
D-29
HA72500
Figure D-15
APPENDIX D
Antenna Feeder Connections - RF and Signal
D-30
HA72500
Figure D-16
APPENDIX D
Pipe Mount - Chu Antenna
D-31
HA72500
Figure D-17
APPENDIX D
Antenna Installation - Chu Antenna
D-32
HA72500
Figure D-18
APPENDIX D
Antenna Installation - Interscan Antenna
D-33
HA72500
Figure D-19
APPENDIX D
Interscan Antenna Baseplate
D-34
HA72500
APPENDIX D
Figure D-20
External I/O Board Layout
D-35
MAIN RF (INPUT)
TYPE "N" FEMALE
(UG-23D/U)
13/32 THRU
6 HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON 6.00 BC
J3
RF MONITOR
OUTPUT
J1
RF INPUT
J2
RF MONITOR
OUTPUT
J4
OBSTN LT
INPUT
50 OHM NOMINAL DC TO GND
0 OHM NOMINAL DC
TO GROUND
Figure D-21
OBSTRUCTION LIGHT
CONNECTOR
(MS3112E8-3P OR EQUAL
MATES WITH
MS3116E8-3S)
50 OHM NOMINAL DC TO GND
MONITOR PROBE
2 PLACES
TYPE "N" FEMALE
(UG-1095A/U)
HA72500
APPENDIX D
dB Systems Antenna Base Connections
D-36
HA72500
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E
TEST EQUIPMENT
E-i
HA72500
APPENDIX E
TABLE of CONTENTS
E.
TEST EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................E-1
E.1
E.2
E.3
E.4
PERFORMANCE TESTING
BEACON ALIGNMENT
LRU TESTING
INSTALLATION
E-1
E-3
E-5
E-9
E-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX E
LIST of TABLES
Table E-1
Table E-2
Table E-3
Recommended Test Equipment for On-site Maintenance......................... E-1

Test Equipment for Beacon Alignment ...................................................... E-3
Recommended Test Equipment for LRU Testing...................................... E-5
E-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX E
E.
TEST EQUIPMENT
E.1
PERFORMANCE TESTING
Table E-1 lists the basic equipment required to perform the performance testing of
Section 3.2. If alignment or testing of the transmitter sections of the DME is required, the
additional special items listed will also be required.
Table E-1
ITEM
Recommended Test Equipment for On-site Maintenance

QTY
CHARACTERISTICS
Accessory kit
Digital multimeter
Oscilloscope
Current probe
Frequency
counter
Detector, coaxial
DME Test Accessory This comprises an extender

Kit
frame for the transponder
subrack, two extender cards for
the CTU subrack, test cables and
basic tools. One kit is supplied
with each DME rack.
Voltage range:
2 to 50 volts full scale
Accuracy:
0.5%
Vertical channels:
2
Bandwidth:
At least 20 MHz
Sensitivity:
10 mV to 2 volts/division
Sweep:
20 nsecs to 50 msecs/div
Probes:
10:1
Frequency range:
120 Hz to 20 MHz
Sensitivity: 10
mA/mV
Coupling:
AC only
Frequency range:
10 Hz to 120 MHz
Frequency accuracy: 5 ppm
Input sensitivity:
50 mV
Input impedance:
>10 kilohms
Frequency:
950 to 1250 MHz
Sensitivity:
-10dBm
Maximum input:
+20 dBm
Impedance:
50 ohms
VSWR:
< 1.2 to 4 GHz
Termination:
4.7 kilohms
The detector plus termination must be calibrated for
output voltage against signal input at a frequency of
1100 MHz, over a signal range of -10 to +20 dBm
SUITABLE
TYPE/MODEL
1A72561
Fluke 8010A
Tektronix 2225
Tektronix
P6021
Leader
LDR-824
Hewlett
Packard 8473,
with
termination
E-1
HA72500
APPENDIX E
The following additional items are required for transmitter alignment/tests

1 Frequency range:
Peak power
950 to 1300 MHz
Hewlett
meter
Input power:
1 to 100 MW
Packard 8900D
Input impedance:
50 ohms, VSWR <1.2
meter, with
Level accuracy
0.1 dB
84811A sensor
(at 1100 MHz, from
10 to 50 mW)
Frequency response Less than 0.05 dB
(from 950 to 1250
MHz):
If the above accuracy requirements are tighter than the
makers' specification, it is acceptable to have the
instrument characterised for corrections to the meter
readings.
Attenuator, power 1 Attenuation:
30.0 0.5 dB
Weinschel
Power rating:
50 watts average (2kW pk)
24-30-43
Impedance:
50 ohms, N type (M-F)
Return loss:
> 20 dB
Frequency response < +0.05 dB
(950 to 1250 MHz):
Calibration accuracy: 0.1 dB required
1 Attenuation:
Attenuator,
20.0 +0.5 dB
Weinschel
medium
Power rating:
1 watt average
50-20
Impedance:
Return loss:
> 20 dB
Frequency response < 0.05 dB
(950 to 1250 MHz):
Calibration accuracy: 0.1 dB required
E-2
HA72500
E.2
APPENDIX E
BEACON ALIGNMENT
Table E-2 lists the items required to perform the beacon alignment of Section 3.3.
Table E-2
Test Equipment for Beacon Alignment
ITEM
QTY
Oscilloscope
Digital
multimeter
Peak power
meter
Power splitter
(for dual
beacon only)
Frequency
counter
Spectrum
analyser
CHARACTERISTICS
Vertical channels:
2
Bandwidth:
At least 20 MHz
Sensitivity:
Sweep:
Probes:
10:1
Voltage range:
Accuracy:
0.5%
Frequency range:
950 to 1300 MHz
Input power:
1 to 100 mW
Input impedance:
50 ohms, VSWR <1.2
Level accuracy:
0.1 dB
(at 1100 MHz, from 10 to
50 mW)
Frequency response:
Less than 0.05 dB
(from 950 to 1250 MHz)
If the above accuracy requirements are tighter than the
makers' specification, it is acceptable to have the
readings.
Power rating:
1 watt
Insertion loss:
< 4 dB
50 ohms
Impedance:
> 15 dB
Return loss:
(950- to 1250 MHz)
Frequency range:
10 Hz to 1300 MHz
Frequency accuracy:
5 ppm
Input sensitivity
0 dBm at 1300 MHz
Input impedance:
50 ohms/> 10 kilohms
Frequency range:
Up to 1300 MHz
Frequency accuracy:
5 MHz
Input power:
-70 to +10 dBm
Level accuracy:
1 dB
Level scale:
Log, 2 dB and 10 dB/div
Frequency response:
< 0.05 dB
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Frequency range:
950 to 1350 MHz
Attenuation accuracy:
+0.5, -0.2 dB
Impedance:
50 ohms
Return loss:
> 20 dB
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Attenuation range:
> 100 dB, 10 dB steps
Attenuation range:
Attenuator,
step
> 10 dB, 1 dB steps
SUITABLE
TYPE/MODEL
Tektronix 2225
Fluke 8010A
Hewlett Packard
8900D meter,
with 84811A
sensor
Narda 4032C
Advantest
TR5823
Hewlett Packard
8590A
Hewlett Packard
8496B
Hewlett Packard
8494B
E-3
HA72500
ITEM
Attenuator,
power
APPENDIX E
QTY
1
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuator,
medium
Adaptor,
coaxial
Attenuation:
Power rating:
Impedance:
Return loss:
Frequency response:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Calibration accuracy:
Attenuation:
Power rating:
Impedance:
Return loss:
Frequency response:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Connectors:
Connectors:
N(F) - BNC(M)
Connectors:
SMA(M) - SMA(F) right angle
Connectors:
SMA(F) -- N(M)
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
Connectors:
N(F) - N(F)
RG-188A/U, 600 mm, with SMA(M) each end
RG-58A/U, 1 m, with SMA(M) - BNC(M)
RG-213, 600 mm, with N(M) each end
Sucoform 141 or UT-141A semirigid, 1.2 m, SMA(M) one
end and N(M) at the other end; loss 0.5 0.1 dB
Test cable
Stopwatch
Antenna
integrity
monitor test
fixture
30.0 0.5 dB
> 20 dB
< 0.05 dB
0.1 dB required
20.0 0.5 dB
1 watt average
> 20 dB
< 0.05 dB
SMA(F) - SMA(F)
SUITABLE
TYPE/MODEL
Weinschel
24-30-43
Weinschel 50-20
Suhner
31SMA50-01
Suhner
33BNC-N50-1
Suhner
53SMA-50-01
Suhner
33N-SMA50-1
Suhner 31N50-02
1
1
E-4
HA72500
E.3
APPENDIX E
LRU TESTING
Table E-3 lists the items of test equipment, cables and miscellaneous components
required to perform the alignment and testing of line replaceable units (LRU) as specified
in Section 3.4.
Table E-3
ITEM
Recommended Test Equipment for LRU Testing

QTY
Signal
generator
Pulse
generator
Digital
multimeter
Oscilloscope
Peak power
meter
RF millivolt
meter
Frequency
counter
Spectrum
analyser
CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency range:
100 kHz to 1300 MHz
Level range:
-133 to +13 dBm
Pulse period:
50 nsecs to 10 secs
Pulse width:
25 nsecs to 100 msecs
Amplitude:
15 volts
Trigger:
External and internal
Voltage range:
Accuracy:
0.5%
Current range:
1 mA to 10 A
Accuracy:
1%
Resistance range:
10 ohms to 200 kilohms
Accuracy:
0.7%
Vertical channels:
2
Bandwidth:
At least 20 MHz
Sensitivity:
Sweep:
Probes:
10:1
Frequency range:
950 to 1300 MHz
Input power:
1 to 100 mW
Input impedance:
50 ohms, VSWR <1.2
Level accuracy:
0.1 dB
(at 1100 MHz, from 10 to
50 mW)
Frequency response:
Less than 0.05 dB
(from 950 to 1250 MHz)
If the above accuracy requirements are tighter than
the makers' specification, it is acceptable to have the
readings.
Frequency range:
950 to 1300 MHz
Input range:
1 mV to 3 volts full scale
Input impedance:
50 ohms or high
Frequency range:
10 Hz to 1300 MHz
Frequency accuracy:
5 ppm
Input sensitivity:
0 dBm at 1300 MHz
Input impedance:
50 ohms/> 10 kilohms
Frequency range:
Up to 1350 MHz
Frequency accuracy:
5 MHz
Input power:
-70 to +10 dBm
Level accuracy:
1 dB
Level scale:
Log, 2 dB and 10 dB/div
Frequency response:
< 0.05 dB
(950 to 1250 MHz)
SUITABLE
TYPE/MODEL
Supplied as part of
Depot Test Facility
Hewlett Packard
8011A
Fluke 8010A
Tektronix 2225
Hewlett Packard
8900D meter, with
84811A sensor
Boonton 92EA
Advantest TR5823
Hewlett Packard
8590A
E-5
HA72500
ITEM
APPENDIX E
QTY
CHARACTERISTICS
SUITABLE
TYPE/MODEL
Tektronix P6021
Current
probe, with
passive
termination,
clip-on type,
AC coupled
Detector,
coaxial
Bandwidth:
Peak current:
Sensitivity:
120 Hz to 20 MHz
15 amperes
2 mA/div or 10 mA/div
950 to 1250 MHz

-10 dBm
+20 dBm
50 ohms
< 1.2 to 4 GHz
4.7 kilohms
950 to 1300 MHz
20 dB 0.5 dB
> 40 dB
1.15:1, 50 ohms
DC to 1300 MHz
+0.5, -0.2 dB
50 ohms
> 20 dB
Hewlett Packard
8473, with
termination
Directional
coupler
Frequency:
Sensitivity:
Maximum input:
Impedance:
VSWR:
Termination:
Frequency range:
Coupling:
Directivity:
VSWR:
Frequency range:
Attenuation accuracy:
Impedance:
Return loss:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Attenuation range:
> 110 dB, 10 dB steps
Attenuation range:
> 11 dB, 1 dB steps
Attenuation:
Power rating:
Impedance:
Return loss:
Frequency response:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Calibration accuracy:
Power rating:
Impedance:
Return loss:
Frequency response:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Attenuation:
Attenuation:
Attenuation:
Attenuation:
Power rating:
Impedance:
Return loss:
Frequency response:
(950 to 1250 MHz)
Attenuation:
Attenuation:
Attenuation:
30.0 0.5 dB
> 20 dB
< 0.05 dB
Hewlett Packard
8496B
Hewlett Packard
8494B
Weinschel 24-30-43
Attenuator,
step
Attenuator,
power
Attenuator,
medium
2
2
1
1
Attenuator,
miniature
1
2
1
Hewlett Packard
776D
0.1 dB required
1 watt average
> 20 dB
< 0.05 dB
20.0 0.5 dB
10.0 0.5 dB
6.0 0.2 dB
3.0 0.2 dB
1 watt average (10 W peak)
50 ohms, SMA type (M-F)
> 20 dB
< 0.05 dB
Weinschel 50-20
Weinschel 50-10
Weinschel 50-6
Weinschel 50-3
30.0 0.5 dB
10.0 0.5 dB
6.0 0.5 dB
Microlab AG-30F
Microlab AG-10F
Microlab AG-6F
E-6
HA72500
APPENDIX E
Termination,
coaxial
Short circuit,
coaxial
Adaptor,
coaxial
Torque
wrench
Power supply
Double
balanced
mixer
Cables,
coaxial
Connector,
coaxial
Connector
Calibration
link
Power rating:
Impedance:
VSWR:
Connector:
1 watt, average
50 ohms
< 1.05
SMA (M)
Connector:
SMA (F)
1
1
Connector:
Connector:
N (M)
SMA (M)
Connector:
SMA (F)
Connectors:
SMA(F) - SMA(F)
Connectors:
SMA(M) - N(M)
Connectors:
SMA(M) - N(F)
Connectors:
SMA(F) - N(M)
1
1
1
Connectors:
Connectors:
For SMA connectors
N(M) - N(M)
N(F) - N(F)
Output voltage:
Output current:
Ripple and noise:
Frequency:
15 volts DC, regulated

100 mA
< 0.1 volts peak-to-peak
50 to 60 MHz
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Cable, power
Detector test
cable for
power
combiner
Test clip lead
RG-213 cable, 100 mm, N(M) - N(M)

RG-213 cable. 800 mm, N(M) - N(M)
RG-188 cable, 100 mm, N(M) - SMA(M)
RG-188 cable, 800 mm, N(M) - SMA(F)
RG-188 cable, 100 mm, N(F) - SMA(M)
RG-58A/U cable, 1 metre, BNC(M) - BNC(M)
'Sucoform' 141 semiflexible cable, 1200 mm, N(M) SMA(M); loss = 0.5 0.1 dB
SMA(F) panel receptacle
Suhner
65SMA-50-0-1
Suhner
65SMA-50-0-31
Suhner 65N-50-0-1
Suhner
64SMA-50-0-1
Suhner
63SMA-50-0-1
Suhner
31SMA-50-0-1
Suhner
32N-SMA-50-0-1
Suhner
33SMA N-50-1
Suhner
33N-SMA-50-1
Suhner 32N-50-0-1
Suhner 31N-50-0-2
Suhner 74Z-0-0-21
Mini Circuits
ZFM-31-1
Huber and Suhner

23-SMA-50-0-52/199
Klippon 12593.69
Plug, 4-pin
'Sucoform' 141 semiflexible cable, 100 mm,
SMA(F) - SMA(F)
Anderson No 1300
Red and black, 2 metres, 35 amperes rating, PVC
195/0.25 mm: connector one end (supplied with rack)
'Sucoform' 141 semiflexible cable, as detailed in
Section 3.4.30
300 20 mm long, with alligator clips both ends
E-7
HA72500
Alligator clips
Resistors,
power
Resistors
Load
resistors
Antenna
integrity
monitor test
fixture
APPENDIX E
2 Small, to be used for shorting test points together
10 6 ohms 10%, 100 watts, wire wound, adjustable
1 54 ohms 2%, 35 watts, wire wound, fixed
(2x27 ohms 20 watts in series)
1 62 ohms, 1%, 400 mW, metal film
1 1.5 kilohms, 1%, 400 mW, metal film
1 365 kilohms, 1%, 400 mW, metal film
1 Resistance range:
0.7 to 3.0 ohms
Resolution:
0.01 ohms
Current rating:
35 amperes
1 Resistance range:
8 to 20 ohms
Resolution:
0.25 ohms
Current rating:
5 amperes
1 Resistance range:
54 ohms
Resolution:
2%
Current rating:
35 watts
1 Resistance range:
100 ohms
Resolution:
2%
Current rating:
20 watts
1 Resistance range:
400 ohms
Resolution:
2%
Current rating:
5 watts
1
The following items are supplied with each DME rack in Accessory Kit 1A72561
1 Fits LDB-102 modules within rack
1A72562
Extender
cradle
2 Eurocard extenders, dual 64-way
VERO 09-0108E
Card
extender
Extender, AC 1 Fits AC Power Supply Control Card
Ericsson
Power supply
ROF131391/1
E-8
HA72500
E.4
APPENDIX E
INSTALLATION
The test equipment and accessories required for installation are identical with those
required for performance testing, and are listed in Section E.1.
As well as normal hand tools appropriate to the installation of an electronic system such
as the LDB-102 DME, the following special items are required.
ITEM
Wrenches
Crimp tool for fitting
connectors to RG223 cable
QTY
2
1
TYPE/PERFORMANCE
13/16 inch capacity
Depends on type of connector supplied:
ERMA 29010
For either type of connector
For Radiall connectors
Radiall R282-223 or
R282-240
Amphenol TWIN-HEX tool For Amphenol connectors
(handle 227-944 and die set
227-1221-57)
E-9
HA72500
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
A-i
HA72500
APPENDIX A
TABLE of CONTENTS
A.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS...................................................................A-1
A.1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - SINGLE DME
A-1
A.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. A-1
A.1.2 Application of Power.................................................................................... A-2
A.1.3 Local Operation ........................................................................................... A-3
A.1.4 Remote Operation ....................................................................................... A-4
A.1.5 Maintenance Operation ............................................................................... A-5
A.1.6 Recycle Operation ....................................................................................... A-5
A.1.7 Typical Test Results .................................................................................... A-6
A.1.8 Operating Notes .......................................................................................... A-7
A.2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - DUAL DME
A-8
A.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. A-8
A.2.2 Application of Power.................................................................................... A-9
A.2.3 Local Operation ......................................................................................... A-10
A.2.4 Remote Operation ..................................................................................... A-11
A.2.5 Maintenance Operation ............................................................................. A-12
A.2.6 Recycle Operation ..................................................................................... A-16
A.2.7 Operating Notes ........................................................................................ A-16
A.2.8 Typical Test Results .................................................................................. A-17
A.3
CTU FACILITIES AND OPERATING PROCEDURE
A-18
A.3.1 CTU Front Panel Controls ......................................................................... A-18
A.3.2 CTU Front Panel Indicators ....................................................................... A-33
A.4
OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A-36
A.5
MODULE PRESET CONTROLS, SWITCHES, LINKS AND INDICATORS A-41
A.5.1 CTU Internal Controls................................................................................ A-41
A.5.2 CTU Internal Displays................................................................................ A-44
A.5.3 Transponder Internal Controls................................................................... A-49
A.6
DEPOT TEST FACILITY OPERATION
A-57
A-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX A
LIST of FIGURES
Figure A-1
Figure A-2
Figure A-3
Figure A-4
Figure A-5
Figure A-6
CTU Front Panel.................................................................................. A-19

Menu Structure in Operational Modes................................................. A-24
Menu Structure in Maintenance Mode................................................. A-25
CTU Processor Board - Control and Indicator Locations .................... A-46
CTU Front Panel Board - Control and Indicator Locations .................. A-47
CTU RCMS Interface Board - Control and Indicator Locations ........... A-48
LIST of TABLES
Table A-1
Table A-2
Table A-3
Table A-4
Table A-5
Table A-6
Table A-7
Table A-8
Table A-9
Table A-10
Table A-11
Switch Setting Checklist - Single System .................................................. A-1

Switch Setting Checklist - Dual System..................................................... A-8
Transponder Front Panel Controls and Indicators................................... A-36
CTU Processor Board Option Switch Settings ........................................ A-42
CTU Processor Board Test Jumpers....................................................... A-43
Internal Controls : Monitor Module 1A72510 ........................................... A-49
Internal Controls : Test Interrogator 1A72514 ......................................... A-51
Internal Controls : Receiver Video 1A72520 ........................................... A-52
Internal Controls : Transponder Power Supply 1A72525 ........................ A-54
Internal Controls : Transmitter Driver 1A72530 ................................... A-55
Internal Controls: 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540............................. A-56
A-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.
A.1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - SINGLE DME
A.1.1
Introduction
The procedures in this section detail the steps required to place a DME beacon (single
configuration) into operation. Each mode of operation is described separately and some
guidance is given concerning action required when abnormal performance occurs.
For in-depth explanation of the various controls, indicators, and facilities, refer to the
following sections:
CTU Facilities and Operating Procedure: Section A.3;
Operator Controls and Indicators: Section A.4;
Module Preset Controls, Switches, Links and Indicators: Section A.5.
The checklist in Table A-1 gives the required switch settings of the front panel switches
prior to placing the beacon into operation. These settings are independent of the final
mode of operation of the beacon.
Table A-1
Switch Setting Checklist - Single System
MODULE/UNIT
AC Power Supply
CONTROL/INDICATOR
SETTING/INDICATION
POWER
OFF
1kW POWER AMP
OFF
CTU & TRANSPONDER
OFF
Monitor
MONITOR OUTPUTS
NORMAL
Test Interrogator
MONITOR AND INTERROGATOR DC

POWER
NORMAL
Transponder Power
Supply
TRANSPONDER DC POWER
NORMAL
Transmitter Driver
DRIVER DC POWER
NORMAL
Receiver Video
IDENT
NORMAL
1kW PA Power Supply
AMPLIFIER DC POWER
NORMAL
Power Distribution Panel
A-1
HA72500
A.1.2
APPENDIX A
Application of Power
a. On the AC power supply, set the POWER switch to ON. Check that the front
panel voltmeter indicates a voltage of 27.0 0.5 volts.
b. On the power distribution panel, set both circuit breakers on. After a short delay
(about 10 seconds), check that the following CTU front panel indicators are on:
AC PWR NORM
BATT CH1
LOCAL
(press LOCAL pushbutton if the indicator is

off)
(press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator

is off)
Check that the following CTU front panel indicators are off:
TEST section:
MODULES
ANT RELAY
POWER section:
BATT CH2
BATT LOW
DME CONTROL section:
RECYCLE
(press RECYCLE pushbutton if the indicator

is on)
REMOTE
(press LOCAL pushbutton if the indicator is

on)
MAINTENANCE
(press MAINTENANCE pushbutton if the

indicator is on)
MONITOR ALARM
(press MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT pushbutton

if the indicator is on)
SELECT MAIN NO1
(press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator

is on)
SELECT MAIN NO2

STATUS section:
NO1 ON
NO2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
If the indications are contrary to the above, refer to Section A.1.8 below.
A-2
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.1.3
Local Operation
A.1.3.1
Switch-on Procedure
a. Set the front panel controls initially as in Section A.1.1.

b. Apply power to the beacon as in Section A.1.2.
c. On the CTU, press the LOCAL control source pushbutton. This selects normal
operation in the 'local' mode and the LOCAL indicator should be on.
d. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 pushbutton. This activates the rack
in its normal operating mode. The following indications should result:
1. SELECT MAIN, NO1 indicator on.
2. NO1 ON status indicator on (this is an internal CTU preset control,
adjustable from 2 to 20 seconds for a cold standby and fixed at 2 seconds
for a warm standby; see A.5.1.6 for details).
3. NORMAL status indicator on, after the selected POWER ON inhibit time.
This indicates that the monitor is powered, and no faults are detected.
4. All the ALARM REGISTER indicators off immediately, and stay off unless
a fault is present.
e. Check that no unit or module has a red indicator on. A red indicator on indicates
that a test switch is not in the NORMAL position, or a fault is present.
"
NOTE
A.1.3.2
A monitor module self test occurs every 15 seconds (2 seconds), and will
produce a momentary PRIMARY fault display on the monitor module. This is
normal operation.
Switch-off Procedure
On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET pushbutton. The indicators in the
STATUS section should go off, after a short delay. The OFF/RESET indicator should be
on, and the SELECT MAIN, NO1 and NO2 indicators should be off.
A.1.3.3
Reset Procedure
To reset the beacon following a shutdown, due to an alarm condition, press the SELECT
MAIN, OFF pushbutton, and then press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 pushbutton.
(Response should be the same as Section A.1.3.1d.)
A-3
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.1.4
Remote Operation
A.1.4.1
At the DME Site
a. Set the front panel switches initially as in Section A.1.1.

c. On the CTU press the SOURCE, REMOTE pushbutton. The SOURCE, LOCAL
indicator should be off, and the SOURCE, REMOTE indicator should be on. This
selects normal operation in the 'remote' mode.
A.1.4.2
At the Remote Site
Check that the AC PWR NORM and BATT CHG remote indicators are on.
A.1.4.2.1
Switch-on Procedure
At the remote control panel, select DME NO1 ON. Correct operation will be indicated by
the DME NORMAL indicator and RACK ON indicator (if used) turning on. At the DME
site, indications should be as in Section A.1.3.1d, except that REMOTE should be on.
A.1.4.2.2
At the remote control panel, select DME OFF/RESET. The DME NORMAL indicator and
the DME NO1 ON indicator (if used) should turn off.
A.1.4.2.3
Reset Procedure
If a beacon shutdown occurs due to an alarm, the DME NORMAL indicator should turn
off, and the SHUTDOWN indicator should turn on.
To reset the beacon, select DME OFF/RESET, and then select DME NO1 ON again.
A-4
HA72500
A.1.5
APPENDIX A
Maintenance Operation
The 'maintenance' mode would normally be used during servicing or alignment of the
DME rack. In a single beacon installation, the 'maintenance' mode is essentially the
same as the 'normal' mode, except that more extensive tests are available from the
CTU, and the high test interrogation rate switches are enabled.
A.1.5.1
Switch-on Procedure
a. Set the front panel switches initially as in Section A.1.1.

c. On the CTU, press the MAINTENANCE pushbutton. This selects 'maintenance'
operation in the local mode. The LOCAL and MAINTENANCE indicators should
be on.
in its maintenance operating mode. The following indications should result:
2. NO1 ON status indicator on.
3. MAINTENANCE status indicator on.
4. All the ALARM REGISTER indicators off immediately, and stay off unless a
fault is present.
A.1.5.2
A.1.5.3
Reset Procedure
To reset the beacon following a shutdown due to an alarm, press the SELECT MAIN,
OFF/RESET pushbutton, and then press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 pushbutton.
A.1.6
Recycle Operation
The recycling facility allows the beacon to automatically restart after a failure. Following
a shutdown due to an alarm, the beacon should attempt three restarts. If normal
operation ensues, then the beacon should remain on. If there are four shutdowns within
a 5-minute period, then the beacon will remain off, until it is manually reset.
a. The RECYCLE facility is 'enabled' when the RECYCLE indicator is on. On the
CTU, press the RECYCLE pushbutton to toggle between the 'enable' and
'disable' of this facility.
b. The number of restarts is recorded on the restart counter. The restart counter is
displayed on the CTU's test display when the Misc softkey is pressed, from the
top level of the operational mode menu.
A-5
HA72500
A.1.7
APPENDIX A
Typical Test Results
The table below shows the normal readings which would be indicated on the Test
Facility of the CTU, in an operating rack. For operation of the test facility of the CTU refer
to Section A.3.1.2.
PARAMETER
LOWER LIMIT
UPPER LIMIT
49.8 s
50.2 s
55.8 s
56.2 s
11.9 S
12.1 s
29.9 s
30.1 s
POWER OUT
1.1 kW
1.3 kW
EFFICIENCY
70%
100%
Decoded Pulse Rate
95 pps
2850 pps
Varies with interrogation rate.
Tx Pulse Rate
940 pps
2850 pps
Pulse Width
3.2 s
3.8 s
Pulse Rise Time
1.9 s
2.5 s
Pulse Fall Time
1.9 s
2.5 s
RV Local Oscillator
1.0 volts
3.0 volts
RV RF Drive
1.5 volts
4.5 volts
TD Drive
1.5 volts
2.5 volts
TD Modulation
1.5 volts
3.5 volts
PA Modulation
1.0 volts
3.5 volts
PA Drive
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
PA Output
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
TI Interrogation
Level
2.7 volts
3.3 volts
21 volts DC
28 volts DC
Power Amplifier HT
49.5 volts DC
50.5 volts DC
Transponder 15 V
14.6 volts DC
15.6 volts DC
Transponder 18 V
17.2 volts DC
18.6 volts DC
Driver HT
41.6 volts DC
42.4 volts DC
DELAY
SPACING
Auxiliary 24 V
NOTES
Typical reply efficiency is 90% unless

interrogation rate is high.
A-6
HA72500
A.1.8
APPENDIX A
Operating Notes
For a full definition of the CTU controls and indicators, refer to Section A.3. The following
notes are given to assist the operator when an abnormal indication occurs on the CTU:
a. If the AC PWR NORM or BATT CHG1 indicators are not on after the power
distribution panel circuit breakers are closed, then the operation of the AC power
supply should be checked for the presence of AC mains and correct DC output
voltage.
b. If the BATT LOW indicator turns on after the power distribution panel circuit
breakers are closed, then the rack DC supply is too low for proper operation, and
the transponder will not switch on. The DC output from the AC power supply and
the battery voltage should be checked.
c. If the CTU fault indicator in the ALARM REGISTER turns on after the power
distribution panel circuit breakers are closed, then the controller circuits are not
operating correctly. Reset the system by switching the CTU & TRANSPONDER
circuit breaker to off and then on again. If the CTU fault indicator is still on, or
flashing, then the CTU module should be replaced.
d. If any of the ALARM REGISTER, PRIMARY or SECONDARY indicators turn on
following switch-on, then one of the transponder operating parameters is out of
tolerance; if this parameter is a primary fault, the transponder should be shut
down after the ALARM DELAY period. The indicators in the ALARM REGISTER
can be used as a guide to locating the cause of the fault condition, after the
transponder has shutdown. (See also Section 4.1.2 for LRU fault location).
A-7
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - DUAL DME
A.2.1
Introduction
The procedures in this section detail the steps required to place a DME beacon (dual
configuration) into operation. Each mode of operation is described separately and some
guidance is given concerning action required when abnormal performance occurs.
For in-depth explanation of the various controls, indicators, and facilities, refer to the
following sections:
CTU Facilities and Operating Procedures: Section A.3.
Operator Controls and Indicators: Section A.4.
Module Preset Controls, Switches, Links and Indicators: Section A.5.
The checklist in Table A-2 gives the required switch settings of the front panel switches
prior to placing the beacon into operation. These settings are independent of the final
mode of operation of the beacon.
Table A-2
Switch Setting Checklist - Dual System
MODULE/UNIT
CONTROL/INDICATOR
SETTING/INDICATION
AC Power Supplies
POWER
OFF
All circuit breakers
OFF
RF Panel
Antenna Relay Control Switch
NORMAL
Monitors
MONITOR OUTPUTS
NORMAL
Test Interrogators
MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC
POWER
NORMAL
Transponder Power Supplies
NORMAL
Transmitter Drivers
DRIVER DC POWER
NORMAL
Receiver Videos
IDENT
NORMAL
1kW PA Power Supplies
AMPLIFIER DC POWER
NORMAL
A-8
HA72500
A.2.2
APPENDIX A
a. On both AC power supplies, set the POWER switch to ON. Check that the front
panel voltmeters indicate a voltage of 27.0 0.5 volts.
b. On the power distribution panel, set all circuit breakers to on. After a short delay
AC PWR NORM
BATT CHG1
BATT CHG2
LOCAL
(press LOCAL pushbutton if the indicator is off)
(press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator is off)
Check that the following CTU front panel indicators are off:
TEST section:
MODULES
ANT RELAY
POWER section:
BATT LOW
RECYCLE
(press RECYCLE pushbutton if the RECYCLE

indicator is on)
REMOTE
(press LOCAL pushbutton if the REMOTE indicator

is on)
MAINTENANCE
(press MAINTENANCE pushbutton if the indicator is

on)
MONITOR ALARM
(press MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT pushbutton if the

indicator is on)
SELECT MAIN NO1
(press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator is on)
SELECT MAIN NO2
(press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator is on)
STATUS section:
NO1 ON
NO2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
MAINTENANCE
If the indications are contrary to the above, refer to Section A.2.8 below.
A-9
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.2.3
Local Operation
A.2.3.1
Switch-on Procedure
a. Set the front panel controls initially as in A.2.1.

b. Apply power to the beacon as in A.2.2.
c. On the CTU, press the LOCAL control source pushbutton. This selects normal
operation in the local mode and the LOCAL indicator should be on.
d. On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 or NO2 pushbutton. This activates
the rack in its normal operating mode. The following indications should result:
1. SELECT MAIN, NO1 or NO2 indicator on.
2. NO1 ON or NO2 ON status indicator on (this is an internal CTU preset
control, adjustable from 2 to 20 seconds for a cold standby and fixed at
2 seconds for a warm standby; see A.5.1.6 for details).
3. NORMAL status indicator on, after the selected POWER ON inhibit time. This
indicates that the monitor is powered, and no faults are detected.
fault is present.
e. Check that no unit or module has a red indicator on. A red indicator on indicates
that a test switch is not in the NORMAL position, or a fault is present.
"
NOTE
A.2.3.2
A monitor module self test occurs every 15 seconds (2 seconds), and will
produce a momentary PRIMARY fault display on the monitor module. This is
normal operation.
on, and the SELECT MAIN, NO1 and NO2 indicators should both be off.
A.2.3.3
Transfer Indication
If the main transponder has been switched off due to an alarm, the NORMAL and
SHUTDOWN status indicators will be off, and if the standby transponder is currently
operating, the TRANSFER indicator will be on. The faults that were present at the time
of the transfer action are displayed on the ALARM REGISTER indicators.
A.2.3.4
Shutdown Indication
If the main transponder and the standby transponder have both been switched off due to
an alarm, the NORMAL and TRANSFER status indicators will be off and the
SHUTDOWN indicator will be on. The faults that were present at the time of the
shutdown action are displayed on the ALARM REGISTER indicators.
A.2.3.5
Reset Procedure
To reset the beacon following a shutdown or transfer, due to an alarm condition, press
the SELECT MAIN, OFF/RESET pushbutton, and then press the SELECT MAIN, NO1
or NO2 pushbutton (response should be the same as A.2.3.1d).
A-10
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.2.4
Remote Operation
A.2.4.1
At the DME Site
a. Set the front panel switches initially as in A.2.1.

b. Apply power to the beacon as in A.2.2.
c. On the CTU press the SOURCE, REMOTE pushbutton. The SOURCE, LOCAL
indicator should be off, and the SOURCE, REMOTE indicator should be on. This
selects normal operation in the remote' mode.
A.2.4.2
At the Remote Site
Check that the AC PWR NORM and BATT CHG NORM remote indicators are on.
A.2.4.2.1
Switch-on Procedure
At the remote control panel, select DME NO1 ON or DME NO2 ON. Correct operation
will be indicated by the DME NORMAL indicator and DME NO1 ON or DME NO2 ON
indicator (if used) turning on. At the DME site, the indications should be the same as
those in A.2.3.1d, except that the REMOTE indicator should be on.
A.2.4.2.2
At the remote control panel, select DME OFF/RESET. The DME NORMAL indicator and
the DME NO1 ON indicator (if used) should turn off.
A.2.4.2.3
Transfer Indication
If the main transponder has switched off due to an alarm, the DME NORMAL and DME
SHUTDOWN status indicators will be off, and if the standby transponder is currently
operating, the DME TRANSFER indicator will be on.
A.2.4.2.4
Shutdown Indication
If the main transponder and the standby transponder have switched off due to an alarm,
the DME NORMAL and DME TRANSFER status indicators will be off, and the DME
SHUTDOWN indicator will be on.
A.2.4.2.5
Reset Procedure
To reset the beacon, select DME OFF/RESET, and then select DME NO1 ON or DME
NO2 ON again.
A-11
HA72500
A.2.5
APPENDIX A
Maintenance Operation
The 'maintenance' mode would normally be used during servicing or alignment of the
DME rack. In a dud,] beacon installation, the 'maintenance' mode allows one of the
transponders to be operated separately as a single transponder while the other
transponder is used for maintenance tasks. Operating in this mode, if the MONITOR
ALARM is selected to be NORMAL, only primary faults will be recognised, and
shutdown is the only action that will be performed. More extensive tests are also
available on the CTU, and the TI RATE 1 kHz and 10 kHz switches are enabled.
"
Only the monitor/test interrogator installed in the operating transponder will be

used to monitor that transponder. In other words, only single monitoring is used
in maintenance mode.
NOTE
A.2.5.1
Switch-on Procedure
A.2.5.1.1
Switch-on Procedure 1
This procedure applies when Transponder 1 is to be connected to the antenna, and

Transponder 2 is to be connected to the dummy load for maintenance or alignment.
b. Perform the following RF wiring changes on the RF panel, noting the original
wiring configuration:
1. Make sure a 10 dB attenuator is attached to connector FWD-A on upper
Directional Coupler (1A69755).
2. Make sure a 50 ohms termination is attached to connector REV-A on the
upper directional coupler.
3. Move the coaxial cable connected to FWD-B on the lower Directional Coupler
(2A69755) to connect from the 10 dB attenuator on TI-2 REPLY DET to
connector FWD-B on the upper directional coupler. A longer coaxial cable
may be necessary.
4. Leave the coaxial cable connected from the 10 dB attenuator on TI-1 REPLY
DET to connector FWD-D on the lower directional coupler.
5. Move the coaxial cable connected to FWD-C on the lower directional coupler,
to connect from FWD-C on the upper directional coupler to TI-2 TEST
INTRGS. A longer coaxial cable may be necessary.
6. Leave the coaxial cable from connector FWD-E on the lower directional
coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS,
7. Connect a coaxial cable from connector ERP IN on the rear of the lower
transponder subrack to the 10 dB attenuator on connector FWD-A on the
A-12
HA72500
APPENDIX A
c. The following table lists the settings of the front panel switches, of Transponder
2, prior to placing the beacon in maintenance operation. These settings are
independent of the final mode of operation of the beacon.
UNIT
SWITCH
SETTING
AC Power Supplies
AC POWER
OFF
RF Panel
Antenna Relay Control

Switch
NORMAL
OFF
Test Interrogator Modules
MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC
POWER
ON
Transponder Power
Supplies
TRANSPONDER DC
POWER
ON
Transmitter Driver Modules
DRIVER DC POWER
ON
AMPLIFIER DC POWER
ON
d. Apply power to the beacon as in A.2.2.

e. On the CTU, press the MAINTENANCE pushbutton. This selects 'maintenance'
be on.
f.
On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 pushbutton. This activates the rack
2. NO1 ON status indicator on.
fault is present.
A.2.5.1.2
Switch-on Procedure 2
This procedure applies when Transponder 2 is to be connected to the antenna, and

Transponder 1 is to be connected to the dummy load for maintenance or alignment.
b. Perform the following RF wiring changes on the RF panel, noting the original
wiring configuration:
1. Make sure a 10 dB attenuator is attached to connectors FWD-A on the upper
Directional Coupler (1A69755).
2. Make sure a 50 ohms termination is attached to connector REV-A on the
3. Move the coaxial cable connected to FWD-D on the lower Directional Coupler
(2A69755) to connect from 10 dB attenuator on TI-1 REPLY DET to
connector FWD-B on the upper directional coupler.
4. Leave the coaxial cable connected from the 10 dB attenuator on TI-2 REPLY
DET to connector FWD-B on the lower directional coupler.
A-13
HA72500
APPENDIX A
5. Move the coaxial cable connected to FWD-E on the lower directional coupler,
to connect from FWD-C on the upper directional coupler to TI-1 TEST
INTRGS.
6. Leave the coaxial cable from connector FWD-C on the lower directional
coupler to TI-2 TEST INTRGS.
7. Connect a coaxial cable from connector ERP IN on the rear of the upper
transponder subrack to the 10 dB attenuator on connector FWD-A on the
c. The following table lists the settings of the front panel switches, of
Transponder 1, prior to placing the beacon in maintenance operation. These
settings are independent of the final mode of operation of the beacon.
UNIT
SWITCH
SETTING
AC Power Supplies
AC POWER
OFF
RF Panel
Antenna Relay Control Switch
NORMAL
OFF
Test Interrogator Modules
MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC POWER
ON
Transponder Power Supplies
ON
Transmitter Driver Modules
DRIVER DC POWER
ON
AMPLIFIER DC POWER
ON
d. Apply power to the beacon as in A.2.2.

e. On the CTU, press the MAINTENANCE pushbutton. This selects 'maintenance'
be on.
f.
On the CTU, press the SELECT MAIN, NO2 pushbutton. This activates the rack
1.
SELECT MAIN, NO2 indicator on.
2.
NO2 ON status indicator on.
3.
MAINTENANCE status indicator on.
4.
All the ALARM REGISTER indicators off immediately, and stay off unless a
fault is present.
A.2.5.2
on, and the SELECT MAIN, NO1 and NO2 indicators should both be off.
A.2.5.3
Reset Procedure
To reset the beacon following a shutdown due to an alarm, press the SELECT MAIN,
OFF/RESET pushbutton, and then press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 or NO2 pushbutton.
A-14
HA72500
A.2.5.4
APPENDIX A
Restore RF Wiring Procedure
If steps A.2.5.1.1 or A.2.5.1.2 have been performed, the RF wiring needs to be restored
for normal dual operation, by performing the following steps:
1. Make sure that 10 dB attenuators are attached to connectors TI-1 REPLY
DET, TI-2 REPLY DET, on the RF panel, and FWD-A on both directional
couplers.
2. Leave 50 ohms terminations on connectors REV-A on both directional
couplers.
3. Remove any coaxial cable connected to FWD-B and FWD-C of the upper
directional coupler.
4. Make sure that a coaxial cable is connected from FWD-D on the lower
directional coupler to the 10 dB attenuator on TI-1 REPLY DET on the RF
panel.
5. Make sure that a coaxial cable is connected from FWD-B on the lower
directional coupler to the 10 dB attenuator on TI-2 REPLY DET on the RF
panel.
6. Make sure that a coaxial cable is connected from FWD-E on the lower
directional coupler to TI-1 TEST INTRGS on the RF panel.
7. Make sure that a coaxial cable is connected from FWD-C on the lower
directional coupler to TI-2 TEST INTRGS, on the RF panel.
8. Re-install the original wiring associated with connectors ERP IN on the rear of
the transponder subracks
A-15
HA72500
A.2.6
APPENDIX A
Recycle Operation
The recycling facility allows the beacon to automatically restart after a failure. Following
a shutdown due to an alarm, the beacon should attempt three restarts. If normal
operation ensues, then the beacon should remain on. If there are four shutdowns within
a 5-minute period, then the beacon will remain off, until it is manually reset.
a. The RECYCLE facility is 'enabled' when the RECYCLE indicator is on. On the
CTU, press the RECYCLE pushbutton to toggle between the 'enable' and
'disable' of this facility.
b. The number of restarts is recorded on the RESTART counter. The RESTART
counter is displayed on the CTU test display when the Misc softkey is pressed,
from the top level of the operational mode test menu.
A.2.7
Operating Notes
For a full definition of the CTU controls and indicators, refer to Section A.3.
The following notes are given to assist the operator when an abnormal indication occurs
on the CTU:
a. If the AC PWR NORM, BATT CHG1 or BATT CHG2 indicators are not on after
the power distribution panel circuit breakers are closed, then the operation of the
AC power supplies should be checked for the presence of AC mains and correct
DC output voltage.
the transponder will not switch on. The DC output from the AC power supplies
and the battery voltages should be checked.
c. If the CTU fault indicator, in the ALARM REGISTER, turns on after the power
operating correctly. Reset the system by switching the CCTU & TRANSPONDER
circuit breakers to off and then on again. If the CTU fault indicator is still on, or
flashing, then the CTU module should be replaced.
tolerance; if this parameter is a primary fault, the transponder should shut down
after the ALARM DELAY period. The indicators in the ALARM REGISTER can
be used as a guide to locating the cause of the fault condition, after the
transponder has shut down. (See also Section 4.1.2 for LRU fault location)
A-16
HA72500
A.2.8
APPENDIX A
Typical Test Results
The table below shows the normal readings which would be indicated on the Test
Facility of the CTU, in an operating rack. For operation of the Test Facility of the CTU
refer to Section A.3.1.2.
PARAMETER
LOWER LIMIT
UPPER LIMIT
49.8 s
50.2 s
55.8 s
56.2 s
11.9 S
12.1 s
29.9 s
30.1 s
POWER OUT
1.1 kW
1.3 kW
EFFICIENCY
70%
100%
Decoded Pulse Rate
95 pps
2850 pps
Tx Pulse Rate
940 pps
2850 pps
Pulse Width
3.2 s
3.8 s
Pulse Rise Time
1.9 s
2.5 s
Pulse Fall Time
1.9 s
2.5 s
RV Local Oscillator
1.0 volts
3.0 volts
RV RF Drive
1.5 volts
4.5 volts
TD Drive
1.5 volts
2.5 volts
TD Modulation
1.5 volts
3.5 volts
PA Modulation
1.0 volts
3.5 volts
PA Drive
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
PA Output
2.0 volts
4.8 volts
TI Interrogation
Level
2.7 volts
3.3 volts
21 volts DC
28 volts DC
Power Amplifier HT
49.5 volts DC
50.5 volts DC
Transponder 15 V
14.6 volts DC
15.6 volts DC
Transponder 18 V
17.2 volts DC
18.6 volts DC
Driver HT
41.6 volts DC
42.4 volts DC
DELAY
SPACING
Auxiliary 24 V
NOTES
Typical reply efficiency is 90%unless

interrogation rate is high.
A-17
HA72500
A.3
APPENDIX A
CTU FACILITIES AND OPERATING PROCEDURE
The major human interface to the DME LDB-102 is provided by the Control and Test
Unit (CTU). Although the implementation of some commands input via the CTU is
installation-specific (that is, depending on the facilities and configuration of the particular
installation) all the facilities provided by the CTU are explained here in order to give a
detailed overview of the operational control facilities available.
This procedure assumes that each individual module of the DME has been correctly
configured and setup in accordance with the alignment and adjustment procedures
described in Section 3 of this handbook.
A.3.1
"
CTU Front Panel Controls
REFER Figure A-1.

The controls on the CTU front panel can be divided into two groups; control switches
and test switches.
CONTROL SWITCHES
TEST SWITCHES
ALARM DELAY
Five multifunction test switches, beneath

display, software programmable
RECYCLE
TIRATE
SOURCE
LOCAL
REMOTE
1 kHz
10 kHz
ESCape
MAINTENANCE
MONITOR ALARM
OFF/RESET
SELECT MAIN
NO 1
NO 2
A-18
HA72500
Figure A-1
APPENDIX A
CTU Front Panel
A-19
HA72500
A.3.1.1
APPENDIX A
CTU Front Panel Control Switches - Description of Operation
Each CTU front panel control switch has an indicator associated with it, indicating the
current setting of that particular switch. These do not indicate the current state of the
DME. This can be determined using the status indicators described in Section A.3.2.1.
The most recent settings of these switches are stored in EEPROM. Therefore, when
power is restored after any type of power interruption to the CTU the switch settings (and
hence the state of the DME) will return to those which were in use immediately before
the power interruption occurred.
A.3.1.1.1
ALARM DELAY Switch
The ALARM DELAY switch is a recessed 10-position rotary switch with positions
labelled 1 through 10. This switch selects the delay in seconds from the moment a fault
is first detected by the CTU until action is taken. The fault must be present for the
duration of this period in order for the CTU to take action following the expiry of the delay
period.
The ALARM DELAY indicator will be lit if an alarm delay of less than 4 seconds is
selected. This indicates that abbreviated postfault measurements will be performed if the
RMM System option is installed.
The CTU will respond immediately to changes in the position of this switch.
A.3.1.1.2
RECYCLE Switch
The RECYCLE switch is a pushbutton switch that toggles between two settings: ON and
OFF. When recycle is selected, the CTU will attempt to restart the main transponder
30 seconds after a complete DME shutdown. If more than three restart attempts occur
within a 5-minute period, the DME will be permanently shut down. When recycle is not
selected, no restart will be attempted if the DME is shut down. When the DME is
permanently shut down, it can only be restarted by firstly selecting OFF on the SELECT
MAIN switches (either locally or remotely, depending upon the setting of the SOURCE
switches).
The CTU will respond immediately to the operation of this switch.
A.3.1.1.3
SOURCE Switches
The SOURCE switches are two pushbutton switches labelled LOCAL and REMOTE.
These settings are mutually exclusive (either LOCAL is selected or REMOTE is selected
- they can never be both on or both off).
When set to remote mode, the DME will accept commands only from a remote source
(either an RCMS interface or an optional RMM system if installed - this is set during
system configuration). In this mode, any attempts to change the SELECT MAIN,
MAINTENANCE or MONITOR ALARM switches will result in a <<< Select LOCAL first
>>> message on the lower line of the CTU front panel display. The current setting of the
SELECT MAIN switches will remain unchanged when REMOTE is selected.
When set to local mode, the DME will allow the MAINTENANCE, MONITOR ALARM or
SELECT MAIN switches to be used. Any commands received from the remote source
will be ignored and, in the case of an RMM system, an error message will be returned to
the remote system.
The CTU will respond immediately to the operation of these switches. Their current
selection cannot be changed remotely.
A-20
HA72500
APPENDIX A
If the MAINTENANCE switch is ON, attempting to select REMOTE will result in a

message << Turn MAINTENANCE off first >> being displayed. If the MONITOR
ALARM switch is set to INHIBIT, attempting to select REMOTE will result in the
message << Turn MON INHIBIT off first >> being displayed.
A.3.1.1.4
MAINTENANCE Switch
The MAINTENANCE switch is a pushbutton switch that toggles between two settings:
ON and OFF. The CTU will only respond to input from this switch when the SOURCE
switches are set to LOCAL. MAINTENANCE may be selected if the DME is on or off. It
may be turned off at any time by pressing the MAINTENANCE switch; it cannot be
changed remotely.
When the MAINTENANCE switch is ON, a dual DME is prevented from transferring to
the standby transponder, thus allowing the standby transponder to be tested without
alarms being generated by h modules. The main transponder may remain on-air, but will
be shut down if a primary fault occurs.
The 1kHz and 10 kHz interrogation rates (TI RATE) are only available when
MAINTENANCE is ON.
A.3.1.1.5
MONITOR ALARM Switch
The MONITOR ALARM switch is a pushbutton switch that toggles between two settings:
INHIBIT and NORMAL. The CTU will only respond to input from this switch when the
SOURCE switches are set to LOCAL. Failure to do this will result in the <<< Select
LOCAL first >>> message on the lower line of the CTU front panel display. It may be
turned off at any time by pressing the MONITOR ALARM switch; it cannot be changed
remotely.
When the MONITOR ALARM switch is set to NORMAL, the DME is able to transfer or
shut down should the monitored parameters warrant such action. When this switch is set
to INHIBIT, transfer and shutdown are prevented since the CTU will ignore the fault lines
from all monitor modules. When set to INHIBIT, it also prevents ident from being
transmitted.
A.3.1.1.6
SELECT MAIN Switches
The SELECT MAIN switches are three pushbutton switches labelled OFF, NO1 and
NO2. These settings are mutually exclusive (one and only one of them can be on at any
given time). These switches can only be used when the SOURCE switches are set to
LOCAL. Failure to do this will result in the <<< Select LOCAL first >>> message on the
lower line of the CTU front panel display. The settings of these switches can be changed
remotely when the remote mode is selected.
When OFF is selected, all modules in the transponder subracks are turned off (unless
they are being forced on by their front panel switches being in the TEST position). When
NO1 is selected, Transponder 1 is selected as the main transponder (and Transponder 2
is selected as the standby transponder in a dual DME). When NO2 is selected in a dual
DME, Transponder 2 is selected as the main transponder and Transponder 1 is selected
as the standby transponder. In a single transponder DME, the message <<< Not
available for single >>> will be displayed on the lower line of the CTU front panel display.
Note that these switches do not indicate which transponder is currently operating (for
example, even though NO1 is selected as main, the DME may have transferred to the
standby transponder due to fault conditions). The currently operating transponder may
be determined from the NO1 ON and NO2 ON status indicators, as described in
Section A.3.2.1.
A-21
HA72500
A.3.1.2
"
APPENDIX A
Test Facility - Description of Operation
REFER Figure A-1.

The test facility of the CTU is located in the top half of the CTU front panel. It provides
facilities which allow the user to measure various parameters, sample status lines, and
control and display some minor functions on the DME transponder(s). In maintenance
mode (see Section A.3.1.1.4) these facilities can also measure the more important fault
limits of the available monitor module(s).
The front panel controls and displays associated with the test facility consist of:
a. A 2x40-character liquid crystal display (LCD), which performs the following:
On the top line of the LCD, status messages and measurement results are
displayed.
On the bottom line of the LCD, labels for the five multifunction pushbuttons
are displayed. This forms the basis of the menu system described below. If a
measurement is being performed, the corresponding switch label will flash.
On the bottom line of the LCD, error messages are displayed. These are
flashed four times at one-second intervals before returning to the previous
display.
b. Five multifunction pushbuttons mounted directly below the LCD display, which
are used to select the action, or select the next menu indicated by the label
above it. These may also be referred to as 'softkeys' throughout the remainder of
this Appendix.
c. ESC (escape) pushbutton, which is used to return to the top level menu.
d. Two TI RATE pushbuttons which select the pulse repetition frequency of the test
interrogator module. The two buttons are:
1kHz.
Toggles the test Interrogation rate (TIPRF) of the test interrogator between
1kHz and 50 Hz (dual DME) or 100 Hz (single DME). This button can only be
operated while the CTU is in maintenance mode and the test interrogator/
monitor modules to be affected has been selected at the top menu. The
active TIPRF rate will be displayed in the top right hand corner of the test
display once the test interrogator/monitor module has been selected from the
menu.
10 kHz.
Is only active while held pressed and selects the 10 kHz test interrogation
rate of the test interrogator module. When the button is released the test
interrogation rate returns to the previously active rate (50 Hz, 100 Hz, or
1 kHz). This button can only be operated while the CTU is in maintenance
mode and the test interrogator/monitor module to be affected has been
selected at the top menu. The active TIPRF rate will be displayed in the top
right hand corner of the test display once the test interrogator/monitor module
has been selected from the menu.
If either of these buttons are pressed when MAINTENANCE switch is OFF, the message
<<< Select MAINTENANCE first >>> will be displayed on the lower line of the CTU front
panel display.
A-22
HA72500
"
APPENDIX A
A.3.1.3
Test Facility - Menu System
A.3.1.3.1
Menu System - Introduction
REFER Figure A-2 and Figure A-3.

The menu system on the CTU allows the implementation of a multifunction test control
system with the minimum of controls and prompts the user with the allowable
combinations. The menus are arranged in an hierarchical system, and the behaviour,
display and choices offered by the menus are modified if maintenance mode is selected.
When the MAINTENANCE switch is not selected (MAINTENANCE indicator is off) the
system is in an operational mode. The menu structure is as shown in Figure A-2 and the
user is allowed to:
a. Perform and display measurements from both transponder monitoring systems
(test interrogator/monitor modules) at the same time. The name of the parameter
being measured, the measured value for each channel (transponder), the unit of
measurement and the pulse repetition rate of the test interrogator are shown on
the top line of the front panel display. A typical parameter display is as shown
below (but with the tiprf field blank). The tiprf is displayed only in maintenance
mode.
Name
Delay
Ch1
Ch2
unit
tiprf
50.1
50.1
100
b. Perform and display measurements that do not interfere with the operation of the
transponder.
c. Display and reset the number of transponder restarts that have occurred.
d. Modify the display on the alarm register to display only those alarms that apply to
a particular transponder. (Otherwise the alarms from both transponders are
ORed together for the display.)
e. Select the ident source or test tone for the internal CTU speaker.
f.
Select the ident source for external audio drive.
g. Test the CTU front panel LED indicators.

h. Display the software version installed in the CTU.
When MAINTENANCE is selected ON, the MAINTENANCE indicator is on and
equipment is in the maintenance mode. The menu structure is as shown in Figure A-3
and the user is allowed to:
a. Perform and display measurements from the selected transponder monitoring
system (test interrogator/monitor module), with the parameter display appearing
as shown above (but with only one parameter value displayed - that from the
selected monitoring system). Tiprf is displayed in this mode.
b. Perform and display measurements that may interfere with the operation of the
transponder (for example 1 kHz and 10 kHz test interrogation rate tests).
c. Perform the monitor module fault limit tests, which interfere with the normal
operation of the DME
A-23
HA72500
Figure A-2
APPENDIX A
Menu Structure in Operational Modes
A-24
HA72500
Figure A-3
APPENDIX A
Menu Structure in Maintenance Mode
A-25
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.3.1.3.2
Menu System in Operational Mode
A.3.1.3.2.1
Measurement Class Selection (Top Level Menu)
CTU Display
Keys
LDB-102 DME
Param
Level
PS.Volt
Status
Misc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Actions performed when the corresponding softkey is pressed:

a. Change display to the first of four parameter select menus (see A.3.1.3.2.2.1).
b. Change display to first of two signal level select menus (see A.3.1.3.2.3.1).
c. Change display to power supply select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.4).
d. Change display to status select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.5).
e. Change display to first of three miscellaneous selection menus (see
A.3.1.3.2.6.1).
A.3.1.3.2.2
Transponder Parameter Selection
A.3.1.3.2.2.1 Parameter Select - First Menu

CTU Display
Keys
Spacing
Delay
Pwr.Out
Effncy
NEXT
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Actions performed (for each of the monitor/test interrogator modules fitted) when the
corresponding softkey is pressed
a. Measure and display 'Spacing' parameter.
b. Measure and display 'Delay' parameter.
c. Measure and display 'Power Out' parameter.
d. Measure and display 'Efficiency' parameter.
e. Change display to second parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.2).
A.3.1.3.2.2.2 Parameter Select - Second Menu

CTU Display
Keys
D.Rate
Tx.Rate
a.
b.
c.
PREV
NEXT
d.
e.
corresponding softkey is pressed:
a. Measure and display 'Decoded Rate' parameter.
b. Measure and display 'Transmit Rate' parameter.
c. No action.
d. Change display to first parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.1).
e. Change display to third parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.3).
A-26
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.3.1.3.2.2.3 Parameter Select - Third Menu

CTU Display
Keys
Width
Rise
Fall
PREV
NEXT
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
a. Measure and display 'Transmit Pulse Width' parameter.
b. Measure and display 'Transmit Pulse Rise Time' parameter.
c. Measure and display 'Transmit Pulse Fall Time' parameter.
d. Change display to second parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.2).
e. Change display to fourth parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.4).
"
NOTE
It is the characteristics of the second transmitted pulse that are measured and
displayed
A.3.1.3.2.2.4 Parameter Select - Fourth Menu

CTU Display
Keys
V Cal
R cal
T cal
PREV
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
a. Measure and display Voltage Test Signal' parameter.
b. Measure and display 'Rate Check Signal' parameter.
c. Measure and display 'Time Check Signal' parameter.
d. Change display to third parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.3).
e. No action.
A-27
HA72500
A.3.1.3.2.3
APPENDIX A
Transponder Signal Level Selection
A.3.1.3.2.3.1 Signal Level Select - First Menu

CTU Display
Keys
RV.Osc
RV.RF
TD.Drv
TD.Mod
NEXT
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Measure and display 'Oscillator RF Level' parameter, from receiver video
module(s).
b. Measure and display Tx RF Drive Level' parameter, from receiver video
module(s).
c. Measure and display TD Drive Level' parameter, from transmitter driver
module(s).
d. Measure and display 'Pulse Modulation Level' parameter, from transmitter driver
module(s).
e. Change display to second signal level select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.3.2).
A.3.1.3.2.3.2 Signal Level Select - Second Menu

CTU Display
Keys
PA.Mod
PA.Drv
PA.Out
TI.RF
PREV
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Measure and display 'RF Modulation Level' parameter, from Power Amplifier
Module(s).
b. Measure and display 'RF Drive Level' parameter, from Power Amplifier
Module(s).
c. Measure and display 'Power Output RF Level' parameter, from Power Amplifier
Module(s).
d. Measure and display 'RF Drive Level' parameter, from Test Interrogator
Module(s).
e. Change display to first signal level select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.3.1).
A-28
HA72500
A.3.1.3.2.4
APPENDIX A
Power Supply Voltage Selection
CTU Display
AUX.24V
PA.HT
TP.15V
TP.18V
Drv.HT
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Keys

a. Measure and display +24 Volt input Supply' parameter, from monitor module(s).
b. Measure and display Power Amplifier HT Supply' (nominal 50 volts) parameter,
from 1kW PA power supply module(s).
c. Measure and display +15 Volts Transponder Supply' parameter, from
transponder power supply module(s).
d. Measure and display +18 Volts Transponder Supply' parameter, from
transponder power supply module(s).
e. Measure and display Driver HT Transponder Supply' (nominal 42 volts)
parameter, from transponder power supply module(s).
A.3.1.3.2.5
Status Selection
CTU Display
Keys
MON PS
RV PS
TI PS
RV TRIG
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Sample and display Monitor Power Status' parameter, from monitor module(s).
b. Sample and display 'Receiver Video Power Status' parameter, from monitor
module(s).
c. Sample and display Test Interrogator Power Status' parameter, from test
interrogator module(s).
d. Sample and display 'Receiver Video Triggers Normal Status' parameter, from
monitor module(s).
e. No action.
A-29
HA72500
A.3.1.3.2.6
APPENDIX A
Miscellaneous Selection
A.3.1.3.2.6.1 Miscellaneous - First Menu

Restart count = xxx
CTU Display
Keys
Reset
Alarm1
Alarm2
NEXT
d.
e.
a.
b.
c.
(where 'xxx' is the restart count)

a. Change display to submenu, to ask the user 'Are you sure T; if the response is 9
yes' then reset the' RESTART COUNT' both in RAM and EEPROM, otherwise
return to this menu.
b. No action.
c. On the alarm register, display only those alarms that apply to Transponder 1
while this button is held down.
d. On the alarm register, display only those alarms that apply to Transponder 2
while this button is held down.
e. Change display to second miscellaneous select menu (see).
A.3.1.3.2.6.2 Miscellaneous - Second Menu

CTU Display
Keys
LEDTst
Version
a.
b.
c.
PREV
NEXT
d.
e.

a. While the pushbutton is pressed, switch on all the CTU front panel LED
indicators, returning to the previous display when the pushbutton is released.
b. Display the version number of the software installed in the CTU (component
reference D17 on the CTU processor board).
c. No action.
d. Change display to first miscellaneous select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.6.1).
e. Change display to third miscellaneous select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.6.3).
A.3.1.3.2.6.3 Miscellaneous - Third Menu

CTU Display
Ident Source : xxx

Mon 1
Mon 2
2240Hz
OFF
a.
b.
c.
d.
Keys
(where 'xxx' is the current audio source for the internal CTU speaker)
PREV
e.

a. Select the Monitor 1 audio source.
b. Select the Monitor 2 audio source.
c. Select 2240 Hz as the audio source.
d. Turn audio source off.
e. Change display to second miscellaneous select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.6.2).
A-30
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.3.1.3.3
Menu System in Maintenance Mode
A.3.1.3.3.1
TI/Monitor Selection (Top Level Menu)
CTU Display
Keys
LDB-102 DME - Maintenance Mode

Ch.1
Ch.2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Select test interrogator/monitor module No. 1 to be used for subsequent
measurements, enable high test interrogation rates, and change display to
maintenance measurement class select menu (see A.3.1.3.3.2).
b. Select test interrogator/monitor module No. 2 to be used for subsequent
measurements, enable high test interrogation rates, and change display to
maintenance measurement class select menu (see A.3.1.3.3.2).
"
NOTE
This option is only offered if 'dual' operation is selected on option switch S1 on

the CTU processor board - see Section A.5.1.1. If 'single' operation is selected,
no action is performed.
c. No action.
d. No action.
e. No action.
A.3.1.3.3.2
Measurement Class Selection
CTU Display
Keys
Param
Level
PS.Volt
Status
F1tLimit
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Change display to first parameter select menu, same menu as when
maintenance is not selected, except that only one value is measured and
displayed (see A.3.1.3.2.2.1). For the 'Efficiency' measurement submenu of the
'Param' selection, see A.3.1.3.3.2.2.
b. Change display to first signal level select menu, same menu as when
displayed (see A.3.1.3.2.3.1).
c. Change display to first power supply select menu, same menu as when
displayed (see A.3.1.3.2.4).
d. Change display to first status select menu, same menu as when maintenance is
not selected, except that only one value is measured and displayed (see
A.3.1.3.2.5).
e. Change display to monitor fault limit select menu (see A.3.1.3.3.2.1).
A-31
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.3.1.3.3.2.1 Monitor Fault Limit Select Menu

When an option is selected from this menu the selected fault limit test will be performed
once, on the selected monitor module, and the results will be displayed. Upper limit will
be displayed on the left hand side of the display, and the lower limit will be displayed on
the right hand side. If no limit is applicable to the parameter selected, 'N/A' will be
displayed.
CTU Display
Keys
Delay
Spacing
Effncy
Tx.Rate
Ant.Pwr
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Perform the Delay fault limit test once.
b. Perform the Spacing fault limit test once.
c. Perform the Efficiency fault limit test once.
d. Perform the Transmit Rate fault limit test once.
e. Perform the Antenna Power fault limit test once.
A.3.1.3.3.2.2 Efficiency Reading Select Menu

CTU Display
Keys
1kHz
Effncy
Hi Eff
Lo Eff
PREV
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

a. Perform a normal Efficiency measurement, alternating high and low level test
interrogations, using the selected test interrogator/monitor modules.
b. Perform an Efficiency measurement, using high level only test interrogations, in
the selected test interrogator/monitor modules.
c. Perform an Efficiency measurement, using low level only test interrogations, in
the selected test interrogator/monitor modules.
d. Return to the first parameter select menu (see A.3.1.3.2.2.1).
e. No action.
A-32
HA72500
A.3.2
"
APPENDIX A
CTU Front Panel Indicators
REFER Figure A-1.
A.3.2.1
Status Indicators
There are six status indicators on the CTU front panel:
NO1 ON (green).
Will be lit if Transponder 1 is powered on and is the currently operating
transponder. This does not indicate that Transponder 1 is selected as main.
NO2 ON (green).
Will be lit if Transponder 2 is powered on and is the currently operating
transponder. This does not indicate that Transponder 2 is selected as main.
NORMAL (green).
The DME will be in the normal state when the selected main transponder (that is,
the transponder selected using the SELECT MAIN switches) is on and operating.
The DME is not in the normal state if the MONITOR ALARM switch is set to
INHIBIT or the MAINTENANCE switch is ON or if any alarms are present.
TRANSFER (yellow).
The DME will be in the transfer state if it is a dual DME and the standby
transponder is on and operating (the standby transponder is the transponder that
is not selected as main on the SELECT MAIN switches).
SHUTDOWN (red).
The DME will be in the shutdown state when all transponders are off due to a
fault condition and the SELECT MAIN switches are set to either NO1 or NO2.
This is an alarm condition.
MAINTENANCE (red).
The DME will be in the maintenance mode when the MAINTENANCE switch is
set to ON. Only when this indicator is lit is the DME actually in the maintenance
mode - under certain conditions there may be a slight delay between the setting
of the MAINTENANCE switch and the DME entering or leaving the maintenance
mode.
Three of these indicators (NORMAL, TRANSFER, and SHUTDOWN) are mutually

exclusive - only one of these may be on at any given time (although they may all be off
in the case of the selected main transponder being on and operating with monitor alarms
inhibited, or if selected OFF at the SELECT MAIN switches).
A-33
HA72500
A.3.2.2
APPENDIX A
Power Status Indicators
There are four POWER status indicators on the CTU front panel:
BATT LOW (red).

Low battery voltage is detected by comparing the 24 volts auxiliary supply
against a predefined threshold (an internal CTU setting - see Section A.5.1.2). If
a transponder is on, and low battery voltage is detected, the transponder will be
shut down to prevent the batteries discharging completely.
BATT CHG 1 (green).

If battery charger 1 is on and operating then this status indicator is on. One of the
battery chargers must be 'normal' for the CTU to power up the transponders,
after a 'battery low voltage' shutdown.
BATT CHG 2 (green).

If battery charger 2 is on and operating then this status indicator is on.
AC PWR NORM (green).

If AC power is being applied to battery charger 1, then this status indicator will be
on.
A.3.2.3
Test Status Indicators
There are two TEST status indicators on the CTU front panel:
MODULES (red).
Will be on if any one of the transponder modules has its control switch out of the
NORMAL position.
ANT RELAY (red).

Will be on if the antenna control switch is not in the NORMAL position. The
antenna test switch is located on the RF panel behind the CTU, and can be
accessed from the rear of the rack.
A-34
HA72500
A.3.2.4
APPENDIX A
Alarm Register
The ALARM REGISTER display indicates the faults (in all transponders) that were
present at the time the most recent shutdown or transfer decision was made by the CTU.
The alarms corresponding to individual transponders can be selected from the menu
system (see Section A.3.1.3.2.6.1).
In a single DME, the alarms shown on this display are derived from the monitor faults.
In a dual DME, the alarms shown on this display are the result of the monitor 'voting'
specified on the internal option switch S2 on the CTU processor board (see Table A-4).
This display is cleared when the main transponder is selected from the OFF state.
There are 12 alarm register indicators on the CTU front panel; all of them are red.
INDICATOR
COLOUR
FAULT TYPE
DESCRIPTION
DELAY
Red
Primary
Monitor delay fault status from both

transponders
SPACING
Red
Primary
Monitor spacing fault status from both

transponders
EFFICIENCY
Red
Secondary
Monitor efficiency fault status from both

transponders
TX RATE
Red
Secondary
monitor transmit rate fault status from both

transponders
POWER
Red
Secondary
Monitor RF power fault status from both

transponders
IDENT
Red
Secondary
Monitor ident fault status from both

transponders
PULSE SHAPE
Red
Secondary
Monitor pulse shape fault status from both

transponders
ANTENNA
Red
Secondary
Monitor antenna fault status from both

transponders
PRIMARY
Red
SECONDARY
Red
MONITOR
Red
Primary
Monitor delay fault status from both

transponders
CTU
Red
Primary
CTU watchdog or software fault
A.3.2.5
Primary
Secondary
Primary fault status from both transponders;

ORed from the primary faults
Secondary fault status from both
transponders; ORed from the secondary faults
Control Switch Indicators
Each of the front panel control switches described in Section A.3.1.1 has an indicator
associated with it to indicate the state of the controls, whether the DME is under remote
or local control.
A-35
HA72500
A.4
APPENDIX A
OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Information on CTU controls and indicators are contained in Sections A.3.1 and A.3.2
respectively. The front panel controls and indicators on the main transponder modules
are listed in Table A-3, following.
Table A-3
Transponder Front Panel Controls and Indicators
MAJOR ASSEMBLY/
SUBASSEMBLY
TYPE No.
NAME
1A72510
Monitor
Module

TYPE
Toggle
switch
LEGEND
MONITOR
OUTPUTS
Green LED
DELAY
Green LED
SPACING
Green LED
EFFICIENCY
Green LED
RATE
Green LED
POWER
Green LED
IDENT
Green LED
ANTENNA
Green LED
SHAPE
Yellow LED SELF TEST
Red LED
PRIMARY
Yellow LED SECONDARY
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
POWER ON
Test jack
ERP PULSE
Test jack
ERP EARTH
Test jack
+15V
Test jack
+5V
Test jack
EARTH
FAILED
All monitor outputs are set to
their fault condition (high)
which invokes a FAILED
condition for all front panel
indicators and all fault lines
read by the CTU. The TEST
indicator is turned on.
NORMAL
Monitor module operates
normally and TEST indicator is
off.
When on, indicates that the named

parameter is within preset limits.
Indicates that the CTU is performing a

Monitor Self Test, during which the CTU will
look for the two primary parameters in the
fault state.
Indicates that one or both of the primary
parameters (Delay or Spacing) are outside
preset limits.
Indicates that one or more of the six
secondary parameters (Efficiency, Rate, RF
Power, ident, Antenna, Shape) are outside
preset limits.
Indicates that the MONITOR OUTPUTS
Indicates that DC power is applied to the
monitor.
Detected pulse waveform of transmitted
pulse - sampled near the antenna and fed
into the ERP IN connector.
Earth reference for the ERP PULSE test
jack signal.
Buffered output of the internally generated
+15 volts.
Buffered output of the internally generated
+5 volts.
Common earth of the power supplies, the
internally generated supplies, and all input
and output signals.
A-36
HA72500
1A72514
Test
Interrogator
APPENDIX A
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
DC POWER ON
Pushbutton CHECK
switch
DETECTOR
COINCIDENCE
Toggle
switch,
centre off
TEST
TRANSPONDER
DECODING
Toggle
switch,
centre off
Indicates that the MONITOR AND

INTERROGATOR DC POWER switch is not
in the NORMAL position.
monitor and test interrogator.
Connects the output of the RF generator into
the reply detector, bypassing the
transponder. Is used to check that the
detector stages in the transponder have the
same delay. The signals at the
INTERROGATIONS TIMING and REPLY
TIMING test jacks should match each other
when this switch is pressed. This switch will
interfere with the normal operation of the
monitor module connected to the test
interrogator under test.
REJECT +2s
Afters the interrogating
pulse spacing outside
acceptable limits to test
-2s
the transponder pulse
decoder rejection.
ACCEPT +1s
Alters the interrogating
pulse spacing within
acceptable limits to test
-1s
the transponder pulse
decoder acceptance.
Sets accept gate timing; variable between
0 and 60 microseconds.
COARSE 16 microseconds increments.
16-way
rotary
switches
REPLY GATE
DELAY
Toggle
switch,
centre off
MONITOR AND
ON
INTERROGATOR
DC POWER
Test jack
TRIGGER
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
REPLY ACCEPT
GATES
Test jack
1 s MARKERS
Test jack
+15V
FINE
1 microsecond increments.
The power supply output is

connected to the test interrogator
and monitor regardless of other
power sources.
OFF
The power supply is
disconnected from the test
interrogator and monitor.
NORMAL The test interrogator circuitry is
connected to the power supply if
the input signal TI-ON from the
CTU is active (high) or
TRANSPONDER POWER on the
transponder power supply is
switched ON. Otherwise, the
module's circuitry is isolated from
the power supply.
Buffered version of test interrogator output
TI-PRF; can be used to trigger an
oscilloscope.
Common earth of all supply voltages and
outputs.
Buffered pulse from the parameter extractor
circuitry, defining a time slot in which the
received reply pulse should be present
(15 volts, 6 microseconds wide).
Buffered output from the timer circuitry
(5 volts, 1 microsecond period).
Buffered +15V internal supply (15 volts).
Test jack
+5V
Protected +5V internal supply (5 volts).
Test jack
DETECTED
REPLIES
Buffered output of the reply detector, which

is a detected pulse envelope representing
the RF pulses transmitted from the
transponder.
A-37
HA72500
APPENDIX A
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
1A72520
Receiver
Video
DETECTED
INTERROGATIONS
EARTH
Buffered detected pulse envelope

representing the RF pulse generated by the
test interrogator for test interrogation.
outputs.
EARTH
outputs.
INTERROGATIONS Output pulses from the RF generator
TIMING
detector.
EARTH
outputs.
REPLY TIMING
Buffered output pulses of the reply detector.
Yellow LED REPLIES

INHIBITED
Flashes on and off when the receiver video

is being over-interrogated.
On continuously when replies are inhibited.
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
DC POWER ON
16-position
switches
BEACON DELAY
Indicates that the IDENT switch is not in the

NORMAL position.
module.
COARSE Sets the Delay parameter of the
receiver video.
FINE
16-position
switch
Toggle
switch
centre off
REPLY PULSE
SEPARATION
IDENT
Sets the Spacing parameter of the receiver

video.
NORMAL
Normal mode of
operation.
OFF
No ident is generated.
CONTINUOUS
Toggle
switch,
spring
loaded to
centre off
Test jack
INHIBIT
INTERROGATIONS
Test jack
LDES PULSE
Test jack
DOUBLE PULSE
DECODER OUT
Test jack
DEAD TIME
Test jack
TRIGS TO
MODULATOR
Test jack
LOCAL OSC
LEVEL
+15V
Test jack
Ident is generated
continuously.
All interrogations are inhibited.
TEST REPLY
RATE MONITOR
Transponder replies are inhibited, and

squitter reduced to 810 Hz.
SDES PULSE
Buffered output from the double pulse

decoder, which gives the short distance
echo suppression pulse to the on-channel
gating logic (15 volts, 2.5 microseconds
wide, one pulse per correctly decoded pulse
pair).
Buffered output from the dead time
suppressor showing the period of long
distance echo suppression and when it is
active (15 volts, selectable length, selectable
trigger level).
Buffered output of the double pulse decoder
indicating a pulse pair has been correctly
decoded (15 volts, 2.5 microseconds wide,
one pulse per each valid interrogation).
Buffered output from the dead time
generator shows the period of dead time
and when it is active (15 volts, selectable
length).
Buffered output from the double pulse
encoder buffer to the transmitter driver. This
output is normally high, and goes low during
TX MODULATION TRIGGERS (0-15 volts,
2.5 microseconds wide pulses in pulse pairs
separated by 12 or 36 microseconds,
minimum rate 945 PPPS, maximum rate
3000 PPPS).
DC output proportional to the drive level out
of the RF source.
Buffered output from the +1 5V regulator.
A-38
HA72500
1A72525
Transponder
Power
Supply
APPENDIX A
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
RF LEVEL
Test jack
ON CHANNEL
VIDEO
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
Green LED
DETECTED LOG
VIDEO
POWER ON
Red LED
TEST
Toggle
switch,
centre off
TRANSPONDER
DC POWER
Test jack
+24V IN
Test jack
HT
Test jack
+15V
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
+18V
Test jack
SWITCHED
+24V
SUPPLY
CURRENT+
SUPPLY
CURRENT-
Test jack
Test jack
1A72530
Transmitter
Driver

outputs.
outputs.
DC output proportional to the output
TX RF DRIVE.
Buffered output of the narrow band detected
on-channel gate from the IF amplifier
(15 volts pulses forming an envelope around
the detected log video pulses, normally
3 microseconds wide).
outputs.
Buffered output from the wideband
logarithmic amplifiers of the IF amplifier.
Indicates that power is applied to the
module.
Indicates that the TRANSPONDER POWER
ON
All supply outputs are on,
regardless of CTU commands.
This is required during testing
and maintenance.
OFF
All power supply outputs are oft.
NORMAL Power supply outputs are under
CTU control.
The input voltage from the power
supply/battery.
HT output to the Transmitter Driver
1A72530.
+15 volts output to the Transmitter
Driver1A72530.
Ground reference for +24V IN, HT, +1 8V
and+15V, which is connected to the power
+24V IN return.
+18 volts output to the Transmitter
Driver1A72530.
The switched +24 volts output.
These test jacks are connected to either
side of a resistor in series with the input
+24V IN. The + is connected to the higher
voltage side of the resistor, and the - jack to
the lower voltage side (100 mV/ampere).
Indicates that 15 volts output from the
transponder power supply is applied to the
module.
Indicates that the DRIVER DC POWER
switch is not in the NORMAL position or that
internal switches S2 and S3 are incorrectly
set.
Adjusts the RF from the module.
Green LED
DC POWER ON
Red LED
TEST
Variable
resistor
Toggle
switch
RF OUTPUT
DRIVER DC
POWER
OFF
Test jack
SQUARE PULSE
MODULATION
Test jack
FUNCTION
GENERATOR
SHAPED PULSE
MODULATION
A buffered low-level modulation pulse output

representing the signal from the pulse
shaper to the second stage of the exciter.
The buffered output of the pulse-shaping
integrator on the pulse shaper.
A buffered high-level modulation output
representing the signal from the pulse
shaper to the modulation stage.
The buffered input + 15V supply.
Test jack
Test jack
+15V
Turns off the pulse modulation to

the second stage of the exciter.
NORMAL Normal operation.
A-39
HA72500
1A72540
1kW PA
Power
Supply
APPENDIX A
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
EARTH
Green LED
POWER ON
Red LED
TEST
Green LED
HT ON
Toggle
switch,
centre off
AMPLIFIER
POWER
Test jack
POWER AMP
MODULATOR
OUT
POWER AMP
OUTPUT OUT
POWER AMP
DRIVER OUT
+15V
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
Test jack
EARTH
Test jack
+24VIN
Test jack
HT OUT
Buffered HT output.
Test jack
SHAPED PULSE
MODULATION
TPNDR2
Buffered signal modulation pulse.
Test jack
RF Panel
PWB
Assembly
(Dual)
Buffered output signal from the output stage

of the1kW RF power amplifier.
Buffered output signal from the driver stage
of the1kW RF power amplifier.
Internally generated +15V supply (15 volts).
These jacks are connected to either side of
a resistor in series with the +24V IN supply.
The + side of the jack is buffered the to jack
higher voltage resistor, and the - jack to the
lower voltage side (1 mV/ampere).
A ground reference for the +24V IN, HT
OUT and+15V OUT supplies, which is
connected to the+24V IN return.
Buffered +24V IN power supply input.
Test jack
2A72547

outputs.
outputs.
Indicates that DC power is supplied to the
module.
Indicates that the AMPLIFIER POWER
Indicates that the HT supply is available,
and within limits.
ON
HT output voltage is supplied to
the1kW RF power amplifier
regardless of the power control
signal state. This is required only
during testing and maintenance.
OFF
There is no power output from
the1kW PA power supply.
NORMAL There is HT output from the
module while the power control
signal from the CTU is active
(high); if it is inactive (low) the HT
output is set to 0 volts.
Buffered output signal from the modulation
stage of the 1kW RF power amplifier.
Toggle
switch,
centre off
SUPPLY
CURRENTSUPPLY
CURRENT +
TPNDR1
NORMAL
The output of Transponder 2 is fed directly

to the antenna.
The output of Transponder 1 is fed directly
to the antenna.
The CTU controls which transponder output
is fed to the antenna.
A-40
HA72500
A.5
APPENDIX A
MODULE PRESET CONTROLS, SWITCHES, LINKS AND

INDICATORS
This section lists all the preset controls, switches, links and indicators that are located
internally on the equipment (that is, not accessible at the front panel). These are used to
set up operating conditions and functional modes of the equipment either prior to
commissioning or as part of alignment or adjustment procedures.
The major mode selection functions are selected by CTU internal controls, which are
described in Section A.5.1. The internal indicators of the CTU are described in Section
A.5.2. The internal controls for the transponder modules and boards are described in
Section A.5.3.
"
A.5.1
CTU Internal Controls
A.5.1.1
Option Switches
REFER Figure A-4.

There are two 8-way dual-in-line switches (S1 and S2) located on the CTU Processor
PWB Assembly (1A72552). These switches are used to modify the CTU's behaviour for
key functions, as described in Table A-4.
A-41
HA72500
Table A-4
SWITCH
S1
S2
APPENDIX A
CTU Processor Board Option Switch Settings
FUNCTION SELECTED
IF SWITCH ON IF SWITCH OFF
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
SW1
Normal
Operation
Production
Tests
SW2
NMP
Present
NOTE
No NMP
SW3
No action
SW4
No action
SW5
No Statistics
Menu
SW6
No action
SW7
No action
SW8
SW1
Single
Main AND
Vote
Subtract from
MFLT2 delay
Add to MFLT2
delay
Delay
Statistics Menu
Available
Subtract from
MFLT1 delay
Add to MFLT1
delay
Dual
Main OR Vote
SW2
Standby
AND Vote
Standby OR
Vote
SW3
RMM
Control
Standby
COLD
RCMS Control
1-element
Antenna
Fault Not
Installed
1-element
Antenna
Fault No
Action
2-element
Antenna
Fault Not
Installed
2-element
Antenna
Fault No
Action
1-element
Antenna Fault
Installed
Subtracts 0.1 microseconds from delay monitor fault limit

readings (see alignment procedure) on Monitor Module 1.
Adds 0.1 microseconds to delay monitor fault limit
readings(see alignment procedure) on Monitor Module 1.
Select single or dual transponder operation.
In a dual transponder this selects the type of voting to be
used between the monitor module fault lines when the
selected 'main' transponder is ON. This has no effect in a
single transponder.
In a dual transponder, this selects the type of voting to be
used between the monitor module fault lines when the
designated 'standby' transponder is ON. This has no effect
in a single transponder.
When remote control is selected on the front panel, this
switch selects the source of that remote control.
In a dual transponder, this selects power OFF (for COLD)
or ON (for WARM) on the transponder that is not in use.
Independent of the state of this switch, power is switched
OFF to the transponder(s) if there is a primary fault, or
maintenance mode is selected, or the transponders are
selected OFF on the CTU front panel. This switch has no
effect in a single transponder.
Used to tell the CTU if one antenna element fault detection
hardware is absent or installed. If installed, it can be used
to display the fault if one is detected.
1-element
Antenna Fault
Action
Used to tell the CTU if the one antenna element fault

detection hardware is to be ignored, or treated as a
secondary fault.
2-element
Antenna Fault
Installed
Used to tell the CTU if two antenna element fault detection

hardware is absent or installed. If installed, it can be used
to display the fault if one is detected.
2-element
Antenna Fault
Action
Used to tell the CTU if the two antenna element fault

detection hardware is to be ignored, or treated as a
secondary fault.
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
Standby
WARM
Used to select normal operation of the CTU or test routines

that are used (in association with a test jig) during
production testing.
Indicates if Navaid Maintenance Processor (NMP) used in
the RMM system is fitted.
If S1:2 Is set to ON (NMP Present), but no NMP Is
connected, there may be a significant delay before the
CTU responds to any commands.
Subtracts 0.1 microseconds from delay monitor fault limit
readings (see alignment procedure) on Monitor Module 2.
Adds 0.1 microseconds to delay monitor fault limit readings
(see alignment procedure) on Monitor Module 2.
Enables mean and standard deviation statistics to be
accumulated for delay readings.
A-42
HA72500
A.5.1.2
"
APPENDIX A
Low Voltage Shutdown Preset
REFER Figure A-4.

This adjustable preset control (R32) is used to set the lower limit of the battery voltage
for normal transponder operation. This limit is adjustable between 19 volts and 22 volts.
If the battery voltage falls below this limit, the transponders are switched off. Normal
operation is restored when the battery voltage rises above this limit and either battery
charger is normal. There is a small amount of hysteresis in the comparator to mask
noise that may be present.
A.5.1.3
"
Internal Speaker Volume Preset
REFER Figure A-4.

This preset control (R33) is used to adjust the audio volume from the internal CTU
speaker (B1), and is located on the CTU processor board. A test tone of 2440 Hz may
be selected from the menu system or via link XN8 on the CTU processor board. The
internal speaker is normally used for recovered ident tone.
A.5.1.4
"
Internal Test Jumpers
REFER Figure A-4.

The internal CTU jumpers are used during production or field test procedures. XN5 and
XN10 may be fitted, depending on the installation configuration. For normal operation, all
other test jumpers should be removed.
Table A-5
JUMPER
CTU Processor Board Test Jumpers

NAME
FUNCTION
XN5
MA IDENT OUTPUT
If fitted, connects ASSOC_IDENT_OUT + (XB1:1 on

External I/O PWB Assembly to ground. To be fitted, as
required, for Interfacing to the ident circuitry of an
associated navaid.
XN6
WATCHDOG DISABLE
Only fitted during fault finding - prevents watchdog

circuitry from regularly resetting the processor, which
may happen during faulty operation of the CTU
processor.
XN7
SIGNATURE
ANALYSIS
Only fitted during fault finding - causes the processor to

cycle through all its addresses, without running the
software in the ROM.
XN8
IDENT TEST
Only fitted during fault finding - causes 2440 Hz test

tone to be fed to the internal CTU speaker.
XN9
WATCHDOG TEST
Only fitted during fault finding - used to test that the

watchdog circuit can reset the CTU processor. When
this is fitted, the processor cannot reset the watchdog
circuit.
XN10
ASSOC IDENT INPUT
When fitted, provides a 10 kilohms pullup on

ASS0C_IDENT_IN (XB1:4 on the External I/O PWB
Assembly) 20 24 volts. To be fitted, as required, for
interfacing to the ident circuitry of an associated navaid.
A-43
HA72500
A.5.1.5
"
APPENDIX A
LCD Viewing Angle Preset
REFER Figure A-5.

This preset control (R1) is located on the CTU front panel board and is used to adjust
the LCD viewing angle for the best display readability. To be adjusted, if required, to give
best contrast on the display when viewed from the normal angle.
A.5.1.6
"
Alarm Power On Inhibit Switch
REFER Figure A-5.

This preset rotary switch (S11) is read by the software to determine the period to ignore
transponder alarms, after a transponder has been switched on, for cold standby. The
delay can be preset between 2 and 20 seconds in 2-second steps. (The delay, in
seconds, is 2 times the switch setting, plus 2)
"
For warm standby operation the alarm power on delay is preset to 2 seconds,
and is independent of this switch
NOTE
A.5.1.7
"
External Ident Level Preset
REFER Figure A-6.

This preset control (R1) is used to adjust the output audible level of the recovered ident
signal. It is located on the RCMS interface board.
A.5.2
CTU Internal Displays
Internal status indicators are provided to display useful information during production
tests and normal operation.
A.5.2.1
"
CTU Processor Board
REFER Figure A-4.

The indicators provided on the CTU processor board are:
H1
Driven from A19 address line.
H2
Driven from A16 address line.
H3
Not used.
H4
ROM Test OK - performed when the processor is reset.
H5
Not used.
H6
Heartbeat - shows operational software activity.
H7
Not used.
H8
RAM Test OK - performed when the processor is reset.
A-44
HA72500
APPENDIX A
A.5.2.2
"
CTU Front Panel Board
REFER Figure A-5.

The indicators provided on the CTU front panel board are:
H14
A.5.2.3
"
Heartbeat - shows operational software activity, and I/0 bus control of the
front panel board.
CTU RCMS Interface Board
REFER Figure A-6.

The indicators provided on the CTU RCMS interface board are:
H1
Heartbeat - shows operational software activity, and I/O bus control of the
RCMS interface board.
A-45
HA72500
Figure A-4
APPENDIX A
CTU Processor Board - Control and Indicator Locations
A-46
HA72500
Figure A-5
APPENDIX A
CTU Front Panel Board - Control and Indicator Locations
A-47
HA72500
Figure A-6
APPENDIX A
CTU RCMS Interface Board - Control and Indicator Locations
A-48
HA72500
A.5.3
APPENDIX A
Transponder Internal Controls
This section gives details of the internal switches, presets and adjustments for each of
the module assemblies.
Table A-6
SUBASSY
Internal Controls : Monitor Module 1A72510

TYPE
1A72511
Main PWB
Assembly,
Monitor
Module
Preset
resistor
8-way DIL
switch
The
Monitor
Fault Limit
switches
S1-4 and
S8-10, S12
and S13
are binary
coded, with
switch 1 of
the DIL
switches
the least
significant
and switch
8 (or 10)
the most
significant.
They use
inverted
logic, with
the OFF
position of
the switch
being
active.
S7 is not
Binary
coded and
is active in
the ON
position
REF
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
R87
S1
PULSE WIDTH
LOWER REJECT
LIMIT
8-way DIL
switch
S2
FALL TIME UPPER

REJECT LIMIT
8-way DIL
switch
S3
RISE TIME UPPER

REJECT LIMIT
8-way DIL
switch
S4
PULSE WIDTH
REJECT WINDOW
8-way DIL
switch
S7
POWER LEVEL
LOWER REJECT
LIMIT
Sets the ERP monitor fault alarm reference level

to 0 dB at commissioning.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
difference between the limits of
1.2 microseconds and the switches are encoded
for a number of 11, as shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
The power level corresponds to the switch
setting, from -1 to -7 dB. For a lower reject limit
of -3 dB the switches are set as shown above
(S7:8 is not used).
A-49
HA72500
SUBASSY
1A72511
Main PWB
Assembly,
Monitor
Module
APPENDIX A
TYPE
REF
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
8-way DIL
switch
S8
8-way DIL
switch
S9
DELAY REJECT
WINDOW
8-way DIL
switch
S10
SPACING REJECT
WINDOW
10-way
DIL switch
S12
DELAY LOWER
REJECT LIMIT
10-way
DIL switch
IDENT GAP
UPPER REJECT
LIMIT
SPACING LOWER
REJECT LIMIT
ON
OFF
Subtract 2 from the required upper reject limit
(in seconds). Encode the switches for this value.
For an upper reject limit of 62 seconds the
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Multiply the difference between the required
upper and lower reject limits (in microseconds)
by 10 and subtract 1. Encode the switches for
this value.
For an upper reject limit of 50.5 microseconds
the difference between the limits is
1.0 microsecond and the switches are encoded
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Multiply the difference between the required
upper and lower reject limits (in microseconds)
by 10 and subtract 1. Encode the switches for
this value.
For an upper reject limit of 12.5 microseconds
the difference between the limits is
1.0 microsecond and the switches are encoded
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON
OFF
shown above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON
OFF
switches are encoded for a number of 114 as
shown above.
A-50
HA72500
APPENDIX A
Table A-7
SUBASSY
1A72515
Main PWB
Assembly.
Test
Interrogator
1A72516
RF
Generator
Internal Controls : Test Interrogator 1A72514

TYPE
REF

LEGEND
Slide
switch
S4
mode
Preset
resistor
R7
TPNDR OP LVL
CAL
Variable
capacitors
Inductor
6-way DIL
switch
C10, 14,18, 22
L1
S1
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
1A72517
RF Filter
1A72518
Modulator
and
Detector
Variable
capacitors
C1, C2
Preset
resistors
R13
R20
R37
Pulse amplitude
Pulse shape
Pulse pedestal
Slide
switch
S1
Test point
Test point
XT1
XT2
Normal
Test
Bias voltage
Pk amp lvl
Test point
Test point
Test point
Test point
XT3
XT4
XT5
XT6
Timing pulse
Mod out
Ground
Ground
X Sets pulse spacing for X channel operation.

Y Sets pulse spacing for Y channel operation.
Used to calibrate the transmitted pulse peak power.
Used to align the RF generator to the operating

interrogator frequencies (see Section 3.4.12).
Selects interrogations at the nominal interrogation
frequency.
Adds a CW signal to the interrogation pules at -10 dB.
Used to align the RF filter (see Section 3.4.13).
Used to align the pulse shape of the interrogations

produced by the RF generator (see Section 3.4.14).
Position for normal operation.
Used during testing.
Bias voltage for level detector circuitry.
DC voltage proportional to the peak amplitude of the
transmitted pulses.
Timing reference for the transmitted pulse.
Modulation pulse to RF generator.
0 volts reference.
0 volts reference.
A-51
HA72500
APPENDIX A
Table A-8
SUBASSY
1A72521
Main PWB
Assembly,
Receiver
Video
1A72522
RF Source
1A72523
IF Amplifier
Internal Controls : Receiver Video 1A72520

TYPE
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
REF
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
R37
CODE SPEED
R39
CODE REPTN
R45
ADJUST 6 dB
OFFSET
Preset
resistor
R46
Slide
switch
S4
LONG DISTANCE
ECHO SUPP
LEVEL
SELECT
ENCODER MODE
Slide
switch
S5
SELECT
DECODER MODE
16-way
rotary
switch
16-way
rotary
switch
Slide
switch
S6
SET LDES
PERIOD
S7
SET DEAD TIME
Sets the dead time period in multiples of

11.57 microseconds.
S8
SDES
Slide
switch
S9
LDES
8-way
switch
CODE ELEMENT
S13
to
S16
C8, 12, 18, 26
ON
Enables SDES operation.
OFF
Disables SDES operation.
ON
Enables LDES operation.
OFF
Disables LDES operation.
Set the ident Morse code characters.
Variable
capacitors
Variable
inductor
Variable
capacitor
Preset
resistors
Variable
inductors
L1
Varies the ident code speed, which is set to

8 Hz.
Varies the ident repetition rate, which is set to
1.5 Hz.
Set to 0.24 volts during factory test, but may
need to be varied at module test level (see
Sections 3.3.8, 3.4.17).
Varies the LDES DC level.
X Selects X mode operation for the encoder.
Y Selects Y mode operation for the encoder.
X Selects X mode operation for the decoder.
Y Selects Y mode operation for the decoder.
Sets the LDES period in multiples of
12.15 microseconds.
Used to align the RF source to the operating

reply frequency
(see Section 3.4.18)
C1
R15, 29, 50
Used to align the IF amplifier

(see Section 3.4.19).
L3, 4, 5, 6, 7
A-52
HA72500
APPENDIX A
The Ident code element switches S13, S14, S15 and S16 on the Main PWB Assembly,
Receiver Video set the ident code as follows:
a. Convert the required Ident letters into International Morse Code, using the
following table.
LETTER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
MORSE SYMBOL
dot dash
dash dot dot dot
dash dot dash dot
dash dot dot
dot
dot dot dash dot
dash dash dot
dot dot dot dot
dot dot
dot dash dash
dash dot dash
dot dash dot dot
dash dash
LETTER
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
MORSE SYMBOL
dash dot
dash dash dash
dot dash dash dot
dash dash dot dash
dot dash dot
dot dot dot
dash
dot dot dash
dot dot dot dash
dot dash dash
dash dot dot dash
dash dot dash dash
dash dash dot dot
b. Set the switches using the following code (shading indicates switch position).
EXAMPLE: For ident code AWA, switch settings are:
A-53
HA72500
Table A-9
SUBASSY
1A72526
Main PWB
Assembly,
Transponder
Power Supply
APPENDIX A
Internal Controls : Transponder Power Supply 1A72525
TYPE
Preset
resistor
REF
R26
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
HT VOLTAGE
Sets the HT output voltage to the Transmitter

Driver 1A72530.
A-54
HA72500
APPENDIX A
Table A-10
SUBASSY
1A72531
Pulse Shaper
PWB
Assembly
Internal Controls : Transmitter Driver 1A72530

TYPE
Preset
resistors
REF
R3, 5,
7, 9,
11, 13
R17
R36
R52
R54
R58
R62
R69
R85
R97
R115
1A72532
Exciter
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
LEGEND
PULSE
SHAPE
INTEGRATOR
BALANCE
BACKPORCH
PEDESTAL
VOLTAGE
2ND PULSE
EQUALISING
MOD PULSE
AMPLITUDE
ALC LEVEL
(RF OUTPUT)
POWER MOD
AMP DC
1W PULSE
EXCITER DC
MED POWER
DRIVER DC
DRIVER DC
POWER
Toggle
switch
S1
Slide switch
S2
ALC LOOP
Slide switch
S3
ALC
Slide switch
S4
MED PD
COLL
Link
X1
POWER
Variable
capacitors
C5, 15, 17. 21, 26, 30,

33, 34.
These vary the slope of the segments of the

function generator output from base (R3) to
apex (R13).
Adjusts the balance of the function generator
integrator.
Adjusts the spacing between the modulation
pulses.
Adjusts the DC level of the shaped modulation
pulse.
Adjusts the height of the second pulse of the
pulse pair to equalise it with the height of the
first pulse.
Adjusts the amplitude of the shaped modulation
pulse.
With S2 (ALC LOOP) in its closed position,
adjusts the shaped modulation pulse amplitude.
Adjusts the power modulation amplifier DC level.
Adjusts the pulse modulation amplitude.
Adjusts the exciter DC level.
Adjusts the medium power driver DC level.
OFF
NORMAL
Power supply to exciter is off.

Power supply to the exciter is
under CTU
CLOSED
Automatic level control is
enabled.
OPEN
Automatic level control is
disabled.
VIDEO
ALC maintains shaped
modulation pulse amplitude
(150W DME).
DETECTED RF ALC maintains output level
from the 1kW RF power
amplifier (1kW DME).
DC
Selects a DC voltage as the
collector supply for the medium
power driver in high power
(1kW) mode.
MODULATION Selects the shaped modulation
pulse as the collector supply
for the medium power driver in
low power (150 W) mode.
150W
Lights TEST LED if switch S3
incorrectly set to DET RF.
1kW
Lights TEST LED if switch S3
incorrectly set to VIDEO.
Used to align the exciter (see Section 3.4.25).
A-55
HA72500
Table A-11
APPENDIX A
Internal Controls: 1kW PA Power Supply 1A72540
SUBASSY
1A72541 Control and
Status PWB Assembly
1A72542 DC-DC
Converter PWB
Assembly
1A72543 Regulator PWB
Assembly
TYPE
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
Preset
resistor
REF
R45
R16
R112
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION/SETTINGP/INDICATION
Varies the centre of the HT ON window between
approximately 48.5 and 51.9 volts.
Calibrates the input circuit monitoring of the
DC-DC converter (see section 3.4.33).
Sets the HT output voltage to the 1kW RF power
amplifier.
A-56
HA72500
A.6
APPENDIX A
DEPOT TEST FACILITY OPERATION
Operating procedures for the Depot Test Facility 3A72500 are contained in Appendix K.
A-57
HA72500
APPENDIX F
APPENDIX F
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE
F-i
HA72500
APPENDIX F
TABLE of CONTENTS
F.
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE...................................................................... F-1
F.1
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
F-1
F.2
COMPONENT ORDERING DATA
F-1
F.3
PRESENTATION OF DATA
F-1
F.4
ASSEMBLY/SUBASSEMBLY IDENTITIES
F-2
F.5
COMPONENT SCHEDULE LISTS
F-8
F.5.1 1A69737 Attenuator..................................................................................... F-8
F.5.2 1A69755 Directional Coupler....................................................................... F-8
F.5.3 2A69755 Directional Coupler....................................................................... F-8
F.5.4 1A69757 50 Ohm Load (SMA) .................................................................... F-8
F.5.5 2A69757 50 Ohm Load (N) ......................................................................... F-9
F.5.6 2A/3A69758 Power Supply System, Dual AC ............................................. F-9
F.5.7 1A69873 250W RF Power Amplifier............................................................ F-9
F.5.8 3A71130 Power Supply 200/260 VAC, 24 VDC 30A................................... F-9
F.5.9 1A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Single 1kW............................................ F-10
F.5.10 2A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Dual 1kW .............................................. F-10
F.5.11 1A72505 Rack Assembly, Single 1kW DME ............................................. F-10
F.5.12 2A72505 Rack Assembly, Dual 1kW DME ................................................ F-10
F.5.13 1A72510 Monitor Module .......................................................................... F-11
F.5.14 1A72511 Monitor Module Main PWB ........................................................ F-11
F.5.15 1A72512 Peak Power Monitor................................................................... F-14
F.5.16 1A72513 Transponder Subrack................................................................. F-14
F.5.17 1A72514 Test Interrogator......................................................................... F-15
F.5.18 1A72515 Test Interrogator Main PWB....................................................... F-15
F.5.19 1A72516 RF Generator ............................................................................. F-18
F.5.20 1A72517 RF Filter ..................................................................................... F-19
F.5.21 1A72518 Modulator and Detector.............................................................. F-19
F.5.22 1A72519 Reply Detector ........................................................................... F-21
F.5.23 1A72520 Receiver Video........................................................................... F-22
F.5.24 1A72521 Receiver Video Main PWB......................................................... F-22
F.5.25 1A72522 RF Source .................................................................................. F-25
F.5.26 1A72523 IF Amplifier ................................................................................. F-26
F.5.27 1A72524 RF Amplifier ............................................................................... F-28
F.5.28 1A72525 Transponder Power Supply........................................................ F-29
F.5.29 1A72526 Transponder Power Supply Main PWB...................................... F-29
F.5.30 1A72530 Transmitter Driver ...................................................................... F-31
F.5.31 1A72531 Pulse Shaper PWB .................................................................... F-32
F.5.32 1A72532 Exciter ........................................................................................ F-34
F.5.33 1A72533 Medium Power Driver................................................................. F-35
F.5.34 1A72534 Power Modulation Amplifier ....................................................... F-36
F.5.35 1A72535 1kW RF Power Amplifier ............................................................ F-36
F.5.36 1A72536 Power Divider............................................................................. F-37
F.5.37 1A72537 Power Combiner ........................................................................ F-37
F.5.38 1A72538 RF Amplifier Driver PWB............................................................ F-38
F.5.39 1A72540 1kW Power Amplifier Power Supply........................................... F-38
F.5.40 1A72541 Control and Status PWB ............................................................ F-39
F.5.41 1A72542 DC-DC Converter PWB.............................................................. F-41
F.5.42 1A72543 Regulator PWB .......................................................................... F-42
F.5.43 1A72544 1kW PA Connector PWB ........................................................... F-43
F.5.44 1A72545 RF Panel - Single DME .............................................................. F-43
F.5.45 2A72545 RF Panel - Dual DME................................................................. F-44
F.5.46 1A72547 RF Panel PWB - Single DME..................................................... F-44
F-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX F
F.5.47 2A72547 RF Panel PWB - Dual DME ....................................................... F-45

F.5.48 A72549 Power Distribution Panel - Single DME........................................ F-45
F.5.49 2A72549 Power Distribution Panel - Dual DME ........................................ F-45
F.5.50 1A72550 Control and Test Unit ................................................................. F-46
F.5.51 1A72552 CTU Processor PWB ................................................................. F-46
F.5.52 1A72553 CTU Front Panel PWB ............................................................... F-48
F.5.53 1A72555 RCMS Interface PWB ................................................................ F-49
F.5.54 1A72556 Transponder Subrack Motherboard ........................................... F-51
F.5.55 1A72557 External I/O PWB ....................................................................... F-51
F.5.56 1A72558 Rack Frame Wired - Single 1kWDME ........................................ F-52
F.5.57 2A72558 Rack Frame Wired - Dual 1kW DME ......................................... F-53
F.5.58 1A72560 Antenna Cable Set for Single Installation................................... F-53
F.5.59 2A72560 Antenna Cable Set for Dual Installation ..................................... F-53
F.5.60 1A72561 Accessory Kit, DME Test ........................................................... F-54
F.5.61 1A72562 Transponder Extender Frame .................................................... F-54
F.5.62 1A72563 Special Tools and Fittings .......................................................... F-54
F.5.63 1A72564 Coaxial Cables and Accessories................................................ F-54
F-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX F
LIST of FIGURES
Figure F-1
Figure F-2
Figure F-3
Figure F-4
Family Tree of DME LDB-102 Station (Single 1kW)...............................F-4

Family Tree of DME LDB-102 Station (Dual 1kW) .................................F-5
Rack/Module Complement of LDB-102 Single 1kW Station 1A72500 ...F-6
Rack/Module Complement of LDB-102 Dual 1kW Station 2A72500 ......F-7
F-iv
HA72500
APPENDIX F
F.
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE
F.1
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
Components in the schedules included in this appendix are identified by a component

reference designator or quantity (as applicable), the value/description, and a code
number. A code number may define components either of one or of more than one
source of manufacture as complying to the relevant specifications of that code number.
These schedules list only the most common, or preferred, source details. Manufacturer
or supplier sources are identified by an abbreviated name or code group. This code
group is followed by the catalogue or part designation used by the manufacturer or
supplier to identify the component. All included code groups are identified in Appendix G,
in which the name and address of the company represented by the code group is also
given.
F.2
COMPONENT ORDERING DATA
When ordering replacement components, always quote:

a. the type number of the parent unit (or subunit);
b. the component reference designator; and
c. all details which are shown in the components schedule against the component
reference designator.
This information will ensure the supply of suitable substitute components should the
listed components have become either obsolete or unavailable.
F.3
PRESENTATION OF DATA
The system arrangement of major assemblies and subassemblies will vary with the
individual configuration, facilities, and options choices that apply to each particular
Installation.
The table on the following page lists the included subassemblies and shows the type
configuration to which they apply.
The assemblies and subassemblies which contain maintainable components are then
listed in numerical order of type number in Section F.5 in this Appendix; this
arrangement is to facilitate usage and, of course, bears no relationship to the system
structure of any particular configuration. The TABLE OF CONTENTS shows a full listing
of all the included component schedules.
Subassemblies which are not maintainable to the component level do not have
components listings included in Section F.5; in the event of failure they should be
replaced as a complete assembly.
In instances where subassemblies are included as parts of higher assemblies, only the
subassembly type number is identified under the higher assembly listing; refer to the
table for the referenced type number for detailed components listing of that
subassembly.
F-1
HA72500
F.4
APPENDIX F
ASSEMBLY/SUBASSEMBLY IDENTITIES
The LDB-102 assemblies and major subassemblies are identified and listed in type
number order in the following table.
The 'VERSION USED ON' column in this table indicates the type variant/s to which each
assembly/subassembly is fitted. The version types referred to are:
1A
1A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Single 1kW.
2A
2A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Dual 1kW
3A
3A72500 DME LDB-102 Depot Test Facility.
The assembly/subassembly relationships of the single and dual 1kW station versions are
shown in Figure F-1 and Figure F-2 respectively. The rack and assembly complement
for the single 1kW station is shown in detail in Figure F-3, and that for the dual 1kW
station in Figure F-4. Components schedules applicable to the Depot Test Facility are
included in Appendix K.
Assembly Type Identification
VERSION
USED ON
1A 2A 3A
ASSEMBLY/ SUBASSEMBLY
TYPE No.
1A69737
1A69755
2A69755
1A69757
2A69757
2/3A69758
1A69873
3A71130
1A72500
2A72500
3A72500
1A72503
1A72505
2A72505
3A72505
1A72506
1A72510
1A72511
1A72512
1A72513
1A72514
2A72514
1A72515
1A72516
2A72516
1A72517
1A72518
1A72519
1A72520
NAME
Attenuator
Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
50 Ohm Termination
50 Ohm Termination
Power Supply System, Dual AC
250W RF Amplifier
AC Power Supply
LDB DME-102 Station (Single 1kW)
LDB DME-102 Station (Dual 1kW)
LDB DME-102 Depot Test Facility
1kW PA Power Supply Frame
Rack Assembly (Single 1kW DME)
Rack Assembly (Dual 1kW DME)
Rack Assembly (Depot Test Facility)
CTU Subrack
Monitor Module
Peak Power Monitor
Transponder Subrack
Test Interrogator
RF Generator
RF Filter
Reply Detector
Receiver Video
NMC
NMC
F-2
HA72500
APPENDIX F
VERSION
USED ON
1A 2A 3A
ASSEMBLY/ SUBASSEMBLY
TYPE No.
2A72520
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72525
1A72526
1A72530
1A72531
1A72532
1A72533
1A72534
1A72535
1A72536
1A72537
1A72538
1A72540
1A72541
1A72542
1A72543
1A72544
1A72545
2A72545
1A72546
1A72547
2A72547
1A72549
2A72549
1A72550
1A72552
1A72553
1A72555
1A72556
1A72557
1A72558
2A72558
3A72558
1A72560
2A72560
1A72561
1A72562
1A72563
1A72564
1A72569
NAME
RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
Transmitter Driver
Exciter
Medium Power Driver
Power Divider
Power Combiner
RF Amplifier Driver PWB Assembly
1kW PA Power Supply
Regulator PWB Assembly
1kW PA Connector PWB Assembly
RF Panel - Dual DME
Preselector Filter
Transponder Subrack Motherboard
Rack Frame Wired - Single 1kW DME
Rack Frame Wired - Dual 1kW DME
Rack Frame Wired (Test Facility)
Antenna Cable Set for Single Installation
Antenna Cable Set for Dual Installation
Accessory Kit, DME Test
Transponder Extender Frame
Special Tools and Fittings
Coaxial Cables and Accessories
Hinge In-line
NMC
NMC
NMC denotes there are no maintainable components, and no component schedule, for this item
F-3
HA72500
Figure F-1
APPENDIX F
Family Tree of DME LDB-102 Station (Single 1kW)
F-4
HA72500
Figure F-2
APPENDIX F
Family Tree of DME LDB-102 Station (Dual 1kW)
F-5
HA72500
Figure F-3
APPENDIX F
Rack/Module Complement of LDB-102 Single 1kW Station 1A72500
F-6
HA72500
Figure F-4
APPENDIX F
Rack/Module Complement of LDB-102 Dual 1kW Station 2A72500
F-7
HA72500
APPENDIX F
F.5
COMPONENT SCHEDULE LISTS
F.5.1
1A69737 Attenuator
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1-4
CODE
1036605V
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805 Q220 JXA-AB
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1-2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
select on test
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1028850Q
DESCRIPTION
switching diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-3041
DESCRIPTION
stripline launcher
jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 23SMA-50-0-52
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
coaxial receptacle
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XFA
1028908D
XFB1, 1028758Q
2
XMA 1028551R
F.5.2
1A69755 Directional Coupler
RESISTORS, FIXED
QTY
2
CODE
1028907C
DESCRIPTION
pill termination
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50
2%
KDI PST-1
DESCRIPTION
stripline launcher
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CONNECTORS
QTY
6
F.5.3
CODE
1028908D
2A69755 Directional Coupler
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
4
CODE
1028907C
DESCRIPTION
pill termination
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50
2%
KDI PST-1
DESCRIPTION
stripline launcher
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CONNECTORS
QTY
8
F.5.4
CODE
1028908D
1A69757 50 Ohm Load (SMA)
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
1
CODE
1050026H
U WARNING
DESCRIPTION
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50
2%
250W RES-NET RPT975-250P
This resistor may contain beryllium oxide
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
69757-4-09 coaxial SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
69757-4-09
F-8
HA72500
F.5.5
APPENDIX F
2A69757 50 Ohm Load (N)
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
1
CODE
1050026H
U WARNING
DESCRIPTION
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50
2%
250W RES-NET RPT975-250P
This resistor may contain beryllium oxide
CABLE
QTY
0.75m
CODE
DESCRIPTION
coaxial 50 ohms
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER EZ-141-AL-TP
DESCRIPTION
coaxial N plug
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
OMNI SPECTRA 3001-7941-00
CONNECTORS
QTY
XC1
CODE
1028913J
F.5.6
2A/3A69758 Power Supply System, Dual AC
MISCELLANEOUS
QTY
2
1
3
1
1
CODE
3A71130
69758-3-22
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
69758-4-24
F.5.7
DESCRIPTION
Power supply, 200/260 VAC, 24 VDC, 30 A
Cable assembly
Cable assembly, earth
Cable assembly, door earth
Installation accessories kit
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3A71130
69758-3-22
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
69758-4-24
1A69873 250W RF Power Amplifier
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1, 2
CODE
1036606W
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
47p
5%
150
VITRAMON VJ0805Q470JXB-AB
INDUCTORS
QTY
L1, 2
CODE
57969V31
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57969V31
SEMICONDUCTORS
QTY
V1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
microwave L-band amplifier
U WARNING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
GHZ TAN250A
V1 may contain beryllium oxide
CONNECTORS
QTY
2
CODE
1031124M
F.5.8
DESCRIPTION
coaxial SMA jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3A71130 Power Supply 200/260 VAC, 24 VDC 30A
The AC Power Supply is a stand-alone equipment and is separately documented in its

own handbook (see Appendix J). Refer to that handbook for details of replacement
components. The major electronics subassembly in the unit is:
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72599
DESCRIPTION
Control Board, AC Power Supply
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72599
F-9
HA72500
F.5.9
APPENDIX F
1A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Single 1kW
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
CODE
1A72505
1A72560
1A72561
F.5.10
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
Rack Assembly (Single 1kW DME)
1A72505
Antenna Cable Set
1A72560
1A72561
DME Antenna
2A72500 DME LDB-102 Station, Dual 1kW
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
CODE
A1
2A72505
A2
2A72560
A3
1A72561
A4
A5
2A/3A69758
F.5.11
DESCRIPTION
Rack Assembly (Dual 1kW DME)
Antenna Cable Set
DME Antenna
Dual AC Power Supply System
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2A72505
2A72560
1A72561
2A/3A69758
1A72505 Rack Assembly, Single 1kW DME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF/
QTY
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A11
A12
2
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1A72520
1A72530
1A72525
1A72510
1A72514
1A72535
1A72540
1A72558
3A71130
1A72550
1A72549
1030559Y
1030562B
F.5.12
Receiver Video
Transmitter Driver
Monitor Module
Test Interrogator
1kW PA Power Supply
Rack Frame Wired - Single 1kW DME
Power Supply, 200/260 VAC,24 VDC, 30 A
Attenuator 10 dB 50 ohms SMA
Termination 50 ohms 1 watt SMA plug
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72520
1A72530
1A72525
1A72510
1A72514
1A72535
1A72540
1A72558
3A71130
1A72550
1A72549
MICROLAB/FXRAG-10F
SUHNER 65SMA-50-0-1/111
2A72505 Rack Assembly, Dual 1kW DME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF/
QTY
A1, 14
A2, 15
A3, 16
A4, 17
A5, 18
A6, 19
A7, 20
A9
A11
A12
3
2
CODE
1A72520
1A72530
1A72525
1A72510
1A72514
1A72535
1A72540
2A72558
1A72550
2A72549
1030559Y
1030562B
DESCRIPTION
Receiver Video
Transmitter Driver
Monitor Module
Test Interrogator
1kW PA Power Supply
Rack Frame Wired - Dual 1kW DME
Attenuator 10 dB 50 ohms SMA
Termination 50 ohms 1 watt SMA plug
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72520
1A72530
1A72525
1A72510
1A72514
1A72535
1A72540
2A72558
1A72550
2A72549
MICROLAB/FXRAG-10F
SUHNER 65SMA-50-0-1/111
F-10
HA72500
F.5.13
APPENDIX F
1A72510 Monitor Module
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
CODE
1A72511
1A72512
DESCRIPTION
Peak Power Monitor
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72511
1A72512
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
REF
1
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72510-4-13 ribbon 20-way
72510-4-14 coaxial BNC/SMA
F.5.14
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72510-4-13
72510-4-14
1A72511 Monitor Module Main PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1-33, 35, 37-45, 49-51, 55-64. 68-71, 73,
81
1018878B ceramic monolyth
C34, 1036506M electrolytic tantalum
52, 82
C36
1004863T
ceramic monolyth
C46, 48, 54, 80, 83
1018751N ceramic monolyth
C47, 1026365P metal polyester
72
C53, 65-67, 74-76
1026369U metal polyester
C77
1028394V ceramic
C78
1028347U ceramic
C79
1026345T
metal polyester
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100n
33u
10%
20%
100V
35V
KEMET CK06BX104K
SIEMENS B45170-E4336-M9
10n
10%
100V
VITRAMON CK05BX103K
1u
470n
10%
10%
50V
63V
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
WIMA MKS2
1u
22p
33p
10n
10%
5%
5%
10%
50V
100V
100V
63V
WIMA MKS2
VITRAMON VP12BA220J
VITRAMON VP12BA330J
WIMA MKS2
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D1
1030379C multiplexer
D2
3A72502
PLD monitor bus interface
D3, 6, 7, 12, 20, 21, 25
1033775U octal buffer
D4, 8, 16, 48
1035245R octal bus transceiver
D5, 22, 27
1028716V multiplexer
D9
4A72502
PLD monitor width counter
D10
5A72502
PLD monitor fall counter
D11
6A72502
PLD monitor rise counter
D13
7A72502
PLD monitor fault driver
D14, 1036477F
octal D-type latch
15
D17
8A72502
PLD pulse shape error counter 1
D18, 35, 38, 41, 42
1030185R dual precision monostable
D19
9A72502
PLD monitor clock 1
D23
10A72502 PLD pulse shape error counter 2
D24
11A72502 PLD monitor clock 2
D26
1032799H hex inverting Schmitt trigger
D28
1036595J
8-bit a/d converter
D29, 1036730F
hex non-inverting buffer
32
D30
12A72502 PLD monitor delay counter
D31
13A72502 PLD monitor spacing counter
D33
14A72502 PLD ident extraction
D34, 36, 39, 43
1030186T
BCD rate multiplier
D37
15A72502 PLD primary error counter
D40
17A72502 PLD monitor ident counter
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4053BD
3A72502
RCA CD74HC541E
TEXAS SN74HC245N
PHILIPS HEF4051BD
4A72502
5A72502
6A72502
7A72502
NATIONAL MM74HC573N
8A72502
PHILIPS HEF4538BD
9A72502
10A72502
11A72502
NATIONAL MM74HC14N
NATIONAL ADC0820BCD
NATIONAL MM74HC4050N
12A72502
13A72502
14A72502
PHILIPS HEF4527BD
15A72502
17A72502
F-11
HA72500
D44
D45
D46
D47
D49
D50
D51
1028410M
18A72502
1028749F
19A72502
20A72502
1033555E
16A72502
APPENDIX F
hex inverter
PLD monitor rate counter
quad 2-input NOR
PLD ident error counter
PLD monitor efficiency counter
hex inverter
PLD mon inhibit device driver
PHILIPS HEF4049BD
18A72502
PHILIPS HEF4001BD
19A72502
20A72502
PHILIPS PC74HCU04P
16A72502
DESCRIPTION
10.0 MHz QC-49
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HY-Q EE01C/QC49
DESCRIPTION
green LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3502-010
yellow LED
red LED
HP HLMP-3400-010
HP HLMP-3300-010
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
CODE
1028733N
INDICATORS
REF
CODE
H1-8, 1036586Z
13
H9, 11 1036587A
H10, 1036588B
12
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
N2, 7,
9
N3, 5
N4, 8
N6
CODE
1036584X
1036504K
DESCRIPTION
dual op amplifier
quad comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM239N
1036594H
1030766Y
1036593G
precision 5V reference
voltage regulator 1.2 to 33V
MAXIM REF02
NATIONAL LM150K
SGS-THOMSON LM217T
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 89 1020019R wire wound
R2, 52, 86, 100, 101
1008758B metal film
R3, 80, 85, 93,108
1008746N metal film
R4, 6, 7, 12, 15. 23, 24, 26, 68
1008739F
metal film
R5,
1008750T
metal film
57, 61
R8
1008773T
metal film
R9, 56, 71, 90-92, 94, 103
1008794Q metal film
R10, 1008720K metal film
20, 27
R11, 21, 22, 72, 73, 99
1029244U metal film
R13, 17, 41, 42, 44, 54, 77
1008774U metal film
R14
1008776W metal film
R16, 37, 38, 50
1008778Y metal film
R18
1008777X metal film
R19
1008802Z
metal film
R28, 29, 43, 75, 97
1008770P metal film
R30, 1008728U metal film
31
R32
1008768M metal film
R33
1008782C metal film
R34, 1036495A metal film
35
R36
1008780A metal film
R39, 1036496B metal film
46, 58
R40
1021552H metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3R3
5% 5W0
IRH ASW-5
3k32
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
511
1k5
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
13k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
100k
82R5
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
0R0
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
15k
18k2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
22k1
20k
221k
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
182
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
8k25
33k2
30k1
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
27k4
10k
10M
1% 0W4
0.1% 0W1
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
PHILIPS 2322-160-41003
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-12
HA72500
R45
1008763G
R47
1008751U
R48, 1008760D
49, 95
R51, 1008756Z
53
R55, 1008754X
98
R59, 69, 70,102
1021512P
R60
1008810H
R62
1008735B
R63
1008752V
R64, 1008764H
74
R65, 1008798V
66
R67, 78. 79, 83
1008786G
R76
1008795R
R81
1008761E
R82
1008749R
R84
1008733Z
R88
1008726R
R96
1021496X
R104, 1008730W
106
R105 1008755Y
R107 1008753W
APPENDIX F
metal film
metal film
metal film
5k11
1k62
3k92
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
2k74
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
2k21
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
1M
475k
365
1k82
5k62
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
150k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
47k5
110k
4k32
1k3
301
150
681k
221
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
2k43
2k0
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R87
CODE
1028760T
DESCRIPTION
Cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10k
10% 0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-103
RESISTORS, NETWORKS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
RN1-3, 22, 33, 34
1026493D SIP 10-pin
RN4, 1032352X SIP 10-pin
12, 18
RN5-10, 15, 16, 19, 26-29, 31, 32, 36-39
1036556R SIP 10-pin
RN13, 14, 17, 20, 23-25, 30
1028389P SIP 10-pin
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1kx9
47kx9
2%
2%
1W25
1W25
BOURNS 4310R-101-102
BOURNS 4610X-101-473
3k3x5
2%
1W25
BOURNS 4610-X-102-332
15kx9
2%
1W25
BOURNS 4310R-101-153
SWITCHES
REF
CODE
S1-4, 1026437T
S7-10
S12,
1036685G
13
S16
1036573K
DESCRIPTION
DIL SPST 8-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CTS 206-8-LPST
DIL SPST 10-way
CTS 206-10-LPST
toggle DPDT
C&K 7201-M-D9-A-B-E
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 4.
5
V2, 6
V3,
11, 12
V7
V8, 9
V10
CODE
1005279V
DESCRIPTION
zener diode 10V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS BZC79/C10
1026172E
1006793Q
low power PNP transistor

switching diode
PHILIPS 2N2907A
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
1030394U
1036408F
1004812M
zener diode 3V3

Schottky diode
rectifier diode
PHILIPS BZX79/B3V9
IRC 1N5818
IRC 1N4004
F-13
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XA1-5 1030153G
XN1
1036519B
XN2
1036522E
XT1-11, 14-16
1036570G
XT13 1036569F
F.5.15
DESCRIPTION
test jack
plug 96-way
header 20-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
SIEMENS V42254-B1400-C910
SIEMENS V23535-A2200-A200
test terminal white

test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 101

WILLIAM HUGHES 103
1A72512 Peak Power Monitor
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1, 2,
8
C3, 9
C4
C5, 11
C6, 7,
10
CODE
1036605V
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
1018751N
1026333E
1018878B
1036507N
ceramic monolyth
metal polyester
ceramic monolyth
electrolytic tantalum
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805 Q220 JXA-AB
1u
1n
100n
6u8
10%
10%
10%
20%
50V
100V
100V
35V
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
WIMA FKS2
VITRAMON CK06BX104K
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-3
N4
CODE
1036584X
1028415T
DESCRIPTION
dual operational amplifier
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM219J
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 31 1035042W chip
R2
1008776W metal film
R3
1008754X metal film
R4
1008742J
metal film
R5
1008781B metal film
R6
1008760D metal film
R7, 8, 19. 21, 22, 26-28
1008778Y metal film
R9, 12 1008698L
metal film
R10
1021545A metal film
R13
1008767L
metal film
R14
1008743K metal film
20
R29
1008714D metal film
R30
1035090Y chip
VALUE
110
18k2
2k21
681
30k1
3k92
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W25 ROHM MCR18X 1100F EZH
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
22k1
10
2M21
7k5
750
27k4
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
47R5
82k5
1%
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
0W125 ROHM MCR18X 823F EZH
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 2
V3
CODE
1019399T
1026172E
DESCRIPTION
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
PHILIPS 2N2907A
CONNECTORS
REF
XC1
XN2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1028757P coaxial SMA jack
72512-4-24 header 2-row 10-way
F.5.16
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72512-4-24
1A72513 Transponder Subrack
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72513-4-11 coaxial jack
72513-4-12 coaxial jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72513-4-11
72513-4-12
F-14
HA72500
F.5.17
APPENDIX F
1A72514 Test Interrogator
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
CODE
1A72515
1A72516
1A69737
1A72518
1A72519
DESCRIPTION
RF Generator
Attenuator
Reply Detector
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72515
1A72516
1A69737
1A72518
1A72519
DESCRIPTION
fixed coaxial 50 ohms SMA 20dB
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MICROLAB/FXR AG-20F
MICROLAB/FXR AG-30F
ATTENUATORS
QTY
1
1
CODE
1030202K
1030203L
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
1
1
CODE
72514-4-12
72514-4-13
72514-4-14
72514-4-16
F.5.18
DESCRIPTION
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
single
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72514-4-12
72514-4-13
72514-4-14
72514-4-16
1A72515 Test Interrogator Main PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
C1, 48, 61, 74, 77
1004863T
ceramic monolyth
10n
C2, 3, 5, 7, 14, 16, 18-27, 29, 30, 32-41, 43, 45-47,
49-52, 55, 57-60, 62-71, 78
100n
C4
1026352A metal polyester
33n
C6, 17 1030190X ceramic
100p
C8
1036506M electrolytic tantalum
33u
C9
1026365P metal polyester
470n
C10, 1036508P electrolytic tantalum
33u
11
C12, 1026369U electrolytic tantalum
1u
79
C13
1036507N electrolytic tantalum
6u8
C15
1026350Y metal polyester
22n
C31, 1028735Q ceramic monolyth
330p
76
C42
1028736R ceramic monolyth
470p
C44, 1028893M ceramic
150p
75
C56
1026354C metal polyester
47n
C72
1028394V ceramic
22p
C73
1028347U ceramic
33p
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10%
100V
VITRAMON CK05BX103K
10%
10%
5%
20%
10%
20%
100V
63V
100V
35V
63V
10V
KEMET CK06BX104K
WIMA MKS2
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
WIMA MKS2
SIEMENS B45170-A1336-M9
10%
50V
WIMA MKS2
20%
10%
10%
35V
63V
100V
WIMA MKS2
PHILIPS 2222-630-08331
10%
5%
100V
100V
PHILIPS 2222-630-08471
PHILIPS 2222-678-34151
10%
5%
5%
63V
100V
100V
WIMA MKS2
VITRAMON VP12BA220J
VITRAMON VP12BA330J
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
CODE
D1, 4, 1028747D
17
D2, 5, 1028375Z
29, 38
1028741X
D3,
18, 40
D6, 41 1030379C
D8, 42 1028716V
D10, 20, 36, 50
1036730F
D12, 1033775U
25, 27
DESCRIPTION
1-64 bit shift register
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4557BD
dual monostable
PHILIPS HEF4528BD
4-bit decimal counter
PHILIPS HEF40160BD
multiplexer
multiplexer
PHILIPS HEF4053BD
PHILIPS HEF4051BD
hex buffer
octal non-inverting buffer
NATIONAL MM74HC4050N
RCA CD74HC541E
F-15
HA72500
D13,
14, 24
D15
D16,
47
D19
D21,
32, 49
D26
D28
D30
D31
D33
D34,
35
D37
D39
D4346
D48
D51,
52
APPENDIX F
1036477F
octal D latch
NATIONAL MM74HC573N
1035245R
1032799H
octal bus transceiver

hex inverting Schmitt trigger
TEXAS SN74HC245N
NATIONAL MM74HC14N
1028402D
1036729E
quad 2-input NAND

hex inverter
PHILIPS HEF4011BD
NATIONAL MM74HC4049
22A72502
1028743Z
1028401C
1028379D
21A72502
1036502H
PLD TI bus interface

8-input tristate multiplexer
quad XOR
dual JK flip-flop
PLD TI timer counter
programmable interval timer
22A72502
PHILIPS HEF4512BD
PHILIPS HEF4070BD
PHILIPS HEF4027BD
21A72502
INTEL TP82C54-2
1028409L
1028378C
1036551L
hex Schmitt trigger

BCD up/down counter
4-bit BCD down counter
PHILIPS HEF40106BD
PHILIPS HEF4510BD
PHILIPS HEF4522BD
1028749F
1028410M
quad 2-input NOR

hex inverter
PHILIPS HEF4001BD
PHILIPS HEF4049BD
DESCRIPTION
10.0 MHz
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HY-Q EE01C/QC49
DESCRIPTION
red LED
green LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3300-010
HP HLMP-3502-010
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
CODE
1028733N
INDICATORS
REF
H1
H2
CODE
1036588B
1036586Z
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
N2
N3
N4-7
CODE
1036118Q
1036554P
1028415T
1036504K
DESCRIPTION
voltage regulator +15V
dual comparator
quad comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM140AK-15
MOTOROLA LM140AK-5.0
NATIONAL LM219J
NATIONAL LM239N
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 19, 45, 47, 60, 61
1008746N metal film
R2, 4, 14, 18, 25
1008762F
metal film
R3,
1008738E metal film
11, 52
R5, 6 1036496B metal film
R8
1036576N wire wound
R9
1036578Q wire wound
R10
1008766K metal film
R18, 1008754X metal film
24, 44
R20, 21, 30, 57
1008786G metal film
R22
1008743K metal film
R23, 1008748Q metal film
51
R36
1008790L
metal film
R27
1008798V metal film
R28, 1008752V metal film
59
R29
1008735B metal film
R31, 1008764H metal film
43
R32
1008761E metal film
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
4k75
475
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
6R8
68
6k81
2k21
0.1%
5%
5%
1%
1%
0W1
6W5
6W5
0W4
0W4
PHILIPS 2322-160-41003
IRH ASW-5
IRH ASW-5
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
47k5
750
1k21
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
68k1
150k
1k82
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
365
5k62
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
4k32
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-16
HA72500
R36, 1008770P
37, 53
R38
1008782C
R40, 41, 49, 54, 55
1008774U
R42
1008758B
R48
1008794Q
R56
1008767L
R62
1021512P
APPENDIX F
metal film
10k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
33k2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
15k
3k32
100k
7k5
1M
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R7
CODE
1028760T
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-103
RESISTOR NETWORKS
REF
CODE
RN1, 2, 4, 10
1036531P
RN3, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15
1028389P
RN5, 1036555Q
11, 17
RN7, 1032352X
13, 14
RN16 1036532Q
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SIP 8-pin
1kx4
2%
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-102
SIP 10-pin
SIP 8-pin
15kx9
100x4
2%
2%
1W25
1W
BOURNS 4310R-101-153
BOURNS 4608X-102-101
SIP 10-pin
47kx9
2%
1W
BOURNS 4610X-101-473
SIP 8-pin
15kx4
2%
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-153
SWITCHES
REF
S1
S2, 3
S4
S5, 6
S7
CODE
1036572J
1036499E
1030651Y
1036500F
1036501G
DESCRIPTION
pushbutton DPDT
toggle DPDT centre off
slide SPDT
rotary hex coded
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 8225-S-D9-A-B-E
C&K 7205-S-D9-A-B-E
C&K 1101-M2-S3-CB-E
ELMA 07-4153
C&K 7203-M-D9-A-B-E
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 4,
9
V2
V3
V5, 7,
8, 15
V6, 14
V1012
V13
CODE
1026171D
DESCRIPTION
low power NPN transistor
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 2N2222A
1030231R
1026172E
1036408F
high power NPN transistor

rectifier diode
MOTOROLA 2N6488
PHILIPS 2N2907A
MOTOROLA 1N5818
1004812M
1006793Q
rectifier diode
switching diode
IRC 1N4004
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
1030394U
zener diode
PHILIPS BZX79/B3V9
DESCRIPTION
test jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
plug 96-way
header 20-way
test terminal white

test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 101

WILLIAM HUGHES 103
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XA1- 1030153G
13
XN
1036519B
XN2
1036522E
XT1-4, 6-12
1036570G
XT5, 1036569F
13
F-17
HA72500
F.5.19
APPENDIX F
1A72516 RF Generator
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1, 5, 1028736R ceramic monolyth
11
C2, 12 1030189W ceramic
C3
1028928A ceramic
C4
1026345T
metal polyester
C6, 24-28, 35
1036605V ceramic chip
C7
1030188V ceramic
C8,
33, 37
C9
C13, 15, 16, 19, 20, 32
1030190X ceramic
C17, 1030211V ceramic
36
23
C29
1033084T
ceramic chip
C30
1030214Y ceramic chip
C34
1033436A ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
470p 10% 100V PHILIPS 2222-630-08471
10p
15p
10n
5%
5%
10%
100V
100V
63V
PHILIPS 2222-678-10109
VITRAMON VP12BA150JB
WIMA MKS2
22p
1n
100n
5%
10%
10%
50v
100V
100V
VITRAMON VJ0805
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
KEMET CK06BX104K
470n
10%
63V
WIMA MKS2
100p
2p2
5%
0p25
100V
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
PHILIPS 2222-680-09228
1p
0p25
100V
PHLIPS 2222-678-03108
10n
5p6
100p
10%
nom
5%
50V
50V
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805Y103KXAMT
VITRAMON 7800P7G02F
VITRAMON VJ0805A101JXAMT
CAPACITORS, VARIABLE
REF
C10
C14
C18
CODE
1005194C
1005195D
1028813A
DESCRIPTION
PTFE film
PTFE film
trimmer
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2-18p
300V PHILIPS 2222-809-05003
1p8-10p
500V PHILIPS 2222-809-05002
0p6-4p5
JOHANSON GIGATRIM 7273
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
L2
L3
L4
L6, 7
CODE
57973V284
57973V285
72516-4-27
72516-4-28
1025352N
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
0u39
0W17
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57973V284
57973V285
72516-4-27
72516-4-28
MILLER 9230-10
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1, 14
R2,
12, 13
R3
R4, 19
R5, 9,
17, 26
R6
R7
R8,
33, 34
R10,
29, 30
R11
R13
R15,
24
R16,
18
R18,
22
R20
R21
R23
CODE
1008762F
1008754X
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
4k75
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k21
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008714D
1008752V
1008734A
metal film
metal film
metal film
47R5
1k82
332
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008742J
1008770P
1008698L
metal film
metal film
metal film
681
10k
10
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008746N
metal film
1k0
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008766K
1008730W
1008750T
metal film
metal film
metal film
6k81
221
1k5
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008758B
metal film
3k32
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008722M
metal film
100
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008774U
1008756Z
1008784E
metal film
metal film
metal film
15k
2k74
39k2
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-18
HA72500
R25,
27
R31
APPENDIX F
1008706V
metal film
22R1
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008726R
metal film
150
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SWITCHES
REF
S1
CODE
1027485G
DESCRIPTION
slide SPST DIP
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CTS 206-006-LPST
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1-5
V6
V7
V8
V9
V10
V11,
12
CODE
906654U
1027618B
1033538L
1026172E
1019399T
1026171D
1006793Q
DESCRIPTION
NPN transistor
HF amplifier NPN
transistor microwave
NPN transistor
hot carrier diode
NPN transistor
switching diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA 2N2857
MOTOROLA MRF901
AVANTEK AT-01635
PHILIPS 2N2907A
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
PHILIPS 2N2222A
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
DESCRIPTION
jack
test terminal white
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XS1-6 1028758Q
XT1-4 1036570G
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72552-4-06 coaxial
F.5.20
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72552-4-06
1A72517 RF Filter
REF
C1, 2
CODE
1030213X
DESCRIPTION
trimmer
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0P8-8p
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
L2
CODE
72517-4-08
72517-4-09
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72517-4-08
72517-4-09
CONNECTORS
REF
XC1
XC2
CODE
1028851R
1028908D
F.5.21
DESCRIPTION
coaxial SMA receptacle
stripline launcher SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 13SMA-50-0-52/199
SUHNER 23SMA-50-0-52/199
1A72518 Modulator and Detector
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1, 3, 4, 7, 14, 25
1030188V ceramic
C2, 9 1018751N ceramic monolyth
C5, 6, 10, 12, 13, 16, 18, 19, 23, 24
C11
C15, 1036507N electrolytic tantalum
20, 22
C17
1026339L
metal polyester
C21
1030190X ceramic
C26- 1036633A ceramic feedthru
31
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1n
1u
10%
10%
100V
50V
PHILIPS 2222-630-01802
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
100n
470n
6u8
10%
10%
20%
100V
63V
35V
KEMET CK06BX104K
WIMA MKS2
3n3
100p
100p
10%
5%
80%
100V
100V
100V
WIMA FKS2
VITRAMON VP12ABA101J
SPECTRUM 5471300X5F101M
F-19
HA72500
APPENDIX F
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D1
D2
CODE
1028749F
1028754L
DESCRIPTION
quad 2-input NOR
analogue mux/demux
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4001BD
PHILIPS HEF4052BD
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-4
N5, 6
CODE
1036584X
1028415T
DESCRIPTION
dual operational amplifier
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM219J
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
R1
1008710Z
R2
1008792N
R3
1008776W
R4
1008781B
R5
1008760D
R6
1008756Z
R7
1008742J
R8,
1008778Y
25, 28
R9
1008781B
R10, 23, 24, 38
1008762F
R11
1008767L
R12
1008743K
R14, 1008746N
32, 51
R15
1008768M
R16, 21, 22, 31
1008774U
R17
1021545A
R18
1021512P
R19
1008750T
R26, 1008789K
27
R29
1008757A
R30
1008754X
R33
1008770P
R34, 39, 43, 47
1008722M
R35
1008772R
R36, 1008714D
52
R40, 42, 44, 45, 50
1008738E
R41
1008736C
R46, 1008758B
48
R49
1008786G
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
33R2
82k5
18k2
30k1
3k92
2k74
681
22k1
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
30k1
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
475
7k5
750
1k
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
8k25
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
15k
2M21
1M
1k5
61k9
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
3K01
2K21
10k
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
100
12k1
47R5
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
475
392
3k32
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
47k5
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R13,
37
R20
CODE
1028756N
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1 -turn
1028760T
cermet 1 -turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-202
10k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-303
SWITCHES
REF
S1
CODE
1030651Y
DESCRIPTION
slide SPDT
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 1101-M2-S3-CB-E
F-20
HA72500
APPENDIX F
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
V2
V3,
10-12
V5, 9
CODE
1019399T
1026172E
1026171D
DESCRIPTION
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
PHILIPS 2N2907A
PHILIPS 2N2222A
1006793Q
switching diode
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
DESCRIPTION
jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
test terminal white

test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 101

WILLIAM HUGHES 103
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XS1- 1028758Q
14
XT1-4 1036570G
XT5, 6 1036569F
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
6
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72518-4-15 7-way D-Type
72518-3-29 20-way ribbon
F.5.22
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72518-4-15
72518-3-29
1A72519 Reply Detector
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1, 2, 1036605V
11
C3, 10 1018751N
C4
1026333E
C5, 7, 8, 12, 13
1018878B
C6
1036507N
C9
1030188V
C14, 1030190X
15
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
ceramic monolyth
metal polyester
ceramic monolyth
ceramic
ceramic
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805-Q220-JXA-AB
1u
1n
10%
10%
50V
100v
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
WIMA FKS2
100n
6u8
1n
100p
10%
20%
10%
5%
100V
35V
100v
100V
KEMET CK06BX104K
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D1
D2
D3
CODE
1030379C
1036596K
1028749F
DESCRIPTION
multiplexer
quad XOR
quad 2-input NOR
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4053BD
PHILIPS HEF4077BD
PHILIPS HEF4001BD
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-3
N4, 5
CODE
1036584X
1028415T
DESCRIPTION
dual op amplifier
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM219J
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1, 22
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7-9,
18-21
R10
R11,
14
R12,
13
R1517
CODE
1035042W
1008776W
1008748Q
1008734A
1008781B
1008760D
1008778Y
DESCRIPTION
chip
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
110
18k2
1k21
332
30k1
3k92
22k1
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1% 0W125 ROHM MCR18X 1100F EZH
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1021545A
1008747P
metal film
metal film
2M21
1k1
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008761E
metal film
4k32
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008746N
metal film
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-21
HA72500
R23,
25
R24
R26
R27,
28
R29
R30
R31
APPENDIX F
1008698L
metal film
10
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008767L
1036694R
1008754X
metal film
metal film
metal film
7k5
4M7
2K21
1%
5%
1%
0W4
0W5
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
PHILIPS 2322-186-13475
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1008714D
1035090Y
1008743K
metal film
chip
metal film
47R5
82k5
750
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W125
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROHM MCR18X 823F EZH
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 2
V3
CODE
1019399T
1026172E
DESCRIPTION
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
PHILIPS 2N2907A
DESCRIPTION
coaxial jack SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CONNECTORS
REF
XC1
CODE
1028757P
F.5.23
1A72520 Receiver Video
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
CODE
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72517
DESCRIPTION
RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
RF Filter
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
1A72517
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
1
1
1
CODE
72520-4-14
72520-4-15
72520-4-16
72520-4-21
72520-4-18
F.5.24
DESCRIPTION
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
ribbon 20-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72520-4-14
72520-4-15
72520-4-16
72520-4-21
72520-4-18
1A72521 Receiver Video Main PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
C1, 3-12, 16-20, 23, 28-32, 34-37, 40-42, 44-47, 49-51, 53-55,
58-62, 66, 68-74, 76-78, 80-90, 92, 99, 100
100n 10% 100V
C2, 15, 21, 33, 52, 79
1030190X ceramic
100p
5%
100V
C13, 1028347U ceramic
33p
5%
100V
14
C22, 48, 57, 97, 98
1026345T
metal polyester
10n
10%
63V
C24, 26, 27, 39, 43
1028882A ceramic monolyth
220p 10% 100V
C25
1030188V ceramic
1n
10% 100V
C38
470n 10%
63V
C63, 1036506M electrolytic tantalum
33u
20%
35V
64, 67
C75, 1036507N electrolytic tantalum
6u8
20%
35V
91
C93, 1026369U electrolytic tantalum
1u
10%
50V
95, 96
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
KEMET CK06BX104K
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
VITRAMON VP12BA330J
WIMA MKS2
PHILIPS 2222-630-08221
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
WIMA MKS2
WIMA MKS2
F-22
HA72500
APPENDIX F
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D1
1028410M hex inverter
D2, 3, 14, 20, 35
1028375Z
dual monostable
D4
1028382G tristate hex inverter
D5, 6, 1028376A 4-bit up/down binary counter
18
D8
1028775J
14-stage fipple carry counter
D9, 28 1028749F
quad 2-input NOR
D10
1030185R dual precision monostable
D11, 29, 30, 36, 39, 40, 43, 46
1028407J
4-bit binary down counter
D12
1028754L
analogue mux/demux
D13, 21-25, 31-34, 42
1028747D 1-64 bit shift register
D15
1028887F
8-bit static shift register
D16
1028744A 5-stage Johnson counter
D17
1028475B quad 2-input NAND
D19
1030379C multiplexer
D26, 1028885D dual D flip-flop
48
D27, 41, 52, 53
1028402D quad 2-input NAND
D37, 45, 47, 50
1028716V multiplexer
D38
57945V48 delay line
D44
1030546J
dual timer
D49
1028886E 12-stage binary counter
D51
1028379D dual JK flip-flop
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4049BD
PHILIPS HEF4528BD
PHILIPS HEF40098BD
PHILIPS HEF40193BD
PHILIPS HEF4060BD
PHILIPS HEF4001BD
PHILIPS HEF4538BD
PHILIPS HEF4526BD
PHILIPS HEF4052BD
PHILIPS HEF4557BD
PHILIPS HEF4021BD
PHILIPS HEF4017BD
PHILIPS HEF4093BD
PHILIPS HEF4053BD
PHILIPS HEF4013BD
PHILIPS HEF4011BD
PHILIPS HEF4051BD
57945V48
NATIONAL LM556J
PHILIPS HEF4040BD
PHILIPS HEF4027BD
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
CODE
1028884C
DESCRIPTION
5.5296 MHz
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HY-Q EE01C/QC18
DESCRIPTION
yellow LED
red LED
green LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3400-010
HP HLMP-3300-010
HP HLMP-3502-010
INDICATORS
REF
H1
H2
H3
CODE
1036587A
1036588B
1036586Z
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
N2-4
N5, 8
N6, 7,
10
CODE
1036118Q
1036504K
1028415T
1036584X
DESCRIPTION
quad comparator
dual comparator
dual op amplifier
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM140AK-15
NATIONAL LM239N
NATIONAL LM219J
RCA CA3240AE
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
R1, 2, 9, 10, 26, 33, 41, 42, 47, 60, 70, 71, 79, 80
1008746N metal film
1k
R3, 5, 7, 53, 54, 59
1008794Q metal film
100k
R4
1008799W metal film
162k
R6
1008780A metal film
27k4
R8,
1008722M metal film
100
11, 21
R12
1008778Y metal film
22k1
R13, 1008786G metal film
47k5
62, 63
150k
17,29
R15, 18, 19, 32, 55, 72, 74, 81
1008774U metal film
15k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-23
HA72500
APPENDIX F

75,
76, 82
R20, 23, 34, 51, 66-68
1008770P metal film
R22, 1008788J
metal film
69
R24, 40, 43, 50
1008764H metal film
R25
1008760D metal film
R27
1008752V metal film
R28
1008735B metal film
R31
1008782C metal film
R35
1008748Q metal film
R36
1008732Y metal film
R38
1008803A metal film
R44
1008736C metal film
R48
1008740G metal film
R49
1008756Z
metal film
61
R56, 1008762F
metal film
57, 64
R58
1008754X metal film
R65
1008768M metal film
R73
1036576N wire wound
78
475k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
56k2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
5k62
3k92
1k82
365
33k2
1k21
274
243k
392
562
2k74
3k32
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
4k75
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k21
8k25
6R8
1k82
1%
1%
5%
1%
0W4
0W4
6W5
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
IRH ASW-5
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R37
R39
R45,
46
CODE
1030146Z
1030542E
1028760T
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1-turn
cermet 1-turn
cermet 1-turn
VALUE
100k
1M
10k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10%
0W5
BECKMAN 72PMR100K
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-105
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-103
RESISTOR NETWORKS
REF
CODE
RN1-2, 6, 13-16
1028389P
RN3, 1036532Q
7-12
RN4
1036531P
RN5
1041467E
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SIP 10-pin
SIP 8-pin
15kx9
15kx4
2%
2%
1W25
1W
BOURNS 4310R-101-153
BOURN S 4608X-102-153
SIP 8-pin
SIP 8-pin
1kx4
4k7x4
2%
2%
1W
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-102
BOURNS 4608X-104-104
SWITCHES
REF
S1-3
S4, 5,
8, 9
S6, 7
S11
S12
S1316
CODE
1036500F
1030651Y
DESCRIPTION
rotary hex coded
slide SPDT
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ELMA 07-4153
C&K 110 -M2-S3-CB-E
1036520C
1036501G
1036499E
1026437T
rotary hex coded

DIL SPST 8-way
SIEMENS C42315-A1353-A10
C&K 7203-M-D9-A-B-E
C&K 7205-S-D9-A-B-E
CTS 206-8-LPST
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
V1-10, 13,16-21
1006793Q
V11
1030394U
V14
1026171D
V15
1026172E
V22
1006326H
DESCRIPTION
switching diode
zener diode 3V3
zener diode 5V6
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
PHILIPS BZX79/B3V9
PHILIPS 2N2222A
PHILIPS 2N2907A
PHILIPS BZX79/C5V6
F-24
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
XA1- 1030153G test jack
13
XN1
1036519B plug 96-way
XN2
1036522E header 20-way
XT1-14, 16, 18-20, 22-26
1036570G test terminal white
XT15, 1036569F
test terminal black
17, 21
F.5.25
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
1A72522 RF Source
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1, 6 1028736R
C2
1030189W
C3
1004836T
C5,
1018878B
28, 29
C7
1030188V
C9
1028736R
C10
1028347U
C11
1028928A
C13, 14, 17, 19, 22
1030190X
C15, 1030211V
20
C22, 1036605V
24, 25
C23
1028930C
C27
1036651V
C31
1033436A
C32
1032940L
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
ceramic
ceramic monolyth
ceramic monolyth
VALUE
470p
10p
10n
100n
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10% 100V PHILIPS 2222-630-08471
5%
100V PHILIPS 2222-678-10109
10% 100V VITRAMON CK05BX103K
10% 100V KEMET CK06BX104K
ceramic
ceramic monolyth
ceramic
ceramic
1n
470p
33p
15p
10%
10%
5%
5%
100V
100V
100V
100V
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
PHILIPS 2222-630-08471
VITRAMON VP12BA330J
ceramic
ceramic
100p
2p2
5%
0p25
100V
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
PHILIPS 2222-680-09228
ceramic chip
22p
5%
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805Q220JXA-AB
ceramic
ceramic
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
3p3
1p
100p
10p
0p25
0p25
5%
5%
100V
100V
50V
50V
PHILIPS 2222-678-09338
PHILIPS 2222-678-03108
MURATA GR40-C06-101J-50V-M6
VITRAMON VJ0805-A100-JXAMT
REF
C8
C12
C18,
26
CODE
1005194C
1005195D
1030213X
DESCRIPTION
PTFE film
PTFE film
trimmer
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2-18p
300V PHILIPS 2222-809-05003
1p8-10p
500V PHILIPS 2222-809-05002
0p8JOHANSON GIGATRIM 27293
8p0
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Frequency is determined by DME operating
channel. Refer to crystal specification in
Appendix N.
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
CODE
57973V284
57973V285
72522-4-32
69734-4-17
69734-4-18
405355D
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
0u82
0W25
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57973V284
57973V285
72522-4-32
69734-4-17
69734-4-18
MILLER 9310-10
F-25
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1
1008752V metal film
R2
1008762F
metal film
R3, 9 1008754X metal film
R4
1008742J
metal film
R5, 12, 13, 17, 20, 22
1008734A metal film
R6
1008746N metal film
R7, 16 1008730W metal film
R8
1008766K metal film
R10
1008758B metal film
R11
1008722M metal film
R14, 1008770P metal film
18, 24
R15
1008756Z
metal film
R19
1008750T
metal film
R21
1008726R metal film
R23
1008714D metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1k82
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
4k75
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k21
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
681
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
332
1k
221
6k81
3k32
100
10k
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k74
1k5
150
47R5
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1-4
V5
CODE
906654U
1027618B
DESCRIPTION
HF amplifier NPN
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA 2N2857
MOTOROLA MRF901
CONNECTORS
REF/
CODE
DESCRIPTION
QTY
XS1, 1028758Q jack
2
XT1-4 1036570G test terminal white
1
72522-4-06 connector assembly
F.5.26
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
72522-4-06
1A72523 IF Amplifier
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C2
1028347U ceramic
C3, 7, 13, 14, 16, 26
1030188V ceramic
C4, 8, 9, 12, 24, 25, 34
1004863T
ceramic monolyth
C5, 36 1028736R ceramic monolyth
C6
1016718D ceramic
C10
1033436A ceramic chip
C11
1028882A ceramic monolyth
C15
1029308N ceramic chip
C17, 21, 22, 27, 35
1018751N ceramic monolyth
C18
1036508P electrolytic tantalum
C19
1028893M ceramic
C20
1026358G metal polyester
C23, 28, 30, 32, 33
C29
1017579P ceramic
C31
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
33p
5%
100V VITRAMON VP12BA330J
1n
10%
100V
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
10n
470p
12p
100p
220p
470p
10%
10%
2%
5%
10%
10%
100V
100V
100V
50V
100V
50V
VITRAMON CK05BX103K
PHILIPS 2222-630-08471
PHILIPS 2222-632-10129
PHILIPS 2222-630-08221
VITRAMON VJ0805-A471-KXAMT
1u
33u
150p
100n
10%
20%
5%
10%
50V
25V
100V
63V
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
PHILIPS 2222-678-34151
WIMA MKS2
100n
47p
6u8
10%
2%
20%
100V
100V
35V
KEMET CK06BX104K
PHILIPS 2222-632-10479
SIEMENS 1345170-E4685-M9
REF
C1
CODE
1005194C
DESCRIPTION
PTFE film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2-18p
300V PHILIPS 2222-809-05003
F-26
HA72500
APPENDIX F
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D1
CODE
57945V48
DESCRIPTION
delay line
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57945V48
DESCRIPTION
53.75 MHz third overtone
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HY-Q EE04S HC-18/U
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
CODE
1028897R
INDUCTORS
REF
L1, 8
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L9
L10
CODE
1030131H
1036668N
72523-3-37
72523-3-28
57998V481
57998V486
72523-3-38
1036710J
1036711K
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
6u8H 10%
MILLER 9310-32
0u1H 10%
CAMBION 550-3399-01
72523-3-37
72523-3-28
57998V481
57998V486
72523-3-38
2u2H 10%
CAMBION 550-3399-17
0u47H 10%
CAMBION 550-3399-09
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-8
N9
N10
N11
CODE
1028894N
1036584X
1028415T
1036593G
DESCRIPTION
log amplifier
dual op amplifier
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PLESSEY SL521CCM
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM219J
SGS-THOMSON LM217T
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 4 1008722M metal film
R2
1008708X metal film
R3
1008736C metal film
R5, 47 1008770P metal film
R7, 8, 31, 34, 44, 48, 51
1008746N metal film
R6, 19, 35, 45
1008738E metal film
R9
1008766K metal film
R10, 1008732Y metal film
14
R11
1008756Z
metal film
R12. 17, 20, 23, 28, 38, 41, 46, 49
1008794Q metal film
R13, 18, 36, 54
1008774U metal film
R16
1008810H metal film
R21, 1008776W metal film
40
R22
1008801Y metal film
R24
1008778Y metal film
R25
1008763G metal film
R26
1008730W metal film
R27
1008743K metal film
R30, 1008750T
metal film
42
R32
1008753W metal film
R33
1036715P temp dependent NTC
R37
1008804B metal film
R39
1008790L
metal film
R43
1008758B metal film
R52
1008726R metal film
R53
1008754X metal film
R55
1008773T
metal film
R56
1008727T
metal film
R57
1008741H metal film
R58
1033316V chip
VALUE
100
27R4
392
10k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
475
6k81
274
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k74
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
100k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
15k
475k
18k2
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
200k
22k1
5k11
221
750
1k5
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k
5k
274k
68k1
3k32
150
2k21
13k0
162
619
0R0
1%
5%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W1
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
W60
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
PHILIPS 2322-645-03502
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ALLEN-BRADLEY BCX0000JT
F-27
HA72500
R59,
60
R61
APPENDIX F
1032675Y
chip
221
1%
0W125 ROHM MCR 18X-221F-EZH
1008802Z
metal film
221k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R15,
50
R29
CODE
1018646Z
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1-turn
1028877V
cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
5k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-502
1k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-102
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 2
V3, 6
V4
V5
CODE
1043550U
1006678Q
906441M
1026171D
DESCRIPTION
transistor dual gate MOSFET
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
TEMIC BF964S
HP 5082-2800
NATIONAL 2N918
PHILIPS 2N2222A
CODE
10288989T
1036629W
72523-4-29
1036570G
DESCRIPTION
header 10-way
header
test terminal white
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 82SMA-50-0-1/111
VARELCO 00-8289-010-006-1-1-3
72523-4-29
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
1036569F
test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
CONNECTORS
REF
XC1
XN1
XN2
XT1,
3-13
XT2
F.5.27
1A72524 RF Amplifier
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1, 8, 1036605V ceramic chip
13, 19
C2
1038980B ceramic chip
C3-5, 10,11, 17,18, 20, 21
1029308N ceramic chip
C6
C7
227739T
C9
1032956D ceramic chip
C12
1032937H ceramic chip
C14
C15
1029310Q ceramic chip
C17
C22- 1036632Z ceramic feedthru
24
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
VITRAMON VJ0805-Q220-JXAAB
2p7
0p25
50V
VITRAMON VP0805Q-2R7-CXA
470p 10%.
6u8
20%
1u
10%
1p
0p25
2p2 0p25
100n 10%
3p
0p25
22p
5%
1n
100%
50V
35V
50V
50V
50V
100V
100V
50V
100V
KEMET T110A105K35AS
MURATA GRM40COG1ROC50V
VITRAMON VJ0805-A2R2-CXAMT
KEMET CKO6BX104K
VITRAMON VJ0805-A3RO-CXB
VITRAMON VJ0805-Q220JXAT
SPECTRUM 54713001X5U102P
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1
R2, 5
R3
R4, 6
R7, 8
R9-12
R13
R14
CODE
1008728U
1008734A
1008735B
1008727T
1032671U
1008770P
1032960H
2000267D
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
chip
metal film
chip
chip
VALUE
182
332
365
162
100
10k
121
15
TOL
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
2%
RATING
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W125
0W4
0W125
0W125
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2162RF.E
ROHM MCR18X-101F
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROHM MCR18X-121F
PHILIPS 2322-712-20159
MODULATORS
REF
U1
CODE
1029313U
DESCRIPTION
double balanced mixer
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MINI-CIRCUITS TFM-12
F-28
HA72500
APPENDIX F
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
V2
V3, 6
V4
V5
V7, 8
V9
CODE
1033634Q
1036581U
1006793Q
1033634Q
1036581U
1019399T
1005279V
DESCRIPTION
low noise NPN transistor
zener diode 7V5
switching diode
transistor microwave
zener diode 7V5 5%
hot carrier diode
zener diode 10V0
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
VSI AT-41435
PHILIPS BZX79/C7V5
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
AVANTEK AT-41435-3
PHILIPS BZX79/C7V5/143
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
PHILIPS BZX79/C10
DESCRIPTION
wireline coupler
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
69742-4-20
DESCRIPTION
jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 82SMA-50-0-1/111
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
RF DEVICES
REF
W1
CODE
1030238Z
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XC2-4 1028898T
XS1-4 1028758Q
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72524-4-06 coaxial connector assembly
F.5.28
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72524-4-06
1A72525 Transponder Power Supply
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72526
F.5.29
DESCRIPTION
Main PWB Assembly, Transponder Power
Supply
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72526
1A72526 Transponder Power Supply Main PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1, 2 1036539Y
C3, 11, 13, 21
1018878B
C4, 6, 1036490V
12
C5, 7, 9, 16, 18, 25
1026358G
C8, 17 1036506M
C10, 1036537W
20
C15
1026337J
C19
1036536V
C22, 1036508P
23
C24
1042217V
C26
1036507N
C27
1026347V
C28
1030188V
DESCRIPTION
electrolytic aluminium
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3m3 50% 100V PHILIPS 2222-114-19332
ceramic monolyth
100n
15u
10%
20%
100V
63V
KEMET CK06BX104K
metal polyester
100n
33u
220u
10%
20%
50%
63V
35V
100V
WIMA MKS2
SIEMENS B41588-D9227-T
metal polyester
2n2
100u
33u
10%
50%
20%
100V
100V
10V
WIMA FKS2
SIEMENS B41588-E9107-T
metal polyester
metal polyester
ceramic
10n
6u8
15n
1n
10%
20%
10%
10%
63V
35V
63V
100V
ROEDERSTEIN MKT-2
WIMA MKS2
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
INDICATORS
REF
H1
H2
CODE
1036586Z
1036588B
DESCRIPTION
green LED
red LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3502-010
HP HLMP-3300-010
DESCRIPTION
flatpack 2 C/O contacts
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL NCED-JP-DC24V
RELAYS
REF
K1
CODE
1028795F
F-29
HA72500
APPENDIX F
INDUCTORS
REF
L1, 3,
4
L2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
57973V286 80uH
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57973V286
2LE65378
2LE65378
11uH
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
CODE
1028204N
DESCRIPTION
regulator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM3524N
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
R1
1036493Y
R2
1008770P
R3
1036575M
R4
1036580T
R5, 31 1036574L
R6, 24 1008757A
R7
1008756Z
R8, 9 1036495A
R10, 1008772R
11
R12
1008732Y
R13- 1036496B
15
R16, 1008764H
29
R17
1008742J
R18, 38, 42, 43
1008758B
R19
1008796T
R20, 1021549E
21
R23
1008774U
R25, 1008754X
36
R27
1008771Q
R28
1004228C
R30, 34, 35, 39
1008762F
R32
1008722M
R33
1008698L
R37
1008748Q
R40
R41, 1008746N
45
R44
1008798V
R46
1021512P
R47
1008732Y
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
wire wound
wire wound
wire wound
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
110k
10k
1R5
4k7
0R1
3k01
2k74
30k1
12k1
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0.1% 0W1
PHILIPS 2322-160-41104
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
5%
3W
DALE RS-2C1R5
5%
3W
DALE RS-2C4K7
5%
3W
DALE RS-2C0R1
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
0.1% 0W1
PHILIPS 2322-160-43013
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
274
10k
1%
0.1%
0W4
0W1
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
PHILIPS 2322-160-41003
metal film
5k62
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
681
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
3k32
121k
3R32
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
15k
2k21
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal oxide
11k
2k2
1%
10%
0W4
2W
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK5
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
select on test
metal film
4k75
100
10
1k21
1%
1%
1%
1%
1k
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
150k
1M
274
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R26
CODE
1018646Z
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1 -turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
5k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-502
RESISTORS, NETWORKS
REF
RN1,
2
CODE
1036531P
DESCRIPTION
SIP 8-pin
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1kx4
2%
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-102
SWITCHES
REF
S1
CODE
1036501G
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 7203-M-D9-A-B-E
F-30
HA72500
APPENDIX F
TRANSFORMERS
REF
T1
CODE
57997V741
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57997V741
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
V1
1036118Q
V2-4, 11, 20, 21, 26
1026171D
V5, 7, 8, 18, 25
1026172E
V6
1005272M
V9
1004812M
V10, 12, 15, 19
1032804N
V13,
1028794E
14
V16
1030119V
V17
906667H
V22
1028910F
V23,
1006793Q
24
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM140AK-15
PHILIPS 2N2222A

zener diode 5V1
rectifier diode
PHILIPS 2N2907A
PHILIPS BZX79/C5V1
IRC 1N4004
zener diode 36V

rectifier diode
PHILIPS BZT03-C36
PHILIPS BYV27-200
rectifier diode
FET hex amplifier
switching diode
PHILIPS BYW29-150
SGS-THOMSON 2N3055
IRC IRF130
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
DESCRIPTION
test jack
plug 96-way D
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
test terminal white
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XA1-8 1030153G
XN1
1036519B
XT1, 2, 7, 10, 11
1036569F
XT3-6, 8, 9
1036570G
F.5.30
1A72530 Transmitter Driver
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
W1
W2
W3
W4
CODE
1A72531
1A72532
1A72533
1A72534
DESCRIPTION
Exciter
Medium Power Driver
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72531
1A72532
1A72533
1A72534
TERMINATIONS
REF
E1
E2
CODE
1030562B
1038981C
DESCRIPTION
termination
termination
VALUE
50R
50R
RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1W
SUHNER 65SMA-50-0-1/111
2W
KDI T150M
DESCRIPTION
microwave circulator
VALUE
RATING
WAVEGUIDES
REF
CODE
W1, 2 1028868K
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
TELEDYNE C-0S23T-2
AEROTEK Do3A-IFFF/OPT1
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
72530-4-14
72530-4-15
72530-4-16
72530-4-17
72530-3-18
72530-4-21
72530-4-22
DESCRIPTION
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial BNC/SMA
ribbon 20-way
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72530-4-14
72530-4-15
72530-4-16
72530-4-17
72530-3-18
72530-4-21
72530-4-22
F-31
HA72500
F.5.31
APPENDIX F
1A72531 Pulse Shaper PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
C1, 4-6, 15-17, 19, 20, 22, 29, 31, 32, 34-37, 45-47
100n
C2
224214L
metal mica
470p
C3,
6u8
40, 41
C7,
470n
21, 25
C8, 9, 1030190X ceramic
100p
11
C10
1028735Q ceramic monolyth
330p
C12-14, 39, 44
1026369U metal polyester
1u
1n
27, 28
C23, 1028928A ceramic
15p
24
C26
1028930C ceramic
3p3
C30, 1036536V electrolytic aluminium
100u
42
C33, 1026362L
metal polyester
220n
38, 43
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10%
5%
20%
100V
500V
35V
KEMET CKO6BX104K
ARCO DM15ED471J04CR
10%
63V
WIMA MKS2
5%
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA101J
10%
100V
PHILIPS 2222-630-08331
10%
10%
50V
100V
WIMA MKS2
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
5%
100V
0p25
50%
100V
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA3R3C
10%
63V
WIMA MKS2
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5, 7
D6
D8
CODE
1028716V
1028378C
1028934G
1028935H
1028379D
1028375Z
1030185R
DESCRIPTION
multiplex
BCD up/down counter
quad 2-input AND
quad bilateral switch
dual JK flip-flop
dual monostable
dual precision monostable
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS HEF4051BD
PHILIPS HEF4510BD
PHILIPS HEF4082BD
PHILIPS HEF4066BD
PHILIPS HEF4027BD
PHILIPS HEF4528BD
PHILIPS HEF4538BD
DESCRIPTION
green LED
red LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3502-010
HP HLMP-3300-010
INDICATORS
REF
H1
H2
CODE
1036586Z
1036588B
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-6
N7, 8
CODE
1036584X
1028415T
DESCRIPTION
dual op amplifier
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CA3240AE
NATIONAL LM219J
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
R1, 14,15, 21, 30, 33, 41, 49, 72, 75, 78, 83, 93, 96,
117,133, 134, 135
1008746N metal film
1k
R2, 4, 13, 38, 47, 48, 56, 64, 81, 103, 104, 112, 128,
129
1008770P metal film
10k
R6, 8 1008760D metal film
3k92
R10, 12, 37, 46,124, 125
1008754X metal film
2k21
R16, 1008773T
metal film
13k
32
R18, 1008738E metal film
475
40
R19, 42, 67, 79, 106
1008758B metal film
3k32
R20
1008776W metal film
18k2
R22, 24, 26. 43, 45, 63, 71, 87
1008774U metal film
15k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-32
HA72500
APPENDIX F
R23
1008782C metal film
33k2
R25, 1008794Q metal film
100k
39
R27
1008800X metal film
182k
R28, 101, 102
1021512P metal film
1M
R29
1008752W metal film
2k
R31, 34, 50, 65, 86, 110
1008750T
metal film
1k5
1k82
60
R44, 70, 73, 77, 82, 95, 111, 113, 116, 120, 130
1008722M metal film
100
R51, 1008778Y metal film
22k1
59
6k81
80
R55, 57, 98, 114
1008762F
metal film
4k75
R61
1008714D metal film
47R5
R66
1008744L
metal film
825
R68
1008742J
metal film
681
R74, 76, 90-92
1008730W metal film
221
R84, 108, 118, 119
1008734A metal film
332
R88, 89, 99
1008768M metal film
8k25
R94
1008757A metal film
3k01
R100 1008802Z
metal film
221k
R105 1008764H metal film
5k62
68R1
123
R109 1008763G metal film
5k11
750
122
R126, 1008767L
metal film
7k5
127
R131, 1008786G metal film
47k5
132
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R3, 5 1028799K cermet 1-turn
R7, 9, 1018644X cermet 1-turn
36
R11, 13, 53, 69, 97, 115
1028760T
cermet 1-turn
R17, 1018646Z cermet 1-turn
54
R58
1028756N cermet 1-turn
R62, 1031087X cermet 1-turn
63
R85
1028877V cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-503
20k
10%
0W5
BECKMAN 72PMR20K
10k
5k
10%
10%
0W5
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-103
BOURNS 3386F-1-502
2k
10k
10%
10%
0W5
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-202
BOURNS 3386X-1-103
1k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-102
SWITCHES
REF
S1
S2-3
S4
CODE
1036573K
1032839B
1030651Y
DESCRIPTION
toggle DPDT
slide SPDT
slide SPDT
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 7201 -M-D9-A-B-E
C&K 1201-M2-S3-CB-E
C&K 1101-M2-S3-CB-E
F-33
HA72500
APPENDIX F
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
V1, 2, 4, 7, 12, 24, 26
1006793Q switching diode
V3, 28 1026172E low power PNP transistor
V5, 18 1006883N high power NPN transistor
V8, 10, 19, 25
1025349K high voltage PNP transistor
V9, 16, 20-22
1028933F
V11, 17, 29
1006485F
high power PNP transistor
V13
1004812M rectifier diode
V14,
1005272M zener diode 5V1
15
V23,
1028910F
FET hex amplifier
30
V27
1026171D low power NPN transistor
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
PHILIPS 2N2907A
MOTOROLA 2N5320
MOTOROLA 2N5401
MOTOROLA 2N5551
RCA 2N5322
IRC 1N4004
PHILIPS BZX79/C5V1
IRC IRF130
PHILIPS 2N2222A
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XA1-7 1030153G
XN1
1036519B
XN2
1036522E
XT1, 1036569F
2, 6, 8
XT3-5, 7, 9-13
1036570G
F.5.32
DESCRIPTION
test jack
plug 96-way C
header 20-way
test terminal black
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
test terminal white
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
1A72532 Exciter
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
C1
1030214Y ceramic chip
5p6
C2, 4, 8, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 27. 29, 31, 32
22p
C3, 7, 1030188V ceramic
1n
24
C6, 9, 1018751N monolyth
1u
28
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0.25pF 50V
Philips 2222-861-14568
5%
10%
50V
100V
VITRAMON Q220JXA-AB-07760K
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
10%
50V
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
REF
CODE
C5, 15, 17, 21
1030213X
C26, 30, 33, 34
1028813A
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
trimmer
0p8-8p
trimmer
0p6-4p5
VALUE
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57969V28
57969V30
INDUCTORS
REF
L1, 2
L5-12
CODE
57969V28
57969V30
DESCRIPTION
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1, 2
R6,
12, 13
R7, 9
R8, 10
CODE
1035025C
1032676Z
DESCRIPTION
chip
chip
1008738E
1008708X
metal film
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10
1% 0W125 ROHM MCR18X-100F-EZH
51R1 1% 0W125 ROHM MCR18X-510F-EZH
475
27R4
1%
1%
0W6
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
F-34
HA72500
APPENDIX F
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
V1, 3, 1030670U
4
V5, 6 1030671V
DESCRIPTION
microwave NPN transistor
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA MRF1000MA
microwave NPN transistor
MOTOROLA MRF1004MA
U WARNING
V1, 3, 4, 5, 6 may contain beryllium oxide
RF DEVICES
REF
W1-4
CODE
1031473R
DESCRIPTION
wireline coupler
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
69826-4-45
DESCRIPTION
header 10-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
VARELCO 00-8289-010-006-113
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
CODE
1036629W
F.5.33
1A72533 Medium Power Driver
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72538
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72538
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C3, 5
C4
CODE
1036606W
1036658C
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
47p
5%
100V VITRAMON VJ0808-Q470-JXB-AB
1n
10% 100V VITRAMON VJ0805-Y102-KXB-AB
REF
C1, 2
CODE
1028813A
DESCRIPTION
trimmer
VALUE
0p6-4p5
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57969V30
69752-4-48
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
L2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
57969V30 inductor
69752-4-48 inductor
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1028921T
DESCRIPTION
RF transistor
U WARNING
V3
FET hex amplifier
1028910F
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
GHZ 0912-45
IRC IRF130
CONNECTORS
REF
XC1
XC2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72533-4-08 termination assembly input
72533-4-09 termination assembly output
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72533-4-08
72533-4-09
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
REF
XN1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72533-4-07 connector and lead 4-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72533-4-07
F-35
HA72500
F.5.34
APPENDIX F
1A72534 Power Modulation Amplifier
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72538
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72538
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
C2
C3
C5-8
C9
C10,
11
CODE
1028810X
1028811Y
1028812Z
1036606W
1036605V
1033436A
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
VALUE
2p
4p7
3p3
47p
22p
100p
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0p1
500V ATC 100B-2R0-BCA-500X
0p1
500V ATC 100B-4R7-BCA-500X
0p1
500V ATC 100B-3R3-BCA-500X
5%
150
VITRAMON VJ0805-Q470-JXB-AB
5%
50V
5%
50V
REF
C4
CODE
1028813A
DESCRIPTION
trimmer
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0p6-4p5
INDUCTORS
REF
L1-3
CODE
30V57969
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
30V57969
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R9
R10,
11
R12
CODE
1021551G
1032676Z
DESCRIPTION
metal film
chip
1035073E
chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
6R8
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
51R1 1% 0W125 ROHM MCR18X-510F-EZH
15k
1%
0W125
ROHM MCR18X-153F-EZH
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1028916M
DESCRIPTION
microwave transistor
U WARNING
V2
V3
hot carrier diode

FET hex amplifier
1019399T
1028910F
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
GHZ 64042
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
IRC IRF130
RF DEVICES
QTY
1
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72534-4-30 balun
72534-4-17 balun assembly
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72534-4-30
72534-4-17
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72534-3-18 connector and lead assembly
72534-4-31 connector assembly RF output
F.5.35
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72534-3-18
72534-4-31
1A72535 1kW RF Power Amplifier
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1-10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
CODE
1A69873
1A72536
1A72537
1A72534
1A72544
2A69757
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
250W RF Amplifier
1A69873
Power Divider Assembly
1A72536
Power Combiner Assembly
1A72537
1A72534
1A72544
50 Ohm Termination
2A69757
F-36
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RF DEVICES
REF
W1
CODE
1031469M
DESCRIPTION
circulator microwave
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
TELEDYNE 23T-6
AEROTEK D03A-10FFF/OPT2
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
20
1
1
CODE
72535-3-21
72545-3-22
72535-4-23
72535-4-24
72535-4-25
F.5.36
DESCRIPTION
coaxial input
coaxial output
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial N/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72535-3-21
72545-3-22
72535-4-23
72535-4-24
72535-4-25
1A72536 Power Divider
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
CODE
1036605V
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1-3
CODE
1030123Z
DESCRIPTION
metal film microstrip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100
RF TECHNIQUES 1A100100
U WARNING
R1-3 may contain beryllium oxide
R4-8
R9-11
R12
R13
R14
chip termination
chip
chip
chip
chip
1028923V
1032671U
1035039T
1035033L
1035073E
50
100
68R1
33R2
15k
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W125
0W125
0W125
0W125
KDI PPC100-200A-G50-2
ROHM MCR1BX-680F-EZH
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1019399T
DESCRIPTION
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
DESCRIPTION
wireline coupler
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
69826-4-45
RF DEVICES
REF
W1-5
CODE
1031473R
CONNECTORS
REF
XF111
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1028908D coaxial SMA
F.5.37
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 22SMA-50-0-52/199
1A72537 Power Combiner
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1-20 1030632C
C21
1028393U
C101 1036605V
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
ceramic chip
VALUE
100u
330p
22p
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50% 100V SIEMENS B41588-E9107-T
10% 100V VITRAMON VP31BA331KB
5%
50V
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
CODE
405355D
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0u82
MILLER 9310-10
F-37
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1-3
CODE
1030123Z
DESCRIPTION
metal film microstrip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100
RF TECHNIQUES 1A100100
U WARNING
R1-3 may contain beryllium oxide
R4-8
R9-11
R12
R13
R14
chip termination
chip
chip
chip
chip
1028923V
1032671U
1036726B
1036727C
1035073E
50
100
47
56
15k
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W125
0W125
0W125
0W125
KDI PPC100-200A-G50-2
PHILIPS 2322-712-20479
PHILIPS 2322-712-20569
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1019399T
DESCRIPTION
hot carrier diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
DESCRIPTION
wireline coupler
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
69826-4-45
DESCRIPTION
terminal quick connect
coaxial SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
UTILUX H2880
SUHNER 22SMA-50-0-52/199
RF DEVICES
REF
W1-5
CODE
1031473R
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
X1-16 234894V
XF1- 1028908D
13
F.5.38
1A72538 RF Amplifier Driver PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C15,
16
CODE
1036536V
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100u 50% 100V SIEMENS B41588-E9107-F
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1
R2
R3
R4
R6-8
CODE
1008734A
1008710Z
1008746N
1008770P
1021546B
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
332
33R2
1k
10k
1
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V4
V5
CODE
1006883N
1006485F
DESCRIPTION
high power PNP transistor
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA 2N5320
RCA 2N5322
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
UTILUX H2880
CONNECTORS
REF
X1-5
CODE
234894V
F.5.39
1A72540 1kW Power Amplifier Power Supply
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
CODE
1A72541
1A72542
DESCRIPTION
Control and Status PWB
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72541
1A72542
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1, 2
CODE
1031019Y
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
6m8 50% 100V PHILIPS 2222-114-19682
F-38
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RELAYS
REF
K1
Opt 1
K1
Opt 2
CODE
1030295L
DESCRIPTION
DPDT 20A contacts
1036646P
power 2 form C V24
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MATSUSHITA HG2DC24V
STRUTHERS-DUNN
298XBX-CSIU24D
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
CODE
1TX80382
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
5mH
1TX80382
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1
R2
CODE
1021548D
609894D
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal oxide
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2R21 1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k7
5%
3W25 ROEDERSTEIN WK8
CONNECTORS
REF
XB1
CODE
1018227U
DESCRIPTION
terminal block 6-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
KLIPPON 6252.2
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72540-3-27 lead group
F.5.40
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72540-3-27
1A72541 Control and Status PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1-3, 11, 13-15
1018878B
C4
1036536V
C5, 7, 1026365P
9
C6, 8, 1026369U
10, 16
C12
1036506M
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
metal polyester
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100n
100u
470n
10%
50%
10%
100V
100V
63V
KEMET CK06BX104K
WIMA MKS2
metal polyester
1u
10%
50V
WIMA MKS2
33u
20%
35V
INDICATORS
REF
H1, 3
H2
CODE
1036586Z
1036588B
DESCRIPTION
green LED
red LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3502-010
HP HLMP-3300-010
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-3,
7
N4-6,
8
N9
CODE
1028415T
DESCRIPTION
dual comparator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM219J
1036584X
dual op amplifier
RCA CA3240AE
1036593G
SGS-THOMSON LM217T
F-39
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 6, 1008802Z
metal film
11
R2, 7, 12, 21, 27, 33, 56
1008770P metal film
R3, 8, 1008767L
metal film
13
R4, 9, 1008743K metal film
14
R5,
1008710Z
metal film
10, 15
R16
1036496B metal film
R17
1036493Y metal film
R18, 22, 24, 28, 30, 34
1008722M metal film
R19, 25, 31, 40, 50
1008762F
metal film
38, 47
R32
1008768M metal film
R23, 1021512P metal film
29, 35
55
37, 48
R39, 1008750T
metal film
43
R41
1008755Y metal film
R42
1008730W metal film
R44
1008785F
metal film
R46
1008736C metal film
R49, 1008746N metal film
57-59
R51
1008714D metal film
R52- 1008752V metal film
54
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
221k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
7k5
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
750
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
33R2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
110k
0.1%
0.1%
0W1
0W1
PHILIPS 2322-160-41003
PHILIPS 2322-160-41104
100
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
4k75
5k62
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
8k25
1M
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
3k32
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
3k01
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k5
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k43
221
43k2
392
1k
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
47R5
1k82
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R45
CODE
1028760T
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-103
RESISTORS, NETWORKS
REF
RN1
CODE
1036531P
DESCRIPTION
SIP 8-pin
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1kx4
2%
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-102
SWITCHES
REF
S1
CODE
1036501G
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 7203-M-D9-A-B-E
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1, 2,
6
V3-5
V7,
13, 10
V9, 13
V12
V14
CODE
1026172E
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 2N2907A
1006793Q
1004812M
switching diode
rectifier diode
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
IRC 1N4004
1026171D
1006326H
1032804H

zener diode 5V6
zener diode 36V
PHILIPS 2N2222A
PHILIPS BZX79/C5V6
PHILIPS BZT03/C36
F-40
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
XA110
XN1
XN2
XT1-3
XT4
CODE
1030153G
DESCRIPTION
test jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SCOTT 4879-125-0
1036518A
1036517Z
1036570G
1036569F
socket 9-way D
plug 25-way D
test terminal white
test terminal black
AMP 747844-6
AMP 747842-6
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
F.5.41
1A72542 DC-DC Converter PWB
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72543
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
Regulator PWB Assembly
1A72543
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
C2, 4
C3, 5
C6, 7
C8
C9,
10, 13
C11,
14
C12
CODE
1026369U
1036538X
1026358G
226633Q
1036506M
1036537W
DESCRIPTION
metal polyester
metal polyester
metal polyester
VALUE
1u
2m2
100n
22n
33u
220u
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10%
50V
WIMA MKS2
30%
63V
SIEMENS B41554-B8228-Q
10%
63V
WIMA MKS2
10% 400V PHILIPS 2222-368-55223
20%
35V
50% 100V SIEMENS B41588-D9227-T
1018878B
ceramic monolyth
100n
10%
100V
KEMET CK06BX104K
1036539Y
3m3
50%
100V
PHILIPS 2222-114-19332
INDUCTORS
REF
CODE
L1
57937V287
L2
1LP80376
L3
57973V288
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
57937V287
1LP80376
57973V288
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1-4
R5-8,
11
R9, 10
R12
R13,
17
R14,
15
CODE
1088T70P
1008698L
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1036549J
wire wound
72542-4-34 resistance wire
1008722M metal film
1008746N
metal film
47
0R06
100
2%
1%
1%
4W
0W4
0W4
DALE RS-2
72542-4-34
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R16
CODE
1031065Y
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1 turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100
1%
0W4
BECKMAN 72PMR100R
TRANSFORMERS
REF
T1-5
T6
CODE
1LH80375
1LP80377
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1LH80375
1LP80377
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1-4
V5-12
V1316
V1721
CODE
1028910F
596894Y
1036638F
DESCRIPTION
FET hex amplifier
zener diode 9V1
transient supp diode 36V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
IRC IRF130
PHILIPS BZX79/C9V1
GSI 1.5KE36A
1030119V
rectifier diode
PHILIPS BYW29/150
F-41
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
XP3-4
XP5-6
XS7
XS816
XT1,
14
XT13
CODE
234894V
1030740V
1036571H
1028758Q
DESCRIPTION
terminal printed board
connector jack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
UTILUX H2880
UTILUX H954
HARWIN H2103A-01
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
1036569F
test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 103
1036570G
test terminal white
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
F.5.42
1A72543 Regulator PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C101 1036507N electrolytic tantalum
C102, 105, 109, 110, 111
1026358G metal polyester
C103 1004863T
ceramic monolyth
C104 1026362L
metal polyester
C106, 1018751N ceramic monolyth
107
C108 1036506M electrolytic tantalum
C113 1030188V ceramic
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
6u8
20%
35V
100n
10n
220n
1u
10%
10%
10%
10%
63V
100V
63V
50V
WIMA MKS2
VITRAMON CK05BX103K
WIMA MKS2
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
33u
1n
20%
10%
35V
100V
PHILIPS 2222-630-08102
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
R101, 1008762F
102
R103 1008770P
R104 1008774U
R105 1008753W
R106 1008786G
R107 1021512P
R108, 131-134
1008714D
R109, 110, 116, 119
1008758B
R111 1008789K
R113 1008755Y
R114, 122, 123, 128
1008746N
R115 1008730W
R117, 1008732Y
120
R118, 1008748Q
121
R124 1008766K
R125 1008790L
R126 1008780A
R127 1008778Y
R129, 1008698L
130
R135 1008722M
DESCRIPTION
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
4k75
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
10k
15k
2k
47k5
1M0
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
47R5
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
3k32
61k9
2k43
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
1k
221
274
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
1k21
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
6k81
68k1
27k4
22k1
10
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
100
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R112
CODE
1028877V
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1 -turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1k
10%
0W5
BOURNS 3386F-1-102
F-42
HA72500
APPENDIX F
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
V101 1028204N regulator
V102 ,106, 107, 109, 110
1026171D low power NPN transistor
V103-105.108, 111
1006793Q switching diode
V112, 1026172E low power PNP
116
transistor
V113 1005272M zener diode 5V1
V114 1005279V zener diode 10V
V115 596890U
zener diode 6V2
V117 1028876U thyristor
V118, 1028382G tristate hex inverter
119
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL LM3524N
PHILIPS 2N2222A
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
PHILIPS 2N2907A
PHILIPS BZX79/C5V1
PHILIPS BZX79/C10
PHILIPS BZX79/C6V2
MOTOROLA C106D
PHILIPS HEF40098BD
CONNECTORS
REF
CODE
XT2-4, 6-12
1036570G
XT5
1036569F
F.5.43
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
test terminal white

test terminal black
WILLIAM HUGHES 101

WILLIAM HUGHES 103
1A72544 1kW PA Connector PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
C1-12 1036605V
C13
1029308N
DESCRIPTION
ceramic chip
ceramic chip
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
22p
5%
50V
470p 10%
50V
INDUCTORS
REF
L3
CODE
405355D
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
0u82H
MILLER 9310-10
DESCRIPTION
plug 15-way D
header 4-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
AMP 745072-2
KLIPPON 12363.6
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
XN2
CODE
1036561X
1036599N
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
1
1
CODE
72544-4-16
72544-4-20
72544-3-21
72544-3-22
F.5.44
DESCRIPTION
coaxial SMA
coaxial SMA
4-way
lead group
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72544-4-16
72544-4-20
72544-3-21
72544-3-22
1A72545 RF Panel - Single DME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
CODE
1A72547
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72547
RF DEVICES
REF
W1
W3
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1031469M Circulator microwave
69755-2-19 directional coupler
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
Teledyne C-ON23T-6
69755-2-19
FILTERS
REF
Z1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72546-3-01 preselector filter
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72546-3-01
F-43
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
2
1
CODE
72545-4-20
72545-4-21
72545-4-22
72545-4-23
F.5.45
DESCRIPTION
coaxial N/SMA
coaxial SMA
coaxial SMA
coaxial N/SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72545-4-20
72545-4-21
72545-4-22
72545-4-23
2A72545 RF Panel - Dual DME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
CODE
2A72547
1A69757
DESCRIPTION
50 Ohm Termination
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2A72547
1A69757
RELAYS
REF
K1
CODE
1036597L
DESCRIPTION
transfer N connectors
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
26R
26V
K&L MICROWAVE LTS-28-F-N
CIRCULATORS
REF
CODE
W1, 2 1031469M
DESCRIPTION
Circulator microwave
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
Teledyne C-ON23T-6
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
CODE
72545-4-20
72545-4-21
72545-4-22
72545-4-28
72545-4-29
72545-4-30
72545-4-31
72545-4-32
F.5.46
DESCRIPTION
coaxial N/SMA
coaxial SMA
coaxial SMA
coaxial N
coaxial N
coaxial N/SMA
coaxial N/SMA
coaxial SMA
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72545-4-20
72545-4-21
72545-4-22
72545-4-28
72545-4-29
72545-4-30
72545-4-31
72545-4-32
1A72547 RF Panel PWB - Single DME
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
CODE
1018878B
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100n 10% 100V KEMET CK06BX104K
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1
R2
CODE
1008698L
1008746N
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V2
V3
CODE
1026498J
1030371U
DESCRIPTION
transient suppressor 10V
surge arrestor 90V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS BZW03-C12
SIEMENS B1-C90/20
DESCRIPTION
plug 9-way D
socket 9-way D
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
AMP 745071-2
AMP 745076-4
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
XN2
CODE
1036611B
1036641J
F-44
HA72500
F.5.47
APPENDIX F
2A72547 RF Panel PWB - Dual DME
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
CODE
1018878B
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100n 10%
100v
KEMET CK06BX104K
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1
R2
CODE
1008698L
1008746N
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SWITCHES
REF
S1
CODE
1036501G
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 7203-M-D9-A-B-E
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
V2
V3
CODE
1004812M
1026498J
1030371U
DESCRIPTION
rectifier diode
transient suppressor 10V
surge arrestor 90V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
IRC 1N4004
PHILIPS BZW03-C12
SIEMENS B1-C90/20
DESCRIPTION
terminal quick-connect
plug 9-way D
socket 9-way D
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
UTILUX H2880
AMP 745071-2
AMP 745076-4
CONNECTORS
REF
X1, 2
XN1
XN2
CODE
234894V
1036611B
1036641J
F.5.48
A72549 Power Distribution Panel - Single DME
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
REF
Q1, 2
CODE
1036656A
DESCRIPTION
no delay aux switch
VALUE
20A
RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50V
AIRPAX APG-1-1REC4-50-203
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
CODE
1036666L
DESCRIPTION
plug 15-way style H15
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ERNI 413-168
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
F.5.49
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72549-3-19
2A72549 Power Distribution Panel - Dual DME
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
REF
Q1, 2
Q3-5
CODE
1036656A
1036655Z
DESCRIPTION
no delay aux switch
no delay aux switch
VALUE
20A
5A
RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
50V
AIRPAX APG-1-1REC4-50-203-A-01
50V
AIRPAX APG-1-1REC4-50-502-A-1
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
CODE
1036666L
DESCRIPTION
plug 15-way style H15
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ERNI 413-168
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72549-3-20
F-45
HA72500
F.5.50
APPENDIX F
1A72550 Control and Test Unit
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A2
A3
A4
CODE
1A72552
1A72553
1A72555
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72552
1A72553
1A72555
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72550-3-16 ribbon 50-way
72550-3-17 ribbon 64-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72550-3-16
72550-3-17
CAPACITORS
REF
C1
CODE
F.5.51
DESCRIPTION
electro alum
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
470u 50%
40V
PHILIPS 2222-032-17471
1A72552 CTU Processor PWB
TRANSDUCERS
REF
B1
CODE
1036622N
DESCRIPTION
speaker
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
STAR QMX-05
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
C1, 7-11, 14-17, 23, 24, 26-29, 31, 33-40, 42, 44-48,
50-53, 54-63, 65, 68, 69
100n
C2-6, 1018751N ceramic monolyth
1u
41
22p
13, 20
C18, 1004863T
ceramic monolyth
10n
22
C19, 25, 30, 32, 43, 49, 64, 66, 67
33u
C21
1028347U ceramic
33p
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10%
10%
100V
50V
KEMET CK06BX104K
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
5%
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA220J
10%
100V
VITRAMON CK05BX103K
20%
5%
10V
100V
VITRAMON VP12BA330J
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
D1,
1032799H hex inverting Schmitt trigger
D38
D2
24A72502 PLD ident tone and keying
D3, 11 1035335P quad 2-input OR
D6
1036583W UART
D7, 8, 1036477F
octal D-type latch
10
D9
1036469X 16-bit microprocessor
D12
1035310M 14-stage binary counter
D13
23A72502 PLD wait state generator
D14, 1036623P 32kx8 CMOS static RAM
15
D16
1036558U 8kx8 CMOS EEPROM
D17
1A72551
CTU software
D18, 1036604U octal latch
23, 26
D19, 20, 24, 25, 30, 31, 33, 34, 36, 37
1033775U octal buffer
D21, 1032927X hex inverter
22
D27, 1032802L
quad 2-input NAND
39
D28
1038948R hex inverter
D29, 1034410J
bi-directional buffer and latch
32, 35
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL MM74HC14N
24A72502
RCA CD74HC32E
SIGNETICS SCC2691AE1N24
NATIONAL MM74HC573N
INTEL TN80C186-12
TI SN74HC4020N
23A72502
AKM AKM62256LPI-10
CATALYST CAT28C65API-20
2A72551
ALLEGRO UCN5801A
RCA CD74HC541E
NATIONAL MM74HC04N
NATIONAL MM74HC00N
NATIONAL MM74AC04N
NATIONAL MM74HC646N
F-46
HA72500
APPENDIX F
FUSES
REF
F1, 2
F3
CODE
1036602R
1036692P
DESCRIPTION
voltage dep resistor
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
65VDC 10%
0W1
SIEMENS SIOV-SO5K50
38V
0W2
SIEMENS SIOV-S14K30
CRYSTALS
REF
G1
G2
CODE
1036530N
1036529M
DESCRIPTION
20MHz 100 ppm
3M6864Hz 100 ppm
HY-Q
HY-Q
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
INDICATORS
REF
CODE
H1-2, 4, 6-8
1036589C
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
green LED
HP HLMP-3507
DESCRIPTION
2.5 turns
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 4312-020-36640
INDUCTORS
REF
L1
CODE
1033446L
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
N2
N3
N4, 5
CODE
1036585Y
1036505L
1038949T
1036671R
DESCRIPTION
photomos relay
microprocessor supervisory circuit
voltage regulator adjustable
RS422/RS485 transceiver
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
NATIONAL AQV214
MAXIM MAX691EPE
NATIONAL LM2931C
NATIONAL DS75176BTN
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
R1, 2, 4, 5, 10
1008698L
metal film
R3, 15, 31, 34, 40, 44
1029244U metal film
R6, 11-14, 17, 22, 28, 29, 39, 43, 48, 49
1008770P metal film
R7-9, 1008722M metal film
45
R16
1008753W metal film
R18, 19, 26, 27, 52, 53
1008746N metal film
R21, 1008774U metal film
23
R25
1021512P metal film
R35, 1008762F
metal film
46, 47
R36
1008755Y metal film
R37
1008796T
metal film
R38
1008786G metal film
R50
1008778Y metal film
R51
1008791M metal film
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
0R0
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
10k
100
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1k
15k
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1M
4k75
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
2k43
121k
47k5
22k1
75k
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R32,
33
CODE
1028756N
DESCRIPTION
cermet -turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2k
1%
0W4
BOURNS 3386F-1-202
F-47
HA72500
APPENDIX F
RESISTOR NETWORKS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
RN1, 1036330W SIP 8-pin
4, 7, 8
RN2, 3, 6, 10, 14, 16, 22-24
1027365B SIP 10-pin
RN5, 1030609C SIP 6-pin
12
RN9, 11, 17, 18
1025401R SIP 10-pin
RN13, 1036660E SIP 8-pin
15
RN19 1036673U SIP 10-pin
RN20, 21, 25, 26, 30, 31
1036555Q SIP 8-pin
RN27-29. 32-34
1032352X SIP 10-pin
RN35 1028388N SIP 8-pin
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10kx4 2%
1W
ALLEN-BRADLEY 708B103
10kx9
4k7x5
2%
2%
1W25
0W75
BOURNS 4310R-101-103
BOURNS 4306R-101-472
4k7x9
22kx4
2%
2%
1W25
1W
BOURNS 4310R-101-472
BOURNS 4608X-102-223
10kx5
2%
1W25
BOURNS 4610X-102-103
100x4
2%
1W
BOURNS 4608X-102-101
47kx9
15kx7
2%
2%
1W25
1W
BOURNS 4610X-101-473
BOURNS 4308R-101-153
SWITCHES
REF
S1, 2
CODE
1026437T
DESCRIPTION
DIL SPST 8-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CTS 206-8-LPST
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
CODE
V1, 4 1004812M
V2, 3 1006883N
V5, 6, 1006793Q
8-11
DESCRIPTION
rectifier diode
switching diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
IRC 1N4004
RCA 2N5320
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
DESCRIPTION
plug 96-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1,
2
XN3
XN4
XN510
XN11
CODE
1036519B
1036616G header 50-way

1036614E header 60-way
72552-4-19 header 2-way
VARELCO 00-8289-050-007-213
VARELCO 00-8289-060-007-213
72552-4-19
1036599N
KLIPPON 12363.6
F.5.52
header 4-way
1A72553 CTU Front Panel PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1, 14, 19, 22
C3, 5, 11-13, 15-18, 20, 21, 23-25
C8-10 1018751N ceramic monolyth
VALUE TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
33u
20%
10V
100n
1u
10%
10%
100V
50V
KEMET CK06BX104K
VITRAMON CK06BX105K
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D3
D4
D5
D6, 8,
9-12
D7
CODE
1033775U
1032799H
26A72502
1036604U
DESCRIPTION
octal buffer non-inverting
hex inverting Schmitt trigger
front panel key switch PLD
octal latch
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
RCA CD74HC541E
NATIONAL MM74HC14N
26A72502
ALLEGRO UCN5801A
1035245R
TI SN74HC245N
DESCRIPTION
yellow LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-3401
INDICATORS
REF
CODE
H5, 8, 1036590D
11, 38
F-48
HA72500
APPENDIX F
H6, 7, 12, 13, 17-19, 35-37

1036589C green LED
H9, 10, 15, 16, 20-28, 30-33, 39, 40
1036591E red LED
H14
1036586Z
green LED
Display 1036607X
2 line 40 char LCD
HP HLMP-3507
HP HLMP-3301
HP HLMP-3502-010
OPTREX DMC40218H
INDUCTORS
REF
L1, 2
CODE
1033446L
DESCRIPTION
2.5 turns
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 4312-020-36640
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
CODE
1041482W
DESCRIPTION
dual op amplifier
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R8, 13
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R10-12
CODE
100869BL
1008746N
1008770P
1008749R
1021512P
1008740G
1008777X
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
10
1k
10k
1k3
1M
562
20k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R1
CODE
1030147A
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1-turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
10k
10%
0W5
BECKMAN 72XR10K
RESISTOR NETWORKS
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
RN 1, 2, 4, 5. 12, 13
1036555Q sip 8-pin
RN3, 6-11, 14-20, 22, 23
1027365B sip 10-pin
RN21 1036330W sip 8-pin
VALUE TOL RATING

100x4
2%
1W
10kx9
10kx4
2%
2%
1W25
1W
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
BOURNS 4608X-102-101
BOURNS 4310R-101-103
ALLEN-BRADLEY 708B103
SWITCHES
REF
CODE
S1-7, 10, 13-20
1036608Y
S11
1036610A
S12
1036609Z
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
pushbutton black
rotary BCD coded
rotary BCD coded
ITT-STC SE-T-BK-AU-OA
ELMA 07-4133
SIEMENS C42315-A1353-A1
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1-6
V7, 8
CODE
1006793Q
1026171D
DESCRIPTION
switching diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
PHILIPS 2N2222A
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1
XN2
CODE
DESCRIPTION
1036615F
header 50-way
72553-4-26 header 2-row 14-way
F.5.53
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
VARELCO 00-8289-050-006-2-1-3
72553-4-26
1A72555 RCMS Interface PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
CODE
DESCRIPTION
C1, 6, 10, 12, 14-21, 24, 25, 27
C2, 22 1036506M electrolytic tantalum
C3-5, 1028369U metal polyester
7-9
VALUE TOL RATING

100n
33u
1u
10%
20%
10%
100V
35V
50V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
KEMET CK06BX104K
WIMA MKS2
F-49
HA72500
C11, 13, 23, 26
1036508P
APPENDIX F
33u
20%
10V
DIGITAL DEVICES
REF
D1
D2
D3, 4
D5
D6, 7
CODE
27A72502
1035245R
1036604U
1036477F
1033775U
DESCRIPTION
PLD RCMS interface
octal latch
octal D-type latch
octal buffer
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
27A72502
TI SN74HC245N
ALLEGRO UCN5801A
NATIONAL MM74HC573N
RCA CD74HC541E
FUSES
REF
CODE
F2-31 1036602R
DESCRIPTION
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
65VDC 10%
0W1
SIEMENS SIOV-SO5K50
INDICATORS
REF
H1
CODE
1036586Z
DESCRIPTION
green LED
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP HLMP-5050
DESCRIPTION
monostable 2 changeover contacts
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SIEMENS V23042-A2005-B101
DESCRIPTION
2.5 turns
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 4312-020-36640
RELAYS
REF
CODE
K1-15 1036204J
INDUCTORS
REF
L1, 2
CODE
1033446L
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1-6
N7
CODE
1032286A
1038949T
DESCRIPTION
opto-isolator
voltage regulator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SIEMENS CNY 17-II
NATIONAL LM2931CT
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R2-7
R8
R10
R12
R15
R16
CODE
1008762F
1008770P
1008794Q
1008698L
1008778Y
1008791M
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
4k75
10k
100k
10
22k1
75k
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
RESISTORS, VARIABLE
REF
R1
CODE
1030141U
DESCRIPTION
cermet 1 -turn
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2k
10%
0W5
BECKMAN 72XR2K
RESISTOR NETWORKS
REF
CODE
RN1, 6, 7, 10, 11
1027365B
RN2- 1036555Q
5, 8, 9
DESCRIPTION
SIP 10-pin
SIP 8-pin
VALUE TOL RATING

10kx9
100x4
2%
2%
1W25
1W
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
BOURNS 4310R-101-103
BOURNS 4608X-102-101
TRANSFORMERS
REF
T1
CODE
1036236U
DESCRIPTION
line 600/600/150 ohms
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ERICSSON REKP173511
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1-3,
7-9
V4-6,
10-12
CODE
1030394U
DESCRIPTION
zener diode 3V3
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS BZX79B3V9
1006793Q
switching diode
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
F-50
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1,
2
XN3
XN4
CODE
1036519B
DESCRIPTION
plug 96-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1036616G
1036614E
header 50-way
header 60-way
VARELCO 00-8289-050-007-213
VARELCO 00-8289-060-007-213
F.5.54
1A72556 Transponder Subrack Motherboard
CONNECTORS
REF
XN1-5
XN6
XN7
XN8,
9
CODE
1036528L
1036525H
1036516Y
1036599N
F.5.55
DESCRIPTION
socket 96-way C
plug 64-way R
socket 25-way D
header 4-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SIEMENS V42254-B1463-R963
AMP 745978-4
KLIPPON 12363.6
1A72557 External I/O PWB
CAPACITORS, FIXED
REF
C1
C2
CODE
1018878B
1036507N
DESCRIPTION
ceramic monolyth
VALUE TOL RATING

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
100n 10% 100V KEMET CK06BX104K
6u8
20%
35V
ANALOGUE DEVICES
REF
N1
N2
CODE
1036593G
1035632M
DESCRIPTION
op amplifier
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SGS-THOMSON LM217T
TI TL081BCP
RESISTORS, FIXED
REF
R1, 2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R14
R15
R16
CODE
1008757A
1008742J
1008696L
1021549E
1008754X
1008805C
1008797U
1008793P
1029244U
1008731X
1021313Y
DESCRIPTION
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
VALUE
3k01
681
10
3R32
2k21
301k
130k
90k9
0R0
243
2k15
TOL RATING
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
906806J
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHILIPS 2N2905A
F-51
HA72500
APPENDIX F
CONNECTORS
REF
XB111
XN1
XN2,
4
XN3
XN5
XN6,
8
XN7
CODE
1036644M
DESCRIPTION
terminal block 6-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
PHOENIX 17-25-04-1
1036518A
1036640H
socket 9-way D
plug 9-way D
AMP 747844-6
AMP 747840-6
1036517Z
1036599N
1036525H
plug 25-way D
header 4-way
plug 64-way R
AMP 747842-6
KLIPPON 12363.6
SIEMENS V42254-B1463-R963
1036518A
socket 9-way D
AMP 747844-6
F.5.56
1A72558 Rack Frame Wired - Single 1kWDME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A7
CODE
1A72506
1A72513
1A72557
1A72503
1A72545
DESCRIPTION
CTU Subrack
Transponder Subrack
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72506
1A72513
1A72557
1A72503
1A72545
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1036684F
DESCRIPTION
dual diode rectifier 60V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA MBR20060CT
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
CODE
72558-2-29
72558-3-31
72558-3-32
72558-2-35
72558-2-37
72558-3-39
72558-3-41
72558-3-42
72558-3-40
72558-1-43
72558-1-44
72558-1-45
72558-4-46
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
72558-3-54
72558-2-55
72558-1-86
DESCRIPTION
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
loom, main power
loom, 1kW PA, power
loom, 1kW PA, signal
power
earth
door earth
DC power
signal
mains cable and filter assembly
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72558-2-29
72558-3-31
72558-3-32
72558-2-35
72558-2-37
72558-3-39
72558-3-41
72558-3-42
72558-3-40
72558-1-43
72558-1-44
72558-1-45
72558-4-46
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
72558-3-54
72558-2-55
72558-1-86
DESCRIPTION
terminal strip 6-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
KLIPPON KS6/014062
CONNECTORS
QTY
XB12
CODE
103173BE
F-52
HA72500
F.5.57
APPENDIX F
2A72558 Rack Frame Wired - Dual 1kW DME
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
CODE
1A72506
1A72513
1A72557
1A72503
1A72513
1A72503
2A72545
DESCRIPTION
CTU Subrack
Transponder Subrack
Transponder Subrack
RF Panel - Dual DME
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72506
1A72513
1A72557
1A72503
1A72513
1A72503
2A72545
SEMICONDUCTORS
REF
V1
CODE
1036684F
DESCRIPTION
dual diode rectifier 60V
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA MBR20060CT
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
CODE
72558-2-29
72558-3-31
72558-3-32
72558-2-35
72558-2-37
72558-2-30
72558-3-33
72558-2-34
72558-2-36
72558-2-38
72558-3-39
72558-3-41
72558-3-42
72558-3-40
72558-1-43
72558-1-44
72558-1-45
72558-4-46
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
F.5.58
DESCRIPTION
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
loom, main power
loom, 1kW PA, power
power
earth
door earth
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72558-2-29
72558-3-31
72558-3-32
72558-2-35
72558-2-37
72558-2-30
72558-3-33
72558-2-34
72558-2-36
72558-2-38
72558-3-39
72558-3-41
72558-3-42
72558-3-40
72558-1-43
72558-1-44
72558-1-45
72558-4-46
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
1A72560 Antenna Cable Set for Single Installation
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
1
1
CODE
1031588R
DESCRIPTION
20m LDF4-50 cable, with L44AW
connector one end
72560-4-01 coaxial, monitor
72560-4-02 coaxial, antenna feeder tail
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ANDREW LDF4-50
72560-4-01
72560-4-02
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72560-4-03 cable accessories kit, single
F.5.59
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72560-4-03
2A72560 Antenna Cable Set for Dual Installation
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
1
2
1
CODE
1031588R
DESCRIPTION
20m LDF4-50 cable, with L44W
connector one end
72560-4-01 coaxial, monitor
72560-4-02 coaxial, antenna feeder tail
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
ANDREW LDF4-50
72560-4-01
72560-4-02
F-53
HA72500
APPENDIX F
ACCESSORIES
QTY
1
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72560-4-04 cable accessories kit, dual
F.5.60
QTY
1
2
1
1
1
QTY
2
2
1A72561 Accessory Kit, DME Test
CODE
1A72562
1036676X
1A72563
1A72564
1036132F
F.5.61
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72562-4-11
72562-4-07
1A72563 Special Tools and Fittings
CODE
1021120N
1021121P
6A70756
1
1
1036731G
1036732H
F.5.63
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
1A72562
VERO 09-0108E
1A72563
1A72564
ERICSSON ROF 131391/1
1A72562 Transponder Extender Frame
QTY
1
1
1
QTY
1
1
1
1
1
1
DESCRIPTION
Transponder extender frame
Eurocard 6U extenders
Special tools and fittings
Coaxial cables and accessories
power supply extender card
CODE
DESCRIPTION
72562-4-11 coaxial jack/SMA
72562-4-07 coaxial BNC/SMA
F.5.62
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72560-4-04
DESCRIPTION
screwdriver Posidrive No. 1
screwdriver Posidrive No. 2
Extension cable assembly, mains
cable
spanner open ended metric A/F 8x9 mm
alignment tool
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
STANLEY 65-532
STANLEY 533
6A70756
SIDCHROME 0397-7415
JOHANSON 8777
1A72564 Coaxial Cables and Accessories
CODE
72564-3-01
72564-3-02
72564-3-03
1030262A
1030560Z
1031583L
DESCRIPTION
Cable assembly CRO trigger
Cable assembly RF test
Cable assembly test
attenuator fixed 50 ohms 3 dB SMA
attenuator fixed 50 ohms 6 dB SMA
adapter coax N(M)-SMA(F)
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72564-3-01
72564-3-02
72564-3-03
KDI A303M
KDI A306M
SUHNER 33N-SMA-50-1/133
F-54
HA72500
APPENDIX G
APPENDIX G
COMPONENT SUPPLIERS
G-i
HA72500
APPENDIX G
TABLE of CONTENTS
G.
G.1
COMPONENT SUPPLIERS................................................................... G-1

COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS AND AGENTS
G-1
G-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX G
G.
COMPONENT SUPPLIERS
G.1
COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS AND AGENTS
The component schedules contained in Appendix F identify manufacturers and/or

suppliers of items by an abbreviated name form. The abbreviations used, and the
manufacturer and/or supplier identities which they represent, are listed below in
alphabetical order.
In instances where organisations based outside Australia are included the Australian
representative or agent, if any, is shown in the right-hand column.
AIRPAX
Airpax Corporation
Philips Components Pty Ltd

PO Box 373
NORTH RYDE
NSW 2113 AUST
AKM
AKM
Braemac Pty Ltd

6/111 Moore Street
LEICHHARDT
NSW 2040 AUST
ALLEGRO
Allegro
VSI Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Allen-Bradley Pty Ltd
Daktron Electronics Pty Ltd

PO Box 6166
BAULKHAM HILLS
NSW 2153 AUST
AMP
Australian AMP Pty Ltd

PO Box 557
CASTLE HILL
NSW 2154 AUST
ANDREW
Andrew Australia
153 Barry Road
CAMPBELLFIELD
VIC 3061 AUST
ARCO
ARCO
Tri-Components Pty Ltd

5 Hampshire Road
GLEN WAVERLEY
VIC 3150 AUST
ATC
American Transistor
Corporation
A. J. Distributors
PO Box 71
PROSPECT
SA 5082 AUST
BECKMAN
Beckman Industrial
Corporation

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
G-1
HA72500
APPENDIX G
BOURNS
Bourns Incorporated

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
BRAEMAC
Braemac Pty Ltd

6/111 Moore Street
LEICHHARDT
NSW 2040 AUST
C&K
C&K Electronics Pty Ltd

PO Box 229
PARRAMATTA
NSW 2124 AUST
CAMBION
Cambion
Electronic Development Sales

Pty Ltd
PO Box 822
LANE COVE
NSW 2066 AUST
CATALYST
Catalyst
Veltek Pty Ltd

10 Harker Street
BURWOOD
VIC 3125 AUST
CTS
CTS Corporation
Moncrief Pty Ltd

8th Floor, 275 Alfred Street
NORTH SYDNEY
NSW 2060 AUST
DALE
Dale Electronics Inc.
EC Capacitors Pty Ltd

PO Box 224
RESERVOIR
VIC 3073 AUST
ELMA
Elma Electronics Ag
Associated Controls Pty Ltd

29 Smith Street
HILLSDALE
NSW 2036 AUST
ERICSSON
L. M. Ericsson Pty Ltd

PO Box 41
BROADMEADOWS
VIC 3047 AUST
ERNI
Erni Australia Pty Ltd

PO Box 62
MITCHAM
VIC 3132 AUST
FAIRCHILD
Fairchild
NSD Australia Pty Ltd

Locked Bag 9
BOX HILL
VIC 3128 AUST
G-2
HA72500
APPENDIX G
GHZ
GHZ Technologies Inc.

3800 Oakmead Village Drive
SANTA CLARA
CA 95051 USA
GSI
General Semiconductor
Industries
Clarke and Severn Electronics

2/107 Hunter Street
HORNSBY
NSW 2077 AUST
HARWIN
Harwin
Clarke and Severn Electronics

2/107 Hunter Street
HORNSBY
NSW 2077 AUST
HEWLETT
PACKARD
Hewlett Packard

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
HY-Q
HY-Q International (Australia)

Pty Ltd
PO Box 210
CLAYTON
VIC 3168 AUST
INTEL
Intel Corporation
Email Electronics
15-17 Hume Street
HUNTINGDALE
VIC 3166 AUST
IRC
International Rectifier
Corporation

Locked Bag 9
BOX HILL
VIC 3128 AUST
IRH
IRH Components
Locked Bag 33
LIDCOMBE
NSW 2141 AUST
ITT
ITT-STC
Alcatel Components Ltd

PO Box 317
ROSEBERY
NSW 2018 AUST
JOHANSON
Johanson Manufacturing
Corporation
Captron Pty Ltd

PO Box 1005
BROOKVALE
NSW 2100 AUST
K&L
MICROWAVE
K&L Microwave
Hawker de Havilland Victoria Ltd

GPO Box 779H
MELBOURNE
VIC 3001 AUST
G-3
HA72500
APPENDIX G
KDI
KDI/Triangle Electronics Inc
Electronic Development Sales

Pty Ltd
PO Box 822
LANE COVE
NSW 2066 AUST
KEMET
Kemet
IRH Components
Locked Bag 33
LIDCOMBE
NSW 2141 AUST
KLIPPON
Klippon Electricals Pty Ltd
Weidmuller (Klippon Products)

PO Box 323
PENRITH
NSW 2751 AUST
MATSUSHITA
Matsushita
RVB Products Pty Ltd

23 DeHavilland Road
BRAESIDE
VIC 3195 AUST
MAXIM
Maxim
Veltek Pty Ltd

10 Harker Street
BURWOOD
VIC 3125 AUST
McMURDO
McMurdo
Swann Electronics Group Limited

5 Dunlop Grove
MULGRAVE
VIC 3170 AUST
MILLER
MGI Incorporated
114 Pleasant Avenue
UPPER SADDLE RIVER
NJ 07458 USA
MICROLAB/FXR
Microlab/FXR
MINI-CIRCUITS
Sigra Electronics Incorporated

7397 Davie Road Extension
HOLLYWOOD
FLA 33024 USA
MOTOROLA
Motorola Semiconductor
Products

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
NATIONAL
National Semiconductor

Locked Bag 9
BOX HILL
VIC 3128 AUST
AWA Distribution
Tower A, 112-118 Talavera Road
NORTH RYDE
NSW 2113 AUST
G-4
HA72500
APPENDIX G
OMNISPECTRA
Sigra Electronics Incorporated

7397 Davie Road Extension
HOLLYWOOD
FLA 33024 USA
PHILIPS

PO Box 373
NORTH RYDE
NSW 2113 AUST
PHOENIX
Phoenix Contact
IRH Components
Locked Bag 33
LIDCOMBE
NSW 2141 AUST
PLESSEY
Plessey Semiconductors
GEC Electronics Division

Locked Bag 29
RYDALMERE
NSW 2116 AUST
RCA
RCA Solid State Division

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
RF TECHNIQUES
R. F. Techniques
140 San Lazaro Avenue
SUNNYVALE
CA 94086 USA
ROEDERSTEIN
Firmengruppe Roederstein
Meyer Kreig and Co.

PO Box 686
UNLEY
SA 5061 AUST
ROHM
ROHM Company
Fairmont Marketing
57 St Heftier Street
HEIDELBERG HEIGHTS
VIC 3081 AUST
SCOTT
Scott (EMC)
Ampec Technologies Pty Ltd

13 Smail Street
ULTIMO
NSW 2007 AUST
SGS-THOMSON
SGS-Thomson
GEC Electronics Division

Locked Bag 29
RYDALMERE
NSW 2116 AUST
SIDCHROME
J. Blackwood and Son Ltd

13 Cooper Street
SMITHFIELD
NSW 2164 AUST
G-5
HA72500
APPENDIX G
SIEMENS
Siemens Ltd
383 Pacific Highway
ARTARMON
NSW 2064 AUST
SIGNETICS
Signetics

PO Box 373
NORTH RYDE
NSW 2113 AUST
SPECTRUM
Spectrum Control
ASEA Brown Boveri Distribution

376 Newbridge Road
LIVERPOOL
NSW 2170 AUST
STANLEY
Stanley Tools
David Piper Pty Ltd

PO Box 161
CONCORD
NSW 2137 AUST
STAR
Star
Koloona Industries Pty Ltd

PO Box 177
MOOREBANK
NSW 2170 NSW
STRUTHERSDUNN
Struthers-Dunn Inc.
Aerospace and Defence Products

4/53 Kalang Road
ELANORA HEIGHTS
NSW 2101 AUST
SUHNER
Huber and Suhner (Australia)

Pty Ltd
PO Box 372
NARABEEN
NSW 2101 AUST
TELEDYNE
Teledyne Microwave
1290 Terra Bella Avenue
MOUNT VIEW
CA 94043 USA
TEXAS
INSTRUMENTS
Texas Instruments
UTILUX
Utilux Pty Ltd

PO Box 68
KINGSGROVE
NSW 2208 AUST
VARELCO
Varelco

PO Box 578
CROWS NEST
NSW 2065 AUST
M. Rutty and Company Pty Ltd

1/38 Leighton Place
HORNSBY
NSW 2077 AUST
G-6
HA72500
APPENDIX G
VERO
Vero Systems
IRH Components
Locked Bag 33
LIDCOMBE
NSW 2141 AUST
VITRAMON
Vitramon Pty Ltd

PO Box 94
AUBURN
NSW 2144 AUST
WILLIAM
HUGHES
William Hughes Inc.
Kingfisher International
4/19 Viewtech Place
ROWVILLE
VIC 3178 AUST
WIMA
Wilhelm Westerman
Techncial Imports Australia Pty

Ltd
PO Box 1120
CASTLE HILL
NSW 2154 AUST
G-7
HA72500
APPENDIX H
APPENDIX H
CTU SOFTWARE
H-i
HA72500
APPENDIX H
TABLE of CONTENTS
H.
CTU SOFTWARE ...................................................................................H-1
H.1
OVERVIEW
H-1
H.2
BEACON MODULE
H-5
H.2.1 The Beacon Control Task............................................................................ H-5
H.2.2 Power Up Sequence.................................................................................... H-6
H.2.3 Power Down Sequence ............................................................................... H-6
H.3
ZMODEM MODULE
H-6
H.4
NMP MODULE
H-7
H.5
MEASUREMENT MODULE
H-9
H.5.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. H-9
H.5.2 Interface to Other Software Modules........................................................... H-9
H.5.3 Measurement Types.................................................................................. H-10
H.5.4 Higher Level Measurement Functions in Other Modules .......................... H-12
H.6
TEST MODULE
H-13
H.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................ H-13
H.6.2 Test Module Tasks .................................................................................... H-13
H.6.3 Interface to Other Software Modules......................................................... H-14
H.7
LOCAL MODULE
H-15
H.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................ H-15
H.7.2 Local Module Tasks................................................................................... H-15
H.8
RCMS MODULE
H-16
H.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................ H-16
H.8.2 CMS Module Task ..................................................................................... H-16
H.9
STARTUP SOFTWARE
H-17
H.9.1 Hardware Initialise ..................................................................................... H-17
H.9.2 Software Initialise ...................................................................................... H-17
H.9.3 Production Test Software .......................................................................... H-17
H.10 TASK SCHEDULER
H-17
H.11 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
H-17
H.11.1Serial Interrupt Service Routine................................................................. H-17
H.11.2Timer Interrupt Service Routine................................................................. H-17
H-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX H
LIST of FIGURES
Figure H-1
Figure H-2
CTU Software Data Flow Diagram ........................................................ H-2

CTU Software Structure Diagram.......................................................... H-4
H-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.
CTU SOFTWARE
H.1
OVERVIEW
This appendix presents an overview of the operation of the Control and Test Unit (CTU)
software. For more detailed information about the operation of the CTU and the parent
DME LDB-102 system itself, see Appendix A.
The main functions of the software are:
a. To control the operation of an LDB-102 DME navaid with either single or dual
transponder configuration. This control may be exercised either locally or
remotely.
b. To collect and display (either locally or remotely) the operational status of the
various modules of the LDB-102 and of the overall beacon.
c. To measure a number of operational parameters from the various modules of the
LDB-102 for use by the Remote Maintenance and Monitoring (RMM) system, if
this option is installed.
d. To control the test functions of the LDB-102.
In order to accomplish these objectives, the CTU software is divided into a number of
self-contained modules which are linked with various data flows. This is shown
diagrammatically in Figure H-1. These modules are:
Zmodem Module.
NMP (Navaid Maintenance Processor) Interface Module.
RCMS (Remote Control and Monitoring System) Module.
Local Module.
Test Module.
Measurement Module.
Beacon Module.
H-1
HA72500
Figure H-1
APPENDIX H
CTU Software Data Flow Diagram
H-2
HA72500
APPENDIX H
There are four hardware blocks to which the CTU software must interface, each aspect
of which is taken care of by a separate software module:
The CTU serial port hardware.

The CTU serial port data is handled by the Zmodem Module, which uses RMM
messages to communicate with the NMP Interface Module.
The RCMS hardware interface.

The RCMS interface hardware is handled by the RCMS Module, which reads the
RCMS inputs and controls the RCMS outputs.
The CTU front panel.

The control switches and status indicators on the CTU front panel are handled by
the Local Module, while the test switches and indicators on the CTU front panel
are handled by the Test Module.
The CTU transponder hardware.

The Beacon Module handles the control and status of the transponder hardware,
while the Measurement Module handles the transponder hardware measurement
registers.
The NMP Interface, RCMS and Local Modules are all used to convey control and status
information to the Beacon Module using the data paths shown in Figure H-1. The Test
Module and Measurement Module convey measurement requests and results to the
Beacon Module.
The software structure diagram, shown in Figure H-2, broadly describes the control flow
of the CTU software. The diagram is read from top to bottom, and left to right. Each
rectangle represents a logical block or module of software. If there is a choice between
modules, each rectangle at that particular level will have a small circle in the top right
hand corner of that rectangle. If there is a loop in a module, or group of modules, a small
circular arrow symbol is shown on the input to those modules.
There are two infinite loops in the CTU software; one is formed in the Task Scheduler,
and the other is in the Production Test software module. Additional software modules
shown on the flow diagram are:
Hardware Initialise Module.
Software Initialise Module.
Interrupt Service Routines.
Task Scheduler.
Production Test Module.
Descriptions of each of the functions shown in Figure H-2 are given in the following
sections.
H-3
HA72500
Figure H-2
APPENDIX H
CTU Software Structure Diagram
H-4
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.2
BEACON MODULE
H.2.1
The Beacon Control Task
The predominant function of the CTU software is that of beacon control. To this end, the
Beacon Control Task can be said to have four distinct states:
a. OFF;
b. BEACON_NO1;
c. BEACON_NO2; and
d. SHUTDOWN.
The beacon starts in the OFF state. If either transponder is currently on, but not selected
as main by the front panel switches (initially OFF is selected), it is powered down. The
task then continually waits for either the Local control task functions or the NMP/RCMS
tasks (in the case of remote access) to signal that the user has turned on one of the
transponders using the SELECT MAIN switches. The internal beacon variables are then
reset and either the BEACON_NO1 or BEACON_NO2 states are entered, depending
upon which transponder was selected as main.
In the BEACON_NO1 or BEACON_NO2 states, the Beacon Control Task cycles through
the following actions:
a. If the battery is not OK or if any front panel switch changes have occurred, return
to the OFF state to properly set the internal variables to reflect the new
conditions.
b. If in BEACON_NO1 state and Transponder 2 is currently powered, then power it
down. If in BEACON_NO2 state and Transponder 1 is currently powered, then
power it down.
c. If in BEACON_NO1 state and Transponder 1 is currently powered down, then
power it up. If in BEACON_NO2 state and Transponder 2 is currently powered
down, then power it up.
d. Determine whether any faults are present. This includes performing a monitor
module self-test every 15 seconds.
e. If the DME is a dual configuration, and the currently operating transponder's
faults are 'worse' than the current standby transponder's (that is, if the operating
transponder has any fault while the current standby has none, or the operating
transponder has a primary fault while the current standby has a secondary fault)
then the current transponder is powered down, the transfer flag is set, and the
task enters either the BEACON_NO1 or BEACON_NO2 state, depending upon
which transponder is currently in standby. Otherwise, if there are primary faults,
power down the currently operating transponder, then enter the SHUTDOWN
state.
In the SHUTDOWN state, the Beacon Control Task firstly increments the shutdown
count, then proceeds to power down any transponder that is still operating. All test
interrogator and monitor modules are powered down and the recycle timer is reset. The
task then waits either for the user to SELECT MAIN OFF or, if retries are permitted, for
the retry counter to expire before entering the OFF state.
H-5
HA72500
H.2.2
APPENDIX H
Power Up Sequence
When a transponder is powered up, the following sequence of events takes place:
a. Switch the antenna to the desired transponder.
b. Switch the associated ident in/out controls to the desired transponder.
c. Switch on the available test interrogator/monitor modules.
d. 20 milliseconds delay for power stabilisation.
e. Switch on the transponder supply.
f.
20 milliseconds delay for power stabilisation.
g. Switch on the power amplifier supply.

h. 20 milliseconds delay for power stabilisation.
i.
Enable RF and the replies.
j.
Wait for the selected cold start delay, or wait for the 2-second warm start delay.
k. Enable ident transmission if monitor alarms are normal.
H.2.3
Power Down Sequence
When a transponder is powered down, the following sequence of events takes place:
a. Inhibit replies.
b. Disable RF output.
c. If cold standby or faults, turn off the power amplifier and transponder hardware
power supplies, otherwise turn on the power amplifier and transponder hardware
supplies.
H.3
ZMODEM MODULE
The CTU communicates with the RMM System using Zmodem data packets. In order to
achieve reliable transmission and reception of such packets, the Zmodem file transfer
protocol is used as the transport mechanism for the Zmodem data packets.
When the Zmodem Task is passed an RMM message from the NMP Task, it initiates a
Zmodem session (using Zmodem packets) with the RMM system via the CTU serial port.
Once the session has been established, the RMM message is encapsulated within a
Zmodem data packet and sent to the serial port. Upon completion, the session is
terminated and the success or failure of the transmission is conveyed to the NMP Task.
A success indication is a guarantee that the message was received by the RMM system.
When the CTU serial port indicates that there are incoming characters, the Zmodem
Task scans the incoming data stream for Zmodem packets in order to establish a
Zmodem session. Once this is done, the incoming Zmodem data packets have their
contents (an RMM message) extracted and buffered. When the Zmodem session is
terminated successfully, the Zmodem Task signals the NMP Task that an RMM
message was received and waits for the NMP Task to remove the message from its
buffer.
H-6
HA72500
H.4
APPENDIX H
NMP MODULE
The NMP Task accepts RMM messages from the Zmodem Task, performs the
appropriate actions, and returns any relevant data to the RMIM system in the form of
RMM messages.
The following table lists the events that may be received from the RMM System and
indicates the NMP Task's responses to them.
EVENT RECEIVED FROM RMM SYSTEM
SERVICE PROVIDED BY NMP TASK
Received Initiate Message from RMM System
Send Acknowledge Message to the RMM

System
Received Terminate Message from RMM

System
Send Terminate Message to the RMM System
Received Check Message from RMM System
Send Acknowledge Message to the RMM

System
Received Control Message from RMM

System with a SET_OFF argument
If SOURCE switch is set to REMOTE, signal

Beacon Task to turn off the DME, otherwise
send an Error Message with an
ERR_SOURCE argument

System with a SET_NO1 argument
If SOURCE switch is set to REMOTE and

Transponder 2 is not selected as main, select
Transponder 1 as main and turn it on.
If the SOURCE switch is set to LOCAL, send
an Error Message with an ERR_SOURCE
argument.
If the SOURCE switch is set to REMOTE but
SELECT MAIN is set to NO2, send an Error
Message with an ERR-MODE argument.

System with a SET_NO2 argument
If SOURCE switch is set to REMOTE and

Transponder 1 is not selected as main, select
Transponder 2 as main and turn it on.
If the SOURCE switch is set to LOCAL, send
an Error Message with an ERR_SOURCE
argument.
If the SOURCE switch is set to REMOTE but
SELECT MAIN is set to NO1, send an Error
Message with an ERR_MODE argument.
Received an Info Request Message from

RMM System with a GET_STATUS argument
Send Status Message to RMM System
Received an Info Request Message from

RMM System with a GET_MEASUREMENTS
argument
If the MAINTENANCE switch is OFF, request

measurement results from the Measurement
Task then send a Measurement Message to
the RMM System, otherwise send an Error
Message with an ERR_MODE argument.
H-7
HA72500
APPENDIX H
The NMP Task may also receive requests from the Beacon Control Task or the Local
Task to send performance characteristics and navaid status information to the RMM
system. The following table lists the events in Beacon Control Task or Local Task that
cause service requests to the NMP Task, as well as the NMP Task's response to them.
EVENT RECEIVED FROM RMM SYSTEM
SERVICE PROVIDED BY NMP TASK
Local Task detects a CTU Front Panel control

switch was pressed
Send a Switch Change Message to the RMM

System. The argument can be one of the
following:
OFF_SELECTED,
NO1_SELECTED,
NO2_SELECTED,
MON_ACTION_INHIBITED,
MON_ACTION_ENABLED,
MAINTENANCE_SELECTED,
MAINTENANCE_DESELECTED,
LOCAL_SELECTED,
REMOTE_SELECTED,
RECYCLE_SELECTED or
RECYCLE_DESELECTED.
Beacon Task detects a Primary or Secondary

Fault
Send an Alarm Message (with either a

P_ALARMS or S_ALARMS argument) and a
Postfault Measurement Message to the RMM
System
Beacon Task took some form of action due to

faults or low battery power
Send an Action Message to the RMM System.

The argument can be one of the following:
POWERDOWN_NO1,
POWERDOWN_NO2,
POWERUP_NO1,
POWERUP_NO2,
TRANSFER_TO_NO1,
TRANSFER_TO_NO2,
SHUTDOWN_FAULTS,
SHUTDOWN_BATTERY,
STOP_RECYCLE,
WAIT_RECYCLE,
RESTART_FAULTS or
RESTART_BATTERY.
Beacon Task detects low battery voltage
Send a Power Message to the RMM System
H-8
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.5
MEASUREMENT MODULE
H.5.1
Introduction
The Measurement Module is a collection of functions used by the other tasks to operate
the measurement hardware in the LDB-102 DME. The other tasks communicate with the
Measurement Module by initialising the input fields of the control buffer, calling the
relevant modules, and reading the results from the output fields of this buffer.
To prevent tasks from interfering with each other, a priority system is set up for each
basic class of measurement that can be performed. A task whose priority is higher than
the current task using the measurement functions can interrupt that measurement. The
lower priority task will then receive an error message to indicate that its measurement
did not complete successfully.
When the entry functions are called, they in turn call more specific functions, depending
on the requested measurement class and type. For example when 'MeasureRead' is
called requesting a 24 volts measurement, this function calls 'MeasureReadVolts' to
perform the measurement. As each of the monitor fault limit measurements is
significantly different from the others, the 'MeasureReadLimit' function calls individual
functions for each of the monitor fault limits.
H.5.2
Interface to Other Software Modules
Other software modules interface to the measurement functions by:

a. Setting up the test interrogation level and rate, using the 'MeasureSet' function.
b. Setting up the interface buffer area, an area unique to each module that requires
measurement functions to be performed.
c. Calling the 'MeasureStart' function, passing it a pointer to the initialised buffer
area. If there are problems with the data fields or another higher priority function
is currently using the measurement facilities, an error message will be returned
and the measurements not started. If the measurements were successfully
started, a NO_ERROR message will be returned and the selected measurement
started.
d. The calling module can check on the progress of the selected measurement by
calling the 'MeasureRead', with the pointer to the buffer area, and checking for
the error messages from this routine. When NO_ERROR has been returned, the
selected measurement has been done and the results stored in the buffer area,
and the measurement hardware has been stopped using a call to the
'MeasureStop' function.
e. The calling module needs to check that the measurement has not been
interrupted by a module with higher priority; if this has happened the
measurement shall be restarted by the calling module if required.
f.
Resetting the test interrogation level and rate, using the 'MeasureSet' function.
H-9
HA72500
APPENDIX H
The structure of the interface buffer is:

monitor
input
calling routine shall state which test interrogator/monitor module is

to used for the requested measurement.
tpndr
input
specify the transponder that is on.
class
input
specify the generic type of measurement to be done

(e.g.: RATES, TIMES, etc).
type
input
specify the type of measurement to be done

(e.g.: DELAY, SPACING, etc).
ti_rate
input
current test interrogation rate set on the hardware.
ti_level
input
current test interrogation level set on the hardware.
info
output
pointer to a lookup information table for the display strings, scaling

factor, and units associated with a particular measurement, set up
by 'MeasureStart' routines.
value1
output
result of a measurement.
value2
output
result of a measurement; for example, from second channel or the

upper limit.
The structure of the information table used for information on display and scaling is:
name
pointer to an ASCII string, up to 15 characters, used to describe the quantity

being measured.
format
pointer to a string, up to five characters, used to specify the format to be

used by the display functions.
units
pointer to a string, up to four characters, to be displayed after the

measurement, for the units of the display.
offset
added to the result before the result is displayed.
scale
multiplied with the result before it is displayed.
H.5.3
Measurement Types
The CTU hardware is designed to measure 'time', 'rate', 'voltage', 'Boolean', and 'monitor
fault limits'. The first four classes of measurements may be run in parallel, and each
channel may be running at the same time. If any monitor fault limit is started, no other
class of measurement can be started.
a. The test interrogator module can provide the following time measurements, in
0.1 microseconds steps:
0 microseconds calibration
Delay
Spacing
Transmit pulse width
Transmit pulse rise time
Transmit pulse fall time
100 microseconds calibration pulse width - from the internal test
interrogator timebase.
H-10
HA72500
APPENDIX H
b. The test interrogator module can provide the following rate measurements, with a
1 MHz timebase:
0 Hz calibration
Decoded pulse rate
Transmit pulse rate
Transponder efficiency
5 kHz calibration rate - from the internal test interrogator timebase.
c. The monitor module can provide the following voltage measurements, in

256 steps from 0 to 5 volts:
0 volts level
Receiver video oscillator level
Receiver video driver level
Transmitter drive level
Transmitter driver modulation level
Power amplifier drive level
Power amplifier modulation level
Power amplifier output level
Power amplifier supply level
Test interrogator RF level
Transponder power output level
Transponder 15 volts supply level
Transponder 18 volts supply level
Transmitter driver power supply level
Battery 24 volts supply level
A DC voltage calibration signal.
d. The monitor module can sample the following flags:
Monitor module power supply status

Receiver video module power supply status
Test interrogator module power supply status
Receiver video RF triggers normal.
e. The test interrogator and monitor modules can provide the following monitor fault
limit measurements:
Lower reply delay limit

Upper reply delay limit
Lower spacing limit
Upper spacing limit
Lower transmit rate limit
Upper transmit rate limit
Lower efficiency limit
Lower output power limit.
H-11
HA72500
H.5.4
APPENDIX H
Higher Level Measurement Functions in Other Modules
The NMP interface module has the following measurement functions, to measure all the
indicated parameters sequentially, except the calibration signals, and using only one test
interrogator/monitor module at a time. The following functions also format and write to
the output RMM message buffer:
'NmpMeasureAllTimes' measures all the times.
'NmpMeasureAllRates' measures all the rates.
NmpMeasureAllVolts' measures all the voltages, also used in the beacon

postfault measurements.
'NmpMeasureAllBooleans' measures all Booleans, also used in the beacon

postfault measurements.
'NmpMeasureAllLimits' measures all the limits, also used in the beacon postfault
measurements.
H-12
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.6
TEST MODULE
H.6.1
Introduction
The test module is a group of tasks that handle the operation of the test section of the
Control and Test Unit (CTU) user interface. This module also provides a collection of
functions used by the other software modules to access the functions of the test section
needed by the other modules. and to communicate with the test module.
H.6.2
Test Module Tasks
There are three test module tasks - Test Measure Task, Test TI Task, and Test Flash
Task.
Test Measure Task performs the following functions:
a. Start a new parameter measurement when a new parameter is selected, and
stop the measurements when the parameter is deselected, or the menu is
changed.
b. Run the measurement process:
1. Call the required measurement functions, including the initialising and running
the buffer areas.
2. Process and display the results, together with the required text strings.
3. Detect and display any exceptions that may occur ('overflow').
4. Detect hardware problems, and display 'wait if a valid reading is not available
after 6 seconds.
c. Trigger the flashing of the softkeys when a measurement is started, and stop the
flashing when the measurement is stopped.
Test TI Task handles the following functions:
a. Monitor the status of the TI RATE 1 kHz pushbutton. If the maintenance function
has been selected, toggle the test interrogation pulse repetition frequency
(TIPRF) between the normal rate (50 Hz or 100 Hz) and the 1 kHz rate,
otherwise generate <<< Select MAINTENANCE first >>> error message.
b. Monitor the status of the TI RATE 10 kHz pushbutton. If the maintenance
function has been selected, then while this button is pressed select the test
interrogation pulse repetition frequency (TIPRF) of 10 kHz; when this button is
released, return the TIPFIF to the previously selected rate (50 Hz or 100 Hz or
1 kHz rates). If the maintenance function has not been selected, generate
<<< Select MAINTENANCE first >>> error message.
Test Flash Task handles the following functions:
a. Flash five time any error messages that are required by other functions and
tasks.
b. Flash the softkey labels while there is a parameter measurement is in progress.
H-13
HA72500
H.6.3
APPENDIX H
a. Test Menu Processor.

This function is called by the Local Task, when a test section activated
pushbutton is detected. This function then takes the necessary action to change
the current menu or action the selected menu item.
b. Miscellaneous Display Drivers.
These functions are called when other software modules need to access the LCD
display in the test section.
H-14
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.7
LOCAL MODULE
H.7.1
Introduction
The test module is a group of tasks that handle the operation of the control section of the
Control and Test Unit (CTU) user interface. This module provides the necessary user
feedback, including any error messages, to guide the user in the operation of the
LDB-102. This module also provides a collection of functions used by the other software
modules to access the functions of the control section needed by the other modules, and
to communicate with the local module.
H.7.2
Local Module Tasks
There are two local module tasks, Local Task and Local Options Task.
Local Task operates the keyboard hardware and, if there is any activity, calls the
relevant processor module. If a pushbutton from the control section is pressed, it calls
the 'Local Switch Processor' routine. If a pushbutton from the test section of the front
panel is pressed, it calls the 'Test Menu Processor' routine. The task waits for the
pushbutton to be released before the pushbutton processor routines are called again.
The two TI RATE pushbuttons (1 kHz and 10 kHz) are handled by the Test Module.
Local Options Task handles the following functions:
a. Collect the power status of the LDB-102, and update this status to the CTU front
panel and to the CTU RCMS system.
b. Collect the options set on the CTU switches (internal and external), and update
and initialise the internal 'Controls' database.
c. Detect the test interrogator/monitor modules being placed in 'normal' mode, and
rewrite the control latches in these modules.
d. Update the 'test' status indicators from the transponder hardware. The TEST
indicators will be on if the important transponder module switches or the antenna
relay are not if the correct position for normal operation.
e. Toggle the watchdog timer hardware, to prevent a hardware reset.
H.7.3
a. Local Put Controls.

This function is called when another module needs to write to the indicators in
the control section of the CTU front panel.
b. Local Put Status.
This function is called when a module needs to write to the indicators in the
status section of the CTU front panel.
c. Local Put Alarms.
This function, and Local Show Alarms', are called when a module needs to write
to the indicators in the alarm section of the CTU front panel. These routines also
select which transponder's alarms are displayed, depending on the input from the
menu system.
d. Local Put Power.
This function is called when a module needs to write to the indicators in the
status section of the CTU front panel. This function also operates the heartbeat
indicators on the CTU processor and front panel boards.
H-15
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.8
RCMS MODULE
H.8.1
Introduction
The RCMS module is a task that handle the operation of the Remote Control and
Maintenance System (RCMS) of the Control and Test Unit (CTU) RCMS interface. This
module also provides a collection of functions used by the other software modules to
access the functions of the RCMS interface hardware needed by the other modules, and
to communicate with the RCMS module.
H.8.2
CMS Module Task
This task monitors the RCMS control inputs if the transponder is set to remote control via
the RCMS system. There is an active input the Beacon Set Controls' routine is called to
select OFF', NO1 ON', or 'NO2 ON, via the relevant control routines.
H.8.3
a. RCMS Put Controls.

This function is called when another software module needs to write the control
status to the outputs of the RCMS interface.
b. RCMS Put Status.
This function is called when another software module needs to write the beacon
status to the status outputs of the RCMS interface.
c. RCMS Put Alarms.
This function is called when another software module needs to write to the alarm
status to the status outputs of the RCMS interface.
d. RCMS Put Power.
This function is called when another software module needs to write to the power
status to the status outputs of the RCMS interface. This routine also operates the
heartbeat indicator on the RCMS interface board.
H-16
HA72500
APPENDIX H
H.9
STARTUP SOFTWARE
H.9.1
Hardware Initialise
The startup code will perform the following hardware tests and initialisations:
ROM test; the 'ROM TEST OK indicator on the CTU processor board will be lit if
the test passes.
RAM test; the 'RAM TEST OK indicator on the CTU processor board will be lit if
the test passes.
Initialise the 80186 hardware, including interrupt controller, address decoder and
timer hardware.
Initialise the interrupt vector tables.
Initialise the initialised 'C' variables.
Initialise the library routines, and their variables.
H.9.2
Software Initialise
The software initialise section of the main routine will execute the 'Init' function from each
of the software modules.
H.9.3
Production Test Software
If the production tests are selected, they will loop, waiting for a control input, until the
processor is turned off or reset. If the production software is not enabled, the normal
operational software will be started by initialising and then starting the Task Scheduler.
H.10
TASK SCHEDULER
The Task Scheduler is a co-operative round robin task scheduler. This means that each
task is run in turn (or restarted), and each task has full control of the processor, and
resources, until it decides to release control. When all the tasks have been run, the first
one is restarted, then the next one, etc.
H.11
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
H.11.1
Serial Interrupt Service Routine
This routine is called by the hardware when a character is received on the serial port.
The character is then saved in a circular buffer for the 'Zmodem' routines. There is no
transmit interrupt service routine set up, as the characters are transmitted directly by the
'Zmodem' routines. When the production tests are running the 'Zmodem' protocol in not
used.
H.11.2
Timer Interrupt Service Routine
The third internal 80186 timer is set up to produce a regular 10 milliseconds interrupt.
The timer interrupt service routine decrements 16 software timers once every timer tick,
until they are zero. Fifteen of these timers are 16-bit numbers, giving a maximum time of
655 seconds (approximately 10 minutes). These software timers are used by various
software modules to time various actions in real-time, such as flashing displays and
timing the hardware actions and responses. The 16th software timer is a 32-bit number,
giving the range necessary to detect and process the recycle rate.
H-17
HA72500
APPENDIX I
APPENDIX I
COMPONENT LAYOUT DIAGRAMS
I-i
HA72500
APPENDIX I
TABLE of CONTENTS
I.
COMPONENT LAYOUT DRAWINGS .......................................................... I-1
I-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX I
LIST of FIGURES
Figure I-1
Figure I-2
Figure I-3
Figure I-4
Figure I-5
Figure I-6
Figure I-7
Figure I-8
Figure I-9
Figure I-10
Figure I-11
Figure I-12
Figure I-13
Figure I-14
Figure I-15
Figure I-16
Figure I-17
Figure I-18
Figure I-19
Figure I-20
Figure I-21
Figure I-22
Figure I-23
Figure I-24
Figure I-25
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72511 Main PWB Assembly, Monitor Module ..... I-1
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72512 Peak Power Monitor ................................. I-2
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72515 Main PWB Assembly, Test Interrogator ... I-3
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72516 RF Generator ........................................... I-4
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72518 Modulator and Detector ........................... I-5
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72519 Reply Detector ......................................... I-6
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72521 Main PWB Assembly, Receiver Video ..... I-7
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72522 RF Source ................................................ I-8
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72523 IF Amplifier ............................................... I-9
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72524 RF Amplifier ....................................... I-10
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72526 Main PWB Assembly,
Transponder Power Supply ............................................................................... I-11
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72531 Pulse Shaper PWB Assembly ............ I-12
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72532 Exciter ................................................ I-13
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72538 RF Amplifier Driver PWB Assembly ... I-14
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72541 Control and Status PWB Assembly.... I-15
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72542 DC-DC Converter PWB Assembly ..... I-16
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72543 Regulator PWB Assembly .................. I-17
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72544 1kW Power Amplifier
Connector PWB Assembly ................................................................................ I-18
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72547 RF Panel PWB Assembly
- Single DME ..................................................................................................... I-19
- Dual DME ........................................................................................................ I-20
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72552 CTU Processor PWB Assembly ........ I-21
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72553 CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly ...... I-22
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72555 RCMS Interface PWB Assembly ........ I-23
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72556 Transponder Subrack Motherboard ... I-24
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72557 External I/O PWB Assembly .............. I-25
I-iii
HA72500
I.
Figure I-1
APPENDIX I
COMPONENT LAYOUT DRAWINGS

Monitor Module
I-1
HA72500
Figure I-2
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72512 Peak Power Monitor
I-2
HA72500
Figure I-3
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72515 Main PWB Assembly, Test

Interrogator
I-3
HA72500
Figure I-4
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72516 RF Generator
I-4
HA72500
Figure I-5
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72518 Modulator and Detector
I-5
HA72500
Figure I-6
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72519 Reply Detector
I-6
HA72500
Figure I-7
APPENDIX I

Receiver Video
I-7
HA72500
Figure I-8
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72522 RF Source
I-8
HA72500
Figure I-9
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72523 IF Amplifier
I-9
HA72500
Figure I-10
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72524 RF Amplifier
I-10
HA72500
Figure I-11
APPENDIX I

I-11
HA72500
Figure I-12
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72531 Pulse Shaper PWB

Assembly
I-12
HA72500
Figure I-13
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72532 Exciter
I-13
HA72500
Figure I-14
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72538 RF Amplifier Driver PWB

Assembly
I-14
HA72500
Figure I-15
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72541 Control and Status PWB

Assembly
I-15
HA72500
Figure I-16
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72542 DC-DC Converter PWB

Assembly
I-16
HA72500
Figure I-17
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72543 Regulator PWB Assembly
I-17
HA72500
Figure I-18
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72544 1kW Power Amplifier

Connector PWB Assembly
I-18
HA72500
Figure I-19
APPENDIX I

- Single DME
I-19
HA72500
Figure I-20
APPENDIX I

- Dual DME
I-20
HA72500
Figure I-21
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72552 CTU Processor

PWB Assembly
I-21
HA72500
Figure I-22
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72553 CTU Front Panel PWB

Assembly
I-22
HA72500
Figure I-23
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72555 RCMS Interface PWB

Assembly
I-23
HA72500
Figure I-24
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72556 Transponder Subrack

Motherboard
I-24
HA72500
Figure I-25
APPENDIX I
Component Layout Diagram : 1A72557 External I/O PWB Assembly
I-25
HA72500
APPENDIX J
APPENDIX J
J-i
HA72500
APPENDIX J
TABLE of CONTENTS
J.
AC POWER SUPPLY 3A71130.................................................................. J-1
J.1
DOCUMENTATION
J-1
J-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX J
J.
J.1
DOCUMENTATION
This power supply replaces the earlier version type 2A71130, which was manufactured
by Ericsson as the BMTP 344002 Rectifier.
All technical, operation and maintenance information for the 3A71130 AC Power Supply
is contained in a separate handbook, HA71130.
J-1
HA72500
APPENDIX K
APPENDIX K
DEPOT TEST FACILITY 3A72500
K-i
HA72500
APPENDIX K
TABLE of CONTENTS
K.
DEPOT TEST FACILITY 3A72500 .............................................................K-1
K.1
K-1
K.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. K-1
K.1.2 Functional Description ................................................................................. K-1
K.1.3 Major Items.................................................................................................. K-1
K.2
K-2
K.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. K-2
K.2.2 Initial Settings .............................................................................................. K-2
K.2.3 Application of Power.................................................................................... K-3
K.2.4 Local Maintenance Operation...................................................................... K-4
K.2.5 Signal Generator Adjustments..................................................................... K-5
K.2.6 Operating Notes .......................................................................................... K-6
K.3
K-7
K.3.1 System......................................................................................................... K-7
K.3.2 Module Descriptions .................................................................................... K-7
K.4
UNIT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
K-11
K.4.1 RF Generator (Modified) 2A72516 ............................................................ K-11
K.5
DRAWINGS
K-14
K.6
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE
K-15
K.6.1 3A72500 DME LDB-102 Depot Test Facility ............................................. K-15
K.6.2 3A72505 Rack Assembly (Depot Test Facility) ......................................... K-15
K.6.3 2A72514 Test Interrogator......................................................................... K-15
K.6.4 A72516 RF Generator (Modified) .............................................................. K-16
K.6.5 2A72520 Receiver Video........................................................................... K-17
K.6.6 3A72558 Rack Frame Wired (Depot Test Facility) .................................... K-17
K-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX K
LIST of FIGURES
Figure K-1
Figure K-2
Depot Test Facility Rack Layout............................................................ K-9

Depot Test Facility Signal Flow Diagram............................................. K-10
K-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX K
K.
DEPOT TEST FACILITY 3A72500
K.1
K.1.1
Introduction
The DME Depot Test Facility type 3A72500 is basically a single LDB-102 DME rack type
1A72505 which has been modified to provide for more flexible operation, thus enabling
easier testing of DME subunits. This appendix contains information which includes a
description of the variations and additions within the rack, both technical and operational,
with component parts lists and circuit diagrams.
K.1.2
Functional Description
The Depot Test Facility is intended for a central maintenance depot where LDB-102
DME line-replaceable units (LRUs) can be fully serviced - fault location, component
replacement or repair, and unit testing.
Whilst DME rack faults can only be diagnosed and repaired on site, LRUs can more
efficiently be restored to operational condition at a fully equipped maintenance depot.
This depot test bench is based on an LDB-102 DME Single 1kW rack to allow for
substitution of LRUs on test into a working transponder. A recommended set of test
equipment is used, in conjunction with the rack, to fully exercise any LRU under its
normal working conditions. Diagnosis, repair, re-alignment and re-test may be performed
on the frequency at which the LRU is to be used.
The principal difference between the Depot Test Rack and a standard DME rack is the
inclusion of two synthesiser signal generators, to act as reply (and local oscillator)
frequency source and test interrogation frequency source.
K.1.3
Major Items
The following list details the major components in the Depot Test Facility rack, many of
them being LDB-102 standard parts:
Power Distribution Panel (Single)
Monitor Module
Test Interrogator, Modified
Transmitter Driver
Receiver Video, Modified
Signal Generator, UHF
1kW PA Power Supply
AC Power Supply
RF Panel
Including Preselector Filter
Directional Coupler
Circulator
1A72550
1A72549
1A72510
2A72514
1A72525
1A72530
2A72520
LEADER 3220 (Qty 2)
1A72535
1A72540
3A71130
1A72545
1A72516
1A69755
These items are housed in the equipment rack as shown in Figure K-1.
K-1
HA72500
APPENDIX K
K.2
K.2.1
Introduction
a. The procedures in this section detail the steps required to place a DME Depot
Test Rack into operation. Each mode of operation is described separately and
some guidance is given concerning action required when abnormal performance
occurs.
b. For in-depth explanation of the various controls, indicators, and facilities, refer to
the following sections:
CTU Facilities and Operating Procedure: see Section A.3;
Module Controls and Indicators: see Section A.4;
Module Preset Switches and Links: see Section A5.
Note that an ANTENNA INTEGRITY test fixture, as described in

Section 3.3.3.9.3, is to be fitted to XN2 on the RF Panel PWB Assembly, as no
antenna is used. Check that the coaxial cables from the signal generators for
reply signal and interrogation signal inputs are connected to receiver video and
test interrogator modules respectively (refer to Drawing 72505-2-21).
K.2.2
Initial Settings
The following table lists the settings of the front panel switches prior to placing the test
rack in operation. These settings are independent of the final mode of operation of the
rack.
UNIT
SWITCH
SETTING
AC Power Supply
POWER
OFF
Both circuit breakers
OFF
Monitor
MONITOR OUTPUTS
NORMAL
Test Interrogator
MONITOR AND
INTERROGATOR DC POWER
NORMAL
NORMAL
Transmitter Driver
DRIVER DC POWER
NORMAL
Receiver Video
IDENT
NORMAL
1kW PA Power Supply
AMPLIFIER DC POWER
NORMAL
Control and Test Unit (CTU)
ALARM DELAY
As required
K-2
HA72500
K.2.3
APPENDIX K
a. On the AC power supply, set the POWER switch on. Check that the front panel
voltmeter indicates a voltage of 27.0 0.5 volts.
b. On both signal generators, set the POWER switch on
c. On the power distribution panel, set both circuit breakers on. After a short delay
AC PWR NORM
BATT CH1
LOCAL (press LOCAL pushbutton if the indicator is off)
OFF/RESET (press OFF/RESET pushbutton if the indicator is off)
MAINTENANCE (press MAINTENANCE pushbutton if the indicator is off)
d. Check that the following CTU front panel indicators are off:
TEST section:
MODULES
ANT RELAY
POWER section:
BATT CH2
BATT LOW
RECYCLE (press RECYCLE pushbutton if the RECYCLE indicator is on)
LOCAL (press LOCAL pushbutton if the REMOTE indicator is on)
MONITOR ALARM (press MONITOR ALARM INHIBIT pushbutton if the
indicator is on)
STATUS section:
NO1 ON
NO2 ON
NORMAL
TRANSFER
SHUTDOWN
If the indications are contrary to the above, refer to Section K.2.6 below.
K-3
HA72500
K.2.4
APPENDIX K
Local Maintenance Operation
The 'maintenance' mode is normally used during servicing or alignment in the test rack.
The 'maintenance' mode is essentially the same as the 'normal' mode, except that more
extensive tests are available from the CTU, and the 1 kHz and 10 kHz TI RATE
switches are enabled.
K.2.4.1
Switch-on Procedure
a. Set the front panel switches initially as in Section K.2.2.

b. Apply mains power to the rack as in Section K.2.3.
c. Check that the LOCAL and MAINTENANCE indicators are on.
2. NO1 ON status indicator on, after the selected ALARM DELAY time.
fault is present.
K.2.4.2
K.2.4.3
Reset Procedure
To reset the rack following a shutdown due to an alarm, press the SELECT MAIN,
OFF/RESET pushbutton, and then press the SELECT MAIN, NO1 pushbutton.
K-4
HA72500
K.2.5
APPENDIX K
Signal Generator Adjustments
The two RF signal generators must be set up for both frequency and output level, to
provide the correct drive to the associated units in the rack, before the Depot Test Rack
can become operational.
a. Set the frequencies of both generators to the appropriate frequencies for the
DME channel required; see Appendix L for the channel frequency tables.
The upper signal generator shall be set to the AIRBORNE INTERROGATION
FREQUENCY and the lower one to the GROUND REPLY FREQUENCY.
Depress the signal generator keys in the order:
FUNCTION
DATA
UNIT
FREQ
(enter frequency digits)
MHz/dBm
Check the display for correct entry in each case.

b. Check that the MODULATION function is disabled by pressing MOD ON
repeatedly until no characters are visible in the MODULATION display.
c. Set the output level of the lower signal generator to +4 dBm.
Depress the signal generator keys in order:
FUNCTION
DATA
UNIT
LEVEL
4.0
MHz/dBm
Check the OUTPUT LEVEL display for correct entry.

d. Set the output level of the upper signal generator as follows:
1. Connect a calibrated oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED
Measure the peak amplitude of the displayed pulses:
2. Adjust the signal generator level, starting at -10 dBm, to achieve a peak
amplitude of 3.0 0.1 volts. (The signal generator level must remain in the
range -3 dBm to -7 dBm).
K-5
HA72500
K.2.6
APPENDIX K
Operating Notes
For a full definition of the CTU controls and indicators, refer to Section A.3 - CTU
Controls and Indicators.
The following notes are given to assist the operator when an abnormal indication occurs
on the CTU:
a. If the AC PWR NORM, and BATT CHG1 indicators are not on after the power
distribution panel circuit breakers are closed, then the operation of the AC power
supply should be checked for the presence of AC mains and correct DC output
voltage.
the transponder will not switch on. The DC output from the AC power supply and
the battery voltage should be checked.
c. If the CTU fault indicator, in the ALARM REGISTER, turns on after the power
operating correctly. Reset the system by switching the circuit breakers off then on
again. If the CTU fault indicator is still on, or flashing, then the CTU module
should be replaced.
tolerance; if this parameter is a primary fault, the transponder should shut down
after the ALARM DELAY period. The indicators in the ALARM REGISTER can
be used as a guide to locating the cause of the fault condition, after the
transponder has shut down. (See also Section 4.1.2 for LRU fault location).
K-6
HA72500
"
APPENDIX K
K.3
K.3.1
System
REFER
Figure K-2.
The Depot Test Rack acts as a conventional DME transponder, but working into a
dummy load instead of a radiating antenna. Interrogation signals are solely generated by
the test interrogator which operates at the desired air-ground frequency, with selectable
pulse separation to simulate X or Y channel interrogations: they are injected into the
antenna feeder by the directional coupler, then to the receiver via the preselector. The
reply signals, generated in response to the successfully decoded interrogations, at the
required ground-air frequency, are fed to the antenna output, then to a 50 ohm power
load. A small proportion of the reply signal is fed, via the directional coupler, to a
detector in the test interrogator, which verifies that replies are correctly being transmitted
as a result of the interrogation pulses.
In a normal DME rack both the reply and the test interrogation frequencies are
generated by crystal controlled oscillators, as each station is at a fixed frequency. The
Depot Test Rack is required to test line-replaceable units (LRU) from many stations at
different frequencies. For this reason, the two crystals controlled oscillators are replaced
by two synthesised RF signal generators, so that required station frequencies can be
easily selected by pushbuttons.
These signal generators are commercial units and the reader is referred to the
manufacturer's handbook for further detail.
"
K.3.2
Module Descriptions
K.3.2.1
Receiver Video Module 2A72520
REFER
In this module the RF source and RF filter are present, but not used for normal Test
Rack operation. For this mode of operation, the RF input to the RF amplifier comes
directly from the lower UHF signal generator, connected to the REPLY SIGNAL
GENERATOR connector on the receiver video front panel.
The external connection between the signal generator and the Receiver Video module
front panel receptacle is made in coaxial cable, terminated in the appropriate coaxial
connectors.
There are no other changes within the module and consequently no changes to circuit
functioning.
"
K.3.2.2
Test Interrogator Module 2A72514
REFER
In this module the only change is to the RF generator unit which has been designed to
operate from an external, variable frequency, signal source rather than the internal
crystal controlled fixed frequency source of the standard version.
The RF generator now has a TNC coaxial connector which protrudes through the
module front panel and is labelled INTERROGATION SIGNAL GENERATOR: it is
connected to the upper UHF signal generator.
The external connection to the signal generator is made in coaxial cable terminated in
the appropriate connectors. There are no other changes within the test interrogator
module.
K-7
HA72500
"
APPENDIX K
K.3.2.3
REFER
The circuit of this unit has been designed to accept signal from the external generator
over a frequency range of 1025 MHz to 1150 MHz. This circuit is pre-tuned and needs
no adjustment, apart from input level setting, to cover the band.
The circuit is a modified version of the RF Generator 1A72516 used in the standard
DME rack. It consists of a three-stage voltage-controlled PIN diode attenuator and three
stages of transistor amplifiers to boost the RF signal level to around +12 dBm.
Both the attenuator section V1, V2 and V3 and the amplifiers V5, V6 and V7 are pulse
modulated to create the required RF pulse envelope at the output as well as obtaining
the required on/off output signal ratios. There are two types of modulation inputs to the
unit both supplied from the pulse shape circuitry on the modulator and detector. One is
DRIVE IN, a square wave pulse input at XS4 that activates V4, V6 and V7 by an on/off
action; the other is a shaped pulse MOD IN at input XS2 which shapes, in V5, the RF
envelope.
The DRIVE IN pulse turns the switch V4 and bias amplifier V8 on and supplies bias drive
to V6. V4 turns the attenuator off, thus allowing the RF signal to pass and V8 switches
on V7, so that V6 and V7 are operating normally, ready for the shaped modulation to
develop.
The MOD IN input pulse has a constant DC pedestal voltage of approximately 1 volt
and, on top of this, the trapezoidal modulation pulse will be positioned and aligned in the
centre of the DRIVE IN pulse.
K-8
HA72500
Figure K-1
APPENDIX K
Depot Test Facility Rack Layout
K-9
HA72500
Figure K-2
APPENDIX K
Depot Test Facility Signal Flow Diagram
K-10
HA72500
K.4
APPENDIX K
UNIT PERFORMANCE CHECKS AND ALIGNMENT
The modules fitted to the Depot Test Facility are generally standard modules, for which
performance checks and alignment procedures are detailed in Section 3.
The only special module is the RF Generator (Modified) 2A72516, for which
performance check and alignment procedures are given following.
K.4.1
RF Generator (Modified) 2A72516
K.4.1.1
Test Equipment
Oscilloscope
Spectrum Analyser
Peak Power Meter
K.4.1.2
Test Setup and Initial Check
1.
Switch the DME OFF. Remove the coaxial cable connected to the
INTERROGATION SIGNAL GENERATOR connector on the front panel of the
test interrogator. Remove the test interrogator from the transponder subrack.
Remove the lids and shims from the RF generator (modified) and the
modulator and detector diecast boxes.
2.
Replace the RF generator (modified) from the rack with the RF generator
(modified) to be tested (after first removing the coaxial connected to the output
connector, XC1, the main PWB assembly test interrogator, the four screws
securing the RF generator (modified) to the chassis and the six leads from the
modulator and detector).
3.
Reconnect the six leads from the modulator and detector. Restore the main
PWB assembly test interrogator to its chassis. Extend the test interrogator in
the transponder subrack using the transponder extender frame.
4.
Connect the spectrum analyser to the output connector, XC1, of the unit under
test.
5.
Switch the DME ON. On the test interrogator front panel, switch MONITOR
6.
On the modulator and detector PWB assembly, switch S1 to TEST.
7.
On the CTU front panel, select Hi Eff (High Efficiency) test in MAINTENANCE
mode and a TI RATE of 1 kHz.
8.
Using Channel 1 of the oscilloscope (externally triggered from test jacks

TRIGGER and EARTH on the test interrogator front panel) check the following
voltages and waveforms on the unit under test (connect the oscilloscope
EARTH lead to the unit under test diecast box):
K-11
HA72500
K.4.1.3
APPENDIX K
Alignment
1. Set the interrogation signal generator frequency to 1090 MHz and output level to
-10 dBm.
2. Disconnect the MOD_PULSE_INPUT lead to XS7 of the modulator and detector
and connect + 15 volts DC to XS7.
3. Tune the capacitors C18 and C22 on the unit under test to peak the RF output as
observed on spectrum analyser; it should peak at greater than +16 dBm.
4. Vary the frequency of the interrogation signal generator from 1025 MHz to
1150 MHz and check that the RF output does not vary more than 3 dB over the
band. Adjust the capacitors C18 and C22, if necessary, to reduce the variation of
the output over the band.
5. Check that all harmonics and spurious are below 60 dB with respect to the carrier
at each of the above three frequencies.
6. Disconnect +15 volts DC from XS7 on the modulator and detector.
7. Tune capacitors C2, C4 and C7 to minimise the RF output level over the band
1025 MHz to 1150 MHz (at least 70 dB down with respect to the level recorded in
step 4 above). Record the highest level and the frequency at which it occurs.
8. Reconnect the MOD_PULSE_INPUT lead from the main PWB to XS7 on the
modulator and detector. Set switch S1 on the modulator and detector board to
NORMAL. Set the interrogation signal generator frequency to 1090 MHz.
9. Connect the probe on channel 1 of oscilloscope to test jacks DETECTED
INTERROGATIONS and EARTH on the front panel of the test interrogator. The
shape of the pulse displayed on the oscilloscope should be as shown below:
K-12
HA72500
APPENDIX K
Adjust the following controls on the modulator and detector, as required, to achieve:
PULSE SHAPE for a FLAT TOP DURATION of 1.0 0.2 microseconds,
PULSE AMPLITUDE for a PEAK AMPLITUDE of 3.0 0.1 volts, and
PULSE PEDESTAL for a PEDESTAL HEIGHT of 0.2 0.1 volts.
If the controls interact, repeat the adjustments until the required shape is achieved.
The baseline DC Level should be 3.6 0.3 volts.
10. Vary the interrogation signal generator frequency from 1025 MHz to 1150 MHz
and record the pulse peak amplitude and the frequencies at which they occur.
The difference between the maximum and minimum amplitudes should be
< 0.4 volts.
11. Set the interrogation signal generator to the frequency where the pulse amplitude
was minimum and increase the signal level (3 dB maximum) to get the pulse
shape back as close as possible to that in Step 9 above.
12. Restore the interrogation signal generator level to -10 dBm. Set the interrogation
signal generator to the frequency where the pulse amplitude was maximum and
reduce the signal level (3 dB maximum) to get the pulse shape back as close as
possible to that in Step 9 above.
K.4.1.4
Tidy Up
1. After having performed the above tests, switch the DME OFF, remove the unit
under test from the test interrogator, and restore the rack RF generator
(modified) back to the 'test interrogator, ensuring that all screws and electrical
connections are correctly replaced and securely tightened.
2. Replace the shims and lids of the diecast boxes. Note that the lids are
deliberately warped to ensure good RF sealing. Tighten the screws firmly.
3. Remove the transponder extender frame and install the test interrogator back in
the DME rack.
K-13
HA72500
K.5
APPENDIX K
DRAWINGS
The drawings listed following, which are specific to the Depot Test Rack 3A72500 and
the specialised assemblies it contains, are included at the rear of this appendix.
DRAWING
NUMBER
DRAWING TITLE
3A72505
2A72514
2A72516
2A72520

INTERWIRING (3 sheets)
INTERWIRING
CIRCUIT
INTERWIRING
72505-2-21
72514-3-23
72516-3-41
72520-3-24
K-14
HA72500
K.6
APPENDIX K
COMPONENTS SCHEDULE
Many of the subassemblies and components of the Depot Test Facility rack are common
to the operational configurations. The components schedules for those items are
contained in Appendix F, and only those for items specific to the Depot Test Facility rack
are contained here. If a components schedule is not listed following, refer to Appendix F
for details.
K.6.1
3A72500 DME LDB-102 Depot Test Facility
SUBASSEMBLIES
COMP
REF
A1
A3
K.6.2
CODE

MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3A72505
1A72561
3A72505 Rack Assembly (Depot Test Facility)
SUBASSEMBLIES
REF/
CODE
QTY
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A11
A12
2
1036672T
K.6.3
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Receiver Video, Modified
Transmitter Driver
Monitor Module
Test Interrogator, Modified
1kW PA Power Supply
Rack Frame Wired - Depot Test Facility
Power Supply 24V DC
UHF signal generator
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
2A72520
1A72530
1A72525
1A72510
2A72514
1A72535
1A72540
3A72558
3A71130
1A72550
1A72549
LEADER 3220
2A72514 Test Interrogator
SUBASSEMBLIES
COMP
CODE
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5

Attenuator
Reply Detector
1A72515
2A72516
1A69737
1A72518
1A72519
ATTENUATORS
QTY
CODE
1
1030202K
1
1030203L
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MICROLAB/FXR AG-20F
MICROLAB/FXR AG-30F
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
CODE
1
1
1
1
DESCRIPTION
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
single
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72514-4-12
72514-4-13
72514-4-14
72514-4-16
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
K-15
HA72500
K.6.4
APPENDIX K
A72516 RF Generator (Modified)
CAPACITORS, FIXED
COMP
CODE
DESCRIPTION
REF
C1, 3, 5, 6. 9-17, 19-21, 24-28, 34, 35
C14
1036651V ceramic
C29
1033084T
ceramic chip
VALUE
TOL
RATING
22p
1p
10n
5%
0P25
10%
50V
100V
50V
C30
C36
C37
5p6
2p2
100n
nom
0p25
10%
50V
100V
100V
VALUE
TOL
RATING
1030214Y
1030211V
1018878B
ceramic chip
ceramic
ceramic monolyth
COMP
CODE
DESCRIPTION
REF
C2, 4, 7 1028813A trimmer
C18, 22 1030213X trimmer
INDUCTORS
COMP
CODE
REF
L3, 8
L4, 7
L5
L6, 10- 1025352N
13
RESISTORS, FIXED
COMP
CODE
REF
R1, 2, 5, 1008746N
29, 30
R4
1008762F
R8, 33
1008698L
R18
1008722M
R19, 24 1008752V
R20
1008753W
R21
1008750T
R22, 25 1008706V
R23
1008777X
R27
1008714D
R28
1008758B
R31
1008726R
R32
1008754X
DESCRIPTION
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
VITRAMON VJ0805
PHILIPS 2222-678-03108
VITRAMON
VJ0805Y103KXAMT
VITRAMON 7800P7G02F
PHILIPS 2222-680-09228
VITRAMON CK06BX104K
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
TOL
0u39
RATING
OW17
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72516-4-55
72516-4-53
72516-4-54
MILLER 9230-10
VALUE
TOL
RATING
metal film
1k
1%
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
metal film
4k75
10
100
1k82
2k
1k5
22R1
20k
47R5
3k32
150
2k21
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
0W4
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
ROEDERSTEIN MK2
SWITCHES
COMP
CODE
REF
S1
11030651Y slide SPDT
SEMICONDUCTORS
COMP
CODE
REF
V1-3
1037858G
V4
906654U
V5, 6
1027618B
V7
1030216A
V8
1026172E
V9
1019399T
V10
1026171D
V12
1006793Q
0p6-4p5
0P8-8p
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
C&K 1101-M2-S3-C-B-E
DESCRIPTION
diode switching PIN
HF amplifier NPN
transistor
hot carrier diode
switching diode
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
HP 5082-3043
MOTOROLA 2N2857
MOTOROLA, MRF901
MOTOROLA 2N6604
MOTOROLA 2N2907A
HP 5082-2817 or 5082-2811
SGS-THOMSON 2N2222A
FAIRCHILD 1N914A
K-16
HA72500
APPENDIX K
CONNECTORS
COMP
CODE
REF
XtC2
1037859H
XS1-6
1028758Q
Xt1, 2
1036570G
DESCRIPTION
coaxial receptacle TNC
jack
test terminal white
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
COMP
CODE
REF
1
coaxial
K.6.5
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
SUHNER 23TNC-50-0-2/133
CAMBION 450-3704-01-03-00
WILLIAM HUGHES 101
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72522-4-06
2A72520 Receiver Video
SUBASSEMBLIES
COMP
CODE
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4

RF Source
IF Amplifier
RF Amplifier
1A72521
1A72522
1A72523
1A72524
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
QTY
CODE
1
1
1
1
1
1
DESCRIPTION
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial BNC/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
coaxial SMA/SMA
ribbon 20-way
coaxial SMA/TNC
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72520-4-14
72520-4-15
72520-4-16
72520-4-17
72520-4-18
72520-4-28
K.6.6
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
3A72558 Rack Frame Wired (Depot Test Facility)
SUBASSEMBLIES
COMP
CODE
REF
A1
A2
A3
A4
A7
DESCRIPTION
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
CTU Subrack
Transponder Subrack
SEMICONDUCTORS
COMP
CODE
DESCRIPTION
REF
V1
1036684F dual diode rectifier
VALUE
60V
1A72506
1A72513
1A72557
1A72503
1A72545
TOL
RATING
100A
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
MOTOROLA MBR20060CT
K-17
HA72500
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
REF/
CODE
QTY
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
CONNECTORS
COMP
CODE
REF
XB12
1031738E
APPENDIX K
DESCRIPTION
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
coaxial
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
ribbon, 64-way
loom, main power
loom, 1kW PA, power
power
earth
door earth
DC power
signal
DESCRIPTION
terminal strip 6-way
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
72558-2-29
72558-3-31
72558-3-32
72558-2-71
72558-2-37
72558-3-39
72558-3-41
72558-3-42
72558-3-40
72558-1-43
72558-1-44
72558-1-45
72558-4-46
72558-4-47
72558-4-48
72558-3-54
72558-2-55
MFR/SUPPLIER REF
KLIPPON KS6/014062
K-18
HA72500
APPENDIX L
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL FREQUENCY AND SPACING SPECIFICATION
L-i
HA72500
APPENDIX L
TABLE of CONTENTS
L.
CHANNEL FREQUENCY AND SPACING SPECIFICATION ..................... L-1
L-ii
HA72500
L.
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL FREQUENCY AND SPACING

SPECIFICATION
AIRBORNE INTERROGATION
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
1X
1025
1Y
2X
12
1025
1026
2Y
3X
3Y
5Y
6X
6Y
7Y
8X
1032
8Y
9X
12
1033
10X
11X
11Y
12X
1035
1036
12Y
13X
13Y
14X
14Y
15X
15Y
16X
1040
16Y
17X
12
1041
18X
19X
19Y
20X
1043
1044
20Y
30
12
1105
980
36
30
12
1106
981
36
30
12
979
12
1044
12
1104
36
12
30
1103
978
12
1043
1102
36
1042
30
12
977
12
1042
18Y
1101
36
1041
30
12
976
36
1040
17Y
1100
36
1039
30
12
975
12
30
12
1099
36
1038
1039
1098
974
12
30
12
973
36
1037
1038
12
972
12
30
1097
36
1036
30
12
971
12
1037
12
1096
36
12
30
1095
970
12
1035
1094
36
1034
30
12
969
12
1034
10Y
1093
36
1033
30
12
968
36
1032
9Y
1092
36
1031
30
12
967
12
30
12
1091
36
1030
1031
12
966
12
30
1090
36
1029
12
965
12
1030
7X
36
1028
30
1089
964
12
1029
12
963
12
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1088
36
1027
4Y
5X
962
12
1028
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
1026
1027
4X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1107
30
L-1
HA72500
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
21X
1045
21Y
22X
1046
24X
24Y
1048
25Y
26X
26Y
27X
27Y
28X
2BY
29X
1053
29Y
30X
12
1054
31X
32X
32Y
33X
1056
1057
33Y
34X
34Y
35X
35Y
36X
36Y
37X
1061
37Y
38X
12
1062
39X
40X
40Y
41X
1064
1065
41Y
42X
42Y
1127
30
12
1128
1003
36
12
30
12
1002
36
1066
1067
12
1001
12
30
1126
36
1065
30
12
1000
12
1066
12
1125
36
12
30
1124
999
12
1064
1123
36
1063
30
12
998
12
1063
39Y
1122
36
1062
30
12
997
36
1061
38Y
1121
36
1060
30
12
996
12
30
12
1120
36
1059
1060
1119
995
12
30
12
994
36
1058
1059
12
993
12
30
1118
36
1057
30
12
992
12
1058
12
1117
36
12
30
1116
991
'12
1056
1115
36
1055
30
12
990
12
1055
31Y
1114
36
1054
30
12
989
36
1053
30Y
1113
36
1052
30
12
988
12
30
12
1112
36
1051
1052
1111
987
12
30
12
986
36
1050
1051
12
985
12
30
1110
36
1049
1050
12
984
12
30
1109
36
12
1049
12
983
12
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1108
36
1047
1048
25X
982
12
1047
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
1046
23Y
43X
12
1045
22Y
23X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1129
1004
30
12
L-2
HA72500
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
43Y
44X
1067
1068
44Y
45X
1068
45Y
46Y
47X
1071
49X
50X
51X
51Y
52X
1075
1076
52Y
53X
53Y
54X
54Y
55X
1079
56X
12
1080
56Y
57X
58X
59X
59Y
60X
1083
1084
60Y
61X
61 Y
62X
62Y
63X
1087
64X
12
1088
64Y
65X
1149
12
1151
30
12
1025
1152
36
30
1150
36
12
1089
30
12
1024
12
1089
65Y
1148
36
1088
30
12
1023
36
1087
30
12
1147
36
1086
63Y
1146
1022
12
30
12
1021
36
1085
1086
12
1020
12
30
1145
36
1084
1085
12
1019
12
30
1144
36
12
30
12
1018
12
1083
12
1143
36
1082
30
1142
1017
12
1082
58Y
1141
36
1081
30
12
1016
12
1081
57Y
1140
36
1080
30
12
1015
36
1079
30
12
1139
36
1078
55Y
1138
1014
12
30
12
1013
36
1077
1078
12
1012
12
30
1137
36
1076
1077
12
1011
12
30
1136
36
12
30
12
1010
12
1075
12
1135
36
1074
30
1134
1009
12
1074
50Y
1008
36
1073
30
12
1133
36
12
1073
49Y
1132
36
1072
30
12
1007
12
1072
48Y
1131
36
1071
30
12
1006
12
1070
47Y
48X
36
1069
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1130
1005
12
1070
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
12
1069
46X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1026
30
L-3
HA72500
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
66X
1090
66Y
67X
1091
69X
1093
70X
1094
70Y
71X
1095
71Y
72X
1096
72Y
73X
1097
73Y
74X
1098
74Y
75X
1099
75Y
76X
1100
76Y
77X
1101
77Y
78X
1102
78Y
79X
1103
79Y
80X
1104
80Y
81X
1105
81Y
82X
1106
82Y
83X
1107
83Y
84X
1108
84Y
85X
1109
85Y
86X
1110
86Y
87X
1111
87Y
1112
30
12
1047
1174
36
12
12
1173
12
30
1046
36
1111
12
1172
12
30
1045
36
1110
12
1171
12
30
1044
36
1109
12
1170
12
30
1043
36
1108
12
1169
12
30
1042
36
1107
12
1168
12
30
1041
36
1106
12
1167
12
30
1040
36
1105
12
1166
12
30
1039
36
1104
12
1165
12
30
1038
36
1103
12
1164
12
30
1037
36
1102
12
1163
12
30
1036
36
1101
12
1162
12
30
1035
36
1100
12
1161
12
30
1034
36
1099
12
1160
12
30
1033
36
1098
12
1159
12
30
1032
36
1097
12
1158
12
30
1031
36
1096
12
1157
12
30
1030
36
1095
12
1156
12
30
1029
36
1094
12
1155
12
30
1028
36
1093
12
1154
12
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1027
36
1092
69Y
1153
12
1092
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
1091
68Y
88X
12
1090
67Y
68X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1048
1175
30
12
L-4
HA72500
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
88Y
89X
1112
1113
89Y
90X
1113
90Y
91Y
92X
92Y
93Y
94X
94Y
95X
95Y
96X
96Y
97X
97Y
98X
98Y
99X
99Y
100X
100Y
101X
101Y
102X
102Y
103X
103Y
104X
104Y
105X
105Y
106X
106Y
107X
107Y
108X
108X
109X
109Y
110X
110Y
1069
36
30
12
1070
1197
36
30
12
1196
12
1134
1068
36
1133
30
12
1195
12
1134
1067
36
1132
30
12
1194
12
1133
1066
36
1131
30
12
1193
12
1132
1065
36
1130
30
12
1192
12
1131
1064
36
1129
30
12
1191
12
1130
1063
36
1128
30
12
1190
12
1129
1062
36
1127
30
12
1189
12
1128
1061
36
1126
30
12
1188
12
1127
1060
36
1125
30
12
1187
12
1126
1059
36
1124
30
12
1186
12
1125
1058
36
1123
30
12
1185
12
1124
1057
36
1122
30
12
1184
12
1123
1056
36
1121
30
12
1183
12
1122
1055
36
1120
30
12
1182
12
1121
1054
36
1119
30
12
1181
12
1120
1053
36
1118
30
12
1180
12
1119
1052
36
1117
30
12
1179
12
1118
1051
36
1116
30
12
1178
12
1117
1050
36
1115
30
12
1177
12
1116
93X
36
1114
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1049
1176
12
1115
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
12
1114
91X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1071
30
L-5
HA72500
APPENDIX L
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
111X
1135
111Y
112X
12
1135
1136
112Y
113X
1138
115X
1139
115Y
116X
1140
116Y
117X
1141
117Y
118X
1142
118Y
119X
1143
119Y
120X
1144
120Y
121X
1145
121 Y
122X
1146
122Y
123X
1147
123Y
124X
1148
124Y
125X
1149
125Y
126X
1150
126Y
12
1212
30
12
1086
1213
36
30
1085
36
12
1150
12
1211
12
30
1084
36
1149
12
1210
12
30
1083
36
1148
12
1209
12
30
1082
36
1147
12
1208
12
30
1081
36
1146
12
1207
12
30
1080
36
1145
12
1206
12
30
1079
36
1144
12
1205
12
30
1078
36
1143
12
1204
12
30
1077
36
1142
12
1203
12
30
1076
36
1141
12
1202
12
30
1075
36
1140
12
1201
12
30
1074
36
1139
12
1200
12
30
1073
36
1138
12
1199
12
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
1072
36
1137
114Y
1198
12
1137
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
36
1136
113Y
114X
PULSE CODE
(microseconds)
GROUND REPLY
30
12
1087
30
L-6
HA72500
APPENDIX M
APPENDIX M
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS
M-i
HA72500
APPENDIX M
TABLE of CONTENTS
M.
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS ......................... M-1
M.1
M.2
M.3
M.4
M.5
M.6
M.7
M.8
M.9
M.10
M.11
M.12
M.13
M.14
M.15
M.16
M.17
M.18
M.19
M.20
M.21
M.22
M.23
M.24
M.25
M.26
INTRODUCTION
M-1
MONITOR BUS INTERFACE - PLD Type 3A72502
M-2
MONITOR WIDTH COUNTER - PLD Type 4A72502
M-4
MONITOR FALL COUNTER - PLD Type 5A72502
M-7
MONITOR RISE COUNTER - PLD Type 6A72502
M-10
MONITOR FAULT DRIVER - PLD Type 7A72502
M-10
MONITOR PULSE SHAPE ERROR COUNTER 1 - PLD Type 8A72502 M-12
MONITOR CLOCK 1 - PLD Type 9A72502
M-15
MONITOR PULSE SHAPE ERROR COUNTER 2 - PLD Type 10A72502 M-16
M-17
MONITOR DELAY COUNTER - PLD Type 12A72502
M-18
MONITOR SPACING COUNTER - PLD Type 13A72502
M-19
MONITOR IDENT EXTRACTION - PLD Type 14A72502
M-22
MONITOR PRIMARY ERROR COUNTER - PLD Type 15A72502
M-26
MONITOR INHIBIT DEVICE DRIVER - PLD Type 16A72502
M-27
MONITOR IDENT COUNTER - PLD Type 17A72502
M-30
MONITOR RATE COUNTER - PLD Type 18A72502
M-35
MONITOR IDENT ERROR COUNTER - PLD Type 19A72502
M-37
MONITOR EFFICIENCY COUNTER - PLD Type 20A72502
M-41
TEST INTERROGATOR COUNTER TIMER - PLD Type 21A72502
M-43
TEST INTERROGATOR BUS INTERFACE - PLI) Type 22A72502
M-46
CTU PROCESSOR WAIT STATE GENERATOR - PLD Type 23A72502 M-48
CTU PROCESSOR IDENT TONE AND KEYING - PLD Type 24A72502 M-50
CTU FRONT PANEL ADDRESS DECODER - PLD Type 25A72502
M-52
CTU FRONT PANEL KEY SWITCH INTERFACE - PLD Type 26A72502 M-54
RCMS INTERFACE ADDRESS DECODER - PLD Type 27A72502
M-56
M-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX M
LIST of FIGURES
Figure M-1
Figure M-2
Figure M-3
Figure M-4
Figure M-5
Figure M-6
Figure M-7
Figure M-8
Figure M-9
Figure M-10
Figure M-11
Figure M-12
Figure M-13
Timing Diagram : Monitor Width Counter ..............................................M-6

Timing Diagram : Monitor Fall Counter..................................................M-9
Timing Diagram : Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 1 .....................M-14
Timing Diagram : Monitor Spacing Counter ........................................M-21
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter Ident Message Spacing ..............
Check ..................................................................................................M-24
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter Ident Extraction ...................M-25
Timing Diagram : Monitor Inhibit Device Driver ...................................M-29
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Within Ident ............
Range ..................................................................................................M-32
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Higher Than Ident
Rate .....................................................................................................M-33
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Lower Than Ident
Rate .....................................................................................................M-34
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Error Counter - Ident Tone ExtractionM-39
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Error Counter - Ident Error Detection and
Inhibit Control ......................................................................................M-40
Timing Diagram : Test Interrogator Counter Timer..............................M-45
M-iii
HA72500
APPENDIX M
M.
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE

DESCRIPTIONS
M.1
INTRODUCTION
Programmable logic devices (PLD) provide on a single 24-pin DIP chip a number of
user-programmable AND and OR arrays and associated input (such as latches) and
output (such as output controls, registers) blocks. They allow complex logic processing
functions to be designed on microcomputer and implemented in the PLD.
The PLDs used in the LDB-102 equipment are equivalent to INTEL TD85C060-25
devices. They provide 16 macrocells of programmable I/O architecture, programmable
clock systems and programmable output registers, which can be configured as D, T, SR
or JK types.
This appendix identifies all the PLD used in the LDB-102, describes the function
provided, and lists and specifies their associated input and output signals. Summary
descriptions are given of the system functions provided by each PLD and, where
applicable, detailed timing diagrams are included.
M-1
HA72500
M.2
APPENDIX M
MONITOR BUS INTERFACE - PLD Type 3A72502
NAME:
Monitor Bus Interface
TYPE No:
3A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72511, Monitor PWB Assembly; D2

FUNCTION:
To decode the address lines on the Extended CTU Bus to the Monitor
PWB Assembly and produce the required chip select lines.
INPUTS:
CLK1
CLK2
RD
WR
DT_R
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
DEN
Pin 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A5
BS
RES
GUNIT
OUTPUTS:
BUFEN
BEN_00
BEN_02
BEN_04
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 14
Pin 23
LEN_06
LEN_08
BEN_0A
BEN_12
Pin 18
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 19
Synchronous clock input - unused

Read Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active LOW
Write Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active LOW
Data Transmit/Receive Signal from Extended CTU Bus.
When LOW, data is read out of the PWBA; when HIGH data
is written to the PWBA.
Data Enable Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active LOW
during memory and I/O accesses.
Address Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active HIGH
Board Select Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active LOW
Reset Signal from Extended CTU Bus. Active HIGH
Locally Generated Bus Enable Signal. Active HIGH
Data Bus Transceiver Enable
Monitor Status Read Select - Fault and Status Signals
Monitor Status Read Select - Fault Signals
Monitor Status Read Select - Feedback of outputs on
LEN_06
Monitor Control Outputs Select - Analogue Input Control
Monitor Control Outputs Select - Monitor Testing
Monitor Status Read Select - A to D Output
Monitor Status Read Select - A to D & Miscellaneous Status

BUFEN enables the transceiver for the data bus. Active LOW when inputs BS and DEN
are active LOW and A5 is HIGH.
M-2
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Monitor Status Read Selects

BEN_00 enables read access of fault and status signals from the Monitor circuitry. Is
active LOW when inputs: BS and RD are active LOW and the address is 20H or 30H.
BEN_02 enables read access of fault signals from the Monitor circuitry. Is active LOW
when inputs: BS and RD are active LOW and the address is 21H or 31H.
BEN_04 enables read access of the output signals written to at the address selected by
LEN_06 (for self test capability). Is active LOW when inputs: BS and RD are active LOW
and the address is 22H or 32H.
BEN_0A enables read access of the 8-bit output of the Analogue to Digital Converter. Is
BEN_12 enables read access of status of the Analogue to Digital Converter and other
signals from the Monitor circuitry. Is active LOW when inputs: BS and RD are active
LOW and the address is 29H or 39H.
Monitor Control Outputs Selects
LEN_06 enables write access to an octal latch driving control outputs to the Analogue to
Digital Converter and Input Analogue Multiplexers. Is active HIGH when inputs: BS and
WR are active LOW and the address is 23H or 33H.
LEN_08 enables write access to an octal latch driving control outputs to test the Monitor
circuitry. Is active HIGH when inputs: BS and WR are active LOW and the address is
24H or 34H.
M-3
HA72500
M.3
APPENDIX M
MONITOR WIDTH COUNTER - PLD Type 4A72502
NAME:
Monitor Width Counter
TYPE No:
4A72502

FUNCTION:
To determine whether the Width pulses from the Test Interrogator are
within the limits set by inputs from the fault limit switches.
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
TIPRF
PULSE
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
A9P
SCNTP
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 14
Synchronous clock input - 10 MHz

Timing pulse before arrival of pulse to be checked
Pulse to be checked
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 17
FLAG
Pin 18
CNT1P
Pin 19
Part of Binary Down Counter A0P to A9P

Second Count Indicator: LOW when Counter is in Lower Limit
Stage; HIGH when Counter is in Accept Window Stage
Pulse Output to indicate that the duration of PULSE is within
limits
Counter Active Indicator
Lower Limit Counter

A0P to A9P form a 10-bit Presettable Binary Down Counter (A0P is the Least Significant
Bit) clocked by the 10 MHz CLOCK. On reaching a count of zero, provided Flip Flop
SCNTP is HIGH, counting ceases and the count remains at zero until a positive TIPRF
pulse is received. While TIPRF pulse is HIGH, the counter outputs are placed in a high
impedance state and the binary data fed to these outputs (through series resistors) is
loaded into the counter. Also while TIPRF pulse is HIGH, Flip Flop SCNTP goes to LOW
and stays LOW until the start of the second count (i.e. in the Accept Window Stage).
After TIPRF returns to LOW, the counter maintains its preset count until the arrival of a
positive PULSE input. A HIGH on PULSE causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH and
the counter to commence the Lower Limit Stage. While CNT1P remains HIGH, the
counter counts down towards zero. When a count of ONE is reached, the next CLOCK
pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be reset LOW and the counter counts to ZERO
completing the Lower Limit Stage.
M-4
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Accept Window Counter

Provided TIPRF is still LOW, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop SCNTP to go
HIGH and stay HIGH until the next TIPRF pulse. This is the commencement of the
Accept Window Stage. If PULSE is still HIGH, this next CLOCK pulse also causes the
counter to be loaded with the binary data on inputs B0 to B4 (B0 is the Least Significant
Bit) and Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH. (However, if the binary data on inputs B0 to B4
is ZERO, Flip Flop CNT1P is not set HIGH and the counter will remain at count ZERO.)
Continuing from the next CLOCK pulse, the counter again counts down towards zero.
When a count of ONE is reached, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be
reset LOW and the counter counts to ZERO. Since Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH, counting
ceases and the count remains at zero until a positive TIPRF pulse is received. This is
the completion of the Accept Window Stage.
Provided PULSE goes LOW while Flip Flops SCNTP and CNT1P are HIGH (i.e. during
the Accept Window Stage), Flip Flop FLAG will be set HIGH indicating that the duration
of PULSE is within the preset limits. Flip Flop FLAG is reset following the count reaching
ZERO while Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH, i.e. at the completion of the Accept Window
Stage.
If PULSE goes LOW during the Lower Limit Stage or is still HIGH at the completion of
the Accept Window Stage, Flip Flop FLAG will not be set HIGH, indicating that the
duration of PULSE is outside the preset limits.
Example and Timing Diagram
Figure M-1 shows the timing relationships when the lower limit input data is set to 617
and the window input data is set to 11. The two waveforms at the bottom of the figure
show the minimum width and maximum width PULSE signals which give 50% FLAG
pulses. If AN and BN are the lower limit input data and window input data respectively,
then it can be seen from the figure that the minimum and maximum width PULSE signals
which give 50% FLAG pulses have duration AN + 1.5 and AN + BN + 1.5 CLOCK periods
respectively. Thus PULSE signals with duration less than or equal to AN + 1 or greater
than or equal to AN + BN + 2 CLOCK periods will be rejected.
M-5
HA72500
Figure M-1
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Width Counter
M-6
HA72500
M.4
APPENDIX M
MONITOR FALL COUNTER - PLD Type 5A72502
NAME:
Monitor Fall Counter
TYPE No:
5A72502

FUNCTION:
To determine whether the Fall pulses from the Test Interrogator are
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
TIPRF
PULSE
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
A9P
FLAG
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11

Pulse to be checked
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 18
CNT1P
Pin 17

limits
Limit Counter
Bit) clocked by the 10 MHz CLOCK. On reaching a count of zero, provided input TIPRF
is not HIGH, counting ceases and the counter is held reset at ZERO until a 'positive
TIPRF pulse is received. While TIPRF pulse is HIGH, the counter outputs are placed in a
high impedance state and the binary data fed to these outputs (through series resistors)
is loaded into the counter.
positive PULSE input. A HIGH on PULSE causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH.
While CNT1P remains HIGH, the counter counts down towards zero. When a count of
ZERO is reached, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be reset LOW and
the counter remains at a count of ZERO.
Provided PULSE goes LOW while Flip Flop CNT1P is HIGH, Flip Flop FLAG will be set
HIGH indicating that the duration of PULSE is less than the preset limit. Flip Flop FLAG
is reset following the count reaching ZERO.
If PULSE is still HIGH after the count reaches ZERO, Flip Flop FLAG will not be set
HIGH, indicating that the duration of PULSE is greater than the preset limit.
M-7
HA72500
APPENDIX M

Figure M-2 shows the timing relationships when the upper limit input data is set to 617.
The waveform at the bottom of the figure shows the maximum width PULSE signals
which give 50% FLAG pulses. If AN is the upper limit input data, then it can be seen from
the figure that the maximum width PULSE signal which gives 50% FLAG pulses has a
duration AN + 0.5. Thus PULSE signals with duration greater than or equal to AN + 1
CLOCK periods will be rejected.
M-8
HA72500
Figure M-2
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Fall Counter
M-9
HA72500
M.5
APPENDIX M
MONITOR RISE COUNTER - PLD Type 6A72502
NAME:
Monitor Rise Counter
TYPE No:
6A72502

FUNCTION:
To determine whether the Rise pulses from the Test Interrogator are
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
TIPRF
PULSE
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
A9P
FLAG
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11

Pulse to be checked
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 18
CNT1P
Pin 17

limits
The operation of the Monitor Rise Counter is identical to that of the Monitor Fall Counter,
Type 5A72502.
M.6
MONITOR FAULT DRIVER - PLD Type 7A72502
NAME:
Monitor Fault Driver
TYPE No:
7A72502

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
IFLT
DELFLT
SEPFLT
EFLT
RFLT
FALLFLT
RISEFLT
WIDTHFLT
PFLT
AI1FLT
AI2FLT
FAIL
Logic processing of the Fault signals from the Monitor Module Fault
Detectors to produce the Fault Signals to the CTU and the signals to
drive the OK lamps on the Monitor Module.
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 14
Pin 23
Output from Ident Fault Detector. Active HIGH

Output from Delay Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Spacing Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Efficiency Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Rate Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Pulse Fall Time Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Pulse Rise Time Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Pulse Width Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Transmitted Power Fault Detector. Active HIGH
Output from Antenna Fault Detector. Active LOW
Output from Antenna Fault Detector. Active LOW
From FAIL/NORMAL Front Panel switch. HIGH = FAIL
M-10
HA72500
OUTPUTS:
PRIFLT
SECFLT
DELRVFLT
SPCRVFLT
PSFLT
ANT
NFAIL
APPENDIX M
Pin 22
Pin 19
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 18
Primary Fault Output

Secondary Fault Output
Delay Fault Signal to Receiver Video
Spacing Fault Signal to Receiver Video
Pulse Shape Fault Output
Antenna Fault Output
Buffered FAIL input signal
Primary Fault Logic

PRIFLT is Active HIGH if either input DELFLT or SEPFLT is Active HIGH.
Secondary Fault Logic
SECFLT is Active HIGH if any of the inputs EFLT, RFLT, PFLT or IFLT or either of the
outputs PSFLT or ANT is Active HIGH.
Fault Signals to Receiver Video
DELRVFLT is buffered and inverted DELFLT input signal. This Active LOW signal is fed
to the Receiver Video where it is used to inhibit replies should the CTU fail to shut down
a transponder with Primary Faults.
SPCRVFLT is buffered and inverted SEPFLT input signal. This Active LOW signal is fed
to the Receiver Video where it is used to inhibit replies should the CTU fail to shut down
a transponder with Primary Faults.
Pulse Shape Fault Logic
PSFLT is Active HIGH if any of the inputs FALLFLT, RISEFLT or WIDTHFLT is Active
HIGH.
Antenna Fault Logic
ANT is Active HIGH if either input AI1FLT or AI2FLT is Active LOW.
Test Signals
NFAIL is buffered FAIL input signal.
M-11
HA72500
M.7
APPENDIX M
MONITOR PULSE SHAPE ERROR COUNTER 1 - PLD Type
8A72502
NAME:
Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 1
TYPE No:
8A72502

FUNCTION:
To provide digital filtering of Parameter OK (FLAG) signals from the

Parameter Counters to produce Fault indication signals. Two counters
are provided in the PLD (identified with "A" and B suffixes
respectively in the I/O lists) plus some common circuitry.
INPUTS:
PRF
Pin 2
INH
Pin 23
FLTA
Pin 11
FLTB
OUTPUTS:
PRFCNT0
Pin 14
PRFCNT1
ALLCLCKA
Pin 15
Pin 9
TIMCLKA
DECA
Pin 7
Pin 6
A0P
A1P
A2P
FLAGA
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 8
ALLCLCKB
TIMCLKB
DECB
B0P
B1P
B2P
FLAGB
Pin 16
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 17
Pin 10
(TIPRF) Timing pulse at beginning of Parameter

Measurement
Inhibit Measurement. Indicates a low level interrogation and
parameter measurements are not to be made. In most
operating modes, toggles between HIGH and LOW before
the PRF pulses.
Positive pulses (following PRF) indicating that the parameter
was within limits. Absence of pulse indicates that the
parameter was outside its preset limits.
(See FLTA)
Part of divide by 3 counter used to select every third
(not INHibited) PRF pulse to the Error Counter
(See PRFCNT0)
Clock signal combining all (not INHibited) PRF and FLTA
pulses
Clock signal to Error Counter. Clocks on negative edge
Count UP/DOWN control for Error Counter. Counts DOWN
when LOW; counts UP when it and PRFCNT0 are HIGH
Part of Error Counter consisting of A0P to A2P
Fault output signal. HIGH indicates that the measured
parameter is consistently within limits; LOW indicates that the
measured parameter is consistently outside limits
(See ALLCLCKA)
(See TIMCLKA)
(See DECA)
(See A0P)
(See A1P)
(See A2P)
(See FLAGA)
Divide by 3 Counter
PRFCNT1 and PRKNT0 form a divide by 3 counter clocked by PRF. The count cycles
through the values 1,2 and 3 (PRFCNT0 is the least significant bit). (See Figure M-3.)
M-12
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Clock Signals
ALLCLCK(A/B) ORs the input signals PRF and FLT(A/B) when INH is inactive LOW.
(See Figure M-3)
TIMCLK(A/B) is basically the same as ALLCLCK(A/B) but with the PRF pulses passed
through a gate controlled by PRFCNT0 being LOW. (See Figure M-3)
Error Counter UP/DOWN Control
DEC(A/B) is a synchronous S/R Flip Flop clocked by ALLCLCK(A/B). It is set by positive
PRF pulses and reset by positive FLT(A/B) PULSES.
Error Counter
(A/B)0P to (A/B)2P form a binary UP/DOWN counter which counts between 0 and 7. It
cannot count UP past 7 nor DOWN past 0. The counter counts UP by 1 on the negative
edges of TIMCLK(A/B) when both DEC(A/B) and PRFCNT0 are HIGH and counts
DOWN by 1 on the negative edges of TIMCLK(A/B) when DEC(A/B) is LOW.
In effect, the counter counts DOWN on every input FLT(A/B) pulse which occurs while
input INH is inactive LOW, and counts UP on every third PRF input pulse which occurs
while input INH is inactive LOW.
OK Output Flag
FLAG(A/B) is a synchronous S/R Flip Flop clocked by ALLCLK(A/B). It is set HIGH on
the positive edge of ALLCLCK(A/B) when the Error Counter count reaches 0, and is
reset LOW on the positive edge of ALLCLK(A/B) when the Error Counter count
reaches 7.
Thus if the FLT(/B) input pulses consistently occur more often than one third of the PRF
pulses, the Error Counter will count DOWN to 0 and FLAG(A/B) will be set HIGH.
However if the FLT(/B) input pulses consistently occur less often than one third of the
PRF pulses, the Error Counter will count UP to 7 and FLAG(A/B) will be reset LOW.
M-13
HA72500
Figure M-3
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 1
M-14
HA72500
M.8
APPENDIX M
NAME:
Monitor Clock 1
TYPE No:
9A72502

FUNCTION:
To produce a range of clock frequencies from the 10 MHz reference

oscillator.
INPUTS:
CLK1
Pin 1
CLK2
Pin 2
CLK3
Pin 11
CLK4
Pin 14
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
OUT1
B0P
B1P
B2P
OUT2
C0P
C1P
C2P
OUT3
D0P
D1P
D2P
OUT4
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 3
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 18
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of A0P to A2P and

OUT1
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of B0P to B2P and
OUT2
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of C0P to C2P and
OUT3
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of D0P to D2P and
OUT4
Part of Decade Counter consisting of A0P to A2P and OUT1
Part of Decade Counter consisting of B0P to B2P and OUT2
Part of Decade Counter consisting of C0P to C2P and OUT3
Part of Decade Counter consisting of D0P to D2P and OUT4
Counter 1
A0P to A2P form a 3-bit divide-by-5 Binary Down Counter (A0P is the Least Significant
Bit) clocked by CLK1. The counter cycles through the values 4 to 0.
On reaching a count of zero, the next pulse of CLK1 toggles OUT1. OUT1 is thus a
square wave with a frequency one tenth of CLK1.
Counters 2 to 4
Counters 2 to 4 are identical to Counter 1.
M-15
HA72500
M.9
APPENDIX M
MONITOR PULSE SHAPE ERROR COUNTER 2 - PLD Type
10A72502
NAME:
Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 2
TYPE No:
10A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72511, Monitor PWIB Assembly; D23

FUNCTION:

are provided in the PLD (identified with "A" and "B" suffixes
INPUTS:
PRF
Pin 2
NH
Pin 23
FLTA
Pin 11
FLTB
OUTPUTS:
PRFCNT0
Pin 14
PRFCNT1
ALLCLCKA
Pin 15
Pin 9
TIMCLKA
DECA
Pin 7
Pin 6
A0P
A1P
A2P
FLAGA
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 8
ALLCLCKB
TIMCLKB
DECB
B0P
B1P
B2P
FLAGB
Pin 16
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 17
Pin 10

Measurement 1
the PRF pulses.
(See FLTA)
(See PRFCNT0)
pulses
when LOW; counts UP when it and PRFCNT0 are HIGH
measured parameter is consistently outside limits
(See ALLCLCKA)
(See TIMCLKA)
(See DECA)
(See A0P)
(See A1P)
(See A2P)
(See FLAGA)
The operation of the Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 2 is identical to that of the
Monitor Pulse Shape Error Counter 1, Type 8A72502.
M-16
HA72500
M.10
APPENDIX M
NAME:
Monitor Clock 2
TYPE No:
11A72502

FUNCTION:
To produce a range of clock frequencies from the 10 MHz reference

oscillator.
INPUTS:
CLK1
Pin 1
CLK2
Pin 2
CLK3
Pin 11
CLK4
Pin 14
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
OUT1
B0P
B1P
B2P
OUT2
C0P
C1P
C2P
OUT3
D0P
D1P
D2P
OUT4
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 3
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 18
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of A0P to A2P and

OUT1
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of B0P to B2P and
OUT2
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of C0P to C2P and
OUT3
Clock to Decade Counter consisting of D0P to D2P and
OUT4
Counter 1
A0P to A2P form a 3-bit divide-by-5 Binary Down Counter (A0P is the Least Significant
Bit) clocked by CLK1. The counter cycles through the values 4 to 0.
On reaching a count of zero, the next pulse of CLK1 toggles OUT1. OUT1 is thus a
square wave with a frequency one tenth of CLK1.
Counters 2 to 4
Counters 2 to 4 are identical to Counter 1.
M-17
HA72500
M.11
APPENDIX M
MONITOR DELAY COUNTER - PLD Type 12A72502
NAME:
Monitor Delay Counter
TYPE No:
12A72502

FUNCTION:
To determine whether the Delay pulses from the Test Interrogator are
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
TIPRF
PULSE
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
A9P
SCNTP
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 14

Pulse to be checked
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 17
FLAG
Pin 18
CNT1P
Pin 19

limits
The operation of the Monitor Delay Counter is identical to that of the Monitor Width
Counter, Type 4A72502.
M-18
HA72500
M.12
APPENDIX M
MONITOR SPACING COUNTER - PLD Type 13A72502
NAME:
Monitor Spacing Counter
TYPE No:
13A72502

FUNCTION:
To determine whether the Spacing pulses from the Test Interrogator

are within the limits set by inputs from the fault limit switches.
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
TIPRF
PULSE
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
OUTPUTS:
TI2P
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
SCNTP
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 14

Pulse to be checked
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Pin 3
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 17
FLAG
Pin 18
CNT1P
Pin 19
TIPRF retimed by CLOCK

limits
Retiming of TIPRF
TI2P is the output of a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLOCK and with TIPRF as input.
Lower Limit Counter
Bit) clocked by the 10 MHz CLOCK. On reaching a count of zero, provided Flip Flop
SCNTP is HIGH, counting ceases and the count remains at zero until a positive TI2P
pulse is received. While TI2P pulse is HIGH, the counter outputs are placed in a high
loaded into the counter. Also while TIPRF pulse is HIGH, Flip Flop SCNTP goes to LOW
and stays LOW until the start of the second count (i.e. in the Accept Window Stage).
After TI2P returns to LOW, the counter maintains its preset count until the arrival of a
positive PULSE input. A HIGH on PULSE causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH and
the counter to commence the Lower Limit Stage. While CNT1P remains HIGH, the
counter counts down towards zero. When a count of ONE is reached, the next CLOCK
pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be reset LOW and the counter counts to ZERO
completing the Lower Limit Stage.
M-19
HA72500
APPENDIX M

Provided TI2P is still LOW, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop SCNTP to go HIGH
and stay HIGH until the next TIPRF pulse. This is the commencement of the Accept
Window Stage. If PULSE is still HIGH, this next CLOCK pulse also causes the counter to
be loaded with the binary data on inputs B0 to B4 (B0 is the Least Significant Bit) and
Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH. (However, if the binary data on inputs B0 to B4 is
ZERO, Flip Flop CNT1P is not set HIGH and the counter will remain at count ZERO.)
Continuing from the next CLOCK pulse, the counter again counts down towards zero.
When a count of ONE is reached, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be
reset LOW and the counter counts to ZERO. Since Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH, counting
ceases and the count remains at zero until a positive TIPRF pulse is received. This is
the completion of the Accept Window Stage.
Provided PULSE goes LOW while Flip Flops SCNTP and CNT1P are HIGH (i.e. during
the Accept Window Stage), Flip Flop FLAG will be set HIGH indicating that the duration
of PULSE is within the preset limits. Flip Flop FLAG is reset following the count reaching
ZERO while Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH, i.e. at the completion of the Accept Window
Stage.
If PULSE goes LOW during the Lower Limit Stage or is still HIGH at the completion of
the Accept Window Stage, Flip Flop FLAG will not be set HIGH, indicating that the
duration of PULSE is outside the preset limits.
Figure M-4 shows the timing relationships when the lower limit input data is set to 105
and the window input data is set to 11. The two waveforms at the bottom of the figure
show the minimum width and maximum width PULSE signals which give 50% FLAG
pulses. If AN and BN are the lower limit input data and window input data respectively,
then it can be seen from the figure that the minimum and maximum width PULSE signals
which give 50% FLAG pulses have duration AN + 1.5 and AN + BN + 1.5 CLOCK periods
respectively. Thus PULSE signals with duration less than or equal to AN + 1 or greater
than or equal to AN + BN + 2 CLOCK periods will be rejected.
M-20
HA72500
Figure M-4
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Spacing Counter
M-21
HA72500
M.13
APPENDIX M
MONITOR IDENT EXTRACTION - PLD Type 14A72502
NAME:
Monitor Ident Extraction
TYPE No:
14A72502

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
CENABLE
To extract Ident Information from Detected Transmitter Pulses and

detect Ident failure (i.e. Ident absent for longer than the preset limit).
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 11
MHZ
EN
GATE
OUTPUTS:
CENOUT
CLR75
Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 14
Pin 17
Pin 16
LOAD
C0P
C1P
C2P
C3P
C4P
C5P
C6P
NOIDENT
D0P
DEC
Pin 20
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 21
Pin 19
Pin 10
CLEAR
ENOUT
GAP
Pin 22
Pin 15
Pin 18
Synchronous clock input - 1 Hz

Ident Message Spacing (i.e. the time between transmissions
of the Ident Code)
1 MHz Clock
Detected Transmitter Pulses
40 microseconds pulses triggered by DEC output
CENABLE input retimed by CLOCK
Positive pulse, one CLOCK period wide, indicates positive
transition of CENABLE
Load signal to counter consisting of C6P to C0P
Part of Counter consisting of C6P to C0P, clocked by CLOCK
Ident Spacing Error
EN input retimed by MHZ
Ident Decide. Positive pulse, one MHZ period wide, indicates
positive transition of EN
Ident Clear. DEC pulse delayed by one period of MHZ
CLEAR pulse delayed by one period of MHZ
Ident Pulse. Negative pulse, three MHZ periods wide,
negative edge aligned with positive edge of CLEAR
Ident Message Spacing Check

Input signal CENABLE is a positive pulse representing the time between transmissions
of the Ident Code. This signal is retimed by the 1 Hz clock signal CLOCK as CENOUT.
(See Figure M-5.)
D-Type Flip Flop CLR75 has as input the ANDing of CENABLE being HIGH and
CENOUT being LOW. i.e. CLR75 produces positive pulses on positive transitions of
CENABLE. The input signal to Flip Flop CLR75 is also used to reset the counter
consisting of C6P to C0P to ZERO.
LOAD D-Type Flip Flop, also clocked by CLOCK, has as input the ORing of CLR75 and
the counter being at a count of 0 or 1. Since the counter is reset to 0 on the rising edge
of CENABLE, LOAD will go HIGH on the next CLOCK pulse. It will stay HIGH until one
CLOCK pulse after CLR75 goes LOW.
While Load is HIGH, the counter outputs are placed in a high impedance state and the
binary data fed to these outputs (through series resistors) is loaded into the counter on
the positive edges of CLOCK.
M-22
HA72500
APPENDIX M
The counter consisting of C6P to C0P is a 7-bit binary down counter clocked by the
positive edges of CLOCK. It is enabled to count provided LOAD is LOW, CLR75 is LOW,
CENOUT is HIGH and the counter is not at a count of 0. Thus, from the CLOCK pulse
following LOAD going LOW, the counter will count down from the preloaded value until
either CENABLE (and thus CENOUT) goes LOW or the counter reaches a count of 0.
S/R Flip Flop NOI DENT is clocked by the negative edges of the 1 MHz clock signal
MHZ. NOIDENT is synchronously set HIGH if the counter reaches a count of 1 and
CENOUT is still HIGH. It is synchronously reset LOW when CENABLE goes LOW
(provided the counter is at a count of 0). Output pulses at NOIDENT thus indicate that
the input CENABLE pulses have a longer duration than the preset limit.
From Figure M-5 it can be seen that the longest duration of CENABLE for which no
NOIDENT pulses are produced is AN + 1 CLOCK periods, where AN is the value
preloaded into the counter. Thus CENABLE pulses AN + 2 or more CLOCK pulses in
duration will cause NOIDENT output error pulses.
Ident Extraction
Input signal EN is a pair of positive pulses representing the detected transmitted Reply
pulses. This signal is gated by input GATE being LOW and retimed by the negative
transitions of 1 MHz clock signal MHZ to produce D0P. (See Figure M-6)
Positive transitions of EN (detected by EN being HIGH and D0P being LOW) are clocked
out at DEC by the negative transitions of MHZ. The positive edges of DEC are used to
trigger an external One-shot with a nominal duration of 40 microseconds. This One-shot
is the GATE input signal and has the effect of removing the second pulse of the EN
pulse pair. (Since the maximum nominal pulse spacing of the pulse pairs is
30 microseconds and the pulse widths are not greater than 4 microseconds, the
40 microseconds GATE pulses is guaranteed to completely remove the second pulse of
the pulse pair.)
DEC also forms the first stage of a 3-stage shift register with CLEAR and ENOUT. All
three stages are clocked by the negative transitions of MHZ.
Output GAP is a D-Type Flip Flop also clocked by the negative transitions of MHZ. Its
input is HIGH only when all three stages of the above shift register are LOW. The one
MHZ clock period wide positive pulse propagating through the above shift register
produces a GATE output (which is normally HIGH) going LOW for 3 MHZ clock periods
each time a transmitted pulse pair is transmitted.
Other circuitry is used to detect if the GATE output waveform indicates the presence of
the 1350 Hz Ident Tone.
M-23
HA72500
Figure M-5
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter Ident Message Spacing
Check
M-24
HA72500
Figure M-6
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter Ident Extraction
M-25
HA72500
M.14
APPENDIX M
MONITOR PRIMARY ERROR COUNTER - PLD Type 15A72502
NAME:
Monitor Primary Error Counter
TYPE No:
15A72502

FUNCTION:

are provided in the PLD (identified with "A" and "B" suffixes
INPUTS:
PRF
Pin 2
INH
Pin 23
FLTA
Pin 11
FLTB
OUTPUTS:
PRFCNT0
Pin 14
PRFCNT1
ALLCLCKA
Pin 15
Pin 9
TIMCLKA
DECA
Pin 7
Pin 6
A0P
A1P
A2P
FLAGA
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 8
ALLCLCKB
TIMCLKB
DECB
B0P
B1P
B2P
FLAGB
Pin 16
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 17
Pin 10

Measurement.
the PRF pulses.
(See FLTA)
(See PRFCNT0)
pulses
when LOW; counts UP when it and PRFCNTO are HIGH
measured parameter is consistently outside limits.
(See ALLCLCKA)
(See TIMCLKA)
(See DECA)
(See A0P)
(See A1P)
(See A2P)
(See FLAGA)
The operation of the Monitor Primary Error Counter is identical to that of the Monitor
Pulse Shape Error Counter 1, Type 8A72502.
M-26
HA72500
M.15
APPENDIX M
MONITOR INHIBIT DEVICE DRIVER - PLD Type 16A72502
NAME:
Monitor Inhibit Device Driver
TYPE No:
16A72502

FUNCTION:
To generate a retimed TIPRF pulse to the Delay, Spacing and Pulse

Shape (Width, Fall and Rise) Counters; to produce Inhibit signals to
the Efficiency and Delay Counters; and provide the input data
switching for the Delay and Spacing Monitor Fault Testing
INPUTS:
CLK
CLK
DELIN
SEPIN
MON TEST
INH
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
DEL_EN
EFF_EN
TIPRF
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
OUTPUTS:
DELOUT
SEPOUT
Pin 22
Pin 21
DEL_INH
Pin 20
EFF_INH
TI
TI1
TI2
Pin 19
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 15

Bit A5 from the "Delay Lower Limit Set switches
Bit A5 from the "Spacing Lower Limit Set" switches
Monitor Fault Test control from CTU
Inhibit control from Ident Extraction. HIGH when Ident is
detected as being transmitted
Delay Enable
Efficiency Enable
TIPRF from Test Interrogator. Indicates that a Test
Interrogation is about to be made
A5 input to Delay Counter. Part of Delay Lower Limit Set data
A5 input to Spacing Counter. Part of Spacing Lower Limit Set
data
Inhibit to Delay and Spacing Error Counters while Ident is
present
Inhibit to Efficiency Counters while Ident is present
Regenerated TIPRF
Part of 2-Stage Shift Register consisting of TI1 and TI2
Part of 2-Stage Shift Register consisting of TI1 and TI2
TIPRF Retiming
TI1 and T12 form a 2-Stage shift register clocked by the 10 MHz clock signal CLK, and
with TIPRF as input to TI1. TI produces a positive pulse of one CLK period duration
following the positive edge of TIPRF as shown in Figure M-7.
This retimed signal is the TIPRF" input signal to Delay, Spacing, Rise, Fall and Width
Counters.
Inhibit Control for Delay and Spacing Error Counters
EFF_INH is active HIGH if either: input INH is active HIGH or input EFF_EN is inactive
LOW.
Inhibit Control for Efficiency Counter
DEL_INH is inactive LOW if either: input MON_TEST is active HIGH or input DEL_EN is
active HIGH while input INH is inactive LOW.
M-27
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Monitor Test of Delay and Spacing Counters

While MON_TEST is inactive LOW, DELOUT is the same as DELIN, and SEPOUT is
the same as SEPIN. However when MON_TEST is active HIGH, DELOUT is the
opposite logic sense of DELIN and SEPOUT is the opposite logic sense of SEPIN.
MON_TEST is used to change the Delay and Spacing Lower Limit Set to the Delay and
Spacing Counters respectively by 3.2 microseconds. Since the maximum Delay and
Spacing Window Set is 3.1 microseconds, MON_TEST going high should cause a fault
indication from both Delay and Spacing Counters if a fault indication had not been
present when MON_TEST was LOW. This is used to check correct operation of these
two counters.
While output TI is HIGH, outputs DELOUT and SEPOUT are placed in a high impedance
state.
M-28
HA72500
Figure M-7
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Inhibit Device Driver
M-29
HA72500
M.16
APPENDIX M
MONITOR IDENT COUNTER - PLD Type 17A72502
NAME:
Monitor Ident Counter
TYPE No:
17A72502

FUNCTION:
To filter out the ident pulse pairs from the totality of transmitted pulse
pairs.
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
DEC
CLEAR
TIPRF
PULSE
B0
B1
B2
OUTPUTS:
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
A4P
A5P
A6P
A7P
A8P
A9P
SCNTP
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 20
Pin 14
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 22
Pin 21

Ident Decide
Clear pulse used to reset Counter
Pulse to be checked
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Accept Window Input
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 17
FLAG
CNT1P
Pin 18
Pin 19

Output to indicate that the duration of PULSE is within limits
Counter Control Inputs

DEC, CLEAR, TIPRF and PULSE are produced externally by a 3-stage shift register
clocked on the negative edge of CLOCK (See Figure M-8 to Figure M-10)
Lower Limit Counter
Sit) clocked by the 10 MHz CLOCK. On reaching a count of zero, provided Flip Flop
SCNTP is HIGH, counting ceases and the count remains at zero until a positive TIPRF
pulse is received. The counter is asynchronously reset to a count of 0 whenever CLEAR
is HIGH. While TIPRF pulse is HIGH, the counter outputs are placed in a high
synchronously loaded into the counter. Also while TIPRF pulse is HIGH, Flip Flop
SCNTP is asynchronously reset to LOW and stays LOW until the start of the second
count (i.e. in the Accept Window Stage).
M-30
HA72500
APPENDIX M
positive PULSE input. A HIGH on PULSE causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH (on
the next CLOCK pulse) and the counter to commence the Lower Limit Stage. While
CNT1P remains HIGH, the counter counts down towards zero. When a count of ONE is
reached, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be reset LOW and the
counter counts to ZERO completing the Lower Limit Stage.
Provided TIPRF is still LOW, the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop SCNTP to go
HIGH and stay HIGH until the next TIPRF pulse. This is the commencement of the
Accept Window Stage. If PULSE is still HIGH, this next CLOCK pulse also causes the
counter to be loaded with the binary data on inputs B0 to B2 (B0 is the Least Significant
Bit) and Flip Flop CNT1P to be set HIGH. (However, if the binary data on inputs B0 to B2
is ZERO, Flip Flop CNT1P is not set HIGH and the counter will remain at count ZERO.)
Provided no DEC or CLEAR pulses are received, continuing from the next CLOCK
pulse, the counter again counts down towards zero. When a count of ONE is reached,
the next CLOCK pulse causes Flip Flop CNT1P to be reset LOW and the counter counts
to ZERO. Since Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH, counting ceases and the count remains at
zero until a positive CLEAR pulse is received. This is the completion of the Accept
Window Stage for the case where the duration between the pulse pairs is greater than
what would normally be expected for Ident transmission. This is shown in Figure M-10.
Pulse Rate Within Ident Range
Provided the next DEC pulse arrives while Flip Flop SCNTP is HIGH (i.e. during the
Accept Window Stage) and the counter is NOT at a count of 0, Flip Flop FLAG will be
set HIGH indicating that the duration of PULSE is within the preset limits.
Figure M-8 shows this condition. From this timing diagram it can be seen that for times
between DEC pulses (and thus between transmitted pulse pairs) in the range
740 microseconds to 746 microseconds the FLAG Flip Flop will be continuously set
HIGH.
Pulse Rate Higher Than Ident Rate
If the next DEC pulse arrives before Flip Flop SCNTP is set HIGH and while Flip Flop
CNT1P is HIGH, Flip Flop FLAG will be reset LOW, indicating that the duration of
PULSE is less than the preset lower limit.
between DEC pulses (and thus between transmitted pulse pairs) of 738 microseconds
and less the FLAG Flip Flop will be continuously reset LOW.
Pulse Rate Lower Than Ident Rate
If the next DEC pulse arrives after the counter reaches a count of 0 and while Flip Flop
SCNTP is HIGH, Flip Flop FLAG will be reset LOW, indicating that the duration of
PULSE is greater than the preset upper limit.
between DEC pulses (and thus between transmitted pulse pairs) of 747 microseconds
and more the FLAG Flip Flop will be continuously reset LOW.
M-31
HA72500
Figure M-8
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Within Ident
Range
M-32
HA72500
Figure M-9
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Higher Than
Ident Rate
M-33
HA72500
Figure M-10
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Counter - Pulse Rate Lower Than
Ident Rate
M-34
HA72500
M.17
APPENDIX M
MONITOR RATE COUNTER - PLD Type 18A72502
NAME:
Monitor Rate Counter
TYPE No:
18A72502 Issue 2
WHERE USED: 1A72511, Monitor PWB Assembly; D45.

Issue 1 used until June 1995.
Issue 2 used from July 1995.
FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLCK
CLCK
REPLYA
RATEA
REPLYB
RATEB
OUTPUTS:
FLAGAB
UA1
UA2
DA1
ENA
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
UB1
DB1
DB2
ENB
B0P
B1P
B2P
To determine if the transmitted pulse pair rate is within the preset

limits.
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 14

Pulse Input to cause Counter A to count Up by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter A to count Down by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter B to count Down by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter B to count Up by 1
Pin 8
Pin 6
Pin 10
Pin 7
Pin 9
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 15
Pin 19
Pin 18
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Fault Indicator. HIGH = No Fault; LOW = Fault condition

REPLYA retimed by CLCK
UA1 retimed by CLCK
RATEA retimed by CLCK
Count Enable to Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
REPLYB retimed by CLCK
RATEB retimed by CLCK
DB1 retimed by CLCK
Count Enable to Counter B
Part of Counter B
Part of Counter B
Part of Counter B
The PLD contains a common output Flip Flop FLAGAB and two sets of essentially
identical circuitry. The two sets are identified by the letters 'A" and "B in the names of
the I/O pins.
Input Signal Processing
UA1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with REPLYA as its input.
UA2 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with UA1 as its input.
DA1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with RATEA as its input.
UB1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with RATEB as its input.
DB1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with REPLYB as its input.
DB2 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with DB1 as its input.
M-35
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Counter A
A0P to A3P form a 4-bit Binary Up/Down Counter (A0P is the Least Significant Bit)
clocked by the 1 MHz CLCK. It is limited to counting up and down between 0 and 15.
Positive edges of RATEA (detected by RATEA being HIGH while DA1 is LOW) cause
Counter A to count Down by 1 provided ENA is HIGH. Positive edges of REPLYA
(detected by UA1 being HIGH while UA2 is LOW) cause Counter A to count Up by 1
provided ENA is HIGH. The counter is enabled by ENA which is the ORing of the 2
above positive edge detectors but with simultaneous positive edges of both RATEA and
REPLYA removed (i.e. simultaneous positive edges of both RATEA and REPLYA
produce no change in the count of Counter A).
Thus, while the frequency of REPLYA exceeds the frequency of RATEA, Counter A will
count Up to a count of 15 and stay at a count of 15. And, while the frequency of RATEA
exceeds the frequency of REPLYA, Counter A will count Down to a count of 0 and stay
at a count of 0.
Counter B
B0P to B2P form a 3-bit Binary Up/Down Counter (B0P is the Least Significant Bit)
Positive edges of RATEB (detected by RATEB being HIGH while UB1 is LOW) cause
Counter B to count Up by 1 provided ENB is HIGH. Positive edges of REPLYB (detected
by ENB being HIGH while DB2 is LOW) cause Counter B to count Down by 1 provided
ENB is HIGH. The counter is enabled by ENB which is the ORing of the two above
positive edge detectors but with simultaneous positive edges of both RATEB and
REPLYB removed (i.e. simultaneous positive edges of both RATEB and REPLYB
produce no change in the count of Counter B).
Thus, while the frequency of REPLYB exceeds the frequency of RATEB, Counter B will
count Down to a count of 0 and stay at a count of 0. And, while the frequency of RATEB
exceeds the frequency of REPLYB, Counter B will count Up to a count of 15 and stay at
a count of 15.
Output Flag
FLAGAB is a synchronous SR-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK. It is set HIGH if
counter A is at a count of 15 and counter B is at a count of 7. It is reset LOW if either of
the counters is at a count of 0.
M-36
HA72500
M.18
APPENDIX M
MONITOR IDENT ERROR COUNTER - PLD Type 19A72502
NAME:
Monitor Ident Error Counter
TYPE No:
19A72502

FUNCTION:
To extract the Ident Tone, produce an Inhibit signal to the fault

processing circuitry to inhibit Fault generation during Ident
Transmission and detect Ident transmissions longer than 10 seconds
as a Fault.
INPUTS:
CLOCK
CLOCK
CODE
ERR75
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 11
Pin 14
IMHZ
CKEY
1KCLK
Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 22
OUTPUTS:
C0P
Pin 20
C1P
Pin 19
INHIBIT
CODE2
B0P
Pin 21
Pin 17
Pin 15
B1P
Pin 8
B2P
Pin 6
B3P
Pin 5
MKERRP
A0P
Pin 18
Pin 4
A1P
Pin 3
A2P
Pin 16
IDNTMKP
TONEP
Pin 7
Pin 10

Ident Message. Envelope of Ident Transmissions
Error signal indicating the absence of Ident for longer than
the preset limit
1 kHz input clock
Ident Keying
40 microseconds pulses, one pulse corresponding to each
detected Transmitted pulse pair
Part of counter consisting of C0P to C1P. Clocked on the +ve
edges of CLOCK
Part of counter consisting of C0P to C1P. Clocked on the +ve
edges of CLOCK
Ident Inhibit signal to fault processing circuitry
CODE input retimed by clock CLOCK
Part of counter consisting of B0P to B3P. Clocked on the +ve
edges of CLOCK
edges of CLOCK
edges of CLOCK
Part of counter consisting of B0P to B3P. Clocked on the + ve
edges of CLOCK
Ident error signal
Part of counter consisting of A0P to A2P. Clocked on the +ve
edges of IMHZ
edges of IMHZ
edges of IMHZ
Recovered Ident Keying
Recovered Ident Tone
Ident Tone Extraction

A0P to A2P form a 3-bit binary Up/Down counter clocked by the 1 kHz input signal
IMHZ. While input CKEY is HIGH, the counter counts Up by 1 on the positive edge of
IMHZ to a maximum of 7. While input CKEY is LOW, the counter counts Down by 1 on
the positive edge of IMHZ to a minimum of 0. (See Figure M-11)
M-37
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Output IDNTMKP uses this counter to filter the CKEY input signal. IDNTMKP is a
synchronous SR-Flip Flop clocked by IMHZ. It is asynchronously reset to LOW
whenever input CKEY is LOW. It is synchronously set to HIGH on the next clock pulse
on the condition that CKEY is HIGH and the counter is at a count of either 6 or 7.
(See Figure M-11)
Input 1KCLK consists of a sequence of 40 microseconds pulses where each pulse
represents a transmitted pulse pair. During Ident transmission these pulses will therefore
occur at the Ident rate of 1350 Hz. IDNTMKP is used to gate these pulses to produce the
recovered transmitted Ident Tone. (Between the Ident transmissions, the
40 microseconds pulses represent the transmitted replies and squitter.)
Ident Inhibit Output
C0P to C1P form a 2-bit binary Up counter clocked by the 1 Hz input signal CLOCK.
This counter is held asynchronously reset to a count of 0 while IDNTMKP is LOW. While
IDNTMKP is HIGH, the counter counts Up by 1 on the positive edge of CLOCK to a
maximum of 3. (See Figure M-12)
During Ident Transmission, all replies are inhibited. Unless action was taken the monitor
circuitry would therefore generate Fault signals. To prevent this, an Ident Inhibit signal,
INHIBIT, is generated by ANDing IDNTMKP being HIGH and the counter being at a
count of either 0 or 1. Thus INHIBIT follows IDNTMKP to inhibit Fault signals during
Ident transmission, but is limited to a maximum duration of two CLOCK periods
(i.e. 2 seconds).
Ident Error Detection
Input CODE is the output of a One-shot triggered by the TONEP pulses. It thus provides
an envelope of the Ident message. This input is retimed in D-Type Flip Flop CODE2
clocked by the 1 kHz signal IMHZ. The positive transitions of CODE (detected by CODE
being HIGH while CODE2 is LOW) are used to asynchronously reset the counter
consisting of B0P to B3P to a count of 0.
B0P to B3P form a 4-bit binary Up counter clocked by the 1 Hz input signal CLOCK.
While CODE is HIGH, the counter counts Up by 1 on the positive edge of CLOCK to a
maximum of 15. (See Figure M-12)
MKERRP is a synchronous SR-Flip Flop clocked by IMHZ. It is synchronously set to
HIGH on the positive edge of the next IMHZ pulse if either CODE is HIGH or input
ERR75 is LOW when the counter consisting of B0P to B3P is at a count of 0. MKERRP
is synchronously reset to LOW on the positive edge of the next IMHZ pulse if input
ERR75 is HIGH or the counter consisting of B0P to B3P is at a count between 10 and
15.
MKERRP is thus an Active LOW error signal indicating that continuous Ident or Ident
Code has been transmitted for longer than 10 seconds, or that Ident has been absent for
longer than the preset time limit.
M-38
HA72500
Figure M-11
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Error Counter - Ident Tone
Extraction
M-39
HA72500
Figure M-12
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Monitor Ident Error Counter - Ident Error
Detection and Inhibit Control
M-40
HA72500
M.19
APPENDIX M
MONITOR EFFICIENCY COUNTER - PLD Type 20A72502
NAME:
Monitor Efficiency Counter
TYPE No:
20A72502

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLCK
CLCK
EINH
BOTH
REPLYA
RATEA
REPLYB
RATEB
OUTPUTS:
FLAGAB
UA1
DA1
CLOKA
A0P
A1P
A2P
A3P
UB1
DB1
CLOKB
B0P
B1P
B2P
To determine if the reply efficiency is greater than the preset limit.

Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 10
Pin 17
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 23
Pin 14

Inhibit
Input to disable the effect of Counter B on FLAGAB output
Pulse Input to cause Counter A to count Up by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter A to count Down by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter B to count Down by 1
Pulse Input to cause Counter B to count Up by 1
Pin 8
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 9
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 15
Pin 19
Pin 18
Pin 16
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Fault Indicator. HIGH = No Fault; LOW = Fault condition

REPLYA retimed by CLCK
RATEA retimed by CLCK
Clock to Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
Part of Counter A
REPLYB retimed by CLCK
RATEB retimed by CLCK
Clock to Counter B
Part of Counter B
Part of Counter B
Part of Counter B
The PLD contains a common output Flip Flop FLAGAB and two sets of essentially
identical circuitry. The two sets are identified by the letters A" and "B" in the names of
the I/O pins.
Input Signal Processing
U(A/B)1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with REPLY(A/B) as its input.
D(A/B)1 is a D-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK with RATE(A/B) as its input.
Counter A
A0P to A3P form a 4-bit Binary Up/Down Counter (A0P is the Least Significant Bit)
Positive edges of RATEA (detected by RATEA being HIGH while DA1 is LOW) cause
Counter A to count Up by 1 provided EINH is LOW. Positive edges of REPLYA (detected
by REPLYA being HIGH while UA1 is LOW) cause Counter A to count Down by 1
provided EINH is LOW. The counter is clocked by the negative edges of CLOKA which
is the ORing of the 2 above positive edge detectors but with simultaneous positive edges
of both RATEA and REPLYA removed (i.e. simultaneous positive edges of both RATEA
and REPLYA produce no change in the count of Counter A).
M-41
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Thus, while the frequency of REPLYA exceeds the frequency of RATEA, Counter A will
count Down to a count of 0 and stay at a count of 0. And, while the frequency of RATEA
exceeds the frequency of REPLYA, Counter A will count Up to a count of 15 and stay at
a count of 15.
Counter B
B0P to B3P form a 3-bit Binary Up/Down Counter (B0P is the Least Significant Bit)
clocked by the 1 MHz CLCK. Positive edges of RATEB (detected by RATEB being HIGH
while DB1 is LOW) cause Counter B to count Down by 1 provided EINH is LOW.
Positive edges of REPLYB (detected by REPLYB being HIGH while UB1 is LOW) cause
Counter B to count Up by 1 provided EINH is LOW. The counter is clocked by the
negative edges of CLOKB which is the ORing of the 2 above positive edge detectors but
with simultaneous positive edges of both RATEB and REPLYB removed (i.e.
simultaneous positive edges of both RATEB and REPLYB produce no change in the
count of Counter B).
Output Flag
FLAGAB is a synchronous SR-Type Flip Flop clocked by CLCK. It is set HIGH if either
Counter A is at a count of 15 or Counter B is at a count of 15 with input BOTH HIGH. It is
reset LOW if either Counter A is at a count of 0 or Counter B is at a count of 0 with input
BOTH HIGH. In its actual use in the Monitor Module, REPLYB, RATEB and BOTH are
all tied LOW and Counter B is thus disabled.
M-42
HA72500
M.20
APPENDIX M
TEST INTERROGATOR COUNTER TIMER - PLD Type 21A72502
NAME:
Test Interrogator Counter Timer
TYPE No:
21A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72515, Test. Interrogator Main PWB Assembly; D33

FUNCTION:
To control signal switching in relation to the 82C54 Counter/Timer

used on the Test Interrogator Main PWB Assembly for measuring
equipment parameters.
INPUTS:
CLK1
ENABLE
PARA
RST
50HZ
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 14
Pin 23
AC0
Pin 22
AC1
OI
RPLY
UNUSED:
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 16
Pin 13
OUTPUTS:
EN1P
EN2P
PARA1P
PARA2P
PARA3P
PARA4P
PARA5P
T_STATUSP
GATEP
TIATTP
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 7
Pin 15
Pin 19
EFFPP
Pin 17

Timer Enable - control input from CTU. Active HIGH
Time Parameter Input Signal - input from Timer Multiplexer
Reset. Active HIGH
Test Interrogations Attenuator Switching - HIGH for high level
interrogations
Control input from CTU. Active HIGH - Efficiency Enable
Override
Control input from CTU. Active HIGH - Delay Enable Override
Over Interrogation. Active HIGH
Detected Replies
Synchronous clock input
Delayed ENABLE (clocked by CLK1)
Delayed EN1P (clocked by CLK1)
Delayed PARA (clocked by CLK1)
Delayed PARA1P (clocked by CLK1)
Gating Signal to select second PARA pulse
Delayed PARA3P (clocked byCLK1)
Delayed PARA4P (clocked by CLK1)
Timer Status
Gate Signal to 80C54 Counter/Timer
Test Interrogations Attenuator Switching - HIGH for high level
interrogations
Gated Reply Pulses for Efficiency Measurement
Timer Status and Parameter Gating

See Figure M-13 for the timing diagram. The ENABLE input from the CTU is fed into the
shift register consisting of EN1P and EN2P. The rising edge of ENABLE (detected by
EN1P being HIGH while EN2P is LOW) causes Flip Flop T_STATUSP to go HIGH.
(Flip Flop T_STATUSP is held RESET while ever EN1P is LOW.)
The PARA input from the Timer Multiplexer is fed into the shift register consisting of
PARA1P and PARA2P. The falling edges of the PAPA pulses (detected by PARA2P
being HIGH while PARA1P is LOW) toggle Flip Flop PARA3P. Flip Flop PARA3P is held
RESET while ever T_STATUSP is LOW. Therefore the falling edge of the first PARA
pulse after T_STATUSP goes HIGH causes PARA3P to go HIGH and the falling edge of
the second PARA pulse after T_STATUSP goes HIGH causes PARA3P to go LOW.
PARA3P is then used to gate out the second PARA pulse as GATEP to the
Counter/Timer for the measurement of its duration.
M-43
HA72500
APPENDIX M
The output of PARA3P is internally fed into the shift register consisting of PARA4P and
PARA5P. The falling edge of PARA3P (detected by PARA5P being HIGH while PARA4P
is LOW) causes Flip Flop T_STATUSP to go LOW to indicate to the CTU that the
parameter measurement is complete.
Gated Reply Pulses
EFFPP passes the input RPLY pulses when ever the setup conditions are acceptable for
an Efficiency measurement; i.e. when 50HZ is LOW or AC0 is HIGH or AC1 is HIGH.
Interrogation Attenuator Control
TIATTP controls the attenuator at the output of the Test Interrogator to produce high
level interrogations when it is HIGH and low level interrogations when it is LOW. The
logic is shown in the table below.
50HZ
AC0
AC1
OI
TIATTP
X = Don't care
M-44
HA72500
Figure M-13
APPENDIX M
Timing Diagram : Test Interrogator Counter Timer
M-45
HA72500
M.21
APPENDIX M
TEST INTERROGATOR BUS INTERFACE - PLI) Type 22A72502
NAME:
Test Interrogator Bus Interface
TYPE No:
22A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72515, Test Interrogator Main PWB Assembly; D26

FUNCTION:
To decode the address lines on the Extended CTU Bus to the Test
Interrogator Main PWB Assembly and produce the required chip select
lines.
INPUTS:
CLK1
CLK2
RD
WR
DT_R
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 23
Pin 3
Pin 4
DEN
Pin 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A5
BS
RES
GUNIT
UNUSED:
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 14
Pin 17
Pin 2
OUTPUTS:
BUFEN
LEN_00
LEN_02
BEN_04
LEN_06
CS_MEAS
CS_FLT
Pin 22
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 19
Pin 18
Pin 15
Pin 16

Data Transmit/Receive Signal from Extended CTU Bus.
When LOW, data is read out of the PWBA; when HIGH data
is written to the PWBA
during memory and I/O accesses
Locally Generated Bus Enable Signal. Active HIGH

Test Interrogator Control Outputs Select
Test Interrogator Status Read Select
Timer Measurement Select
Fault Detector Test Signal Generator Select

BUFEN enables the transceiver for the data bus. Active LOW when inputs BS and DEN
are active LOW, RESET is inactive LOW and A5 is LOW.
Test Interrogator Control Outputs Selects
LEN_00 enables write access to an octal latch driving control outputs to the Test
Interrogator circuitry. Is active HIGH when inputs: BS and WR are active LOW and the
address is 00H or 10H.
M-46
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Test Interrogator Status Read Select

BEN_04 enables read access of status signals from the Test Interrogator circuitry. Is
Timer Measurement Select
CS_MEAS enables read and write access to the 82C54 Counter/Timer used for
measuring equipment parameters. Is active LOW when inputs: BS and DEN are active
LOW and the address is in the range 08H to 0BH or in the range 18H to 1BH.
Fault Detector Test Signal Generator Select
CS_FLT enables read and write access to the 82C54 Counter/Timer used to generate
Fault Detector Test Signals. Is active LOW when inputs: BS and DEN are active LOW
and the address is in the range 0CH to 0FH or in the range 1CH to 1FH.
M-47
HA72500
M.22
APPENDIX M
CTU PROCESSOR WAIT STATE GENERATOR - PLD Type
23A72502
NAME:
CTU Processor Wait State Generator
TYPE No:
23A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72552, CTU Processor PWB Assembly; D13

FUNCTION:
To generate wait states for the 80C186 microprocessor to slow it down

when it accesses slow peripherals. It also provides some address
decoding.
INPUTS:
CLOCK1
CLOCK2
DEN
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 21
RD
WR
PCS0
Pin 23
Pin 14
Pin 11
PCS1
Pin 2
PCS2
Pin 10
MCS1
Pin 9
MCS2
Pin 8
OUTPUTS:
XRD
XWR
WR_PCS1
WR_PCS2
DEN_PCS0
DEN_MCS1
DEN_MCS2
SRDY
CT0
CT1
CT2
XIPL
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 5
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 22
Pin 18
Pin 20
Pin 19
Pin 15
10 MHz Clock from Microprocessor

10 MHz Clock from Microprocessor - phase inverted
Data Enable from Microprocessor. Active LOW during
memory and I/O accesses by the microprocessor
Active LOW Read strobe from Microprocessor
Active LOW Write strobe from Microprocessor
Programmable Active LOW Peripheral Chip Select from
Microprocessor (CTU Front Panel and RCMS I/F PWBAs)
Microprocessor (Transponder I/O on CTU Processor PWBA)
Microprocessor (Configuration I/O on CTU Processor PWBA)
Programmable Active LOW Mid-Range Memory Chip Select
from Microprocessor (Extended CTU Bus to Transponder
No.1)
Programmable Active LOW Mid-Range Memory Chip Select
from Microprocessor (Extended CTU Bus to Transponder
No.2)
Extended Read
Extended Write
Write Signal for Peripheral Chip Select 1
Data Transceiver Enable for Peripheral Chip Select 0
Data Transceiver Enable for Mid-Range Memory Chip Select 1
Synchronous Ready to Microprocessor
Part of BCD Counter consisting of CT0, CT1, CT2, XIPL
Extended CTU Bus

The Extended CTU Bus is an extension of the CTU Processor bus stowed down so that
peripherals up to 2 metres from the CTU can be accessed by the CTU Processor. The
timing of the Extended CTU Bus is controlled by the Wait State Counter.
Wait State Counter
The counter consisting of CT0, CT1, CT2, XIPL (CT0 is the least significant bit) is a BCD
counter (counting from 0 to 9) clocked by input CLOCK2. It is normally held at count 0,
but is enabled to start counting from count 0 whenever any of the chip select input
signals PCS0, PCS1, PCS2, MCS1, MCS2 goes active low.
M-48
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Extended Bus Input Data Latch Clock

XIPL provides a positive clock edge at the beginning of count 8 of the Wait State
Counter. This clock is used to latch read data on the Extended CTU Bus into latches to
be then read by the CTU.
Extended Bus Read
XRD goes active low whenever the input signal RD is active low and the Wait State
Counter is at counts in the range 3 to 8. Extended Bus Write XWR goes active low
whenever the input signal WR is active low and the Wait State Counter is at counts in
the range 3 to 8.
Synchronous Ready
SRDY, on going low, causes the 80C186 microprocessor to generate wait states until
this signal goes high again. This signal is low whenever either input RD or WR is low
and the Wait State Counter is at counts in the range 1 to 8.
WR_PCS1 is an active HIGH latch control signal for data written by the microprocessor
at the address(es) selected by input PCS1. This signal is only high when both inputs WR
and PCS1 are active LOW and the Wait State Counter is at counts in the range 4 to 8.
WR_PCS2 is an active HIGH latch control signal for data written by the microprocessor
at the address(es) selected by input PCS2. This signal is only high, when both inputs
WR and PCS2 are active LOW and the Wait State Counter is at counts in the range
4 to 8.
Data Transceiver Enable for Peripheral Chip Select 0
DEN_PCS0 is an enable signal to the data bus transceiver for the extended CTU Bus to
the CTU Front Panel and RCMS I/F. The signal is active LOW whenever both inputs
DEN and PCS0 are active LOW.
DEN_MCS1 is an enable signal to the data bus transceiver for the extended CTU Bus to
Transponder No.1. The signal is active LOW whenever both inputs DEN and MCS1 are
active LOW.
DEN_MCS1 is an enable signal to the data bus transceiver for the extended CTU Bus to
Transponder No.2. The signal is active LOW whenever both inputs DEN and MCS2 are
active LOW.
M-49
HA72500
APPENDIX M
M.23
CTU PROCESSOR IDENT TONE AND KEYING - PLD Type

24A72502
NAME:
CTU Processor Ident Tone and Keying
TYPE No:
24A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72552, CTU Processor PWB Assembly, D2

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
R_SEL1
R_SEL2
R_TON1
R_TON2
R_KEY1
R_KEY2
A_SEL1
A_SEL2
M_OUT1
M_OUT2
2440HZ
TMROUT
A_IN
OUTPUTS:
TN_TXFR
SPEAKER
DET_KEY
M_IN1
M_IN2
M_OUT
IDENT_ON
To control the switching of the Ident signals on the CTU Processor

Pin 14
Pin 10
Pin 18
Pin 17
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 23
Pin 19
Pin 21
Pin 20
Pin 2
Pin 11
Pin 22
Received Ident Select Control Signal

Received Ident Select Control Signal
Received Ident Tone from Monitor 1
Received Ident Tone from Monitor 2
Received Ident Keying from Monitor 1
Received Ident Keying from Monitor 2
Associate Ident Select Control Signal
Associate Ident Select Control Signal
Master Output of Ident Generator of Transponder 1
Master Output of Ident Generator of Transponder 2
Input Clock
Timing Signal from Microprocessor
Associate Ident Input Signal
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 7
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Ident Tone Output to RCMS I/F Transformer

Ident Tone Output to Speaker in CTU
Detected Ident Keying (to EXT I/O PWBA)
Master Ident Input to Transmitter of Transponder 1
Master Ident Input to Transmitter of Transponder 2
Master Ident Output to Associate Navaid
Status Signal to CTU
Ident Switching for Outputs: M_IN, MA_OUT, TN_TXFR, DET_KEY

INPUTS
OUTPUTS
A-SEL
M_IN
MA_OUT
TN_TXFR
DET_KEY
A_IN
M_OUT1
R_TON1
R_KEY1
A_IN
M_OUT2
R_TON2
R_KEY2
1
1
M-50
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Ident Switching for Output: SPEAKER

INPUTS
OUTPUT
A_SEL
SPEAKER
R_TON1
R_TON2
2440HZ
TMROUT
Ident Switching for Output: IDENT_ON

INPUTS
A_SEL
OUTPUT
R_SEL
2440HZ
IDENT_ON
R_KEY1
R_KEY2
X= Don't care
= Low-to-high transition
P= State of IDENT_ON at previous
low-to-high transition of 2440HZ
M-51
HA72500
M.24
APPENDIX M
CTU FRONT PANEL ADDRESS DECODER - PLD Type
25A72502
NAME:
CTU Front Panel Address Decoder
TYPE No:
25A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72553, CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly; D9

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLOCK1
CLOCK2
XRD_N
XWR_N
DEN_N
XRES
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
PCS0_N
OUTPUTS:
FP_DEN_N
DIS_EN
SSC
ALARM
A_REG1
A_REG2
C_STAT1
C_STAT2
M_STAT
To decode the address fines on the Extended CTU Bus to the CTU
Front Panel PWB Assembly and produce the required chip select lines.
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 19
Pin 18
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 23
Pin 14
Pin 11
Pin 2
Pin 10

Pin 17
Pin 22
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 8
Pin 5
Pin 9
Pin 6
Pin 7

Display Select
Key Switch Select
Alarm Delay Switch Select
Alarm Register Write Select 1
Alarm Register Write Select 2
Control Status Write Select 1
Control Status Write Select 2
Miscellaneous Status Write Select

FP_DEN_N enables the transceiver for the data bus. Active LOW when inputs PCS0_N
and XDEN_N are active LOW and XRES and A6 are inactive LOW.
Display Select
DIS_EN enables read and write access to the LCD Display. Is active HIGH when inputs:
PCS0 is active LOW, either XRD or XWR is active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the
address is in the range 00H to 01H.
Key Switch Select
SSC enables read access to keypad interface PLD. Is active LOW when inputs: PCS0
and XRD are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the address is 02H.
Alarm Delay Switch Select
ALARM enables read access to the two BCD Alarm Delay setting switches. Is active
LOW when inputs: PCS0 and XRD are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the
address is 03H.
M-52
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Alarm Register Write Selects

A_REG1 enables write access to an octal latch driving alarm indicators. Is active HIGH
when inputs: PCS0 and XWR are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the address
is 04H.
A_REG2 enables write access to an octal latch driving alarm indicators. Is active HIGH
is 05H.
Control Status Write Selects
C_STAT1 enables write access to an octal latch driving status indicators. Is active HIGH
is 06H.
C_STAT2 enables write access to an octal latch driving status indicators. Is active HIGH
is 07H.
M_STAT enables write access to an octal latch driving alarm indicators. Is active HIGH
is 08H.
M-53
HA72500
M.25
APPENDIX M
CTU FRONT PANEL KEY SWITCH INTERFACE - PLD Type
26A72502
NAME:
CTU Front Panel Key Switch Interface
TYPE No:
26A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72553, CTU Front Panel PWB Assembly; D5

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLK1
CLK1
10KHZIN
1KHZIN
CSN_RDN
DEBNZIN
ROW1
ROW2
ROW3
ROW4
OUTPUTS:
COL1
COL2
COL3
COL4
KEY0
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEYON
1KHZOUT
10KHZOUT
DEBNZOUT
To detect operation of the momentary action push button keys on the

front panel of the CTU and supply this information to the CTU via the
CTU Extended Bus.
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 23
Pin 14
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 2
Pin 11

Dedicated Key input from 10kHz key
Dedicated Key input from 1kHz" key
Chip Select for outputting Key data to the Extended CTU
Bus. Active HIGH
Debounce input
Input from switch matrix
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Output to switch matrix

Key Status Output to Data Bus for keys in switch matrix
Dedicated Key Status Output to Data Bus
Dedicated Key Status Output to Data Bus
Debounce output
Switch Matrix
COL1 to COL4 are active LOW signals with only one LOW at a time. They feed a 4 X 4
switch matrix (through a pull down diode) with the row signals as inputs back into the
PLD. With no keys pressed, the LOW column signal repeatedly cycles from COL1
through COL4. The rate is controlled by the CLK1 input signal (1221 Hz). If a key is
pressed when the corresponding COL signal goes LOW, that COL signal stays LOW
until all keys in that column are released.
DEBNZOUT is an active LOW debounce signal. It is LOW while ever one and only one
key in a column is pressed. This signal is externally delayed (nominally 14 ms) and
inverted and fed back into the DEBNZIN input.
Thus when a single key in a column is pressed for longer than the debounce delay, the
column and row data will be stable with only one each of the column and row signals
LOW, and DEBNZIN HIGH.
M-54
HA72500
APPENDIX M
If more than one key in a column is pressed, DEBNZIN will remain low. If keys in more
than one column are pressed, the column in which the first pressed key is detected will
be the one which remains low (while the key remains pressed). Pressed keys in other
columns will remain undetected while the detected key remains pressed. DEBNZIN will
go HIGH indicating a valid key input provide only one key is pressed in the selected
column.
Bus Interface
While input CSN_RDN is HIGH, the seven output signals KEY0, KEY1, KEY2, KEY3,
KEYON, 1KHZOUT and 10KHZOUT are in a high impedance state. When CSN_RDN is
low these seven signals become active and drive the data bus.
1KHZOUT and 10KHZOUT are just the buffered input signals 1KHZIN and 10KHZIN.
KEYON, when HIGH, indicates that valid key data is present on KEY0, KEY1, KEY2 and
KEY3 from the switch matrix.
KEY0, KEY1 provide a binary code (KEY0 is the least significant bit) for the column of
the pressed key as follows:
COLUMN
KEY1
KEY0
KEY2, KEY3 provide a binary code (KEY2 is the least significant bit) for the row of the
pressed key as follows:
ROW
KEY3
KEY2
M-55
HA72500
M.26
APPENDIX M
RCMS INTERFACE ADDRESS DECODER - PLD Type 27A72502
NAME:
RCMS Interface Address Decoder
TYPE No:
27A72502
WHERE USED: 1A72555, CTU RCMS I/F PWB Assembly; D1

FUNCTION:
INPUTS:
CLOCK1
CLOCK2
XRD_N
XWR_N
DEN_N
XRES
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
PCS0_N
UNUSED:
OUTPUTS:
RCMS_DEN_N
M_STAT
RSTAT_2
BITOUT_3
BITFB_2
RCONT_1
To decode the address lines on the Extended CTU Bus to the CTU
RCMS I/F PWB Assembly and produce the required chip select lines.
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 19
Pin 18
Pin 16
Pin 15
Pin 23
Pin 14
Pin 11
Pin 2
Pin 10
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 22
Pin 17
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7


RCMS Status Write Select
Built In Bus Test Write Select
Built In Bus Test Read Select
RCMS Control Inputs Select

RCMS_DEN_N enables the transceiver for the data bus. Active LOW when inputs
PCS0_N and XDEN_N are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW and A6 is active HIGH.
RCMS Control Inputs Select
RCONT_1 enables read access of the RCMS control inputs. Is active LOW when inputs:
PCS0 and XRD are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the address is 20H.
M_STAT enables write access to an octal latch driving RCMS status outputs. Is active
HIGH when inputs: PCS0 and XWR are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the
address is 22H.
RCMS Status Write Select
RSTAT_2 enables write access to an octal latch driving RCMS status outputs. Is active
HIGH when inputs: PCS0 and XWR are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the
address is 23H.
M-56
HA72500
APPENDIX M
Built In Bus Test Selects

BITOUT_3 enables write access to an octal latch for test purposes. Is active HIGH when
inputs: PCS0 and XWR are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the address is 25H.
BITFB_2 enables read access of the data written to the above test latch. Is active LOW
when inputs: PCS0 and XRD are active LOW, XRES is inactive LOW, and the address is
27H.
M-57
HA72500
APPENDIX N
APPENDIX N
RF CRYSTAL SPECIFICATION
N-i
HA72500
APPENDIX N
TABLE of CONTENTS
N.
RF CRYSTAL SPECIFICATION .............................................................N-1
N.1
CRYSTAL FREQUENCIES AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
N-1
N.1.1 RF Generator Crystals................................................................................. N-1
N.1.2 Receiver-Video Crystal................................................................................ N-1
N.1.3 Procurement Specification........................................................................... N-1
N-ii
HA72500
APPENDIX N
N.
RF CRYSTAL SPECIFICATION
N.1
CRYSTAL FREQUENCIES AND PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS
Six oscillator crystals are installed in each equipment. For each, the crystal frequency is
one-twelfth of the RF frequency being generated.
N.1.1
RF Generator Crystals
Five crystals are installed in the RF Generator board in the Test Interrogator module, as
follows:
CRYSTAL
INTERROGATE
FREQUENCY
CRYSTAL
FREQUENCY
G1
Fo
Fx
G2
Fo + 160 kHz
Fx + 13.3 kHz
G3
Fo - 160 kHz
Fx - 13.3 kHz
G4
Fo + 900 kHz
Fx + 75 kHz
G5
Fo - 900 kHz
Fx - 75 kHz
Each crystal has a frequency equal to one-twelfth of the interrogate frequency.

Example: Channel 84X interrogation frequency = 1108 MHz = Fo
N.1.2
Receiver-Video Crystal
The sixth crystal is installed in the RF Source board in the Receiver-Video module and
has a frequency equal to one-twelfth of the reply frequency.
Example: Channel 84X reply frequency = 1171 MHz
N.1.3
Procurement Specification
Replacement crystals should be ordered to the following specification:
Frequency in kHz;
Fifth overtone;
Series resonant;
Accuracy +5, -15 parts per million;
Temperature range -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C 10 parts per million;
Holder type HC-50/U.
N-1
HA72500
LIST OF DRAWINGS
DRAWING
NUMBER
DRAWING TITLE
1A69737
Attenuator
CIRCUIT
69737-3-24
1A69758
Power Supply System, Single AC
INTERWIRING
69758-3-23
2A69758
Power Supply System, Dual AC
INTERWIRING
69758-3-28
1A69873
250W RF Amplifier
CIRCUIT
69873-3-09
1-3A72500
LDB-102 DME 1kW System
BLOCK DIAGRAM
72500-2-26
1A72505
Rack Assembly, Single 1kW DME
72505-2-06
Transponder Wiring
INTERWIRING
72505-2-37
2A72505
Rack Assembly, Dual 1kW DME
72505-2-17
1A72510
Monitor Module
INTERWIRING
72510-3-06
1A72511
CIRCUIT (14 sheets)
72511-1-01
1A72512
Peak Power Monitor
CIRCUIT
72512-3-01
1A72514
Test Interrogator
INTERWIRING
72514-3-04
1A72515
CIRCUIT (5 sheets)
72515-1-01
1A72516
RF Generator
CIRCUIT
72516-2-01
1A72517
RF Filter
CIRCUIT
72517-4-02
1A72518
CIRCUIT
72518-2-01
1A72519
Reply Detector
CIRCUIT
72519-3-01
1A72520
Receiver Video
INTERWIRING
72520-3-04
1A72521
CIRCUIT (5 sheets)
72521-1-01
1A72522
RF Source
CIRCUIT
72522-3-01
1A72523
IF Amplifier
CIRCUIT (2 sheets)
72523-1-01
1A72524
RF Amplifier
CIRCUIT
72524-3-01
1A72526
Main PWB Assembly,

CIRCUIT
72526-1-01
1A72530
Transmitter Driver
INTERWIRING
72530-3-03
1A72531
CIRCUIT (2 sheets)
72531-1-01
1A72532
Exciter
CIRCUIT
72532-2-01
1A72533
Medium Power Driver
CIRCUIT
72533-3-01
1A72534
CIRCUIT
72534-3-01
1A72535
CIRCUIT
72535-1-07
1A72540
1kW PA Power Supply
INTERWIRING
72540-1-03
1A72541
CIRCUIT (2 sheets)
72541-1-01
1A72542
CIRCUIT
72542-1-01
1A72544
CIRCUIT
72544-1-01
1A72545
CIRCUIT
72545-3-04
2A72545
RF Panel - Dual DME
CIRCUIT
72545-3-05
1A72547
2A72547
CIRCUIT
72547-1-01
H4A71110
REVISION RECORD
1A72549
CIRCUIT
72549-3-06
2A72549
CIRCUIT
72549-3-16
1A72550
72550-1-03
1A72552
CIRCUIT (5 sheets)
72552-1-02
1A72553
CIRCUIT (2 sheets)
72553-1-02
1A72555
CIRCUIT (2 sheets)
72555-1-02
1A72556
Transponder Subrack Motherboard
CIRCUIT
72556-2-01
1A72557
CIRCUIT
72557-1-01
Pelorus
AustralAsia
Pelorus
AustralAsia
Pelorus
AustralAsia

Technical Handbook 1kW DME STATION LDB-102

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical Handbook 1kW DME STATION LDB-102

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical

1kW DME STATION

ECO 901695, 901687, 901695, 901701,

ECO 902169, 902181, 902309, 902449,

ECO 901940, 902157, 902422, 902731

ECO 902011, 903033, 903044, 903233,

ECO E3003, E3004, E3005, E3006,

Copyright Interscan Navigation Systems Pty Ltd

BRIEF SPECIFICATION AND SPECIFICATION

ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS AND MASSES

POWER AND REMOTE CONTROL

COMPONENT LAYOUT DIAGRAMS

AC POWER SUPPLY 3A71130

DEPOT TEST FACILITY

CHANNEL FREQUENCY AND SPACING SPECIFICATION

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS

RADIATION EXPOSURE HAZARD

ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD

EMERGENCY CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION FOR

National Heart Foundation of Australia

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

LED may indicate either

light emitting diode

light emitting diodes

Automatic frequency control

Automatic gain control

Airport terminal information service

Binary coded decimal

Complementary metal oxide semiconductor

Central processing unit

Conventional VHF omni-range

Dual in line package

Distance measuring equipment

Doppler VHF omni-range

Electrically programmable read only memory

Field effect transistor

International standard equipment practice

Light emitting diode

Line replaceable unit

Metal oxide semiconductor

Metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor

Parts per million

Pulse repetition frequency

Programmable read only memory

Printed wiring board

Random access memory

Read only memory

Silicon controlled rectifier

Voltage controlled oscillator

Very high frequency

Voltage standing wave ratio

Words per minute

Transducers, from non-electrical to electrical quantity or vice versa

Binary elements, delay devices, storage devices

Generators, power supplies

Analogue integrated circuits

Measuring equipment, testing equipment

Mechanical switching devices for power circuits

Transformers, regulators (power)

Tubes, semiconductors (discrete)

Transmission paths, waveguides, aerials (antennas)

Terminals, plugs, sockets, links, joints (also see below)

Electrically operated mechanical devices